LabX Manual EN

Reference Manual LabX
LabX Version 11
Table of Contents
1 Introduction 13
1.1 Definitions........................................................................................................................ 13
1.2 Elements of instructions..................................................................................................... 14
2 Overview and Navigation 15

2.1 Login screen .................................................................................................................... 16
2.2 Versioned objects.............................................................................................................. 17
2.3 List views......................................................................................................................... 17
2.4 Graphics window options .................................................................................................. 18
2.5 Supported languages ........................................................................................................ 19
3 Common Activities 21
3.1 Approve and release of objects ........................................................................................... 21
3.1.1 Approve objects ................................................................................................. 22
3.1.2 Release objects.................................................................................................. 23
3.1.3 Delete released objects ....................................................................................... 23
3.1.4 Revoke approval on result sets ............................................................................ 24
3.1.5 Manage versions ............................................................................................... 24
3.1.6 Display signatures ............................................................................................. 24
3.2 Lock screen...................................................................................................................... 25
3.3 Manage folders................................................................................................................. 25
3.4 Manage search folders ...................................................................................................... 26
3.5 Manage messages............................................................................................................ 27
3.6 Display messages ............................................................................................................ 28
3.7 Apply tags........................................................................................................................ 28
3.8 View archives ................................................................................................................... 28
4 Options and Settings 30

4.1 LabX licensing.................................................................................................................. 30
4.1.1 License manager ............................................................................................... 30
4.1.2 License options.................................................................................................. 31
4.1.3 Activation .......................................................................................................... 32
4.1.3.1 Online activation ........................................................................................... 32
4.1.3.2 Offline activation ........................................................................................... 32
4.2 User settings .................................................................................................................... 33
4.2.1 Change your own password................................................................................ 33
4.2.2 Register fingerprints............................................................................................ 34
4.2.3 Delete fingerprints .............................................................................................. 34
4.3 Global Settings ................................................................................................................. 34
4.3.1 Tag settings....................................................................................................... 34
4.3.2 Label settings .................................................................................................... 35
4.3.3 Account policies................................................................................................. 36
4.3.4 Signature and release policies ............................................................................. 38
4.3.5 E-Mail settings................................................................................................... 40
4.3.6 Color settings for highlighting results .................................................................... 41
4.3.7 Overall result state settings.................................................................................. 41
4.3.8 Page setup........................................................................................................ 42
4.3.9 StatusLight settings ............................................................................................ 42
4.3.10 Titration settings................................................................................................. 42
4.3.11 Thermal Values settings ...................................................................................... 43
4.3.12 SevenExcellence settings..................................................................................... 43
4.3.13 Density and Refractometry settings....................................................................... 44
5 Operate Instruments 45
5.1 USB instrument drivers ...................................................................................................... 45
LabX Table of Contents 1

5.1.1 Remove old instrument drivers............................................................................. 45
5.2 Balances - XPR/XSR.......................................................................................................... 45
5.2.1 Configure the Ethernet Interface ............................................................................ 45
5.2.2 Configure LabX connection.................................................................................. 46
5.2.3 Operate the balance ........................................................................................... 47
5.2.3.1 Switch on the balance and log on ................................................................... 47
5.2.3.2 The home screen........................................................................................... 48
5.2.3.3 Select analysis.............................................................................................. 49
5.2.3.4 Add shortcut ................................................................................................. 49
5.2.3.5 Weighing of titration samples ......................................................................... 49
5.2.4 Add peripheral devices........................................................................................ 49
5.3 Balances - XP/XS/XPE/XSE................................................................................................. 50
5.3.1 Configure the Ethernet Interface ............................................................................ 50
5.3.2 Configure the serial interface................................................................................ 50
5.3.3 Operate the balance ........................................................................................... 51
5.3.3.2 The home screen........................................................................................... 52
5.3.3.3 Select analysis.............................................................................................. 53
5.3.3.4 Weighing of titration samples ......................................................................... 53
5.3.3.5 Edit tasks ..................................................................................................... 54
5.3.4 Add peripheral devices........................................................................................ 54
5.4 Quantos .......................................................................................................................... 54
5.4.1 Configure the interfaces....................................................................................... 54
5.4.2 Operate Quantos ................................................................................................ 55
5.4.2.1 Switch on Quantos and log on........................................................................ 55
5.4.2.2 The home screen........................................................................................... 56
5.4.2.3 Manual operations ........................................................................................ 57
5.5 Titration ........................................................................................................................... 58
5.5.1 Configure the network settings ............................................................................. 58
5.5.3 Titrator settings .................................................................................................. 59
5.5.3.1 Global settings.............................................................................................. 60
5.5.3.2 Chemicals .................................................................................................... 67
5.5.3.3 Hardware ..................................................................................................... 73
5.5.3.4 User Settings ................................................................................................ 90
5.5.3.5 Values ......................................................................................................... 91
5.5.4 Operate the instrument........................................................................................ 92
5.5.4.1 Switch on the instrument and log on................................................................ 92
5.5.4.2 The home screen........................................................................................... 93
5.5.4.3 Add shortcuts ............................................................................................... 94
5.5.4.4 Select methods ............................................................................................. 94
5.5.4.5 Edit tasks ..................................................................................................... 95
5.5.4.6 Task list ....................................................................................................... 96
5.5.4.7 Control running tasks..................................................................................... 97
5.5.4.8 Control queued tasks ..................................................................................... 97
5.5.4.9 Resetting ...................................................................................................... 98
5.6 Density Refractometry........................................................................................................ 112
5.6.3 Instrument settings ............................................................................................. 113
5.6.3.1 Shortcuts...................................................................................................... 113
5.6.4.2 The home screen........................................................................................... 115
5.6.4.3 Add shortcuts ............................................................................................... 116
5.6.4.4 Select methods ............................................................................................. 116
5.6.4.5 Task list ....................................................................................................... 116
2 Table of Contents LabX

5.6.4.9 Display results .............................................................................................. 121
5.7 Thermal Value .................................................................................................................. 121
5.7.3.2 The home screen........................................................................................... 123
5.7.3.3 Add shortcuts ............................................................................................... 125
5.7.3.4 Adjust the temperature accuracy...................................................................... 125
5.8 SevenExcellence ............................................................................................................... 127
5.8.3.1 Screen ......................................................................................................... 128
5.8.3.2 Beep............................................................................................................ 128
5.8.3.3 Shortcuts...................................................................................................... 128
5.8.3.4 Sensors ....................................................................................................... 129
5.8.3.5 Automation................................................................................................... 129
5.8.4.2 The home screen........................................................................................... 130
5.8.4.3 Add shortcuts ............................................................................................... 131
5.8.4.4 Select methods ............................................................................................. 131
5.8.4.5 Edit tasks ..................................................................................................... 132
5.8.4.6 Task list ....................................................................................................... 132
5.8.4.9 Display results .............................................................................................. 134
5.9 UV/VIS ............................................................................................................................. 135
5.9.3.1 Quant Calibrations......................................................................................... 136
5.9.3.2 Shortcuts...................................................................................................... 138
5.9.4.2 The home screen........................................................................................... 139
5.9.4.3 Add shortcuts ............................................................................................... 140
5.9.4.4 Select methods ............................................................................................. 140
5.9.4.5 Edit tasks ..................................................................................................... 141
5.9.4.6 Task list ....................................................................................................... 141
5.9.4.9 Display results .............................................................................................. 143
6 Workbench for Instruments 148

6.1 StatusLight - Dialog........................................................................................................... 149
6.2 Task resources - Dialog..................................................................................................... 150
6.3 User interactions - Dialog................................................................................................... 150
6.4 Shortcuts - Workbench ...................................................................................................... 150
6.5 Sample series - Workbench ............................................................................................... 151
6.6 Methods - Workbench ....................................................................................................... 151

6.7 Products - Workbench....................................................................................................... 152
6.8 Tasks - Workbench ........................................................................................................... 152
6.9 Task editor - Workbench.................................................................................................... 153
6.10 Results - Workbench ......................................................................................................... 153
6.11 Statistics - Workbench....................................................................................................... 154
6.12 Data transfer - Workbench ................................................................................................. 154
6.13 Task status control - Workbench......................................................................................... 155
6.14 Measurements - Workbench............................................................................................... 156
6.15 Measurements chart - Workbench....................................................................................... 156
6.16 Graph - Workbench........................................................................................................... 156
6.17 Standard table - Dialog...................................................................................................... 157
6.18 Spectrum - Workbench ...................................................................................................... 157
6.19 Calibration - Workbench .................................................................................................... 157
6.20 Kinetics - Workbench ........................................................................................................ 158
6.21 Performance tests - Workbench .......................................................................................... 158
6.22 Sample changer - Workbench ............................................................................................ 158
6.23 Start Auto SmartCodes - Dialog........................................................................................... 159
6.24 Auxiliary instruments - Workbench...................................................................................... 161
6.25 Burette - Workbench.......................................................................................................... 163
6.26 Pump - Workbench........................................................................................................... 164
6.26.1 Pump ............................................................................................................... 165
6.26.2 Drain ................................................................................................................ 165
6.26.3 Fill.................................................................................................................... 165
6.26.4 Replace solvent ................................................................................................. 166
6.26.5 Reset counter..................................................................................................... 166
6.26.6 Stirrer................................................................................................................ 166
6.27 Result buffer - Workbench.................................................................................................. 166
6.28 Sensor - Workbench.......................................................................................................... 167
6.28.1 Temperature sensor............................................................................................ 167
6.28.2 Potentiometric Sensor ......................................................................................... 167
6.28.3 Polarized sensor ................................................................................................ 168
6.28.4 Conductivity sensor ............................................................................................ 169
6.29 SmartSample.................................................................................................................... 170
6.30 Stirrer - Workbench ........................................................................................................... 170
6.31 Table of measured values - Workbench............................................................................... 170
7 Analysis and Methods Workspace 171

7.1 Manage shortcuts in LabX.................................................................................................. 171
7.1.1 Manage shortcuts .............................................................................................. 171
7.2 Manage tasks................................................................................................................... 173
7.2.1 Add tasks.......................................................................................................... 173
7.2.2 Edit tasks .......................................................................................................... 174
7.2.3 Control tasks ..................................................................................................... 175
7.2.4 Assign tasks...................................................................................................... 176
7.2.5 Auto ID generation.............................................................................................. 176
7.3 Manage sample series ...................................................................................................... 177
7.3.1 Add sample series.............................................................................................. 178
7.3.2 Manage sample series........................................................................................ 179
7.3.3 Compare sample series ...................................................................................... 180
7.4 Manage series sequences.................................................................................................. 180
7.4.1 Add series sequence........................................................................................... 180
7.4.2 Edit series sequence........................................................................................... 180
7.5 Manage products.............................................................................................................. 181
7.5.1 Edit products ..................................................................................................... 182
7.5.2 Compare products.............................................................................................. 183
7.6 Manage methods.............................................................................................................. 185
7.6.1 Method editor .................................................................................................... 185
7.6.2 Create methods.................................................................................................. 187

7.6.3 Edit methods ..................................................................................................... 187
7.6.3.1 Edit method properties ................................................................................... 188
7.6.3.2 Insert method functions.................................................................................. 189
7.6.3.3 Edit method parameters ................................................................................. 190
7.6.3.4 Insert symbols .............................................................................................. 191
7.6.3.5 Insert hyperlinks............................................................................................ 191
7.6.4 Compare methods.............................................................................................. 192
7.6.5 Import methods ................................................................................................. 192
7.6.6 Export methods.................................................................................................. 193
7.6.7 Update of outdated methods................................................................................ 193
7.7 Use of fx, data binding, task parameters, formulas ............................................................... 195
7.7.1 Examples of data binding ................................................................................... 195
7.7.1.1 Info lines ...................................................................................................... 195
7.7.1.2 Result .......................................................................................................... 196
7.7.1.3 Message ...................................................................................................... 198
7.7.2 Use of data binding ............................................................................................ 199
7.7.2.1 Notation of data binding................................................................................. 199
7.7.3 Use of task parameters ....................................................................................... 200
7.7.4 Use of formulas ................................................................................................. 201
7.7.4.1 Notation of formulas ...................................................................................... 202
7.7.5 Use of value tables............................................................................................. 204
7.7.6 Use of messages ............................................................................................... 204
7.7.7 Use of conditions ............................................................................................... 205
7.8 Manage statistical evaluations............................................................................................ 207
7.8.1 Rule sets........................................................................................................... 207
7.8.1.1 Edit rules...................................................................................................... 208
7.8.2 Import and export rule sets.................................................................................. 208
7.8.3 Evaluations ....................................................................................................... 209
7.8.4 Execute evaluations............................................................................................ 210
7.8.5 Import and export evaluations ............................................................................. 210
7.9 Method functions - Common .............................................................................................. 210
7.9.1 User interaction.................................................................................................. 210
7.9.1.1 Beep............................................................................................................ 210
7.9.1.2 Sample IDs .................................................................................................. 211
7.9.1.3 Message ...................................................................................................... 211
7.9.1.4 Method information ....................................................................................... 213
7.9.1.5 Number ....................................................................................................... 213
7.9.1.6 Selection ...................................................................................................... 215
7.9.1.7 Text ............................................................................................................. 216
7.9.2 Miscellaneous ................................................................................................... 217
7.9.2.1 Audit Trail..................................................................................................... 217
7.9.2.2 Block instrument ........................................................................................... 218
7.9.2.3 Data Access ................................................................................................. 219
7.9.2.4 Data input .................................................................................................... 220
7.9.2.5 Delay........................................................................................................... 221
7.9.2.6 Label printer ................................................................................................. 222
7.9.2.7 Notify........................................................................................................... 222
7.9.2.8 Peripheral communication.............................................................................. 223
7.9.2.9 Read RFID tag .............................................................................................. 225
7.9.2.10 Recreate task ................................................................................................ 226
7.9.2.11 Report.......................................................................................................... 226
7.9.2.12 Result .......................................................................................................... 227
7.9.2.13 Sample changer............................................................................................ 230
7.9.2.14 Strip printer................................................................................................... 231
7.9.2.15 Task ............................................................................................................ 232
7.9.2.16 Transfer data ................................................................................................ 234
7.9.2.17 Unblock instrument........................................................................................ 235

7.9.2.18 Write RFID tag .............................................................................................. 235
7.9.3 Structural .......................................................................................................... 240
7.9.3.1 Decide ......................................................................................................... 240
7.9.3.2 Decision branch............................................................................................ 240
7.9.3.3 Do while ...................................................................................................... 241
7.9.3.4 Sample cycle ................................................................................................ 241
7.9.3.5 Sample scope............................................................................................... 242
7.9.4 Return values - Common .................................................................................... 245
7.10 Method functions - Balance................................................................................................ 247
7.10.1 Instrument......................................................................................................... 247
7.10.1.1 Adjustment ................................................................................................... 247
7.10.1.2 Automatic feeder ........................................................................................... 248
7.10.1.3 Draft shield................................................................................................... 248
7.10.1.4 Info lines ...................................................................................................... 249
7.10.1.5 Ionizer ......................................................................................................... 250
7.10.1.6 Settings........................................................................................................ 250
7.10.1.7 Validation..................................................................................................... 252
7.10.1.8 Return values ............................................................................................... 254
7.10.2 Performance...................................................................................................... 255
7.10.2.1 Eccentricity test ............................................................................................. 255
7.10.2.2 Repeatability - 1 test point.............................................................................. 256
7.10.2.3 Sensitivity - 1 test point.................................................................................. 258
7.10.2.4 Test history record ......................................................................................... 260
7.10.2.5 Return values ............................................................................................... 260
7.10.3 Measurement..................................................................................................... 262
7.10.3.1 Interval weight .............................................................................................. 262
7.10.3.2 Pretare ......................................................................................................... 264
7.10.3.3 Tare............................................................................................................. 265
7.10.3.4 Weight ......................................................................................................... 267
7.10.3.5 Zero............................................................................................................. 271
7.10.3.6 Automatic weight detection ............................................................................. 272
7.10.3.7 Return values ............................................................................................... 274
7.11 Method functions - Quantos ............................................................................................... 277
7.11.1 Instrument......................................................................................................... 277
7.11.1.1 Front door .................................................................................................... 277
7.11.1.2 Validation and settings................................................................................... 277
7.11.1.3 Read / write dosing head ............................................................................... 278
7.11.2 Analysis components ......................................................................................... 279
7.11.2.1 Dispense...................................................................................................... 279
7.11.2.2 Lock head .................................................................................................... 280
7.11.3 Return values .................................................................................................... 281
7.12 Method functions - Titration................................................................................................ 284
7.12.1 Overview of method functions.............................................................................. 284
7.12.1.1 Method functions T5 / T7 / T9......................................................................... 284
7.12.1.2 Method functions T50 / T70 / T90................................................................... 300
7.12.1.3 Method functions G20 S................................................................................. 304
7.12.1.4 Method functions G20 ................................................................................... 308
7.12.1.5 Method functions V20 S / V30 S ..................................................................... 309
7.12.1.6 Method functions V20 / V30 ........................................................................... 314
7.12.1.7 Method functions C20 S / C30 S ..................................................................... 315
7.12.1.8 Method functions C20 / C30........................................................................... 322
7.12.1.9 Types and possible number of loops T5 / T7 / T9 ............................................. 322
7.12.2.1 Auxiliary instruments ..................................................................................... 323
7.12.2.2 Auxiliary value .............................................................................................. 327
7.12.2.3 Blank........................................................................................................... 328
7.12.2.4 Calculation ................................................................................................... 329

7.12.2.5 Conditioning ................................................................................................. 333
7.12.2.6 Conditioning (Controlled) ............................................................................... 333
7.12.2.7 Dispense (controlled) .................................................................................... 335
7.12.2.8 Dispense (normal) ........................................................................................ 336
7.12.2.9 Drain ........................................................................................................... 337
7.12.2.10 Drift determination ......................................................................................... 337
7.12.2.11 Homogenizer ................................................................................................ 338
7.12.2.12 Instruction .................................................................................................... 338
7.12.2.13 Line Rinse .................................................................................................... 339
7.12.2.14 Liquid Handling ............................................................................................ 340
7.12.2.15 Measure (MVT) ............................................................................................. 345
7.12.2.16 Measure (normal) ......................................................................................... 346
7.12.2.17 Park ............................................................................................................ 349
7.12.2.18 Pump .......................................................................................................... 350
7.12.2.19 Record ......................................................................................................... 350
7.12.2.20 Rinse ........................................................................................................... 351
7.12.2.21 Scan (KF Coul) ............................................................................................. 351
7.12.2.22 Scan (KF Vol) ............................................................................................... 353
7.12.2.23 Stating ......................................................................................................... 355
7.12.2.24 Stir .............................................................................................................. 359
7.12.2.25 Standard addition.......................................................................................... 360
7.12.2.26 Standby ....................................................................................................... 363
7.12.2.27 Sync ............................................................................................................ 363
7.12.2.28 Titration (2-phase) ........................................................................................ 363
7.12.2.29 Titration (EP) ................................................................................................ 367
7.12.2.30 Titration (EP Coul) ........................................................................................ 372
7.12.2.31 Pretitration (EP Coul)..................................................................................... 373
7.12.2.32 Titration (EQP).............................................................................................. 373
7.12.2.33 Titration (KF Vol)........................................................................................... 381
7.12.2.34 Titration (KF Coul)......................................................................................... 382
7.12.2.35 Titration (Learn EQP) ..................................................................................... 384
7.12.2.36 Titration (Thermometric)................................................................................. 385
7.12.2.37 Titration stand............................................................................................... 387
7.12.3 Sample ............................................................................................................. 391
7.12.3.1 Sample ........................................................................................................ 391
7.12.3.2 Sample (Calib) ............................................................................................. 393
7.12.3.3 Sample (KF)................................................................................................. 394
7.12.3.4 Sample (Standard addition) ........................................................................... 399
7.12.3.5 Sample (Titer) .............................................................................................. 403
7.12.4 Titer.................................................................................................................. 404
7.12.4.1 Titer ............................................................................................................. 404
7.12.5 Subfunctions ..................................................................................................... 405
7.12.5.1 Hidden sub functions..................................................................................... 405
7.12.5.2 Calibration ................................................................................................... 405
7.12.5.3 Mix Time ...................................................................................................... 407
7.12.6 Titrator Evaluation Procedure ............................................................................... 407
7.12.6.1 Standard Evaluation Procedure ....................................................................... 408
7.12.6.2 Minimum / Maximum .................................................................................... 408
7.12.6.3 Segmented Evaluation ................................................................................... 409
7.12.6.4 Asymmetric .................................................................................................. 409
7.12.7 Evaluate and calculate........................................................................................ 410
7.12.7.1 Formulas ..................................................................................................... 410
7.12.7.2 Result proposal lists ...................................................................................... 418
7.12.7.3 Constants within a Content Calculation ............................................................ 440
7.12.7.4 Mathematical functions and operators ............................................................. 440
7.12.7.5 Naming Conventions for Using Analysis Data in Calculations ............................. 441
7.13 Method functions - Density Refractometry ............................................................................ 453

7.13.1 Common........................................................................................................... 453
7.13.1.1 Adjustment ................................................................................................... 453
7.13.1.2 Clean........................................................................................................... 454
7.13.1.3 Import adjustment data .................................................................................. 455
7.13.1.4 Measurement................................................................................................ 456
7.13.1.5 Atmospheric Pressure .................................................................................... 458
7.13.1.6 Test ............................................................................................................. 458
7.13.2.1 Calculate on instrument ................................................................................. 459
7.13.2.2 Cell Test ....................................................................................................... 461
7.13.2.3 Clean........................................................................................................... 462
7.13.2.4 Instruction .................................................................................................... 464
7.13.2.5 Temperature compensation ............................................................................ 465
7.13.2.6 Wait ............................................................................................................ 466
7.13.2.7 Line rinse ..................................................................................................... 466
7.13.2.9 PowerShower ............................................................................................... 469
7.13.2.10 Park ............................................................................................................ 470
7.13.2.11 Stir .............................................................................................................. 471
7.13.3 User interaction.................................................................................................. 472
7.13.3.1 Standard data ............................................................................................... 472
7.13.3.2 Return values ............................................................................................... 473
7.13.4 Subfunctions ..................................................................................................... 474
7.13.4.1 Set sample parameters (Adjustment) ............................................................... 474
7.13.4.2 Set sample parameters (Test) ......................................................................... 475
7.13.4.3 Set sample parameters (Measurement)............................................................ 476
7.13.4.4 Measure (Adjustment) ................................................................................... 477
7.13.4.5 Measure (Measurement) ................................................................................ 478
7.13.4.6 Measure (Test) ............................................................................................. 480
7.13.4.7 Adjustment ................................................................................................... 482
7.13.4.8 Test ............................................................................................................. 482
7.13.4.9 Fill............................................................................................................... 483
7.13.4.10 Online display............................................................................................... 484
7.13.5 Return values .................................................................................................... 485
7.14 Method functions - Thermal Value....................................................................................... 487
7.14.1 Performance verification...................................................................................... 487
7.14.2 Test melting point/range...................................................................................... 487
7.14.3 Melting point/range ............................................................................................ 493
7.14.4 Cloud point ....................................................................................................... 498
7.14.5 Boiling point...................................................................................................... 501
7.14.6 Slip melting point ............................................................................................... 504
7.14.7 Return values .................................................................................................... 507
7.15 Method functions - SevenExcellence.................................................................................... 510
7.15.1 Stir ................................................................................................................... 510
7.15.2 Measurement..................................................................................................... 510
7.15.2.1 Measuring pH / Redox ................................................................................... 512
7.15.2.2 Measuring ion .............................................................................................. 513
7.15.2.3 Measuring conductivity .................................................................................. 514
7.15.2.4 Measuring dissolved oxygen .......................................................................... 516
7.15.2.5 Measuring temperature .................................................................................. 517
7.15.3 Calibration ........................................................................................................ 519
7.15.3.1 Calibrating pH/ISFET sensor............................................................................ 519
7.15.3.2 Calibrating ion sensor.................................................................................... 521
7.15.3.3 Calibrating conductivity sensor ....................................................................... 523
7.15.3.4 Calibrating dissolved oxygen sensor................................................................ 524
7.15.4 Resource validation............................................................................................ 526
7.15.5 Return values .................................................................................................... 526

7.16 Method functions - UV/VIS.................................................................................................. 529
7.16.1 Configuration..................................................................................................... 529
7.16.1.1 Bio Fixed Wavelength .................................................................................... 529
7.16.1.2 Bio Quant..................................................................................................... 532
7.16.1.3 Bio Scanning ................................................................................................ 534
7.16.1.4 Fixed Wavelength.......................................................................................... 537
7.16.1.5 Kinetics........................................................................................................ 540
7.16.1.6 Quant .......................................................................................................... 542
7.16.1.7 Scanning ..................................................................................................... 545
7.16.2 Measure blank................................................................................................... 548
7.16.3 Measure sample ................................................................................................ 549
7.16.3.1 Return values - Spectrum ............................................................................... 550
7.16.3.2 Return values - Color ..................................................................................... 553
7.16.4 Kinetics loop ..................................................................................................... 554
7.16.5 Parallel kinetics ................................................................................................. 555
7.16.6 Calibration ........................................................................................................ 558
7.16.7 Clean................................................................................................................ 560
7.16.8 Display results................................................................................................... 561
7.16.9 Fill.................................................................................................................... 562
7.16.10 Measure standard .............................................................................................. 562
7.16.11 Performance test ................................................................................................ 563
7.16.12 PowerShower .................................................................................................... 565
7.16.13 Stir ................................................................................................................... 566
8 Data and Results Workspace 568

8.1 Manage results................................................................................................................. 568
8.1.1 Edit sample data................................................................................................ 569
8.1.2 Recalculate results ............................................................................................. 570
8.1.3 Reevaluate ........................................................................................................ 571
8.1.4 Reanalysis ........................................................................................................ 573
8.1.5 Results ............................................................................................................. 574
8.1.6 Result details..................................................................................................... 574
8.1.6.1 Edit results comments.................................................................................... 575
8.1.7 Raw data .......................................................................................................... 575
8.1.8 Video................................................................................................................ 575
8.1.9 Measured values................................................................................................ 575
8.1.9.1 Balance ....................................................................................................... 575
8.1.9.2 Quantos ....................................................................................................... 575
8.1.9.3 Titration ....................................................................................................... 576
8.1.9.4 Thermal Value .............................................................................................. 576
8.1.9.5 SevenExcellence............................................................................................ 577
8.1.9.6 UV/VIS ......................................................................................................... 577
8.1.10 Signatures......................................................................................................... 579
8.1.11 Task data.......................................................................................................... 579
8.1.12 Statistics ........................................................................................................... 579
8.1.13 Resource data ................................................................................................... 580
8.1.14 Method data ...................................................................................................... 580
8.1.15 Add compliance comment................................................................................... 580
8.2 Export results ................................................................................................................... 581
8.3 Display additional results................................................................................................... 581
8.4 Edit instrument settings...................................................................................................... 581
9 Resources and Instruments Workspace 583

9.1 Manage instruments.......................................................................................................... 583
9.1.1 Manage instrument settings................................................................................. 584
9.1.1.1 Connection ................................................................................................... 585
9.1.1.2 Properties..................................................................................................... 585
9.1.1.3 Default assignments ...................................................................................... 585

9.1.1.4 Drivers ......................................................................................................... 585
9.1.1.5 Maintenance................................................................................................. 585
9.1.1.6 StatusLight ................................................................................................... 586
9.1.1.7 Adjustment and test ....................................................................................... 586
9.1.1.8 Hardware ..................................................................................................... 586
9.1.1.9 Global settings - Titration ............................................................................... 588
9.1.1.10 Stirrer - SevenExcellence ................................................................................ 597
9.1.1.11 Sensor modules - SevenExcellence.................................................................. 597
9.1.1.12 Performance test sequence - UV/VIS ................................................................ 598
9.1.1.13 Performance tests - UV/VIS ............................................................................. 599
9.1.2 Add instruments................................................................................................. 600
9.1.2.1 Establishing a serial connection...................................................................... 600
9.1.2.2 Establishing a network connection .................................................................. 601
9.1.2.3 Establishing a USB connection........................................................................ 603
9.1.3 Change availability of instruments........................................................................ 604
9.1.4 Block or unblock instruments .............................................................................. 604
9.1.5 Edit ErgoSens settings ........................................................................................ 605
9.2 Resources Balance ........................................................................................................... 605
9.2.1 Monitored objects............................................................................................... 605
9.2.2 History.............................................................................................................. 605
9.2.3 Quality Settings.................................................................................................. 606
9.2.3.1 Monitoring.................................................................................................... 606
9.2.3.2 Adjustments ................................................................................................. 607
9.2.3.3 Tests ........................................................................................................... 609
9.2.3.4 Tolerance profiles .......................................................................................... 615
9.2.4 Manage weights ................................................................................................ 617
9.2.5 Manage weight sets ........................................................................................... 618
9.3 Resources Titration............................................................................................................ 619
9.3.1 Hardware .......................................................................................................... 619
9.3.1.1 Sensors ....................................................................................................... 619
9.3.1.2 Pumps......................................................................................................... 628
9.3.1.3 Peripherals ................................................................................................... 629
9.3.1.4 Titration stands ............................................................................................. 633
9.3.1.6 Homogenizers .............................................................................................. 639
9.3.1.7 Liquid Handlers............................................................................................. 639
9.3.2 Values .............................................................................................................. 640
9.3.2.1 Blanks ......................................................................................................... 640
9.3.2.2 Auxiliary values............................................................................................. 641
9.3.3 Chemicals......................................................................................................... 641
9.3.3.1 Titrants ........................................................................................................ 641
9.3.3.2 Auxiliary reagents.......................................................................................... 644
9.3.3.3 Calibration standards..................................................................................... 644
9.3.3.4 Concentration and titer standards .................................................................... 645
9.3.3.5 Substances .................................................................................................. 647
9.3.4 Expired resources............................................................................................... 647
9.4 Resources Density Refractometry ........................................................................................ 647
9.4.1 Manage adjustment sets ..................................................................................... 648
9.4.2 Manage test sets................................................................................................ 648
9.5 Resources Thermal Value................................................................................................... 649
9.5.1 Manage calibration substances ........................................................................... 649
9.5.1.1 Manage lots ................................................................................................. 649
9.6 Resources SevenExcellence................................................................................................ 650
9.6.1 Sensors ............................................................................................................ 650
9.6.1.1 pH/ISFET sensors .......................................................................................... 650
9.6.1.2 Ion sensors .................................................................................................. 651
9.6.1.3 Redox sensors .............................................................................................. 653

9.6.1.4 Conductivity sensors...................................................................................... 653
9.6.1.5 Dissolved oxygen sensors.............................................................................. 654
9.6.1.6 Temperature sensors ..................................................................................... 655
9.6.2 Sensor calibration history.................................................................................... 656
9.6.3 Manage buffers and standards ............................................................................ 656
9.6.3.1 Copying pH buffers........................................................................................ 657
9.6.3.2 Predefined buffers and standards .................................................................... 658
9.7 Resources UV/VIS.............................................................................................................. 658
9.7.1 Dyes................................................................................................................. 658
9.7.2 Quant Calibrations ............................................................................................. 659
9.7.3 CertiRef ............................................................................................................. 659
9.8 Manage value tables ......................................................................................................... 660
9.8.1 Import value tables............................................................................................. 662
9.8.2 Export value tables............................................................................................. 663
10 System Workspace 665

10.1 Audit Trail ........................................................................................................................ 665
10.1.1 Compare versions .............................................................................................. 665
10.2 Manage schedules............................................................................................................ 666
10.3 User management............................................................................................................. 667
10.3.1 Manage users.................................................................................................... 668
10.3.1.1 Manage LabX users....................................................................................... 668
10.3.1.2 Manage Active Directory users ........................................................................ 670
10.3.2 Manage roles .................................................................................................... 671
10.3.2.1 Assign rights to roles ..................................................................................... 672
10.4 Background jobs .............................................................................................................. 674
10.5 Report templates............................................................................................................... 675
10.5.1 Manage report templates..................................................................................... 676
10.5.2 The report editor................................................................................................. 677
10.5.3 The report designer............................................................................................. 679
10.5.3.1 Insert bands ................................................................................................. 681
10.5.3.2 Inserting detailed reports ................................................................................ 681
10.5.3.3 Items on the Tool Box tab............................................................................... 682
10.5.3.4 Pivot grids.................................................................................................... 682
10.5.3.5 Structuring a simple template.......................................................................... 683
10.5.3.6 Linking items with data .................................................................................. 683
10.5.3.7 Filtering the data ........................................................................................... 684
10.5.3.8 Using formatting rules.................................................................................... 684
10.5.3.9 Reviewing in the preview................................................................................ 684
10.5.3.10 Further information ........................................................................................ 684
10.5.4 Print preview ..................................................................................................... 684
10.6 Import and export ............................................................................................................. 686
10.6.1 Manage import templates.................................................................................... 686
10.6.2 Manage export templates .................................................................................... 688
10.6.3 Import and export templates ................................................................................ 690
10.6.4 Elements for export and import templates.............................................................. 691
10.7 Manage drivers................................................................................................................. 693
10.8 SmartCodes ..................................................................................................................... 693
10.8.1 Add SmartCodes ................................................................................................ 693
10.8.2 Edit SmartCodes ................................................................................................ 693
10.8.2.1 SmartCodes examples ................................................................................... 695
10.8.2.2 SmartCodes example for titration..................................................................... 696
10.8.3 Import and export SmartCodes............................................................................. 696
11 Peripheral devices 697

11.1 Barcode readers ............................................................................................................... 697
11.2 Fingerprint readers ............................................................................................................ 697

12 Data Backup 698
12.1 Database backup.............................................................................................................. 698
12.2 LabX DB Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 698
12.2.1 Create automated data backup ............................................................................ 699
12.2.2 Perform manual data backup .............................................................................. 700
12.2.3 Restore database ............................................................................................... 700
12.2.4 Initialize database .............................................................................................. 701
12.2.5 Create archive.................................................................................................... 701
12.2.6 Publish an archive ............................................................................................. 701
13 Appendix 703
13.1 Handling of passwords in LabX .......................................................................................... 703
13.2 System users.................................................................................................................... 703
13.3 Synchronization of date and time........................................................................................ 704
13.4 Applicable operators.......................................................................................................... 704
13.5 Applicable functions .......................................................................................................... 705
13.6 Global variables ............................................................................................................... 717
13.7 Data markings.................................................................................................................. 720
13.8 Balance alibi memory ....................................................................................................... 721
13.9 Determination type ............................................................................................................ 721
13.10 User defined date and time format strings ............................................................................ 722
13.11 Standard date and time formats strings ............................................................................... 724
13.12 User-defined time and date functions................................................................................... 724
13.13 Density Refractometry formula syntax and tables .................................................................. 725
13.13.1 Conditions and formulas..................................................................................... 725
13.13.2 Color scales ...................................................................................................... 727
13.13.3 Result proposals ................................................................................................ 727
13.14 Arithmetic model............................................................................................................... 729
13.14.1 Computations and accuracy................................................................................ 729
13.14.2 Infinity and NaN................................................................................................. 730
13.14.3 Rounding .......................................................................................................... 730
13.14.4 Trailing zeroes in calculations and results............................................................. 730
13.14.5 Significant digits ................................................................................................ 731
13.14.6 Standard deviation ............................................................................................. 731
13.15 Grubbs table G (N, 90%) .................................................................................................. 731
13.16 Version info...................................................................................................................... 732
Index 733

1 Introduction
- Laboratory Solutions Powered by LabX -
LabX supports the following METTLER TOLEDO instruments:
• Excellence balances XP / XS / XPE / XSE
• Excellence balances XPR / XSR
• Quantos, automatic dosing systems
• Titration Excellence T50 / T70 / T90
• Titration Excellence T5 / T7 / T9
• Compact Titration G20 / G20 S not in combination with the option Regulation.
• Compact Titration V20 / V30 / C20 / C30
• Compact Titration V20 S / V30 S / C20 S / C30 S
• SevenExcellence™ multi parameter instruments
• UV/VIS Excellence spectrophotometers
• Thermal Value Excellence, melting point systems MP70 / MP80 / MP90
• Density meters and refractometers DM40 / DM45 / DM50 / RM40 / RM50 / DX40 / DX45 / DX50 / X40 /
RX50
• Density meters and refractometers D4 / D5 / D6 / R4 / R5 / RX4 / RX5
LabX allows you to safely manage all your methods, including performing calculations. LabX guides you
through the procedure and the creation of reports, which can be fully customized. You can perform day-to-day
tasks directly on the touchscreen of the instruments, and you are guided step-by-step through the procedures.
Find out more and visit us on: www.mt.com/LabX
Find E-learning tutorial videos for LabX on: www.mt.com/…eLearning
1.1 Definitions
Tasks
Tasks are assigned to instruments and inserted into the wait queues of the selected instruments. Tasks contain
information about methods, samples and the instrument. The list of tasks may be viewed both on the
instrument and on the PC. Tasks may be started from this list. Tasks can also be executed in a time-controlled
manner.
Task parameters
Task parameters refer to the parameters that can be defined in a method although their values are not yet
determined. The values can be entered either when a task, a product or a sample series is created. Never-
theless, task parameters enable default values and restrictions to be specified based on the type of data.
Data binding
The term data binding refers to the referencing of return values of arbitrary method functions. Data binding
enables values from previous method functions to be used in text fields. The same syntax applies as for
formulas, but this must be contained in curly brackets.
Return values
Return values are listed in the relevant tab in the method functions. Depending on the instrument and method
function, different values are available for displaying results or for calculating results using the data binding
functions.
Methods
In order to perform an analysis using an instrument, you need a method. A method represents the program for
executing the analysis. It consists of a series of method functions that are processed in sequence by the
instrument. A method function usually comprises several substeps, which consist of parameters with
changeable values.
LabX Introduction 13
Sample Series
With the help of sample series, you can combine several individual samples to form a single series. All
samples in the series are analyzed one by one in the specified order. A sample series can be used repeatedly, if
necessary by entering new sample-specific values.
Series sequences
With the help of series sequences, you can combine several sample series to form a single series. All samples
in the series are analyzed one by one in the specified order. New tasks will be created for every sample series
within a series sequence.
Products
Products are helpful for specifying parameter values for samples with similar properties. This means that a
product is used to define the values of task parameters as appropriate to the properties of the product.
Resources
A resource, or system resource, is any physical or virtual component of limited availability within a system.
Every device connected to a system is a resource. It also includes device-specific resources such as weights,
pumps, sensors, reagents and standards.
Value tables
In a value table, values that are used for the conversion of results are aligned as value pairs. The output values
are interpolated according to the selected settings.
Shortcuts
Shortcuts enable you to start tasks directly from the shortcuts list on the PC or from an instrument. Shortcuts are
applicable to methods, sample series, products and manual operations. Shortcuts are assigned to users,
groups or instruments.
Search folders
Search Folders are virtual folders that provides views of all items that match one or more specific search
criteria.
Workbench
A Workbench permits you to setup individually adaptable views for instruments. The components available are
dependent on the type of the instrument used. The settings such as position and the components displayed are
saved for each user and module. Hence, you may specify different views for the various types of devices.
SmartCodes
Encoded barcodes and RFID data (SmartSample) can be used to start the relevant methods in combination
with products or sample series. Barcode readers can be connected to instruments, InMotion sample changer or
to a PC. SmartSample readers are connected to InMotion sample changer.
1.2 Elements of instructions

In this manual, step-by-step instructions are presented as follows. The action steps are numbered and can
contain prerequisites, intermediate results and results, as shown in the example. Sequences with less than two
steps are not numbered.
§ Prerequisites that must be fulfilled before the individual steps can be executed.
1 Step 1
ð Intermediate result
2 Step 2
ð Result
14 Introduction LabX
2 Overview and Navigation
An important element in the LabX user interface is the toolbar. The toolbar show the most relevant commands
for the different task areas in the applications. In this way, different commands are displayed depending on
which element is currently selected. When an object is displayed in the folder list, the toolbar contains different
commands to those displayed if a related object is selected in the list view.
Like the toolbar, a context menu contains commands. The commands in the context menu vary depending on
the object currently selected so that only relevant commands are available. Right-click on the desired object in
the list view or folder list.
11
LabX METTLER TOLEDO PredefinedUser 10
New Method Delete Method
1 9
Compare Show Workbench
Open Method Tag Create Task Start Task New Schedule Approve Method Release Method
Methods
Import Method Export Method Print
8
Analysis Methods
2 7
Search text... Released
Tasks
Methods Drag a column header here to group by that column

3
Balance methods ID Name Type Internal ID Compatibility Modified by Version Creation time Status
Sieve Sieve analysis General Balance M342 Balance Smith-23 4 2019.11.12 Valid
UV/VIS Methods
Density Liq. Density Liquids General Balance M356 Balance Smith-23 9 2019.09.11 Valid
Quality Lab
Filt.Weigh. Diesel emission General Balance M426 Balance
New Method Smith-23 9 2019.07.06 Valid
Test Lab Open Method
Sample Series Delete Method
Series sequences
Tag
6
Create Task
Products Start Task
New Schedule
Statistical Evaluations
Approve Method
Messages Release Method
Compare Methods
Shortcuts
Import Method
Data
Export Method
Resources New Shortcut
Copy selected as Text

System
Copy all as Text 5
Designation Description
1 Toolbar Commands are organized in related groups. Commands are contextually
displayed based on the currently selected object.
2 Navigation pane The navigation pane is used to switch between different workspaces. It also
contains lists of folders for each workspace.
3 Tree view Depending on the selected workspace, different groups of folder objects are
displayed.
4 Command bar Commands to organize custom folders and subfolders.
5 Context menu Like the toolbar, a context menu (right-click) contains commands. The
commands in the context menu vary depending on the object currently
selected in list view, and therefore only relevant commands are available.
6 Reading pane The contents of the object selected in the list view are displayed in the
reading pane.
7 List view The contents of selected objects in the tree view are displayed in table format.
8 Workbench Workbenches show individually adaptable views for instruments.
9 Settings For the general settings that apply to all LabX users on all workstations and
for activating the software.
10 Help The context-sensitive help is accessed via the question mark in the upper
right-hand corner of the title bar or by using the Help button in dialog boxes.
11 User settings For the settings that apply to the currently logged in LabX user. These settings
also apply to other workstations.
LabX Overview and Navigation 15

2.1 Login screen

The login window appears when LabX is started.
User name PredefinedUser
Password
OK Cancel
On a newly installed system, the standard administrator "PredefinedUser" is created and shown under User
name.
− Without entering a password, click on OK.
- or -
1 Enter your user name. If LabX has been configured to allow this, the most recent user names to have logged
in can be selected from the drop-down list.
2 Enter your password and click on OK.
- or -
Fingerprint readers can be used for authentication as an alternative to password entry. An active fingerprint
reader is indicated by a fingerprint icon at the time of login.
− Place the preferred finger on the fingerprint reader.

ð If the fingerprint is recognized, the relevant user is authenticated in the same way as if the user had entered
a user name and password.
Notes when using Active Directory
• If the user management is based on Active Directory, you must use these credentials to log on.
If the LabX server and its users are on the same domain, it is sufficient to provide a simple username in this
field, for example "paulw".
If the server and its users are on different domains, or many domains are in use, the "DOMAIN\user" format
must be provided.
• The login screen will not appear if Single Sign-On is activated.
• Fingerprint readers cannot be used for authentication.
• If Single Sign-On is enabled and you want to log on as another user, select under Windows:
Start > All apps > METTLER TOLEDO > LabX > Tools > LabX Client with Login
When logging on to LabX fails and an error message appears, e.g. "LabX could not log you on because of…"
or similar, check the following points:
• Check whether the LabX server is connected to the domain and the user that runs the LabX services has
sufficient privileges within the domain to authenticate users.
• If User / role assignments is activated, check whether the user belongs to the Active Directory group which
has been selected for LabX role mapping.
• Verify that the Active Directory password of the user has not expired or the maximum number of login
attempts has been exceeded.
16 Overview and Navigation LabX

See also
2 Register fingerprints } Page 34
2.2 Versioned objects

For objects that are managed in versions, a new version is created every time you save. The history can be
viewed at any time. Older versions of certain objects can be restored.
• Select Latest in the header of the list view to list the latest saved versions of objects.
• Select Released in the header of the list view to list only released versions of objects.
Versioned objects
Module Object Restoreable
Platform Methods Yes
Products Yes
Value tables Yes
Report templates Yes
Balance Monitoring Settings No
Adjustments No
Tests No
Tolerance Profiles No
Weights Yes
See also
2 Approve and release of objects } Page 21
2 Signature and release policies } Page 38
2 Manage versions } Page 24
2.3 List views

When you select an object in the folder list, the contents are displayed in table format. You can select multiple
objects at a time. To do this, hold the Shift key and click on an object to select a range of objects or hold the
Ctrl key and click on the individual objects you wish to select.
If you right-click an object in the tree view, a context menu opens and displays a list of commands available for
selection.
The F5 key will refresh the sorting and grouping of the list view.
Methods
1 Search text... Released 5
2 Name
ID
3 ID Name Type Internal ID Compatibility Modified by Version Creation time Status

Name: Sieve analysis
Column chooser
4 ID: Sieve
Sieve Sieve analysis
Hidden Columns
General Balance M342 Balance
Visible Columns
Smith-23 4 20xx.11.12 Valid 6
Name Order Name Order
Name: Density Liquids
Approval state 0 ID 0
Name: Diesel emission
Created by 1 Name 1
Removal state 2 Type 2
Runs on blocked instrument 3 Internal ID 3
Tags 4 Compatibility 4
Modified by 5
Version 6
Creation time 7
OK Cancel

Designation Description
1 Title bar with quick search Specifies which objects are displayed. If you enter a search string, only
those objects are displayed whose name contains the search string.
2 Groups toolbar • Drag a column header from the title bar to the groups toolbar to
create groups in the list. This function is cascadable, simply drag
another element onto the groups toolbar.
• Drag elements from the group toolbar to ungroup them.
3 Column header • Rearrange the columns by moving the column headers in the
header.
• Click column headers to change column sorting. Click the same
column header again to reverse the sorting.
• Drag the boundary in the column header to increase or decrease the
width of columns.
4 List view The contents of selected objects in the tree view are displayed in list
format.
5 Filter selection • Select Latest from the drop-down list. The most recent versions of
objects are displayed regardless of whether they are released or not.
• Select Released from the drop-down list. Only objects with status
Release state > Released are displayed.
6 Column selection • Right-click on the column header and choose Column chooser to
display the list of available columns.
• Use the arrows to add or remove columns.
2.4 Graphics window options

The graph windows contain many options to adjust the representation of the data. The zooming as well as the
axis scale can be adjusted.
Available actions
Action Procedure
Zooming the view 1 Click and hold for the first selection point.
2 Drag a selection and release.
ð The chart is zoomed into the bounds of the selection.
Panning displayed Panning an image means changing the section of the image to be displayed in the chart
area area.
1 Right-click and hold anywhere in the chart area.
ð The mouse pointer changes to a finger pointer .
2 Move the finger in any direction to pan.
ð The displayed area is updated while moving.

Action Procedure
Scaling axis Scaling axes allows you to scale outward from geometry's center point. The displayed
axes can be set individually.
1 Hover over an horizontal and vertical axis scale.
2 The mouse pointer changes to a double arrow pointer .
3 Click and drag to adjust the scaling.
ð The displayed area is updated while dragging.
Reverting to default − Double click to zoom to extents.
view ð All adjustments will be reverted.
Data point tooltips − Hover your mouse pointer over a data point in the chart area.
ð Details of that data point will appear in a tooltip.
Graph
Select results
Grid lines on x axis
Grid lines on y axis
Show all grid lines

Hide all grid lines
Series markers
Toolbar buttons
Function Description
Axis settings Defines the visibility of the axes or enables the overlay of results.
Gridlines selection Grid lines can be configured. Minor and major in horizontal and
vertical directions.
Chart fitting To fit the activated curves into the chart area.
Export options − To export the graph, click this icon and select an option from
the menu.
ð As an image in JPG, BMP or PNG format (the graph is
exported as you see it on the screen).
ð As CSV file (the complete dataset is exported independent of
the zoom level.
2.5 Supported languages

LabX and connectable instruments sometimes do not support the same languages for the user interface. When
an instrument is connected, the user interface language on the connected instrument is changed to the
language currently installed on the LabX installation.
Excellence instruments supported
Language LabX Balance Quantos Titration Density Thermal Seven- UV/VIS
Refrac- Values Excellence
tometry
English • • • • • • • •
German • • • • • • • •
French • • • • • • • •
Italian • • • • • • • •
Spanish • • • • • • • •
Portuguese • •1) •1) • • • • •
Russian 2) • • • • • • • •

Language LabX Balance Quantos Titration Density Thermal Seven- UV/VIS
Refrac- Values Excellence
tometry
Chinese • • • • • • • •
Japanese • • • • - • • •
1) If the language of the LabX installation is not available on the instrument, individual texts are displayed on the instrument in
English.
2) With a Russian installation of LabX, Russian keyboards are displayed on the balances for text input. Since not all characters can
be entered via these keyboards, this must be taken into account when entering user names and passwords on the PC.

3 Common Activities
3.1 Approve and release of objects
Use of electronic signatures, enforcing permitted sequences of signature steps are defined in Signature and
Release Policies. The signers must have the appropriate role rights.
Approve of objects
For objects that can be approved, one or two signature steps can be defined. To release objects that can be
released, all approval signatures must be available.
Approvable objects
Module Object Releaseable
Platform Methods •
Products •
Report templates •
Value tables •
*)
Result sets
Balance Weights •
Tests
Adjustments
Tolerance Profiles
Monitoring Settings
Density Refractometry Test Sets •
Adjustment Sets •
*)
The approval can be revoked.
• Select Latest in the header of the list view to list the latest saved versions of objects.
• Select Released in the header of the list view to list only released versions of objects.
Release of objects
Releasable objects can only be released if all approval signatures are available. For objects that are managed
in versions, a new version is created every time the object is saved. Released versions however remain the
active versions.
• If Auto release is activated, objects are released by the system as soon as all required signatures have
been obtained.
• If Auto release is not activated, objects must be released in additional manual steps. The time of the
approval process is thus independent of the time of the actual release of the new version.
Example
A method can be created and undergo the release process. The released method is displayed on instruments
and is used to execute tasks. This method can be further developed and refined, but the released version can
LabX Common Activities 21

still be used for measurements. The latest version does not become the released version until this latest version
is released again.
Signature and Release Policies
Type Review - Approve Type Review
Auto Release Policies Auto release off Auto Release Policies Auto release on
Signing procedure
Latest Latest
Approval state Release state Approval state Release state

Not reviewed Proposed Not reviewed Proposed
Approve Method Approve Method
Reviewed Proposed Approved Proposed
Approve Method Auto release

Approved Proposed Approved Released
Release Method
Approved Released
See also
2 Manage roles } Page 671
3.1.1 Approve objects

This example refers to a method, but can also be transferred to other objects that can be approved.
Approve a method
Navigation: Analysis > Methods
§ In the header of the list view, Latest must be selected in order to view unreleased methods.
1 In the list view, select a newly created or modified method which has status Approval state > Not
reviewed.
2 Select Approve Method in the toolbar.
ð The corresponding dialog box appears.
3 If predefined comments are defined, select one from the Signing
drop-down list or enter your own comment. Signature 1 of 2 for approval of method
4 Click OK, enter the corresponding credentials and click Concerns method 'Checkweighing'
Number of requested signatures: 2
OK.
Role Lab Assistant
ð If two steps are defined, step two for the signing Predefined Comment
procedure will appear. If a one step is defined, the Comment
dialog box will close.

Internal ID M11
Version number 1
OK Cancel
22 Common Activities LabX

5 Click Cancel to postpone the second step of the Signing
signing process. Signature 2 of 2 for approval of Method
- or - Concerns method 'Checkweighing'

Number of requested signatures: 2
Another user selects or enters the necessary comments.
6 Click OK, enter the corresponding credentials and click Role Lab Assistant
Predefined Comment
OK. Comment
ð The status of Approval state has been changed to

Reviewed or Approved. Internal ID M11
If two signatures are required, the second is usually Version number 1
performed by a different person in an additional step.

OK Cancel
The second signature can be performed immediately after
the first, by the second person entering corresponding user
data. However, the signing procedure can also be continued at a later time or on a different LabX Client. In this
case, the procedure is not continued after the first signing step by clicking Cancel. If the object requiring a
signature is a method, select the method in the list view. By selecting Approve Method in the toolbar again, the
second signature is prompted.
See also
2 Release objects } Page 23
3.1.2 Release objects

active versions.
This example refers to a method, but can also be transferred to other objects that can be released.
Release a method
§ In the header of the list view, Latest must be selected in order to view unreleased methods.
1 In the list view, select a method which has status Approval state > Approved.
2 Select Release Method in the toolbar.
ð The method has been released, the new status is Release state > Released.
See also
3.1.3 Delete released objects

Objects that are released also require signatures for deletion.
This example refers to a method, but can also be transferred to other objects that can be released.
1 Select Released in the header of the list view to list only released versions of objects.
2 In the list view, select the method which you want to delete.
3 Select Delete Method in the toolbar.

3.1.4 Revoke approval on result sets
Approval on result sets can be revoked, enabling the further calculation on results. All changes are traceable in
the Audit Trail.
Navigation: Data > Result set
1 Select the result set in the list view on that you want to revoke the approval.
2 Select Revoke Approval in the toolbar.
ð The status of Approval state has been changed to Not reviewed.
ð Then the result set can be edited again.
See also
2 Audit Trail } Page 665
3.1.5 Manage versions

For objects that are managed in versions, a new version is created every time you save. The history can be
viewed at any time. Older versions of certain objects can be restored.
Versioned objects
Module Object Restoreable
Platform Methods Yes
Products Yes
Value tables Yes
Report templates Yes
Balance Monitoring Settings No
Adjustments No
Tests No
Tolerance Profiles No
Weights Yes
1 Select the desired object in the list view and choose Open... > Old Versions in the toolbar. The corre-
sponding dialog opens.
2 Select a version from the list and choose the desired action.
ð If you select Restore Version, an editor window is opened. This object is not saved as a new version until
you choose Save and Close. The restored version becomes the new, current version. The previous version
can be viewed in the version history and can be restored if necessary.
ð If you select View Version, an editor window is opened but you cannot edit or save the version.
See also
2 Compare methods } Page 192
2 Compare products } Page 183
2 Versioned objects } Page 17
3.1.6 Display signatures

The signatures obtained are visible for all of the relevant objects when you set them to be displayed via the
command Open Read-Only.

With the exception of methods, report templates and result sets, signatures obtained are visible in the reading
pane when you select a suitable object in the list view. Signatures are displayed in two categories: Approval
signatures and Deletion Signatures.
Review
User login name PeterSmith
User full name Peter Smith
Reason
Execution time 2019/24/08 10:13
Approve
User login name JoanneMiller
User full name Joanne Miller
Reason
Execution time 2019/27/08 10:34
3.2 Lock screen

LabX may be locked for security reasons either by setting an automatic screen lock that is initiated after a set
period of inactivity, or by manually choosing to lock LabX. Once the LabX screen lock is invoked, only the user
that locked LabX or an authorized user can unlock LabX.
Navigation:
− Follow the navigation and select Lock Screen.
ð The application has been locked and the login window appears.
See also
2 Account policies } Page 36
3.3 Manage folders

For improved manageability, you can create several folders and subfolders for methods, products, sample
series, instruments and other objects. Objects and folders can be repositioned by dragging. Folders can be
renamed or deleted.
Add a folder
1 Select the desired group in the folder list.
Analysis
2 Select from the command bar at the bottom of the
UV/VIS Methods
navigation pane.
ð The corresponding editor window appears. Quality Lab
3 Give the folder a meaningful name. Test Lab
4 After editing the settings, save the changes. Sample Series
Series sequences
Products
Statistical Evaluations
Messages
Shortcuts
Data
Resources
System
Edit a folder
1 Select the folder that you want to edit.
2 Select from the command bar at the bottom of the navigation pane.
ð The corresponding editor window appears.

3 After editing the settings, save the changes.
Delete a folder
1 Select the folder that you want to delete.
ð A dialog box appears.
3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
See also
2 Manage search folders } Page 26
3.4 Manage search folders

You can define your own filters, which will then be displayed in addition to the series of predefined filters.
Creating your own search folders makes it is easier to gain an overview of large amounts of data. You can
assign multiple criteria to a particular search folder and thereby create combinations that satisfy multiple
criteria, e.g. all results that have been carried out on a specific instrument by user xy in the last 24 hours.
The folders are arranged in alphabetical order ascending by name. The sorting order cannot be changed.
Search folders are available on the following folders:
• Results
• Result sets
• Reports
• Tasks
• Audit Trail
• Balance history
Add a search folder
1 Select the desired group in the folder list.
3 Give the search folder a meaningful name. Assign fields to the criteria, choose the corresponding operators
and arguments, and save your settings.
4 Edit the settings as required and save them.
Edit a search folder
1 Select the search folder that you want to edit.
Delete a search folder
1 Select the search folder that you want to delete.
Note
• If only a single result from a result set containing multiple results matches the selected search criteria, the
complete result set will be displayed.
• The number of displayed entries of search folders is limited to the most recent 2000. If more are to be
displayed, a warning icon will appear.

See also
2 Display additional results } Page 581
3.5 Manage messages

There are various groups of objects that can trigger messages. For each of these groups, you can define which
users or roles will receive messages. Depending on the group, various predefined messages are displayed.
These settings are applicable globally to all objects. In addition to these groups, the Notify method function can
display individual messages.
How individual users should receive messages, via e-mail or via Messages, can be defined for each user
account in the user management.
Groups Messages
Users If a user has made too many login attempts and the account has been disabled.
These are messages of high importance that are displayed in red color.
Instruments For due dates or expiry dates. For changes to software or firmware versions.
Resources Expiry date of resources.
• Weights
• Sensors
• Titrants
• Peripherals
• Calibration substances
• Quant Calibrations
• CertiRefs
Activate a message
1 Choose the desired group or object in the list view.
2 Select Set Messages in the toolbar.
Parameter Description Values
Activate Select this option to activate monitoring of the calibration due Active | Inactive
monitoring date.
Only in combination with weights.
Days in advance Defines the number of days before the reminder informs about the 1…365
upcoming due date.
Only in combination with weights.
Activate message Define whether messages are sent for objects of this type. Active | Inactive
Message Defines own text to be displayed in addition to the system Text
message.
Users to remind Defines which users are to receive messages. Selection
Roles to remind Defines which roles are to receive messages. Selection
See also
2 Notify } Page 222
2 Manage users } Page 668
2 E-Mail settings } Page 40

3.6 Display messages
Messages generated by the system are either displayed to the corresponding users in LabX under Messages or
sent to them via e-mail.
Navigation: Analysis > Messages
− Select the required message in the list view.
ð The detailed message is displayed in the reading pane.
See also
2 Manage messages } Page 27
3.7 Apply tags

Tags can be used for grouping together different objects and thereby improving transparency. A tag consists of
a selectable color and freely definable text. Tags are displayed in the list view and the reading pane. Multiple
tags can be assigned to one object. Tags are used for the following objects:
• Methods
• Products
• Sample Series
• Tasks
• Instruments
• Report templates
• Results (at sample level, which means that all results that belong to the same sample receive the same
tags)
• Reports
• User
Note: Applying and changing tags are not recorded in the audit trail.
1 Select the required object in the list view (multiple selection is possible).
2 Click Tag in the toolbar and select the tag to be assigned or removed.
See also
2 Tag settings } Page 34
3.8 View archives

An archive is a data backup file that is created before data is deleted from the database.
When an archive is created, a data backup is performed with subsequent purging of past data for results,
reports and the Audit Trail. All other data, such as methods, resources and users, are left intact.
Data from an archived database is read-only and therefore cannot be changed. However, you can create new
reports or new search folders for the archived data. These are saved in the active database.
The following data of a published archive can be viewed in LabX:
• Results
• Reports
• Audit Trail

Navigation: > Open Archive
§ An archive was created and has been published.
1 Follow the navigation and select Open Archive.
ð An additional LabX window appears.
2 Create or edit existing search folders to make it is easier to gain an overview of large amounts of data.
See also
2 Create archive } Page 701
2 Publish an archive } Page 701

4 Options and Settings
4.1 LabX licensing
Starter Packs
Each installation of LabX begins with a Starter Pack, which consists of an edition
(LabX Express or LabX Server), instrument license(s), and in some cases Option
Licenses. The Starter Pack includes the functionalities of method and report editing
as well as data- and instrument management.
Editions
There are two editions available, LabX Express and LabX Server. LabX Express
edition is an installation of LabX software on one computer. Up to three
instruments can be connected.
LabX Server edition is capable of a distributed installation on multiple computers.
Up to 30 instruments can be connected.
Instrument Licenses
LabX is licensed per connected instrument, i.e. each instrument in the installation
requires an Instrument License. Independent of the Starter Pack, all types of
instruments can be added to the system.
Option Licenses
Customize the LabX system to fit your application. There are several options
available. For example, the "Product Database" option allows you to handle
products in a professional manner and to run your methods based on specific
product data. The option "Regulation" ensures full support of 21 CFR part 11
compliance.
Reactivation is required if you add or remove licenses or if you replace hardware components or the entire
server. The procedure for reactivation is similar to activation, but without the steps required for creating a new
user on the activation portal.
4.1.1 License manager

The License Manager is where you manage all types of license key, regardless of whether they are edition
licenses, instrument licenses or option licenses.
In License options you can activate or deactivate specific options or modules.
Navigation: > LabX Licensing
1 Follow the navigation and select License manager.
2 Manage the licenses as required.
30 Options and Settings LabX

3 Click Create New Licensing Report to generate a report.
ð After any change to the licenses, it will be necessary to restart the LabX clients to apply the changes.
LabX Activation Status
The status informs you whether the system is active or when this period will expire. From this screen, you are
also able to go directly to the activation feature.
Registered Licenses
The list showing all installed licenses ensures that you always have an overview of the system. Here you can
add licenses to a system or remove licenses from a system.
• To add a license, click Add and enter a license key.
• To remove a license, select the required license in the list and click Remove.
Hardware
The Hardware ID is a set of numbers and letters that uniquely identify your computer (Business Server) to LabX.
The ID is used to register LabX in the activation procedure.
See also
2 License options } Page 31
2 Activation } Page 32
4.1.2 License options

The license keys installed determine which option and edition functions are available. You can activate or
deactivate specific options or modules across the entire system if desired. For example, if you clear the corre-
sponding check box, this feature will no longer be available in the LabX clients.
1 Follow the navigation and select License options.
2 Activate or deactivate the option licenses and instrument licenses according to your requirements.
ð After any change to the licenses, it will be necessary to restart the LabX clients to apply the changes.
Edition
Information on the edition that is licensed to the LabX system.
Option licenses
License Description
Report Designer Freely customize your reports with all details and possibilities including charts,
graphics, and tables.
Product Database Manage product data within LabX centrally – run methods based on product data.
User management Centrally maintain and control users and roles within LabX.
Auto import/export LabX allows you to automatically import and export data into and from CSV and
XML formats.
Regulation LabX fully supports regulatory requirements, including 21 CFR Part 11.
System Integration Integrate LabX installation with other software packages including LIMS and ERPs
using API webservice.
Statistical Evaluation Functionality to postprocess statistical reports of main results, based on definitions
in Rule Sets and Evaluations.
LabX Options and Settings 31

Instrument licenses
License Description
Balance Excellence balances
Quantos Quantos automatic dosing systems
Density Refractometry Density meters and refractometers
SevenExcellence SevenExcellence™ multi parameter instruments
Titration Titration Excellence / Compact Titration
Thermal Values Thermal Value Excellence melting point systems
UV/VIS UV/VIS Excellence spectrophotometers
See also
2 LabX licensing } Page 30
2 Activation } Page 32
4.1.3 Activation
A non-activated version of LabX will only run for 45 days. 5 days before this period expires, you will be
prompted to activate LabX each time you start LabX. Once this period has expired, you will be prompted to
activate the application the next time you attempt to start LabX. It will no longer be possible to start LabX until
you have activated it.
Reactivation is required if you add or remove licenses or if you replace hardware components or the entire
server. The procedure for reactivation is similar to activation, but without the steps required for creating a new
user on the activation portal.
4.1.3.1 Online activation

Before you activate your system, make sure that all licenses are registered. Activation is required whenever you
add or remove licenses or if you replace hardware components or the entire server.
§ For online activation, the PC must be connected directly to the Internet.
1 Click on and select LabX Licensing > Activation.
ð The LabX activation wizard appears.
2 Under Activation type choose Direct (internet connection required).
3 Follow the instructions on the screen.
ð LabX has been activated.
See also
2 License manager } Page 30
2 Offline activation } Page 32
4.1.3.2 Offline activation

Before you activate your system, make sure that all licenses are registered. Activation is required whenever you
add or remove licenses or if you replace hardware components or the entire server.
§ Select this method of activation if you have no direct link to the Internet.
1 Click on and select LabX Licensing > Activation.
ð The LabX activation wizard appears.
2 Under Activation type select Manual (using activation key and license file) and click on Next.
3 Click on Save License Key File and enter the export path, e.g. to a USB drive. Then click on Next.

4 Take the USB drive to another PC with Internet access.
§ The following steps are performed on a PC with Internet access.
1 In the web browser's address bar, enter http://activation.mt.com to go to the "Software Activation Portal".
2 Click Register in the menu bar.
ð The window Membership request will appear.
3 Enter a user name, your e-mail address and enter the text from the picture. Click Create User to submit the
data.
ð You will then receive your login information and a generated password via e-mail.
4 Click on the link in the e-mail you received.
ð The window Sign In will appear.
5 Enter the user name and the generated password and click on Sign In.
ð The window Manage Customer Profile will appear.
6 Complete your profile data and click Save.
7 Click on Activation, enter the path for the license key file and click on Submit to upload.
8 Complete the fields in Instruments and save the details.
9 In System overview, download the activation key file and copy it to the USB drive.
10 Please enter all the details for your installed system under My systems. These will be relevant for software
updates.
11 Take the USB drive back to the PC on which you installed LabX.
§ The following steps are performed on the PC with LabX installed on it.
− Click on Import Activation Key File and enter the import to the activation key file. Then click on Finish.
ð LabX is now activated.
See also
2 License manager } Page 30
4.2 User settings

• The user settings apply to the user currently logged into LabX. These settings also apply to other
workstations.
4.2.1 Change your own password

All users can change their passwords. Administrators can also change or enter passwords under User
management.
Navigation: > User Identification
1 Log on to LabX with the required user.
2 Follow the navigation and select Change password. The relevant dialog box appears.
3 Enter your old password in the Current password box.
4 Enter the new password in the New password box and again to confirm in the Confirm new password box.
5 Click the OK button to confirm your entries.
ð The password has been changed.
Note
You cannot change your Active Directory password in LabX.
See also
2 Manage LabX users } Page 668

4.2.2 Register fingerprints
Fingerprint readers can be used for authentication as an alternative to password entry. In contrast to a conven-
tional login with a user name and password, the user simply places a finger on the fingerprint reader. If the
fingerprint is recognized, the relevant user is authenticated in the same way as if they had entered a user name
and password.
When a fingerprint reader is active, this is indicated by a fingerprint icon during the following actions.
• Logging on to LabX
• Releasing a screen lock
• Signing various objects

§ To register fingerprints, a fingerprint reader must be connected to the PC and a driver must be installed on
the PC.
§ In addition, the user management with password must be fully activated for all users first so that fingerprints
can be registered.
2 Follow the navigation and select Register Fingerprint. The relevant dialog box appears.
3 Place the preferred finger on the fingerprint reader and repeat the step as prompted.
4 Complete the action by entering your password.
ð The fingerprint has been registered.
Note
• If the user management is based on Active Directory, fingerprint readers cannot be used for authentication.
• A PC driver for the fingerprint reader can be found on the LabX installation DVD, in the directory “Drivers/
Fingerprint Reader”.
• Fingerprint readers can also be operated in conjunction with Density Refractometry, Titration Excellence,
SevenExcellence, UV/Vis spectrophotometers instruments for the log-in procedure on LabX. In order to do
this, the fingerprint reader must have been activated on the instrument.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > Fingerprint reader
Fingerprint readers on a PC are always activated.
4.2.3 Delete fingerprints

2 Follow the navigation and select Remove Fingerprint.
ð The fingerprint has been deleted.
4.3 Global Settings

• These global settings apply to all LabX users on all workstations.
4.3.1 Tag settings

Tags can be used for grouping together different objects and thereby improving transparency. A tag consists of
a selectable color and freely definable text. Tags are displayed in the list view and the reading pane. Multiple
tags can be assigned to one object. Tags are used for the following objects:
• Methods
• Products
• Sample Series
• Tasks

• Instruments
• Report templates
• Results (at sample level, which means that all results that belong to the same sample receive the same
tags)
• Reports
• User
Tag Settings
Add Remove
Search text...
Tag Name Methods
Develop Search text...
Test
Drag a column header here to group by that column
ID Name Tags Type

Develop General Balance
Test General Balance
General Balance
Save Save and Close Cancel
Navigation: > Options and Settings

Manage tags
1 Follow the navigation and select Tag Settings.
2 Click on Add to add tags.
3 Give tags meaningful names.
4 Click to select the color for a tag.
Remove a tag
1 Follow the navigation and select Tag Settings.
2 Select the tag that you want to remove.
3 Click Remove.
ð If the tag is assigned to any objects, a dialog box appears.
4 Click Yes to confirm the removal.
Apply tags
The commands for assigning tags to objects are found in the Edit group in the toolbar.
1 Select the required object in the list view (multiple selection is possible).
2 Click Tag in the toolbar and select the tag to be assigned or removed.
See also
2 Apply tags } Page 28
4.3.2 Label settings

Labels are headers for freely definable fields, in which you can enter additional information for the properties of
following objects:
• Instruments

• Methods
• Products
• Sample Series
• Series sequences
A maximum of 6 additional fields can be defined and assigned text labels. For example, use an additional field
to specify the location of instruments.
Label Settings
Labels help to identify objects. For each label you can optionally provide a name (e.g. Location).
Properties
Labeled objects Instrument name and properties
Instrument Method Product Sample Series Series sequence Serial number 57294856392
Add Remove Category Balance

Labels
Model XPR
Location
Name Mettler 23
Label 1
Location
Label 1

1 Follow the navigation and select Label Settings.
2 Select an object in the left-hand column Labeled objects.
3 Enter a text for each of the activated field labels in Labels.
ð The added fields are now available for the corresponding objects.
4.3.3 Account policies

Account policies are a combination of settings governing password and account lockout policies. Password
policies are an effective way to secure most environments because they can impose complex passwords and
periodic password changes. The account lockout policy makes it possible to deactivate an account automat-
ically after a sequence of failed login attempts.
Please note that if the LabX system is used in a GxP-regulated environment, the settings you select must
comply with the regulations of the relevant authorities.
Active Directory
Active Directory is the directory service by Microsoft. With the aid of Active Directory the administrator can grant
and limit access to users of the network. You can activate Active Directory for authentication and to map Active
Directory groups to LabX roles.
Using Active Directory Service, you can delegate user properties and password management to Windows from
the LabX environment. Various settings in Account policies and User management have therefore no effect on
the Active Directory users.
1 Follow the navigation and select Edit Account Policies.
Login
Parameters Description
Define the login behavior and features here.

Show user name history On the login screen, the last 20 successfully logged in users are shown.
Show last user name On the login screen, the last logged in user is shown.
Deactivate account after Allows the system to lock out user accounts after a specified number of failed login
failed login 1) attempts.
Max. login attempts 1) Defines the maximum number of failed login attempts before lockout.
Login policy 1) Defines whether the login is also allowed via fingerprint scan (user name /
password combination is always possible).
Password
Define the password security settings here.
Authorization by Logon requires a password to be entered.
password required 1)
May contain user name 1) Allows the user name to be part of the password.
Password complexity If enabled, passwords must meet minimum requirements when they are changed
required * 1) or created.
Minimum length 1) Sets the minimum number of characters for a password.
1)
Changes before reuse Sets the minimum number of password changes before an old password can be
used again.
Password Expiration
Define the settings for expiration of passwords here.
Password expires 1) If activated, passwords will expire after a defined number of days.
1)
Expires after [days] Defines the number of days that the user can use the same password before being
forced to change it.
Notification period Defines how many days before password expiration the user is notified of the need
(days) 1) to change the password.
Password Exclusion List

Here, you can define words or word chains that are not permitted to be used in passwords.
Words 1) The list of excluded passwords is shown here. You can add or remove list entries.
Active Directory
Using Active Directory Service, user properties and password management are delegated to Windows from the
LabX environment.
Authentication 2) Activates Active Directory services for authentication in LabX.
2)
Role mapping Activates the mapping from Active Directory groups to LabX roles.
2)
Single Sign-On If activated, a user logs in once on a PC and accesses LabX without being
prompted to log in again.
If Single Sign-On is enabled and you want to log on as another user, select under
Windows:
Start > All apps > METTLER TOLEDO > LabX > Tools > LabX Client with Login
Screen Lock
Here, you can define whether LabX should be locked after a defined period.

1)
Lock active If activated, LabX will lock after a defined number of minutes of inactivity.
1)
Wait time [minutes] Defines the time in minutes until the screen is locked.
1) Not applicable for Active Directory users.
2) Not applicable for local LabX users.
Password complexity required *

* must include at least 3 of these 5 items: lowercase characters, uppercase characters, digits, non-
alphanumeric symbols, other Unicode characters.
Category Description
Lower case Lowercase characters of European languages (a through z, sharp-s, with diacritic
marks, Greek and Cyrillic characters).
Upper case Uppercase characters of European languages (A through Z, with diacritic marks,
Greek and Cyrillic characters).
Digits Base 10 digits (0 through 9).
Non-alphanumeric Symbols in the Unicode standard that include the following:
symbols • Letterlike symbols. ℀ ℄ ™
• Currency symbols. € ₣ ₤
• Number forms. ⅐ ⅛
• Mathematical operators and arrows. + × ⇒
• Geometric symbols. ▤ ▰ ◇
• Technical symbols. ⌀ ⌂ ⌖
• Braille patterns. ⠋ ⠏ ⠟
• Dingbats. ✁ ✆ ✈
Other Unicode characters Any Unicode character that does not fall into one of the above listed categories. _
(&?},
This includes Unicode characters from Asian languages.
See also
2 User management } Page 667
2 Handling of passwords in LabX } Page 703
4.3.4 Signature and release policies

Define the use of electronic signatures to enforce permitted sequences of signature steps for approval and
release of objects. Assign roles to the defined signature steps.
§ Close all LabX clients before making any changes to these settings to ensure that they take effect
immediately.
1 Follow the navigation and select Signature and Release Policies.
Objects

Platform
Object Approval Deletion Unblocking Releaseable Versioned Restorable
Methods • • • • •
Products • • • • •
Report templates • • • • •
(1)
Result sets •
Value tables • • • • •
Instrument •
1
The approval can be revoked.
Balance
Monitoring Settings • • •
Adjustments • • •
Tests • • •
Tolerance Profiles • • •
Weights • • • • •
Density Refractometry
Test Sets • • •
Adjustment Sets • • •
Available types in Signature Policies

Parameter Description
None If no signing procedure is defined, the object will immediately change to Approved.
Review One signature is required to fulfill the policies. The Approval state of an object will change
to Approved after one signature.
Review - Approve Two signatures are required to fulfill the policies. The Approval state of an object will
change to Reviewed after the first signature and to Approved after the second signature.
Review
Signing role Defines the role for the signature step. Only members of the selected role will be allowed to
sign.
Comments Defines whether entering comments are mandatory for the signature step.
required
Predefined Defines whether using predefined comments are allowed for the signature step.
comments
allowed
Approve
Signing role Defines the role for the signature step. Only members of the selected role will be allowed to
sign.
Comments Defines whether entering comments are mandatory for the signature step.
required
Predefined Defines whether using predefined comments are allowed for the signature step.
comments
allowed

Different user If activated, the same user who signed the previous step cannot sign for this step.
required
Release Policies
active versions.
Auto Release Policies
Active Versions are released automatically with the last required approval signature or, if no
signatures are required, when new versions are saved.
Inactive Objects must be released in additional manual steps after all approval signatures have
been obtained.
Predefined Signature Comments
Text Defines predefined texts that will be available as a selection for the signing procedures.
See also
2 Approve and release of objects } Page 21
4.3.5 E-Mail settings

• These settings apply to all user accounts.
You use these settings to define which e-mail server is used for sending messages.
1 Follow the navigation and select E-Mail Settings.
User Authentication
Authentication Select the type of login. Windows login refers to the login under Anonymous | Mail server
type which the LabX server component is running. login | Windows login
User name The user's login name for Mail server login. -
Password The user's password for Mail server login. -
Domain Name of the domain for Mail server login. -
Settings Check
Test e-mail Address to which a test e-mail should be sent. -
address
SMTP Mail Server
Server name Server name of the e-mail server. -
Server port E-mail server port. -
Use SSL Defines whether e-mails are sent in encrypted format. Active | Inactive
Connection Specifies the maximum time after which the connection process is 1…600
timeout [s] canceled.

E-Mail Header
Sender e-mail Defines the e-mail address of the sender. -
address
See also
4.3.6 Color settings for highlighting results

With these settings, you can define the color in which results should be displayed in the list view. Text and
background colors are displayed differently, depending on the status of the results and the tolerance ranges.
1 Follow the navigation and select Result Color Settings.
2 Click on color definitions to modify and select new colors from the color selector.
Result State Uncertain A parameter that is needed for the calculation has the Indeterminate status. For
example, as a result of overloading of a particular load cell.
Result State Not OK A parameter that is needed for the calculation has the Not OK status. For example,
due to division by zero.
Tolerance Range Depending on the tolerance ranges, T1 to T3 are assigned different colors.
Tolerance Range If the tolerance ranges have not been defined, this color template will be applied.
Undefined
4.3.7 Overall result state settings

Depending on the LabX module and the instrument type, the available options are different.
With these settings, you can control the status (Overall result state) of results, dependent on individual result
validations (Data markings). This describes the behavior when individual validation errors occur. Depending
on the status of the results and the tolerance ranges, text and background colors can be defined for result
views.
1 Follow the navigation and select Overall Result State Settings.
2 Assign a status to each of the possible markings.
ð The status of results will be shown accordingly.
Overall result state Description
OK Will be set, even if the validation is violated.
Uncertain This status will be applied if the validation is violated.
Not OK This status will be applied if the validation is violated.
See also
2 Data markings } Page 720
2 Color settings for highlighting results } Page 41

4.3.8 Page setup
With these settings, you define the header and footer fields and page size of general printings. These setting do
not apply for reports defined in Report templates.
1 Follow the navigation and select Page Setup. The Editor is opened.
2 Click the placeholder positions shown on the layout and select the desired items from the drop-down list.
Available items
None No information is printed on the specified location.
Document title The titles of the documents are printed on the specified location.
Logo image The LabX logo is printed on the specified location.
Creation date The creation dates are printed on the specified location.
Page numbers Page numbers are printed on the specified location.
User name The user names are printed on the specified location.
Available toolbar functions
Margins Specify the size of the margins to improve the appearance of a printed report.
Under Custom Margins..., enter the width and height that you want.
Size Select the size of paper that you want from the list.
4.3.9 StatusLight settings

• These settings apply to all compatible instruments.
1 Follow the navigation and select StatusLight Settings.
On the workbenches, the button StatusLight is always shown and does not depend on these settings.
Instrument Terminal Settings
StatusLight Activates the status indicator and the status information on all instruments. The
status information are displayed on the instrument screens.
Green light Activates the green status indication. If deactivated, the StatusLight does not light
up when the instrument is ready to use.
The other status indications (flashing green, orange) are displayed as normal.
4.3.10 Titration settings

Define here which balance may connect to a titrator and the behavior when using Smart Tags.
1 Follow the navigation and select Titration Settings.

Balances
Select the balances to be Select the balances to be used with titrators. The selected balances display a
used with titration button Titration on the home screen. Tappping the button will show the tasks for
which you want to weigh samples.
Smart Tag
Delete Smart Tag data If activated, the sample data on the Smart Tags will be deleted, as soon as they
after reading have been read.
See also
2 Weighing of titration samples } Page 53
4.3.11 Thermal Values settings

• These settings apply to all Thermal Value instruments.
1 Follow the navigation and select Thermal Values Settings.
Instrument Settings
Displayed Here you can define the global settings for the displayed °C | °F | K
temperature unit temperature unit.
Beep when start Active: The instrument plays an audio signal when the start Active | Inactive
temperature is temperature is reached.
reached Inactive: The instrument does not play an audio signal when the
start temperature is reached.
Beep at end of Active: The instrument plays an audio signal when the analysis is Active | Inactive
analysis finished.
Inactive: The instrument does not play an audio signal when the
analysis is finished.
Volume Defines the volume of the audio signals. 1…5
1: Lowest volume.
5: Highest volume.
Videos
Limit video The number of stored videos can be set to limit the amount of Active | Inactive
storage storage space in the database. A video pair occupies around
1.3 MB minimum of memory capacity in the database.
Maximum If the option is activated and the maximum number of results -
number of results containing videos has been reached, the videos of the oldest
with video results that exceed the limit will be deleted.
4.3.12 SevenExcellence settings

• These settings apply to all SevenExcellence instruments.

1 Follow the navigation and select SevenExcellence Settings.
Action When Sensors Expire
With these settings you specify whether the instrument warns, warns and blocks or does not react, when usable
life or life span expired. The usable life is the period after which the values for a specific resource should be
remeasured, e.g. calibration for sensors. The life span is the period after which a resource is exhausted and
should be replaced.
Usable life Select the action when exceeding usable life. Warn | Warn and block |
None
Life span Select the action when exceeding life span. Warn | Warn and block |
None
Instrument Settings
With these settings you specify the units used on the instruments and the default units used within LabX.
Temperature unit Defines the temperature unit applicable for all measurements. °C | °F
All entries and representations will be provided in the selected
unit.
Barometric Defines the barometric pressure unit applicable for dissolved mbar | hPa | mmHg |
pressure unit oxygen measurements. atm
All entries and representations will be provided in the selected
unit.
4.3.13 Density and Refractometry settings

• These settings apply to all Density and Refractometry instruments.
1 Follow the navigation and select Density Refractometry Settings.
Videos
Limit video The number of stored videos can be set to limit the amount of Active | Inactive
storage storage space in the database.
Maximum If the option is activated and the maximum number of results -
number of results containing videos has been reached, the videos of the oldest
with video results that exceed the limit will be deleted.

5 Operate Instruments
5.1 USB instrument drivers
LabX Version 11 requires an instrument driver to be installed on the "LabX Business Server" and all "LabX
Clients" that is used for all types of instruments. Existing old drivers must be removed.
Installing the USB driver
§ Ensure that no instrument is connected to any of the USB ports on the PC.
1 Open the directory Drivers > USB Driver on the LabX USB flash drive.
2 Run MT_Generic_USB_Serial_Port_Driver_v1.34.0.0_2019-02-06_setup.exe as an administrator and
follow the instructions on the screen.
Selecting the USB driver
§ The USB driver must be installed on the PC.
− Connect the instrument to the PC using a USB cable.
ð A message "Installing" appears in the notification area of the task bar.
ð After a short time the message "Installed successfully" appears in the notification area of the task bar.
ð The instrument can now be added to LabX.
See also
2 Add instruments } Page 600
5.1.1 Remove old instrument drivers

Existing old instrument drivers must be removed if a new universal driver (METTLER TOLEDO USB Serial Port
Driver) is installed.
§ Ensure that no instrument is connected to any of the USB ports on the PC.
1 Select Start > Control Panel > Settings > Apps.
2 Select a driver Windows Driver Package - Mettler Toledo.
3 Click on the Remove button.
4 Repeat the previous steps for all the installed drivers.
5 Restart the computer.
5.2 Balances - XPR/XSR
5.2.1 Configure the Ethernet Interface

To enable communication between LabX and instruments, the appropriate settings in the instruments must
correspond with the settings in LabX.
LabX synchronizes the date and time on the instruments with the LabX Server each time a connection is made
and each time a task is started. When an instrument is connected, the user interface language on the
connected instrument is changed to the language currently installed on the LabX installation.
Define Ethernet options
Navigation: Balance menu > Settings > Interfaces > Ethernet
Configure these settings if you have your instrument connected to a network.
If the IP address of the instrument is obtained via DHCP, make sure that IP address reservation is enabled.
Please consult your IT administrator for IP address reservations.
1 In coordination with your IT administrator, configure the parameters.
2 Save the setting and restart the balance.
Host name Defines the balance host name. Numeric (22* | 0 ... 22)
LabX Operate Instruments 45

MAC address Information on the MAC address (Media Access Control) that is -
used to uniquely identify the balance in the network.
Network configu- DHCP: The parameters for the ethernet connection will be DHCP* | Manual
ration automatically set.
Manual: The options for the ethernet connection must be set
manually by the user.
IP address If the IP is not to be automatically obtained, you can enter it here. 000.000.000.000 …
255.255.255.255
Subnet mask Defines the subnet mask that is used by the TCP/IP protocol to 000.000.000.000 …
determine whether a host is on the local subnet or on a remote 255.255.255.255
network.
DNS server Defines the domain name server address of the primary server. 000.000.000.000 …
(primary) 255.255.255.255
DNS server Defines the domain name server address of the secondary DNS 000.000.000.000 …
(secondary) server. 255.255.255.255
Default gateway Defines the address of the default gateway that links the host's 000.000.000.000 …
subnet to other networks. 255.255.255.255
Note
• A default gateway entry is also required if the instrument is not being operated in the same subnet as LabX.
Ensure the configuration’s default gateway address is defined in the same subnet as the IP address.
See also
5.2.2 Configure LabX connection

Navigation: Balance menu > Settings > LabX / Services
§ If the connection is made via a network, observe the setting in Ethernet.
2 Save the setting and restart the instrument.
LabX service Network: A network connection to LabX will be established on Network | Inactive* |
startup. USB
Inactive: No connection to LabX will be established.
USB: A USB connection to LabX will be established on startup.
Port Defines the port for a network connection of the balance to LabX. 1024…65535
Port 8014 is proposed by default. The port number must be
entered when adding an instruments in LabX.
See also
46 Operate Instruments LabX

5.2.3 Operate the balance
5.2.3.1 Switch on the balance and log on

If the user management is based on Active Directory, you must use these credentials to log on.
field, for example "paul-w".
must be provided.
Switch on
− Press briefly to switch the balance on.
ð The balance is establishing the connection to LabX. Connecting to LabX ...
Connection type Network
IP address 172.16.05.23
Port 8014
Mode
Log on with the displayed user

1 In the Login window tap on Password and enter the LabX
Login
10:13 2019/24/06
password.
2 Next, tap Login. PredefinedUser
User name PredefinedUser
Password Enter here
Please enter your user name and password.
Mode Login
Select a user and log on

1 In the Login window the recent logged-in users are displayed.
The list of recently logged-in users is displayed only if your system is configured accordingly.
2 Select a user from the list. For larger lists, drag the System 10:13 2019/24/06
Login
selection left or right to browse.
- or - Peter Smith PredefinedUser Joanne Miller
Tap the user name field and enter a user name User name PredefinedUser
recognized by the system. Password Enter here
3 Tap on Password to enter the password and tap Login. Please enter your user name and password.
Mode Login

5.2.3.2 The home screen
Elements on the home screen
• The home screen displays a variety of information. The Home Analysis 10:13 2019/24/06
Administrator
LabX icon indicates that the instrument is in LabX
mode.
• The central area of the display shows shortcuts to
methods, products, sample series and manual
Dens. liq. Std. sol. Loss on Drying
operations. Shortcuts of type Immediate start are
identified by a small arrow.
Log out and lock the screen

1 On the home screen, tap the left flyout menu.
ð The Balance menu opens.
2 Tap Exit. Home
Balance menu
Administrator
Analysis 10:13 2019/24/06
ð A selection window is displayed. Leveling aid
Alibi memory
Balance info
Settings
Shortcuts
Exit
ð Choose Logout to log out the current user so that Home

Balance menu
Administrator
Analysis 10:13 2019/24/06
another user may log in. Leveling aidExit
ð Choose Lock Screen so that it cannot be used by other Alibi memoryLogout
users. Balance info Lock Screen
ð Choose Block, enter a reason for why the instrument Settings Block
will be blocked and click OK. Shortcuts Offline
ð Choose Offline to operate the instrument independently Reboot
of LabX.
Back
ð Choose Reboot to reboot the instrument. Exit
Unblock balance
If the system settings require an electronic signature to unblock the instruments, this action must be done on a
PC. Follow these instructions if no electronic signature is required.
1 On the home screen, tap the left flyout menu.
2 On the Balance menu tap Exit.
3 Tap Unblock on the selection window.
4 Enter a reason for unblocking the balance and tap OK.
ð The balance has been unblocked.
See also
2 Manage shortcuts in LabX } Page 171
2 Block or unblock instruments } Page 604

5.2.3.3 Select analysis
1 On the home screen, tap the top flyout menu Analysis.
ð The Analysis flyout menu opens.
2 To start an analysis, select the desired analysis from Analysis Released Methods
one of the groups and tap Start. Tasks Std. sol.
3 To close the flyout menu, tap Analysis. Methods
Products
Series
Tests
Adjustments
Show Latest
Analysis
5.2.3.4 Add shortcut

Shortcuts enable you to start tasks directly from the Shortcuts list on the PC or from an instrument. Shortcuts
can be created directly on instruments for the following objects:
• Methods
• Series
• Products
• Tests
• Adjustments
§ The start dialog of a valid object is opened on the instrument.
1 Tap AddToHome to create a shortcut.
2 Define the shortcut parameters.
3 Tap Save.
ð The shortcut is now set on the home screen.
5.2.3.5 Weighing of titration samples

If a balance is defined to be used for titrators, an additional button Titration is displayed.
1 Tap Titration on the home screen.
ð All created or running titration tasks are shown.
2 Tap Tolerance Profile to select the tolerance profile in titration mode.
3 Tap the task for which you want to weigh the samples.
4 For running tasks you are requested to weigh the current sample.
- or -
For created or waiting tasks choose one of the samples from the list.
Note
• Weighing a titration sample is logged with the time of the event and the balance used. Titration -
Measurement Report will include this information.
See also
2 Titration settings } Page 42
5.2.4 Add peripheral devices

External devices such as printers, barcode readers, ErgoSens, foot switches, AntiStatic Kits as well as automatic
feeders can be added and configured.
Navigation: Balance menu > Settings > Devices / Printers

5.3 Balances - XP/XS/XPE/XSE
5.3.1 Configure the Ethernet Interface

1 To call up the system settings, press the key and then the System button. The System window will be
displayed.
2 Tap on Peripherals. The Peripherals window will be displayed.
3 Under LabX choose Ethernet Option > Define. We recommend that you use the default parameters.
Communication mode Server only
Remote Host Address -
Remote Host Port Number -
* Local Server Port Number -
End of Line <CR><LF>
* Port 8014 is proposed by default. This port number must be entered when adding instruments in LabX.
Making global settings
displayed.
2 Click on Option to access the global settings of the Ethernet interface.
3 In coordination with your IT administrator, configure the parameters and save the setting.
4 On the home screen, tap on Online.
Note
See also
5.3.2 Configure the serial interface

displayed.
3 Under LabX choose RS232 built-in > Define. We recommend that you use the default parameters.
4 Exit the settings and click on Online on the home screen.

Default parameters
Baud rate 9600
Bit/Parity 8 / none
Handshake Xon/Xoff
End of line <CR><LF>
Character set Ansi/Win
See also
5.3.3 Operate the balance

5.3.3.1 Switch on the balance and log on

must be provided.
Switching on
1 Briefly press the On/Off button. A short test is executed.
2 Switch to the LabX mode. To do this tap on LabX Online. The
connection to LabX is established.
Log on with displayed user

1 In the Login window tap on Password and enter the
password.
2 Next, select Login.

Select a user and log on to the system
1 In the Login window tap, on the users displayed.
The list of recent logged-in users is displayed only if your
system is configured accordingly.
2 Select a user from the list,
- or -
press on the keyboard symbol and enter a user name
recognized by the system.
3 The Login dialog is displayed again.
4 Click on Password to enter the password for the displayed
user and then select Login.

The home screen displays various information. The LabX icon Home 07. Jan 2019 15:28
Administrator (Predefineduser)
indicates that the balance is in LabX mode. The current user is
also displayed.
The lower screen area contains shortcuts to methods, products
and sample series and two buttons for listing analyses and
tasks. Shortcuts are identified by a small arrow.
A button Status is shown if StatusLight is activated.
Exit Analysis Tasks

− On the home screen, tap Exit. A selection is displayed. Exit
ð Choose Logout to log out the current user so that another
user may log in. Logout
ð Choose Lock Screen so that it cannot be used by other users. Lock Screen
ð Choose Block, enter a reason for why the instrument will be Block
blocked and click OK.
Offline
ð Choose Offline to operate the instrument independently of
LabX.
Unblock balance
1 On the home screen, tap on Exit.
3 Enter a reason for unblocking the instrument and tap OK.
ð The instrument has been unblocked.
See also
2 StatusLight settings } Page 42

5.3.3.3 Select analysis
1 On the home screen, tap on Analysis. The folder containing
the methods, products and sample series is displayed.
2 Click on Methods. A list is displayed containing all methods
with folder structures similar to the list in LabX.
To access one folder higher, tap on C.
Select methods
1 On the Analysis screen, tap on Methods. A list is displayed
containing all methods, with folder structures similar to the
list in LabX.
2 Click on a method to start it.
After a method has been started, it is included in the list of tasks.
To go up to the parent folder, tap on the folder symbol at the top
right.
5.3.3.4 Weighing of titration samples

If a balance is defined to be used for titrators, an additional
button Titration is displayed.
1 Tap Titration on the home screen.
ð All created or running titration tasks are shown. Tap the
button in the upper right corner to define the balance
settings in titration mode (for example the display
readability).
2 Tap the task for which you want to weigh the samples.
3 For running tasks you are requested to weigh the current
sample.
- or -
For created or waiting tasks choose one of the samples from
the list.
Note
• Weighing a titration sample is logged with the time of the event and the balance used. Titration -
Measurement Report will include this information.
See also
2 Titration settings } Page 42

5.3.3.5 Edit tasks
§ The task list can be accessed only if at least one task is
active.
1 On the home screen, tap on Tasks. The system displays a list
of all tasks for this balance.
2 Tap on the task that you want to edit.
The statuses shown in the example are Paused and Waiting.
5.3.4 Add peripheral devices

One single peripheral device can be operated on one balance. In this case, the desired interface is configured in
the settings of the balance itself. It is possible to select either RS232 or Ethernet interface, depending upon
which of these interfaces is already in use for LabX. To operate a peripheral device on a balance, you need an
additional interface option.
displayed.
2 Select Peripherals > LabX Controlled Device > RS232 built-in / Ethernet Option > Define.
3 Set the appropriate parameters.
5.4 Quantos
5.4.1 Configure the interfaces

displayed.
3 Under LabX choose Ethernet Option > Define. We recommend that you use the default parameters.
Communication mode Server only
Remote Host Address -
Remote Host Port Number -
* Local Server Port Number -
End of Line <CR><LF>
* Port 8014 is proposed by default. This port number must be entered when adding instruments in LabX.
Making global settings
displayed.
2 Click on Option to access the global settings of the Ethernet interface.
3 In coordination with your IT administrator, configure the parameters and save the setting.
4 On the home screen, tap on Online.

* No specific entries are recommended, since these settings depend on your IT infrastructure.
Note
See also
5.4.2 Operate Quantos
5.4.2.1 Switch on Quantos and log on

must be provided.
Switching on
1 Briefly press the On/Off button. A short test is executed.
2 Switch to the LabX mode. To do this tap on LabX Online. The
connection to LabX is established.
Log on with displayed user

1 In the Login window tap on Password and enter the
password.
2 Next, select Login.
Select a user and log on to the system

1 In the Login window tap, on the users displayed.
The list of recent logged-in users is displayed only if your
system is configured accordingly.
2 Select a user from the list,
- or -
press on the keyboard symbol and enter a user name
recognized by the system.
3 The Login dialog is displayed again.
4 Click on Password to enter the password for the displayed
user and then select Login.

The home screen displays various information. The LabX icon Home 07. Jan 2019 15:28
Administrator (Predefineduser)
indicates that the balance is in LabX mode. The current user is
also displayed.
The lower screen area contains shortcuts to methods, products
and sample series and two buttons for listing analyses and
tasks. Shortcuts are identified by a small arrow.
A button Status is shown if StatusLight is activated.
Exit Analysis Tasks
Select analyses
− On the home screen, tap on Analysis. The window with
methods, products, sample series and manual operations is
displayed.
You can go to the higher level window with C.
Select method
1 In the Analysis window tap on Methods. A list is displayed
containing all methods, with folder structures similar to the
list in LabX.
2 Click on a method to start it.
After a method has been started, it is included in the list of tasks.
To go to the higher level folder, tap on the folder symbol at the
top right.
Edit tasks
§ The task list can be accessed only if at least one task is
active.
1 On the home screen, tap on Tasks. The system displays a list
of all tasks for this balance.
2 Click on the task that you want to edit.
The statuses shown in the example are Paused and Waiting.

− On the home screen, tap Exit. A selection is displayed. Exit
ð Choose Logout to log out the current user so that another
user may log in. Logout
ð Choose Lock Screen so that it cannot be used by other users. Lock Screen
ð Choose Block, enter a reason for why the instrument will be Block
blocked and click OK.
Offline
ð Choose Offline to operate the instrument independently of
LabX.
Unblock instrument
See also
5.4.2.3 Manual operations

With the help of the manual operations, you may call up various functions of the instrument that are
independent of the immediate execution of an analysis but which for example, may be helpful during the prepa-
ration of the samples.
Navigation: Home > Analysis > Manual Operations
5.4.2.3.1 Dosing head

Lock head The Lock head option locks the dosing head in the holder prior to Lock | Unlock
dosing and thus prevents it from being removed inadvertently.
SafePos The SafePos option moves the dosing head after dosing to a safe Move Down | Move Up
position and prevents it from coming into contact with the vial.
Read information This option reads information from the RFID chip of the dosing Dosing head information
head connected.
Each dosing head has an RFID memory chip (RFID = Radio
Frequency IDentification), which can exchange data with the
instrument. You can remove the dosing head and insert it into
another Quantos and the data is then available there immediately.
Tapper operation The tapping motor may be activated here. Active | Inactive
The tapper improves the material flow if it is inadequate. Tapping
prior to dosing prevents large quantities of powder from falling
down during the dosing process and possibly lead to overdosing.
Intensity [%] Defines the intensity of the tapper prior to dosing. 10 … 100
Duration Defines the duration of tapping prior to dosing. 1 … 30

See also
2 Read / write dosing head } Page 278
5.4.2.3.2 Front door

Front door This specifies whether the front doors are to be opened or closed. Open | Close
5.4.2.3.3 Sample changer

Item Description
Home The sample changer moves to the "Home" position.
Next position The sample changer moves one position forward.
Previous position The sample changer moves one position backward.
Next rack The sample changer moves ahead to the next rack.
Previous rack The sample changer moves behind to the previous rack.
Absolute position (0..30) Absolute position that is approached by the sample changer.
Relative position The number of steps moved by the sample changer.
(-30..30)
Adjust offset After each turn the automatic sample changer moves somewhat behind. In this
manner, it ensures that the vial stands freely on the weighing pan in the dosing
position. The factory setting is adjusted to the optional bottle adapter and ensures
that the vials are positioned exactly in the center when using this setting. It may be
necessary to change this setting if you use new vials with a different diameter.
Follow the instructions on the terminal for adjustment.
5.5 Titration
5.5.1 Configure the network settings

Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > Network settings
Obtain IP address Indicates whether the IP address should be automatically Active | Inactive
automatically obtained over the network.
255.255.255.255
Subnet mask If you want to run the instrument on a local subnetwork, you can 000.000.000.000 …
define the subnet mask here that you want to use to link the 255.255.255.255
subnet's IP address.
Standard gateway This is where you can enter the address of the standard gateway 000.000.000.000 …
for communication between the various networks. 255.255.255.255

See also
2 Configure LabX connection } Page 59

Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > PC settings
§ If the connection is made via a network, observe the setting in Network settings.
Connect to LabX If this parameter is activated, a connection to LabX will be estab- Active | Inactive
at start-up lished on startup.
Connection type Defines how the titrator is connected to the PC, either via the Ethernet | USB
network connection or via the USB connection.
Status Information on the connection status from the instrument to LabX. Connected | Discon-
nected
Port number Defines the port for a network connection of the titrator to LabX. 1024…65535
Only appears for Connection type = Ethernet.
See also
2 Configure the network settings } Page 58
5.5.3 Titrator settings

This section tells you how to set up the titrator in accordance with your requirements so that you can carry out
titration.
Navigation: Home > Setup
Chemicals Titrants
Auxiliary reagents
Calibration standards
Concentration and titer standards
Substances
Hardware Sensors
Pumps
Peripherals
Titration Stands
Auxiliary Instruments
Homogenizer
Liquid Handlers

User settings StatusLight
Screen
Audio signal
Shortcuts
Keyboard
Global settings Analysis and resources behavior
Solvent Control
Values Blank
Auxiliary values
• These settings can be managed on the instrument or on the PC.
Expired resources
Navigation: Home > Setup
Resources for which monitoring was selected in the settings can expire. Tap Expired resources to open an
overview of all expired resources with the type, name and date of expiry of the respective resource.
5.5.3.1 Global settings

Navigation: Home > Setup > Global settings
In Global settings, you can make general settings on the titrator that apply for all users.
Settings Explanation
Analysis and resources Settings for monitoring the expiration dates and life span of resources (determining
behavior the actions of the titrator before, during and after the performance of an analysis).
Settings for the response of the titrator when resources are deleted or when PnP
resources are identified.
Solvent Control Prompts the user to replace the solvent. For information on the process for
replacing the solvent (Manual operation).
See also
2 Global settings - Titration } Page 588
5.5.3.1.1 Analysis and resources behavior

The settings that you make here relate to the sequence of the analysis of samples or series with the aid of
methods.
• You can define the actions of the titrator when started, during an analysis and afterward.
• You can also program the response of the titrator to the deletion of resources or when it identifies PnP
resources.
Navigation: Setup > Global settings > Analysis and resources behavior
Analysis sequence settings
The analysis sequence settings can only be modified if no tasks are currently being performed by the titrator.
You can make the following settings that influence the sequence of an analysis.

Show required When an analysis is started a screen appears displaying all Active | Inactive
resources at start resources required for the analysis and their status (available,
not-available, locked or in use). If an individual entry is selected
from this screen then the user receives additional information
about the respective resource.
However, if Inactive is selected, then the required resources are
still checked when the analysis is started and if necessary, an
appropriate error message is issued.
Show SOP If an SOP (standard operating procedure) has been defined in the Active | Inactive
Title method function then this will be displayed before the
method is started provided that Active has been selected.
Note
• If Show required resources at start and Show SOP parameters were set to Active, all SOPs and subse-
quently all resources for the individual sample series must be confirmed before the analysis is started. In
this way, a Series sequence can be performed after it has been started without any further interruption.
Confirm after a This setting affects analyses that are to be performed on the Active | Inactive
completed rack sample changer and require more beakers than can be accom-
rotation modated on the rack of the sample changer.
If activated, a warning message is issued after a complete
revolution of the sample changer and before a position is
approached on the tray that has already been titrated. This
warning must be acknowledged by the user.
InMotion sample For InMotion T: if the beaker is not detected or the sample data is Active | Inactive
detection auto- not readable (e.g. Smart Tag or barcode) the system automat-
skip ically skips the sample after 10 min without requiring confir-
mation.
For InMotion KF: if the vial is not detected or the vial is higher
than allowed, a message informs the user of the problem, moves
the drift vial to the oven position and goes into standby mode.
The system automatically skips the sample after 10 min without
requiring confirmation.
Show results after If a manual or external titration stand is being used, then the Active | Inactive
analysis results for a sample are automatically displayed after they have
been analyzed and must be acknowledged by the user before the
analysis can be continued. With Auto stand the results are
displayed for a certain period and are not to be confirmed.
The activated parameter is valid for the following functions:
Analysis: the results for a sample are shown
Calibration/Loop: The results of the calibration are shown (slope,
zero point)
Sensor test: The results of the test are shown (slope, zero point,
drift and sensor test OK / not OK)
Check local When selected, the availability of a printer is checked at the Active | Inactive
printer connection beginning of the method.
and wait If not selected and no printer is connected, the method function
Record is skipped. If a printer is connected, the method function
Record is executed even if this parameter is not selected.
Only for USB printer, USB compact printer.

Resources behavior
Use the following parameters to configure how the titrator responds to the deletion of resources and its response
to the automatic identification of PnP resources.
Information when Defines if a confirmation will be requested every time a PnP Active | Inactive
recognizing PnP resource is identified.
resources
Action when exceeding usable life
If it is determined by the titrator that the expiration dates of a resource have been exceeded, then the titrator may
perform various actions.
Warning The user is warned that the resource's usable life has been exceeded and the raw results and
results determined with the respective resource will be labeled accordingly.
Block The user is notified that the usable life of the resource has been exceeded and it is no longer
possible to start the analysis with the affected resource. (Methods that result in renewal of
this resource can however still be started.)
None If you select "none" then the analysis is started without message in spite of the exceeded
usable life. The expiry of the expiration date will, however, be logged.

Sensors The action is executed if the system determines at the start of an None | Warning | Block
analysis that the usable life of a sensor has been exceeded.
Titrants The action is executed if the system determines at the start of an None | Warning | Block
analysis that the expiration date of a titrant has been exceeded.
Titer/conc. stds The action is executed if the system determines at the start of an None | Warning | Block
analysis that the date in Usable life of a titer or a concentration
standard has been exceeded.
Auxiliary values This action is performed if the system determines at the start of an None | Warning | Block
analysis that the usable life of an auxiliary value that is to be
used in the analysis has been exceeded.
Blank values This action is performed if the system determines at the start of an None | Warning | Block
analysis that the usable life of a blank value that is to be used in
the analysis has been exceeded.
Action when exceeding life span
If, at the start of an analysis, it is determined that the life span of a resource to be used for the analysis has
expired, the titrator can set various actions.
Warning The user is warned that the resource life span has been exceeded and the raw results and
Block The user is notified that the life span of the resource has been exceeded and it is no longer
possible to start the analysis with the affected resource.
None The analysis is started in spite of the exceeded life span.

analysis that the life span of a sensor has been exceeded.
analysis that the life span of a titrant has been exceeded.
Action when exceeding shelf life / expiry date
If, at the start of an analysis, it is determined that the date in Shelf life or Expiry date of a resource to be used
for the analysis has expired, the titrator can set various actions.

Warning A message is displayed at the start of the analysis. Users can continue the analysis. Results
and raw data are marked.
Block A message is displayed at the start of the analysis. Users can only start the analysis when
the resource is replaced.
None The analysis is performed without warning. Results and raw data are marked.

analysis that the date in Shelf life of a titrant has been exceeded.
analysis that the date in Expiry date of a titer or a concentration
Pump and stirrer detection
Stirrer detection Defines if the automatic stirrer detection is activated. This may be Active | Inactive
necessary, for example, if you connect additional devices via the
stirrer outputs that are not automatically identified by the titrator.
Pump detection Defines if the automatic pump detection is activated. This may be Active | Inactive
pump outputs that are not automatically identified by the titrator.
See also
2 Analysis and resources behavior } Page 590
2 Monitoring the usable life of a resource } Page 588
2 Monitoring the life span of a resource } Page 589
5.5.3.1.2 Solvent Control

Solvent control allows you to monitor the solvent for volumetric Karl Fischer titrations or the reagent for coulo-
metric Karl Fischer titrations.
On T9 you can run parallel titrations. If you run parallel Karl Fischer titrations you can either run two volumetric
Karl Fischer titrations or one volumetric and one coulometric Karl Fischer titration.
For each instance of solvent control you can configure the parameters listed below. Parameters that are specific
for coulometric or volumetric Karl Fischer titrations are listed in the next chapter.

Instance Shows the selected instance of Solvent control. Solvent Control 1 |
Solvent Control 2
Control type Defines the type of Karl Fischer titration that the solvent control is Solvent (volumetric) |
used for. Reagent (coulometric)
Solvent (volumetric): solvent control is used for a volumetric
Karl Fischer titration.
Reagent (coulometric): solvent control is used for a coulometric
See also
2 Pump } Page 106
Volumetric Karl Fischer titrations

For solvent control to work, you need a Karl Fischer titration stand and pumps that can be used to drain or fill
the titration vessel. You can configure a second instance of solvent control, Solvent Control 2, if you either add
a second KF stand, a second InMotion KF, or a second Stromboli TTL 2.
The following table summarizes the options.

Solvent Control Drain pump Fill pump Titration stand
Solvent Control 1 • Solvent Manager • Solvent Manager • KF stand
• Peristaltic • Peristaltic • Stromboli TTL 1 (only
• Membrane • Membrane T7 and T9)
• InMotion KF/1 (only
T7 and T9)
Solvent Control 2 • Solvent Manager 2 • Solvent Manager 2 • KF stand 2
T7 and T9)
The monitoring parameters available are listed below.
• Monitoring usable life of solvent: The time interval for the use of the solvent.
• Monitoring capacity of solvent: The capacity limit, i.e. a fixed maximum value of the total water volume of
samples titrated (including standby and pre-titration) in the same solvent.
• Monitoring no. of samples: Maximum number of samples to be titrated in the solvent.
You can configure the action of the system when the defined monitoring parameters reach their limits. The
available actions are listed below.
• Enforce replacement when exceeding usable life: The user has to replace the solvent before he can start
the next titration.
• Autom. exchange when exceeding usable life: The solvent manager replaces the solvent or reagent
automatically.
• If neither Enforce replacement when exceeding usable life nor Autom. exchange when exceeding usable
life is activated, the system displays a reminder that the solvent should be exchanged. The user can either
replace the solvent or start a new titration.
Exchange of solvent with a Stromboli oven sample changer
For sample analysis using the Stromboli oven sample changer, the solvent can only be replaced in standby
mode before analysis of the first sample, or at the end of the series, if the titrator returns to standby mode.
Exchange of solvent with an InMotion KF Pro
For sample analysis using an InMotion KF, the solvent can be replaced in standby mode before analysis of the
first sample, at the end of the series if the titrator returns to standby mode, or within a series if the Allow
replacement within InMotion KF Pro series parameter is activated
Parameter description
Navigation: Home > Setup > Global settings > Solvent Control

Drain pump Defines, which pump is used for draining. Available pumps
Fill pump Defines, which pump is used for filling. Available pumps
Titration stand Shows the selected titration stand (e.g. KF stand). -
Monitoring usable Defines if the usable life of the solvent is monitored. Active | Inactive
life of solvent
Last replacement Shows date and time of the last solvent-replacement. -
Performed by Shows the person or instance who performed the last -
replacement.
Usable life Defines the time interval in days for the use of the solvent. 1…104
Only if Monitoring usable life of solvent is activated.
Expiry date Shows the expiry date of the solvent in use. -

Enforce If activated, the user is forced to replace the solvent before he can Active | Inactive
replacement start a new Karl Fischer titration.
when exceeding Only if Monitoring usable life of solvent is activated.
usable life
Autom. exchange The exchange of solvent is performed automatically when Active | Inactive
when exceeding exceeding the specified usable life.
usable life Only if Monitoring usable life of solvent is activated.
Monitoring Defines if the capacity of the solvent is monitored. Active | Inactive
capacity of
solvent
Max. amount of The maximum volume of water in [mg] for a solvent. 0...106
water Only if Monitoring capacity of solvent is activated.
Curr. amount of Shows the current amount of water [mg] in the solvent. -
water
Enforce If activated, the user is forced to replace the solvent before he can
when exceeding Only if Monitoring capacity of solvent is activated.
capacity
when exceeding exceeding the specified capacity of the solvent.
capacity Only if Monitoring capacity of solvent is activated.
Monitoring no. of Defines if the number of samples is monitored. Active | Inactive
samples
Max. no. of Defines the maximum number of samples before replacing the 0...120
samples solvent.
Only if Monitoring no. of samples is activated.
Curr. no. of Shows the current number of samples. -
samples
replacement at start a new Karl Fischer titration.
max. no. of Only if Monitoring no. of samples is activated.
samples
at max. no. of exceeding the specified maximum number of samples.
samples Only if Monitoring no. of samples is activated.
Allow Defines whether the solvent or reagent can be replaced within a Active | Inactive
replacement series or not.
within InMotion
KF Pro series
Stir Enables the stirrer during solvent exchange. Active | Inactive
Drain duration Defines the pumping time for draining the exhausted solvent from 0...1000
the titration vessel.
The pumping time should be as long as possible to ensure that
the tubes are completely free of solvent following draining.
Only if Autom. exchange when exceeding usable life, Autom.
exchange when exceeding capacity or Autom. exchange at
max. no. of samples is activated.
Drain volume Defines the volume that is pumped out of the titration vessel. 0…1000 mL

Fill time Defines the pumping time for filling the titration vessel with new 0...1000
solvent.
Fill volume Defines the volume that is pumped into the titration vessel. 0…1000 mL
Coulometric Karl Fischer titrations

• Stromboli TTL 1 (only
T7 and T9)
T7 and T9)
T7 and T9)
T7 and T9)
• Monitoring usable life of reagent: The time interval for the use of the reagent.
• Monitoring capacity of reagent: The capacity limit, i.e. a fixed maximum value of the total water volume of
samples titrated (including standby and pre-titration) in the same reagent.
• Monitoring no. of samples: Maximum number of samples to be titrated in the reagent.
• Enforce replacement when exceeding usable life: The user has to replace the reagent before he can start
the next titration.
• If Enforce replacement when exceeding usable life is not activated, the system displays a reminder that
the reagent should be exchanged. The user can either replace the reagent or start a new titration.
Exchange of reagent with a Stromboli oven sample changer
For sample analysis using the Stromboli oven sample changer, the reagent can only be replaced in standby
Exchange of reagent with an InMotion KF Pro
For sample analysis using an InMotion KF, the reagent can be replaced in standby mode before analysis of the


Monitoring usable Defines if the usable life of the reagent is monitored. Active | Inactive
life of reagent
Last replacement Shows date and time of the last reagent-replacement. -
Performed by Shows the person or instance who performed the last reagent- -
replacement.
Usable life Defines the time interval in days for the use of the reagent. 1…104
Only if Monitoring usable life of reagent is activated.
Expiry date Shows the expiry date of the reagent in use. -
Enforce If activated, the user is forced to replace the reagent before he can Active | Inactive
when exceeding Only if Monitoring usable life of reagent is activated.
usable life
Monitoring Defines if the capacity of the reagent is monitored. Active | Inactive
capacity of
reagent
Max. amount of Defines the maximum volume of water in [mg] for a reagent. 0...106
water Only if Monitoring capacity of reagent is activated.
Curr. amount of Shows the current amount of water [mg] in the reagent. -
water
Enforce If activated, the user is forced to replace the reagent before he can
when exceeding Only if Monitoring capacity of reagent is activated.
capacity
samples
samples reagent.
samples
samples
within InMotion
KF Pro series
5.5.3.2 Chemicals
In Chemicals, configure and manage the titrant, auxiliary reagents, concentration/titer standard, and other
substances. You can view and print out lists of chemicals that have already been defined. You can also specify
new chemicals or delete created chemicals.
Auxiliary reagents must be assigned to a pump with which they can be added. Titrants (independently of the
type) must each be assigned to a drive.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Chemicals
Titrants Titrants are managed together with burettes and burette drive.

Auxiliary reagent Auxiliary reagents are liquid chemicals that can be used to aid the titration
process.
Calibration standards Calibration standards are used for the calibration of sensors.
Concentration and titer The titer standards required to determine the titer for the titrant used can be stored
standards and managed.
Substances Any chemical substances that are required for performing your analyses can be
managed using name, empirical formula, molecular weight, and equivalent
number.
• These settings are stored on the instrument and in LabX and can be managed on the instrument terminal or
on the PC.
See also
2 Titrants } Page 641
2 Auxiliary reagents } Page 644
2 Calibration standards } Page 644
2 Concentration and titer standards } Page 645
2 Substances } Page 647
5.5.3.2.1 Titrants
Navigation: Home > Setup > Chemicals > Titrants
on the PC.
Titrants are managed together with burettes and burette drive (PnP with chip and traditional burettes without
chips).
For classical burettes, the relevant titrant data is entered manually. For PnP (Plug&Play) burettes, the data is
automatically read from the chip and automatically transferred to the instrument. If the chip is still blank, the
data must be entered in Setup or assigned to a titrant. The data is saved in both the titrator and in the chip.
Monitoring resources is only available on V30S.

Add a titrant
1 In Titrants choose New.
2 To read data from a SmartChemical Tag, tap More and then Read SmartChemical.
3 Place the container over the SmartSample reader.
ð The titrator reads the data.
ð The Parameters window opens.
4 Check the parameter settings and if needed, adjust them.
5 Tap Save.
Type The type of titrant. You can select from the following types of General titration |
titrant: Auxiliary reagent |
General titration: Classical titrants for general titration. Karl Fischer titration |
Auxiliary reagent: If you are adding reagents manually using a Standard Addition
burette.
Karl Fischer titration: Karl Fischer titrant.
Standard Addition: For adding standards using a burette.
Name Specify a descriptive name of your choice. Arbitrary

Concentration The concentration of the titrant, in [mol/L]. 0.00001…100
For Type = General titration.
The non-dimensional concentration of an auxiliary reagent. 0.00001…104
For Type = Auxiliary reagent.
The concentration of the titrant in [mg/L] 0.00001...40'000
For Type = Standard Addition.
Titer The titer for the titrant. 0.00001…10
For Type = General titration, Standard Addition
Reagent type Defines the type of Karl Fischer titrant used in the titration. 1-comp | 2-comp
Nominal conc. Specified concentration of the Karl Fischer titrant in [mg/mL]. 0.1…100
Current conc. Actual concentration of the Karl Fischer titrant in [mg/mL]. 0.1…100
Monitoring usable Specifies whether the usable life of a resource or a value is to be Active | Inactive
life monitored.
Time period Specifies the unit for the time range used for monitoring. Days | Hours
Usable life Defines the time span of the expiry dates either in days or in Days: 1…1000
hours as defined in Time period. Hours: 1…104
Reminder Determines whether the titrator should issue a warning before the Active | Inactive
usable life of a resource or a value elapses.
Only if Monitoring usable life = Active.
Monitoring life Specifies whether the life span of the resource is to be monitored. Active | Inactive
span
Initial operation Here you can enter the date of initial activation of the resource. Date
Life span Defines the life span of the resource in months. 0…100
Shelf life Defines the end of shelf life of the chemical stored in original Date
unopened packaging (bottle) as given by the supplier.
Lot/Batch The lot or batch of the reagent. Enter any designation. Arbitrary
Fill rate The filling rate of the burette in percent. 100% stands for 30…100
maximum filling rate.
Burette volume Select the burette volume in [mL]. 1 | 5 | 10 | 20
Drive Defines the drive on which you will use the burette containing the 1…8 | PnP
titrant. Select the "PnP" entry for available but unused PnP
burettes.
Serial number The serial number of the relevant device type. Arbitrary
Note
• Titrants (independently of the type) must each be assigned to a drive.
• A maximum of 100 titrants can be defined in the instrument.
• In PnP burettes, the serial number is entered automatically. This can, however, be changed.
5.5.3.2.2 Auxiliary reagents

on the PC.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Chemicals > Auxiliary reagents
Auxiliary reagents are liquid chemicals that can be used to aid the titration process. Auxiliary reagents must be
added using a pump and can be used via the method functions Pumps and Rinse.
Adding an auxiliary reagent
− In Auxiliary reagents choose [New].
ð The windows to edit the parameters opens.

Define the following parameters for each auxiliary reagent here:
Pump Use this setting to select a pump. List of available pumps
Note
• Auxiliary reagents must be assigned to a pump with which they can be added.
• A maximum of 50 auxiliary reagents can be defined in the instrument.
5.5.3.2.3 Calibration standards

Calibration standards are used for the calibration of sensors. The instrument contains various calibration
standard lists for the calibration of pH sensors (pH buffer lists), ISE sensors (ISE standard lists) and conduc-
tivity sensors (conductivity standard lists) (see Appendix). In this dialog, you can view and print the predefined
lists stored in the titrator, and create additional user-defined calibration standard lists for pH buffers and ISE and
conductivity standards.
on the PC.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Chemicals > Calibration standards
Add a new user-defined calibration standard lists
1 In Calibration standards, choose [New].
2 Edit the parameters and save the settings.
ð After you have created a calibration standard list, you can add various buffers and standards to this list,
depending on the type selected.
Type Select the corresponding type for the new calibration standard list. pH | Auto pH | ISE |
Conductivity
Unit The unit of measure to be used will depend on the type selected. pH | pM | pX | ppm |
mS/cm | µS/cm
Base list Add the calibration standard lists of various pH buffers by List of available
selecting them from the list. calibration standards
Only for Type = Auto pH.
Ref. temperature Define the reference temperature of the buffer. -20…200
Note
• To delete a user-defined calibration standard list from the titrator, you must first access the parameters in
the list via [Info]. From this dialog, you can delete the calibration standard list from the titrator memory by
selecting [Delete].
• A maximum of 20 user-defined calibration standard lists and 10 auto pH buffer lists can be defined in the
titrator.
Adding a pH Calibration Standard (pH Buffer)
§ After creating a calibration standard list of the type pH, add various pH buffers to it.
1 Add various pH buffers by choosing [New].
2 Enter the respective pH value of the buffer, based on the reference temperature from the calibration standard
list and tap [OK].
ð To reflect the temperature influence of a pH buffer, enter a maximum of 20 value pairs for each
individual buffer composed of the temperature and corresponding pH value.
3 Choose a buffer and add various values by choosing [New].

4 Enter the respective pH value of the buffer, based on the reference temperature from the calibration standard
list.
5 Save the list by tapping [Save].
Adding a pH Calibration Standard (pH buffer) of type Auto pH
§ For a calibration standard list of the type Auto pH, the various pH buffers are detected by the titrator
automatically. In order to ensure positive identification, the pH values of the individual solutions must differ
from each other by at least two units.
1 Add various pH buffers to the calibration standard list by choosing [Add] and selecting them from the
specified list.
ð By doing so, the titrator offers only suitable pH buffers in order to ensure that the selected pH buffers always
differ from each other by at least two pH points.
Note
• The temperature dependency of the individual pH buffers is also taken from the base list and cannot be
edited, only viewed.
Adding an ISE Calibration Standard (ISE Standard)
§ After creating a calibration standard list of the type ISE, you can add various ISE standards to it.
1 Add various ISE standards to it by choosing [New].
2 Enter the corresponding value for the standard in the desired unit of measure, based on the reference
temperature from the calibration standard list and tap [OK].
ð To reflect the temperature influence of an ISE standard, enter a maximum of 20 value pairs for each
individual standard composed of the temperature and corresponding standard value.
Adding a Conductivity Calibration Standard (Conductivity Standard)
§ After creating a calibration standard list of the type Conductivity, add various conductivity standards to it.
1 Add various conductivity standards to it by choosing [New].
2 Enter the conductivity for each standard based on the reference temperature from the calibration standard
list and tap [OK].
ð To reflect the temperature influence of a conductivity standard, enter a maximum of 20 value pairs for
each individual standard composed of the temperature and corresponding conductivity value.
5.5.3.2.4 Concentration and titer standards

Enter and manage the and titer standards required for titer determinations and the Karl Fischer water standards
for the concentration determination of KF titrants.
on the PC.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Chemicals > Concentration and titer standards
Add a standard
1 In Concentration and titer standards, choose New.
2 In Titer standards, choose New.
3 In Concentration standards, choose New.
4 To read data from a SmartChemical Tag, tap Read SmartChemical.

5 Place the container over the SmartSample reader.
ð The titrator reads the data.
ð The Parameters window opens.
7 Tap Save.
Type Defines the type of standard. solid | liquid | KF
Purity The purity of a solid standard, in percent. 0.001…101.000
Only for Type = solid.
Concentration The concentration of a liquid standard, in [mol/L]. 0.00001…100
Only for Type = liquid.
Water content The water content of a Karl Fischer standard. 0.00001…106
Unit Unit for the water content of the Karl Fischer standard. mg/g | mg/mL | % |
ppm | mg/piece
M The molar mass of a solid standard, in [g/mol]. 10-5…103
Density The density of a liquid standard, in [g/mL]. 0.0001…100
Only for Type = liquid or KF.
Equivalent The equivalent number "z" of the standard 1…9
number
Container ID Defines the ID of the container that contains the chemical. 1…30 characters
Article number Defines the article number of the chemical. 1…30 characters
Supplier Defines the name of the company that supplied the chemical. 1…30 characters
life monitored.
Reminder Determines whether the titrator should issue a warning before the Active | Inactive
usable life of a resource or a value elapses.
Only if Monitoring usable life = Active.
Note
• All fields except for Lot/Batch must be filled before the standard can be saved.
• A maximum of 50 titer standards can be defined.
5.5.3.2.5 Substances
Any chemical substances that are required for performing your analyses can be managed using name,
empirical formula, molecular weight, and equivalent number.
on the PC.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Chemicals > Substances
1 In Substances choose New.

Empirical formula Defines the empirical formula of the substance. Arbitrary
Molecular weight Defines the molecular weight of the substance. 0.0001…104
number
Note
A maximum of 100 substances can be defined.
5.5.3.3 Hardware
In Hardware, configure all the hardware components connected to the titrator.
Settings Description
Sensors Configure and manage sensors to be used with the titrator.
Pumps Configure a maximum of 20 pumps for use with the titrator.
Peripherals Peripherals encompasses all input and output devices that belong to the titrator
environment.
Titration Stands Configure the titration stands connected to the titrator.
Auxiliary Instruments Auxiliary instruments can be any instruments that access a titrator's TTL or 24 V
output, stirrer or RS-232 connection and that are to be used in a method.
Homogenizer Lists the available homogenizers according to their control type.
Liquid Handlers Specify the setup parameters, for example to assign the ports to the related
connections.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware
on the PC.
5.5.3.3.1 Sensors
You can configure and manage sensors to be used with the titrator as well as change settings already stored in
the titrator. The settings for an individual sensor can also be output to a printer. In addition, the corresponding
method for sensor calibration can be accessed from here.
• A maximum of 50 sensors can be defined in the device.
• Each sensor is associated with a specific type. Each sensor type can deliver measured values in one or
more units of measure. The following table provides information regarding which units of measure can be
selected for a corresponding sensor type:
Sensor type Default unit of measure Eligible units of measure
1)
mV mV mV
1)
pH pH pH | mV
ISE pM pM / pX | ppm | mV
Phototrode %T %T | A | mV
Polarized mV mV | µA
Temperature °C °C | K | °F
Thermometric °C °C | K | °F
Conductivity µS/cm µS/cm | mS/cm | µS | mS
1)
Plug and Play sensors (PnP) are available for pH or mV measurements.

• Changing the unit of measurement for a sensor may render the calibration parameters and expiration date
parameters meaningless and result in their subsequent omission. This may also mean that the calibration
parameters are recalculated by the titrator (for temperature sensors), or that another set of calibration
parameters is displayed (for ISE sensors).
on the PC.
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Sensors
To create a new sensor in the titrator, proceed as follows:
1 In Sensors choose New.
Plug and Play sensors (PnP)
• If a PnP sensor is connected to the sensor input, this automatically generates an entry in the setup. All infor-
mation (sensor name, type or inputs) is updated by the titrator (if a PnP sensor is not connected, the entry
"PnP" appears for the sensor input ).
• The setup may contain several PnP sensors with identical sensor IDs but with different sensor input infor-
mation. When the analysis starts, a validation is carried out during which the user is prompted to remove a
sensor. For several PnP sensors with the same ID, all entries apart from one are deleted when the sensors
are removed.
The following settings are available for configuring a sensor depending on the sensor type selected:
Sensor type: mV
Unit Defines the unit of measure that is used for the measurement. mV
Sensor input Defines the input the sensor is connected to. List of available inputs
Internal Select this option if the sensor has an internal temperature sensor. Active | Inactive
temperature In this case the system will automatically make an entry in the
sensor sensor setup for the internal temperature sensor.
span
Sensor type: pH
Unit Defines the unit of measure used for the measurement. List of available units
Calibration Determines the calibration type. Linear | Segmented
Displayed if Unit is set to pH.
Zero point The pH value where the sensor reads 0.0 mV. -100…100
Slope (TCalib) The slope of the sensor at the calibration temperature in [mV/pH]. -100…100
Calib. Defines the temperature at which the calibration was performed. -20…200
temperature
life monitored.

span
Note
• The parameters zero point, slope and the corresponding calibration temperature are required to convert the
mV signal of the sensor to the selected unit. These appear only for the unit [pH].
Sensor type: Phototrode
Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will mV | %T | A
depend on the sensor type selected.
Wavelength The Phototrode DP5 features a selection of 5 fixed wavelengths in 520 | 555 | 590 | 620 |
[nm]. 660
Zero point The percentage of transmittance where the sensor reads 0.0 mV. -100 … 100
Slope The slope of the phototrode in [mV/%T]. -100…100
temperature
life monitored.
span
Note
• The parameter Calib. temperature cannot be edited for segmented calibration; in this case, the system
displays an information field.
Sensor type: Polarized
Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will mV | µA
span
Sensor type: Temperature
Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will °C | K | °F
Zero point The adjusted point from the theoretical value for reading 0.0 °C. -20 … 200 [°C]
-4.0 … 392 [°F]
253.2 … 473.2 [K]
life monitored.

span
Sensor type: Conductivity
Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will µS/cm | mS/cm | µS |
depend on the sensor type selected. mS
T compensation For the temperature compensation, the titrator converts the Linear | Non linear |
conductivity to a defined reference temperature. Inactive
Linear: The conductivity is linearly converted to a reference
temperature. The linearity is described by the temperature
coefficient [%/°C].
Non linear: The conductivity is converted to a reference
temperature non-linearly, in accordance with the EN norm 27
888.
Inactive: The conductivity is determined without temperature
compensation.
Only appears for Unit = µS/cm or mS/cm.
T coefficient The temperature coefficient in [%/°C] defines the percentage of 0.001…100
the change in conductivity for linear temperature compensation for
a temperature increase of 1°C.
Appears for T compensation = Linear only.
Ref. temperature The reference temperature in [°C] for the temperature compen- 25.0 | 20.0
sation.
Appears for T compensation = Linear or Non linear only.
Cell constant The cell constant in [1/cm] can be entered here. The cell constant 0…100
is required for conversion of the measured sensor conductance
value [mS | µS] into the conductivity [mS/cm | µS/cm]. The
temperature compensation only affects the conductivity, not the
conductance.
temperature
life monitored.
span
Note
• The temperature compensation is only performed for the units µS/cm and mS/cm (conductivity).
Temperature compensation is not conducted for units of measure µS and mS (conductance).
• The parameter Calib. temperature is required during the calibration to determine the temperature-dependent
conductivity of conductivity standards.
(Only appears for Unit = µS/cm or mS/cm.)

Sensor type: ISE
Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will pM | pX | ppm
Not displayed if Unit is set to mV.
Zero point The pM or pX value where the sensor reads 0.0 mV. -100…100
Slope (TCalib) The slope of the sensor at the calibration temperature in [mV/pX] -100…100
or [mV/pM].
life monitored.
span
Note
• For ISE sensors there are two independent calibration sets, one for the units "pM" or "pX" and one for the
unit "ppm".
• When calibrating an ISE sensor in ppm units, the sensor's slope and zero point are specified in pX or pM
units.
5.5.3.3.2 Pumps
You can configure a maximum of 20 pumps for use with the titrator. Starting from the pump list, you can add
new pumps or select existing ones and change their settings. The list can also be printed and pumps can be
deleted.
You can set up different pumps. For each pump, you need to specify an explicit, user-defined name, the
pumping rate and the connection from which the pump should operate.
• The Karl Fischer Solvent Manager is predefined in Setup when connecting to the back of the instrument, and
cannot be configured individually. All pump ports on the instrument but also on the InMotion autosampler
are available for connection.
• Two Solvent Managers or Air pumps can be defined per instrument.
on the PC.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Pumps
Add a pump
1 In Pumps choose New.
Type Defines the type of pump. Available pump types
Max. pump rate Displays the pump rate in [mL/min] when the pump is operated 0.1…1000
at 100%. This is stated by the manufacturer or determined experi-
mentally.
Pump output The output where you want to operate the pump. Available outputs
• A maximum of 20 pumps can be defined in the titrator.

• For Type = Membrane, the name parameter is predefined and is displayed as an info field.
5.5.3.3.3 Peripherals
These settings encompass all input and output devices that belong to the titrator environment but that are not
essential instruments for processing an analysis (peripherals cannot be accessed in methods).
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Peripherals
on the PC.
Balance
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > Balance
Balances can be connected either directly to the instrument or to LabX. Here you find the description for a direct
connection to the instrument.
Before defining a balance, you need to select the balance type. The titrator supports the following types of
balance:
Balance type Supported balances
Mettler AB | PB | PB-S | AB-S | PB-E | AB-E | College-S | SB | CB | GB | College-B |
HB | AG | PG | PG-S | SG | HG | XP | XS | XA | XPE | XSE | XVE | AX | MX |
UMX | PR | SR | HR | AT | MT | UMT | PM | AM | SM | CM | MS | ML | XPR | XSR
Sartorius Sartorius
Others -
METTLER TOLEDO Balances

These balances support Plug'n'Play and are automatically recognized and configured by the titrator.
For automatic balance recognition, you need to ensure the following:
1. The balance has been started up and is connected to the titrator by a suitable cable,
2. The balance has been set to "Bidirectional" (if necessary, set the "Host" parameter accordingly),
3. The parameters for the RS-232 interface on the balance correspond with those on the titrator.
Note
• As long as the balance is not connected to the titrator, the settings "Baud Rate", "Data Bit", "Stop Bit",
"Parity" and "Handshake" can be entered manually. These are however automatically overwritten with the
values identified by the PnP as soon as the user sets the same transmission parameters at the balance and
the titrator.
Type Defines the type and the brand of a balance as well as the type of Mettler RS-232 | Mettler
connection. USB | Sartorius | Others |
Mettler RS-232: For METTLER TOLEDO balances connected via None
RS-232 port.
Mettler USB: For METTLER TOLEDO balances connected via USB
port.
Sartorius/Others: For other brands of balances connected via an
RS-232 port.
None: No balance is to be connected to the titrator.
Status Indicates whether the balance is connected to the titrator. Installed | Not installed
Connection The serial port to which the device is connected. Possible MB/COM1 | MB/COM2
connections are located on the mainboard, the analog board and
the conductivity board.

Baud rate The baud rate for data transmission via the RS-232 interface. 1200 | 2400 | 4800 |
9600 | 19200
Data bit Defines the number of data bits. 7 | 8
Stop bit Defines the number of stop bits. (2 stop bits can only be selected 1 | 2
if 7 data bits are also selected at the same time.)
Parity Defines the parity protocol. Even | Odd | None
Handshake Data transmission via the RS-232 interface. (Only the handshake None | Xon-Xoff
option Xon-Xoff is available for serial connections on the analog
board AB and conductivity board CB in conjunction with a baud
rate of 9600.)
Barcode reader
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > Barcode reader
When a barcode is imported, the system checks whether the imported barcode is suitable for starting a method.
If so, the analysis starts on the corresponding instrument. On a InMotion sample changer, the position CP+1
will be assigned. The barcode will be ignored if it cannot be recognized.
If an analysis is already running with the same method ID, the sample is added to the end of the current
analysis.
Note
• Only one barcode reader can be defined.
Transfer Transfer barcode to LabX. Active | Inactive
SmartCodes to
LabX
USB-Stick
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > USB-Stick
Commercially available USB sticks from USB Version 1.1 are supported.
You can assign a relevant name to the USB stick.
Printer
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > Printer
Printer
The following printer types are supported by the titrator:
• RS-232 compact printer (RS-P26)
• USB compact printer
The following data is printed using these printers:

Results All except for curves and tables of measured values
Method function Record Overview
Results
Raw results
Resource data
Sample data
Method data

Note
• The USB-B port on the mainboard is exclusively reserved for LabX.
• The available printers are different from the operation in the offline mode.
USB compact printer

Status Indicates whether the selected printer type is installed. Installed
Connection Information on the USB port to which the printer is connected. PnP MB/USB 1/2/Terminal
is displayed if the printer is not connected to the titrator.
Printer type Defines the type of printer or data export used. RS-232 compact
printer | USB compact
printer | LabX printer
RS-232
Name Information on the name of the installed printer is displayed. RS-P26
Baud rate Information on the baud rate for data transmission via the RS-232 2400
interface.
Data bit Information on the number of data bits is displayed. 8
Stop bit Information the number of stop bits is displayed. 1
Parity Information on the parity defined for the report is displayed. No
Handshake Information on data transmission via the RS-232 interface. None
PC settings
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > PC settings
Configure these settings if you have your instrument connected to LabX. Once connected, the settings are read-
only.
Note
• T50/T70/T90 titrators: The PC with LabX installed must always be connected to the USB2 or Ethernet port
on the mainboard.
• T5/T7/T9 titrators: The PC with LabX installed must always be connected to the USB B or Ethernet port on
the mainboard.
• V20/V30/C20/C30/G20 titrators: The PC with LabX installed must always be connected to the PC (USB) or
Ethernet port on the rear panel.
• After the settings have been modified, it may be necessary to restart the instrument.
nected

Network settings
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > Network settings
Configure these settings if you have your instrument connected to LabX. Once connected, the settings are read-
only.
255.255.255.255
Fingerprint reader
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > Fingerprint reader
You can use a fingerprint reader to authenticate users on instruments. In order to do this, the fingerprint reader
must be activated on the instrument.
Activate Activates the fingerprint reader for authenticating users when Active | Inactive
fingerprint reader logging onto the titrator.
Status Indicates whether the fingerprint reader is connected to the titrator. Installed | Not installed
Name The designation of the fingerprint reader. Arbitrary
Connection Information on the USB port to which the fingerprint reader is PnP | USB 1
connected. PnP is displayed if the fingerprint reader is not
connected to the titrator.
LevelSens
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > LevelSens
The level sensor (LevelSens) can be used either to monitor the fill level of titration or solvent vessels or to
prevent the overflow of waste vessels.
The level sensor is connected to the "LevelSens box", which is connected to the titrator via the CAN interface.
The titrator automatically recognizes up to two of these boxes (PnP recognition). These appear in the settings.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > LevelSens
1 In LevelSens, tap on a "LevelSens box".
2 The parameters Level, Waste or Inactive can be defined for the relevant sensor type
Activating level monitoring
• At the start of a method or a manual operation.
The level is checked for all activated and connected sensors, regardless of whether they are used in the
method.
• At the start of each sample (GT).
• After completion of a Karl Fischer analysis (KF).
• Before the start of a KF Stromboli method.

• Before replacing the solvent.
• During the course of the following manual operations: Burette (Rinse, Rinse multiple burettes, Dispense,
Manual titration), Pump, Auxiliary instrument (output 24V), Sample changer (Pump, Rinse).
If the fill level is not reached or exceeded, a message appears with a prompt either to empty or fill the vessel
(depending on the Setup setting: Waste or Level). The analysis is interrupted during this time. After the vessel
has been emptied or filled and the message has been confirmed, the analysis is resumed.
Note
• Only two LevelSens boxes can be entered in the settings. Additional boxes do not generate an additional
entry.
• Entries in the settings can only be deleted if the corresponding LevelSens box is not installed.
• The sensor must be fitted in such a way that when the maximum fill level is reached, the analysis of a
sample, the entire loop of a Stromboli method or a solvent replacement can be performed.
• The fill level is only checked before a sample analysis, at the start of a Stromboli method or before a solvent
replacement.
Name Information on the designation of the LevelSens box. -
In the settings, the first detected box is entered as LevelSens Box
1, the second as LevelSens Box 2.
Chip ID Information on the Chip-ID of the detected LevelSens box. -
Position Information on the position of the LevelSens box connected to the PnP | PnP1 | PnP2
titrator.
Sensor 1 type… Specifies the sensor type to be used. Level | Waste | Inactive
Sensor 4 type
TBox
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > TBox
The following parameters are available for the METTLER TOLEDO TBox: TBox connected. This parameter
specifies whether or not the TBox is connected to the titrator.
5.5.3.3.4 Titration stands

Starting from the titration stand list, you can add new titration stands or select existing ones and modify their
parameters. Furthermore the list can be printed out or individual titration stands can be deleted, whereby one of
each type must be in the list.
on the PC.
Configure the following titration stands that can be connected to the titrator.
• Manual stand
• Auto stand
• External stand
• Rondo/Tower A and Rondo/Tower B
• InMotion T/Tower A and InMotion T/Tower B
• Rondolino TTL
• Stromboli TTL
• KF stand
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Titration Stands
Add a titration stand
1 In Titration Stands tap [New].

2 In Type choose the type of titration stand to be added.
Type Defines the type of the titration stand. Available titration stands
Manual stand
The manual stand is typically used for the METTLER TOLEDO Manual Titration Stands. Before each sample in
the series is analyzed, a popup window requesting confirmation that the respective sample is in place will
appear. The selected titration stand defines the stirrer output used in following method functions requiring a
function Stir.
Name Defines the name of the titration stand. Additional titration stands List of available names
of a kind will have an index number assigned.
Stirrer output Defines the stirrer output. Available stirrer outputs
Auto stand
If you use an auto stand, the popup window that reminds you to add the respective sample does not appear.
Thus an interruption-free analysis sequence can be guaranteed for multiple determinations with an automation
unit. The selected titration stand defines the stirrer output used in following method functions requiring a
function Stir.
External stand
The external stand is typically used for stands not directly attached to the titrator. Before each sample in the
series is analyzed, a popup window requesting confirmation that the resepective sample in place will appear.
The selected titration stand defines the stirrer output used in following method functions requiring a function
Stir.
Type Defines the type of the titration stand. -
Rondolino TTL
The Rondolino sample changer can hold 9 samples to be tested in sequence. The Rondolino connects to the
TTL port on the titrator. The selected titration stand defines the stirrer output used in following method functions
requiring a function Stir.
Connection Indicates the connection type. Available connections

Stromboli TTL
The Stromboli oven sample changer can hold 14 sample vials and one drift vial. The Stromboli connects to the
TTL port on the titrator.
Drift Value of the last drift determination [µg/min]. 0.0…106
Determination Method name of the method used for the determination. Method name
method
Determination Determination type (volumetric, coulometric titration). -
type
Date / Time Date and time of the determination. Date and time
Performed by Name of the user performing the determination. User name
InMotion KF
InMotion KF titration stands are available on the following titrator types:
• T7
• T9
• C30S
• V30S
Base type Indicates the sample changer type. Available types
Chip ID Shows the ID of the identification chip of the sample changer. Unique number
Gas stop valve Indicates whether a gas stop valve is installed on the sample Installed | Not installed
changer.
Air pump KF Indicates whether an air pump is installed on the sample Installed | Not installed
changer.
Heated transfer Indicates whether a heated transfer tube is installed on the sample Installed | Not installed
tube changer.
Rack Indicates the type of the installed rack. KF | PnP
KF: a standard rack is detected.
PnP: no rack is detected.
Rack size Indicates the size of the installed rack. Number of positions on
the rack
Vial height Defines the height of the vials used on the rack. 34…60 mm
method
type

InMotion
The InMotion Autosamplers can hold multiple samples depending on the base unit (Flex, Pro or Max) and the
accompanying sample rack. The InMotion Autosampler connects to USB1 on the titrator. InMotion
Autosamplers and attached towers are PnP devices that are automatically recognized and installed upon
connection to the titrator. If a second InMotion Autosampler is to be attached, a USB expander must be used at
the titrator for the second USB connection. The USB expander ports on the back of the first InMotion
Autosampler attached can also be used for the connection. The first InMotion device attached is labelled
InMotion T/1A and the second attached to the system will be labeled InMotion T/2A in the list. If unattached
and reattached after the initial installation, the titrator will know which InMotion Autosampler is /1 and /2
according their Chip ID. An InMotion Autosampler can also manually be added to the Titration Stand list with
default parameters if needed for method programming.
CoverUp Indicates whether this option is installed. Installed | Not installed
SmartSample Indicates whether a SmartSample reader is installed for the inner Installed | Not installed
inner row.
SmartSample Indicates whether a SmartSample reader for the outer row is Installed | Not installed
outer installed.
Barcode reader Indicates whether this option is installed. Installed | Not installed
Only the outer rack row can be used with the barcode option.
Rack Indicates the type of the installed rack. Standard | Water bath |
Standard: Standard rack. Dual | PnP
Water bath: Rack including a wather bath.
Dual: Rack type with two types of beaker sizes.
PnP: No rack is detected.
the rack
Beaker height Defines the beaker height [mm]. 65…215
For COD kit = Active the value range is different.
Conditioning Defines if a specific condition beaker is used. The last beaker Active | Inactive
beaker position of the rack is the specific conditioning beaker position.
This parameter is stored in the rack.
Rinse beaker Defines if a specific rinse beaker is used. Active | Inactive
Special beaker Defines if specific special beaker are used. Rinse beaker positions Active | Inactive
1…Special are next to the conditioning beaker.
beaker 4 These parameters are stored in the rack.
Note
When fixed beakers are defined, they cannot be used for samples and are reserved for Conditioning, Rinse
and Line rinse method functions only. The fixed beakers reserve the last available positions on the rack, in the
order stated above, with conditioning beaker being last.

COD kit Defines if the system is used with the Aliquot Kit. Active | Inactive
For InMotion Pro with 25 mL rack only.
This parameter is stored on the InMotion.
Aliquot beaker Defines whether the extension on InMotion is installed for an Active | Inactive
aliquot beaker. Aliquoting is not possible with all rack types. For
InMotion Pro only.
Rondo60
The Rondo autosampler can hold 12-60 samples depending on the accompanying sample rack. The Rondo is
connected to either MB1/COM or MB2/COM ports on the titrator. The Rondo60 is automatically named /1 or /2
according to the COM port is attached. The Rondo and attached Towers are PnP devices that are automatically
recognized and installed upon connection to the titrator. A Rondo can also manually be added to the Titration
Stand list with default parameters if needed for method programming.
Rack Indicates the size off the installed rack. 20 | 12 | 15 | 30 | 60
Beaker height Beaker configuration of the installed rack. 90 | 110 | 150 | 210
Tower position Indicates the tower position configuration off Rondo. Left | Right
Conditioning Conditioning beaker setting of the installed rack. Installed | Not installed
beaker
Rinse beaker Indicates the beaker setting of the installed rack. Installed | Not installed
Special beaker 1 Indicates the special beaker setting of the installed rack. Installed | Not installed
CoverUp Defines whether a CoverUp unit is connected to the Rondo and, if Rondo/1 TTL-Out 1 |
so, to which port. Select None if there is no CoverUp unit on your Rondo/1 TTL-Out 2 |
Rondo. Rondo/2 TTL-Out 1 |
Only appears when Rack = 20 has been selected. Rondo/2 TTL-Out 2 |
MB/TTL-Out 1 | MB/TTL-
Out 2 | None
KF stand
Stir.
method
type

5.5.3.3.5 Auxiliary instruments

Auxiliary instruments can be any instruments that access a titrator's TTL or 24 V output, stirrer or RS-232
connection and that are to be used in a method (e.g. valves, dispensers).
An auxiliary instrument is switched on for a predefined period or switched on and then switched off again via
the corresponding command. The instruments are controlled via the method function Auxiliary instrument.
Auxiliary instruments form part of a method, while peripherals are classified as input/output devices (printers,
balances, barcode readers etc.), which do not have direct access to methods.
Starting from the auxiliary instrument list, you can add new auxiliary instruments or select existing ones or
modify their parameters. Furthermore the list can be printed out at a printer or selected auxiliary instruments can
be deleted.
• A maximum of 50 auxiliary instruments can be saved in the titrator.
on the PC.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Auxiliary instrument
Adding an auxiliary instrument
1 In Auxiliary instrument choose [New].
2 In Control type you must first select the manner in which the auxiliary instrument is to be controlled.
ð After you have selected the relevant type, you can determine the parameters.
Control type Select the manner in which the auxiliary instrument is to be Output 24 V | Out TTL
controlled. (Single pin) | Input TTL
(Single pin) | TTL
(Multipin) | Stirrer |
RS-232
Output 24 V/Stirrer (0-18V output)
Output Indicates which port on the titrator you want to use for the MB/PUMP1 | MB/
auxiliary instrument. PUMP2 | AB1/PUMP |
More depending on
configuration
TTL
Output Indicates which port and which pin on the titrator you want to use MB/TTL-Out 1 | MB/TTL-
for the auxiliary instrument. Out 2 | MB/TTL-Out 3 |
Does not appears for Control type = Input TTL (Single pin). MB/TTL-Out 4 | More
depending on configu-
ration
Input The input where the auxiliary instrument should be queried. MB/TTL-In 1 | MB/TTL-In
Only appears for Control type = Input TTL (Single pin). 2

RS-232
9600 | 19200
rate of 9600.)
5.5.3.3.6 Homogenizer
This window lists the available homogenizers according to their control type. The list can be sorted and printed
out.
Depending on the control type, there are two different types of homogenizer.
on the PC.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Homogenizer
1 In Homogenizer choose the required entry.
Homogenizer TTL
Output Defines the output to which the device is connected. MB/TTL-Out 1…MB/TTL-
Out 4 | Rondo/1 TTL-Out
1…Rondo/2 TTL-Out 4 |
(More depending on
configuration)
Homogenizer RS
Status Determines whether or not the titrator is connected to the homog- Installed | Not installed
enizer.
Output Indicates which port on the titrator you want to use. MB/COM1 | MB/COM2 |
AB1/COM | (More
ration)
• For the homogenizer of type PT 1300D (RS interface), the panel for changing or saving the speed during
operation is blocked via the titrator (GLP conformity).
• It is not possible to change an entry while a method that uses a homogenizer is running.
• For the status Installed, balance and sample changer polling is deactivated.
• The parameters for serial connection are for information only and cannot be changed.

5.5.3.3.7 Liquid Handler
If a Liquid Handler is connected, the titrator detects the Liquid Handler automatically (PnP) and the identifi-
cation parameters are transferred to the titrator's setup. Specify the setup parameters, for example to assign the
ports to the related connections. Port 6 is fixed assigned to the waste port. The waste port is required to
discharge residual solutions upon liquid exchange or to remove excessive liquid volumes from the burette.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Liquid Handler

1 In Liquid Handler choose the detected Liquid Handler.
In this dialog you obtain the following parameters:
Name The first connected Liquid Handler is displayed as Liquid Handler Liquid Handler 1 | Liquid
1 and the second one as Liquid Handler 2. Handler 2
For T9 you can change the name only if one Liquid Handler is
available and is not connected.
Chip ID Information on the ID of the Liquid Handler's PnP chip. Arbitrary
Position Information on the position of the Liquid Handler. 1 | 2 | PnP (default
value)
Burette volume Information on the volume [mL] of the Liquid Handler's burette. 50 mL (default)
SNR Burette glass The serial number of the burette glass can be entered. Arbitrary
Port 1…6 Indicates the position of the multiport valve. Active | Inactive
Connection The corresponding ports and the connected components can be Arbitrary
designated. The names can then be selected within the method
function Liquid Handling.
Note
• After the removing of the Liquid Handler, the data (name, chip-ID, burette volume, SNR burette glass,
connections and port assignments) remain at the titrator's setup.
• When a Liquid Handler is connected, the chip-ID will be overwritten.
• When more than one Liquid Handler are connected, the existing Setup entries will be assigned to the
related.
Liquid Handler, according to the connection order.
• The last Liquid Handler in the list cannot be deleted.
5.5.3.3.8 External SmartChemical reader

You can use a SmartChemical reader to read data from reagent bottles tagged accordingly. The following
parameters are available for the SmartChemical reader:
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > External SmartChemical reader
Status Indicates whether the SmartChemical reader is connected to the Installed | Not installed
titrator.
Name The designation of the SmartChemical reader. Arbitrary
Serial number Information on the serial number of the device. Arbitrary
Connection Information on the USB port to which the SmartChemical reader is PnP | USB 1
connected. PnP is displayed if the SmartChemical reader is not

5.5.3.4 User Settings
Navigation: Home > Setup > User settings
These settings contains the options that can be made specifically for each currently logged in user.
You can configure the screen settings (for the touchscreen), the layout of the alphanumeric and numeric
keyboard, the use of beeps, and shortcuts for each user.
• These settings with the exception of Shortcuts can only be managed on the instrument.
5.5.3.4.1 StatusLight
Navigation: Home > Setup > User settings > StatusLight
Terminal Defines whether the StatusLight on the terminal is activated or not. Active | Inactive
StatusLight
Brightness Defines the brightness of the StatusLight of the terminal. Low | Medium | High
Only if Terminal StatusLight is activated.
Instrument Defines whether the StatusLight on the titrator is activated or not. Active | Inactive
StatusLight
Brightness Defines the brightness of the StatusLight of the instrument. Low | Medium | High
Only if Instrument StatusLight is activated.
InMotion T Defines whether the StatusLight on the InMotion is activated or Active | Inactive
StatusLight not.
5.5.3.4.2 Screen
Navigation: Home > Setup > User settings > Screen
Define the following parameters:
Primary color Here various color schemes for the user interface can be selected. Gray | Blue | Green | Red
Brightness Specifies the display brightness in [%]. 50 | 60 | 70 | 80 | 90 |
100 [%]
Button shape Defines whether to display the buttons in the menus with square Rounded | Square
or rounded corners.
Screen saver Here you can define whether the screen saver should be used. Active | Inactive
Wait time Defines how long in [min] the system should wait after the user's 1…1000
last action on the terminal before activating the screen saver.
5.5.3.4.3 Audio signal

Navigation: Home > Setup > User settings > Audio signal
Define the following parameter:
At push of a Enables a beep when tapping on the touch screen. Active | Inactive
button
Sound Activate or deactivate sound signals (e.g. after finishing a Active | Inactive
measurement).
Volume Defines the volume of the sound signals. Low | Medium | High
Only if Sound is activated.
5.5.3.4.4 Shortcuts

• Shortcuts of type Manual Operation can only be created and used directly on instruments.
Navigation: Home > Setup > User settings > Shortcuts
Name Enter a meaningful name that simplifies identification. Method -
names must not start with a number, and must not contain any
blank or special characters.
Type Describes the type of shortcut. Method | Series | Manual
operation
Treat as priority Determines whether the task is to be added to the queue with a Active | Inactive
task high priority.
Immediate start If activated, the method or series starts can be started Active | Inactive
immediately.
Personal Information if the shortcut is personal and is not displayed to Active | Inactive
other users.
5.5.3.4.5 Keyboard
Navigation: Home > Setup > User settings > Keyboards
In this dialog, you can define the layout for the alphanumeric and the numeric input fields. The following
settings are available:
ABC keyboard Determines the layout of the alphanumeric input field. English | French |
German
123 keyboard Defines the organization of the keys for the numeric input field. Calculator | Phone
5.5.3.5 Values
Blanks and auxiliary values can be created, edited and deleted and the list of defined blanks or auxiliary values
can be viewed and printed out. It is also possible to print out the individual values with their parameters.
on the PC.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Values
Blanks Blank values can be used in formulas for calculations.
Auxiliary values You can use auxiliary values in formulas.
5.5.3.5.1 Blanks
Blanks can be used in formulas for calculations. They can either be created manually with the aid of their
various parameters or generated as the result of a method. A resulting blank (or calculated mean value) can
then be assigned to a blank using the method function Blank. The blank will then appear under the assigned
name in the Blank list in Setup.
Add a blank value
Navigation: Setup > Values > Blanks
1 In Blanks choose New.
Define the following parameters to define the blank:

Unit The units in which the blank is specified. Arbitrary
Value Here you can enter a numerical value. -108…108
life monitored.
Note
• A maximum of 100 blanks can be saved in the titrator.
• Blanks cannot be deleted or modified if they are currently in use.
• When a blank is assigned with the "Blank" method function, this is updated in the setup immediately after
completion of the method function.
5.5.3.5.2 Auxiliary values

You can use auxiliary values in formulas. They can either be manually created and edited or can be generated
using a method. A result, a mean derived from several results or a raw result can be assigned to an auxiliary
value by means of the "Auxiliary Value" method function. The auxiliary value then appears under the assigned
name in the auxiliary values list in the Setup.
Add an auxiliary value
Navigation: Setup > Values > Auxiliary values
1 In Auxiliary values choose New.
Define the following parameters to define the auxiliary value:
life monitored.
Note
• A maximum of 100 auxiliary values can be saved in the titrator.
• Auxiliary values cannot be deleted or modified when they are currently in use.
• When an auxiliary value is assigned with the method function Auxiliary value, this is updated in the setup
immediately after completion of the method function.
5.5.4 Operate the instrument
5.5.4.1 Switch on the instrument and log on

must be provided.

− Press the On/Off button briefly to switch the instrument on.
ð This executes a short test and establishes the Connecting to LabX
connection to LabX.
§ The login screen only appears, if user management is
enabled.
The instrument is currently connecting to LabX.
Please wait or click "Cancel" to cancel the connecting process.
Cancel
1 Click on Users if you would like to enter another user Login

registered or recognized on the system. The keyboard
User name
is displayed.
- or - Password
If a fingerprint reader is active and your preferred finger Please enter your user name and password.
is known by the system, place your finger on the

fingerprint reader. You will be logged in immediately.
2 Enter the username. The Login window will be
displayed.
Offline Users Login
3 Click on Password to enter the password for the
displayed user and then select Login.
§ A list of recently logged-in users is displayed (only if your system is configured appropriately).
1 In the Login window tap on Users to select a different User Account
user from the one displayed.
User
2 Select a user from the list. The Login window is
PeterSmith
displayed again.
JoanneMiller
Cancel

• The home screen displays a variety of information. The Home PeterSmith 2019/24/08 10:13 Tasks
LabX icon indicates that the instrument is in LabX Methods

mode.
Series
methods, products, sample series and manual Results
operations. Shortcuts are identified by a small arrow.

Setup
Manual
Exit User data SmartCodes Start

− On the home screen, tap on Exit.
ð A selection is displayed.
ð Choose Logout to log out the current user so that Exit
another user may log in. Exit
Logout
ð Choose Lock Screen so that it cannot be used by other
users. Lock Screen
ð Choose Offline to operate the instrument independently Offline
of LabX.
Back
5.5.4.3 Add shortcuts

• Methods
• Series
• Manual Operations
3 Tap Save.
Note
See also
2 Shortcuts } Page 90
5.5.4.4 Select methods

1 On the home screen, tap Methods.
2 Select a method from the list. Methods Tasks
Methods
ð The Method Editor window opens.
Type ID Name
GT 00018 Calibration
GT m668 EQP (FOS)
Back Show Latest New

3 Tap Start to start the method. m668 Tasks
Method
ð After a method has been started, it is included in the
Line Method function
list of tasks.
Title
See also Sample
2 Edit tasks } Page 95 Titration stand
Stir
Titration (EQP)
Back Delete Method Insert Start
5.5.4.5 Edit tasks

This window is accessed in several different ways:
• When starting a method
• When starting a sample series
• When starting a titer determination
• When controlling a queued task
You can enter the following parameters in the Task Editor dialog, depending on the type of analysis to be
started and the resources used:
Method Name Name of the method being used for the analysis. -
Sample series Name of the sample series being used for the analysis. -
name Only appears if the analysis was started from a sample series.
Queue position Indiactes the position in the task queue. -
Workspace The workspace in which the sample series or analysis is to be A | B
run.
In Workspaces A and B, tasks can be performed in parallel if they
do not use the same resources. Tasks in each workspace will be
performed one after the other.
Number of The number of standards to be analyzed with a method or series. 1…303
standards
Number of Defines the number of samples to be analyzed. The number 1…303
samples depends on the selected titration stand.
Start position Defines the start position of the first sample on the sample 1...max. number of
changer. CP means current position. positions | CP | CP+1 |
CP+2
ID 1 The ID for the first or only sample of an analysis. Arbitrary
Sample size You can enter the sample size here. 0…1000 [g] | [mL]
For fixed entry types, this field only appears as an info field. 0…106 [pcs.]
Weight Weight in [g]. 0…1000
Appears only if Entry type = Weight was selected.
Volume Volume in [mL]. 0…1000
Appears only if Entry type = Volume was selected.
Pieces The number of sample(s). 0…106
Appears only if Entry type = Pieces was selected.
Task comment Enter a comment or remark. Arbitrary
task high priority.
Continuous run After each termination of the analysis (using series or methods) Active | Inactive
the analysis is automatically restarted (this is done until the
process is canceled manually).

Note
• All the parameters that can be edited in the Task Editor dialog or the sample data dialog will overwrite the
settings defined in the method for the same parameters.
• All non-editable parameters that are displayed as an info field are only shown for orientation purposes and
list the settings from the method.
• If the sample size must be entered before the analysis but the user does not do so, the user will be required
to enter it immediately before the start of the analysis.
5.5.4.5.1 Edit samples

If the analysis you want to start is a single determination, you can enter the sample size or sample ID directly
as a parameter in the Task Editor dialog.
In general, the sample data can be entered for each individual sample. In Samples, a list of the individual
samples is displayed.

Number Defines the number of the sample. 1…303
ID 2…ID 3 The name defined here will be used as the default name for the Arbitrary
respective sample on the sample loop.
Only appears subject to the settings made for Number of IDs.
Sample size You can enter the sample size here. 0…1000 [g] | [mL]
For fixed entry types, this field only appears as an info field. 0…106 [pcs.]
Weight per piece The weight in [g] per pirece. 0 … 1000
Appears only if Entry type = Pieces or Fixed pieces was
selected.
Density You can enter the sample's density, in [g/mL], here. 0…100
Does not appear for the Entry type = Pieces and Fixed pieces.
Comment You can enter a brief comment about the series. Arbitrary
Correction factor Any correction factor that can be used in calculations. 0.0001…106
Temperature The temperature in [°C] during the analysis. If temperature -20…200
monitoring is activated in a titration function, the system will
ignore the sample temperature given here.
5.5.4.5.2 Add shortcuts

When you create a shortcut by choosing AddToHome, the following parameters are available:

Description Any name for the shortcut. Arbitrary
Immediate start The method, series, or manual operation can be started Active | Inactive
immediately. This enables you to start the analysis without any
interfering dialog.
Homescreen Defines the position for the shortcut on the homescreen. 1…24
position 1..12: Positions on the first page of the homescreen.
13...24: Positions on the second page of the homescreen.
5.5.4.6 Task list

1 On the home screen tap on Tasks to display the online view of the active task or the task list. Only if
multiple tasks are in queue.

2 If multiple tasks are pending and you tap on the current task in the Task list, you will be taken to the online
view.
- or -
If multiple tasks are pending and you tap on a queued task in the Task list, you will be taken to Tasks.
Status display of Tasks
Blue No task is lined up.
Yellow A task is running right now.
Yellow / blue blinking A task is waiting for confirmation
Status of tasks
Tasks can have various statuses, which you can change.
Status Explanation
Created This task has been created. To start or queue, tap on [Start].
Waiting This task has been assigned to a workspace and is waiting in the queue. This will start
automatically when it reaches the very top of the list.
Running This task is currently in progress.
Suspended This task has been suspended and can be resumed. The instrument is blocked.
5.5.4.7 Control running tasks

1 On the home screen, tap on Tasks.
2 If multiple tasks are queued, select the task that is currently running. Otherwise, ignore this step.
ð The online view is displayed.
3 Select the desired function.
Steps Explanation
Results Displays the results and statistics for the analyzed samples after the analysis.
Axes You can select the units for the horizontal and vertical axes from a list.
Measured values Use this option to display a table of measured values during the analysis.
Samples Choose this option to change sample and series data.
Suspend • Continue: Choose this option to continue the analysis.
• Stop: Choose this option to stop the suspended analysis.
• Create Sample Series: Create a sample series based on the running task.
• Skip sample: The analysis continues with the next sample. The current sample
is marked in the Results as Excluded.
• Skip sample scope: The analysis omits the current sample scope and
continues with the next one. The scope is marked in Results as Excluded.
• Task Info: Displays the task information.
5.5.4.8 Control queued tasks

1 On the home screen, tap on Tasks.
ð A list of tasks is shown.
2 Select a queued task.
ð The Task Editor window with a selection of options will be displayed.

Steps Explanation
Control • Pause: Choose this option to pause the analysis.
• Stop: Choose this option to stop the analysis.
• Move to Top: The analysis is sent to the first position in the queue.
• Move to End: The analysis is sent to the last position in the queue.
Samples Choose this option to edit or add samples.
5.5.4.9 Resetting
The Reset button on the instrument acts as an "EMERGENCY STOP" switch and ends all tasks that are currently
running. If the titrator malfunctions or there is an operating error, you can stop all current tasks by pressing the
reset button. Afterward, for each task, you can decide whether to stop or continue it.
1 Press on the instrument.
ð The Instrument Reset screen appears, listing all tasks. You have the options to continue or to stop the
tasks.
2 Tap on a task in the list to get the options for a single task.
- or -
Tap Continue to continue all tasks.
- or -
Tap Stop all to stop all running tasks.
- or -
Tap Back to go to the home screen.
Releasing the reset state of the instrument
§ The instrument is in reset state, which is indicated on the by the red top bar and the button Reset on the
home screen.
1 Tap Reset on the home screen.
ð The Reset Info screen appears. You have the options to continue or to stop all the tasks.
2 Tap Continue to continue all tasks.
- or -
Tap Back to return to the home screen.

You can use manual operations to access various titrator functions that are not directly connected to the
execution of an analysis, but that might be useful during the sample preparation, for example.
You can call up the following manual operations from here with the relevant titrator components:
Hardware Possible manual operations Possible usages
components
Stirrer Stir Dissolve a solid sample
Sensor Measure Determine the pH or temperature of a solution
Burette Rinse Rinse burette before changing a titrant
Rinse multiple burettes Rinsing several burettes simultaneously
Dispense Dispense during sample preparation
Manual titration Manual titration using a color indicator
Pump Pump Pump auxiliary reagents in and out, fill and empty
sample vessels, replace the solvent (for Karl Fischer
water determination).

Hardware Possible manual operations Possible usages
components
Auxiliary Control Activating a valve
instrument
Sample changer Move to position Prepare an analysis
Move titration head
Rinse
Note
• With the T7/T70 and T9/T90 models, you can perform a maximum of six manual operations simulta-
neously (with one hardware component each), if your power consumption permits.
• With the T7/T70 and T9/T90 you cannot start another manual operation if a manual titration is being
executed.
• The T5/T50 model does not allow parallel execution of multiple manual operations.
• Manual operations can also be executed while an analysis is running, if the hardware components that you
want to operate manually are not going to be used by the analysis and if the power consumption permits.
(T7/T70 and T9/T90 only)
• The resource parameters in all editable fields can be changed temporarily (only for the execution of the
manual operation in question) and can vary from the setup settings. The changes made will not be copied
over to the setup, however.
5.5.4.10.1 Stirrer
To switch a connected stirrer (Rod stirrer or magnetic stirrer) on or off for a definable time interval and at a
definable stirring speed, select the following:
Navigation: Home > Manual > Stirrer
1 Make a selection in Titration stand.
2 Select the desired stirrer in Stirrer output and enter the speed in [%].
3 Enter the stir time in [sec] or select "∞" for an infinite duration.
4 Tap Start to start the stirrer.
ð The stirrer starts. Tap Stop to stop the stirrer at any time (terminating the manual operation).
Titration stand Defines which titration stand is to be used. List of available titration
stands
Stirrer output Defines the stirrer output. List of available outputs
Speed Defines the stirring speed in [%]. 0…100
Stir time The stirring time, in [sec], during which the stirrer should be in 0…104 | ∞
operation. Select "∞" for unlimited stirring time.
Note
• Entries made here will only be applied to the manual operation and will have no effect on the instrument
settings.
5.5.4.10.2 Sensor
To take a measurement using any connected sensor, select the following:
Navigation: Home > Manual > Sensor
1 Make a selection in Sensor.
2 Select the desired stirrer and enter a speed.
3 For polarized, potentiometric and conductivity sensors, specify whether the temperature should be entered
manually or automatically.

4 For manual temperature acquisition, enter the temperature.
- or -
For automatic temperature acquisition, select a connected temperature sensor and the temperature unit to be
used.
5 Enter the duration of the measurement in [sec] or select "∞" for an infinite duration.
6 Select whether to output a record on the printer.
7 To output a record on the printer, use dt [sec] to define the time interval between measurements.
8 Tap Start to start the measurement.
ð The measurement starts. Tap Stop to stop the measurment at any time (terminating the manual operation).
ð During the measurement, the system will display the online curve (measured values in the selected unit
versus time). Use Measured values to display a table of measured values instead of the curve.
Temperature sensor
You can define the following parameters for a manual operation:
Sensor Defines the sensor used to perform the measurement. List of available sensors
Sensor input The input to which you want to connect the sensor. AB1/PT1000 | More
ration
stands
Duration The measurement and stirring time, in [sec]. Select "∞" for 0…104 | ∞
unlimited measurement time.
Record If activated, the measured values will be printed out. Active | Inactive
dt Defines the time interval in [sec] for outputting measured values 1…6000
to the printer.
Only appears if Record = Active was selected.
Note
settings.
Potentiometric Sensor
Potentiometric sensors are potentiometric indicator electrode, such as glass electrodes for pH measurement,
Redox electrode for measuring the redox potential or ion-selective electrodes (ISE) for determining of ion content
in the solution. Below, the editable parameters are listed for both potentiometric sensors and photrodes used for
turbidimetric and color induced titrations:
Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will mV | pH | pM | A | %T
stands

Temperature Defines whether to enter the temperature manually (Active) or via Active | Inactive
manual a temperature sensor (Inactive).
Temperature If the temperature is entered manually, you can enter it here, in -20…200
[°C].
Only appears if Temperature manual = Active was selected.
Temperature Here you can select the required temperature sensor. List of available sensors
sensor Only appears if Temperature manual = Inactive is selected.
Temperature unit The unit of measure for the temperature measurement. °C | K | °F
Only appears if Temperature manual = Inactive was selected.
to the printer.
Note
• The parameters for temperature acquisition or entering the temperature, Temperature manual,
Temperature, Temperature sensor, Sensor input and Temperature unit are omitted for mV sensors and
the phototrode.
settings.
Polarized sensor
Sensor input The input to which you want to connect the sensor. AB1/SENSOR2 | More
ration
Indication Defines how to do the indication. Depending on the unit of Voltametric | Ampero-
measure: [mV] = Voltametric, [µA] = Amperometric. metric
Ipol Ipol is the polarization current for the voltametric indication. 0.0…24.0 µA
Upol Defines the polarization voltage [mV], for an amperometric 0…2000.0
indication.
Only for polarized sensors and Indication = Amperometric.
stands
[°C].

ration
to the printer.
Note
settings.
Conductivity sensor
Sensor input The input to which you want to connect the sensor. CB1/Conductivity | More
ration
Unit Defines the unit of measure to be used for the measurement. µS/cm | mS/cm | µS |
mS
stands
[°C].
ration
to the printer.
Note
settings.

5.5.4.10.3 Burette
In this window, carry out various manual operations with the available burettes.
Rinse an available burette or rinse multiple burettes at the same time, dispense a defined quantity of titrant or
run a manual titration with a selected burette.
Navigation: Home > Manual > Burette
Rinse burette
Navigation: Home > Manual > Burette > Rinse
This operation lets you rinse a burette and its connecting tubes and fill it with fresh titrant, for example if you
want to remove air bubbles from the system.
1 Select the titrant you want to rinse with.
2 Select the drive on which the titrant is installed. (For PnP burettes, the system automatically selects the
appropriate drive.)
3 Enter the number of cycles you want to run.
4 Enter the discharge volume in [%] to define the percentage of the burette's total volume that you want to
discharge during each rinse passage.
5 Enter the filling rate in [%] to define the speed at which you want to refill the burette. (100% is the
maximum rate.)
6 Tap Start to start the procedure.
ð The procedure starts. Tap Stop to stop the procedure at any time.
Note
• Make sure that the dispensing tube is directed into a vessel which is a multiple of the volume of the burette.
• For reagents with a higher viscosity or volatile reagents, we recommend reducing the filling rate to prevent
air from being drawn in and the titrant from outgassing.
You can determine the following parameters:

Titrant Select a titrant from the list of the defined titrants. Titrant list
Drive The drive on which the burette with the selected titrant is installed. 1…8
Cycles Defines the number of rinse cycles to be executed. 1…100
Discharge volume The volume of titrant, in [mL], to be discharged during the rinsing 10…100
process.
Rinse multiple burettes

Navigation: Home > Manual > Burette > Rinse multiple burettes
Several burettes can be rinsed at the same time using this operation. If more than four burettes are rinsed at the
same time, the corresponding drives are actuated sequentially, i.e. the first four burettes are rinsed simulta-
neously first, followed by the next four burettes.
1 Select the corresponding drives to rinse the burettes with titrant.
2 Enter the number of cycles during which rinsing is to take place.

Drive 1…Drive 8 Drives on which the burettes with titrant are installed. Active | Inactive

Note
• The drives can only be seen if they are connected.
• Drives that are equipped with a PnP burette are opened again at the specific fill rate of the titrant, whereas
conventional drives are opened at 100% fill rate.
Dispense
Navigation: Home > Manual > Burette > Dispense
This manual operation lets you manually dispense a defined quantity of titrant.
1 Select the titrant you would like to dispense.
appropriate drive.)
3 Enter the volume to be dispensed in [mL].
maximum rate.)

Volume Defines the volume to be dispensed, in [mL]. 0.001…100
Manual titration
Navigation: Manual > Burette > Manual titration
To perform a manually controlled titration, proceed as follows:
1 Select the titrant you would like to titrate with.
appropriate drive.)
maximum rate.)
4 Select the sensors you would like to use for the measurement from the list of sensors defined in the setup.
5 Select the stirrer output for the stirrer and enter a speed.
6 Specify whether the temperature should be entered manually or automatically.
7 For manual temperature acquisition, enter the temperature.
- or -
For automatic temperature acquisition, select a connected temperature sensor and the temperature unit to be
used.
8 Select whether the results should be given in the form of consumption (of the titrant) or content (in the
sample).
9 Select the measurement unit and the number of decimal places for the results.
10 For results given as content, select the sample's entry type (Volume or Weight) and enter the sample
quantity m, the density d (for entry types Volume or Weight), the molar mass M and the equivalent number
z for the substance to be tested.
11 Specify whether a record should be output to the printer and select which elements should be contained in
that record (Results, Table of measured values and Curve).
12 Tap Start to start the manual titration and move to the online dialog.

13 Tap Dispense once to add a minimum volume of titrant. If you touch and hold Dispense, the system will
continuously add titrant.
ð The dispensing rate will increase as you hold down the button.
ð After you release the button, the system will titrate at the minimum speed again the next time you tap the
button.
14 Tap Exit to end the manual titration.
During the manual titration, the system will display the measured value, the titrant consumption, and a curve
(measured value versus consumption) on the screen. After you finish, a record can automatically be output to
the printer. You can also view the results, measured values and curve on the screen.
Note
• For the results of the manual titration, the system takes as a basis the titrant consumption until the
conclusion of the titration. The EQP is not calculated!

indication.
stands
[°C].
Result Select whether to output the result of the manual titration as the Consumption | Content
amount of titrant consumed or as the content in the sample.
Unit The unit for stating the result in the form of the titrant mL | mmol
consumption.
Only for Result = Consumption.
Unit The unit for stating the result as the sample content. mol/L | mol/kg | g/L | g/
Only for Result = Content. kg | % | ppm

Decimal places Specify the required number of decimal places for the results. 1...4
Entry type The entry type for the sample size. Weight | Volume
Only for Result = Content
Sample size The sample size, in [mL] or in [g], depending on the entry type 0.0001…100
selected.
Only for Result = Content.
Density The density of the sample substance to be determined, in [g/mL]. 0.0001…100
Only for Result = Content.
M [g/mol] Defines the molar mass of the substance [g/mol]. List of concentration/titer
Only in method function GT (general titration). standards and
substances
Record Defines whether to output a record to the printer after the titration. Active | Inactive
Incl. result Here you can specify whether the record should contain all the Active | Inactive
results.
Only appears for Record = Active.
Incl. table of Here you can specify whether the record should contain a table of Active | Inactive
measured values measured values.
Incl. curve Here you can specify whether the record should contain a curve. Active | Inactive
Note
the phototrode.
5.5.4.10.4 Pump
Within Pump, the following actions are available.
• Pump
• Drain
• Fill
• Replace solvent

Action Determines the actions for the pump process. Pump | Drain | Fill |
Replace solvent
For Drain, Fill and Replace solvent you can activate and configure a stirrer and reset the counters that are
used to monitor a solvent or reagent.
The parameters available for each action, stirrers and resetting the counters are described in the following
chapter.
Pump
This manual operation will use a connected pump to pump in any volume of auxiliary reagent or - depending
on the connection of the tubes - to drain it from the titration vessel.
Proceed as follows to start a pump process:
1 Go to Home > Manual > Pump.
2 Set Action to Pump
3 Select the pump and adjust the pump rate.
4 Enter the volume in [mL] to be added.


Auxiliary reagent The auxiliary reagent to be added. List of available
auxiliary reagents
Max. pump rate Displays the pump rate in as defined in the settings. Changing 0.1…1000 mL/min
this value does not change the rate of the pump, only the time
calculated for the addition.
Volume The volume to be dispensed, in [mL]. Select "∞" for unlimited 0…1000 | ∞
pumping.
Pump property Defines the properties for the pump used. 1-way | 1-way, two
rates | 2-way, fine rate
Rate Allows to reduce the pump rate. 10…100 (2-way, fine
Only if the pump supports this and if the pump is connected to the rate) | 50/100 (1-way,
instrument (Pump1 / Pump2) or InMotion. two rates)
Direction Defines the pump direction for a 2-way pump Forward | Reverse
Drain

Drain duration Defines the pumping time for draining a fluid. 0...1000 s | ∞
The duration of the drain operation for the tubes should be as
long as possible to ensure that the tubes are completely free of
liquids following draining.
See also
2 Reset counter } Page 108
2 Stirrer } Page 108
2 Replace solvent } Page 108
Fill

Fill duration Defines the pumping time for filling a titration vessel. 0...1000 s | ∞

See also
Replace solvent
Replace solvent combines draining and filling the titration vessel.
The parameters for draining, filling, resetting the counter and using a stirrer are the same as in the actions
Drain and Fill.
See also
2 Drain } Page 107
2 Fill } Page 107
Reset counter
Resetting the counters for monitoring the solvent or the reagent is available on the following titrator types:
• T5
• T7
• T9
• C30S
• V30S

Reset counter If this parameter is set, all counters are reset when the manual Active | Inactive
operation starts. The fill date for the titration vessel is also reset.
Instance Defines for which instance of solvent control the counters are Available Solvent
reset. Controls
Stirrer

Stirrer A stirrer can be switched on. Active | Inactive
Only for Action = Fill or Drain.
Titration stand The name of the titration stand. List of titration stands
only if stirrer is activated.
Speed Speed in [%]. 0…100
Only if stirrer is activated.
5.5.4.10.5 Auxiliary instrument

Navigation: Home > Manual > Auxiliary instrument
Selectively control here the titrator's inputs and outputs. You can transmit outgoing signals and query incoming
signals. This lets you check whether the communication is functioning between the titrator and a connected
auxiliary instrument (lid handler, dispenser, etc.). In this way, manually triggered auxiliary instrument functions
can be used as support for a titration.
To activate an auxiliary instrument, proceed as follows:
1 In Control type, select the auxiliary instrument to be controlled.

2 Enter the specific communication parameters for the control type.
Note
• For Control type = Stirrer, you may use a second stirrer simultaneously to a stirrer started by the manual
operation Stirrer. (Only for the T7 and T9)
The following parameters are available, depending on the type:

Control type The control type of the auxiliary instrument. Output 24 V | Stirrer |
Out TTL (Single pin) |
Input TTL (Single pin) |
TTL (Multipin) | RS-232
For Control type = Output 24 V, the following parameters are available:

Name Select the auxiliary instrument to be controlled from the list. Auxiliary instrument
More depending on
configuration
Duration The time, in [sec], the auxiliary instrument should be switched 0…104 | ∞
on. Select "∞" for unlimited time.
Note
• An auxiliary instrument controlled by the control type Output 24 V can be switched on and off or operated
for a defined period of time.
For Control type = Out TTL (Single pin) , the following parameters are available:

Output Indicates which port and which pin on the titrator you want to use Rondo/1 TTL-Out 1…
for the auxiliary instrument. Rondo/1 TTL-Out 4 |
MB/TTL-Out 1…MB/TTL-
Out 4 | More depending
on configuration
Mode Determines the number and type of TTL signal issued. Fixed time | Input
Fixed time: The control output is switched on for the defined time controlled | Sequential
period.
Input controlled: A signal received at the control inlet controls the
control outlet. The Auxiliary Instrument function will be terminated
as soon as the signal changes at the control inlet or after a
defined maximum time has expired.
Sequential: The control output runs through a defined sequence.
Input aux. instr. The name of the auxiliary instrument to serve as the signal input List of auxiliary
(control input). instrument
Only appears for Mode = Input controlled.
Only appears for Mode = Input controlled. 2

Max. wait time The maximum waiting time for a signal change. After it expires, 0…104 | ∞
the method will be continued even if no input sequence was
detected.
Output signal Normal: The signal is transmitted without conversion. Normal | Inverted
Inverted: The signal is transmitted in inverted form.
Only if Mode = Input controlled.
Number of pulses The number of impulses in the planned sequence. 0…104
Only if Mode = Sequential.
Pulse duration The duration of a pulse, in [sec]. 0…104
Only appears for Mode = Sequential.
Interval Defines the time span, in [sec], between two impulse starts. 0…106 | 0…104
Note
• If Mode = Input controlled was selected, the system checks the incoming input signal until the maximum
time expires or a signal is received.
For Control type = Input TTL (Single pin), the following parameters are available:

Input signal Indicates whether an rising or a falling input signal should be Rising | Falling
detected.
detected.
Note
• Use the control type Input TTL (Single pin) to wait for a rising or falling input signal. The manual operation
will be ended as soon as an input signal is received or the maximum waiting time is exceeded.
For Control type = Stirrer, the following parameters are available:

More depending on
configuration
Note
• An auxiliary instrument controlled by the control type Stirrer can be switched on and off or operated for a
defined period of time.
For Control type = RS-232, the following parameters are available:


Output sequence Defines the output sequence to be transmitted by the titrator. ASCII ASCII characters
control characters are generated with sequences started by the
backslash character followed by three digits. For example:
\013 for Carriage Return
\010 for line feed.
Wait for response Defines whether the system should wait for a response sequence Active | Inactive
from the device.
Input sequence The response sequence from the external device. Arbitrary
Only if Wait for response = Active was selected.
detected.
Note
• Use the control type RS-232 to transmit any signal and (if you so specify) to wait for a response.
5.5.4.10.6 Sample changer

Navigation: Home > Manual > Sample changer
Use this manual operation to move the titration head of a connected sample changer, approach a specific
position on the rack and use the rinse function on the sample changer.
The available options may vary depending on the type and configuration of sample changer.
To perform the required action for a sample changer, proceed as follows:
1 Make a selection in Sample changer.
2 Select an option in Action.
3 According to the selection, enter the additional values and options.
4 Tap Start to start the action.
ð The action starts. Tap Stop to stop the action at any time.

Sample changer Defines which sample changer is used. Available sample
changers
Action Defines the action to be executed on the sample changer. Move to position | Move
titration head | Rinse
Depending on the action to be executed, the following parameters will be available:
Move to position

Position Defines the position on the rack to which the system should 1…maximum number
move. of positions on the rack
Direction Specifies whether to rotate the rack forward or backward. Forward | Backward

Titration head The vertical position to which the titration head of the sample Sample | Rotate | Rinse |
position changer should be brought. Cond. measure
Cond. measure: This position is 20 mm above the Sample
position and is intended to immerse the conductivity sensor into
the sample but not the pH sensor, preventing electrolyte contami-
nation from the pH sensor.
Only available with InMotion.
Move titration head
Move here the sample changer's titration head to one of possible vertical positions.

Rinse
The sensors, stirrer, tubes, etc. on a sample changer can be rinsed, with or without draining the rinse liquid.

auxiliary reagents
Rinse cycles The number of rinse cycles to be run. 1…100
Vol. per cycle The rinse volume in [mL] per cycle. 0…1000
Drain Defines whether to drain the rinse liquid. Active | Inactive
See also
2 Solvent Control } Page 63
5.6 Density Refractometry



255.255.255.255
See also


nected
See also
5.6.3 Instrument settings
5.6.3.1 Shortcuts

Navigation: Home > Setup > Shortcuts
Type Describes the type of shortcut. Method | Series |
Product | Manual
operation
task high priority.
immediately.
Personal The shortcut is personal and is not displayed to other users. Active | Inactive

must be provided.
connection to LabX.
enabled.
Cancel

User name
is displayed.
- or - Password

displayed.
Offline Users Login

User
PeterSmith
displayed again.
JoanneMiller
Cancel

LabX icon indicates that the instrument is in LabX Methods /

Products
mode.
Series
methods, products, sample series and manual Results
operations. Shortcuts are identified by a small arrow. Adjustment Measure

Setup
• A button Status is shown if StatusLight is activated.
Manual
• A button SmartCodes is shown if the instrument is
used with an InMotion sample changer. Exit User data SmartCodes

Logout
users. Lock Screen
ð Choose Block, enter a reason for why the instrument Block

will be blocked and click OK. Offline
ð Choose Offline to operate the instrument independently
of LabX.
Back
Unblock instrument
See also

• Methods
• Series
• Products
3 Tap Save.
Note
See also

Select methods folder
− On the home screen, tap on Methods or Products.
ð Methods or Products is displayed. Methods / Products Tasks
Methods / Products
Methods Products
Back
Select method
1 Tap on Methods to access the method list.
2 Select a method from the list. Methods Tasks
Methods / Products
ð The Task parameters window opens.
Type ID Name
3 Tap Start to start the method. ADJ M145 Adjustment with Air and Water (D)
ð After a method has been started, it is included in the MS M149 Alcohol Determination (d)
list of tasks. MS M155 Brix Determination (d)
Back Show Latest
5.6.4.5 Task list

1 On the home screen tap on Tasks.
ð If the task list contains only one running task, the online view is displayed. The task list is displayed if
the task list contains multiple tasks or it the task list contains no running task (e.g. one created task).

view.
- or -
Status of tasks
Status Symbol Explanation
Created This task has been created. To start or queue, tap on Start.
Waiting This will start automatically when it reaches the very top of the list.
Suspended This task has been suspended and can be resumed.
Paused This task has been paused and can be resumed - even on a different
instrument, from the point at which it was last saved.

1 On the home screen, tap on .
3 Tap Control and select the desired function.
Action Explanation
Sample control Edit Sample Cycle Data Select a sample that is not currently executed.
• Delete last cycle: Choose this option to delete the
measurements and results of the last sample cycle
of the selected sample.
• Delete all sample measurements: Choose this
option to delete all the measurements and results
End sample scope: Choose this option to end the current sample scope and to
proceed with the method.

Action Explanation
Task Control • Pause: Choose this option to pause the task. A task that has been paused and
can be resumed, even on a different instrument, from the point at which it was
last saved.
• Stop: Choose this option to stop the task. A task has been stopped and cannot
be restarted.
• Suspend: Choose this option to suspend the task. A task that has been
suspended and can be resumed. Not available in the following method
functions: Stir, Measurement, Calibration.
• Skip sample: The task continues with the next sample. The current sample is
marked in the Results as Excluded.
• Skip sample scope: The task omits the current sample scope and continues
with the next one. The scope is marked in Results as Excluded, depending on
the selected method and the settings.
Lock Screen If you choose this option, the instrument is locked for other users.
Home This option brings you back to the home screen.

Steps Explanation
Start To start the selected task.
• Move to Top: The analysis is sent to the first position within the queue.
• Move to End: The analysis is sent to the last position within the queue.

With the help of the manual operations, you may call up various functions of the instrument that are
independent of the immediate execution of an analysis but which for example, may be helpful during the prepa-
ration of the samples.
Navigation: Home > Manual
You can perform the following manual operations with the automation units:
Compatibility of automation units
SPR200 DryPro SC30 SC1 InMotion FillPal DryPal
D4 / D5 / D6 • • • • •
DM40 / DM45 / • • • • •
DM50 / DX40 /
DX45 / DX50
Dry • • • •

SPR200 DryPro SC30 SC1 InMotion FillPal DryPal
D4 / D5 / D6 • • • • •
DM40 / DM45 / • • • • •
DM50 / DX40 /
DX45 / DX50
Rinse • • • • •
Drain •
Pump sample • • • • •
PowerShower •
Stir •
Move to position • •
Move lift •
Define the following parameters to perform a manual operation with an automation unit:
Cell mode Defines the type of cells (Density/Refractometry). D | R | D+R | D+D | R+R
Automation Defines the automation unit for manual operation. List of available
automation units
Action Defines the action to be executed on the automation unit. List of actions
5.6.4.8.1 Dry
The displayed options depend on the selected automation unit.
Navigation: Home > Manual > Dry
Dry mode Fixed duration: Drying is stopped after a defined time. Fixed duration |
Automatic: The oscillation is measured. Drying is stopped, when Automatic
the oscillation value becomes stable.
Dry duration Defines the fixed drying time in [s]. 1…1000
Max. dry duration If the oscillation value has not stabilized by the end of this period 1…10000
[s], drying is stopped.
5.6.4.8.2 Rinse
Navigation: Home > Manual > Rinse
Solvent Definition of the solvent at the connections Rinse 1 and Rinse 2. List of solvents
Rinse duration Defines the fixed rinse time in [s]. 1…10000 | ∞
Rinse position Absolute position: Defines the absolute position that is Absolute position |
approached by the sample changer. Current position | Next
Current position: The beaker at the current position is used. beaker
Next beaker: The sample changer will move to the beaker which
is next to the tower (home position + 1). If no beaker can be
detected, the sample changer moves to the next position (home
position + 2) and repeats until a beaker is detected.

5.6.4.8.3 Drain
Navigation: Home > Manual > Drain
Drain duration Defines the fixed drain duration in [s]. 1…10000 | ∞
5.6.4.8.4 Pump sample

Navigation: Home > Manual > Pump sample
Direction Defines the pumping direction. Waste | Vial | Beaker
Waste: The liquid is pumped through the cell and into the waste
container.
Vial: The liquid is pumped back into the sample vial.
Beaker: The liquid is pumped back into the sample beaker.
Speed High / Medium / Low: The corresponding pump speed can be set High | Medium | Low |
on the instrument under Setup > Hardware > Automation. Maximum | Reduced |
SC1 / SC30 Automatic
• Maximum: Sample feed with maximum pump speed.
• Reduced: Sample feed with speed set at the automation unit.
• Automatic: The pump speed changes after the defined time
period from Reduced to Maximum.
Duration Defines the fixed pumping duration in [s]. 1…10000 | ∞
5.6.4.8.5 PowerShower
Navigation: Home > Manual > PowerShower
Rinse cycles Number of rinse cycles that should be performed. 1…100
Volume per cycle Defines the rinse volume in [mL] per cycle. 10…1000
5.6.4.8.6 Stir
Navigation: Home > Manual > Stir
Speed Defines the speed of the stirrer in percent of the maximum speed. 0…100 %
0 %: The stirrer is off.
100 %: The stirrer moves at maximum speed.
Stir duration Defines the fixed stir time in [s]. 1…10000 | ∞
5.6.4.8.7 Move to position


Navigation: Home > Manual > Move to position
Go to Home: To move the sample rack to the home position. Home | Relative position
Relative position: To move the sample rack a definable number | Absolute position | Next
of steps. vial | Next beaker
Absolute position: To move the sample rack to a defined
position.
Next vial / Next beaker: To move the sample rack to the next vial
or beaker.
Position Defines the absolute position on the sample rack. 1…303 | 1…30
Direction Defines the moving direction of the sample rack. Forward | Backward
5.6.4.8.8 Move lift

Navigation: Home > Manual > Move lift
Lift position Defines the position of the lift to approach. Sample | Rinse | Rotate
5.6.4.9 Display results

Navigation on the instrument: Home > Results
Results and result sets from LabX can be displayed on instruments. For this purpose, search folders with the
relevant settings are created in LabX.
1 On the home screen, tap on Results. The Sample list is displayed.
ð You can select the displayed columns and define the column widths. To do this tap on Select columns.
2 On the Sample list, tap on the desired sample. The dialog Sample results is displayed.
ð You can display the various data.
Results of samples Explanation
Results Displays results, e.g. density.
Sample data Displays sample-specific information, e.g. creation time.
Measurements Displays information on the analysis, e.g. nD or d.
Resource data Displays the resources used, e.g. the method or adjustment set used.
Task results Displays task-specific information including with multiple samples.
See also
2 Edit instrument settings } Page 581
5.7 Thermal Value


255.255.255.255
See also

nected
See also

must be provided.

connection to LabX.
enabled.
Cancel

is displayed. User name
- or -
If a fingerprint reader is active and your preferred finger Password
is known by the system, place your finger on the Please enter your user name and password.
displayed.
Offline Users Login
§ A list of recently logged-in users is displayed (only if
your system is configured appropriately).
2 Select a user from the list. The Login window is User
displayed again. PeterSmith
JoanneMiller
Cancel

• The home screen displays a variety of information. The Home 2019/24/08 10:13 Tasks
LabX icon indicates that the instrument is in LabX
0s
mode. Temperature control 99.0 °C
• You will find all methods, products and sample series
Analysis
under Analysis. Urea
methods, products and sample series. Shortcuts are
identified by a small arrow. Adjustment
Manual
Exit User data

Elements on the Analysis screen
− On the home screen, tap on Analysis.
ð All of the methods, products and sample series stored Analysis
in LabX can be displayed here. Analysis
Methods
Products
Series
Back
Select methods
1 On the Analysis screen, tap on Methods. A list is displayed containing all methods, with folder structures
similar to the list in LabX.
2 Click on a method to start it. Methods
ð After a method has been started, it is included in the Analysis
list of tasks. Type ID Name
Back Show Latest
Edit tasks
1 On the home screen, tap on Task.
ð The system displays a list of all tasks for this instrument.
2 Select the required action from the list. Tasks
3 Click on the task that you want to edit. Tasks
No. Origin Name Status
Back

− On the home screen, tap on Exit. A selection is displayed.
ð Choose Lock Screen so that it cannot be used by other Logout
users.
ð Choose Block, enter a reason for why the instrument Lock Screen
will be blocked and click OK.

Block
of LabX. Offline
Back
Unblock instrument
See also

• Methods
• Series
• Products
3 Tap Save.
Note
• For the instrument type Thermal Values, shortcuts are managed on the PC.
See also
5.7.3.4 Adjust the temperature accuracy

The melting point measurements taken when using reference substances form the basis for an adjustment. A
maximum of six points can be adjusted, whereby you can select from the ten most recently performed
analyses. If, for example, you wish to perform a 3-point adjustment, three analyses that were performed using
reference substances must be available. If an analysis has been used for an adjustment, it is no longer
available for subsequent adjustments. None of the analyses performed before the last successful adjustment
can be used subsequently, regardless of whether or not these were ever used for an adjustment.
The following conditions must be met in order to perform a manual adjustment.

• The required quantity of reference substances must be known to the system and the specific data must be
entered as batches.
• Methods for the melting point according to "Pharmacopeia" or "Thermodynamic" are available for the
relevant reference substances. The respective reference substance must be selected under "Reference
substances".
• The Thermal Value instrument must be connected and logged on to LabX.
• All methods must be performed with the corresponding reference substances, whereby the analyses must
not be interrupted.
Performing a manual adjustment
§ The points listed above must be fulfilled.
1 On the home screen tap on Adjustment. The adjustment parameters are displayed.
2 Click on Adjustment points to select the desired number of adjustment points. The adjustment parameters
are displayed again.
3 Click on Calibration substance 1 and select the desired reference substance from the list.
4 Repeat this step for all additional adjustment points.
5 Click on Calculate.
ð The adjustment is performed.
See also
2 Manage calibration substances } Page 649
2 Melting point/range } Page 493
2 Test melting point/range } Page 487

When the instrument is switched on and no analysis is running, you can perform the following manual tasks:
• Set the furnace temperature
• Switch off the furnace
• Display a live video from inside the furnace
Set the furnace temperature

Navigation: Home > Manual > Set furnace temperature
§ The Switch on button in the lower right-hand corner shows that the temperature control is switched off.
1 Enter the required furnace temperature in the Set temperature field. The current furnace temperature is
displayed under Set temperature.
2 Click on Switch on to approach the set temperature.
ð The furnace temperature approaches the entered value. This is shown by the changing value of the
current furnace temperature under Set temperature and can be followed in the diagram.
The button in the lower right-hand corner now reads Switch off, which indicates that the temperature
control is switched on.
Switch off the furnace
§ The button is enabled only when the furnace is switched on or if you have not defined Furnace power off as
the end behavior in the most recently performed analysis.
− Click Furnace power off.
ð After you have clicked on Furnace power off the measuring cell cools down to room temperature.
View inside of furnace
You can display a video of the inside of the furnace.

− Click Furnace inside view.
ð The current reflected light image is displayed in the top half of this window and the current transmitted
light image is shown in the lower half.
ð If the transmitted light holes are blocked, this can be detected in the lower image. In this case, the holes
must be cleaned.
ð The current furnace temperature is displayed on the right under Actual temperature.
5.8 SevenExcellence

Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Network settings
2 Save the settings and restart the instrument.
Type Information on the type of network connection. Ethernet
Obtain IP address If activated, the device automatically obtains an IP address. Active | Inactive
automatically
IP address Defines the IP address of the instrument. 000.000.000.000 …
Only if Obtain IP address automatically is not activated. 255.255.255.255
Subnet mask Defines the subnet mask to link the subnet's IP address, to run 000.000.000.000 …
the instrument on a local subnetwork. 255.255.255.255
Only if Obtain IP address automatically is not activated.
Standard gateway Defines the address of the standard gateway for communication 000.000.000.000 …
between the various networks. 255.255.255.255
Only if Obtain IP address automatically is not activated.
See also

Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Communication settings

Communication Defines the type of communication. Off | Transfer results to
Transfer results to EasyDirect: To transfer results to EasyDirect EasyDirect | Remote
pH or LabX direct pH. control at start-up |
Remote control at start-up: Activates remote interface via Connect to LabX at start-
Ethernet and USB. up
Connect to LabX at start-up: A connection to LabX will be estab-
lished on startup.
Connection type Defines how the instrument is connected to the PC, either via the Ethernet | USB
Displayed if Communication = Remote control at start-up or
Connect to LabX at start-up is selected.
Port number Defines the port for a network connection of the instrument. 1024…65535
Displayed if Connection type = Ethernet is selected.
See also
5.8.3.1 Screen
You can define the appearance and the properties of the touch screen.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Screen
Brightness Defines the brightness of the display. 50…100%
Screen saver Activates the screen saver. Active | Inactive
Wait time Defines how long in [min] the system should wait after the user's 1…120
last action on the terminal before activating the screen saver.
5.8.3.2 Beep
An acoustic signal can be enabled for different features.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Beep
Push of a button Enables the audio signal when tapping on the touch screen. Active | Inactive
Stability signal Enables the audio signal when a measurement result is stable. Active | Inactive
News Enables the audio signal when events occur that appear under Active | Inactive
News.
5.8.3.3 Shortcuts


Product | Manual
operation
task high priority.
immediately.
5.8.3.4 Sensors
• These settings are stored in LabX and can only be managed on the PC. The list is for informative purposes.
Sensors for pH, redox, ISFET, conductivity, dissolved oxygen, ion and temperature measurement can be
connected to the instrument.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Sensors
5.8.3.5 Automation
The instrument has PnP (Plug & Play) identification. As soon as InMotion autosmapler is connected, the
appropriate information is displayed.
accompanying sample rack. The InMotion Autosampler connects to a USB interface on the instrument. InMotion
autosamplers and attached towers are PnP devices that are automatically recognized and installed upon
Navigation: Home > Setup > Automation
Type Shows the instrument type. -
Base type Indicates the sample changer type. Flex | Pro | Max
Status Information if an InMotion autosampler is installed. Installed | Not installed |
Installed, not supported
Stirrer output Defines the stirrer output on the InMotion where the stirrer is InMotion/Stirrer1 …
connected. InMotion/Stirrer6
PowerShower Specifies the pump connection on the InMotion where the InMotion/Pump1 …
output PowerShower pump is connected. InMotion/Pump6
Rate Specifies the pump rate for the PowerShower pump [mL/min]. 0.1…1000
Drain pump Specifies the pump connection on the InMotion where the drain InMotion/Pump1 …
output pump is connected. InMotion/Pump6
Rate Specifies the pump rate for the drain pump [mL/min]. 0.1…1000
Rack Indicates the type of the installed rack. Standard | Water bath
Standard: Standard rack.
the rack


must be provided.
connection to LabX.
enabled.
Cancel

User name
is displayed.
- or - Password

displayed.
Offline Users Login
User
PeterSmith
displayed again.
JoanneMiller
Cancel

• The home screen displays a variety of information. The Home PeterSmith 2019/24/08 10:13

pH/Ion Cond.
Products
mode.
Series
• If modules are connected they are displayed at the top
of the Home screen. The central area of the display Results
shows shortcuts to methods, products and sample

Setup
series. Shortcuts are identified by a small arrow.
• A button Status is shown if StatusLight is activated. Sensors
Exit User data

Logout
users. Lock Screen

of LabX.
Back
Unblock instrument
See also

• Methods
• Series
• Products
3 Tap Save.
Note
See also

1 On the home screen, tap on Methods or Products.
ð Methods or Products is displayed.
3 Select a method from the list.

4 Tap Start to start the method.
ð After a method has been started, it is included in the list of tasks.
5.8.4.5 Edit tasks

You can edit parameters in the Task Editor window, depending on the type of analysis to be started and the
resources used. Define if the task should be queued with high priority. Define if after each termination of the
analysis (using series or methods) the analysis is automatically restarted.
Note
• If the sample size must be entered before the analysis but the user does not do so, the user will be required
to enter it immediately before the start of the analysis.
5.8.4.6 Task list

view.
- or -
Status of tasks


Action Explanation
can be resumed, even on a different instrument, from the point at which it was
last saved.
be restarted.

Steps Explanation

relevant settings are created in LabX. You can select the displayed columns and define the column widths. To
do this tap on Select columns.
In folders of the type Result sets, you will find one entry for each task processed. In folders of the type Results,
you will find an entry for each sample processed, if a method function Sample Scope was used in a method.
Displayed data
Results Results are the results of the calculation of raw results.
Statistics Statistics data such as mean value and standard deviation is displayed
Task data Displays the global and sample parameters which were used at the time of
execution.
Samples Select a sample from the list to display sample-specific information. You can
select the displayed columns and define the column widths. To do this tap on
Select columns.
• Results: Displays results, e.g. the pH value.
• Sample data: Displays sample-specific information, e.g. creation time.
• Resource data: Displays the data for all resources as used during the
execution of an analysis.
• Raw Data: These data are automatically generated and stored during each
analyses.
• Method Data: Displays the version of the method as used at the time of
execution.
See also

Navigation on the instrument: Home > Manual > Automation
Use this manual operation to move the head of a connected sample changer, approach a specific position on
the rack and use the rinse function on the sample changer.
The available options may vary depending on the type and configuration of sample changer.
To perform the required action for a sample changer, proceed as follows:
1 Make a selection in Automation.
2 Select an option in Action.
3 According to the selection, enter the additional values and options.
4 Tap Start to start the action.
ð The action starts. Tap Stop to stop the action at any time.
Sample Changer Information on the used sample changer. InMotion
Action Defines the action to be performed on the sample changer. Drain | Move lift | Move
to position |
PowerShower | Stir

Drain
Infinite duration Select this option for an unlimited time. Active | Inactive
Drain duration [s] Defines the pumping time [s] for draining the sample beaker. 1…10000
Move to position
Go to Defines how to approach positions on the rack. Absolute position |
Next beaker: To move to the beaker which is next to the tower Relative Position | Next
(current position + 1). If no beaker can be detected, the sample beaker | Home
changer moves to the next position (current position + 2) and
repeats until a beaker is detected.
Home: To move the sample rack to the home position.
Absolute position Defines the absolute position of the rack to be approached. 1…maximum number
of positions on the rack
Direction Defines the direction of movement of the sample rack for the Forward | Backward
selection Relative Position.
Number of steps Defines the relative number of steps to move from the current 1…maximum number
position of the sample rack for the selection Relative Position. of positions on the rack
Move lift
Lift position The vertical position to which the head of the sample changer Sample | Rotate | Rinse |
should be brought. Conductivity
Conductivity measurement: This position is 20 mm above the measurement
sample position and is intended to immerse the conductivity
sensor into the sample but not the pH sensor, preventing
electrolyte contamination from the pH sensor.
PowerShower
Rinse cycles Defines the number of rinse cycles to be performed. 1…100
Volume per cycle Defines the rinse volume [mL] per cycle. 10...1000
Drain Activates draining the sample beaker. Active | Inactive
Stir
Stir duration [s] Defines the stirring time, in [sec]. 0…10000
5.9 UV/VIS


255.255.255.255
See also


nected
See also
5.9.3.1 Quant Calibrations

Based on the Lambert-Beer Law, the concentration of a compound in a solution can be determined quantita-
tively by UV/VIS spectroscopy. To perform that in quantitative measurements, a calibration curve is first
determined by measuring the absorbance of several standard solutions of known concentration. In this way, the
concentration of samples such as, DNA, RNA, proteins, carbohydrates or organic compounds can be
determined.

This menu shows a list of stored calibration curves. The menu Quant calibrations is the entry point to the menu
Calibration overview of a selected calibration associated with a method.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Quant calibrations
§ The method associated with the calibration is not running.
− To open the menu Calibration overview, tap one of the listed calibrations.
The menu Calibration overview is the entry point to the different menus that provide information about the
calibration or allow you to edit the calibration data.
• Calibration curve: Shows the calibration curve.
• Standards: Shows the standards. Standards can be excluded and included.
• Information: Shows information about the calibration curve.
• Monitoring (only on UV7): Parameters for monitoring the calibration can be set.
5.9.3.1.1 Calibration Curve

This menu shows the calibration curve, which standards are excluded or included and whether the calibration
curve has been updated. Excluded standards are displayed on the graph as a red point.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Quant calibrations > Calibration overview > Calibration curve
1
Calibration curve Task Calibration curve Task
Back Back
Calibration curve with all standards Calibration curve with the second standard (1)
excluded
5.9.3.1.2 Standards
This menu shows a list of the standards and their absorbance values. In the menu Standards you can exclude
and include standards from the calibration curve.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Quant calibrations > Calibration overview > Standards
Excluding a standard
1 Tap the standard you want to exclude.
ð The menu Standard data opens.
2 Tap Exclude standard.
ð The menu Standard list opens.
ð The standard is excluded and the calibration curve is updated.
Including a standard
1 Tap the standard you want to include.
ð The menu Standard data opens.
2 Tap Include standard.
ð The menu Standard list opens.
ð The standard is included and the calibration curve is updated.

5.9.3.1.3 Monitoring (UV7 only)
In this menu you can define the parameters for monitoring the calibration.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Quant calibrations > Calibration overview > Monitoring

Monitoring Defines if the calibration is monitored. Active | Inactive
calibration
Interval Defines the time period from the determination date to the expiry 1...10000 days
date.
Displayed if Monitoring calibration is activated.
Expiry date Shows the expiry date calculated based on the determination date -
and the interval.
Reminder Defines if the user is reminded that the calibration will expire Active | Inactive
soon.
Days before Defines the number of days before the reminder informs about the 1...100 days
expiration upcoming expiry date.
The number of days must be smaller than the number of days
defined in Interval.
Displayed if Monitoring calibration and Reminder are activated.
Action when Defines the action of the system when the calibration has expired. Block | Warn
expired Block: The method associated with the calibration cannot be
started.
Warn: A warning appears if the method associated with the
calibration is started.
5.9.3.2 Shortcuts

Product | Manual
operation
task high priority.
immediately.


must be provided.
connection to LabX.
enabled.
Cancel

User name
is displayed.
- or - Password

displayed.
Offline Users Login
User
PeterSmith
displayed again.
JoanneMiller
Cancel


Products
mode.
Series
• A button Status is shown if StatusLight is activated
and the status is not "green". Results
Setup
Manual
Exit User data

Logout
users. Lock Screen

of LabX.
Back
Unblock instrument
See also

• Methods
• Series
3 Tap Save.
Note
See also

1 On the home screen, tap on Methods or Products.
ð Methods or Products is displayed.
3 Select a method from the list.
4 Tap Start to start the method.
ð After a method has been started, it is included in the list of tasks.

5.9.4.5 Edit tasks
You can edit parameters in the Task Editor window, depending on the type of analysis to be started and the
resources used. Define if the task should be queued with high priority. Define if after each termination of the
analysis (using series or methods) the analysis is automatically restarted.
Note
5.9.4.6 Task list

view.
- or -
Blue No running task is lined up.
Status of tasks


Steps Explanation
can be resumed - even on a different instrument, from the point at which it was
last saved.
be restarted.

Steps Explanation

relevant settings are created in LabX. You can select the displayed columns and define the column widths. To
do this tap on Select columns.
In folders of the type Result sets, you will find one entry for each task processed. In folders of the type Results,
you will find an entry for each sample processed, if a method function Sample Scope was used in a method.
Displayed data
Results Results are the results of the calculation of raw results.
Statistics Statistics data such as mean value and standard deviation is displayed
Task data Displays the global and sample parameters which were used at the time of
execution.
Samples Select a sample from the list to display sample-specific information. You can
select the displayed columns and define the column widths. To do this tap on
Select columns.
• Results: Displays results, e.g. the pH value.
• Sample data: Displays sample-specific information, e.g. creation time.
• Resource data: Displays the data for all resources as used during the
execution of an analysis.
• Raw Data: These data are automatically generated and stored during each
analyses.
• Method Data: Displays the version of the method as used at the time of
execution.
See also

Navigation on the instrument: Home > Manual
Note: The UV5Nano does not support CuvetteChanger.
The type of automated-sampling device defines which actions are available.
Action InMotion CuvetteChanger FillPalMini
Pump • – •
Move to position • • –
Rinse • – –
Drain • – –
PowerShower • – –
Move lift • – –
Stir • – –
Common parameters
Automation Defines the automated-sampling device used for the manual Available automated-
operation. sampling devices
Action Defines the action the automated-sampling device performs. Available actions

5.9.4.10.1 Pump
§ The automated-sampling device is installed as described in this document.
2 Tap Start.
ð If an InMotion is used, the lift moves to the sample position.
ð Liquid is pumped into the defined direction.
3 To stop the pump, tap Stop.
Direction Defines the pumping direction. Cuvette | Beaker
Cuvette: The liquid is pumped into the cuvette.
Beaker: The liquid is pumped into the beaker.
Speed Defines the pumping speed. Low | Medium | High
Low: Value defined in Setup > Hardware > Automation > Speed
"Low".
Medium: Value defined in Setup > Hardware > Automation >
Speed "Medium".
High: Value defined in Setup > Hardware > Automation > Speed
"High".
Duration Defines the pumping duration. 1...10000 [s] | ∞ [s]
1...10000 [s]: The pump stops after the defined number of
seconds.
∞ [s]: The pump stops only if you tap Stop or Suspend.
5.9.4.10.2 Move to position

CuvetteChanger
You can move a specific cuvette to the analysis position.
2 Tap Start.
ð The CuvetteChanger moves position 1 to the analysis position.
ð If an absolute position is defined, the CuvetteChanger moves to the defined position to the analysis position.

Go to Defines which position of the CuvetteChanger is moved to the Home | Absolute
analysis position. position
Home: The CuvetteChanger moves position 1 to the analysis
position.
Absolute position: The CuvetteChanger moves to position defined
in Position to the analysis position.
Position Defines the position the sample changer moves to. Available number of
positions
InMotion
The sample changer moves a specific sample vessel to the sample handling position and the lift to a
predefined position.
Go to, Number of steps, Position and Direction define the movement of the rack. Lift position defines the
position of the lift at the end of the action.

2 Tap Start.
ð The lift moves to the rotate position.
ð The rack rotates according to the settings of Go to and Direction.
ð The lift moves to the position defined in Lift position.
3 To stop the movement, tap Stop.
ð The lift stops immediately and the rack stops as soon as the next position is at the sample handling
position.
Go to Defines which position the sample changer rotates to the sample Home | Relative
handling position. position | Absolute
Home: the rack rotates in the directions defined in Direction until position | Next beaker
position 1 is in the sample handling position.
Relative position: the rack rotates as defined by the parameters
Number of steps and Direction.
Absolute position: the rack rotates in the directions defined in
Direction until the position defined in Position is in the sample
handling position.
Next beaker: the rack rotates forward until the next position is in
the sample handling position.
Number of steps Defines how many positions the sample changer rotates past the Available number of
sample handling position. steps
positions
Direction Defines in which direction the rack rotates. Forward | Backward
Forward: the rack rotates clockwise.
Backward: the rack rotates counterclockwise.
Lift position Defines to which position the lift moves. Rinse | Rotate | Sample
Rinse: position for rinsing with a PowerShower
Rotate: position for rotating between samples
Sample: lower end position of the lift
5.9.4.10.3 Rinse
2 Tap Start.
ð The rack rotates the position defined in Rinse position to the sample handling position.
ð The sampling pump moves liquid from the sample vessel through the flow cell to the waste container.
Rinse position Defines which sample vessel contains the liquid used for rinsing. Current position | Next
Current position: the sample vessel that is in the sample beaker | Absolute
handling position contains the rinsing liquid. position
Next beaker: the sample vessel to the left of the sampling
position contains the rinsing liquid.
Absolute position: the sample vessel in the position defined in
Position contains the rinsing liquid..
positions
Rinse duration Defines the pumping time for rinsing. 1…10000 s | ∞

5.9.4.10.4 Drain
2 Tap Start.
ð The lift moves to the rotate position.
ð The sampling pump moves liquid from the sample vessel through the flow cell to the waste container.
Drain duration Defines the pumping time for draining. 1…10000 s | ∞
5.9.4.10.5 PowerShower
The basic concept of the PowerShower manual operation is, that the PowerShower pump moves rinsing liquid
through the PowerShower head into the sample vessel. To prevent overfilling of the sample vessel, the
sampling pump pumps liquid from the sample vessel to the waste bottle. The sampling pump runs with the
maximum flow rate.
During rinsing, the lift moves between the sample position and the rinse position while rinsing liquid is pumped
into the sample vessel. The rinsing is done in cycles. The number of cycles is defined by Rinse cycles.
A cycle ends when the volume defined in Volume per cycle has been pumped into the sample vessel. Between
two cycles, the sampling pump removes the volume defined in Volume per cycle from the sample vessel. The
liquid that is added to the sample vessel during the last cycle is not drained.
2 Tap Start.
ð The lift moves to the rinse position.
ð The rinse cycles are performed.
3 To stop the rinsing, tap Stop.
Rinse cycles Defines the number of cycles for rinsing. If the number of rinse 1…10
cylce is greater than one, the dosed volume in the previous rinse
cylce is drained before the next rinse cycle.
Volume per cycle Defines the volume of rinsing liquid that the PowerShower pump 0…1000 mL
moves to the sample vessel during each cycle.
5.9.4.10.6 Move lift

Lift position Defines to which position the lift moves. Rinse | Rotate | Sample
Rinse: position for rinsing with a PowerShower
Rotate: position for rotating between samples
Sample: lower end position of the lift
5.9.4.10.7 Stir
2 Tap Start.
ð The lift moves to the sample position.
ð The sample is stirred for the duration defined in Stir duration.
3 To stop the stirring, tap Stop.

Speed Defines the pumping speed. Low | Medium | High
Low: Value defined in Setup > Hardware > Automation > Speed
"Low".
Medium: Value defined in Setup > Hardware > Automation >
Speed "Medium".
High: Value defined in Setup > Hardware > Automation > Speed
"High".
Stir duration Duration of stirring. 0…10000 s | ∞ s

6 Workbench for Instruments
Navigation: Toolbar > Show Workbench
A Workbench permits you to setup individually adaptable views for instruments. The components available are
dependent on the type of the instrument used. The settings such as position and the components displayed are
saved for each user and module. Hence, you may specify different views for the various types of devices.
Each component may be arranged at the top, bottom, right or left. You may also dock this in order to fill up the
entire window area. By dragging one component into another, these may be grouped and arranged as tabs.
The default view may be restored whenever required. For this purpose, select Restore Default View in the
toolbar.
Components Balance Quantos Titration Density Refrac- Thermal Values Seven- UV/VIS
tometry Excellence
Shortcuts • • • • • • •
Sample Series • • • • • • •
Methods • • • • • • •
Products • • • • • •
Tasks • • • • • • •
Task Editor • • • • • • •
Results • • • • • •
Statistics • • • • • •
Data Transfer • • • • • •
Task Status • • • • • • •
Control
Measurements • • • •
Measurements • •
chart
Graph • • •
Spectrum •
Calibration •
Kinetics •
Performance •
test
Auxiliary •
instrument
Burette •
Pump •
Sample •
Changer
Result buffer •
Sensor •
SmartSample •
Stirrer •
Table of •
measured
values
1 Open the workbench for the desired instrument.

2 If the workbench view is fixed, you cannot make any changes to the display. Select Unlock View in the
toolbar to revoke the lock.
3 To add components, select Manage Views in the toolbar and choose a desired component from the list. In
order to remove components, click on the Close symbol at the top of the component.
ð The new components may be arranged as desired.
4 Repeat the steps to add other components.
5 If you would like to fix the view of the workbench, select Lock View in the toolbar.
148 Workbench for Instruments LabX

The display within the components is comparable with the display on the instrument for the same registered
user.
6.1 StatusLight - Dialog

1 Select StatusLight in the toolbar to open the dialog box.
ð The lists of the instrument statuses is displayed.
2 Select one of the entries to get a more detailed description.
The color of the StatusLight indicates the current status of an instrument.
StatusLight
Ready Green This status will be indicated if the listed conditions are fulfilled.
• The instrument is in Availability status > Available.
• The serial number of the instrument matches a registered
serial number in LabX.
• A matching instrument license is installed.
• The instrument is compatible with LabX.
• No relevant hardware differences noticed.
Busy Flashing green The instrument is busy.
Interaction Required Orange • User interaction is required before the task can be continued
on the instrument.
• The instrument service has expired.
LabX Workbench for Instruments 149

Interaction Required Flashing orange The instrument needs attention and user interaction is required
before the task can be continued.
Blocked Red • The instrument is blocked by the method function Block
Instrument.
• A service date has expired.
Unavailable Red The instrument is made unavailable by user.
Error Red • An error occurred on the instrument.
• Measurement conditions are not met.
• Unsuccessful calibration.
System error Flashing red An system error occurred on the instrument.
6.2 Task resources - Dialog

When starting a task, a message will appear if any of the needed resources have already been allocated or are
missing. All resources are listed, whereby already allocated or missing resources are marked. The task can be
restarted after correcting actions.
6.3 User interactions - Dialog

The User Interaction component on the Workbench enables the entry of values that are necessary during the
execution of a task. The types supported on the PC are numbers, text and selections. If the workbench for a
device is displayed with an active task and an entry is necessary, this component is automatically displayed in
the foreground. This happens even if the component was previously hidden.
Entries may be made on either the workbench or on the instrument.
6.4 Shortcuts - Workbench

The Shortcuts component on the workbench displays the same list of links as that on the instrument for the
same registered user. You create a new task by executing a shortcut. In order to edit shortcuts, click on and
choose the shortcut to be edited.

Note
• If a user does not have the rights to create tasks, he may run tasks nonetheless via the shortcuts assigned
to him.
See also
6.5 Sample series - Workbench

The Sample Series component on the workbench shows the series that may be executed on the instrument.
• You can create sample series based on methods.
• You can edit existing sample series.
• You can create a task based on the selected sample series.
• You can create and start a task based on the selected sample series.
• You can create shortcuts to allow the quick creation of a task based on a sample series.
See also
2 Manage sample series } Page 177
6.6 Methods - Workbench

The Methods component on the workbench shows the methods that may be executed on the instrument. You
may execute methods or generate shortcuts from them.
• You can create new methods in the method designer.
• You can edit existing methods.
• You can create a task based on the selected method.
• You can create and start a task based on the selected method.
• You can create shortcuts to allow the quick creation of a task based on a method.
See also
2 Manage methods } Page 185

6.7 Products - Workbench
The Products component on the workbench shows only those products that are relevant for this instrument.
• You can create a new product.
• You can edit existing products.
• You can create a task based on the selected product.
• You can create and start a task based on the selected product.
• You can create shortcuts to allow the quick creation of a task based on a product.
Note
• The function Products is not available for the instrument type Titration.
See also
2 Manage products } Page 181
6.8 Tasks - Workbench

The Tasks component on the workbench shows the tasks for the same user logged on.
Control a task
§ A Tasks component is displayed on the workbench in which all user-defined tasks are displayed.
1 Select the desired task in the list.
2 Depending upon the current status of a task, you can modify it using the buttons using the available
commands for the relevant status.
State
Status Explanation
Created This task has been created.
Waiting This task has been assigned to a workspace and is waiting in the queue. The precon-
ditions from this method have been fulfilled.
Running This task is currently in progress. The dynamic preconditions are being fulfilled by the
instrument and workspace.
Paused This task has been paused and can be resumed - even on a different instrument, from
the point at which it was last saved.

Status Explanation
Stopped This task has been stopped and cannot be restarted.
Completed This task has finished successfully.
Edit queued tasks

§ A Tasks component is displayed on the workbench in which all user-defined tasks are displayed.
1 Double-click on the desired task in the list. An Editor window is opened.
2 Change the task by editing the samples.
See also
2 Task editor - Workbench } Page 153
2 Manage tasks } Page 173
6.9 Task editor - Workbench

On the Task Editor component on the workbench you may add or edit samples for the task being executed
currently. If active sample series are edited, the product assignment can also be edited.
Task Editor
Task Properties
Task name Empty Origin Method
Status Running Workspace
Sample Scope
Number of Samples
Up Down Add Remove
Sample ID 1 Sample ID 2 Sample ID 3 Sample ID 4 Sample ID 5 Sample ID 6
• Completed samples and used parameters are displayed in grey. Completed samples are no longer editable.
• Running samples are displayed in orange.
• Parameters that are defined by products are displayed in light red and cannot be edited.
Edit active tasks

− Change the active task by editing the samples, as a result of which every change is applied immediately.
Note
• A task that has not been assigned to a role or a user is displayed to all users.
• Tasks that are not assigned to any instrument are displayed on all instruments.
• For the titrator model T90/T9, two workspaces A and B are displayed.
See also
2 Auto ID generation } Page 176
6.10 Results - Workbench

The Results component on the workbench shows the results for the task being executed currently.

1 Select a result in the list view.
2 To display detailed results in an editor window, click on .
3 To edit the comment of a result, click on .
Note
6.11 Statistics - Workbench

The Statistics component on the workbench shows the same data as the Results component but in a diagram
format. The samples may be displayed either in the order of the samples or measurements.
1 In Result selection select the result to be shown in the graph pane.
2 In the graph pane, select or clear options and select curve displays.
Note
6.12 Data transfer - Workbench

The Transfer Data component on the workbench enables the transfer of data from an active task to another
open application on a client PC. The used method must contain a method function Transfer Data.
§ A target application must be open on the system on which the LabX client is running. This is typically a
spreadsheet application.
§ The window for the target application must not be minimized.
1 Open a Transfer Data component on the workbench.

2 Enable the function and choose the target application
or the option Drop at cursor location.
ð If Drop at cursor location is selected, switch to the
required application and click in the desired cell where
the data transfer should start, as soon as the method is
started.
Note
• You can insert a method function Delay in the method in order to have enough time to switch to the
required application if Drop at cursor location is selected.
See also
2 Transfer data } Page 234
6.13 Task status control - Workbench

Depending upon the current status of a task, you can modify it using the available commands for the relevant
status.
Task Status Control
M0034 Sample IDs Scope
Available button commands

Button Balance Quantos Titration Density Refrac- Thermal Values Seven- UV/VIS
command tometry Excellence
Continue • • • •
Pause • • • • • •
Suspend • • • •
Stop • • • • • • •
End sample • • • • • •
scope
(Active sample
scope)
Start • • • • • • •
(Last performed
task)
Create Sample • • • • • • •
Series
(For active
task)
Blank determi- •
nation (KF)
Concentration •
determination
(KF)
Drift determi- •
nation (KF)
End series (KF) •
Start sample •
(KF)
Stop Analysis •
(KF)
Skip sample •
(Current
sample)

Button Balance Quantos Titration Density Refrac- Thermal Values Seven- UV/VIS
command tometry Excellence
Skip sample •
scope
(Current sample
scope)
6.14 Measurements - Workbench

The Measurements component on the workbench shows the same data as the Measurements chart
component but in a table format. Enter the search criteria in the Filter field so that the results are filtered by
name. By default, all results are displayed.
6.15 Measurements chart - Workbench

The Measurements chart component on the workbench shows the same data as the Measurements
component but in a diagram format. The samples may be displayed either in the order of the samples or
measurements. Enter the search criteria in the Filter field so that the results are filtered by name. By default, all
results are displayed.
See also
2 Graphics window options } Page 18
6.16 Graph - Workbench

Displays the raw data sent by the instrument as a chart. The window contains various options to adjust the
representation of the data. Grid lines can be configured (minor/major in both directions on/off).
Graph
Select results
Grid lines on x axis
Grid lines on y axis
Show all grid lines

Hide all grid lines
Series markers
Graph functions
• To export the graph, click and select an option from the menu (Image or CSV file).
• To pan, right-click and move the mouse pointer in any direction.
• To zoom, click and drag a selection or use the mouse-wheel.
• To revert, double click in the chart window or use the mouse-wheel.
Note
See also

6.17 Standard table - Dialog
When a method function of type Calibration within a method of type Quant or Bio Quant is executed, this
dialog window will appear. The standards that will be used for the calibration in a measurement first have to be
defined. They are either predefined in the method or can be edited in this dialog window. Click Continue to
accept the settings and to proceed.
Number of Defines the number of standards to be used. 1…100
standards
Standard ID Define an arbitrary ID for the standard. Any
Concentration Enter the concentration of the standard. The unit can be defined in 0…100000
the method function Standards.
Standard You can add an arbitrary comment for this standard. Any
comment
6.18 Spectrum - Workbench

The measured spectrum/spectra and the associated value table is shown. If for the selected task multiple
spectra are available, you can select from the list of available spectra. Default units Absorbance [A] and Trans-
mittance [%]) of the measured spectrum are shown, as defined within the method function.
You can choose the unit (A or %T) at the top left of the graph. Grid lines can be configured (minor/major in
both directions on/off).
Graph functions
See also
6.19 Calibration - Workbench

After measuring the standards using a method function of type Calibration, this component displays the
summary of the results as defined in the measurement parameters which includes the coefficient of determi-
nation. You can include or exclude standards in the column Status.
If for the selected task multiple calibrations are available, you can select from the list of available calibrations.
Grid lines can be configured (minor/major in both directions on/off).
Graph functions
See also

6.20 Kinetics - Workbench
A graphical representation of the kinetics curve and the associated value table is shown. If for the selected task
multiple kinetics are available, you can select from the list of available kinetics. If for a kinetic measurement
multiple wavelengths are measured, you can select the wavelengths to be shown in the graphical represen-
tation (overlay).
For each selected wavelength (curve) the following results are shown if available as an additional information
within the "Filter settings table".
• Wavelength
• k and corresponding R2
• vInit and corresponding R2
Graph functions
See also
6.21 Performance tests - Workbench

This tab displays the results of the performance test (passed/failed), the estimated duration of the individual
tests, and the respective start time for all tests from the selected performance test sequence. If multiple
performance test method functions are executed within the task, you can choose which results you want to view
in the selection list.
See also
6.22 Sample changer - Workbench

Use this manual operation to move the titration head of a connected sample changer, approach a specific
position on the rack and use the rinse function on the sample changer.
1 Define all parameters for the manual operation.
2 Click to start the procedure.
ð The procedure starts. Click to stop the procedure at any time.

Sample changer Defines which sample changer is used. Available sample
changers
Action Defines the action to be executed on the sample changer. Move to position | Move
titration head | Rinse

Move to position

Direction Specifies whether to rotate the rack forward or backward. Forward | Backward
Move titration head
Move here the sample changer's titration head to one of possible vertical positions.

Rinse
The sensors, stirrer, tubes, etc... on a sample changer can be rinsed, with or without draining the rinse liquid.

auxiliary reagents
Drain Defines whether to drain the rinse liquid. Active | Inactive
6.23 Start Auto SmartCodes - Dialog

The Start Auto SmartCodes dialog box of the titrator workbench enables the entry of values that are necessary
to start an titration analysis. SmartCodes are read from RFID readers or barcode scanners in connection with
InMotion sample changers.

Start the SmartCodes mode by clicking Start Auto SmartCodes in the toolbar of the workbench. A SmartCodes
button is also shown on the terminal of the titrator. Each sample is scanned (RFID or barcode) and the method
is automatically started.
Note
• On the titrator, a button SmartCodes is automatically displayed on the home screen, if an InMotion
autosampler is detected with a RFID or barcode reader attached.
• Depending on the settings, the data from Smart Tags will be deleted after reading. See also: [Titration
settings } Page 42].
• You can use the method function Calculation to write data to Smart Tags.
• For the T90/T9 titrator there are two buttons Start Auto SmartCodes on the toolbar. One for each workspace
A, one for workspace B.
Example
Series Samples
S1 Adjacent samples using the same method are automatically included in the same
series.
S2 If a new method is scanned, the running series is ended and a new one started.
S3 To start a new series using the same method, leave an empty position on the
autosampler.
End If the autosampler does not detect a sample, it scans a total of 5 positions before
ending the series and stopping the task.
The setting Confirm after a completed rack rotation has to be considered as well.
See also: [Analysis and resources behavior } Page 60]
Start Auto SmartCodes
− Click Start Auto SmartCodes to start the procedure.
ð The dialog box to enter the required parameters for starting the automation process appears.
Sample Changer Select a sample changer for the automation. List of available sample
changers
Workspace Information of the used workspace. A|B
Start position Defines the start position of the first sample on the sample CP | CP+1 | CP+2 |
changer. CP means current position. 1...303
Reader type Here, you can select the of reader to be used, barcode or RFID. Barcode | SmartSample

Park position Defines the position the sample changer will approach after the List of available beakers
analysis is completed. Immersing the sensor into a solution or vials
prevents dehydration of the sensor membrane.
See also
2 Edit SmartCodes } Page 693
6.24 Auxiliary instruments - Workbench

Selectively control here the titrator's inputs and outputs. You can transmit outgoing signals and query incoming
signals. This lets you check whether the communication is functioning between the titrator and a connected
auxiliary instrument (lid handler, dispenser, etc.). In this way, manually triggered auxiliary instrument functions
can be used as support for a titration.

For Control type = Output 24 V, the following parameters are available:

More depending on
configuration
Duration The time, in [sec], the auxiliary instrument should be switched 0…104
on.
Note
• An auxiliary instrument controlled by the control type Output 24 V can be switched on and off or operated
for a defined period of time.
For Control type = Out TTL (Single pin), the following parameters are available:

More depending on
configuration

Mode Determines the number and type of TTL signal issued. Fixed time | Input
Fixed time: The control output is switched on for the defined time controlled | Sequential
period.
control outlet. The Auxiliary Instrument function will be terminated
as soon as the signal changes at the control inlet or after a
defined maximum time has expired.
on.
Input aux. instr. The name of the auxiliary instrument to serve as the signal input List of auxiliary
(control input). instrument
detected.
Pulse duration The duration of a pulse, in [sec]. 0…104
Only appears for Mode = Sequential.
Note
• If Mode = Input controlled was selected, the system checks the incoming input signal until the maximum
time expires or a signal is received.
For Control type = Input TTL (Single pin), the following parameters are available:

detected.
detected.
Note
• Use the control type Input TTL (Single pin) to wait for a rising or falling input signal. The manual operation
will be ended as soon as an input signal is received or the maximum waiting time is exceeded.
For Control type = Stirrer, the following parameters are available:

More depending on
configuration
on.
Note
• An auxiliary instrument controlled by the control type Stirrer can be switched on and off or operated for a
defined period of time.
For Control type = RS-232, the following parameters are available:

Output sequence Defines the output sequence to be transmitted by the titrator. ASCII ASCII characters
control characters are generated with sequences started by the
backslash character followed by three digits. For example:
\010 for line feed.
from the device.
detected.
Note
• Use the control type RS-232 to transmit any signal and (if you so specify) to wait for a response.
6.25 Burette - Workbench

In this window, carry out various manual operations with the available burettes. Rinse an available burette or
rinse multiple burettes at the same time, dispense a defined quantity of titrant with a selected burette.
Rinse burette


Discharge volume The volume of titrant, in [mL], to be discharged during the rinsing 10…100
process.
Rinsing multiple burettes
Several burettes can be rinsed at the same time using this operation. If more than four burettes are rinsed at the
same time, the corresponding drives are actuated sequentially, i.e. the first four burettes are rinsed simulta-
neously first, followed by the next four burettes.

Drive 1…Drive 8 Drives on which the burettes with titrant are installed. Active | Inactive
Note
• The drives can only be seen if they are connected.
• Drives that are equipped with a PnP burette are opened again at the specific fill rate of the titrant, whereas
conventional drives are opened at 100% fill rate.
Dispense
This manual operation lets you manually dispense a defined quantity of titrant.

Volume Defines the volume to be dispensed, in [mL]. 0.001…100
6.26 Pump - Workbench

This manual operation will use a connected pump to pump in any volume of auxiliary reagent or - depending
on the connection of the tubes - to drain it from the titration vessel.
Within Pump, the following actions are available.
• Pump
• Drain
• Fill
• Replace solvent

Action Determines the actions for the pump process. Pump | Drain | Fill |
Replace solvent
For Drain, Fill and Replace solvent you can activate and configure a stirrer and reset the counters that are
used to monitor a solvent or reagent.
The parameters available for each action, stirrers and resetting the counters are described in the following
chapter.

6.26.1 Pump

auxiliary reagents
Volume The volume to be dispensed, in [mL]. Select "∞" for unlimited 0…1000 | ∞
pumping.
6.26.2 Drain

Drain duration Defines the pumping time for draining a fluid. 0...1000 s | ∞
The duration of the drain operation for the tubes should be as
long as possible to ensure that the tubes are completely free of
liquids following draining.
See also
6.26.3 Fill

Fill duration Defines the pumping time for filling a titration vessel. 0...1000 s | ∞

See also
6.26.4 Replace solvent

Replace solvent combines draining and filling the titration vessel.
The parameters for draining, filling, resetting the counter and using a stirrer are the same as in the actions
Drain and Fill.
See also
2 Drain } Page 165
2 Fill } Page 165
6.26.5 Reset counter

Resetting the counters for monitoring the solvent or the reagent is available on the following titrator types:
• T5
• T7
• T9
• C30S
• V30S

Reset counter If this parameter is set, all counters are reset when the manual Active | Inactive
operation starts. The fill date for the titration vessel is also reset.
Instance Defines for which instance of solvent control the counters are Available Solvent
reset. Controls
6.26.6 Stirrer

Stirrer A stirrer can be switched on. Active | Inactive
Only for Action = Fill or Drain.
Titration stand The name of the titration stand. List of titration stands
only if stirrer is activated.
Speed Speed in [%]. 0…100
Only if stirrer is activated.
6.27 Result buffer - Workbench

The results of a method can be stored in the result buffer of the titrator and then reused. Results are stored in the
buffer using the method function Calculation and the parameter Send to buffer. Results stored in the result
buffer may be accessed both from inside and outside a loop.
These results are assigned a unique method ID, allowing them to be reused for other calculations. They can be

accessed using the method of your choice, for example via Rx = Ry[method ID].
If, while an analysis is running, a method is waiting for a result with a corresponding method ID, the analysis
process is interrupted until the relevant result is generated and present in the result buffer.
Note
• An analysis which is in this waiting state can only be ended using Reset instrument or Stop. It is not
possible to proceed without a result.
• Once the titrator has been restarted the buffer is empty. (Recalculation is only possible using older,
internally stored analysis data.
• Implicit sample indexing ensures that the calculations for sample x only accesses results for sample x.
6.28 Sensor - Workbench

To take a measurement using any connected sensor.
6.28.1 Temperature sensor

ration
stands
to the printer.
Note
settings.
6.28.2 Potentiometric Sensor

Potentiometric sensors are potentiometric indicator electrode, such as glass electrodes for pH measurement,
Redox electrode for measuring the redox potential or ion-selective electrodes (ISE) for determining of ion content
in the solution. Below, the editable parameters are listed for both potentiometric sensors and photrodes used for
turbidimetric and color induced titrations:

Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will mV | pH | pM | A | %T
stands
[°C].
to the printer.
Note
the phototrode.
settings.
6.28.3 Polarized sensor

Sensor input The input to which you want to connect the sensor. AB1/SENSOR2 | More
ration
indication.
stands

[°C].
ration
to the printer.
Note
settings.
6.28.4 Conductivity sensor

Sensor input The input to which you want to connect the sensor. CB1/Conductivity | More
ration
Unit Defines the unit of measure to be used for the measurement. µS/cm | mS/cm | µS |
mS
stands
[°C].
ration

to the printer.
Note
settings.
6.29 SmartSample
ID 1…ID 2 Defines ID 1 or ID 2 of the sample. 0…20 characters
Entry type Defines how the sample size is entered. Weight | Volume |
Weight: Sample size is entered as weight in [g]. Pieces
Volume: Sample size is entered as volume in [mL].
Pieces: Sample size is entered as number of pieces.
Sample size Defines the size of the sample. The unit depends on the setting for 0…1000
Entry type.
Density Defines the density of the sample in [g/mL]. 0…100
Correction factor Defines the correction factor. The correction factor can be used in 0…105
calculations.
6.30 Stirrer - Workbench

To switch a connected stirrer (Rod stirrer or magnetic stirrer) on or off for a definable time interval and at a
definable stirring speed.
stands
Stir time The stirring time, in [sec], during which the stirrer should be in 0…104 | ∞
operation. Select "∞" for unlimited stirring time.
Note
settings.
6.31 Table of measured values - Workbench

Displays a table of measured values during an analysis.
Note

7 Analysis and Methods Workspace
The Analysis workspace contains the following objects.
All table views can be customized, for example by changing the displayed columns and adjusting the column
width.
Object Explanation
Tasks Here you organize all tasks in the system.
Methods Here you organize all methods in the system.
Sample Series Here you organize all sample series in the system.
Series sequences Here you organize all series sequences in the system.
Products Here you define which methods or analysis techniques you want to use for analyzing a
sample.
Statistical Here you organize post process functionality to analyze how the measurements and
Evaluation process change over time.
Messages Messages generated by the system are displayed here.
See also
2 List views } Page 17
7.1 Manage shortcuts in LabX

Shortcuts enable you to start tasks directly from the shortcuts list on the PC or from an instrument. Shortcuts are
applicable to methods, sample series, products and manual operations. Shortcuts are assigned to users,
groups or instruments.
Note
• If a user does not have the rights to create tasks, he may run tasks nonetheless via the shortcuts assigned
to him.
• Shortcuts of type Manual operation can only be created and used directly on instruments.
See also
2 Shortcuts - Workbench } Page 150
7.1.1 Manage shortcuts

Depending on the rights of the logged on user, shortcuts created in the system can be edited. Personal
shortcuts are not displayed to other users.
Navigation: Analysis > Shortcuts
Add a shortcut
1 Select the desired object in the list view.
2 Select New Shortcut in the toolbar.
ð An Editor window is opened.
3 Configure the settings in the Properties tab according to your requirements.
4 Enter the data for the samples in the Samples tab and save the information.
ð Depending on the selected properties the shortcut appears on the instrument, in Analysis > Shortcuts of
LabX, and the workbench.
Edit a shortcut
1 Select the desired shortcut in the list view and select Edit Shortcut in the toolbar.
2 Edit the properties of the shortcut in the Properties tab according to your requirements.
LabX Analysis and Methods Workspace 171

3 Edit the data for the samples in the Samples tab and save the information.
Delete a shortcut
1 Select the desired shortcut in the list view and select Delete Shortcut in the toolbar.
Properties - Group
Shortcut
Name Enter the name of the shortcut.
Methods or This defines the method, sample series and the product.
Sample Series or
Products
Created by Displays the author of the shortcut.
Treat as priority Define whether the task should be queued with high priority.
task
Immediate start The task starts without first displaying a confirmation dialog.
Users and Roles
Shortcut is The shortcut is personal and is not displayed to other users.
personal
Availability for Defines the users to whom the shortcut is displayed.
users
Availability for Defines the roles of users to whom the shortcut is displayed. There is no accumulation
roles taking place between Availability for users and Availability for roles.
Instrument Shortcut
Is visible on Shortcuts may be displayed on multiple instruments and on the workbench. Specify the
instrument/ allocation.
workbench
PC Shortcut
Can be executed Specifies whether the shortcut can be executed from the list view of LabX clients. Specify the
on PC instrument on which the shortcut is to be executed.
Samples - Group
Sample scope
In this area, individual samples are added and the sample-specific data is defined. These are task parameters
from method functions which lie within the sample scope. Here, you may also specify task parameters from
method functions that do not lie within a sample range.
Sample ID Here you can define the sample IDs. These can also be copied from the parameters of the
method.
Product Only the products that are referenced to the selected method are displayed here. When you
select a product, the task parameters are copied automatically.
172 Analysis and Methods Workspace LabX

Task parameters If a product is selected for a sample, the task parameters are entered automatically. If these
parameters have been set to Defined in the products, these can no longer be modified.
Values that cannot be modified are displayed in gray.
If no product is selected, default values from the method are used, although these can be
edited at any time.
Note
• Product is displayed only if one sample series is the starting point for the shortcut and there are products
that are defined for the method currently selected.
See also
7.2 Manage tasks

Tasks are assigned to instruments and inserted into the wait queues of the selected instruments. Tasks contain
information about methods, samples and the instrument. The list of tasks may be viewed both on the
instrument and on the PC. Tasks may be started from this list. Tasks can also be executed in a time-controlled
manner.
Navigation: Analysis > Tasks
Creating your own search folders makes it easier to gain an overview of large amounts of data. You can assign
multiple criteria to a particular search folder and thereby create combinations that satisfy multiple criteria, e.g.
all tasks that have been carried out on a specific instrument by a given user in the last 24 hours.
The attribute in the column Origin is task specific. It presents the source from which a task was created. As
origin the following sources could come into consideration: Method, Product, Sample Series and Series
sequence.
See also
2 Manage schedules } Page 666
2 Tasks - Workbench } Page 152
7.2.1 Add tasks

Navigation: Analysis > Methods or Sample Series or Series sequence or Products
Start a task
1 Select the required object in the list view.
2 Select Start Task in the toolbar and choose the desired instrument from the list.
3 Edit the task properties and the samples to be analyzed.
4 After editing the properties click OK.
ð The task will start immediately.
Create a task
1 Select the required object in the list view.

2 Select Create Task in the toolbar and choose No Instrument from the list for a task that will not be assigned
to a specific instrument.
- or -
Select Create Task in the toolbar and choose the desired instrument from the list.
ð The task will be added in the queue.
Note
• A queued task can be started either on the instrument or on the PC.
See also
2 Assign tasks } Page 176
2 Edit tasks } Page 174
7.2.2 Edit tasks

Tasks that do not have the Stopped or Completed status can be edited. If a task has the Running status it can
be edited in the workbench.
An entry prompt for missing task parameters is displayed while a task is active. This happens if samples
without default values in the task parameters were added to an active task.
§ To be able to change a task, it must be assigned to the logged in user.
1 Select the required task in the list view.
2 Select Open Task in the toolbar.
Note
• A created task can be started either on the instrument or on the PC.
• The available parameters depend on the type of instrument used.
Global Parameters
ID This indicates the ID of the used method, sample series or -
product.
Name This indicates the name of the used method, sample series or -
product.
Task name Defines the name of the task. 0…100 characters
Task comment Enter a comment or remark. This may also be changed if the task 0…1000 characters
has the Completed status.
task high priority.

Blank ID Enter an arbitrary default ID for the blank. The entered ID can be 0…30 characters
modified in the start analysis screen.
Comment A brief comment to the method can be entered. 0…120 characters
Sample Scope
In this area, individual samples are added and the sample-specific data is defined. These are task parameters
from method functions which lie within the sample scope. Here, you may also specify task parameters from
method functions that do not lie within a sample range.
Sample ID Here you can define the sample IDs. These can also be copied 0…100 characters
from the parameters of the method.
Product Only the products that are referenced to the selected method are -
displayed here. When you select a product, the task parameters
are copied automatically.
Task parameters If a product is selected for a sample, the task parameters are -
entered automatically. If these parameters have been set to
Defined in the products, these can no longer be modified. Values
that cannot be modified are displayed in gray.
If no product is selected, default values from the method are used,
although these can be edited at any time.
See also
7.2.3 Control tasks

Tasks can have various statuses. Depending on the current status, you can modify it using the commands that
are available for the status concerned.
§ To be able to change a task, it must be assigned to the logged in user.
2 Select the desired command in the toolbar.
State
Status Explanation
Created This task has been created.
Waiting This task has been assigned to a workspace and is waiting in the queue. The precon-
ditions from this method have been fulfilled.
Running This task is currently in progress. The dynamic preconditions are being fulfilled by the
instrument and workspace.
Paused This task has been paused and can be resumed - even on a different instrument, from
the point at which it was last saved.
Stopped This task has been stopped and cannot be restarted.
Completed This task has finished successfully.

See also
7.2.4 Assign tasks

Tasks are assigned to users, roles or instruments. You can edit the assignment depending on the current
status.
Tasks that do not have the Running, Stopped or Completed status can be edited.
2 Select Edit Task Assignments in the toolbar. An Editor window is opened.
3 Edit the assignments.
Task Assignment
Parameter Explanation
Users Defines the users for the assignment.
Roles In addition to users, you can also assign roles. The assignment is performed cumula-
tively between users and roles.
Instruments One task can be assigned to multiple instruments.
Note
7.2.5 Auto ID generation

In addition to a free text, the sample ID can contain any number of placeholders #, 0 (zero), and @. The
character # represents a number, 0 (zero) represents a number without preceding zeros. The character @
represents a letter. Space characters or _ must be used to separate a free text from placeholders.
The character sequence is structured so that it always begins from the right. If numbers are used on the left and
letters are used on the right, sequencing begins using the letters in ascending order first. When Z is reached, the
number is increased by a value of one, and the letters begin at A again.
Example of Auto ID generation
§ The sample series must be prepared by selecting a method and adding more than 10 samples.
1 For the first sample, enter the starting value ID_@## for the sample ID, and press Enter to confirm your
input.
ð A dot is displayed in the bottom right-hand corner of the input field. If you move the mouse pointer over
this dot, the cursor becomes cross-hairs.
2 Click on the cross-hairs and drag it downwards over several columns.
ð The value is counted up to ID_C20.
Entry
Parameter Entry
Auto ID format ID_@##
Default value (Auto ID start value) C10
Generated values
Generated values Values
First ID_C10
Second ID_C11
Third ID_C12
…

One hundred ID_D10
Sample Scope Parameters
SampleScope1 Enter your search text...
Drag a column header here to group by that column
Sample changer position Sample ID 1 Product

Detect next sample ID_C10

Add Remove
In this example, if C99 is reached, the counting continues with D00.

letters are used on the right, counting begins using the letters in ascending order first. When Z is reached, the
When the maximum value in the character sequence is reached (Z99 in the example above), no further
samples can be created. This still applies even if the value in Limit Number of Samples would permit more
samples. If the sample scope contains more than one sample cycle, the system now explicitly asks for the
sample ID for the next sample to be processed and starts at the next respective sample cycle. If the sample
scope contains one sample cycle, however, the sample scope will be completed.
7.3 Manage sample series

With the help of sample series, you can combine several individual samples to form a single series. All
samples in the series are analyzed one by one in the specified order. A sample series can be used repeatedly, if
necessary by entering new sample-specific values.
LabX can manage a maximum of 2000 sample series.
Sample series are normally created based on methods, which include at least one Sample Scope method
function. Only then is it possible to define values specific to each sample using Task parameters. Alternatively,
these values may also be taken over from Products.
In the sample series, all task parameters entered must be defined if these are to be used in assigned methods.
Note
• When you start a task based on a sample series, all task parameter default values defined in the method
are "overwritten" with values from the sample series.
• Whenever a method is modified, it may be necessary to adapt the sample series to the method.
• It is also possible for a sample series to be created without having any method associated with it. However,
it would not be possible to define task parameter values for these sample series.
• If a parameter is not defined, the sample series cannot be started.

Associations of Methods / Products / Series
Method properties
ID
Internal ID Methods
Name
Comment
Product : Blond orange

Tolerances Properties Methods
Type Offset as % of nominal value General properties Product : Blood orange
Add Properties
Remove Methods
Nominal value
Method General
ID properties
Method name Tags Product: Apple
Approval state juice
Nominal value background color Default Properties Methods
Add Remove
Nominal value text color
Nominal value icon

Default Method General
ID properties
Add
Method name
Remove
Tags Approval state
Products
Method ID Method name Tags Approval state
Tolerance T1
T1+
T1+ background color White

Nominal value Value
T1+ text color Default
T1+ Value
T1+ icon Nominal value
T1- Value
Value
T1+ Value
Nominal value Value
Nominal value T1- Value
Value
T1+ Value
T1+ Value
T1- Value
Value
T1+ Value
Sample Series: Brix Blond orange & Apple juice
Nominal value Value
T1- Value
Series
T1+ Value
Create Task Start Task
T1- Value
General properties Save and Close Close
Name Method
Save and Close Close
Sample Series ID User defined label 1
Comments
Continuous run
Scope 1 Sample scope
Number of samples
Add Remove Move Up Move Down
No. Sample ID 1 Nominal value T1+ T1- Products
Save Save and Close Close
Methods In methods, it is possible to define task parameters that will act as placeholders for values
yet to be defined. The values can be entered either when a task, a product or a sample series
is created.
Products Products are used to define the values of task parameters as appropriate to the properties of
a product.
Sample In sample series, specific values are defined for the task parameters or are referenced from
Series products.
See also
2 Use of task parameters } Page 200
2 Sample series - Workbench } Page 151
7.3.1 Add sample series

1 Select New Sample Series in the toolbar. An Editor window is opened.
2 Define the properties for the sample series and select the method to be used.
3 If global parameters are defined in the method, these can be entered under Global Parameters.
4 Under Sample Scope, you can now add the individual samples and define their parameters.
ð You can create a task directly from a sample series. To do this, click on Create Task or Start Task in the
toolbar.
See also

7.3.2 Manage sample series
LabX can manage a maximum of 2000 sample series.
Navigation: Analysis > Sample Series
1 Select the required sample series in the list view.
2 Select Open Sample Series in the toolbar. An Editor window is opened.
3 Define the properties for the sample series and select the method to be used.
4 If global parameters are defined in the method, these can be entered under Global Parameters.
5 Under Sample Scope, you can now add the individual samples and define their parameters.
Note
General properties
This area is used to manage the basic properties of the sample series.
Name Defines the name of the sample series. 1…100 characters
ID Defines the ID of the sample series. 0…100 characters
Comment A brief comment to the method can be entered. 0…120 characters
Method Select the method to be used for the sample series. -
Global Parameters
This area displays the global parameters of a method. Global parameters are task parameters from method
functions that lie outside of the sample scope.
Parameter names and values are displayed. If default values have been defined, these are applied but can also
be overwritten.
Task parameters If a product is selected for a sample, the task parameters are -
entered automatically. If these parameters have been set to
Defined in the products, these can no longer be modified. Values
that cannot be modified are displayed in gray.
If no product is selected, default values from the method are used,
although these can be edited at any time.
Product Only the products that are referenced to the selected method are -
displayed here. When you select a product, the task parameters
are copied automatically.
Sample scope
Sample ID Here you can define the sample IDs. These can also be copied 0…100 characters
from the parameters of the method.
See also
2 Sample scope } Page 242

7.3.3 Compare sample series
Navigation: Analysis > Sample Series
Compare two different sample series
This function is used to compare two different sample series.
1 Select two sample series in the list view. To do this, hold the Ctrl key and click on the sample series you
wish to compare.
2 Click Compare Sample Series in the toolbar to open the corresponding dialog box.
Compare versions of sample series
This function is used to compare a sample series with its previous version.
− Select a sample series in the list view and click Compare Versions in the toolbar. The corresponding dialog
is opened.
The columns show the parameters and the values to be compared. Non-matching values or parameters are
marked with colors. Click on Show Changes Only to show only the non matching values.
Green The values have been added.
Yellow The values are different or have been changed.
Red The values or functions have been removed or deleted.
7.4 Manage series sequences

With the help of series sequences, you can combine several sample series to form a single series. All samples
in the series are analyzed one by one in the specified order. New tasks will be created for every sample series
within a series sequence.
Note
• Series sequences are not shown on workbenches nor instruments. To enable using series sequences
directly from instrument screens, create shortcuts on the PC.
See also
7.4.1 Add series sequence

Navigation: Analysis > Series sequences
1 Select New Series Sequence in the toolbar. An Editor window is opened.
2 Define the properties for the series sequence and select the sample series to be used.
See also
2 Edit series sequence } Page 180
7.4.2 Edit series sequence

Navigation: Analysis > Series sequences
1 Select the required series sequence in the list view.
2 Select Open Series Sequence in the toolbar. An Editor window is opened.
3 Define the properties for the series sequence and select the sample series to be used.
General Properties
This area is used to manage the basic properties of the sample series.
Name Name of the sample series.
Series Sequence ID Here you can define an ID.

Comments Here you can enter a comment.
User defined Enter text here according to the defined label.
Sample Series
This area displays the used sample series. Add or remove sample series and change to order.
7.5 Manage products

Products are helpful for specifying parameter values for samples with similar properties. This means that a
product is used to define the values of task parameters as appropriate to the properties of the product.
LabX can manage a maximum of 2000 products.
For a defined sample series, it is possible to specify whether one or more samples in the series should take
values from a selected product. At the time of sample series creation, a column is displayed to make it possible
to select a particular product.
Products are created and managed in the Product Editor. Products set forth the values to be defined for one or
more associated methods. The definition of task parameters by means of a product is optional.
Methods must include at least one method function Sample Scope. Only then is it possible to define values,
specific to each product, using task parameters within method functions Sample Scope.
Note
• When you start a task based on a product, all task parameter default values defined in the method are
"overwritten" with values from the product.
• Whenever a method is modified, it may be necessary to adapt the sample series to the method.
• It is also possible for a product to be created without having any method associated with it. However, it
would not be possible to define task parameter values for this product.

Method properties
ID
Internal ID Methods
Name
Comment

Add Properties
Remove Methods
Nominal value
Method General
ID properties
Add Remove
Nominal value icon

ID properties
Add
Method name
Remove
Tags Approval state
Products
Tolerance T1
T1+

Nominal value Value
T1+ Value
T1- Value
Value
T1+ Value
Nominal value Value
Value
T1+ Value
T1+ Value
T1- Value
Value
T1+ Value
Nominal value Value
T1- Value
Series
T1+ Value
T1- Value
Name Method
Comments
Continuous run
Number of samples
is created.
a product.
Series products.
See also
2 Products - Workbench } Page 152
7.5.1 Edit products

Products are always linked to one or more methods, and multiple products can be linked to one and the same
method.
LabX can manage a maximum of 2000 products.
Navigation: Analysis > Products
Add a product
1 Select New Product in the toolbar. An Editor window is opened.
2 Define the properties in Properties and Method according to your requirements.
Edit a product
1 Select the required product in the list view.

2 Select Open Product in the toolbar. An Editor window is opened.
3 Define the settings in Properties according to your requirements.
4 In Method click on Add and choose one or more of the displayed methods to assign these to the product.
5 For the selected method, the editable task parameters of the method are listed. Enter the appropriate product
parameters.
Properties - group
Name and Properties
Internal ID The ID used by LabX.
Product ID Define an ID for the product.
Name Specify the name for the product.
User defined Specify additional information. You can adapt the label of the field.
Additional Information
Additional Information
Description Any description of the product.
Comment Any comment or remark on the product.
Approval and Release State
Release state Indicates the status of the product.
Methods - group
Method
Attached Methods You can use the Add / Remove buttons to add or remove methods.
Product Parameters For the selected method, the editable task parameters of the method are listed. The
standard values for the method are proposed by default. If Defined is selected for
a particular value, this defined value can no longer be modified when a task is
started.
Products are normally created based on methods, which include at least one
method function Sample scope. Only then is it possible to define values specific to
each product using task parameters.
7.5.2 Compare products

With this function, all differences which have been applied in the product editor are shown. This includes
product specific properties, method assignments, and task parameters that have been defined. Changes in
methods cannot be fully displayed and have to be verified by comparing methods. Method names, versions
and internal IDs are always shown with current assigned methods.
Navigation: Analysis > Products
Compare two different products
This function is used to compare two different products.
1 Select two products in the list view. To do this, hold the Ctrl key and click on the products you wish to
compare.
2 Click Compare Products in the toolbar to open the corresponding dialog box.
Compare different versions of a product
This function is used to compare different versions of a product.

1 Select the desired product in the list view and choose Open Product > Old Versions in the toolbar. The
corresponding dialog is opened.
2 Select two versions in the list view. To do this, hold the Ctrl key and click on the versions you wish to
compare.
3 Click Compare Versions to open the corresponding dialog box.
See also
2 Compare methods } Page 192

7.6 Manage methods
In order to perform an analysis using an instrument, you need a method. A method represents the program for
executing the analysis. It consists of a series of method functions that are processed in sequence by the
instrument. A method function usually comprises several substeps, which consist of parameters with
changeable values. For improved manageability, you can create several folders and subfolders for methods.
A number of method templates have already been saved in LabX. These methods were developed by METTLER
TOLEDO for specific uses and can be used immediately for analyses accordingly. You can modify the method
templates according to your own specifications and save them as user methods. When creating methods,
depending on the device type, you can refer to method templates which specify the structure of the method for
specific purposes, and whose parameters already contain the most suitable default values.
Methods can be exported or imported. This enables you to send methods to another location, for example by
e-mail or using a data storage medium. Methods can also be printed out. These commands are available in
the Miscellaneous group in the toolbar.
Method properties
ID
Internal ID Methods
Name
Comment

Add Properties
Remove Methods
Nominal value
Method General
ID properties
Add Remove
Nominal value icon

ID properties
Add
Method name
Remove
Tags Approval state
Products
Tolerance T1
T1+

Nominal value Value
T1+ Value
T1- Value
Value
T1+ Value
Nominal value Value
Value
T1+ Value
T1+ Value
T1- Value
Value
T1+ Value
Nominal value Value
T1- Value
Series
T1+ Value
T1- Value
Name Method
Comments
Continuous run
Number of samples
See also
2 Methods - Workbench } Page 151
7.6.1 Method editor

Methods are so-called "versioned objects". A new version is created every time you save the object. The history
can be displayed at any time, and older versions can be restored.
The settings such as position and the components displayed are saved for each user. Hence, you can define
their preferred view.
The default view may be restored whenever desired. To do this, select Restore Default View in the toolbar.
Each component may be arranged at the top, bottom, right or left. A component may also be arranged as

required in such a manner that it fills up the entire free space between the adjacent components. For this
purpose, for example, the middle field of the docking targets is selected. By dragging one component into
another, these are grouped and arranged as tabs.
A component may also be arranged as required in such a manner that it fills up the entire free space between
the adjacent components. To do this, the middle field of the docking targets is selected (compare point 5 in the
following figure)
2
3 10
9
4 5 6 7
Designation Explanation
1 Toolbar Commands are shown in the toolbar as control elements. Related groups of
commands are organized into tabs. Different tabs and commands are
contextually displayed based on the currently selected object.
2 Library This tab contains a list of all available method functions. You can use
drag&drop to move method functions from the library to the graphical editor.
3 Quick search If you enter a search string, only those objects are displayed whose name
contains the search string.
4 Graphical Editor A method normally consists of a sequence of several method functions. The
method functions used are represented graphically in the graphical editor.
5 Docking targets The docking targets are displayed if a movable component is moved.
6 Click to open the context sensitive help for a specific method function.
7 Return values This tab displays the returned values for the currently selected method
function. The raw data output by the instrument are also listed here. This list
is required for creating formulae. This component is moved in the example.
8 Parameters This tab displays parameters for the currently selected method function. The
fields can be edited and a wide range of options is available for entering the
required parameters.

Designation Explanation
9 Quick search If you enter a search string, only those objects are displayed whose name
contains the search string.
10 Method Each method must be assigned a method ID of your choice. Select a unique
and meaningful name for methods that simplify identification for you. Here,
you may also select the export settings for the automatic export of results.
In the Method labels section there are additional freely selectable fields in
which you may enter additional information.
Non-filled mandatory fields or values outside the permitted limits are indicated by the symbol . Clicking on
symbol will display the related information.
7.6.2 Create methods

A number of method templates have already been saved in LabX. These methods were developed by METTLER
TOLEDO for specific uses and can be used immediately for analyses accordingly. You can modify the method
templates according to your own specifications and save them as user methods. When creating methods,
depending on the device type, you can refer to method templates which specify the structure of the method for
specific purposes, and whose parameters already contain the most suitable default values.
To open the context sensitive help for a specific method function, click the icon in the upper right corner of it.
1 Select New Method in the toolbar and choose a desired configuration from the list.
ð The window with a selection of templates is displayed.
2 From the available templates, choose the one that is most similar to the method you wish to create.
3 Click Open to edit the method according to requirements.
- or -
Click Save to save the template to the list of methods.
Available method templates
Search text... If you enter a search string, only those objects are displayed whose name contains
the search string.
Category / name Find the method templates sorted by category and name.
ID Additional Identification of the method templates.
Type Information on the type of application.
Compatibility Specifies to which instruments the method is compatible.
Description
A brief description of the specific possibilities and features of the method.
Application notes
If available, application notes are accessible in this area. Double-click to open the corresponding file in Adobe
Reader.
See also
2 Edit methods } Page 187
7.6.3 Edit methods


1 Select the required method in the list view.
2 Select Open Method in the toolbar.
ð An editor window opens.
3 Select Unlock View in the toolbar to revoke the lock if necessary.
4 To add components, select Manage Views in the toolbar and choose a desired component from the list.
ð The new components may be arranged as desired.
5 Repeat the steps to add other components. In order to remove components, click on at the top of the
component or select it in the Manage Views toolbar again.
6 If you would like to fix the view of the Method Editor, select Lock View in the toolbar.
7 Save the data.
In General, descriptive information of every method function is entered.
Title Defines the title of the method function for output in reports. The input of Unicode characters
is supported.
Name Defines the name of the method function that is displayed in the method editor. This name
is used to reference method function's return values from another method function. Special
characters and space characters are not permitted.
Description A free text describing the method function. This description allows comprehensive
documentation of complex methods.
See also
2 Manage export templates } Page 688
2 Label settings } Page 35
2 Use of formulas } Page 201
7.6.3.1 Edit method properties

Define the general properties of a method such as the ID and exporting options.
ð The Method Editor opens. Depending on the type of method, different parameters are shown.
3 In the Method tab, define the required parameters.
4 Save the data.
Method properties
ID Enter a method ID of your choice. -
Internal ID Displays the internal ID used by LabX. -
Type Information on the type of method. -
Compatibility Information on the compatible instruments for the method. -
Comment A brief comment to the method can be entered. -

Export Templates Select the export templates to be used for the automated export of -
results.
Release state Information on the state of the method is displayed, depending on -
the defined policies.
Method Labels
User defined In this section there are freely selectable fields in which you may -
enter additional information.
SOP
Activate SOP Activates the SOP (Standard Operating Procedures) option. Active | Inactive
SOP Defines whether a free SOP text will be defined or if a link to an Text | Link
external file will be added.
SOP text Defines the text for a standard operating procedure. Text | Link
SOP link Specifies the path to where the file is stored. Text | Link
PDF Settings
When this function is selected, a PDF file containing a report is generated.
Note
• This function is only available for the instrument type "Titration".
Generate a PDF Defines whether a PDF file should be generated. Active | Inactive
File
Path Specifies the path to which the files are exported. -
File name Defines the file name of the PDF file. The name can also be -
formulated via data binding.
Overwrite the Defines whether an existing PDF file should be overwritten. Active | Inactive
existing file
Title Defines the title in the properties of the PDF file. -
Author Defines the author in the properties of the PDF file. -
Subject Defines the subject in the properties of the PDF file. -
Note
• Depending on the settings selected, the method must undergo a signature and release process.
See also
7.6.3.2 Insert method functions

The method functions can be grouped either alphabetically or by category. A quick way to find method
functions is to enter text into the search field. Only those method functions that match this text will be displayed.

ð The method editor opens.
3 Click on a method function in the library and hold down the mouse button to drag this into the graphical
editor.
ð A green plus sign is displayed to indicate the positions in which the selected method function can be
inserted.
4 Move the method function to the required plus sign and release the mouse button.
ð The method function is displayed at the desired position.
5 Save the data.
Note
See also
7.6.3.3 Edit method parameters

Parameters of a method can be selected or implemented depending on the application. Parameters are
generally validated when you save and when you switch to a different method function.
Where the data of a particular method function are referenced in a different method function, this is done by
means of the Name. Please take this into account if you intend to change or edit a name.

ð The method editor opens. Depending on the type of method, different method functions are shown.
3 Double-click on the required method function in the
Weight
graphical editor.
ð The parameter of the selected method function are
displayed. The selected method function is
displayed in the graphical editor in green.
4 Edit the parameters according to your requirements
and click OK to save the data.
Note
See also
7.6.3.4 Insert symbols

In comment or text boxes, it is possible to insert numbers in superscript or subscript and some symbols like
"µ".
1 In a text box, place the insertion point in the desired location.
2 Click Insert Symbol in the toolbar.
3 Choose the desired element from the window. Superscript and Subscript
ð The symbol is inserted in the desired location.
Symbol
7.6.3.5 Insert hyperlinks

In the Comment boxes, it is possible to define hyperlink targets. By creating these links, you can link to files on
a particular Intranet/Internet page or a network server in your organization.

1 Highlight the desired text in a Comment box.
2 Right-click on the highlighted text and select Insert Method properties
Hyperlink from the context menu. Method ID
Internal ID
3 Enter the hyperlink. Example:
Name
- C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator ...
Comment
- http://www.wikipedia.org/wiki/Density
ð The hyperlink is active and is displayed in underlined Cut
Can run Copy
blue text. To open the link, press and hold the Ctrl key on
blocked Paste
and click on the link. instrumen
ts Insert Hyperlink
7.6.4 Compare methods

Compare two different methods
This function is used to compare two different methods, which is very helpful when comparing two similarly
structured methods.
1 Select two methods in the list view. To do this, hold the Ctrl key and click on the methods you wish to
compare.
2 Click Compare Methods in the toolbar to open the corresponding dialog box.
Compare different versions of a method
This function is used to compare different versions of a method.
1 Select the desired method in the list view and choose Open Method > Old Versions in the toolbar. The
corresponding dialog is opened.
2 Select two versions in the list view. To do this, hold the Ctrl key and click on the versions you wish to
compare.
3 Click Compare Versions to open the corresponding dialog box.
See also
7.6.5 Import methods

Methods from a variety of sources can be imported or migrated into LabX. During the import, methods will be
checked and validated. For every imported method, a detailed message will be generated and displayed.
Source Format Explanation
LabX .lmt General exchange format of LabX methods.
LabX Titration .cop Format as used in LabX Titration versions 2.5 - 3.1.
Titration .xml Format as used on the instruments. Data exchange using USB-
sticks.
Density Refrac- .xml Format as used on the instruments. Data exchange using USB-
tometry sticks.
UV/VIS .xml Format as used on the instruments. Data exchange using USB-
sticks.

Import methods
1 Click Import Method in the toolbar and select the format to be imported.
2 Enter the path to the file and click on OK.
3 The method is displayed in the "Method editor" and can be edited according to requirements.
ð The import process is not complete until the method has been saved.
Note
• Methods from the former software "LabX titration" with the file extension .cop can be imported by this
version of LabX. As the method function Record is different in this version of LabX, select a suitable report
template from the list.
• When importing methods from titrators in xml. format, a report template is selected automatically according
to the method type. Please check the selected report template in the methods after importing.
7.6.6 Export methods

Methods can be exported or imported. This enables you to send methods to another location, for example, by
e-mail or using a data storage medium. In addition, titration methods can be exported in a format that can be
imported by titrators which are compatible to LabX.
Target Format Explanation
LabX .lmt General exchange format of LabX methods.
Titrator .xml Format as used on the instruments. Data exchange using USB
sticks.
Export methods
1 Select the required method in the list view, click on Export Method in the toolbar and select the file type.
2 Enter the path for the file and click on OK.
ð The method has been saved to the file system.
Note
• When importing a method on a titrator, parameters from the method function Record will be set to the
default values. Parameters from the method function Instruction defined in Message content will be
ignored.
7.6.7 Update of outdated methods

When the LabX installation is upgraded by a major version, the installation process will create new versions for
those methods that need updating. The history can be displayed at any time in the History Viewer.
Incompatible methods and methods that need checking can be identified by the status that will show Outdated
in red color in the list view. Method functions which need checking only have to be confirmed. Methods
containing method functions that are not compatible with the current version of LabX have to be updated.
To update an outdated method, proceed as follows:
ð A message box appears with the list of method functions concerned.
3 Click OK to proceed to the "Method editor".
ð Method functions which need checking only will be shown in green color and no further actions are
required.
ð Incompatible method functions can be identified by the status that will show Outdated in red color and
the grey background color.

4 Click on to display the related information.
Validation and settings Outdated
5 To update a method function right-click the method Allowed units
function and select Update…. Value release

Activate StaticDetect Update…
ð A dialog box appears. Open / close door Delete
6 Follow the instructions on screen to update the method.

7.7 Use of fx, data binding, task parameters, formulas
Data binding, formulas and conditions enable you to link together the data collected in a method in a flexible
manner. Data binding is relevant within formulas and conditions.
7.7.1 Examples of data binding

This example is based on a balance method that contains the following method functions.
Method function Function Data binding
Zero This function sets a new zero point.
Tare The balance is tared according to the set
parameters.
Info lines This function is used to display several Displays the tare value.
lines of text on the balance display.
Weight A weighing process is performed in
accordance with the settings.
Result When this function is selected, a result is Calculate the relationship between the
calculated. sample weight and the tare weight as
a percentage.
Message If this function is enabled, a notification Display the calculated result.
appears on the instrument display.
[Next -> } Page 195]
7.7.1.1 Info lines

The aim is to display the tare value from the method function Tare on the balance using the method function
Info lines.
1 Double-click on the method function Info lines in the graphical editor. The parameters are displayed on the
right-hand side.
2 Under Information, click on New to add a text line and enter "Tare".
3 In the second text column, click on . The editor for data binding is opened.

1 Click on the method function Tare in the graphical editor. The Return values are displayed on the right-
hand side.
2 Under Tare, click on . The tare value is referenced in the "Source" field.
3 In the editor, click on OK.
ð The tare value has been integrated in the method functionInfo lines.
7.7.1.2 Result
The aim is to calculate a result that provides the relationship between the sample weight and the tare weight as
a percentage.

1 Double-click on the method function Result in the graphical editor. The parameters are displayed on the
right-hand side.
2 Under Formula, click on . The editor for data binding is opened.
1 Click on the method function Weight in the graphical editor. The Return values are displayed on the right-
hand side.
2 Under Net, click on . The net value is referenced in the Source field. Enter the operator "/" for a division.
3 Under Tare, click on . The net value is referenced in the Source field. Enter the operator "*" for a multipli-
cation, followed by the number 100.
ð The formula output is integrated in the method function Result.

7.7.1.3 Message
The aim is to display the calculated result on the balance using the method function Message.
1 Double-click on the method function Message in the graphical editor. The parameters are displayed on the
right-hand side.
2 Under Caption, enter the following text: Result in percent.
3 Under Notification, click on . The editor for data binding is opened.
1 Enter the following text in the Source field: The sample weight in percent is x% of the tare weight.
2 Click on the method function Result in the graphical editor. The Return values are displayed on the right-
hand side.
3 Place the insertion mark at the position in the Source field at which the referenced value is to be inserted
and under Result, click on . The result is referenced in the Source field.

ð The result is integrated into the method function Message.
7.7.2 Use of data binding

The editor integrated in the method editor provides support for entering formulas, transferring data from the data
binding, and defining task parameters.
The editor can be opened from any location in which the button is found next to the parameters. Return
values, on the other hand, display the button for referencing data in the opened editor. The editor offers a
different scope of functions depending on the type of parameter.
When creating a task via a method that defines task parameters, all parameters must be entered to permit the
task to be created.
Editor for data binding
1 Click on next to a relevant parameter.
ð The Editor is opened.
2 Place the insertion mark to the correct position in the RSD(Formula)
Data binding Task parameters
Source field. Source rsdn-1(TabletNet.Result)
Operands Functions Variables Date/Time Value tables OK

3 In the graphical editor, click on the required method Available variables
Cancel
function to display the corresponding return values in Insert Variable

Validate
the right-hand window.

4 Select the required value and click on .
ð The value has been inserted into the formula.
5 Click OK to accept the changes and to close the editor.
Note
• When using variables, methods are valid and executable regardless of the language in which LabX is
executed. Insert variables from the drop-down list and click on Insert Variable to accept them.
• Operators, functions, variables, time and date formats and value tables are available for calculations. These
are found on the available tabs.
See also
2 Examples of data binding } Page 195
2 Global variables } Page 717
7.7.2.1 Notation of data binding

The term data binding refers to the referencing of return values of arbitrary method functions. The notation of the
data binding is described in the following.
Example
Item Name Description

Method function The name of the method function within the method. The following
name characters are not permitted.
: +*ç%&/()=?`'´^~ -!][<>\°§€.,:;{}"

Method function [i] The last result of the specified method function.
indexer [s] The result of the current sample.
[1] A specific result. Values >=0 and <= 2147483647 are
permitted.
Result value The returned result value of a method function.
Result value indexer [0] A specific result. Values >=0 and <= 2147483647 are
permitted.
7.7.3 Use of task parameters

Task parameters refer to the parameters that can be defined in a method although their values are not yet
determined.
The values can be entered either when a task, a product or a sample series is created. Nevertheless, task
parameters enable default values and restrictions to be specified based on the type of data. If the value is Text,
the default value, minimum length and maximum length can be entered.
These parameters are defined as over writable Task parameters in the method, although default values can
also be entered. The real values used by a running task can be carried over from the default values of methods,
from products, from sample series or they can be queried by users after tasks have been created.
task to be created.
1 Click on for a relevant parameter.
ð The Editor is opened.
2 Select Task parameters and enter the required values Weight
in the fields. Data binding Task parameters
Define label Default value OK
Min. Value
Cancel
Max. Value
Decimal places
Default value Specifies the value that is entered as a default value within products or sample
series.
Min. Value / Max. Value Specifies the limits of the value range that can be selected for the parameter in
products or sample series.
Decimal places Specifies the number of digits with which the value can be defined in products or
sample series. If this value is left as 0, only whole integers can be defined in the
product and sample series.

Method properties
ID
Internal ID Methods
Name
Comment

Add Properties
Remove Methods
Nominal value
Method General
ID properties
Add Remove
Nominal value icon

ID properties
Add
Method name
Remove
Tags Approval state
Products
Tolerance T1
T1+

Nominal value Value
T1+ Value
T1- Value
Value
T1+ Value
Nominal value Value
Value
T1+ Value
T1+ Value
T1- Value
Value
T1+ Value
Nominal value Value
T1- Value
Series
T1+ Value
T1- Value
Name Method
Comments
Continuous run
Number of samples
is created.
a product.
Series products.
7.7.4 Use of formulas

task to be created.
To perform the following steps, a method or a method template must be open in the method editor, which also
contains a method function Result. Only this method function contains a field for formulas.
Formulas can be used to offset method function results against each other. Operators, functions, variables, time
and date formats and value tables are available for calculations. These are found on the various tabs.
Additional functions can be entered that are not available on the Functions tab.
See [Applicable functions } Page 705].
1 Click on next to a relevant parameter Result.
ð The formula editor is opened.

Result
Source rsdn-1(TabletNet.Result)
Operands Functions Variables Date/Time Value tables Dyes OK
Cancel
Validate
2 Select the register Functions.

3 Place the insertion mark to the correct position in the Source field.
4 Click a function to add it to the formula.
ð The function has been inserted into the formula.
5 Use databinding to bind values to the placeholders of the added function.
See also
2 Examples of data binding } Page 195
2 Result } Page 227
2 Applicable functions } Page 705
7.7.4.1 Notation of formulas

Formulas can be used to offset the results of method functions against each other. Operators and functions are
available for this offsetting.
Example

: +*ç%&/()=?`'´^~ -!][<>\°§€.,:;{}"
permitted.
Numeric value Arbitrary numeric values.
>=-999999999999999999.999999999999999999 and
<=999999999999999999.999999999999999999
Function Generally, all types of data binding or numeric values are
permitted, depending on the function used. The arguments are
separated by ";" . There are several functions with a different
number of arguments.
Return values from other method functions are thus entered in brackets. Depending on the operators used,
multiple results or one single result are output. When using simple operators such as + or - , one result per
measurement is often output, and for statistical calculations such as the standard deviation, for example,
multiple measurements generate a single result.

• For a list of all operators, see ["Applicable operators" } Page 704].
• For a list of all functions, see ["Applicable functions" } Page 705].
• For a list of all time and date functions, see ["Time and date functions" } Page 724].
Example with the calculation of the mean value and standard deviation
The method weighs various samples, after which the mean value and the standard deviation are calculated and
displayed automatically. In this example, no [i] or [s] indices are needed because all results have to be
calculated.
Method function addressing

An implicit method function addressing can be used for symbols which can be related to a method function
(that provides the symbol) without unsolvable ambiguity. This allows all symbols to be used without refer-
encing the method function.
Example: "Result" instead of "Result1.Result"
Ambiguities will be resolved by the rules defined below. If no resolving is possible, implicit addressing cannot
be used in a formula. The first of the following rules that matches will be applied. If none of the rule applies,
implicit addressing is rejected due to ambiguities.
• Referencing a symbol that is provided by only one method function within the entire method.
• A formula within a sample scope is referencing a symbol that is provided by only one method function
within that sample scope.
• A formula within a sample cycle is referencing a symbol that is provided by only one method function within
that sample cycle.
• A formula within a loop is referencing a symbol that is provided by only one method function within that
loop.
Alternative Symbols
Common known symbols that are alternatives for the existing symbols can be used.
Example: "T" instead of "TemperatureValue"
If a symbol is not unique, the method function can be addressed in brackets. method function addressing is
name based, index numbers are not allowed.
Example: "T[Measurement2]"
Symbols in method function Result
The method function Result provides an alternative and dynamically used symbol, whose name is equal to the
name of the method function within the method (i.e a method function Result named "ResultXY" provides a
symbol "ResultXY" that is equal to "ResultXY.Result").
See also
2 Manage value tables } Page 660

7.7.5 Use of value tables
are interpolated according to the selected settings.
To perform the following steps, a method or a method template must be open in the method editor, which also
contains a method function Result. Only this method function contains a field for formulas.
1 Click on next to a relevant parameter.
ð The formula editor is opened.
2 Select the register Value tables. Result
3 In Available tables select the required table and click Source vt('PurifiedWater'; scalar)
Value tables
Operands Functions Variables Date/Time OK
Insert Table. Available tables PurifiedWater Insert Table
Cancel
ð The referenced table has been added to the Source

field.
4 Place the insertion mark to the correct position in the
Source field (e.g. orange marking).
5 In the graphical editor, click on the required method function to display the corresponding return values in
the right-hand window.
6 Select the required value and click on .
ð The value has been inserted into the formula.
Note
• Operators, functions, variables, time and date formats and value tables are available for calculations. These
are found on the available tabs.
• For Density Refractometry instruments, value tables can also be used in method functions Calculate on
Instrument. The operator for value tables is T instead of vt.
See also
2 Calculate on instrument } Page 459
2 Result } Page 227
7.7.6 Use of messages

Messages allow you to include method function results in a text. To enable this, data binding expressions are
added to the text.
Example 1
Example 2

: +*ç%&/()=?`'´^~ -!][<>\°§€.,:;{}"

Format string The format string can be used to specify date and time output
formats.
{methodFunctionA.ResultValue hh:mm:ss} => 16:12.32
{methodFunctionA.ResultValue dd.MM.yyyy} => 20:11.2009
For more information, see ["User-defined time and date
functions } Page 724]" and ["Default date and time
formats" } Page 724].
When using formulas, these must be contained in curly brackets.
7.7.7 Use of conditions

Conditions provide the option to link different method function results together. The result of a link is either TRUE
or FALSE, which allows different procedures to be executed within a method.
Example
The following operators are available for conditions.
: +*ç%&/()=?`'´^~ -!][<>\°§€.,:;{}"
permitted.
Numeric value Arbitrary numeric values.
>=-999999999999999999.999999999999999999 and
<=999999999999999999.999999999999999999
Function Generally, all types of data binding or numeric values are
permitted, depending on the function used. The arguments are
separated by ";" . There are several functions with a different
number of arguments.
Format string The format string can be used to specify date and time output
formats.
{methodFunctionA.ResultValue hh:mm:ss} => 16:12.32
{methodFunctionA.ResultValue dd.MM.yyyy} => 20:11.2009
For more information, see ["User-defined time and date
functions } Page 724]" and ["Default date and time
formats" } Page 724].
Comparison operator == Equals
!= Not Equal To
> Greater Than
< Less Than
>= Greater Than or Equal To
<= Less Than or Equal To
Boolean operator The boolean operators "and" and "or" are supported.

Operators can be used with both numerical values and strings. Numerical values can be specified in any
format, for example, 1.32345322 or even simply 1. It is possible to integrate values using a data binding, for
example, {method function.return value}. The result of a method function is stored each time the method
function is processed. As a result of data binding, several return values (list) can be produced if using Do
while and Sample cycle. To extract one individual value from the return values, the string must be structured
as follows {Method function[i].Return value}. This string can be applied within Do while.
It is possible to compare a numerical value and a string. If this is done the expression on the right side of the
comparison operator will always be converted to the type of expression on the left side. If the type conversion
fails, the task will be paused.
Example
Assume the following return values are available:
• Text1.Text: "123"
• Text2.Text: "abc"
• Number1.Number: 123
If those return values are compared the following behavior can be observed:
Condition Behavior
{Text1[s].Text} == {Number1[s].Number} Number1.Number is converted to a string and the
condition is TRUE.
{Number1[s].Number} == {Text1[s].Text} Text1.Text is converted to a numerical value and the
condition is TRUE.
{Text2[s].Text} == {Number1[s].Number} Number1.Number is converted to a string and the
condition is FALSE.
{Number1[s].Number} == {Text2[s].Text} Text2.Text can't be converted to a numerical value and
the task pauses.
See also
2 Global variables } Page 717

7.8 Manage statistical evaluations
This feature provides post process functionality to analyze how the measurements and process change over
time. The applicable process regulations can effortlessly be monitored, assisting in staying always under
control.
In Statistical Evaluation you manage Rule Sets specifying tolerance definitions and rules. These are used to
execute evaluations on results.
Procedures
• Create the dedicated main results.
• These results are summarized and filtered applying specific arguments. This ensures a consistent
population of values to be evaluated.
• All Rule Sets of the corresponding Evaluation are applied to the collected main results
• A statistical evaluation report is created.
7.8.1 Rule sets

Rule Sets consists of tolerance definition which includes the target value and optional sets of rules. The
tolerance definitions may optionally contain up to three upper and lower limits. The ranges are calculated
according to the defined limits. In Rules the settings to warn or reject are defined. The system uses ISO 31-11
notation for ranges and limits with square brackets.
Navigation: Analysis > Statistics > Rule Sets
Add rule sets
1 Select New Rule Set in the toolbar.
General
Name This indicates the name of the rule set.
Unit Specifies the unit used for the evaluation. Rule sets with the same unit can only be
used in the same evaluation.
Decimal places Specifies the number of digits after the decimal point for the evaluation.
Comment A comment that describes the rule set can be entered.
Tolerance Definitions
Limit type Specifies the type of the values to be entered. Value | SD | SD (n-1) | %
T1+…T3+ Defining the relative upper limits in the unit specified or relative to the target or
mean value.
Target | Mean value Defining the desired target value or the calculated mean value.
T1-…T3- Defining the relative lower limits in the unit specified or relative to the target or
mean value.
Interval range definitions The representation of the ranges. Choice for the assignment of the values which lie
exactly on the limits.
Rules
Assignment of up to 6 rules to be applied when executing an evaluation. You can add, edit or delete rules.

Notation for ranges
]T1+, Target] Indicates that limit T1+ is excluded and the Target is included in the range.
[T1+, Target] Indicates that both limits are included in the range.
]T1+, Target[ Indicates that both limits are excluded from the range.
Deleting rule sets

1 Select the required rule set in the list view.
2 Select Delete Rule Set in the toolbar.
Edit rule sets
1 Select the required rule set in the list view.
2 Select Open Rule Set in the toolbar.
7.8.1.1 Edit rules

In Rules you select the classification for the rule. All rules are shown in the reports and nowhere else. The report
has a tick or not if the rule is broken. If not violated then the user can see that it is OK.
§ A rule set must be open in an editor window.
1 Click Add / Edit.
ð The window to edit the rules opens.
2 Edit the parameters and click OK to apply the settings.
Level Type
Level Selections for the classification for the rule. Reject | Warning.
Rule Type
Mean value Select this option when the mean value is required to be compared from the target
value.
Population size Select this option when a necessary population size must be checked.
Range counting Select this option to count the number of observations within the selected range or
ranges.
In Count, define the rule's condition.
See also
2 Rule sets } Page 207
7.8.2 Import and export rule sets

Rule set definitions can be exported or imported. This enables you to send definitions to another location, for
example, by e-mail or using a data storage medium. The file extension .lsrp is used for rule sets. Exported rule
sets will also export the linked rules.
Navigation: Analysis > Statistics > Rule Sets
Import rule sets
1 Select Import Rule Set in the toolbar.

2 Enter the path to the file and click OK.
3 The rule set is displayed in the editor and can be edited according to requirements.
ð The import process is not complete until the rule set has been saved.
Export rule sets
1 Select the required rule set in the list view and click on Export Rule Set in the or toolbar.
2 Enter the path for the file and click OK.
ð The rule set is saved in the file system.
7.8.3 Evaluations
An evaluation defines all necessary parameters in order to create a statistics report. It retrieves the main results
provided by a filter and evaluates the applied rule sets. The outcome of an evaluation is the statistics report.
Navigation: Analysis > Statistics > Evaluations
Add evaluations
1 Select New Evaluation in the toolbar.
General
Name This indicates the name of the evaluation.
Report template Defines which report template is to be used for the report.
Comment A comment that describes the evaluation can be entered.
Filter fields and the Result name (unique per method) define which results will be included. The same filters
(fields and their corresponding operators) which can be defined in Search folders for results are supported.
Additionally time range filters can be applied. These filters can be combined using AND operation. Arguments
can either be defined in the evaluation or they can be requested upon execution of the evaluation. You can add
or delete the filters.
Result
Name Select a result from the drop down list that contains all available results. The result
name can also be typed directly.
Filter Defines the required filter settings that will be used when executing evaluations.
Prompt for filter Defines the required filter settings that will be used when executing evaluations.
The entry in the field Label is the description for the argument that will be
displayed in an selection dialog window when executing an evaluation.
Rule Sets to Apply
Selection of rule sets that will be applied for the evaluation. Only rule sets of the same unit can be selected.
Delete evaluations
1 Select the required evaluation in the list view.
2 Select Delete Evaluation in the toolbar.
Edit evaluations

2 Select Edit Group in the toolbar.
7.8.4 Execute evaluations

2 Select Execute Evaluation in the toolbar.
ð Depending on the settings, you are requested to enter specific parameters.
3 Enter the information and click OK.
ð After executing the evaluation, the generated report template will open.
7.8.5 Import and export evaluations

Evaluation settings can be exported or imported. This enables you to send definitions to another location, for
example, by e-mail or using a data storage medium. The export of an evaluation will always include the
associated rule sets and the report template to maintain the functions and settings. The file extension .lsrp is
used for rule sets.
Navigation: Analysis > Statistics > Evaluations
Import Evaluation
1 Select Import Evaluation in the toolbar.
3 The evaluation is displayed in the editor and can be edited according to requirements.
ð The evaluation, rules sets and report template has been imported.
ð Existing evaluations, rules sets and report template will not be overwritten, instead duplicates will be
generated.
Export Evaluation
1 Select the required evaluation in the list view and click on Export Evaluation in the or toolbar.
ð Evaluations, rules sets and report template are saved in the file system.
7.9 Method functions - Common

• This function is not available for the instrument type Titration.
7.9.1 User interaction
7.9.1.1 Beep
Use this method function to emit audio signals on instruments.
Method function: Beep
General
is supported.

Behavior
Duration Defines the length of the beep. 0.0 ... 30 s
Duration unit Unit in which the beep duration is specified. Seconds | Miliseconds
7.9.1.2 Sample IDs

Use this method function to display or request sample IDs. This method function is provided by default within
the method function Sample Scope, but can also be used within the method function Sample cycle.
Method function: Sample IDs
In the parameters of Sample Scope, you define the parts that form the sample's unique identifier, which will
then be used to identify a particular sample. In the top-level Sample IDs method function, only parts belonging
to the unique combination can be entered. In the method function within a sample cycle, additional IDs can be
requested and displayed. The unique parts can only be displayed here.
General
is supported.
Sample IDs
Edit mode Specifies how sample IDs can be requested, added and No editing | Request
displayed. from user | Set sample
No editing: The sample ID remains unchanged. ID
Request from user: The sample ID will be requested during task
execution.
Set sample ID: The value can be defined in Value.
Value Specifies the value for this sample ID that is used during method -
execution. If used within a sample cycle, data or text can be
referenced from method functions outside the sample cycle.
Displayed if Edit mode = Set sample ID is selected.
Show sample ID Determines whether the sample IDs are displayed, e.g. in a Active | Inactive
second cycle.
Barcode reader configuration
Close after If this checkbox is activated, the data entry dialog is automatically Active | Inactive
scanning closed following a successful scan procedure.
7.9.1.3 Message
Use this method function to display messages and instructions on instruments or on workbenches.

Method function: Message
General
is supported.
Message appearance
Show "OK" button If this checkbox is selected, the OK key will be displayed on the Active | Inactive
instrument.
Show "Cancel" The Cancel button allows the user to cancel the current task or Active | Inactive
button the "Sample scope".
User buttons A maximum of two user keys can be created. For this function -
you can enter text of your choice. Longer entries of more than 12
characters are abbreviated.
If a Decision branch method function is foreseen subsequently in the sequence, the key result of this method
function can be queried. A decision can then be made on this basis.
Background color Defines the background color of the message display. If "Default" White | Black | Green |
is selected, the default background color of the instrument is Red | Blue | Yellow |
used. Standard
Text Color Defines the color of the message display. If Default is selected, White | Black | Green |
the default background color of the instrument is used. Red | Blue | Yellow |
Standard
Message content
Caption Here you can enter a short text to be displayed as the title bar. 1…30 characters
Message Here you can enter a multiline text which is displayed as a notifi- 1…1000 characters
cation.
Data binding enables values from previous method functions to be used in text fields. The same syntax applies
as for formulas, but this must be contained in curly brackets. In addition to calculations or simple data
bindings, texts can also be entered.
Data binding Mean value: {mean(Weight1.Net)} g
Display Mean value: 5.342 g

Icon Defines which symbol is displayed with the notification. - | Info | Warning |
Question | Error
Return values
A link to the list of return values can be found at the end of this chapter.
See also
2 Use of messages } Page 204
2 Return values - Common } Page 245

7.9.1.4 Method information
Use this method function to display method information on instrument screens or on workbenches. This
includes information such as Method ID, Method Name and Release state.
Method function: Method Information
General
is supported.
7.9.1.5 Number
Use this method function to define numerical values. In addition, values can be entered on instruments or on
workbenches. These values can then be used, for example, as variables or constants.
Method function: Number
General
is supported.
Number entry
Lower limit This value defines the minimum value that can be entered. If no - | Any numerical value
value is entered, there is no lower limit.
Upper limit This value defines the maximum value that can be entered. If no - | Any numerical value
value is entered, there is no upper limit.
Default value Specifies the preset value. Any numerical value that
must be between the
limits specified.
Request value If this checkbox is selected, the value is entered on the instrument Active | Inactive
or in LabX. A default value can be preset.
Displayed unit Specifies the unit that is displayed on the input dialog. Any
Decimal places Specifies the number of digits after the decimal point. 0 … 14
Message content
If a message content is to be defined, this will be displayed at the start of the method function.

Message Here you can enter a multiline text which is displayed as a notifi- Any
cation. If the message is empty, the entry screen will be displayed
immediately.
Question | Error
Error message content
An error message is displayed if the value exceeds or falls below the set limits.
immediately.
Question | Error
If no message is entered, LabX displays a default text informing you that the specified limits were not
maintained.
Error message appearance
Background color Determines the color of the background for the notification. If White | Black | Green |
Default is selected, the default background color of the instrument Red | Blue | Yellow |
is used. Standard
Text Color Determines the color of the text for the notification. If Default is White | Black | Green |
selected, the default background color of the instrument is used. Red | Blue | Yellow |
Standard
Message appearance
Allow canceling If this checkbox is selected, it is possible to cancel this function. A Active | Inactive
dialog is displayed offering a selection of options.
is used. Standard
Standard
Export
Include results in If this checkbox is selected, the results are exported. (Only if in Active | Inactive
exports Method Properties > Export Template is selected.)
Return values

7.9.1.6 Selection
Use this method function to display selections on instruments or on workbenches. This includes to display
messages and instructions.
Method function: Selection
General
is supported.
Selection
Selectable items Define the elements that are displayed as a list on the instrument. Any
For this function you can enter text of your choice. Longer entries
of more than 12 characters are abbreviated. To add items, click
on New.
Using data binding, values from previous method functions can also be included, e.g. {Weight1.Net}. Later in
the sequence, a Decision branch method function may be provided since the list entry selected is requested, on
the basis by which a decision may be taken.
The sequence of the elements may be changed as desired while creating or editing the method.
Message content
immediately.
Question | Error
Message appearance
is used. Standard
Standard
Export

Return values
See also
2 Decision branch } Page 240
7.9.1.7 Text
Use this method function for entering text of your choice on instruments or on workbenches. This includes to
display messages and instructions.
Method function: Text
General
is supported.
Text entry
Minimum text Minimum permitted length of the text. If this value is set to "0", the 0...200 characters
length user is not required to enter a text.
Maximum text Maximum permitted length of the text. Without any specification, 1...200 characters
length 200 characters are permitted.
Default text Specifies the text that is used as a default in the input dialog. 0…200 characters
Request text If this checkbox is selected, the text is entered on the instrument Active | Inactive
or in LabX. A default value can be preset.
Message content
immediately.
Question | Error
Error message content
An error message is displayed if the value exceeds or falls below the set limits. This function is not available for
all instrument types.
Message Here you can enter a multiline text which is displayed as a notifi- 1…1000 characters
cation.
Question | Error

If no message is entered, LabX displays a default text informing you that the specified limits were not
maintained.
Error message appearance
is used. Standard
Standard
Message appearance
is used. Standard
Standard
Export
Return values
See also
7.9.2 Miscellaneous
7.9.2.1 Audit Trail

Use this method function to write an entry to the Audit Trail.
Method function: Audit Trail
General
is supported.

Contents
Information Text that will be written to the Audit Trail. -
General
is supported.
See also
7.9.2.2 Block instrument

Use this method function to block instruments. Tasks can only be performed on blocked instruments if Can run
on blocked instruments is selected in the method properties.
This method function is typically arranged inside a method function Decision branch. A method function
Unblock instrument can then be arranged inside another method function Decision branch.
Instruments can also be unblocked manually on the instruments or on a PC.
Method function: Block Instrument
General
is supported.
Blocking information
Blocking reason Reason for which an instrument was locked. This is displayed Any
both on the instrument and in the list of instruments. The reason
is also entered in the Audit Trail.

See also
2 Unblock instrument } Page 235
7.9.2.3 Data Access

Use this method function to access any results from a running task. The results are searched according to the
defined query in the method function. Results are values generated by the method function Result and Calcu-
lation (Titration).
Method function: Data Access
General
is supported.
Filter Settings
Search filter Define one or more criteria to search results. Data binding -
enables values from previous method functions to be used in text
fields. In Reference value, click on . The editor for data binding
is opened.
To add items, click on New.
Include inter- Intermediate results can be included if data from another running Active | Inactive
mediate results task directly before the sample is completed.
Sorting
Sorting Specify which results are to be used from the sorted list of results. -
If multiple results are found, the list of results obtained must be
sorted by a criterion.
Limit
Constraint Defines which result on the sorted list should be selected. It is Index range | First (One)
possible to select one or several results. | Last (One) | First
(Many) | Last (Many)
From index Defines the first index or the selection. -
Only appears if Constraint = Index range is selected.
To index Defines the last index or the selection. -
Only appears if Constraint = Index range is selected.
Test
Perform test Perform a test to check your query and your configurations Active | Inactive
directly in the method editor. Click Execute query to check the
settings applied.

Test filter Defines the test settings for one or more criteria to search results. -
Data binding enables values from previous method functions to
be used in text fields.
Return values
When multiple results are retrieved with the data access method function a vector is provided as a return value.
If one of the values in this vector is empty it will be output as NaN.
See also
7.9.2.4 Data input

Data strings from external sources, such as barcode readers, contain multiple data types in a format of a
number, text and dates. These data can be transferred to a task by scanning the barcode once and use the
information repeatedly in a method.
Method function: Data input
Following the reading, scanning or entering of the information, the method function will split the individual fields
and can pass these fields to parameters of other method functions via data binding functionality.
The return values will be grouped by field types in the order as defined.
Pattern definition
Field type Separator type Prefix/Length

Text Prefix
Date/Time Prefix
Text Prefix
Number Prefix
Text Prefix Return values
General
Text 1
New Delete
Text 2
Text 3
Number 1
Date/Time 1
Creation time
General
is supported.
Data source
Request input If this option is selected, the user is prompted to scan a barcode Active | Inactive
or to enter the value manually.

Input data If defined as Task Parameter, a previously scanned SmartCode -
will be used for the pattern.
If defined as Data binding, return values from other method
functions are used.
Only appears if Request input = Inactive.
Pattern definition
Pattern Define one or more criteria for the pattern. -
To add items, click on New.
Field type Text: To define alphanumeric elements (text and numbers). Text | Number | Date/
Number: To define numeric elements. Time | Place holder
Date/Time: To define dates and times elements.
Place holder: To define a placeholder elements.
Separator type Prefix: Enter a prefix to be used for separation of the selected Prefix | Unused | Length
item. If the items have a fixed length, no prefix is required.
Unused: Placeholder that it is not used after the interpretation.
Length: If the item has a fixed number of characters, enter the
number of characters here.
Prefix / Length Prefix: Enter a prefix to be used for separation of the selected -
item.
Length: If the items have a fixed length, enter the number of
characters here.
Formats
Defines the formats that are used for the parameters in Pattern definition.
Date/Time Select the date and time format to be used. List of available date
and time formats
Decimal Select the decimal separators to be used. .|,
separator
Return values
7.9.2.5 Delay
Use this method function to delay the execution of a task. A countdown can be displayed during this time.
Method function: Delay
General
is supported.

Behavior
Display Indicates whether a countdown is to be shown on the instrument Active | Inactive
countdown during the delay time.
Delay time Determines the length of the delay. 1 s ... 24 h
Delay unit Specifies the unit used for the delay. Hours | Minutes |
Seconds | Miliseconds
Message content
Message Here you can enter a multiline text that is displayed as infor- Any
mation during the countdown.
Only appears if Display countdown is activated.
7.9.2.6 Label printer

Use this method function to send printouts to label printers. Printing takes place on default printers of the
instrument used for the method.
Method function: Label printer
General
is supported.
Contents to Print
Contents Determine which elements are to be printed. You can combine Any
different types of data, control characters, text, and data via data
binding, depending on the printer used.
The control characters that can be used depend on the printer model. For more information, see the printer
manual.
In most cases, the following control characters are supported: <tab>, <cr> and <lf>.
See also
7.9.2.7 Notify
Use this method function to display notifications or to send notifications via e-mail to the appropriate users in
LabX.

Method function: Notify
General
is supported.
Message content
E-Mail recipients Defines the e-mail address for direct sending. -
Notify responsible The notification is sent to the current responsible user. Active | Inactive
user
Roles to notify The notification is sent to the members with the selected roles. Active | Inactive
High importance Defines the importance of the notification. Active | Inactive
Subject Specifies the subject of the e-mail. Any
Message Here you can enter a multiline text, which is displayed as a notifi- Any
cation.
See also
7.9.2.8 Peripheral communication

Use this method function to communicate with peripheral devices. Commands can be sent and answers can be
received.
Method function: Peripheral communication
Peripheral devices are added in LabX and can be permanently assigned to instruments. Peripheral devices can
also be connected directly to instruments, whereby configuring is done at the instruments rather than in LabX.
Only one single peripheral device can be operated per instrument.
General
is supported.

Instruction
Instruction Enter a short instruction that appears as the first line on the 0…250 characters
terminal when the method function is processed. If no entry is
made, this step is skipped without any user interaction.
Instruction Enter a short instruction that appears as the second line on the -
description terminal before the method function is processed.
Peripheral Device
Target peripheral Defines the peripheral device to be used. Peripheral Device 1-4 |
Peripheral Device: Refers to the peripheral devices assigned to Instrument | Added
the instrument. peripheral devices
Instrument: Refers to the peripheral devices connected directly to
an instrument.
A peripheral device may also be selected directly.
Command Specifies the command that is sent to the peripheral device. If this -
field is left empty, a response from the instrument is waited for
without a command being sent beforehand. Data binding enables
values from previous method functions to be used.
Control characters are written in pointed brackets. ASCII code can
also be used for control characters. The number 12 in the
example is interpreted as "ff".
Example: "start<12>request<cr><lf>"
Control character table
Control character ASCII
<bs> 8
<tab> 9
<lf> 10
<cr> 13
<ff> 12
<esc> 27
<del> 127
Expected Response
The same control characters are used for the response as for the commands.
Wait for response Defines whether the response from the peripheral device is Active | Inactive
evaluated.
Response pattern Defines the pattern by which the received response is referenced -
in the return values. A response with no value is also possible.
[N1] references number 1. [T1] references text 1. Characters
must be positioned between placeholders (of the same type).
Example: "[N1]_[T1]end"
Use length Use this option when placeholders are used for termination or no Active | Inactive
response pattern is being used.
Response length Specifies the number of characters in the response. 1 …100000
Wait timeout [s] Specifies the maximum time after which the process is canceled. 1 …1000000

Return values
See also
2 Default assignments } Page 585
2 Add peripheral devices } Page 54
7.9.2.9 Read RFID tag

Use this method function to read information from RFID tags. Use of an optional RFID reader connected to a the
balance is required.
Method function: Read RFID tag
General
is supported.
Instruction lines
Comment Enter a short comment that appears as the second line on the 0…680 characters
terminal when the method function is processed.
Chip ID
Verify chip ID Defines whether the chip ID of the RFID tag is verified. Active | Inactive
Expected chip ID Defines the chip ID expected to read from the RFID tag. 1…30 characters
Only appears if Verify chip ID is activated.

RFID information
Format Beaker: For RFID tags (SmartSample) used on titration beakers to Beaker | *Chain of
store various sample information. Custody | *Identifi-
Chain of Custody (CoC): Used to identify the existence of cation | Pipette |
contamination and those responsible for the collection and *Pretare | *Sieve
transfer of evidence.
Identification: Used as an alternative to barcodes for identifi-
cation and to store various sample information.
Pipette: For RFID tags used on pipettes to store various infor-
mation.
Pretare: To identify tare vessels and to store pretare values for
error free retrieval when required.
Sieve: To identify sieves and to store the required values used in
workflows.
* Formats that are not supported by all device types.
7.9.2.10 Recreate task

Use this method function to generate copies of a current task with the same properties and task parameters, if
particular conditions are fulfilled.
Method function: Recreate task
1. Depending on the user's setting:
All results generated so far in this task are checked, to see whether one of them has the status Not OK.
Only the last task created before this method function is checked, to see whether it has the status Not OK.
2. The task has not yet been recreated.
3. The task is not running in automation mode in combination with a sample changer.
4. The task contains a maximum of one sample.
If all these conditions are fulfilled at the same time, a copy of the current task is created.
General
is supported.
Settings
Mode Defines which method functions are checked. Check previous method
functions | Check latest
method function
7.9.2.11 Report
Use this method function to generate a report that will be printed or saved to a PDF file.

Method function: Report
General
is supported.
Behavior
Printer Defines which printer is to be used for printing the log. Selection
Report template Defines which report template is to be used for the report. List of available reports
Use intermediate When activated, intermediate data for the report generation is Active | Inactive
data used at this point. If this option is not activated, data from the
next storage point will be used.
Report name Defines the name that will be displayed in the list view of Data > -
Reports.
Data storage
There are intervals at which the collected data is stored during method execution. As a general rule, data is
stored at the end of each method execution. This behavior can only be influenced through the use of a sample
scopes or sample cycles. All data collected is also stored at the time when entering a sample scope at the end
of each sample cycle.
PDF Settings
File
Overwrite the Defines whether an existing PDF file should be overwritten. Active | Inactive
existing file
Title Defines the title in the properties of the PDF file. -
Author Defines the author in the properties of the PDF file. -
Subject Defines the subject in the properties of the PDF file. -
Keywords Defines the keywords in the properties of the PDF file. -
7.9.2.12 Result
Use this method function to calculate results. Enter a formula of your choice with raw results, tables, or other
calculated results. Results can be displayed in the online view.
Method function: Result
Results are always recalculated during the method execution if the basic data changes. The changes to the
recalculated results is always visible at the time of saving (end of the method or end of the sample cycle) in the
online view. The value of the index operator [i] and the use of constants, e.g. [1] is considered as a constant
and does not change in case of recalculation. This response may be suppressed.

Examples
mean(Weight1.Net) Is always recalculated if a new measurement has been carried out.
mean(Weight1[s].Net) Is always recalculated if a new measurement has been carried out for the
same sample.
mean(Weight1[i].Net) Results that have already been calculated remain constant even if a new
measurement has been made.
mean(Weight[1].Net) Remains constant always even if new measurements have been made.
General
is supported.
Result
Main result Indicates that the result is a main result and provides additional Active | Inactive
options. Moreover, results are displayed in the Data workspace
and the Online view only if they are marked as the main result.
Main results may be applied only if individual results have been
calculated.
• These can be signed.
• Days can be assigned.
• A comment or remark can be entered.
• Tolerance values can be specified.
• The result can be displayed on the device.
Show result This specifies whether the result and notifications are displayed Active | Inactive
on the device. (
Only if Main result = Active is selected.
Activate basic This specifies whether basic statistic data, such as mean value Active | Inactive
statistics and standard deviation is displayed in the results.
Comment mode This defines the manner in which the user must or can enter None | Optional |
comments that appear with each result. To be able to manually Mandatory | Implicit
enter a text during task execution, Show result must be = Active.
None: No comment will be used.
Optional: The user is prompted to optionally enter a comment
during task execution.
Mandatory: The user is prompted to enter a comment during task
execution.
Implicit: A text can be formulated via data binding or a text entry
can be made.
Only appears if Main result = Active.
Comment The text can be formulated via data binding. Using data binding, -
values from previous method functions or from other methods can
be inserted. Alternatively, a text entry can be made.

Export
Calculation
Formula Specifies the formula for calculating the result. -
Unit Specifies the unit used for the result. 0…20 characters
Decimal places Specifies the number of digits after the decimal point for the result. 0…28
Suppress recalcu- Active: Results are only calculated once at the time of creation. Active | Inactive
lation This is the default behavior, since most calculations of results do
not have any dependencies across samples.
Inactive: Results are calculated every time new results are created
that have dependencies to this result.
Tolerances
Check result Defines whether the tolerances for T1+ and T1- should be Active | Inactive
limits level 1…3 checked.
Type Specifies the type of information for the tolerance. If "%" is Absolute offset from
selected, the tolerance is calculated as a percentage deviation nominal value | Offset
from the nominal value. If "Relative" is selected, the tolerance is as % of nominal value
calculated from the addition/subtraction of the specified value
from the nominal value.
Nominal value Defining the desired nominal value, which is used as the -1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
reference value for the tolerances.
Nominal value Defines the background color of the text when displaying the White | Black | Green |
background color results, if no tolerance has been exceeded. Red | Blue | Yellow |
Standard
Nominal value Defines the color of the text when displaying the results, if no White | Black | Green |
text color tolerance has been exceeded. Red | Blue | Yellow |
Standard
Nominal value Defines the symbol when displaying the results, if no tolerance - | Info | Warning |
icon has been exceeded. Question | Error
Nominal value Defines the notification text when displaying the results, if no -
text tolerance has been exceeded.
Tolerances T1…T3
T1+ Defining the relative upper tolerances in the unit specified or [%] 0 ... 1.0x106 |
relative to the nominal value. 0.0 ... 100
T1+ background Defines the color of the background when displaying the results, if White | Black | Green |
color the tolerance Tx+ has been exceeded. Red | Blue | Yellow |
Standard
T1+ text color Defines the color of the text when displaying the results, if the White | Black | Green |
tolerance Tx+ has been exceeded. Red | Blue | Yellow |
Standard
T1+ icon Defines the symbol when displaying the results, if the tolerance Tx - | Info | Warning |
+ has been exceeded. Question | Error

T1+ text Defines the notification text when displaying the results, if the Any
tolerance Tx+ has been exceeded.
T1- Defining the relative lower tolerances in the unit specified or [%] 0 ... 1.0x106 |
relative to the nominal value. 0.0 ... 100
T1- background Defines the color of the background when displaying the results, if White | Black | Green |
color the tolerance Tx- has been undershot. Red | Blue | Yellow |
Standard
T1- text color Defines the color of the text when displaying the results, if the White | Black | Green |
tolerance Tx- has been undershot. Red | Blue | Yellow |
Standard
T1- icon Defines the symbol when displaying the results, if the tolerance - | Info | Warning |
Tx- has been undershot. Question | Error
T1- text Defines the notification text when displaying the results, if the Any
tolerance Tx- has been undershot.
Tagging
Tagging mode This defines the manner in which the user can assign tags. Implicit | Explicit
Explicit: The tags can be assigned at the time of calculating the
results.
Implicit: Tags are assigned automatically.
Tags This defines the labels that are assigned automatically to the Selection
result when the labeling mode is set to "Implicit". The preset
labels cannot be changed at the time of executing the method
functions.
Return values
See also
2 Use of fx, data binding, task parameters, formulas } Page 195
7.9.2.13 Sample changer

Use this method function to approach a specific position on the sample rack of an sample changer.
Method function: Sample Changer
General
is supported.
Sample Changer
Sample changer Select a sample changer for the automation. List of available sample
type changers

Sample changer Specifies the way in which the sample changer moves to a Relative | Absolute |
position position. Home refers to position 1 or position 0, depending on Home | +1 | Detect next
the sample changer used. sample | Current
position
Position Sample changer position = Relative: The position is increased Number
by the specified number of steps relative to the current position.
Sample changer position = Absolute: The sample changer
moves to the entered position.
Lift position The vertical position to which the head of the sample changer Rotate | Conductivity |
should be brought. Rinse | Sample | Not
Conductivity: This position is 20 mm above the sample position defined
and is intended to immerse the conductivity sensor into the
sample but not the pH sensor, preventing electrolyte contami-
Lid handling Defines whether before analysing the lid of a sample should be Active | Inactive
removed with an attached CoverUp™ unit.
Return values
See also
7.9.2.14 Strip printer

Use this method function to print a defined content to a Strip printer that is connected to the used instrument.
Method function: Strip printer
General
is supported.
Contents to Print
Contents Determine which individual elements are to be printed. The data Any
are added row by row. You can combine different types of data,
control characters, text, and data via data binding, depending on
the printer used.
Please note, that tabs are supported by the syntax, but will not be
correctly printed on the strip printer. Curly brackets cannot be
used within plain text.

Example of data binding
See also
7.9.2.15 Task
Use this method function to manually or automatically modify certain properties of a task that is currently
running.
• Pause or stop tasks or end sample scopes.
• Continue tasks on other devices.
• Assign tasks to other users, roles or instruments.
Method function: Task

Data storage
General
is supported.

Behavior
Action Defines the action of the function. Runtime task actions |
Runtime task actions: Enables a selection properties that can be Pause and discard |
changed while the task is running. Stop Task | Pause /
Continue task | End
Pause and discard: To pause the task and discarding the
sample scope
measured values.
Stop Task: To stop the task and discarding the measured values.
Pause / Continue task only within a sample scope: To pause a
task and to change the user assignment, the role assignment and
the instrument assignment. If a new instrument assignment is
defined, it can be defined to automatically continue the task.
End sample scope only within a sample scope: To end the
current sample scope and to proceed with the method.
Reason Specifies the reason why a task was paused or stopped. The Any
reason is displayed both on the instrument and in the list of tasks.
The following parameters are shown if Runtime task actions is selected.
Rename task This enables the option to modify the name of the task. Active | Inactive
New name Enter the name of the task if Rename task is enabled. Using data Any
binding, for example, the sample ID can be transferred into the
name.
Change priority This enables the option to modify the priority of the task if the task Active | Inactive
is in a waiting state.
High priority When activated, the task changes the priority. If the Change Active | Inactive
priority option is selected and the High priority option is not
selected, the priority is set to the normal priority.
This is displayed only if Change priority is enabled.
Reassign to This enables the option that assigns the task to the user Active | Inactive
responsible user responsible. The assignments to other users or roles are revoked.
The following parameters are shown if Pause / Continue task is selected.
Change user Active: Enables the option to change the assignment. Active | Inactive
assignment Inactive: The assignment will not be changed.
New User None: The assignment of the task to a user will be removed. None | Choose a user
Choose a user name: To assign the task to another, unspecified name | List of users
user in the parameter User name.
List of users: Assign the task to another user by selecting one
from the list.
User name The name can be formulated via data binding. Using data -
binding, values from previous method functions or from other
methods can be inserted.
Alternatively, a text entry can be made.
Change role Active: Enables the option to change the assignment. Active | Inactive
assignment Inactive: The assignment will not be changed.

New Role None: The assignment of the task to a user will be removed. None | Choose a role
Choose a role name: To assign the task to another, unspecified name | List of roles
role in the parameter Role name.
List of roles: Assign the task to another role by selecting one from
the list.
Role name The name can be formulated via data binding. Using data -
Change Active: Enables the option to change the assignment. Active | Inactive
instrument Inactive: The assignment will not be changed.
assignment
New Instrument None: The assignment of the task to a user will be removed. None | Choose an
Choose an instrument name: To assign the task to another, instrument name | List of
unspecified instrument in the parameter Instrument name. instruments
List of instruments: Assign the task to another instrument by
selecting one from the list.
Instrument name The name can be formulated via data binding. Using data -
See also
7.9.2.16 Transfer data

Use this method function transfer data to a different open application on a client PC. While methods with this
method function are executed, some prerequisites must be fulfilled.
Method function: Transfer Data
Prerequisites
• A target application must be open on the system on which the LabX client is running. This is usually a
spreadsheet application.
• The window for the target application must not be minimized.
• A workbench with the Transfer Data component for the relevant instrument must be open in the LabX client.
• Activate the function and choose the target application.
General
is supported.

Contents
Data sequence Defines which data is sent to the target application. You can 1...3600 | -1.0x106 ...
assign an action to each element added, similar to a keyboard 1.0x106
input.
The sequence of the elements can be changed as required when
creating or editing the method.
See also
2 Data transfer - Workbench } Page 154
7.9.2.17 Unblock instrument

Use this method function to unblock an instrument that is currently blocked. To execute this method function on
blocked instruments, select Can run on blocked instruments in the method properties.
Method function: Unblock instrument
General
is supported.
Instruments can also be unblocked manually on the instruments or on a PC.
Navigation: Resources > Instruments
1 Select the required instrument in the list view.
2 Select Unblock instrument in the toolbar.
ð Depending on the system settings either the Unblock window or the Signing window appears.
3 Enter a comment describing the reason for unblocking the instrument and click OK or Sign.
See also
2 Block instrument } Page 218
7.9.2.18 Write RFID tag

Use this method function to write information to RFID tags. Use of an optional RFID reader connected to a the
balance is required.

Method function: Write RFID tag
General
is supported.
Instruction lines
Chip ID
Verify chip ID Defines whether the chip ID of the RFID tag is verified. Active | Inactive
Expected chip ID Defines the chip ID expected to read from the RFID tag. 1…30 characters
Only appears if Verify chip ID is activated.
RFID information
Format Beaker: For RFID tags (SmartSample) used on titration beakers to Beaker | *Chain of
store various sample information. Custody | *Identifi-
Chain of Custody (CoC): Used to identify the existence of cation | Pipette |
contamination and those responsible for the collection and *Pretare | *Sieve
transfer of evidence.
Identification: Used as an alternative to barcodes for identifi-
cation and to store various sample information.
Pipette: For RFID tags used on pipettes to store various infor-
mation.
Pretare: To identify tare vessels and to store pretare values for
error free retrieval when required.
Sieve: To identify sieves and to store the required values used in
workflows.
* Formats that are not supported by all device types.
Return values
See also
7.9.2.18.1 Beaker - RFID information

Beaker - RFID information
For RFID tags (SmartSample) used on titration beakers to store various sample information.

Available Select the desired attributes to write to the RFID tag. List of available
attributes attributes
ID 1 Defines a designation. This field may be used as a sample 1…20 characters
identifier.
ID 2 Defines a designation. This field may be used as a method 1…20 characters
identifier.
Density [g/ml] Defines the density of the sample [g/mL]. 1.0…100.0
Correction factor Defines a correction factor. 1.0…1.0x106
Sample weight Defines the weight of the sample [g]. 0.0…1000.0
[g]
Return values
See also
7.9.2.18.2 Chain of Custody - RFID information

Chain of Custody - RFID information
Used to identify the existence of contamination and those responsible for the collection and transfer of evidence.
Sample ID 1 Defines a sample ID. This field may be used as a sample 0…20 characters
identifier.
Text 1 Defines a first free text. 0…20 characters
Text 2 Defines a second free text. 0…20 characters
Date/Time Defines a date and time. Date/Time
Weight Defines the weight value. -
Return values
See also
7.9.2.18.3 Identification - RFID information

Identification - RFID information
Used as an alternative to barcodes for identification and to store various sample information.
identifier.
identifier.
Text Defines a free text. 0…9 characters
Date 1 To define a date. Date

Return values
See also
7.9.2.18.4 Pipette - RFID information

Pipette - RFID information
For RFID tags used on pipettes to store various information.
Pipette SNR Defines the serial number of the pipette. 0…15 characters
Pipette model Specifies the pipette model. 0…15 characters
Nominal volume Defines the nominal pipette volume in microliters [µL]. 1…20000
[µl]
Next calibration Defines the next calibration date. Date
Next Quick Check Defines the next date for checking. Date
Is single channel Defines wether a single-channel pipette is used or not. Active | Inactive
For data binding, use:
0 = Multi channel
1 = Single channel
Evaporation trap Defines whether an evaporation trap is required. Active | Inactive
No. of Defines the number of measurements for Quick Check (valid for 2…10
measurements all volumes).
Check interval Defines the check interval in days. 1…365
[days]
Volume 1 [%] Defines the check volume 1 (percentage of the nominal volume). 1…100
Systematic error - Maximum permissible systematic error (tolerance limit) for check 0.0…100.0
Volume 1 [%]… volumes 1…3 (percentage of nominal volume).
Systematic error -
Volume 3 [%]
Random error - Maximum permissible random error (tolerance limit) for check 0.0…100.0
Volume 1 [%] … volumes 1…3 (percentage of nominal volume).
Random error -
Volume 3 [%]
Free field: Name Defines the name of the freely usable field. 0…15 characters
Free field: Content Defines the name of the freely usable field. 0…15 characters
Return values
See also

7.9.2.18.5 Pretare - RFID information
Pretare - RFID information
To identify tare vessels and to store pretare values for error free retrieval when required.
Tare ID 1 Defines a tare ID. 0…20 characters
Return values
See also
7.9.2.18.6 Sieve - RFID information

Sieve - RFID information
To identify sieves and to store the required values used in a workflow.
Sieve ID Defines the ID of the sieve. 0…20 characters
Sieve number Defines an individual number for the sieve. -
Mesh size [mm] Defines the mesh size in [mm]. -
Mesh size Defines the mesh size in [mesh]. -
[mesh]
Return values
See also

7.9.3 Structural
7.9.3.1 Decide
Decide method functions contain one or more Decision branch method functions. Each method function
Decision branch can be defined with a condition. Any method function can be used inside this method
function.
Decide method functions are executed from left to right. LabX executes the first Decision branch for which the
specified condition is fulfilled. If further conditions follow whose conditions are also fulfilled, these are ignored.
A Decision branch without a condition can be placed on the far right. This is executed in all cases where no
conditions had previously been met.
Method function: Decide
General
is supported.
See also
2 Decision branch } Page 240
2 Message } Page 211
7.9.3.2 Decision branch

This method function cannot be inserted as an independent element, but is always a component of the Decide
method function. Each Decision branch method function can be defined with a condition. Any method function
can be used inside this method function.
Multiple decision branches can be inserted into the one method function. All decision branches are checked for
a true condition from left to right. The first one to return a true condition is executed and all others are ignored.
Where more than one decision branch exists, the one on the far right can be defined with no condition. This
branch will then always be executed if none of the previous branches fulfilled a true condition.
Syntax examples
• {Message1.ButtonResult}=="Name of button"
• {Message1.ButtonResult}==ButtonOk
These examples refer to a Message method function. The request for the OK button is predefined in the
variables.
Method function: Decision branch
General
is supported.

Behavior
Execution Specifies the condition using operators and data binding. Any
condition
See also
2 Decide } Page 240
2 Message } Page 211
2 Use of conditions } Page 205
7.9.3.3 Do while
Use this method function to repeatedly execute a task until the condition is no longer fulfilled. Any method
function can be used inside this method function.
This method function offers a return value that provides information on the current number of loops. The return
value Loop index can be used in all conditions or formulae.
Method function: Do while
General
is supported.
Behavior
Repeat condition Specifies the condition using operators and data binding. Any
See also
2 Use of conditions } Page 205
7.9.3.4 Sample cycle

This method function cannot be added as an independent element, but is always a component of the Sample
Scope method function. By using “drag and drop”, you can create multiple sample cycles to the left or right of
the existing sample cycles.
Method function: Sample cycle
General
is supported.

Return values
See also
2 Sample scope } Page 242
7.9.3.5 Sample scope

This method function forms the prerequisite for processing multiple samples with at least one sample cycle.
You can create multiple sample cycles to the left or right of an existing sample cycle. During execution, the
sample cycles for each individual sample are processed in the same order from left to right respectively.
What is decisive for identification of the sample is the combination of all parts of the sample ID that were
defined as Part of unique ID. After each sample cycle, the next sample must be defined by entry of all IDs.
Here, the behavior of the system differs depending on how the task was created.
Method without task parameters / product that specifies all task parameters
The unique parts of the sample ID are requested automatically, at the latest before the new sample cycle is
started. The entry of a new combination of unique IDs creates a new sample, otherwise an existing sample will
be selected. With a Sample IDs method function, the user has the option of defining sample IDs manually at
the time of the request.
Sample series / method with task parameters

LabX processes the samples defined by the series in the order specified. You can add other samples by editing
a task. See [Manage tasks } Page 173].
If the number of samples has been limited (see below) or a task with predefined samples has been created, the
sample scope is completed automatically when all samples have undergone all cycles. If no samples have
been specified, the sample scope may be completed with the help of Sample control > End sample scope.
This option is always available within the sample scope. If a task is interrupted during execution of a sample
scope (paused by a user or as a result of an error), the execution always starts from the beginning of the
sample scope on resumption of the task. All samples acquired and fully completed sample cycles will be
retained. However, the data from the sample cycle in progress at the time will be discarded.
Simple example
The order of the sample cycles during method execution is as follows.
Application case A A new, unknown sample ID is entered. This executes the first sample cycle with this
sample.
Application case B A known sample ID is entered, which executes the next sample cycle for this sample
Application case C A known sample ID is entered and all sample cycles have already been executed for this
sample. A message is displayed.
More complex example
An example with 3 sample cycles 1, 2, 3 and samples A, B, C, which are not entered in ascending order.
Sample ID Sample Scope
A 1
A 2
B 1
C 1
B 2
A 3
A All sample cycles completed. A message is displayed.
C 2

The IDs or "Keys" are queried in the higher-level Sample IDs method function in the sample scope. These IDs
are required for the decision as to which sample cycle the system should proceed. Additional IDs can be
queried if a Sample IDs method function is placed within a sample cycle.
Method function: Sample Scope
General
is supported.
Sample Changer
Use sample Enables the settings for the sample changer. Active | Inactive
changer position
Sample changer Select a sample changer for the automation. List of available sample
type changers
Default sample Specifies the position of the sample changer that is approached Not defined | Detect next
changer position when the function is executed. You can select a relative position sample | Current
or an absolute position. position | Home | 1 | +1
Offset | 2
Position Sample changer position = Relative: The position is increased Number
by the specified number of steps relative to the current position.
Sample changer position = Absolute: The sample changer
moves to the entered position.
Detect empty Defines whether empty positions should be checked. Active | Inactive
positions
Behavior on Defines what should happen when the sample changer detects an Error | End sample
empty position empty position. scope
Lift position The vertical position to which the head of the sample changer Rotate | Conductivity |
should be brought. Rinse | Sample | Not
Conductivity: This position is 20 mm above the sample position defined
and is intended to immerse the conductivity sensor into the
sample but not the pH sensor, preventing electrolyte contami-
Lid handling Defines whether before analysing the lid of a sample should be Active | Inactive
Limit Number of Samples
Limit Number of Enables the settings for limiting the number of samples. If this Active | Inactive
Samples option is not enabled, the sample cycle is terminated manually.
Number of Defines the maximum number of samples. Once this number has 1…2000
Samples been reached, no further samples can be added. If the sample
scope contains only one sample cycle, the sample scope will be
completed.
Request value If this option is selected, the user is prompted to enter the value Active | Inactive
when the task starts.

Sample ID Configuration
Number of Defines the number of sample IDs to be shown in the method 1…6
sample IDs editor and other related dialogs, i.e. task editor and workbench.
Data markings
Mark unfinished Defines whether samples that have not completed all Active | Inactive
samples measurements are marked in the results.
Sample ID
Label Determines the label or title bar when the ID is entered on the Any
instrument.
Default value If Auto ID generation is not enabled. Any
Specifies the default value, which is predefined as the ID in the
input dialog.
If Auto ID generation is enabled.
It specifies the starting value. For each placeholder in Auto ID
generation a corresponding value must exist in the same order.
Part of unique ID Determines whether this ID is used as a key. Active | Inactive
Mandatory Determines whether an input is mandatory. Active | Inactive
Auto ID Activates the automatic generation of an ID. It is ensured that a Active | Inactive
generation value has been entered at the end of the last sample cycle for
each sample.
Request initial The user is prompted to enter the value when the first ID is to be Active | Inactive
counter value used.
Displayed if Auto ID generation = Active is selected.
Auto ID format Specifies the template, which in addition to a free text may also Any
contain an arbitrary quantity of placeholders #, 0 (zero), and @.
The character # represents a number, 0 (zero) represents a
number without preceding zeros. The character @ represents a
letter. Space characters or _ can be used to separate a free text
from placeholders.
Example of Auto ID generation
Entry
Parameter Entry
Auto ID format ID_@##
Default value (Auto ID start value) C10
Generated values
First ID_C10
Second ID_C11
Third ID_C12
…
One hundred ID_D10
In this example, if C99 is reached, the counting continues with D00.

letters are used on the right, counting begins using the letters in ascending order first. When Z is reached, the
When the maximum value in the character sequence is reached (Z99 in the example above), no further
samples can be created. This still applies even if the value in Limit Number of Samples would permit more
samples. If the sample scope contains more than one sample cycle, the system now explicitly asks for the
sample ID for the next sample to be processed and starts at the next respective sample cycle. If the sample
scope contains one sample cycle, however, the sample scope will be completed.
See also
2 Manage tasks } Page 173
7.9.4 Return values - Common

functions.
Sample available Indicates if a sample could be found. True | False
Absolute position The position to which the sample changer moved. 1…303
Answer Syntax verification of the response of a received string. Not OK | OK
successfully
parsed
Button Request for the key that was pressed on the instrument. Used in -
method functions Text/Selection/Message.
Comment The comment, entered by the user or defined in the method -
function Result.
Creation time The time at which return values are created. The time is visible on -
the results display.
Cycle index Returns the sample cycle and index. -
Date/Time 1…5 Date/Time output of method function Data input. -
Formula Formula used in method function Result. -
Limit exceeded The maximum number of records has been exceeded in Data True | False
Access.
Loop index The index of the last execution of a Do while loop. Number
Violated tolerance Specifies the tolerance range in which the result falls. In the case T3+, T2+, T1+,
range of a list, this specifies the maximum tolerance range of the list Nominal value, T1-,
values. T2-, T3-, Undefined
Name The name of the result, found by the method function Data -
Access.
Nominal value Target value that is used for comparison with the calculated -
result.
Number 1 - 10 Request for the number entered on the instrument. -
Number of The number of matches in method function Data Access Number
matches
Overall state Specifies the summarized result state. Not OK | OK | Uncertain
Received answer The received string of the peripheral device of method function -
Peripheral communication.
Result The calculated result of method function Result. Number / Vector

Result comment The comment, entered by the user or defined in the method -
function Result.
Result index The sample specific result index retrieved by the method function -
Data Access.
Result value The result value retrieved by the method function Data Access. -
Result timestamp Timestamp of the measurment Date/Time
Sample ID The sample IDs retrieved by the method function Data Access. -
State Specifies the status of the result. Not OK | OK | Uncertain
T1-…3 Negative tolerance value x. -
T1+…3 Positive tolerance value x. -
Text 1…10 Text received by peripheral instruments of method function -
Peripheral communication.
Timeout occurred Did a timeout occur in conjunction with a peripheral device? True | False
Title The result title retrieved by the method function Data Access. -
Tolerance Range Specifies the tolerance range in which the result falls. T3+ | T2+ | T1+ |
Nominal value | T1- |
T2- | T3- | Undefined
Unit The defined unit for results. -
Violated tolerance The violated tolerance range in localized language. T3+ | T2+ | T1+ |
range localized Nominal value | T1- |
T2- | T3- | Undefined
Violated tolerance The violated tolerance range. T3Plus | T2Plus | T1Plus
range | Nominal | T1Minus |
T2Minus | T3Minus |
Undefined
Read RFID tag / Write RFID tag
Format Indicates the format of the RFID Tag. Beaker | Pipette | Empty
Chip ID ID of the RFID Tag. -

Legacy chip ID ID of the RFID Tag. -
Verify Chip ID Indicates whether the chip ID was checked. True | False
active
Sieve ID Defines the ID of the sieve. -
Sieve number Defines the number of the sieve. -
Mesh size Defines the mesh size in [mesh]. -
[mesh]
Mesh size [mm] Defines the mesh size in [mm]. -
ID 1 Content of ID1. -
ID 2 Content of ID2. -
Density Density of the sample. g/mL
Correction factor Correction factor stored on the RFID Tag. -
Sample weight Weight of sample. g
Pipette SNR Serial number of the pipette. -
Pipette model Pipette model name. -
Nominal volume Nominal volume of the pipette. ul
Next calibration Next calibration due date. DD.MM.YYYY

Pipette type Indicates the type of the pipette. Multi channel | Single
For data binding, use: channel
0 = Multi channel
1 = Single channel
Next Quick Check Next quick check due date. DD.MM.YYYY
Evaporation trap Indicates whether evaporation trap is required. True | False
No. of Number of measurements, valid for all volumes. -
measurements
Check interval Check-interval in days. days
Volume 1 Volume 1, percentage of nominal volume. %
Systematic error - Systematic error limit Volume 1, percentage of nominal value. %
Volume 1
Volume 2
Volume 3
Random error - Random error limit Volume 1, percentage of nominal value. %
Volume 1
Volume 2
Volume 3
Free field: Name Content of the freely usable field. Text
Free field: Content Content of the freely usable field. Text
7.10 Method functions - Balance
7.10.1 Instrument
General
is supported.
7.10.1.1 Adjustment
The balance will be adjusted according to the set strategy and parameters in Resources > Balance > Quality
Settings > Adjustments.

Method function: Adjustment
General
is supported.
Return Values
A list of return values is provided in the relevant chapter for all method functions.
See also
2 Adjustments } Page 607
2 Return values } Page 260
7.10.1.2 Automatic feeder

Use this method function to control automatic feeders that are attached to balances.
Method function: Automatic feeder
General
is supported.
Automatic feeder
Command Feed one piece: The automatic feeder delivers a single piece to Feed one piece |
the balance and then stops. Discharge
Discharge: The system feeds at the configured feed rate and
stops 90 seconds after the last piece has passed the light barrier.
Feed rate Defines the intensity of the feeding. Low | Medium | High |
Low: Lowest feed rate. Very high
Very high: Highest feed rate.
7.10.1.3 Draft shield

Use this method function to define the behavior of the draft shields.
Method function: Draft shield
General
is supported.

Settings
The available doors of the balance differ according to model and configuration.
Operation Close: The doors close automatically when the method function Close | Open as
is executed, regardless of the balance settings. configured | Open as
Open as configured: The doors open automatically as defined in defined
method function Settings when the method function is executed.
Open as defined: To define and use the settings within this
method function.
Left Activates the door settings for the left doors. Active | Inactive
Outer [%]: Specifies how far the doors are to be opened.
Inner [%]: Specifies how far the doors are to be opened.
Right Activates the door settings for the right doors. Active | Inactive
Top Activates the door settings for the top door. Active | Inactive
Top [%]: Specifies how far the doors are to be opened.
See also
2 Settings } Page 250
7.10.1.4 Info lines

This function is used to display several lines of text on the balance display.
Method function: Info lines
General
is supported.
Info fields
Information You can show several lines of text on balance displays, each split -
over three columns. Ideally, texts should be kept as short as
possible.
The fields can be formulated via data binding. Using data

7.10.1.5 Ionizer
Use this method function to activate or deactivate the ionizer. Neutralize the charge by holding and turning the
sample near the ionizer for several seconds. Turning the sample neutralizes enveloping charges.
Method function: Ionizer
General
is supported.
Instruction lines
Ionizer
Activate ionizer Defines whether the ionizer is to be activated or deactivated. Active | Inactive
7.10.1.6 Settings
This function determines the settings of the performing balance.
Method function: Settings
General
is supported.
Configuration
Set tolerance Option to enable the selection of the tolerance profile. Active | Inactive
profile
Set balance Option to enable the selection of the display unit. Active | Inactive
display
Set StaticDetect Option to enable defining the StaticDetect settings. Active | Inactive
Electrostatic charge detection will only be performed if activated in
the corresponding method functions (Weight or Tare).

Set antistatic kit Option to enable defining the AntiStatic kit settings. Active | Inactive
Set draft shield From user configuration: The individual user settings from the From user configu-
balance are used. ration | Active | Inactive
Active: Default settings from the balance are used.
Inactive: Draft shields have to be operated from the balance.
Tolerance Profile
Name Selection of the tolerance profile to be used. The default tolerance List of available names
profile is used if none is selected.
Balance display
Display unit Defines the unit that is shown on the balance display. µg | mg | g | kg | t | ct |
lb | oz | ozt
StaticDetect
Threshold [mg] Defines the detection threshold of the estimated weight error for 0…10
triggering an action.
Action Action upon detection of electrostatic charge. Accept | Prompt for
Accept: No action will be triggered, but results will be marked action | Do not accept
(Error due to electrostatic charge).
Prompt for action: A dialog window with the option Retry or
Accept is displayed. The task will continue if Accept is selected,
but results will be marked (Error due to electrostatic charge).
Do not accept: A dialog window with the option Retry is
displayed.
Include weighing Defines whether the estimated weight error will be shown on the Active | Inactive
error dialog window if an action is triggered.
Antistatic kit
This function only supports the door triggered antistatic kits.
Internal ionizer modules of XPR balances can only be activated via the parameter Active after door closed [s].
With XPR balances, ionizers are always switched off after 5 seconds.
After door opened Determines whether ionization is performed when the draft shield Active | Inactive
is open.
Active after door Determines for how long in [s] ionization is performed after the 1…1000
closed [s] draft shield has been closed.
Draft shield
The available doors of the balance differ according to model and configuration.

Draft shield Defines the draft shield operation for the functions Zero, Tare, From user configu-
automation Weight. ration | Active | Inactive
From user configuration: The individual user settings as defined
on the balance terminal are used.
Active: Automatic draft shield opening and closing according to
the settings in Draft shield opening configuration.
Inactive: Automatic draft shield opening and closing is
deactivated.
Draft shield Specifies the door opening settings for the method. Determines From user configu-
opening configu- how far each door is to be opened. ration | Custom settings
ration From user configuration: The individual user settings as defined
on the balance terminal are used.
Custom settings: To define the general settings that apply to the
whole method.
Left Activates the door settings for the left doors. Active | Inactive
Right Activates the door settings for the right doors. Active | Inactive
Top Activates the door settings for the top door. Active | Inactive
Top [%]: Specifies how far the doors are to be opened.
Return Values
See also
7.10.1.7 Validation
This method function validates the prerequisites of the performing balance.
Method function: Validation
General
is supported.
Balance prerequisites
If the prerequisites are not fulfilled, the method stops.

Balance Checks the readability in [g] of the balance. 0.0000001 | 0.000001
readability [g] | 0.00001 | 0.0001 |
0.001 | 0.01 | 0.1 | 1.0
Weighing Checks the required reading capacity in [g] of the balance and 1 ... 1.0x106
capacity [g] must correspond to the specifications of the balance used.
Approved balance Checks whether an "Approved balance" is to be used or not. Active | Inactive
There is no check with an empty selection.
Minimum power- Checks the minimum time [h] that the balance must be powered 1 ... 24
on duration [h] on, before measurements can be made.
Dynamic Checks whether the balance has to support dynamic weighing. Yes | No.
weighing There is no check with an empty selection.
GWP Approved GWP Approved must be activated on the balance. Active | Inactive
activated
Leveling warning Leveling warning must be activated on the balance. Active | Inactive
activated
Peripherals
RFID reader Checks whether an RFID reader is connected to the balance. Active | Inactive
connected
Automatic feeder Checks whether an automatic feeder is connected to the balance. Active | Inactive
connected
Quality prerequisites
Quality criteria to All: All criteria will be checked. All | Custom | None
check Custom: Selection of the own set of criteria to be checked.
None: There will be no checks.
Tests Defines whether the due date of the test will be checked. Active | Inactive
Balance service Defines whether the due date of the service will be checked. Active | Inactive
Calibration Defines whether the expiry date of the certificate will be checked. Active | Inactive
certificate
MinWeigh Defines whether the expiry date of the certificate will be checked. Active | Inactive
certificate
Check validity When activated, a validity period can be defined. Active | Inactive
period
Monitored objects Defines the minimum time period for monitored objects validity at 1...720
must be valid for start of the task.
[h]
Action when Ignore: No dialog window will be shown, but results will be Ignore | Prompt for
adjustment is due marked (Monitored objects criteria not fulfilled). action | Execute (no
Prompt for action: A dialog window will be shown with the option warning)
to execute the pending adjustment right now. The task will
continue if No is selected, but results will be marked (Monitored
objects criteria not fulfilled).
Execute (no warning): A required adjustment will be executed
automatically.

See also
7.10.1.8 Return values

functions.
Adjustment Language-independent result of the test method function, which False | True
successful? can be used as a decision-making criterion in the method
function Decide.
Adjustment Result The status of the executed adjustment. Passed | Passed with
warning | Failed |
Canceled
Adjustment The adjustment strategy used for the adjustment. Internal | External
strategy
'As found' test The status of the test. Passed | Passed with
result warning | Failed |
Canceled | Not
performed
'As found' test The difference of the expected weight and the measured weight in -
deviation %.
'As left' test result The status of the test. Passed | Passed with
warning | Failed |
Canceled | Not
performed
'As left' test The difference of the expected weight and the measured weight in -
deviation %.
Adjustment Indicates whether the adjustment tolerance was exceeded. False | True
tolerance
exceeded?
Fine range slope Calibration certificate values from the used tolerance profile. -
[C]
Fine range offset Calibration certificate values from the used tolerance profile. -
[Uo]
Fine range offset Calibration certificate values from the used tolerance profile. -
unit
Coarse range Calibration certificate values from the used tolerance profile. -
slope [C]
offset [Uo]
offset unit
Fine range max. Calibration certificate values from the used tolerance profile. -
load
Fine range max. Calibration certificate values from the used tolerance profile. -
load unit

7.10.2 Performance
7.10.2.1 Eccentricity test

A test is performed on the balance in accordance with the set parameters, using external weights.
Methods containing this type of method function can be used within Custom test. See [Custom
test } Page 613].
Insert a method function Test history record to define the pass or fail criteria and to write an entry to the test
history.
Method function: Eccentricity test
General
is supported.
Test Weights
The parameter definition takes place in Custom test, if Use custom test parameters > Active is selected.
Nominal weight Defines the value for the nominal weight. The nominal weight is Numeric
defined as the expected weight of the measured object.
Unit Defines the unit for the nominal weight. µg | mg | g | kg
Weight class Defines the weight class according to OIML or ASTM. E1 | E2 | F1 | F2 | M1 |
M2 | M3 | ASTM000 |
ASTM00 | ASTM0 |
ASTM0 | ASTM1 |
ASTM2 | ASTM3 |
ASTM4 | ASTM5 |
ASTM6 | ASTM7 | Own*
Result calculation Select whether the nominal weight or the conventional mass value On nominal weight* |
(CMV) is used for the result calculation. On actual weight (CMV)
On nominal weight: Nominal value of a weight with a specific
weight class.
On actual weight (CMV): Conventional mass value (CMV) of a
weight from the weight calibration certificate.
Balance display
Show preparation If activated, a predefined preparatory instruction is displayed in Active* | Inactive
instructions the test sequence.
Tolerances
Limit unit Defines the unit for the tolerance. Depends on the used
balance

Warning limit Defines the warning limit. Numeric | (0.001 ...
The warning limit is an upper or lower limit, which if exceeded or 100%)
not reached, makes more stringent process monitoring necessary.
The warning limit has to be smaller than the control limit.
Result if the warning limit is exceeded: The test is passed, but the
difference is higher than expected.
Control limit Defines the control limit. Numeric | 0.2 %*
The control limit is the error tolerance of a process with respect to (0.001 ... 100%)
its set value. Exceeding the control limit is a violation of quality
requirements and therefore requires a correction of the process.
Result if the control limit is exceeded: The test failed, the balance
is out of specification.
Custom Test Settings
Use custom test If activated, parameters from the linked custom test will be used. Active | Inactive
parameters This allows the use of the same method for multiple balances,
using different weights and tolerances.
Messages
Show result If this checkbox is selected, the results and notifications are Active | Inactive
message displayed after the test has been completed.
* Factory setting
Return Values
See also
7.10.2.2 Repeatability - 1 test point

The repeatability of the balance is tested according to the set parameters with the use of external weights.
test } Page 613].
history.
Method function: Repeatab. - 1 TP
General
is supported.
Test Settings

Number of Defines the number of weight measurements of a series. Numeric 10* | (2...15)
repetitions
Tare weight is If this checkbox is selected, this indicates that a tare weight is Active | Inactive
used used. The terminal displays an appropriate prompt when the tare
is to be placed on the balance.
Minimum tare Defines the minimum weight for the tare container. The test is only Numeric
weight continued if a tare container with at least this weight is placed on
the balance.
Minimum tare Defines the unit for the tare weight. µg | mg | g | kg
unit
Test Weights
M2 | M3 | ASTM000 |
ASTM00 | ASTM0 |
ASTM0 | ASTM1 |
ASTM2 | ASTM3 |
ASTM4 | ASTM5 |
weight class.
Balance display
Tolerances
balance

Messages
* Factory setting
Return Values
See also
7.10.2.3 Sensitivity - 1 test point

A sensitivity test is performed on the balance in accordance with the set parameters, using external weights.
test } Page 613].
history.
Method function: Sensitivity test
General
is supported.
Test Weights

M2 | M3 | ASTM000 |
ASTM00 | ASTM0 |
ASTM0 | ASTM1 |
ASTM2 | ASTM3 |
ASTM4 | ASTM5 |
weight class.
Balance display
Tolerances
balance
Messages
* Factory setting
Return Values

See also
2 Custom test } Page 613
7.10.2.4 Test history record

Defines the pass or fail criteria for performance tests and writes an entry to the test history.
Method function: Test history record
General
is supported.
Balance test result
Evaluate test Use formula: To define a formula whose result will define the Use formula | Set
result successful or unsuccessful criteria in Test result formula. "Passed" | Set "Failed"
Set "Passed": Used for a successful execution if based on a
condition.
Set "Failed": Used for a unsuccessful execution if based on a
condition.
Test result Here you can enter a formula whose result will define the Mathematical calcu-
formula successful or unsuccessful criteria. Use data binding to bind data lation
from other method functions.
Example: {Sensitivity1TP.IsTestSuccessful}==true
True = Pass
False = Fail
Return Values
See also

functions.
Test successful? Language-independent result of the test method function, which False | True
can be used as a decision-making criterion in the method
function Decide.
Result The end result of an adjustment or test. Passed | Failed | Passed
with warning | Canceled
Test result The result of a custom test. Passed | Failed

Test definition The name of a custom test. -
name
Test definition The internal ID of a custom test. -
internal ID
Creation time The time at which the return value was created. -
Center position - Eccentricity test: The weight value sent by the balance. This 0.0>… 1.0x106
Weight value is transferred from the balance without calculation.
measurement
Center position - Eccentricity test: The unit of the weight value sent by the Depends on the used
Weight balance. balance
measurement unit
Front left position Eccentricity test: The weight value sent by the balance. This 0.0>… 1.0x106
- Weight value is transferred from the balance without calculation.
measurement
Front left position Eccentricity test: The unit of the weight value sent by the Depends on the used
- Weight balance. balance
measurement unit
Front left position Eccentricity test: The deviation between the weight value -1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
- Deviation measured in the center of the weighing pan and the weight value
measured at this position.
Front left position Eccentricity test: The unit of the weight value sent by the Depends on the used
- Deviation unit balance. balance
Rear left position Eccentricity test: The weight value sent by the balance. This 0.0>… 1.0x106
- Weight value is transferred from the balance without calculation.
measurement
Rear left position Eccentricity test: The unit of the weight value sent by the Depends on the used
- Weight balance. balance
measurement unit
Rear left position Eccentricity test: The deviation between the weight value -1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
- Deviation measured in the center of the weighing pan and the weight value
measured at this position.
Rear left position Eccentricity test: The unit of the weight value sent by the Depends on the used
- Deviation unit balance. balance
Rear right Eccentricity test: The weight value sent by the balance. This 0.0>… 1.0x106
position - Weight value is transferred from the balance without calculation.
measurement
Rear right Eccentricity test: The unit of the weight value sent by the Depends on the used
position - Weight balance. balance
measurement unit
Rear right Eccentricity test: The deviation between the weight value -1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
position - measured in the center of the weighing pan and the weight value
Deviation measured at this position.
Rear right Eccentricity test: The unit of the weight value sent by the Depends on the used
position - balance. balance
Deviation unit
Front right Eccentricity test: The weight value sent by the balance. This 0.0>… 1.0x106
position - Weight value is transferred from the balance without calculation.
measurement
Front right Eccentricity test: The unit of the weight value sent by the Depends on the used
position - Weight balance. balance
measurement unit

Front right Eccentricity test: The deviation between the weight value -1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
position - measured in the center of the weighing pan and the weight value
Deviation measured at this position.
Front right Eccentricity test: The unit of the weight value sent by the Depends on the used
position - balance. balance
Deviation unit
Max. deviation Eccentricity test: The position on the weighing pan with the Depends on the used
weight position maximum deviation of the weight value measured in the center of balance
the weighing pan and the weight value measured at the other
positions.
Maximum Eccentricity test: The maximum deviation between the weight -
deviation value measured in the center of the weighing pan and the weight
value measured in the other positions.
Maximum Eccentricity test: The unit of the weight value sent by the Depends on the used
deviation - Unit balance. balance
State Eccentricity test: Specifies the status of the result. Not OK | OK | Uncertain
Actual repeata- In the repeatability test, standard deviation of the differences -
bility between the measured weight value with and without the test
weight.
Actual repeata- The unit of the repeatability. Depends on the used
bility unit balance
Tare weight list The list of tare weights used for the repeatability tests with tare. -
[g]
Zero weight list The list of weights measurements after zeroing. -
[g]
Calculated loaded The list of weight measurements with loaded test weight. -
weight list [g]
Difference list [g] The list of the differences of weight measurements with loaded -
weight and weight measurements after zeroing.
Deviation [%] Deviation from the expected weight in %. -
Net weight Measured net weight with loaded weight. -
Net weight unit The unit used for the measured net weight. -
Deviation Deviation from the expected weight. -
Deviation unit The unit used for the deviation. -
7.10.3 Measurement
7.10.3.1 Interval weight

Use this method function to perform a certain number of weighings at definable intervals and conditions.
Method function: Interval weight
General
is supported.

Instruction lines
Interval
Time between Specifies the time interval at which the individual measurements 0.05…1000
measurements are performed.
[s]
Start Measurement Acquisition
There are two ways to start the measuring procedure. As soon as the conditions for Automatic weight
detection are met, the weighing process is started. If Automatic weight detection is not activated, the
weighing process initiates as soon as the method function is active.
Delay time [s] Time in [s] until measured value acquisition is started after a 0…1000
defined weight or a difference has been reached. If “Automatic
Weight Detection” is activated, this is the delay time.
cation.
Activate If the checkbox is selected, the system uses automatic weight Active | Inactive
automatic weight detection at this point.
detection
Trigger mode Defines the trigger for automatic weight detection once a defined Above or equal | Below
weight or difference is reached. or equal | Any
transition | Positive
transition | Negative
delta | Any delta |
Positive delta
Limit [g] Specifies a defined weight limit in [g] that is used for automatic -1.0x106…1.0x106
weight detection.
Timeout Maximum time in [s] after which the weighing process is 1...86400
terminated if automatic weight detection is not triggered.
Stop Measurement Acquisition
There are two ways to end the measuring procedure: Automatic weight detection or a fixed number of
measurements to be carried out. The weighing process is ended as soon as the conditions for Automatic
weight detection are fulfilled. If Automatic weight detection is activated, the number of measurements must
also be specified. Whichever criterion is met will end the weighing process.
detection

delta | Any delta |
Positive delta
weight detection.
Number of Specifies the number of measurements to be performed. If 1…10000
measurements Automatic weight detection is enabled, possibly even fewer
measurements are carried out.
SmartTrac
The "SmartTrac" is a graphical representation of the remaining range, which displays the current occupied
range and remaining available weighing range at any one time.
SmartTrac type Here you can define the type of representation of the SmartTrac. None | Circle | Bar |
Beaker
Return values
See also
2 Automatic weight detection } Page 272
7.10.3.2 Pretare
A fixed tare value is entered in the software or on the balance.
Method function: Pretare
General
is supported.
Instruction lines

Pretare
Request value If this checkbox is selected, the value for the pretare is entered on Active | Inactive
the balance.
Pretare value Specifies the default value for the weight that is used for the tare. If 0.0…1.0x106
Request value is activated, the default value and the balance can
be overwritten.
Pretare unit Specifies the unit used for the pretare. g | kg | t | mg | µg | ct |
lb | oz | ozt
Messages
Warn for non- Determines whether messages are displayed if invalid objects are Active | Inactive
valid monitored detected at the time of execution.
objects
period
Must be valid for Defines the minimum time period for the objects validity at start of 1...240
[min] the task.
Return values
See also
7.10.3.3 Tare
The balance is tared according to the set parameters.
Method function: Tare
General
is supported.
Instruction lines
Measurement acquisition
Acquisition of Defines under which conditions the weight value is transferred. Stable | Immediate
measured values

StaticDetect
Electrostatic charges on weighing containers or samples can lead to incorrect measurement. The electrostatic
detection is used to measure electrostatic charges and quantify their influence on the weighing result. If a result
exceeds a user-defined threshold value, an appropriate message is generated depending on the settings in the
method function Settings.
The visual display in the weighing chamber shows blue during measurement. If a relevant charge is detected,
the visual display flashes as an additional information next to the message on the terminal.
The electrostatic charge of a sample can be neutralized by holding and turning it in front of the ionizer for
several seconds. For that, the ionizer needs to be activated in a method function Ionizer. Turning the sample
neutralizes enveloping charges.
Activate Defines whether electrostatic charge detection is performed. Active | Inactive
StaticDetect StaticDetect must be inactive when Measurement acquisition is
set to Dynamic or Immediate.
SmartTrac
Beaker
Automatic weight detection
Use these parameters to define the conditions under which the balance automatically detects placement of the
weighing object, which saves you from having to press a button to confirm. Once these conditions are met, the
weighing process is started. If the selected settings for Acquisition of measured values are then fulfilled, the
weighed value is recorded. Note that the net weight values are used for weight detection.
Alternatively, you can also press OK. The weighed value is still recorded even if the criteria for weight detection
are not fulfilled.
delta | Any delta |
Positive delta
weight detection.
Message Here you can enter a short text to be displayed during the delay Text
time.
Tolerance Violations
Upper limit This value defines the maximum weight in [g] that can be placed 0x106…1.0x106
on the balance in order to be recorded as a weighed value.
Lower limit This value defines the minimum weight in [g] that must be placed 0x106…1.0x106
on the balance in order to be recorded as a weighed value.

Action on Defines the action taken if the set tolerances are exceeded. If a Accept | Do not accept |
violation measurement is not accepted, the method function remains active Prompt for action
until the tolerances are met. By choosing Prompt for action, you
can define notifications that are displayed on the terminal.
Upper limit Provides information about the terminal on which the message is Text
exceeded - displayed when the limit is violated.
Message
Lower limit Provides information about the terminal on which the message is Text
exceeded - displayed when the limit is undershot.
Message
Balance keys
Activate "Zero" If this checkbox is selected, this key can be used on the balance. Active | Inactive
key
Messages
objects
period
[min] the task.
Return values
See also
2 Ionizer } Page 250
7.10.3.4 Weight
Use this method function to performed a weighing process in accordance with the settings.
Method function: Weight
General
is supported.

Instruction lines
Define the conditions under which a weight value is accepted. Stable means that a value is accepted as soon
as the display reaches a steady state. Immediate means that a value is accepted immediately. Dynamic: This
selection enables you to perform efficient, convenient, and precise weighing of unstable weighing objects (e.g.
animals). You can adjust the settings according to the weighing object, thus optimizing the speed at which
results are returned.
Measurement Defines the conditions under which the weight value is captured. Stable | Immediate |
acquisition Dynamic (Dynamic
behavior) | Dynamic
(Time interval)
Dynamic Selection of the tolerance profile to be used for the weighing List of available
tolerance profile process. tolerance profiles
Only if Dynamic (Dynamic behavior) is selected in
Measurement acquisition.
Timeout [s] Specifies the maximum time in [s] after which the weighing 1...3600
process is terminated if no stable value has been found.
Only if Dynamic (Dynamic behavior) is selected in
Measurement acquisition.
Dynamic time Time in [s] after which the weight value is captured. 1...99
interval [s] Only if Dynamic (Time interval) is selected in Measurement
acquisition.
StaticDetect
Electrostatic charges on weighing containers or samples can lead to incorrect measurement. The electrostatic
detection is used to measure electrostatic charges and quantify their influence on the weighing result. If a result
exceeds a user-defined threshold value, an appropriate message is generated depending on the settings in the
method function Settings.
The visual display in the weighing chamber shows blue during measurement. If a relevant charge is detected,
the visual display flashes as an additional information next to the message on the terminal.
The electrostatic charge of a sample can be neutralized by holding and turning it in front of the ionizer for
several seconds. For that, the ionizer needs to be activated in a method function Ionizer. Turning the sample
neutralizes enveloping charges.
Activate Defines whether electrostatic charge detection is performed. Active | Inactive
StaticDetect StaticDetect must be inactive when Measurement acquisition is
set to Dynamic or Immediate.
SmartTrac

Activate tolerance If this checkbox is selected, the tolerance values of the SmartTrac Active | Inactive
are enabled.
Beaker
Type Defines how the SmartTrac is displayed. Absolute offset from
nominal value | Offset
as % of nominal value
Tolerance unit Specifies the unit used for the tolerance for Absolute offset from -
nominal value.
Upper tolerance This upper value defines the level of precision for the weighing 0.0…1.0x106
procedure. Instead of a percentage value, it is also possible to
enter an absolute tolerance in [g].
Nominal value Specifies a defined weight in [g] that is used for the zero point of -1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
the SmartTrac. This may differ from the set value of the weighing
object.
Lower tolerance This lower value defines the level of precision for the weighing 0.0…1.0x106
procedure. Instead of a percentage value, it is also possible to
enter an absolute tolerance in [g].
are not fulfilled.
detection
delta | Any delta |
Positive delta
weight detection.
time.
Tolerances
Type Specifies the type of tolerance value, either as an absolute Absolute offset from
difference from the nominal value or as a relative difference from nominal value | Offset
the nominal value. as % of nominal value

Tolerance unit Specifies the unit used for the tolerance for Absolute offset from -
nominal value.
Nominal value Defines the desired nominal weight [g]. This is also used as a -1.0x106…1.0x106
[g] reference for the tolerances.
T1…T3 Determines the relative upper tolerances in [g] or [%] for 0.0 ... 1.0x106
weighing in to a nominal weight.
T1-…T3- Determines the relative lower tolerances in [g] or [%] for 0.0 ... 1.0x106
weighing in to a nominal weight.
Tolerance Violations
Upper limit This value defines the maximum weight that can be placed on the T3+ | T2+ | T1+ |
balance in order to be recorded as a weighed value. Nominal | T1- | T2- | T3-
Lower limit This value defines the minimum weight that must be placed on T3+ | T2+ | T1+ |
the balance in order to be recorded as a weighed value. Nominal | T1- | T2- | T3-
Upper limit Provides information about the terminal on which the message is Text
exceeded - displayed when the limit is violated.
Message
Lower limit Provides information about the terminal on which the message is Text
exceeded - displayed when the limit is undershot.
Message
Action on violation
Tolerance Defines the action if the limits are exceeded. Accept | Do not accept |
Accept: No action will be triggered, but results will be marked Prompt for action
accordingly.
displayed.
Accept is displayed.
MinWeigh Defines the action if the limits are exceeded. Accept | Do not accept |
accordingly.
displayed.
GWP Approved Defines the action if the settings are not fulfilled. Accept | Do not accept |
accordingly.
displayed.
Balance keys
Activate "Zero" If this checkbox is selected, this key can be used on the balance. Active | Inactive
key

Activate "Tare" If this checkbox is selected, this key can be used on the balance. Active | Inactive
key
Messages
objects
period
[min] the task.
Return values
See also
2 Tolerance profiles } Page 615
2 Ionizer } Page 250
7.10.3.5 Zero
This function is used to set a new zero point and all weight values (including the tare weight) are measured in
relation to this zero point.
Method function: Zero
General
is supported.
Instruction lines
Acquisition of Defines under which conditions the weight value is transferred. Stable | Immediate
measured values

SmartTrac
Beaker
are not fulfilled.
delta | Any delta |
Positive delta
weight detection.
time.
Messages
objects
period
[min] the task.
Return values
See also
7.10.3.6 Automatic weight detection

Using the parameters under Auto weight detection, you can define the conditions under which the balance
automatically detects the placement of the weighing object. Once these conditions are met, the weighing
process is started. If the selected settings for Acquisition of measured values are then fulfilled, the weighed
value is recorded. The following list provides an explanation of the options available for the trigger mode.

Positive transition
The measured value acquisition initiates as soon as the set limits are
exceeded. The weight value must either be initially below the set limit, or
Weight
must drop below this limit at least once while the method function is active.
Time
Negative transition
The measured value acquisition initiates as soon as the set limits are
undershot. The weight value must either be initially above the set limit, or
Weight
must exceed this limit at least once while the method function is active.
Time
Any transition
The measured value acquisition initiates as soon as the value falls below or
exceeds the set limit. The weight value may initially be above or below the
Weight
set limit.
Time
Above or equal
The measured value acquisition initiates as soon as the value reaches or
exceeds the set limit.
Weight
Time
Below or equal
The measured value acquisition initiates as soon as the value reaches or
falls below the set limit.
Weight
Time

Positive delta
The measured value acquisition initiates if the set deviation from the initial
value is exceeded while the method function is active.
Weight
Time
Negative delta
The measured value acquisition initiates if the value falls below the set
deviation from the initial value while the method function is active.
Weight
Time
Any delta
The measured value acquisition initiates if the value falls below or exceeds
the set deviation from the initial value while the method function is active.
Weight
Time

functions.

T1+ … T3+ Absolute tolerance value calculated from the defined values of the -
method function.
Nominal weight The defined value from the method function. -
T1- … T3- Absolute tolerance value calculated from the defined values of the -
method function.
Upper limit text Outputs the text specifying the range in which the upper tolerance T3+ | T2+ | T1+ |
lies. Nominal value | T1- |
T2- | T3-
Lower limit text Outputs the text specifying the range in which the lower tolerance T3+ | T2+ | T1+ |
lies. Nominal value | T1- |
T2- | T3-
StaticDetect Indicates whether the electrostatic charge detection was enabled. False | True
activated
Electrostatic Indicates whether electrostatic charge was detected before False | True
charge detected weighing.
Electrostatic The estimated weighing error due to electrostatic charge. -
weighing error
[mg]
Gross The gross weight received from the balance. -1.0x106…1.0x106

Gross decimal The used number of decimal places for the measurement. 0…8
places
Gross readability The used gross readability for the measurement. 0.0000001 |
0.000001 | 0.00001 |
0.0001 | 0.001 | 0.01 |
0.1 | 1 | 0.0000002 |
0.000002 | 0.00002 |
0.0002 | 0.002 | 0.02 |
0.2 | 2 | 0.0000005 |
0.000005 | 0.00005 |
0.0005 | 0.005 | 0.05 |
0.5 | 5
Gross unit The unit of the gross weight received from the balance. baht | ct | Custom | GN |
g | kg | msg | µg | mg |
mom | ng | oz | ozt |
dwt | lb | tlh | tls | tlt |
tola | t | Undefined
Gross time Time and date when the value was received from the balance. Date/Time
GWP Approved Indicates whether the measurement was GWP Approved. False | True
Reason for GWP Information why the measurement is not GWP Approved. Text
Not OK
Tolerance Profile The tolerance profile name used for the measurement. -
Is MinWeigh Indicates whether the measured weight was below the Smallest False | True
violated net weight defined in the Tolerance profile.
Smallest net The value as defined in the Tolerance profile. -
weight
Smallest net The unit as defined in the Tolerance profile. -
weight unit
Net The value of the measured net weight received from the balance. -
Net decimal The decimal places of the measured net weight. -
places
Net readability The readability of the measured net weight. -
Net unit The unit of the measured net weight. -
Net time The measurement time of the measured net weight. Date/Time
Net list List of measured net weights. -
Net decimal List of decimal places of the measured net weights. -
places list
Net readability list List of readability of the measured net weights. -
Net time list List of measurement times of the measured net weights. Time
Tare The tare weight received from the balance. -1.0x106…1.0x106
Tare decimal The used number of decimal places for the measurement. 0…8
places

Tare readability The used tare readability for the measurement. 0.0000001 |
0.000001 | 0.00001 |
0.0001 | 0.001 | 0.01 |
0.1 | 1 0.0000002 |
0.000002 | 0.00002 |
0.0002 | 0.002 | 0.02 |
0.2 | 2 0.0000005 |
0.000005 | 0.00005 |
0.0005 | 0.005 | 0.05 |
0.5 | 5
Tare unit The unit of the tare weight received from the balance baht | ct | custom | GN |
g | kg | msg | µg | mg |
mom | ng | oz | ozt |
dwt | lb | tlh | tls | tlt |
tola | t | Undefined
Tare time The time and date when the value was received from the Date/Time
balance..
Display The display readability of the balance display received from the 1 | 1/2 | 1/5 | 1/10 |
readability balance. 1/100 | 1/1000
1: Shows the maximum resolution
1/2: Shows the final digit in increments of 2
1/5: Shows the final digit in increments of 5
1/10: 10x smaller resolution
State Specifies the status of the measurement. Not OK | OK | Uncertain
Creation time The creation time of return values. Date/Time

7.11 Method functions - Quantos
7.11.1 Instrument
7.11.1.1 Front door

This method function defines the state of the front doors, opened or closed.
Method function: Front door
General
is supported.
Instruction lines
Operation
Operation This specifies whether the front doors are to be opened or closed. Open | Close
7.11.1.2 Validation and settings

This method function validates the Quantos requirements and defines the settings for the automatic sample
changer.
Method function: Validation and settings
General
is supported.
Prerequisites
Sample Changer Activates the automatic sample changer. Active | Inactive
The automatic sample changer accepts up to 30 vials and can
dose up to 30 samples automatically.

Sample Changer Settings
Vial diameter Specifies the diameter of the sample vial on the sample changer 24…28
[mm] in mm.
7.11.1.3 Read / write dosing head

This method function reads information from and writes information to the RFID chip of the connected dosing
head. Each dosing head has an RFID memory chip (RFID = Radio Frequency IDentification), which can
exchange data with the instrument. You can remove the dosing head and insert it into another Quantos and the
data is then available there immediately.
The counter for the remaining number of dosing operations is based on the maximum service life of the dosing
head.
If the container of the old dosing head still contains a considerable quantity of substance, you can unscrew the
container from the old head and attach it to the new one. To do this, copy the user data and the counter value
for the residual quantity from the old head to the new one. If the residual quantity for the next dosing operation
is no longer adequate, an appropriate warning message appears. You can remove the container from the head
and refill it.
Method function: Read / Write Dosing Head
General
is supported.
Instruction lines
Dosing Head Information to Write
Available Select the desired attributes that need to be incorporated in the List of available
attributes RFID information: attributes
Substance Specifies the name of the substance. 1 … 20 characters
Lot ID Defines the batch identification. 1 … 15 characters
Filling date Specifies the date when the substance was filled. 1.1.2000 …
31.12.2064
Expiry date Specifies the expiry date of the substance. 1.1.2000 …
31.12.2064
Retest date Specifies the date for the verification of the substance. 1.1.2000 …
31.12.2064
Initial quantity Specifies the initial quantity of the substance in mg in the dosing 0 … 1'000'000
head.

Label 1 … 4 Defines the lettering of the user-defined fields for free use. 1 … 10
Value 1 … 4 Defines the values of the user-defined fields. 1 … 15
Dose limit Specifies the maximum number of dosing operations with this 1 … 999
dosing head.
Return values
See also
7.11.2 Analysis components
7.11.2.1 Dispense
Use this method function to dose powder or liquid substances with the appropriate parameter settings.
Method function: Dispense
General
is supported.
Instruction lines
Substance
Substance type Specifies whether powder or liquid substance is used. Solid | Liquid
Dosing module
Use SafePos SafePos is activated here. Active | Inactive
The "SafePos" option moves the dosing head after each dosing
operation to a safe position and prevents it from coming into
contact with the vial.
Tapper activated The tapping motor is activated here. Active | Inactive
The tapper improves the material flow if it is inadequate.
Tapping before The function Tapping before dosing is activated here. Active | Inactive
dosing It automatically activates a tapping cycle prior to each dosing
operation. Tapping prior to dosing prevents large quantities of
powder from falling down during the dosing process and possibly
lead to overdosing.

Tapping before Defines the intensity of the tapper prior to dosing. 10 … 100
dosing intensity
Tapping before Defines the duration of tapping prior to dosing in seconds. 1 … 30
dosing duration
[s]
Max. dispense Defines the cancelation criterion of the dosing time in seconds. 1 … 3600
duration [s]
Dosing pressure Defines the pressure for the liquid dosing operation in bar. 0.3 … 0.5
[bar] Only if Substance type = liquid is selected.
Measurement Defines the conditions under which the weight value is recorded. Stable | Immediate |
acquisition Information field of the corresponding balance setting. Dynamic
Target range
Target [mg] Defines the target filling quantity for the dosing operation in mg. 0.1 … 1'000'000
Minimum [mg] Defines the minimum target filling quantity for the dosing <= Target and 0.1 …
operation in mg. Only if Substance type = Liquid is selected. 1,000,000
SmartTrac
The SmartTrac is a graphical representation of the remaining range, which displays the currently occupied
range and remaining available weighing range at any time.
Beaker
Messages
objects
period
[min] the task.
Return values
See also
7.11.2.2 Lock head

This method function defines the combined activity for locking and unlocking the head and the head verifi-
cation.

Method function: Lock head
General
is supported.
Instruction lines
Head verification
Available Select the desired attributes that need to be incorporated when List of available
attributes checking the dosing head. attributes
Head ID Defines the identification number of the head to be verified. 12 characters
Substance Defines the substance name to be checked. 1 … 20 characters
Lot ID Defines the batch identification to be checked. 1 … 15 characters
Remaining Defines the residual quantity to be checked in mg, which must be 0 … 1'000'000
quantity available as a minimum for one dosing operation.
Remaining doses Defines the remaining number of dosing operations to be 0 … 999
checked, which can be made with this dosing head.
Label 1 … 4 Defines the lettering of the user-defined fields to be checked. 1 … 10
Value 1 … 4 Defines the values of the user-defined fields to be checked. 1 … 15
Check expiry date Activates the checking of the expiry date. Active | Inactive
Check retest date Activates the checking of the verification date. Active | Inactive
Head Lock
Release head at Unlocks the head when the method is canceled. Active | Inactive
exit
7.11.3 Return values

functions.
Dispense
Dispensing time Time needed for the dosing operation in seconds
[s]
Substance Name of the substance on the RFID chip 1 … 20

Lot ID Batch ID on the RFID chip 1 … 15
Sample changer Current position on the sample changer 1 … 30
position
Initial quantity Filling quantity of the dosing head in mg 0 … 1'000'000
Initial quantity Weight unit of the filling quantity of the dosing head mg
unit
Remaining Residual quantity of the substance in the dosing head in mg
quantity
Remaining Weight unit of the residual quantity in the dosing head mg
quantity unit
MinWeigh state MinWeigh violation Violated | Not violated |
Undefined
Leveling state Undefined: The state of the inclinometer cannot be determined. Undefined | Leveled | Not
Leveled: The inclinometer has been leveled. leveled | Not available |
Not leveled: The inclinometer has not been leveled. Malfunction
Not available: The device does not have an inclinometer.
Malfunction: The inclinometer is defective.
Target [mg] Target weight of the dosing in mg 0.1 … 1'000'000
Minimum [mg] Minimum target weight of the dosing in mg <= Target, 0.1 …
1,000,000
Tare Tare weight sent by the balance. -1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
Tare decimal Specifies the number of decimal places for the tare value. 0…8
places
Tare readability Readability of the tare weight 0.0000001 | 0.000001
| 0.00001 | 0.0001 |
0.001 | 0.01 | 0.1 | 1 |
0.0000002 | 0.000002
| 0.00002 | 0.0002 |
0.002 | 0.02 | 0.2 | 2 |
0.0000005 | 0.000005
| 0.00005 | 0.0005 |
0.005 | 0.05 | 0.5 | 5
Tare unit Unit of the tare weight sent by the balance. mg
Tare time Date and time when the tare value was sent 01.01.2000 …
31.12.2099
Net Net weight sent by the balance. -1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
[WeightValue]
Net decimal Specifies the number of decimal places for the net weight value. 0…8
places
Net readability Readability of the net weight 0.0000001 | 0.000001
| 0.00001 | 0.0001 |
0.001 | 0.01 | 0.1 | 1 |
0.0000002 | 0.000002
| 0.00002 | 0.0002 |
0.002 | 0.02 | 0.2 | 2 |
0.0000005 | 0.000005
| 0.00005 | 0.0005 |
0.005 | 0.05 | 0.5 | 5
Net unit Unit of the net weight sent by the balance. mg
Net time Date and time when the value was sent 01.01.2000 …
31.12.2099

Gross Gross weight sent by the balance -1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
Gross decimal Specifies the number of decimal places for the gross weight 0…8
places value.
Gross readability Readability of the gross weight 0.0000001 | 0.000001
| 0.00001 | 0.0001 |
0.001 | 0.01 | 0.1 | 1 |
0.0000002 | 0.000002
| 0.00002 | 0.0002 |
0.002 | 0.02 | 0.2 | 2 |
0.0000005 | 0.000005
| 0.00005 | 0.0005 |
0.005 | 0.05 | 0.5 | 5
Gross unit Unit of the gross weight sent by the balance mg
Gross time Date and time when the value was sent 01.01.2000 …
31.12.2099
Display Display readability
readability
State Specifies the status of the measurement.
Creation time Creation time of these return values Date & Time in the
defined format
Read / Write Dosing Head

Head ID Unique identification of the dosing head for traceability
Substance Name of the substance on the RFID chip 1 … 20
Lot ID Batch ID on the RFID chip 1 … 15
Filling date Date of filling the substance in the dosing head 01.01.2000 …
31.12.2064
Expiry date Expiration date of the substance in the dosing head 01.01.2000 …
31.12.2064
Retest date Date for verification of the substance in the dosing head 01.01.2000 …
31.12.2064
Initial quantity Filling quantity of the dosing head in mg
Remaining Residual quantity in the dosing head in mg
quantity
Remaining doses Number of dosing operations that may still be carried out with this 0 … 999
dosing head (Limit - Counter)
Label Lettering of the user-defined fields 1 … 4 1 … 10
Value Value of the user-defined fields 1 … 4 1 … 15
Head production Production date of the dosing head 01.01.2000 …
date 31.12.2064
Head type Type of dosing head Solid | Liquid
Dose limit Maximum number of dosing operations with this dosing head <= Hard dose limit,
1 … 999
Hard dose limit Hardware limit for the number of dosing operations (service life) 1 … 999
for this dosing head
Creation time Creation time of these return values Date and time in the
defined format

7.12 Method functions - Titration
7.12.1 Overview of method functions
7.12.1.1 Method functions T5 / T7 / T9

A method consists of a sequence of method functions that are executed consecutively when a method is
processed.
Method functions can be located within a loop or outside of a loop. Method functions within a loop are
performed for each sample if the loop contains more than one sample. Method functions outside of a loop are
only performed once.
As an example, the list below shows the method functions for the standard method template Measure
(normal).
• Title
• Sample
• Titration stand (Manual stand)
• Stir
• Measure (normal)
• Calculation R1
• End of sample
• Record
The method function Sample marks the beginning of the loop and the method function End of sample marks
the end of the loop. This means, that if this loop contains two samples, the method functions Sample, Titration
stand (Manual stand), Stir, Measure (normal) and Calculation R1 are performed for each sample. The
method function End of sample is performed, after the second sample is analysed. The loop is stopped and the
method function Record is performed.
The number of loops and method functions allowed in a method differs depending on the method type and
titrator type. When establishing a method, certain rules (method syntax) must be followed. These fundamental
rules are described below.
7.12.1.1.1 General titration

This chapter describes the rules for the method types listed below.
• General titration
• Titer
• Calibration
• Standard Addition
Types and possible numbers of loops

The following table shows the maximum number of loops, the maximum numbers of method functions and the
allowed loop types for the different types of titrators and method types.
Method type Permissible loop Maximum number of loops per Maximum number of method
types method functions per method
T5 T7 T9 T5 T7 T9
General titration Sample loop 1 3 6 15 60 150
Titer loop
Calibration loop
Standard addition
loop
Titer Titer loop 1 3 6 15 60 150
Calibration Calibration loop 1 3 6 15 60 150

Possible numbers of method functions
The following table shows the maximum number of method functions that can be used within a method.
Method function T5 T7 T9
Title 1 1 1
Sample 1 3 6
Sample (Titer) 1 3 6
Sample (Calibration) 1 3 6
Sample (Standard 1 3 6
Addition)
Titration stand 1 12 24
(max. 6 per loop) (max. 6 per loop)
Rinse 1 10 10
Conditioning 10 10 10
Pump 2 20 40
Park 1 6 12
Conditioning (controlled) 10 10 15
Stir 3 10 20
Dispense (normal) 3 10 100
Measure (normal) 2 20 20
Measure (MVT) 2 8 10
Titration (EP) 2 8 10
Titration (EQP) 2 8 10
Titration (Learn EQP) 2 8 10
Titration (2-phase) 2 8 10
Titration (Therm.) 2 8 10
Standard Addition 1 3 6
Stating 2 8 10
Dispense (controlled) 2 8 10
Calculation 6 40 40
End of sample 1 3 6
Titer 1 3 6
Calibration 1 3 6
Auxiliary value 4 30 30
Blank 2 10 10
Auxiliary instrument 10 30 60
Instruction 3 10 20
Sync – – 20
Drain 1 10 10
Record 2 10 10
Liquid Handling – 30 30
Line rinse 1 10 10
Inserting and deleting loops

Follow the rules listed below when you insert or delete loops.
• You can only insert or delete entire loops from a method.

• You can only insert loops outside of existing loops.
• When you insert a loop using the Sample, Sample (Titer), Sample (Calib), Sample (Standard Addition),
Sample (Blank) or Sample (Standard) method function, a regular, correct template is inserted.
Templates for loop types
General titration
Sample loop: Sample
Titration stand (Manual stand)
Stir
Titration (EQP)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Titer
Sample (Titer) loop: Sample (Titer)
Stir
Titration (EQP)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Titer
Calibration
Sample (Calib) loop: Sample (Calib)
Stir
Measure (normal)
End of sample
Calibration
Standard Addition
Standard Addition loop: Sample (Standard Addition)
Stir
Standard Addition
Calculation
Record
End of sample

Sample (Blank)
Sample (Blank) loop: Sample (Blank)
Stir
Titration (EQP)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Blank
Sample (Standard)
Sample (Standard) loop: Sample (Standard)
Stir
Titration (EQP)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Method functions within a loop

The method functions that are permitted within a loop are limited and depend on the loop type. Follow the rules
listed below when you place a method function within a loop.
• One method function Titration stand must appear immediately after the loop-initializing functions Sample,
Sample (Standard Addition), Sample (Calib) or Sample (Titer). Additional method functions Titration
stand can be used in other position within the loop.
• The method function Record must be inserted after the method function that generates the results the record
should contain.
• The method function Calculation must be inserted after the method function that determines the raw results
for the calculation.
• A calibration loop must contain exactly one method function Measure (normal).
• A titer loop must contain at least one method function titration.
• A standard addition loop must contain exactly one method function Standard Addition.
The table below shows the method functions allowed within a loop.
Method function General titration, Titer Calibration Standard Addition
Titration stand • • •
Rinse • • •
Conditioning • • •
Pump • • •
Conditioning (controlled) • – •
Stir • • •
Dispense (normal) • • •
Measure (normal) • • •
Measure (MVT) • • –
Titration (EP) • – –
Titration (EQP) • – –

Method function General titration, Titer Calibration Standard Addition
Titration (Learn EQP) • – –
Titration (2-phase) • – –
Titration (Therm.) • – –
Standard Addition – – •
Stating • – –
Dispense (controlled) • – •
Calculation • • •
Auxiliary value • • •
Blank • • •
Auxiliary instrument • • •
Instruction • • •
Sync • • •
Drain • • •
Record • • •
Liquid Handling • • •
Line rinse • • •
Method functions outside of a loop

In addition to the preset method function Title, which always appears at the start, additional method functions
can be inserted outside of a loop depending on the method type. Follow the rules listed below when you place
a method function outside of a loop.
• The method function Calibration must appear immediately after the method function End of sample of a
calibration loop.
• The method function Titer must appear immediately after the method function End of sample of a titer loop.
• The method function Park must appear immediately after the method function End of sample, Calibration
and Titer.
The table below shows the method functions allowed outside of a loop.
Method function General titration, Calibration, Titer Standard Addition
Rinse • •
Conditioning • •
Pump • •
Park (position is fixed) • •
Conditioning (controlled) • •
Dispense (normal) • •
Calculation • •
Titer (position is fixed) • •
Calibration (position is fixed) • •
Auxiliary value • •
Blank • •
Auxiliary instrument • •
Instruction • •
Sync • •
Drain • •
Record • •

Method function General titration, Calibration, Titer Standard Addition
Liquid Handling • •
Line rinse • •
7.12.1.1.2 Volumetric Karl Fischer titration

T5 T7 T9 T5 T7 T9
KF Vol KF loop 1 1 1 12 150 150
Ext. Extr. V. KF loop – 1 1 – 150 150
Scan KF V. KF loop – 1 1 – 150 150
IM KF V. KF loop – 20 20 – 180 180
Stromb. V. KF loop – 14 14 – 150 150

Method function KF Vol, Ext. Extr. V. Scan KF V. IM KF V. Stromb. V.
T5 T7 T9 T7 T9 T7 T9 T7 T9
Title 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Sample (KF) 1 1 1 1 1 20 20 14 14
Titration stand (KF stand) 1 1 1 1 1 20 20 14 14
Drift determination – – – – – 21 21 15 15
Homogenizer – 2 2 – – – – – -
Mix time 1 1 1 1 1 20 20 14 14
Titration (KF Vol) 1 1 1 – – 20 20 14 14
Scan (KF Vol) – – – 1 1 – – – –
Calculation 4 40 40 3 3 40 40 40 40
Record 1 10 10 2 2 20 20 14 14
Auxiliary value – 30 30 3 3 30 30 30 30
Blank – – – – – 20 20 10 10
Instruction 1 10 20 3 3 20 20 10 20
Standby – – – 1 1 1 1 1 1
End of sample 1 1 1 1 1 20 20 14 14

• You can only insert loops into methods of the method type Stromb. V. and IM KF V..
• When you insert a loop using the Sample, Sample (Blank) or Sample (Standard) method function, a
regular, correct template is inserted.
Sample (Blank) and Sample (Standard) are only available for the IM KF V. method type.

• When you insert a sample loop into a method of the IM KF V. method type, the new sample loop inherits
some of the settings of the first loop of the method.
IM KF V.
Sample loop Sample
Titration stand (InMotion KF)
Mix time
Titration (KF Vol)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Mix time
Titration (KF Vol)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Blank
Mix time
Titration (KF Vol)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Stromb. V. without blank value
Sample loop Sample
Titration stand (Stromboli)
Mix time
Titration (KF Vol)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
KF Vol and Ext. Extr. V.
Sample loop Sample
Titration stand (KF stand)
Mix time
Titration (KF Vol)
Calculation
Record
End of sample

Scan KF V.
Sample loop Sample
Mix time
Scan KF Vol
Calculation
Record
End of sample

• The sequence below must be followed in a loop.
– Sample (KF) (only once)
– Titration stand (only once)
– Drift determination (optional, only once)
– Homogenizer (optional)
– Mix time (only once)
– Titration (KF Vol) or Scan (KF Vol) (only once)
– Calculation (optional)
– Record (optional)
• The method function Titration stand must follow immediately after the function Sample (KF) which
introduces the loop.
should contain.
Method function KF Vol Ext. Extr. V. Scan KF V. IM KF V. Stromb. V.
Titration stand • • • • •
Drift determination – – – • •
Homogenizer • – – – –
Mix time • • • • •
Titration (KF Vol) • • – • •
Scan (KF Vol) – – • – –
Calculation • • • • •
Record • • • • •
Auxiliary value • • • • •
Blank – – – • •
Instruction • • • • •
Liquid Handling • • – • •


• The method function Standby must be the last method function and must only be used once.
Method function KF Vol, Ext. Extr. V. Scan KF V. IM KF V., Stromb. V.
Auxiliary value – • •
Blank – – •
Calculation – • •
Drift determination – – •
Instruction – • •
Liquid Handling – – •
Record – • •
Standby – • •
7.12.1.1.3 Coulometric Karl Fischer titration

T5 T7 T9 T5 T7 T9
KF Coul KF loop 1 1 1 12 150 150
Ext. Extr. C. KF loop – 1 1 – 150 150
Scan KF C. KF loop – 1 1 – 150 150
IM KF C. KF loop – 20 20 – 180 180
Stromb. C. KF loop – 14 14 – 150 150

Method function KF Coul, Ext. Extr. C. Scan KF C. IM KF C. Stromb. C.
T5 T7 T9 T7 T9 T7 T9 T7 T9
Title 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Sample (KF) 1 1 1 1 1 20 20 14 14
Titration stand 1 1 1 1 1 20 20 14 14
Drift determination – – – – – 21 21 15 15
Mix time 1 1 1 1 1 20 20 14 14
Titration (KF Coul) 1 1 1 – – 20 20 14 14
Scan (KF Coul) – – – 1 1 – – – –
Calculation 3 40 40 3 3 40 40 40 40
Record 1 10 10 2 2 20 20 14 14
Auxiliary value – 30 30 3 3 30 30 30 30
Blank – – – – – 20 20 10 10
Instruction 1 10 20 3 3 20 20 10 20
Standby – – – 1 1 1 1 1 1
End of sample 1 1 1 1 1 20 20 14 14

• You can only insert loops into methods of the method type Stromb. C. and IM KF C..
Sample (Blank) and Sample (Standard) are only available for the IM KF C. method type.
• When you insert a sample loop into a method of the IM KF C. method type, the new sample loop inherits
IM KF C.
Sample loop Sample (KF)
Mix time
Titration (KF Coul)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Mix time
Titration (KF Coul)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Blank
Mix time
Titration (KF Coul)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Stromb. C. without blank value
Mix time
Titration (KF Coul)
Calculation
Record
End of sample

KF Coul and Ext. Extr. C.
Sample loop (KFCoul): Sample (KF)
Mix time
Titration (KF Coul)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Scan KF C.
Mix time
Scan (KF Coul)
Calculation
Record
End of sample

– Titration (KF Coul) or Scan (KF Coul) (only once)
should contain.
Method function KF Coul, Ext. Extr. C. Scan KF C. IM KF C., Stromb. C.
Mix time • • •
Titration (KF Coul) • – •
Scan (KF Coul) – • –
Record • • •
Blank – – •


• The method function Standby must be in the last method function and must only be used once.
Blank – – •
Record – • •
Standby – • •
7.12.1.1.4 Bromine index

Method type Permissible Maximum number of loops per method Maximum number of method functions
loop types per method
T5 T7 T9 T5 T7 T9
Bromine Sample loop 2 3 3 15 150 150
Index

Method function Max. number per method
T5 T7 T9
Title 1 1 1
Sample 2 3 3
Titration stand 2 3 3
Pretitration 2 3 3
Mix time 2 3 3
Titration (EP Coul) 2 3 3
Calculation 3 40 40
Record 2 10 10
Blank 1 10 10
Instruction 3 10 20
End of sample 2 3 3

• When you insert a loop using the Sample method function, a regular, correct template is inserted.

Bromine Index
Sample loop: Sample
Mix time
Titration (EP Coul)
Calculation
Record
End of sample

– Sample (only once)
– Pretitration (optional, only once)
– Titration (EP Coul) (only once)
• The method function Titration stand must follow immediately after the function Sample which introduces
the loop.
should contain.
The method functions allowed within a loop are listed below.
• Titration stand
• Pretitration
• Mix time
• Titration (EP Coul)
• Auxiliary value
• Instruction
• Record
• Calculation
• Blank

can be inserted outside of a loop depending on the method type.

The method functions allowed outside a loop are listed below.
• Calculation
• Auxiliary value
• Blank
• Instruction
• Record
7.12.1.1.5 Overview of method functions
General titration
Method function Explanation Inside loop Outside loop
Title Title and characteristics of the method. No Yes
Sample Start of a sample loop. Start of loop
Sample (Titer) Start of a loop for titer determination Start of loop
Sample (Calibration) Start of a loop for sensor calibration. Start of loop
Sample (Standard Addition) Start of a loop for standard addition. Start of loop
Titration stand Selects titration stand. Yes No
Rinse Rinsing function for a sensor or stirrer. Yes Yes
Conditioning Conditioning function for sample changer. Yes Yes
Pump Pumps a defined volume of a liquid. Yes Yes
Park Park function for sample changer. No Yes
Conditioning (controlled) Conditioning makes a sensor suitable for Yes Yes
the next analysis.
Stir Activates a stirrer. Yes No
Dispense (normal) Dispenses a defined quantity of titrant. Yes Yes
Measure (normal) For the controlled acquisition of a Yes No
measured value from a sensor.
Measure (MVT) Creates a table of measured values from Yes No
the measured values of a sensor over a
certain period of time.
Titration (EQP) Conducts an equivalence-point titration. Yes No
Titration (Learn EQP) Conducts an equivalence-point titration to Yes No
determine optimal settings for the
parameters of an equivalence-point
titration. Once the equivalence point is
found, the Titration (Learn EQP) is trans-
formed into a Titration (EQP) with the
optimal parameters. If the analysis has
more than one sample, the subsequent
samples are titrated and analyzed with
these optimal parameters.
Titration (EP) Conducts an end-point titration. Yes No
Titration (2-phase) Conducts a two-phase titration Yes No
Titration (Therm.) Conducts a thermometric equivalence-point Yes No
titration.
Standard Addition Determines the concentration for a sample Yes No
solution using the standard addition
principle.

Stating A sample solution can be maintained at a Yes No
constant pH value using the stating
function.
Dispense (controlled) Controlled dispensing with potential or Yes No
temperature monitoring.
Calculation Converts the analysis results. Yes Yes
End of sample Concludes a sample loop. End of loop
Titer Assigns the result of a titer sample loop to No Yes
a titer.
Calibration Assigns the result of a calibration loop to a No Yes
sensor.
Auxiliary value Assigns a result or an arbitrary value to an Yes Yes
auxiliary value and updates the value
stored in Setup.
Blank Assigns a result or an arbitrary value to a Yes Yes
blank and updates the value stored in
Setup.
Auxiliary instrument Activates external auxiliary instruments. Yes Yes
Instruction Halts the analysis and displays instructions Yes Yes
on the screen for the user.
Sync Synchronization codes are used for Yes Yes
synchronizing methods running simulta-
neously in both workspaces A and B for a
T9.
Drain Drains a volume from the sample vessel. Yes Yes
Record Defines the record data to be output to the Yes Yes
printer.
Liquid Handling Automated dosing of aqueous or non- Yes Yes
aqueous liquids with a Liquid handler.
Line rinse Rinse the lines of an InMotion sample Yes Yes
changer.
Volumetric Karl Fischer titration

Sample (KF) Start of a sample loop for a Karl Fischer Start of loop
titration.
Drift determination Determines the drift for Karl Fischer Yes Yes
titrations.
Homogenizer Controls a homogenizer and defines the Yes No
speed (only for RS homogenizer) and
duration of its usage.
Mix time Duration of the mixing process. This value Yes No
is gained from experience. It can be entered
specifically for each sample.
Titration (KF Vol) Conducts a volumetric Karl Fischer titration. Yes No

Scan (KF Vol) Volumetric Karl Fischer titration of a sample Yes No
that is heated at a constant rate from a
defined start to a defined end temperature.
printer.
stored in Setup.
Setup.
aqueous liquids with a Liquid handler.
Standby Returns the titrator to standby mode on No Yes
completion of a series, so that a new series
can be started quickly.
Coulometric Karl Fischer titration

titration.
titrations.
Titration (KF Coul) Conducts a coulometric Karl Fischer Yes No
titration.
Scan (KF Coul) Coulometric Karl Fischer titration of a Yes No
sample that is heated at a constant rate
from a defined start to a defined end
temperature.
printer.
stored in Setup.
Setup.

Bromine Index
Pretitration Pretitration for a method function Titration Yes No
(EP Coul) that is performed with low
currents and samples with low concen-
trations.
Titration (EP Coul) Conducts an end-point titration with coulo- Yes No
metric production of the titrant.
printer.
stored in Setup.
Setup.
7.12.1.2 Method functions T50 / T70 / T90

Overview of method functions: GT
Functions Explanation Inside loop Outside loop
Sample (Titer) Start of a loop for titer determination
Sample (Calibration) Start of a loop for sensor calibration.
Line rinse Rinse the lines of an InMotion sample Yes Yes
changer.
Liquid Handling Performs aspirating or dispensing Yes Yes
functions.
Mix time Duration of the mixing process This value Yes No

Rinse Rinsing function for a sensor or stirrer. Yes Yes
Conditioning Conditioning function for sample changer. Yes Yes
Pumps Pumps a defined volume of a liquid. Yes Yes
aqueous liquids (the method function
Liquid Handling is described in the
Operating Instructions of the "Liquid
Handler".
Park Park function for sample changer. No Yes
Sync Synchronization codes are used for Yes Yes
synchronizing methods running simulta-
neously in both workspaces A and B for a
T90.
Measure (MVT) Creates a table of measured values from Yes No
the measured values of a sensor over a
certain period of time.
titration.
Titration (Therm.) Conducts a thermometric titration. Yes No
Titration (2-phase) Conducts a two-phase titration Yes No
Stating A sample solution can be maintained at a Yes No
constant pH value using the stating
function.
Dispense (controlled) Controlled dispensing with potential or Yes No
temperature monitoring.
End of sample Concludes a sample loop. End of loop Yes
a titer.
sensor.
stored in Setup.
Setup.
Drain Drains a volume from the sample vessel.. Yes Yes

printer.
Overview of method functions: KF Vol
Sample (KF) Start of a sample loop. Start of loop
Titration stand (KF stand) Select a titration stand. Yes No
duration of its usage (not for method types
Stromboli or Ext. Extr.).
Titration (KF Vol) Conducts a Karl Fischer titration. Yes No
All auxiliary values Assigns a result or an arbitrary value to an Yes Yes
stored in Setup.
Instruction Pauses the analysis and displays Yes Yes
instructions on the screen for the user.
printer.
titrations (only for method types Stromboli
Coul.).
blank and updates the value saved in the
setup (only for method types Stromboli
Coul.).
completion of the Stromboli Coul. series,
so that new series can be started quickly.
Note
The following sequence must be observed within the Karl Fischer loop:
1. Sample
2. Titration stand
3. Drift determination (only for Stromboli Coul.)*
4. Homogenizer*
5. Mix time
6. Titration
7. Calculation*
8. Record*
9. End of sample
10. Standby*(only for Stromboli Coul.)
Functions marked with * are optional.

Possible number of method functions: GT
The number of method functions that can be used within a method is limited and depends on the type of
titrator:
Method function T50 T70 T90
Title 1 1 1
Sample 1 3 6
Sample (Titer)
Sample (Calibration)
Titration stand 1 6 (max. 2 /loop) 24
(6 loops x 4 Titration
stand; 1 loop max. 4
Titration stand)
Rinse 1 10 10
Conditioning 10 10 10
Pumps 2 20 40
Park 1 6 12
Stir 2 10 20
Dispense (normal) 3 10 100
Measure (normal) 2 20 20
Measure (MVT) 2 8 10
Titration (EQP)
Titration (EP)
Titration (Learn EQP)
Stating
Dispense (controlled)
Titration (2-phase)
Calculation 6 40 40
End of sample 1 3 6
Titer 1 3 6
Calibration
Blank 1 10 10
Auxiliary instrument 10 30 60
Instruction 3 10 10
Drain 1 10 10
Record 2 10 10
Further method functions are available for the Karl Fischer (KF) method types. The following table shows the
method functions for T70/T90 for the KF method types only (KF Vol, Stromboli Coul. and external extraction).
The maximum number of functions per method is listed.
Possible number of method functions: KF Vol and Stromboli Coul.
Method function Max. Number per Method for Max. Number for Stromboli
All KF Method Types Except Methods
Stromboli
Title 1 1
Sample (KF) 1 14

Stromboli
Titration stand (KF) 1 14
Titration (KF Vol) 1 14
Calculation 40 40
End of sample 1 14
Auxiliary value 30 30
Blank - 10
Instruction 10 10
Record 10 14
Drift determination - 14
Mix time 1 15
Homogenizer 2 -
Standby (Stromboli) - 1
Possible number of loops

Nested loops (scopes) are not permitted. Loops can only be inserted into or deleted from a method as a whole.
The number of loops allowed in a method differs depending on the method type and device type:
Method type Permissible loop Maximum number of loops per method
types
T50 T70 T90
GT Sample loop 1 6 6
Titer loop
Calibration loop
Titer Titer loop 1 6 6
Calib. Calibration loop 1 6 6
KF Vol KF loop 1 1 1
Ext. Extr. V. KF loop - 1 1
Stromb. V. KF loop - 14 14
7.12.1.3 Method functions G20 S

processed.
As an example, the list below shows the method functions for the standard method template Measure
(normal).
• Title
• Sample
• Titration stand (Manual stand)
• Stir
• Measure (normal)
• Calculation R1
• End of sample
• Record

The method function Sample marks the beginning of the loop and the method function End of sample marks
the end of the loop. This means, that if this loop contains two samples, the method functions Sample, Titration
stand (Manual stand), Stir, Measure (normal) and Calculation R1 are performed for each sample. The
method function End of sample is performed, after the second sample is analysed. The loop is stopped and the
method function Record is performed.
Sample (Titer) Start of a loop for titer determination Start of loop
Sample (Calibration) Start of a loop for sensor calibration. Start of loop
Pump Pumps a defined volume of a liquid. Yes Yes
titration. Once the equivalence point is
found, the Titration (Learn EQP) is trans-
formed into a Titration (EQP) with the
optimal parameters. If the analysis has
more than one sample, the subsequent
samples are titrated and analyzed with
these optimal parameters.
a titer.
sensor.
stored in Setup.
Setup.
Drain Drains a volume from the sample vessel. Yes Yes
printer.

7.12.1.3.1 Types and possible numbers of loops
Method type Permissible loop types Maximum number of loops Maximum number of
per method method functions per
method
General titration Sample loop 1 12
Titer loop
Calibration loop
Titer Titer loop 1 12
Calibration Calibration loop 1 12
7.12.1.3.2 Possible numbers of method functions

Method function Max. number method functions
Title 1
Sample 1
Sample (Titer) 1
Sample (Calibration) 1
Titration stand 1
Pump 1
Stir 2
Dispense (normal) 1
Measure (normal) 1
Titration (EP) 2
Titration (EQP) 2
Titration (Learn EQP) 2
Calculation 3
End of sample 1
Titer 1
Calibration 1
Auxiliary value 1
Blank 1
Auxiliary instrument 2
Drain 1
Record 2
7.12.1.3.3 Inserting and deleting loops

• When you insert a loop using the Sample, Sample (Titer) or Sample (Calib) method function, a regular,
correct template is inserted.

General titration
Sample loop: Sample
Stir
Titration (EQP)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Titer
Sample (Titer) loop: Sample (Titer)
Stir
Titration (EQP)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Titer
Calibration
Sample (Calib) loop: Sample (Calib)
Stir
Measure (normal)
End of sample
Calibration
7.12.1.3.4 Method functions within a loop

• One method function Titration stand must appear immediately after the loop-initializing functions Sample,
Sample (Calib) or Sample (Titer). Additional method functions Titration stand can be used in other
position within the loop.
should contain.
• A calibration loop must contain exactly one method function Measure (normal).
• A titer loop must contain at least one method function titration.
Method function General titration, Titer Calibration
Titration stand • •
Pump • •
Stir • •
Dispense (normal) • •
Measure (normal) • •

Method function General titration, Titer Calibration
Titration (EP) • –
Titration (EQP) • –
Titration (Learn EQP) • –
Calculation • •
Auxiliary value • •
Blank • •
Auxiliary instrument • •
Drain • •
Record • •
7.12.1.3.5 Method functions outside of a loop

• The method function Calibration must appear immediately after the method function End of sample of a
calibration loop.
• The method function Titer must appear immediately after the method function End of sample of a titer loop.
Method function General titration, Calibration, Titer
Drain •
Calculation •
Blank •
Dispense (normal) •
Auxiliary instrument •
Auxiliary value •
Calibration (position is fixed) •
Pump •
Record •
Titer (position is fixed) •
7.12.1.4 Method functions G20

The number of method functions that can be used within a method is limited. The maximum number of method
functions is 12.
Functions Explanation Possible No. of MFs Within loop Outside loop
Title Title and characteristics of the 1 No Yes
method.
Sample Start of a sample loop. total 1 Start of loop
Sample (Titer) Start of a loop for titer determination.
Sample Start of a loop for sensor calibration.
(Calibration)
Titration stand Selects titration stand. 1 Yes No
Pumps Pumps a defined volume of a liquid. 2 Yes Yes
Stir Activates a stirrer. 2 Yes No
Dispense Dispenses a defined quantity of 1 Yes Yes
(normal) titrant.

Functions Explanation Possible No. of MFs Within loop Outside loop
Measure Takes over monitoring a measured total 2 Yes No
(normal) value from a sensor.
Titration (EQP) Conducts an equivalence-point Yes No
titration.
Titration Conducts an equivalent-point- Yes No
(LearnEQP) detection titration.
Calculation Converts the analysis results. 3 Yes Yes
End of sample Concludes a sample loop. 1 End of loop Yes
Titer Assigns the result of a titer sample total 1 No Yes
loop to a titer.
Calibration Assigns the result of a calibration No Yes
loop to a sensor.
Blank Assigns a result or an arbitrary value 1 Yes Yes
to a blank and updates the value
stored in Setup.
Auxiliary value Assigns a value (Mean[R1], 1 Yes Yes
Mean[R2], or Mean[R3]) to an
stored in the settings.
Auxiliary Activates external auxiliary 2 Yes Yes
instrument instruments.
Drain Drains a volume from the sample 1 Yes Yes
vessel.
Record Defines the record data to be output to 2 Yes Yes
the printer.
7.12.1.5 Method functions V20 S / V30 S

processed.
As an example, the list below shows the method functions for KF Vol method.
• Title
• Sample (KF)
• Titration stand (KF stand)
• Mix time
• Titration (KF Vol)
• Calculation R1
• End of sample
• Record
The method function Sample (KF) marks the beginning of the loop and the method function End of sample
marks the end of the loop. This means, that if this loop contains two samples, the method functions Sample
(KF), Titration stand (KF stand), Mix time, Titration (KF Vol) and Calculation R1 are performed for each
sample. The method function End of sample is performed, after the second sample is analysed. The loop is
stopped and the method function Record is performed.

titration.
titrations.
duration of its usage.
Titration (KF Vol) Conducts a volumetric Karl Fischer titration. Yes No
Scan (KF Vol) Volumetric Karl Fischer titration of a sample Yes No
that is heated at a constant rate from a
defined start to a defined end temperature.
printer.
stored in Setup.
Setup.
7.12.1.5.1 Types and possible number of loops

Method type Maximum number of loops per Maximum number of method
method functions per method
V20S V30S V20S V30S
KF Vol 1 1 12 150
Ext. Extr. V. – 1 - 150
Scan KF V. – 1 – 150
IM KF V. – 20 – 180
Stromb. V. – 14 - 150

7.12.1.5.2 Possible number of method functions
Method function KF Vol, Ext. Extr. V. Scan KF V. IM KF V. Stromb. V.
V20S V30S V30S V30S V30S
Title 1 1 1 1 1
Sample (KF) 1 1 1 20 14
Titration stand (KF stand) 1 1 1 20 14
Drift determination – – – 21 15
Homogenizer – 2 – – -
Mix time 1 1 1 20 14
Titration (KF Vol) 1 1 – 20 14
Scan (KF Vol) – – 1 – –
Calculation 4 40 – 40 40
Record 1 10 20 20 14
Auxiliary value - 30 30 30 30
Blank – – – 20 10
Instruction 1 10 20 20 10
Standby – – 1 1 1
End of sample 1 1 1 20 14
7.12.1.5.3 Inserting and deleting loops

• You can only insert loops into methods of the method type Stromb. V. and IM KF V..
Sample (Blank) and Sample (Standard) are only available for the IM KF V. method type.
• When you insert a sample loop into a method of the IM KF V. method type, the new sample loop inherits
IM KF V.
Sample loop Sample
Mix time
Titration (KF Vol)
Calculation
Record
End of sample

Mix time
Titration (KF Vol)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Blank
Mix time
Titration (KF Vol)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Stromb. V. without blank value
Sample loop Sample
Mix time
Titration (KF Vol)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
KF Vol and Ext. Extr. V.
Sample loop Sample
Mix time
Titration (KF Vol)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Scan KF V.
Sample loop Sample
Mix time
Scan KF Vol
Calculation
Record
End of sample
7.12.1.5.4 Method functions within a loop


– Homogenizer (optional)
– Titration (KF Vol) or Scan (KF Vol) (only once)
should contain.
Method function KF Vol Ext. Extr. V. Scan KF V. IM KF V. Stromb. V.
Titration stand • • • • •
Drift determination – – – • •
Homogenizer • – – – –
Mix time • • • • •
Titration (KF Vol) • • – • •
Scan (KF Vol) – – • – –
Calculation • • • • •
Record • • • • •
Auxiliary value • • • • •
Blank – – – • •
Instruction • • • • •
7.12.1.5.5 Method functions outside of a loop

• The method function Standby must be the last method function and must only be used once.
Method function KF Vol, Ext. Extr. V. Scan KF V. IM KF V., Stromb. V.
Blank – – •
Record – • •
Standby – • •

7.12.1.6 Method functions V20 / V30
Overview of method functions: KF Vol / KF Coul
Titration stand KF stand Select a titration stand (KF stand, Yes No
Stromboli Coul.)
duration of its usage (not for method types
Stromboli or ext. extraction).
Titration (KF Vol) or Titration Conducts a Karl Fischer titration. Yes No
(KF Coul)
All auxiliary values Assigns a result or an arbitrary value to an Yes Yes
stored in Setup.
printer.
titrations (only for method type Stromboli
Coul.).
setup (only for method type "Stromboli").
completion of the Stromboli Coul. series,
so that new series can be started quickly.
Note
1. Sample
2. Titration stand
4. Homogenizer*
5. Mix time
6. Titration
7. Calculation*
8. Record*
9. End of sample

Possible number of method functions: KF Vol and Stromboli Coul.
Stromboli
Title 1 1
Sample (KF) 1 14
Titration stand (KF) 1 14
Titration (KF Vol) 1 14
Calculation 40 40
End of sample 1 14
Auxiliary value 30 30
Blank - 10
Instruction 10 10
Record 10 14
Drift determination - 14
Mix time 1 15
Homogenizer 2 -
Standby (Stromboli) - 1
7.12.1.7 Method functions C20 S / C30 S

processed.
As an example, the list below shows the method functions for KF Coul method.
• Title
• Sample (KF)
• Titration stand (KF stand)
• Mix time
• Titration (KF Coul)
• Calculation R1
• End of sample
• Record
The method function Sample (KF) marks the beginning of the loop and the method function End of sample
marks the end of the loop. This means, that if this loop contains two samples, the method functions Sample
(KF), Titration stand (KF stand), Mix time, Titration (KF Coul) and Calculation R1 are performed for each
sample. The method function End of sample is performed, after the second sample is analysed. The loop is
stopped and the method function Record is performed.
Coulometric Karl Fischer titration
titration.

titrations.
titration.
Scan (KF Coul) Coulometric Karl Fischer titration of a Yes No
sample that is heated at a constant rate
from a defined start to a defined end
temperature.
printer.
stored in Setup.
Setup.
Bromine index
Pretitration Pretitration for a method function Titration Yes No
(EP Coul) that is performed with low
currents and samples with low concen-
trations.
Titration (EP Coul) Conducts an end-point titration with coulo- Yes No
metric production of the titrant.
printer.
stored in Setup.

Setup.

method functions per method
C20S C30S C20S C30S
KF Coul 1 1 12 150
Ext. Extr. C. - 1 - 150
Scan KF C. – 1 – 150
IM KF C. – 20 – 180
Stromb. C. - 14 - 150

The following table shows the method functions for the Karl Fischer method types (KF Coul, Ext. Extraction
Coul., Stromboli Coul. and Bromine Index). The maximum number of functions per method is listed.
Method function KF Coul, Ext. Extr. C. Scan KF C. IM KF C. Stromb. C.
C20S C30S C30S C30S C30S
Title 1 1 1 1 1
Sample (KF) 1 1 1 20 14
Titration stand 1 1 1 20 14
Drift determination – – – 21 15
Mix time 1 1 1 20 14
Titration (KF Coul) 1 1 – 20 14
Scan (KF Coul) – – 1 – –
Calculation 3 40 – 40 40
Record 1 10 20 20 14
Auxiliary value – 30 30 30 30
Blank – – – 20 10
Instruction 1 10 20 20 10
Standby – – 1 1 1
End of sample 1 1 1 20 14

• You can only insert loops into methods of the method type Stromb. C. and IM KF C..

Sample (Blank) and Sample (Standard) are only available for the IM KF C. method type.
• When you insert a sample loop into a method of the IM KF C. method type, the new sample loop inherits
IM KF C.
Mix time
Titration (KF Coul)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Mix time
Titration (KF Coul)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Blank
Mix time
Titration (KF Coul)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Stromb. C. without blank value
Mix time
Titration (KF Coul)
Calculation
Record
End of sample

KF Coul and Ext. Extr. C.
Mix time
Titration (KF Coul)
Calculation
Record
End of sample
Scan KF C.
Mix time
Scan (KF Coul)
Calculation
Record
End of sample

– Titration (KF Coul) or Scan (KF Coul) (only once)
should contain.
Mix time • • •
Titration (KF Coul) • – •
Scan (KF Coul) – • –
Record • • •
Blank – – •


• The method function Standby must be in the last method function and must only be used once.
Blank – – •
Record – • •
Standby – • •
7.12.1.7.2 Bromine index

method for C30S functions per method for C30S
Bromine Index 3 150

Number of functions Max. number for BI on C30S
Title 1
Sample 3
Pretitration 3
Titration stand 3
Mix time 3
Titration (EP Coul) 3
Calculation 40
Record 10
Auxiliary value 30
Blank 10
Instruction 10
End of sample 3


• When you insert a loop using the Sample method function, a regular, correct template is inserted.
Bromine Index
Sample loop: Sample
Mix time
Titration (EP Coul)
Calculation
Record
End of sample

– Sample (only once)
– Pretitration (optional, only once)
– Titration (EP Coul) (only once)
• The method function Titration stand must follow immediately after the function Sample which introduces
the loop.
should contain.
The method functions allowed within a loop are listed below.
• Titration stand
• Pretitration
• Mix time
• Auxiliary value
• Instruction
• Record
• Calculation
• Blank

can be inserted outside of a loop depending on the method type.
The method functions allowed outside a loop are listed below.
• Calculation
• Auxiliary value

• Blank
• Instruction
• Record
7.12.1.8 Method functions C20 / C30

Functions Explanation Within loop Outside loop
Titration stand Select a titration stand (KF stand or Yes No
Stromboli TTL)
titration.
stored in Setup.
printer.
titrations (only for method type
"Stromboli").
setup (only for method type "Stromboli").
completion of the "Stromboli" series, so that
new series can be started quickly.
1. Sample
2. Titration stand
4. Mix time
5. Titration
6. Calculation*
7. Record*
8. End of sample
7.12.1.9 Types and possible number of loops T5 / T7 / T9

Nested loops (scopes) are not permitted. Loops can only be inserted into or deleted from a method as a whole.

The number of loops allowed in a method differs depending on the method type and device type:
Method type Permissible loop Maximum number of loops per method
types
T5 T7 T9
GT Sample loop 1 3 6
Titer loop
Calibration loop
Titer Titer loop 1 3 6
Calib. Calibration loop 1 3 6
KF Vol KF loop 1 1 1
Ext. Extraction Coul. KF loop - 1 1
KF Vol
Stromboli Coul. KF KF loop - 14 14
Vol
KF Coul 1 1 1
Ext. Extraction Coul. - 1 1
Stromboli Coul. - 14 14
Bromine Index 2 3 3
7.12.2.1 Auxiliary instruments

This method function activates external auxiliary instruments and enables the titrator to be controlled by such
auxiliary instruments. The parameters described in the following can be defined for all control types. These are
followed by parameters that can be defined explicitly for the listed control types.
Navigation: Auxiliary instrument
Condition Logical condition that determines whether or not a method Active | Inactive
function is executed based on a result (true or false).
A method function can be executed using a specified calculation
formula (see the parameter Formula).
Formula Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will Mathematical calcu-
determine the execution of the method function. lation
The method function is only executed if the result is "True", and
only for Condition = Active.
See also
2 Evaluate and calculate } Page 410

7.12.2.1.1 Control type: Output 24 V
Mode Defines the mode for controlling the control output. On | Off | Fixed time
Fixed time: The control output is switched on for the defined time
interval.
On | Off: The control outlet is switched on or off. After a sample
series the control outlet is automatically switched off.
Time A time span in [sec] can be defined here for which the control 0…106
outlet should be switched on.
Only if Mode = Fixed time.
7.12.2.1.2 Control type: Stirrer

Mode Defines the mode for controlling the control output. On | Off | Fixed time
Fixed time: The control output is switched on for the defined time
interval.
7.12.2.1.3 Control type: Out TTL (Single pin)

Mode Defines the mode for controlling the control output. For TTL On | Off | Fixed time |
signals, the number and type of the output signals is determined. Input controlled |
Fixed time: The control output is switched on for the defined time Sequential
period.
On | Off: The control output is switched on or off.
control outlet. The Auxiliary instrument function is terminated as
soon as the signal changes at the control input or after a defined
maximum time has expired.
Input Select the auxiliary instrument to serve as the signal input (control Auxiliary instrument
input).
Max. time The maximum waiting time for a signal change, in [sec]. 0…106
After it expires, the method is continued even if no signal change
was detected.
Only for signal inputs.

Pulse duration The duration of a pulse in [sec] (time switched on + time 0…106
switched off).
7.12.2.1.4 Control type: Input TTL (Single pin)

detected.
was detected.
7.12.2.1.5 Control type: TTL (multipin)

Input/Output Defines the communication direction. Output | Input
Pin Select a pin and define the type of control. 1…4
Output: 1, 2, 3, 4
Input: 1, 2,
Mode Defines the mode for controlling the control output. For TTL On | Off | Fixed time |
signals, the number and type of the output signals is determined. Input controlled |
Fixed time: The control output is switched on for the defined time Sequential
period.
On | Off: The control output is switched on or off.
control outlet. The Auxiliary instrument function is terminated as
soon as the signal changes at the control input or after a defined
maximum time has expired.
Input Select the auxiliary instrument to serve as the signal input (control Auxiliary instrument
input).
was detected.
Pulse duration The duration of a pulse in [sec] (time switched on + time 0…106
switched off).

Pin Select a pin and define the type of control. 1…4
Output: 1, 2, 3, 4
Input: 1, 2,
detected.
7.12.2.1.6 Control type: RS-232

Send output Defines whether an output sequence should be sent. Active | Inactive
sequence
Output sequence The control sequence for the signal receiver - can also contain a ASCII character
formula or result enclosed in characters % or control characters
in format \xxx where xxx is the decimal number of the ASCII
control character.
\010 for line feed.
Only if Send output sequence= Active.
from the device.
Max. time The maximum waiting time for an input sequence in [sec]. After it 0…106 | ∞
expires, the method will be continued even if no input sequence
was detected.
Only if Wait for input sequence = Active.
Input sequence Defines whether the input sequence of the external device Active | Inactive
with result contains results which have to be imported.
Start sequence Start sequence of the incoming sequence from the external device. 1…20
This is the reference position for the following results. The start
sequence can also contain control characters in format \xxx
where xxx is the decimal number of the control character.
Total length Length from the beginning of the start sequence up to end of the 1…1000
last result.
Number of results The number of results from the sequence of the external device. 1...10
Note
Results are saved in the variable "AuxInst x". (x: The index of the result).
Start position 1 ... Start position (beginning) of the result 1…10 counted from the 1…1000
Start position 10 beginning of the start sequence. Leading space characters before
the result will be ignored.
Max. length 1 ... Maximum length of the result 1…10 beginning at the start 1...1000
Max. length 10 position of the result.

Note
For more information about ASCII control characters, refer to: http://www.asciitable.com/
See also
7.12.2.2 Auxiliary value

This method function assigns a result or arbitrary value to an auxiliary value.
Define limits for the auxiliary value
If Limits is activated, the titrator checks if the auxiliary value falls within the limits defined in Lower limit and
Upper limit. If the auxiliary value lies outside the limits, it is marked as such.
Configure the action of the system if the auxiliary value lies outside the limits
The table below shows the settings for the four possible actions of the system if the auxiliary value lies outside
of the limits.
Action of the system Message outside limits Stop outside limits
The analysis continues. Inactive Inactive
The user is not informed that the value lies outside of
the limits.
A message opens and informs the user that the value Active Inactive
lies outside of the limits.
The analysis is interrupted until the user confirms the
message.
The analysis is stopped. Active Active
A message opens and informs the user that the value
The analysis is stopped. Inactive Active
the limits.

Formula H= Here you can enter a formula that will be used to convert the Formula (see
result of the sample loop to the auxiliary value. You can also "[Evaluation and calcu-
enter a number or an auxiliary value. lation } Page 410]") |
Auxiliary Value | Number
Limits Determines whether limits should be taken into account for acqui- Active | Inactive
sition of a value. If the value is outside these limits, the value is
not transferred to Setup.
Message outside Defines whether a message opens that informs the user that the Active | Inactive
limits value lies outside of the limits.
Stop outside Defines whether the analysis is stopped if the value lies outside Active | Inactive
limits the defined limits.
Lower limit Defines the lower limit of the value. -108 … 108
Only if Limits = Active

Upper limit Defines the upper limit of the value. -108 … 108
See also
7.12.2.3 Blank
This method function assigns a result or arbitrary value to a blank value, including the unit.
Define limits for the blank value
If Limits is activated, the titrator checks if the blank value falls within the limits defined in Lower limit and
Upper limit. If the blank value lies outside the limits, it is marked as such.
Configure the action of the system if the blank value lies outside the limits
The table below shows the settings for the four possible actions of the system if the blank value lies outside of
the limits.
the limits.
message.
the limits.

Value B= Here you can enter a formula that will be used to convert the Formula (see
sample loop result to the blank. You can also enter a number or "[Evaluation and Calcu-
an auxiliary value. lation } Page 410]") |
Auxiliary value | Number

See also
7.12.2.4 Calculation
For converting the titration results.
Define limits for the results
If Result limits is activated, the titrator checks if the result falls within the limits defined in Lower limit and
Upper limit. If the result lies outside the limits, it is marked as such.
Configure the action of the system if the result lies outside the limits
The table below shows the settings for the four possible actions of the system if the value of the result lies
outside of the limits.
the limits.
message.
the limits.
Define a maximum relative standard deviation for all samples or groups of samples
You can only define a maximum relative standard deviation if you use the Calculation method function within
a loop.
Activate Extra statistical functions to define a maximum relative standard deviation for all samples in the
sample loop. If the calculated relative standard deviation (srel) is higher than the value defined in Max. srel, it
is marked in the record.

• Example: The relative standard deviation is calculated 1
for all 11 samples in the loop (1). This realtive
standard deviation is compared to the value defined in
Max. srel.
Activate Extra statistical functions and Multiple determination to calculate the relative standard deviation for
groups of samples in addition to the relative standard deviation of all samples. Number of samples defines
how many results are combined to calculate the relative standard deviation of groups. The relative standard
deviation of each group is compared to the value defined in Max. srel and marked if it exceeds the value.
• Example: The relative standard deviation is calculated 1
for all 11 samples in the loop (1). In addition the
relative standard deviation is calculated for groups of
three samples (2) because Multiple determination is 2 2 2
activated and the Number of samples is set to 3.
Configure the action of the system if the maximum relative standard deviation is exceeded
You can only configure the action of the system if Multiple determination is activated.
The table below shows the settings for the four possible actions of the system if the relative standard deviation
exceeds the maximum relative standard deviation.
Action of the system Message above max. srel Stop above max. srel
The titrator only records that the relative standard Inactive Inactive
deviation of a group is higher than the value defined in
Max. srel.
A message opens and informs the user that the relative Active Inactive
standard deviation of a group is higher than the value
defined in Max. srel.
message.
A message opens and informs the user that the relative
standard deviation of a group is higher than the value
defined in Max. srel.
The user is not informed that the relative standard
deviation of a group is higher than the value defined in
Max. srel.
The subfunction Condition is only available on T9 titrators.
Result type Predefined: a predefined result from the proposal list has to be Predefined | User defined
used and the parameters Result unit, Formula, and Constant C=
cannot be changed. The parameters Result, Result unit,
Formula, and Constant C= are adjusted automatically in
accordance with the parameter settings in the method function
Sample, Sample (KF) or Sample (Standard Addition) .
User defined: a predefined result from the proposal list or a user
defined result can be used. All parameters can be changed. There
is no automatic adjustment of the parameters Result, Result unit,
Formula, and Constant C=

Result Defines the name for the result of the calculation. Results list | Arbitrary
If you select a result from the dropdown list Result proposals, the
system automatically sets the parameters Result unit, Formula
and Constant C= parameters.
You can change the parameters Result, Result unit, Formula and
Constant C= independently from each other, if Result type is set
to User defined.
Result unit Defines the unit of the result. Results list | Arbitrary
system automatically sets the parameter Result unit.
You can change the parameter Result unit independently, if
Result type is set to User defined.
Formula Defines the formula for calculating the result. Results list | Arbitrary
system automatically sets the parameter Formula.
You can change the parameter Formula independently, if Result
type is set to User defined.
Constant C= Defines the constant C which can be used in the calculation. The Results list | Arbitrary
constant C can itself be a formula.
system automatically sets the parameter Constant C=.
You can change the parameter Constant C= independently, if
Result type is set to User defined.
M [g/mol] Defines the molar mass of the substance [g/mol]. List of concentration/titer
Only in method function GT (general titration). standards and
substances
Decimal places The number of decimal places for the result. 0…6
Result limits Defines whether limits should be observed for the result. If this Active | Inactive
function is activated, there will be a message in the record if the
result falls outside the defined limits.
Lower limit Defines the lower limit of the result. -108 … 108
Upper limit Defines the upper limit of the result. -108…108
Record statistics Specifies whether statistics should also be issued with the results Active | Inactive
in the report along with the result.
The statistics are not printed, if in the method function Record the
parameter Results is not selected.
Extra statistical Defines whether the relative standard deviation is compared to a Active | Inactive
functions maximum relative standard deviation.
Active: the relative standard deviation of all samples in a loop is
compared to the value defined in Max. srel. If the relative
standard deviation is higher than Max. srel, it is marked in the
record.
Inactive: the relative standard deviation is not evaluated.
Max. srel Defines the maximum relative standard deviation. 0…100

Send to buffer Defines if the results that are generated outside and inside a loop Active | Inactive
are stored in the result buffer. The result buffer only contains the
results of a single method.
The result buffer can be accessed using a variety of methods
(both inside and outside a loop).
The content of the result buffer is visible to the user and can be
deleted or printed out. Once the titrator has been restarted the
result buffer is empty.
Multiple determi- Defines whether the relative standard deviation is calculated for Active | Inactive
nation groups of samples and compared to a maximum relative
standard deviation.
Active: the relative standard deviation of groups of samples is
compared to the value defined in Max. srel. If the relative
standard deviation is higher than Max. srel, it is marked in the
record.
Inactive: the relative standard deviation is only calculated for all
samples in a loop.
Number of Defines the sample groups for a multiple determination. For 2…9
samples example, a value of 3 means that the system will run a statistical
evaluation on three consecutive samples.
Max. srel Defines the maximum relative standard deviation. 0…100
Message above Defines whether a message opens as soon as the relative Active | Inactive
max. srel standard deviation of a sample group within a multiple determi-
nation is above the value defined in Max. srel.
Stop above max. Defines whether the analysis is stopped if the relative standard Active | Inactive
srel deviation of a group is higher than the value defined in Max. srel.
Record If selected, the multiple determination function will create a record Active | Inactive
listing the groups after a double determination whose relative
standard deviation lies above a "Max. srel" number defined in the
method.
Appears only if Extra statistical functions and Multiple determi-
nation = Active.
Write to Smart Defines if the calculation result is written to the Smart Tag on the None | Density |
Tag beaker. Correction factor
None: the calculation result is not written to the Smart Tag.
Density: the calculation result is written to the Density data field
of the Smart Tag. If the calculation result lies outside the limits for
density defined in the MF Sample, the default value for density is
written to the Smart Tag. If the calculation result has more
decimal places than allowed for the density, the calculation result
is rounded off.
Correction factor: The calculation result is written to the data field
Correction factor of the Smart Tag. If the calculation result lies
outside the limits for the correction factor defined in the MF
Sample, the default value for the correction factor is written to the
Smart Tag. If the calculation result has more decimal places than
allowed for the correction factor, the calculation result is rounded
off.
Only appears for GT (general titration) and Titration stand =
InMotion.

See also
7.12.2.5 Conditioning
Use this method function to prepare a sensor for the next analysis. This method function becomes active when
a sample changer is selected.
Titration stand Activates a sample changer defined in the setup. Appears only if List of titration stands
the method function Conditioning is used outside of a sample
loop.
Interval Defines the conditioning interval, i.e., after how many samples 1...60 (Rondo) | 1…
conditioning will be performed. 303 (InMotion)
Appears only when inside a loop.
Position Defines the position of the conditioning beaker. Variable position Variable position |
uses the defined interval to define the position(s). Variable Special beaker 1…4 |
position can only be selected if Titration stand = InMotion Conditioning beaker
selected and method function is used within a loop.
Cond. beaker Defines where the conditioning beakers are positioned on the rack 1…303
spacing for variable conditioning beaker positions: value = number of
sample beakers between two conditioning beakers.
Note that the beaker series must start with a conditioning beaker.
The start position in the series or in analysis start must be set to
the first conditioning beaker. E.g. Cond. beaker spacing = 3
defines following beaker series: C S S S C S S S C etc. where C is
a conditioning beaker and S is a sample beaker.
Time Defines the conditioning period in [sec]. 1…104
Lid handling Defines whether before titration the lid of a sample should be Active | Inactive
Appears only for Type = InMotion.
See also
7.12.2.6 Conditioning (Controlled)

stands

Position Defines the position in which to park the titration head. Conditioning beaker |
For Current position, the head is parked in the last active position Rinse beaker | Special
(for example: Sample). beaker 1…Special
For Current position + 1, the head is parked in the beaker after beaker 4 | Current
the last active position. position | Current
position + 1
Appears only for Type = InMotion.
Sensor type Choose the type of sensor which is connected to the instrument. mV | pH | Phototrode |
Conductivity | ISE
Unit Measuring unit of the selected sensor. Arbitrary
Acquisition Defines how the measured value is acquired. Equilibrium controlled |
Equilibrium controlled: Fix
The measured value is acquired as soon as it stabilizes.
Fix:
The measured value is acquired after a defined waiting period.
dE dE and dt define when a measured value is considered stable in 0.1...15 [mV]
the sub steps of the first addition. dE defines the maximal
potential difference for a stable value during the time span dt.
Only if Acquisition is set to Equilibrium controlled.
dt dE and dt define when a measured value is considered stable in 1...150 [s]
the sub steps of the first addition. dt defines the time interval for
calculating dE/dt.
t(min) Defines the minimal time before the next measured value acqui- 1...1800 [s]
sition in the sub steps of the first addition.
t(max) Defines the maximal time before the next measured value acqui- 1...10000 [s]
Action Defines the behaviour of the titrator if t(max) is exceeded. None | Stop | User inter-
None: the titrator moves on to the next step of the analysis. action
Stop: The analysis is stopped.
User interaction: The titrator prompts the user to select between
moving to the next step or stopping the analysis.
Time Defines the conditioning period. 1…105 [s]
Only if Acquisition is set to Fix.
Temperature Select if you want to activate a temperature acquisition. For this a Active | Inactive
acquisition temperature sensor must be connected to the instrument.
Temperature Define the temperature in [°C] during the analysis. If Temperature -20…200
acquisition is activated, this temperature value will be ignored.
Temperature Select the connected temperature sensor from the list. Arbitrary
sensor Only if Temperature acquisition is activated.

See also
7.12.2.7 Dispense (controlled)

Controlled dispensing is used for monitored dosing. Controlled dispensing continually monitors the potential or
the temperature of the sample solution and records if the predefined criteria have been exceeded.
The relevant parameters can be determined for the following subfunctions:
Subfunction: Titrant
Continuous Continuous addition requires a second burette and a second drive Active | Inactive
addition with the same titrant. If the first burette empties and is refilled, the
second burette will continue dispensing seamlessly.
(not with T50)
Titrant 2 The second titrant to be used for the continuous addition. (Only if Titrant list in Setup
"continuous addition" is selected.) (not with T50)
Subfunction: Sensor
Type Defines the type of sensor used to perform the measurement. List of available sensor
types
Subfunction: Temperature acquisition
Temperature Defines whether to record the temperature, with the aid of a Active | Inactive
acquisition temperature sensor, during the execution of the analysis function.
Temperature Defines which temperature sensor to use for the temperature Sensor list
sensor acquisition.
Only for Temperature acquisition = Active.
Unit Defines the temperature unit to be used. °C | K | °F
Subfunction: Stir
Subfunction: Dispense
Volume The volume to be dispensed, in [mL]. 0.001 … 1000 |
Auxiliary value | Formula

Dosing rate The dosing speed, in [mL/min]. If the number is above the 0.001…60
maximum value possible, the system will dispense at the
maximum rate. You can also select a burette type-dependent
maximum number.
t(max) Defines a time period, in [min], after which dispensing will be 0.1…106
terminated, even if the volume has not yet been reached.
Subfunction: Monitoring
Monitoring Defines whether to monitor the sensor signal or temperature Active | Inactive
during the main stating process.
Signal If you want to run monitoring, this is where you specify whether to Sensor signal |
monitor the sensor signal or the temperature. (For Monitoring = Temperature
Active only.)
Lower limit Defines the lower limit of the range within which the signal or -
temperature will be allowed to vary. If the signal or temperature
violate this range, that will trigger the defined "Action". The unit of
measure will depend on the sensor used.
Upper limit Defines the upper limit of the range within which the signal or -
Action Defines an action for violations of the upper or lower monitoring Automatic | Manual |
parameters. Cancel
Cancel: Stating will be canceled.
Manual: The stating will be interrupted and a message will
appear on the display. The user can cancel or continue the stating
process.
Automatic: Stating will be interrupted and continued when the
monitoring parameters have returned within the limits.
Subfunction: Measured value storage
Interval Defines the interval, in [sec], at which the date should be saved. 0.1…106
Subfunction: Condition
See also
7.12.2.8 Dispense (normal)

You can use this method function to dispense a precisely defined quantity of titrant.
The smallest increment (dV(min)) is 1/20000 of the burette volume, i.e. for the following burettes:

1 mL burette: dV(min) = 0.05 µL
20 mL burette: dV(min) = 1 µL
Volume Volume in [mL]. 0.0001…1000 |
Dosing rate Defines the dosing rate (not including the filling time), in [mL/ 0.01…60
min]. You can also select a burette type-dependent maximum
number.
See also
7.12.2.9 Drain
You use this method function to drain a specific volume from a sample vessel using a pump.
Drain volume The volume to be drained, in [mL]. 0…1000 | Auxiliary
value | Formula
See also
7.12.2.10 Drift determination

You can use the "Drift determination" method function to record the drift after a specific wait time for Karl Fischer
titration. This method function can be inserted both within the loop (per sample) and outside the loop (per
series).

Note
The method function "Drift determination" applies only for methods of the type "Stromboli".
Wait time Here you can enter the time in [s] until the drift is to be recorded. 0…1000
Duration You can enter the length of time in [min] for which the drift deter- 0 … 10
mination should last.
Interval Defines the drift determination interval, i.e., after how many 0 … 10
samples the drift determination will be performed. Appears only if
the method function is used within a loop.
7.12.2.11 Homogenizer
There are two different homogenizer types: RS and TTL. The TTL Homogenizer can only be switched on for a
defined period of time. For the RS Homogenizer, the speed can also be set in the method.
The method function "Homogenizer" applies only for Karl Fischer titrations when not using the Stromboli oven
sample changer, and does not apply for the method type "External extraction".
You can define the following parameters: First select the relevant homogenizer:
Name Select the type of homogenizer. Homogenizer RS |
Homogenizer TTL
For the TTL homogenizer, you can also determine the stir time:
Duration Duration in [s]. 1...104
For the RS homogenizer, you can also determine the speed:
Speed Here you can enter the homogenizer speed in [%]. 25 … 100
Only if Homogenizer = Homogenizer RS
7.12.2.12 Instruction
Interrupts the analysis and outputs an instruction to the user on the screen. Either the user has to confirm the
instructions or they will disappear automatically after a certain period.
Instruction The text of the instructions to be output to the display. Arbitrary, including
This text can also contain a formula or auxiliary values, enclosed enclosed formula
in percent symbols. (control characters: %)
Example: "Add %VEQ*m/z% g".
Continue after Confirmation: The analysis will continue as soon as the user Confirmation | Time
confirms the instructions. interval
Time interval: The analysis is continued after the defined time
period has elapsed.
Time interval The time period, in [sec], during which the analysis is terminated 0…106
and the instructions are displayed on the screen.
Only appears if Continue after = Time interval is selected.
Print If selected, the instructions will be output to a connected printer. Active | Inactive

Message content
E-Mail recipients Defines the e-mail address for direct sending. -
Notify responsible The notification is sent to the current responsible user. Active | Inactive
user
Roles to notify The notification is sent to the members with the selected roles. Active | Inactive
High importance Defines the importance of the notification. Active | Inactive
Subject Specifies the subject of the e-mail. Any
Message Here you can enter a multiline text, which is displayed as a notifi- Any
cation.
See also
7.12.2.13 Line Rinse

The Line Rinse function, for InMotion sample changer, starts at the Rinse Position (or when using higher
beakers at a higher position) and moves down at a variable speed (Descent rate). Operating the pump at a
flow rate (always 100%) faster than the descent speed, air bubbles are introduced with the reagent in the
beaker for mechanical cleaning of the tube. Use Line rinse at very high descent rate to replace solvents in
Conditioning beakers with the desired interval for Refill = Yes.
Titration stand Defines which titration stand is to be used. List of available
This parameter is only visible outside the loop. Inside the loop the InMotion titration stands
titration stand of the previous method function Titration stand is
used.
Interval Defines the rinsing interval, i.e., after how many samples rinsing 1...303
will be performed.
Position Defines the position on the autosampler where the rinse procedure Current position | Rinse
should be executed. For Position = Current sample, rinsing is beaker | Special beaker
only possible within the loop. 1…Special beaker 4 |
Conditioning beaker |
Current sample
Direction Defines the the pump direction to be used. Forward | Reverse
Only if Pump property = 2-way, fine rate is selected.
Descent rate Defines the speed at which the lift of the autosampler is lowered. Very low | Low |
This parameter affects the ratio of intake air and liquid. The Medium | High | Very
suction of air improves the cleaning effect. high |
Proposed rates by pump types
Descent rate
Beaker/Tube SP280/SPR200 SD660
25 mL High Very high
80 mL Medium High

Descent rate
Beaker/Tube SP280/SPR200 SD660
100 mL Low Medium
180 mL Very low Low
250 mL Very low Low

Refill Defines whether the beaker will be refilled with the auxiliary Active | Inactive
reagent after rinsing.
Auxiliary reagent Specifies the auxiliary reagent to be added. List of available
Only if Refill = Active is selected. auxiliary reagents
Volume Defines the volume in [mL] of reagent to be pumped or filled. 0…1000
7.12.2.14 Liquid Handling

The method function Liquid Handling allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Prepare: This task shall be performed in order to rinse the respective port of the multi port valve of the
Liquid Handler, if the port, i.e. the liquid is changed. This procedure avoids carry-over.
• Aspirate or Dispense of solutions.
Liquid Handling can be applied inside or outside of a sample loop.
At the end of the Liquid Handler's operation instruction, a method is shown that can be used for the system test
of the Liquid Handler.
If Liquid Handling is applied in combination with a sample changer, you can decide whether you want to use
the fix or flexible start position:
• If you select the parameter Fix, after each sample loop the titration head moves always to the specified start
position.
• For Flexible, the titration head's position is incremented with +1 for each loop run.
Note: This option is only available if the method function Liquid Handling is placed inside the sample loop.
In the following the Liquid Handling parameters are described. There are parameters which are only available
for the related task Action; others are available for all tasks:
Parameters available for all tasks
Liquid Handler You can select the Liquid Handler detected by the titrator. Liquid Handler 1 |
Liquid Handler 2
Action The type of Liquid Handling. Prepare | Aspirate |
Dispense
Connection You can select the ports specified in the settings. List field (the values are
defined in the settings.
Port Information on the current connected port for the selected action. -
stands
Type Defines the kind of the sample changer's start position. Fix | Flexible
Only available for Titration stand = Rondo or InMotion.
Position Defines the kind of the sample changer's start position. Conditioning beaker |
Only available for Titration stand = Rondo or InMotion and Type Rinse beaker | Special
= Fix. beaker 1…Special
beaker 4 | Position
number

Position number You can enter a number of the sample changer's start position. 1...303 | H (auxiliary
Only available for Titration stand = Rondo or InMotion, Type = value)
Fix and Position = Position number.
Start position Defines the first start position of the sample changer. The start 1...60 | 1...303 | H
<name of the position for each sample loop is incremented with +1.
Titration stand> Only available for Titration stand = Rondo or InMotion, Type =
Flexible.
Note: The flexible type of the start position is not available for the
Liquid Handling method function applied outside of a loop. Rondo
only offers numbers in the range of 1...60.
Specific Parameters for Prepare

Aspiration rate The relative aspiration rate in [%] 0.1…80
80% =>
120 mL/min
Discharge rate The relative dispensing rate in [%] 0.1 …80
H (auxiliary value) | F
(formula)
Rinse port The implementation of a two-stage purification process of the Active | Inactive
specified connections with solution.
If Inactive is selected, the multiport valve changes to Waste (port
6) and the burette cylinder is emptied.
No. of rinse Determines the number of rinse cycles, which will be performed. 1…5
cycles 1…2 In general, there are two rinse cycles, one with a large volume
and the other one with low volume.
Only available if Rinse port = Active.
Volume per cycle Specifies the rinse volume in [mL] per rinse cycle. 0.010…50
1…2 Only available if Rinse port = Active.
Specific Parameters for Aspirate

80% =>
120 mL/min
Aspiration volume The aspiration volume in [mL]. 0.01…50
Spindle backlash Specifies spindle backlash compensation in order to compensate Active | Inactive
compensation spindle tolerances during the operation period of aspirating and
pipetting solutions. Also to eliminate air bubbles trapped during
aspiration in tubes or in the burette.
Only available for Action = Aspirate.
Wait time With this parameter a waiting period in [s] can be defined after 0…300
the aspiration that enables complete aspiration of viscous liquids.

Air gap before Avoids the mixing of the sample solution with the transfer solution Active | Inactive
aspiration in the tube.
Only available for Action = Aspirate and for Titration stand =
Rondo or InMotion.
80% =>
120 mL/min
Volume Specifies the volume in [mL] of the related air gap. 0.010 ... 1 | H
Only available for Action = Aspirate and for Air gap before (auxiliary value) | F
aspiration = Active. (formula)
Specific Parameters for Dispense

Discharge rate The relative dispensing rate in [%] 0.1 …80
(formula)
Discharge volume The dispensing volume in [mL]. 0.01…500
(formula)
Refill This parameter is used if volumes are required which exceeds the Active | Inactive
maximum burette volume (50 mL). If activated, you can specify
the Connection and the Aspiration rate for the automatic refilling
of the burette.
For multiple aspiration, be aware that volume shall be a multiple
of 25 µL.
Note
• Both, Aspiration rate and Discharge rate depend on the viscosity of the solution. Low rate values are
required for highly viscous liquids and high rate values for liquids with a low viscosity (for more information
about the viscosity of some liquids at room temperature refer to:
– http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/Hbase/tables/viscosity.html
– 5,000 centipoise is the maximum value. Aspiration of high viscous samples require a waiting time after
the aspiration step is completed.
See also
2 Liquid Handler Spindle Backlash Compensation } Page 342
2 Multiple Aspiration Tasks } Page 343
7.12.2.14.1 Liquid Handler Spindle Backlash Compensation

The piston of the burette is mounted on a precision stainless steel spindle that is moved by a motor via a drive
belt. The Liquid Handler performs an automatic spindle backlash compensation in order to compensate for the
following reasons:
• the spindle backlash that may increase over the lifetime of the Liquid Handler
• intermediate positions of the spindle obtained after the first movement into one direction (aspiration of
liquid), which would lead to inaccurate dosing after the spindle movement is reversed in order to dispense
the aspirated volume
• air bubble accumulation in the multi port valve
The automatic procedure of the spindle backlash compensation includes aspiration of an excessive volume of
300 µL (0.6% of the total volume of the burette) in addition to the selected nominal volume. The direction of
the spindle movement is reversed and the excessive volume is dispensed into the waste via the fix waste port
(port 6). After that the Liquid Handler is prepared for accurate dosing of the Liquid via the selected port.

7.12.2.14.2 Multiple Aspiration Tasks
If the Liquid Handler shall perform multiple aspiration tasks that include:
• aspiration of sample and air gaps into a pipetting tube connected to a port of the multiport valve.
• multiple aspiration of different volumes of different liquids into the burette.
The default spindle backlash compensation must only be activated in the last aspiration steps. The actual
volume aspirated in the first step deviates from the nominal volume since an intermediate spindle position is
obtained. The volumes of the subsequent aspiration are correct. The last aspiration step, i.e. the last step prior
to the reverse of the spindle movement, must include a spindle backlash compensation in order to compensate
the volume error generated by the first one.
Note
• The maximum aspiration volume is 50.000 mL (spindle backlash compensation volume is excluded). If
this value is exceeded by the sum of all nominal aspiration volumes, a corresponding error message is
displayed during method run, not at method development. This must be considered, especially if formulas
are used for the calculation of the respective aspiration volumes.
• The volume of each aspiration step must be a multiple integer of 25 µL in order to completely dispense the
total volume accumulated in multiple aspiration steps.
Example:
• Aspiration of 50 µL without spindle backlash compensation (BLC)
• Aspiration of 2500 µL without BLC
• Aspiration of 75 µL without BLC
• Aspiration of 10000 µL with BLC
• Dosing of 12625 µL
If the volume of an aspiration step is not an integer of 25 µL, i.e. the division of the nominal volume by the
minimum dosing increment of 1.5625 results in an odd number, i.e. a lower actual volume than the nominal
one will be aspirated due to the automatic rounding down (see above). The total actual aspirated volume is
therefore lower than the total nominal one. This will result in an error message of the total aspirated volume
shall be dispensed.
The following figures illustrate the multiple aspiration tasks for the Liquid Handler combined with the Rondo
sample changer using air gaps and applying spindle backlash compensation:
4
5 6
1
Liquid Handler with pipetting tube mounted on the Rondo
3 2
1 titration head and connection to water supply.
1: Water
4
5 6
1 Aspirate water with spindle backlash compensation
3 2

4
5 6
1 1. The Rinse beaker is turned to the Rondo tower
3 2 2. The pipetting tube is lowered into the beaker
3. The pipetting tube is flushed from the inside by
dispensing water from the Liquid Handler
4. The pipetting tube is rinsed from the outside with water
by PowerShowerTM action
5. The rinse solution is drained into waste using a
peristaltic pump
1
2
1: Drain
2: Rinse beaker
4
5 6
1 1. The pipetting tube is raised
3 2 2. An air bubble of x mL volume is aspirated into the
pipetting tube without spindle backlash compensation
4
5 6
1
1. The sample beaker is turned to the Rondo tower
3 2 2. y mL sample solution is aspirated without spindle
backlash compensation
1
1: Sample beaker
4
5 6
1
1. The pipetting tube is raised above the level of the
3 2
sample solution
2. An air bubble of x mL volume is aspirated into the
pipetting tube without spindle backlash compensation

4
5 6
1 1. The Rinse beaker is turned to the Rondo tower
3 2 2. The pipetting tube is lowered into the beaker
3. The pipetting tube is rinsed from the outside with water
by PowerShowerTM action
4. The rinse solution is drained into waste using a
peristaltic pump
1
2
1: Drain
2: Rinse beaker
4
5 6
1 z mL water is aspirated with spindle backlash compen-
3 2
sation
6
4
5
1 1. The titration beaker is turned to the Rondo tower
3 2
1 2. 2x + y + z mL volume is dispensed in order to
completely dispense the sample solution and burette
content into the titration beaker.
2
1: Water
2: Titration beaker
7.12.2.15 Measure (MVT)

This method function enables the continuous acquisition of measured values for a sensor (maximum of 1000
measured values within a defined time interval).. If a temperature sensor is selected for the measurement, the
subfunction "Temperature acquisition" is omitted.
Subfunction: Sensor
types

indication.

sensor acquisition.
Subfunction: Stir
Subfunction: Saving measured values
t(max) Defines the time, in [min], during which the measured values 1…106
should be collected.
See also
7.12.2.16 Measure (normal)

For the controlled acquisition of a measured value from a sensor. If a temperature sensor or a thermometric
sensor is selected for the measurement, the subfunction Temperature acquisition is omitted.
Subfunction: Sensor
types

indication.

sensor acquisition.
Subfunction: Stir
Subfunction: Acquisition of measured values
Acquisition Defines how the measured value is acquired. Equilibrium controlled |
Equilibrium controlled: The measured value is acquired as soon Fix | Set value
as it stabilizes.
Fix: The measured value is acquired after a defined waiting
period.
Set value: The measured value is acquired as soon as it has
exceeded, or fallen short of, a specific set value, or as soon as it
is within a range defined by the lower and upper limits. (The Set
Value option is not available if the method function is used within
a Sample (Calib) loop.)
Parameters for sensor types: mV, pH, ISE, Phototrode, Polarized, Conductivity
dE Defines the measured value interval. As soon as the change in the 0.02…15
measured value over the time period dt is less than dE, the
measured value will be acquired. This occurs within the defined
time interval of t(min) to t(max).
dE is specified in the unchanged unit of the sensor per second:
- mV for the mV sensor type, pH, ISE, phototrode and polarized
voltametric
- µA for polarized amperometric
- mS | µS for conductivity sensor (only for "Acquisition " =
"Equilibrium controlled".)
dt Defines the time component, in [sec] for dE/dt. 1…150
Only if Acquisition = Equilibrium controlled
t(min) Earliest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in 1…150
[sec].
Only if Acquisition = Equilibrium controlled.
t(max) Latest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec]. 1…105
Time Waiting time, in [sec], before acquisition of a measured value. 1…105
Only if Acquisition = Fix

Mode Mode for the measured value acquisition of the "set value". E > set value | E < set
E > set value acquires the measured value as soon as the set value
value has been exceeded.
E < set value acquires the measured value as soon as the
measured value falls below the set value. Not available within a
calibration loop.
Only for Acquisition = Set value.
Set value Set value in the sensor unit. Measured values will be acquired (See "Value Ranges of
after they exceed or fall below this value, depending on the mode Sensor Measuring Units
setting. and Control Band")
Only if Acquisition = Set value. Not available within a calibration
loop.
t(max) Latest time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec]. 1…105
loop.
Mean value The system finds a mean value for the saved measured value, Active | Inactive
using a maximum of 10 measured values.
No. of measured When you want to calculate a mean value, you can define the 1…10
values number of measured values used to find that mean value here.
dt Defines the time interval, in [sec], for the measured value acqui- 1…60
sition of the measured values to be averaged.
Only if Mean value = Active
Parameters for sensor types: Temperature

dT Defines the measured value interval. As soon as the change in the 0.1 … 10 Unit: °C | K |
measured value during the time period dt is less than dT, the °F
time interval of t(min) to t(max).
This value is specified in the unchanged unit of the sensor, per
second:
°C | K | °F
dt Defines the time component, in [sec] for dT/dt. 1…150
t(min) Earliest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in 1…150
[sec].
Only if Acquisition = Equilibrium controlled.
Time Waiting time, in [sec], before acquisition of a measured value. 1…105
Only if Acquisition = Fix
Mode Mode for the measured value acquisition of the "set value". T > set value | T < set
T > set value: acquires the measured value as soon as the set value | T within range | T
value has been exceeded. within range
T < set value: value acquires the measured value as soon as the
measured value falls below the set value. Not available within a
calibration loop.
T within range: acquires the measured value as soon as the
measured temp. value is within the range including the limits.
Only for Acquisition = Set value.

Set value Set value in the sensor unit. Measured values will be acquired (See "Value Ranges of
after they exceed or fall below this value, depending on the mode Sensor Measuring Units
setting. and Control Band")
loop.
Lower limit Defines the lower limit for the temperature acquisition. -20.0…200.0
Only appears if Mode = T within range.
Upper limit Defines the upper limit for the temperature acquisition. -20.0…200.0
Only appears if Mode = T within range.
t(max) Latest time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec]. 1…105
loop.
Mean value The system finds a mean value for the saved measured value, Active | Inactive
using a maximum of 10 measured values.
No. of measured When you want to calculate a mean value, you can define the 1…10
values number of measured values used to find that mean value here.
dt Defines the time interval, in [sec], for the measured value acqui- 1…60
sition of the measured values to be averaged.
Only if Mean value = Active
See also
7.12.2.17 Park
Activates the park function for a sample changer. So that for instance the sensor can be deposited into a
selected sample vessel at the end of a sample series.
stands
Position Defines the position in which to park the titration head. Conditioning beaker |
For Current position, the head is parked in the last active position Rinse beaker | Special
(for example: Sample). beaker 1…Special
For Current position + 1, the head is parked in the beaker after beaker 4 | Current
the last active position. position | Current
position + 1

See also
7.12.2.18 Pump
You can use this method function to drain a reagent into a sample vessel.
auxiliary reagents
Volume Volume in [mL]. 0.0001…1000 |
See also
7.12.2.19 Record
Use this method function to generate a report.
Print Reports are automatically printed after tasks are completed to the Active | Inactive
default printer.

See also
2 Manage instrument settings } Page 584
7.12.2.20 Rinse
You can use this method function to rinse a sensor. You can define the following parameters:
Titration stand Selects a titration stand defined in the setup. Appears only if the Select the titration
method function Rinse is used outside of a sample loop. stands from the list
specified in Setup.
auxiliary reagents
Position Defines the position on the sample changer where the rinse Current position | Rinse
procedure should be executed. The rinsing beaker can only be beaker | Current sample
selected for a connected Rondo. Rinsing in the Current sample
position is only possible within the loop.
Drain Defines whether the contents of the rinse vessel should be drained Active | Inactive
before starting the rinse procedure. This is always automatically
set to "Active" if the Position has been set to Rinse beaker or if
more than one rinse cycle is executed.
See also
7.12.2.21 Scan (KF Coul)

Scan (KF Coul) is available on the following titrator types:
• T7
• T9
• C30S
7.12.2.21.1 Sensor
For Karl Fischer titrations, only polarized sensors are used.

Type Shows the type of sensor used to perform the measurement Polarized
Indication Shows how the indication is done. Voltametric

7.12.2.21.2 Temperature program
The parameters of the temperature program defines the temperature range and heating rate for the
measurement. If the ambient temperature is higher than 30°C, the Start temperature needs to be at least 10 °C
higher than the ambient temperature.
• The measurement starts (1) when the start temperature
End temperature
is reached and the conditions defined in Max. start °C
drift and Drift stability are met..
• The measurement ends (2) when the end temperature 2
is reached.
Heating rate
1
Start temperature
min

Start temperature Defines the temperature at which the measurement starts. 40…280 °C
If the ambient temperature is higher than 30°C, the start
temperature needs to be at least 10 °C higher than the ambient
temperature.
Heating rate Defines the rate at which the oven is heated during the 0.5…75 °C/min
measurement.
End temperature Defines the final temperature at the end of the measurement. 40…280 °C
7.12.2.21.3 Stir
7.12.2.21.4 Control
End point End point in [mV] of the Karl Fischer titration and the standby -2000 … 2000
titration.
Control band The value in [mV] defines the width of the control band. Outside 0.1...2000
the control band, the system will titrate with the maximum
dispensing rate. The control band allows the dynamic behavior of
the controller to be influenced. Reducing the control band causes
a more aggressive control behavior, while increasing the control
band gives a gentler control behavior. When the measurement
curve reaches the control band, the titrator slows down the
addition of titrant to approach the end point cautiously.
Generator current Defines how the pulse strength is regulated. Automatic | Fix
Automatic: The pulse strength is regulated automatically.
Possible values for the pulse strength are 100 mA, 200 mA,
300 mA and 400 mA.
Fix: The pulse strength has a fixed values that is entered by the
user.
Current Defines the pulse strength generated by the generator electrode in 100 | 200 | 300 | 400
[mA].
7.12.2.21.5 Condition

See also
7.12.2.22 Scan (KF Vol)

Scan (KF Vol) is available on the following titrator types:
• T7
• T9
• V30S
7.12.2.22.1 Titrant
7.12.2.22.2 Sensor
For Karl Fischer titrations, only polarized sensors are used.
Type Shows the type of sensor used to perform the measurement Polarized
Indication Shows how the indication is done. Voltametric
7.12.2.22.3 Temperature program

The parameters of the temperature program defines the temperature range and heating rate for the
measurement. If the ambient temperature is higher than 30°C, the Start temperature needs to be at least 10 °C
higher than the ambient temperature.
• The measurement starts (1) when the start temperature
End temperature
is reached and the conditions defined in Max. start °C
drift and Drift stability are met..
• The measurement ends (2) when the end temperature 2
is reached.
Heating rate
1
Start temperature
min

Start temperature Defines the temperature at which the measurement starts. 40…280 °C
temperature.
Heating rate Defines the rate at which the oven is heated during the 0.5…75 °C/min
measurement.
End temperature Defines the final temperature at the end of the measurement. 40…280 °C
7.12.2.22.4 Stir
7.12.2.22.5 Control
The maximum dosing rates are dependent on the size of the burette. The user is able to edit the entire value
range. When Start is pressed, the system then checks whether the entered values are actually possible with the
current burette size.
Burette size [ml] Maximum dosing rate [mL/min]
1 3
5 15
10 30
20 60

titration.
Dosing rate The maximum dosing rate in [mL/min]. 0.001…60
(max)
Dosing rate (min) The minimum dosing rate in [µL/min]. 1…104
7.12.2.22.6 Termination
The analysis stops when the end temperature is reached.
To prevent the sample vessel from overflowing, the analysis is stopped at the latest when a defined maximum
volume of titrant has been added. If the maximum volume of titrant has been added, the analysis is stopped
even if other criteria are not met. The maximum volume is defined in At Vmax.
At Vmax

At Vmax Defines the maximum volume of titrant that can be added before Active | Inactive
the analysis is stopped at the latest.
7.12.2.22.7 Condition
See also
7.12.2.23 Stating
Stating is used to maintain a sample solution at a particular set potential.
Initial potential
At the beginning, the initial potential of the pH-stating is determined. The average of the last 10 measured
values is taken as the initial potential.
Pretitration
The pretitration is performed in consideration of the control band, the tendency and the maximum and
minimum rate to the set potential. A message that the titration is completed is displayed. As long as this is not
confirmed, the control remains active. After confirmation, the titration is stopped and a further message to the
actual sample addition is displayed. Throughout the titration, all data points are recorded.
Predispense
After the sample was added, and all messages are acknowledged, the predispensing is carried out.
Predispense = Volume
The volume is carried out at the maximum dosing rate of the burette drive in one step. Data points will be
recorded prior and after the predispensing.
Predispense = Potential
Corresponds to a prior endpoint titration. The data points are recorded according to the parameters in the
subfunction Measured value storage.
Stating
In order to prevent drifting of the sensor signal at the beginning of the stating, the control is inactive until the first
drop below the set potential.

The following figure illustrates the stages using "pretitration" and "predispense to potential" functions before
running the stating. In this example, a positive tendency is assumed.
Sample addition Start of titration addition

Wait time
SP2 Titrant addition
CB1
SP1+CB1
SP1
CB2
SP1-CB1
SP1-2×CB1
Pretitration Predispense Stating
SP1: The set potential defined in the subfunction Control.

SP2: Set potential of the subfunction Predispense (Mode = Potential).
CB1: Control band defined in subfunction Control.
CB2: Control band defined in subfunction Pretitration.
The relevant parameters can be determined for the following subfunctions:


(not with T50)
Subfunction: Sensor

Type The type of sensor to be used to perform the stating. mV | pH
Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will mV | pH

sensor acquisition.

Subfunction: Stir

Subfunction: Pretitration

Pretitration Pretitration specifies whether a pretitration should be performed. Active | Inactive
Pretitration takes place until the target potential defined in the
subfunction "control" is reached.
Control band This number defines the width of the control band. Outside the Depends on the sensor |
control band, the system will titrate with the maximum dispensing Auxiliary value
rate. The smaller the control band, the faster the titrator will react
to a deviation from the potential of the defined end point. When
the measurement curve reaches the control band, the titrator will
slow down the titrant addition to approach the end point in a
cautious manner. The unit will depend on the sensor used.
Sub function: Predispense

Mode Specifies the type of addition: Volume | Potential |
Volume: predispenses a specific volume. Factor | None
Potential: system predispenses a substance until a certain
potential is reached. The control band defined in the subfunction
Control is used.
Factor: A multiple of the sample size is predispensed.
None: does not predispense.
Volume The volume to be predispensed in [mL]. 0.0001…1000 |
Only for Mode = Volume. Auxiliary value | Formula
Potential The potential at which predispensing is stopped. Depends on the sensor
Only for Mode = Potential.
Factor The system calculates the predispensing volume by multiplying 0…105 | Auxiliary value
the factor by the sample size. | Formula
For Mode = Factor only.
Wait time Defines a waiting time, in [sec]. 0…32000
After predispensing or, if Mode = None, before the start of
titration.
Subfunction: Control

Set potential Defines the target potential at which the sample solution should -
be kept as constantly as possible. The unit of measure will
depend on the sensor used.

Control band This number defines the width of the control band. Depending on Depends on the sensor |
the tendency, the system will titrate with the maximum rate or will Auxiliary value
stop the titrant addition. Compare the upper graph. The smaller
the control band, the faster the titrator will react to a deviation
from the potential of the defined end point.
The titrant addition depends on the tendency and the actual
measured potential. Below the set potential, the titrant addition
rate will be adapted (speed up or slow down) to the reaction rate
of the system to approach the set potential in a cautious manner.
When the measured curve drifts below the control area, the
system will increase the titrant addition to the maximum
dispensing rate. Above the set potential, the titrant addition rate
will only be reduced within the control band, reaching zero when
the measurement curve drifts above the upper control band. The
smaller the control band, the faster the titrator will react to a
deviation from the set potential.
Tendency Defines the direction in which the sensor signal should be shifted Positive | Negative
by the titrant addition.
(max)

Active only.)
parameters. Cancel
process.
Subfunction: Termination

At Vmax The volume, in [mL], after the dispensing of which the stating will 0.01…1000
be terminated.
From t(min) Specifies whether to define a time for the earliest possible termi- Active | Inactive
nation of the stating.

t(min) The earliest time, in [min], at which termination can take place, if 0.1…106
the maximum volume has not yet been reached. (Only if "from
t(min)" = "yes" is selected.)
At t(max) Specifies whether to define a time at which the stating will be Active | Inactive
terminated if it has not ended already.
t(max) The time, in [min], at which the stating will be terminated if it has 0.1…106
not ended already.
(Only if "At "t(max)" = "Yes" is selected.)
After stating Specifies whether to define a time period after which the stating Active | Inactive
duration will be terminated after reaching the end point for the first time.
Stating duration The time period, in [min], after which the stating will be 0.1…106
terminated after reaching the first end point. If defined, "t(min)"
will be taken into consideration.
(Only if "After stating duration" = "Yes" is selected.)
At minimum rate Defines whether to take a minimum rate into consideration which Active | Inactive
will terminate the stating if violated.
dV The volume increment, in [mL/dt], for calculating the minimum 0.0001…10
rate.
(Only if "at minimum rate" = "yes" is selected.)
dt The time increment, in [min], for calculating the minimum rate. 1…106
(Only if "at minimal rate" = "yes" is selected.)
Subfunction: Measured value storage

Start condition Defines the starting condition for saving the data: After pretitration | After
• After pretitration: The system will start saving the data after the predispensing
pretitration.
• After predispensing: The system will start saving the data after
the predispensing.

See also
2 Value ranges from sensor measuring units and control band } Page 628
7.12.2.24 Stir
Activates or deactivates (speed ="0") the stirrer of the current titration stand.

Duration The stirring time, in [sec]. (Can also be defined by an auxiliary 0…105 | Auxiliary
value or a formula.) value/Formula
After the stirring time has elapsed, the titrator will continue to the
next method function without switching off the stirrer. The method
functions End of sample and Titration stand switch off the stirrer.
The stirrer output is defined by the prior method function Titration
stand.
See also
7.12.2.25 Standard addition


Titrant standard Define your titrant standard or select from the list. Arbitrary
Concentration Define the concentration of your titrant standard. -
Subfunction: Sensor

Type Shows the connected sensor type prior to the definition of the Arbitrary
following parameters.
Sensor Select a sensor from the setup list (for the selected sensor type). Arbitrary
Unit Measuring unit of the selected sensor. Arbitrary
Ion charge Shows the ion charge for the selected ISE sensor. Arbitrary

Temperature Select if you want to activate a temperature acquisition. For this a Active | Inactive
acquisition temperature sensor must be connected to the instrument.
Temperature Select the connected temperature sensor from the list. Arbitrary
sensor
Unit Select the temperature unit for the measured temperature. °C | K | °F
Subfunction: Stir

Speed Define the stirrer speed in percent. 0...100%


Control Selection of various control parameter sets for dE (Value acqui- Normal | Fast |
sition) dt, tmin, tmax. Cautious | User
dE (Potential Define the potential difference per addition. 1...60 [mV]
difference)
Number of Define the number of standard additions performed during the 2...8
additions analysis.
Show parameters Here you can select whether to display the preset parameters of Active | Inactive
the control modes Normal, Fast or Cautious as non-editable info
fields.
Not for Control = User.
Meas. val. acqui- Equilibrium controlled: Acquisition of measured values and -
sition subsequent titrant addition are done once the measured value is
stable.
Only if Show parameters is activated or Control is set to User
dE Maximum potential change for the measurement value acquisition 0.01...15 [mV]
which takes place not earlier than t(min) and not later than
t(max).
Only if Show parameters is activated or Control is set to User.
Read only if Control is set to Normal, Fast or Cautious.
dt Time span for potential change during a measurement value 1...150 [s]
acquisition.
t(min) Minimum time for a measurement value acquisition. 1...150 [s]
t(max) Maximum time for a measurement value acquisition. 1...100000 [s]
Show parameters Defines if the extra parameters used for the addition of titrant in Active | Inactive
for first addition the substeps of the first addition are displayed.
Titrant addition Defines how the volume of titrant added per sub step of the first Dynamic | Incremental
addition is determined.
Dynamic: the volume is adjusted for each sub step.
Incremental: the volume defined in dV is added.
Only if Show parameters for first addition is activated. Read
only, if Control is set to Normal, Fast or Cautious.
dE(set value) Defines the potential difference targeted in each sub steps during 0.1...100 [mV]
the first addition of titrant.
only, if Control is set to Normal, Fast or Cautious
dV(min) Defines the minimal volume of titrant added in each sub step of 0.0001...1 [mL]
the first addition.

dV(max) Defines the maximal volume of titrant added in each sub step of 0.0001...10 [mL]
the first addition.
dV Defines the volume of titrant added in each sub step of the first 0.0001…10 [mL]
addition.
Only if Show parameters for first addition is activated, ifControl
is set to User and if Titrant addition is set to Incremental.
Meas. val. acqui- Defines the type of measured value acquisition for the sub steps -
sition of the first addition.
Equilibrium controlled: Acquisition of measured values and
subsequent titrant addition are done once the measured value is
stable.
Fixed time: Acquisition of measured values and subsequent
titrant addition are done after a fixed time, that is defined in dt.
dE dE and dt define when a measured value is considered stable in 0.01...15 [mV]
the sub steps of the first addition. dE defines the maximal
potential difference for a stable value during the time span dt.
dt dE and dt define when a measured value is considered stable in 1...150 [s]
the sub steps of the first addition. dt defines the time interval for
calculating dE/dt.
t(min) Defines the minimal time before the next measured value acqui- 1...150 [s]
t(max) Defines the maximal time before the next measured value acqui- 1...100000 [s]
dt Defines the time interval for the measured value acquisition in the 1...6000 [s]
sub steps of the first addition.
Only if Show parameters for first addition is activated, if Control
is set to User and if Meas. val. acquisition is set to Fixed time.

At Vmax Define the maximum volume for termination. The termination will 0.10...1'000
be active when the maximum volume is reached at the latest.

Condition Activate if you want to create a condition for your standard Active | Inactive
addition.
Formula Define the specific formula for your condition. Arbitrary
Only if Condition is activated.

7.12.2.26 Standby
The "Standby" method function can only be inserted into Stromboli methods following the "End of sample"
method function. This method function determines whether the method is terminated at the end of the series, or
if the method remains active and then enters standby mode for the first loop. (This method function is only
available for Karl Fischer titrations with the "Stromboli" titration stand.)
7.12.2.27 Sync
This function is only supported by the titrator model T9.
Five synchronization codes are used for synchronizing methods running simultaneously in both workspaces A
and B. Each of the codes is accessible for any running method using this method function. Methods can be
designed so that one method syncs another and vice versa.
When the parameter Action is set to Wait within a method function Sync, the method will be waiting at this
point. The method will be continued as soon as the parameter Action set to Send from a second running
method is reached for the same number selected in Code.
Always begin an analysis by starting the method that first contains a parameter Action = Send. This fixes the
status of the codes and enables the correct order of the sequence.
If using a series sequence containing two series, order the series with method containing the Action = Send
first in the sequence series.

Action Defines if a code is to be sent or received. Send | Wait
Code Individually identifies the code to be sent or received. 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5
7.12.2.28 Titration (2-phase)

This method function performs an end-point titration. You can determine the relevant parameters for the
following subfunctions:

Subfunction: Sensor

types
indication.


sensor acquisition.
Subfunction: Stir

Subfunction: Predispense

potential is reached.
titration.

Titrant addition Defines whether to always dispense the same volume defined by Dynamic | Incremental
dV (Incremental) or to adjust the volume to be titrated per step as
the titration progresses (Dynamic).
Only for Control = User.
dE(set value) Defines the potential difference targeted per titrant addition. [mV/µA] 0.1…100
Only for Control = User and Titrant addition = Dynamic. [mS/µS] 0.01…100
dT(set value) Defines the temperature difference in the unit of the temperature 0.1…100
sensor that is targeted for a temperature sensor per titrant
addition.
For Control = User and Titrant addition = Dynamic only.
dV(min) Defines the minimum amount for a titrant addition, in [mL]. 0.0001…1
dV(max) Defines the maximum amount for a titrant addition, in [mL]. 0.0001…10
dV Defines the volume increment, in [mL], for the incremental titrant 0.0001…10
addition.
For Control = User and Titrant addition = Incremental only.

Meas. val. acqui- Type of measuring value acquisition: Equilibrium controlled |
sition Equilibrium controlled: The system acquires the measured value Fixed time
and makes the next titrant addition as soon as a stable measured
value is established.
Fixed time: The measured values acquisition and the titrant
addition occur according to fixed time intervals.
dE As soon as the change in the measured value during the time [mV/µA] 0.1 … 15
period dt is less than dE, the measured value will be acquired. [mS/µS] 0.01 … 15
Acquisition takes place no earlier than after t(min) and no later
than after t(max). Then the next titrant addition is conducted.
For Control = User and Meas. val. acquisition = Equilibrium
controlled only.
dT As soon as the change in the measured value during the time 1…150
period dt is less than dT, the measured value will be acquired.
controlled for a temperature sensor only.
dt Defines the time interval, in [sec], for calculating dE/dt (or dT/dt 0.1…15
for a temperature sensor).
controlled only.
t(min) Earliest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in 0.5…150
[sec].
Only for Control = User and Meas. val. acquisition =
Equilibrium controlled.
dt Defines the time interval, in [sec], for Fixed time. 0.5…6000
For Control = User and Meas. val. acquisition = Fixed time
only.
Subfunction: Evaluation and Recognition

Procedure Defines which evaluation procedure to use. Standard | Asymmetric |
Minimum | Maximum |
Segmented
Threshold Defines the threshold (absolute amount) that must be exceeded Standard,
for the recognition of an EQP. Asymmetric and
Procedure = Minimum and Maximum: This threshold value Segmented: 0 … 106
refers to the original curve [UoM] Minimum and
Procedure = Standard and Asymmetric: It refers to the 1st Maximum: Depends on
derivative of the original curve [UoM*/mL]. the sensor
Procedure = Segmented: It refers to the 2nd derivative of the
original curve [UoM/mL].
*
UoM: Unit of Measurement
Tendency Defines the tendency for which the EQP is to be detected. Positive | Negative |
For Procedure = Standard, Asymmetric and Segmented. None

Ranges You can define up to three recognition ranges. Outside these 1 | 2 | 3 | 0
ranges, the system will recognize neither EQP's nor EQP
candidates.
Depending on what is defined here, upper and lower limits are
defined for each recognition range and also whether additional
EQP criteria are to be used for each recognition range.
Range type 1…3 Defines the type of the definition range. Potential | Volume |
Potential: each range is defined by an upper limit and a lower Potential & volume
limit of a potential.
Volume: each range is defined by an upper limit and a lower limit
of a volume.
Potential & volume: each range is defined by an upper limit and
a lower limit of a potential and an upper and a lower limit of a
volume.
Lower limit Defines the lower limit for the recognition range as potential. The Depends on the sensor
potential 1…3 unit of measure will depend on the sensor used.
Upper limit Defines the upper limit for the recognition range as potential. The Depends on the sensor
Lower limit Defines the lower limit for the recognition range as volume. 1…1000 mL
volume 1…3
Upper limit Defines the upper limit for the recognition range as volume. 1…1000 mL
volume 1…3
Add. EQP criteria Defines whether to take additional EQP criteria into consideration. Last EQP | Steepest
The available selection will depend on the evaluation procedure jump | Lowest value |
chosen. They can be defined individually for each recognition Highest value | No
range or for the overall recognition range (Ranges = 0).
Last EQP: The system only considers the quantity of EQPs
defined.
Steepest jump: The system only considers the number of
steepest jumps defined.
Lowest value: The system only considers the number of lowest
values defined.
Highest value: The system only considers the number of highest
values defined.
Last jumps The quantity of last jumps to be taken into consideration. 1…9
Only for Add. EQP criteria = Last EQP.
Steepest jumps The quantity of steepest jumps to be taken into consideration. 1…9
Only for Add. EQP criteria = Steepest jump.
Lowest values The quantity of lowest values to be taken into consideration. 1…9
Only for Add. EQP criteria = Lowest value.
Highest values The quantity of highest values to be taken into consideration. 1…9
Only for Add. EQP criteria = Highest value.
Buffer capacity Determination of buffer capacity with VEQ/2. Only possible for Active | Inactive
sensor unit "pH" and volume-based sample entry (Sample >
Entry type = Volume or Fixed volume).


At EP Defines whether to terminate the titration after reaching the end Active | Inactive
point.
If Inactive is selected, after reaching the end point the system will
continue acquiring measured values without adding titrant until
the maximum time period is reached.
Termination delay The termination delay which defines the time period, in [sec], 0…108 | Auxiliary value
between reaching the end point and terminating the titration. If
during the termination delay the measured value drops below the
end point, the system will add further increments and restart the
termination delay.
Only if At EP = Active is selected.)
At Vmax The titration will be terminated no later than at this dispensed 0…108
maximum volume, in [mL].
Max. time Defines the maximum time of the titration, in [sec]. 0…108 | ∞ | Auxiliary
value

See also
2 Titrator Evaluation Procedure } Page 407
7.12.2.29 Titration (EP)

Carries out an endpoint titration. Define the relevant parameters for the following subfunctions:
Method function: Titration (EP)
Titrant

Sensor

types

Frequency Polarization frequency in [Hz]. The standard frequency is 4 Hz; 4 | 2 | 1 | 0.5
other values should only be used for special applications.
Only for Type = Polarized, and Unit = mV.
indication.
Temperature acquisition

sensor acquisition.
Stir

Predispense

titration.
Control

End point type Absolute: Titration is ended when the absolute measured value is Absolute | Relative
reached.
Relative: The system will take into consideration the difference
between the desired end point and the measured value at the start
of the titration.

Tendency Defines the direction of change for the measured value during the Positive | Negative |
titrant addition. If the starting potential, end point and tendency None
are inconsistent at the start of the analysis, the system will
terminate the analysis immediately.
For End point type = Absolute only.
End point value The defined titration end point. The unit will depend on the sensor Depends on the sensor |
used. Formula | Auxiliary value
(max)
Termination

point.
continue acquiring measured values without adding titrant until
the maximum time period is reached.
Termination delay The termination delay which defines the time period, in [sec], 0…108 | Auxiliary value
between reaching the end point and terminating the titration. If
during the termination delay the measured value drops below the
end point, the system will add further increments and restart the
termination delay.
Only if At EP = Active is selected.)
At Vmax Defines the maximum volume, in [mL], at which the titration 0.1…1000 | Auxiliary
must be terminated if it has not been terminated already. value | Formula
Max. time Defines the maximum time of the titration, in [sec]. 0…108 | ∞ | Auxiliary
value
Accompanying Stating
• For instrument type T7/T70 and T9/T90 only.

Accompanying Activates a stating that runs parallel to the actual titration. Titration Active | Inactive
Stating accompanied by stating allows a sample solution to be
maintained at a specific electrode potential during titration.

(not with T50)

Subfunction: Sensor



Control is used.
titration.


(max)

Active only.)
parameters. Cancel
process.
Condition

See also
7.12.2.30 Titration (EP Coul)

This method function is used to determine the Bromine Index (BI). This method function contains subfunctions
which each have their own parameters.
You can define the relevant parameters for the following subfunctions:
Subfunction: Sensor
For coulometric titrations, only polarized sensors are used.

Subfunction: Stir

The titrant generation is controlled by the generator current. Defined current increments can be defined user-
specifically or automatically. You can also set the titration endpoint. You can define the rate of titrant
generation, whether it is generated normally or slowly (cautiously). The Cautious mode is used to avoid overti-
tration for smaller sample volumes.

End point The defined titration end point. The unit will depend on the sensor Depends on the sensor |
used. Formula | Auxiliary value
Rate Cautious or normal current regulation. Cautious | Normal
generation rate. The control band allows the dynamic behavior of
generation of titrant to approach the end point cautiously.
300 mA and 400 mA.
user.
Current Defines the pulse strength generated by the generator electrode in 1 | 5 | 100 | 200 | 300 |
[mA]. 400


point.
continue acquiring measured values without generating titrant
until the maximum time period is reached.
Termination delay Time in [s] from the time the end point is first reached until the 0...108
termination of the titration.
Max. time Defines the maximum duration of the titration. 0...108 | ∞ | Auxiliary
value
See also
7.12.2.31 Pretitration (EP Coul)

The method function Pretitration can be used in combination with the method function Titration (EP Coul) to
determine the Bromine Index for low currents and for samples with low concentrations.
The Termination delay has a setting that is specific for the pretitration. For the parameters listed below, the
settings from the subfunctions Control and Termination of the method function Titration (EP Coul) are used.
• End point
• Rate
• Control band
• Generator current
• Current
• At EP
When the pretitration has reached the termination criteria, the user is informed by a pop-up. The pretitration
continues until the user confirms the pop-up. After the user has confirmed the pop-up, he is prompted to add
the sample.
Subfunction: Pretitration (EP Coul)

Termination delay Time in [s] from the time the end point is first reached until the 0...108
termination of the pretitration.
7.12.2.32 Titration (EQP)

Carries out an equivalence-point titration. You can define the relevant parameters for the following subfunctions:

Method function: Titration (EQP)
Titrant

Sensor
types
Frequency Polarization frequency in [Hz]. The standard frequency is 4 Hz; 4 | 2 | 1 | 0.5
other values should only be used for special applications.
Only for Type = Polarized, and Unit = mV.
indication.
Temperature acquisition

sensor acquisition.
Stir

Predispense

titration.
Control

Control Here you can select from among three predefined control modes, Normal | Fast | Cautious
or you can select User to define all the parameters as freely | User
editable.
If you change from Normal, Fast, Cautious to User, the system
will copy over the predefined parameter settings and they will then
be freely editable.
Mode Select an application depending on the sensor type. The selected Application list
application will then provide its own specific parameter set.
Not available for Control = User.
Show parameters Here you can select whether to display the preset parameters of Active | Inactive
the control modes Normal, Fast or Cautious as non-editable info
fields.
Not for Control = User.
Titrant addition Defines whether to always dispense the same volume defined by Dynamic | Incremental
dV (Incremental) or to adjust the volume to be titrated per step as
the titration progresses (Dynamic).
dE(set value) Defines the potential difference targeted per titrant addition. [mV/µA] 0.1…100
Only for Control = User and Titrant addition = Dynamic. [mS/µS] 0.01…100
dT(set value) Defines the temperature difference in the unit of the temperature 0.1…100
sensor that is targeted for a temperature sensor per titrant
addition.
dV(min) Defines the minimum amount for a titrant addition, in [mL]. 0.0001…1
dV(max) Defines the maximum amount for a titrant addition, in [mL]. 0.0001…10
dV Defines the volume increment, in [mL], for the incremental titrant 0.0001…10
addition.
For Control = User and Titrant addition = Incremental only.
Meas. val. acqui- Type of measuring value acquisition: Equilibrium controlled |
sition Equilibrium controlled: The system acquires the measured value Fixed time
and makes the next titrant addition as soon as a stable measured
value is established.
Fixed time: The measured values acquisition and the titrant
addition occur according to fixed time intervals.

dE As soon as the change in the measured value during the time [mV/µA] 0.1 … 15
period dt is less than dE, the measured value will be acquired. [mS/µS] 0.01 … 15
controlled only.
dT As soon as the change in the measured value during the time 1…150
period dt is less than dT, the measured value will be acquired.
controlled for a temperature sensor only.
dt Defines the time interval, in [sec], for calculating dE/dt (or dT/dt 0.1…15
for a temperature sensor).
controlled only.
t(min) Earliest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in 0.5…150
[sec].
dt Defines the time interval, in [sec], for Fixed time. 0.5…6000
For Control = User and Meas. val. acquisition = Fixed time
only.
Evaluation and Recognition

Minimum | Maximum |
Segmented
*
candidates.

of a volume.
volume.
volume 1…3
volume 1…3
defined.
values defined.
values defined.
Buffer capacity Determination of buffer capacity with VEQ/2. Only possible for Active | Inactive
sensor unit "pH" and volume-based sample entry (Sample >
Entry type = Volume or Fixed volume).
Termination

At potential Defines whether to terminate the titration after reaching a defined Active | Inactive
potential (with the correct tendency!).
Potential The potential at which to terminate the titration. The unit of -100...100 | Auxiliary
measure will depend on the sensor used. value | Formula
Only for At potential = Active. (Depends on the
sensor)

Termination Defines for which tendency the titration should be terminated. Positive | Negative |
tendency Only for At potential = Active. None
At slope Defines whether to terminate the titration after reaching a defined Active | Inactive
slope. This absolute value must be exceeded by one measured
value and then be greater than two measured values to result in
termination.
Slope The slope, in [unit of measure/mL], at which to terminate the 0...105 | Auxiliary value
titration. | Formula
Only for At slope = Active.
After number of Specifies whether the titration should be terminated after the Active | Inactive
recognized EQPs recognition of a specific quantity of EQP candidates. The EQP
candidates must fulfill the following conditions:
- It lies within the recognition range defined in Ranges.
- It is above the threshold defined in Threshold
- It show the correct tendency as defined in Tendency. If no
additional EQP criteria should be considered, then EQP candidate
= EQP applies.
Number of EQPs Defines the quantity of EQP candidates after the recognition of 1…10 | Auxiliary value |
which the system should terminate the titration. Formula
Only for After number of recognized EQPs = Active.
Combined termi- Inactive: Termination as soon as the first of the selected criteria Active | Inactive
nation criteria from the (Potential | Slope | After number of recognized EQPs)
group has been fulfilled.
Active: Termination as soon as all the selected criteria have been
fulfilled. Termination of the titration in any case if the maximum
volume is reached.
Accompanying Stating
• For instrument type T7/T70 and T9/T90 only.

Accompanying Activates a stating that runs parallel to the actual titration. Titration Active | Inactive
Stating accompanied by stating allows a sample solution to be
maintained at a specific electrode potential during titration.

(not with T50)
Subfunction: Sensor




Control is used.
titration.


(max)

Active only.)
parameters. Cancel
process.
Condition


See also
7.12.2.33 Titration (KF Vol)

Carries out a Karl Fischer titration. You can determine the relevant parameters for the following subfunctions:

Subfunction: Sensor

For Karl Fischer titrations, only polarized sensors can be selected.
Subfunction: Stir

Subfunction: Predispense

Mode Specifies the type of addition: Volume | None
Volume: predispenses a specific volume.
titration.
The maximum dosing rates are dependent on the size of the burette. The user is able to edit the entire value
range. When Start is pressed, the system then checks whether the entered values are actually possible with the
current burette size.
Burette size [ml] Maximum dosing rate [mL/min]
1 3
5 15
10 30
20 60

titration.
(max)
Start Cautious or normal start of a Karl Fischer titration. Cautious | Normal
The titration is terminated when the maximum time, the maximum volume or the drift stop are reached.
To prevent the sample vessel from overflowing, the analysis is stopped at the latest when a defined maximum
volume of titrant has been added. If the maximum volume of titrant has been added, the analysis is stopped
even if other criteria are not met. The maximum volume is defined in At Vmax.
At Vmax

Type Termination of titration following defined drift and if the value falls Drift stop relative | Drift
below the end-point value (EP). stop absolute | Delay
Drift stop relative: Actual drift stop value = online drift + drift time
Drift stop absolute: Actual drift stop value = drift
Delay time: Termination after a delay time below the EP.
Drift The drift value in [µg/min] for the termination criterion drift stop 1.0 ... 106
relative or drift stop absolute.
Delay time Time in [s] from the time the end point is first reached until the 0...6000
Min. time Titration is not to be terminated before this time in [s] is reached 0...108 | Auxiliary value
(exception: the maximum volume has been reached).
value
At Vmax Defines the maximum volume of titrant that can be added before Active | Inactive
the analysis is stopped at the latest.
7.12.2.34 Titration (KF Coul)

The Karl Fischer titration is performed using the "Titration (KF Coul)" method function. This function contains
subfunctions which each have their own parameters.
You can determine the relevant parameters for the following subfunctions:
Subfunction: Sensor
For coulometric KF titrations, only polarized sensors are used.

Subfunction: Stir

The titrant generation is controlled by the generator current. Defined current increments can be defined user-
specifically or automatically. You can also set the titration end point (recommended value:100 mV). You can
determine the rate of titrant generation - whether it is generated normally or slowly (cautiously). The Cautious
mode is used to avoid overtitration for smaller sample volumes.

titration.
Rate Cautious or normal current regulation. Cautious | Normal
300 mA and 400 mA.
user.
Current Defines the pulse strength generated by the generator electrode in 100 | 200 | 300 | 400
[mA].

Type Termination of titration following defined drift and if the value falls Drift stop relative | Drift
below the end-point value (EP). stop absolute | Delay
Drift stop relative: Actual drift stop value = online drift + drift time
Drift stop absolute: Actual drift stop value = drift
Delay time: Termination after a delay time below the EP.
Drift The drift value in [µg/min] for the termination criterion drift stop 1.0 ... 106
relative or drift stop absolute.
Delay time Time in [s] from the time the end point is first reached until the 0...6000
Min. time Titration is not to be terminated before this time in [s] is reached 0...108 | Auxiliary value
(exception: the maximum volume has been reached).
value

Condition
See also
7.12.2.35 Titration (Learn EQP)

Titration (Learn EQP) is used to determine the best parameters for carrying out an EQP titration. As soon as
the settings have been successfully recorded, the titration detection in the method is converted to a Titration
(EQP) with the recorded settings. If the analysis has more than one sample, the subsequent samples are
titrated and analyzed with the recorded settings parameters.
You can determine the relevant parameters for the following subfunctions:

Subfunction: Sensor

types
indication.

sensor acquisition.
Subfunction: Stir



See also
7.12.2.36 Titration (Thermometric)

Carries out an thermometric titration. You can define the relevant parameters for the following subfunctions:
Sub function: Titrant
Sub function: Sensor
types
Sub function: Stir
Sub function: Control
Dosing rate The dosing speed, in [mL/min]. If the number is above the 0.001…60
maximum value possible, the system will dispense at the
maximum rate. You can also select a burette type-dependent
maximum number.
Sub function: Evaluation and Recognition
Procedure Defines which evaluation procedure is used. Segmented
Threshold Defines the threshold (absolute amount) that must be exceeded 0…106
for the recognition of an EQP. It refers to the 2nd derivative of the
original curve [UoM/mL2].
*

Tendency Defines the tendency for which the EQP is detected. None | Positive |
None: The tendency is not used for the detection of the EQP. Negative
Positive: The titration curve must go up for the detection of the
EQP.
Negative: The titration curve must go down for the detection of the
EQP.
of a volume.
volume.
volume 1…3
volume 1…3
Add. EQP criteria Defines whether to take additional EQP criteria into consideration. Inactive | Last EQP |
Additional EQP criteria can be defined individually for each recog- Steepest jump
nition range or for the overall recognition range.
Inactive: No additional EQP criteria are considered.
defined.
Sub function: Termination

After number of Specifies whether the titration should be terminated after the Active | Inactive
recognized EQPs recognition of a specific quantity of EQP candidates. The EQP
candidates must fulfill the following conditions:
- It lies within the recognition range defined in Ranges.
- It is above the threshold defined in Threshold
- It show the correct tendency as defined in Tendency. If no
additional EQP criteria should be considered, then EQP candidate
= EQP applies.
Number of EQPs Defines the quantity of EQP candidates after the recognition of 1…10 | Auxiliary value |
which the system should terminate the titration. Formula
Only for After number of recognized EQPs = Active.

Sub function: Condition
See also
7.12.2.37 Titration stand

You can use the following parameters to specify the relevant titration stand.
Method function: Titration stand
In this chapter the parameters of all titration stands are described. The method type determines which titration
stands are available.
The following titration stands have no parameters that are specific for the titration stand.
• Auto stand
• Manual stand
• External stand
• Rondolino
These titration stands are available for the following method types:
• Titer
• Calibration
Parameters common to all titration stands

stands
7.12.2.37.1 Rondo
Rondo is available for the following method types:
• Titer
• Calibration

7.12.2.37.2 InMotion T
InMotion T is available for the following method types:

• Titer
• Calibration

Titration head The vertical position to which the titration head of the sample Sample | Cond. measure
position changer should be brought.
7.12.2.37.3 KF Stand
KF stand is available for the following method types:
• KF Vol
• Ext. Extr. V.
• KF Coul
• Ext. Extr. C.
• Bromine Index
Source for drift and Max. start drift are not available for Bromine Index.

Source for drift Defines the source for the drift value used in the method function Online | Determination |
Calculation. Fix value | Request
Online: Drift value determined in the Standby mode, at the time
the user taps Start sample.
Determination: Result of a drift determination started from the
More KF functions window. The result is saved in the KF titration
stand that is used in the method.
Fix value: Value defined in Drift
Request: Value that the user enters after starting a sample
analysis or a series.
Drift Defines the drift value. 0...1000 µg/min
Max. start drift The maximum drift for which a sample determination can still be 0...1000 µg/min
started.
7.12.2.37.4 InMotion KF
InMotion KF is available for the following method types:
• IM KF V.
• Scan KF V.
• IM KF C.
• Scan KF C.
Controlled heating of the sample
With Temperature ramp you can heat a sample to the measurement temperature at a controlled rate. The water
that the sample releases while it is heated, is included when the water content is calculated.
If the ambient temperature is higher than 30°C, the Start temperature needs to be at least 10 °C higher than
the ambient temperature.
Temperature ramp is available for the following method functions:
• IM KF V.

• IM KF C.
Temperature ramp is activated:
• The sample changer inserts the sample in the oven
Oven temperature
when the temperature defined in Start temperature is °C
reached (1).
• The sample is heated at the rate defined in Oven 2
heating rate. Oven heating rate
• The measurement starts when the oven reaches the 1
temperature defined in Oven temperature (2) and the
conditions defined in Max. start drift and Drift
Start temperature
stability are met.
min
• At the end of the measurement the oven returns to the
start temperature before the next sample is inserted.
Temperature ramp is deactivated:
• The sample changer inserts the sample in the oven when the temperature defined in Oven temperature is
reached.
Define the maximum drift at the start of a measurement
Max. start drift defines the upper limit for the drift at the start of the measurement. The measurement only
starts, when the drift is lower than the value defined in Max. start drift. Drift is caused by water that continually
diffuses into the titration stand and that is not part of the sample. The drift should be small and stable, because
it is subtracted from the measured value when the water content is calculated. METTLER TOLEDO recommends
a drift <10 µg/mL and if possible <5 µg/mL.
Source for drift defines which drift value is used in the method function Calculation. Source for drift is
available for the following method types:
• IM KF V.
• IM KF C.
Define the carrier gas source

A gas flow carries the water from the vial (1) in the oven to the titration vessel (2).
Carrier gas source 1 2
Three basic setups are possible for the carrier gas source:
• An air pump KF from METTLER TOLEDO is installed on the InMotion KF to pump ambient air through the
system. Set Carrier gas source to InMotion KF and define the flow rate of the carrier gas in Flow rate.
• A gas stop valve from METTLER TOLEDO is installed on the InMotion KF to control the gas flow from a
pressurized gas cylinder or gas pipes. Set Carrier gas source to InMotion KF and define the flow rate of the
carrier gas in Flow rate.
• It is possible to use another system. In this case the titrator cannot control the flow rate. If you want to use
another system, contact your authorized METTLER TOLEDO dealer or service representative.
u www.mt.com/contact

Transfer tube heating
To minimize the amount of water that is lost due to condensation in the transfer tube, you can use a heated
transfer tube and activate Transfer tube heating. If Transfer tube heating is activated, the heated transfer tube
is heated.

Temperature Defines whether a sample is heated at a controlled rate or not. Active | Inactive
ramp
Start temperature Defines the start temperature of the temperature ramp. 40…280 °C
temperature.
Oven heating rate Defines the maximum heating rate of the temperature ramp. 0.1…75 °C/min
Oven temperature Defines the measurement temperature of the oven sample 40...280 °C
changer.
Source for drift Defines the source for the drift value used in the method function Determination | Fix value
Calculation. | Request
started.
Carrier gas Defines the source of the carrier gas. InMotion KF | External
source InMotion KF: Either the air pump KF or the gas stop valve
installed on the sample changer are used.
External: A source independent of the sample changer is used.
Flow rate Defines the flow rate of the carrier gas. 20…200 mL/min
Transfer tube Defines whether the titrator switches the heating of a heated Active | Inactive
heating transfer tube on or off.
7.12.2.37.5 Stromboli
Stromboli is available for the following method types:
• Stromb. V.
• Stromb. C.

Oven temperature Defines the measurement temperature of the oven sample 50...300 °C
changer.
Source for drift Defines the source for the drift value used in the method function Determination | Fix value
Calculation. | Request

started.
7.12.3 Sample
7.12.3.1 Sample
The method function Sample defines the container for a sample loop. All of the method functions contained are
conducted for each sample in a series. You can add multiple method functions of this type above or below of
an existing one.
With the parameters in the method function Sample you can define information about the sample and how this
information is entered.
Identification of the sample
For each sample up to 3 IDs can be defined, depending on the setting of the parameter Number of IDs. ID 1 is
always available. ID 2 and ID 3 are only available if the parameter Number of IDs is set to 2 or 3 respectively.
The values defined in the method function Sample are used as default values and can be changed before or
during an analysis.
ID 1 is displayed in the window Start analysis. ID 2 and ID 3 are displayed in the window Sample data.
Definition of the sample size
You can define if the sample size is given as weight, volume or number of pieces and if the sample size can be
entered or is set to a fixed value.
Weight, Volume and Pieces allow the user to enter the sample size in the window Start analysis. You can
define a range for the sample size with the parameters Lower limit and Upper limit. The user can change
Weight per piece and Density for a sample in the window Sample data.
The following table shows the parameters available for each option.
Weight Volume Pieces
Lower limit • • •
Upper limit • • •
Weight per piece - - •
Density • • -
For Fixed weight, Fixed volume and Fixed pieces the predefined sample size is displayed in the window Start
analysis but the user cannot change it. You can define the sample size with the parameters Weight, Volume
and Pieces. The user can change Weight per piece and Density for a sample in the window Sample data.
Fixed weight Fixed volume Fixed pieces
Weight • - -
Volume - • -
Pieces - - •
Density • • -
Definition of additional information about the sample

You can use the parameter Correction factor to define additional information about the sample. The value
defined in the method function Sample is used as default value. The user can change the value before or
during an analysis, and when the results are recalculated.
The value of the correction factor is included in reports and can be used in calculations.
Definition of the method for entering sample size and additional data
You can define if the sample size and some additional data is read from the sample by one of the devices listed
below or if the data needs to be entered by hand.

• SmartSample reader of the titrator
• SmartSample reader of a connected InMotion Autosampler
• Barcode reader
The table below shows which data can be read depending on the setting of the parameter Titrator reader or
InMotion reader. InMotion reader is displayed, if an InMotion Autosampler is used as titration stand.
ID 1 ID 2 Sample size Density Correction factor
SmartSample • • • • •
MT 2D barcode • - • - -
ID 1 barcode • - - - -
Definition of time for entering sample size and additional data

With Entry, you can define if the user has to enter sample size and additional data before the analysis starts or
before and during the analyses. This option only exists If the user needs to enter the sample size manually.
Sample type Defines the type of sample used in the sample loop. The sample Sample | Standard |
type is shown in the method editor, the sample data window and Blank
the report.
Number of IDs Defines the number of sample IDs to be defined. 1…3
Only appears subject to the settings made for Number of IDs.
Entry type Defines whether the sample should be added with a defined Weight | Fixed weight |
mass, defined volume or defined number of pieces. The sample Volume | Fixed volume |
data query will then adjust according to the unit of measurement. Pieces | Fixed pieces
Fixed volume or Fixed pieces: The sampling weight, sample
volume or number of pieces will be entered as the parameter in
this method function and will not be prompted when conducting
the method.
Lower limit Defines the lower limit for the variable entry data. The unit will [g]: 0 … 1000
depend on the setting for Entry type parameter. [mL]: 0 … 1000
Only appears if none fixed values are selected in Entry type. [pcs.]: 0 … 106
Upper limit Defines the upper limit for the variable entry of data. The unit will [g]: 0 … 1000
Only appears if none fixed values are selected in Entry type. [St.]: 0 … 106
Appears only if Entry type = Fixed weight was selected.
Appears only if Entry type = Fixed volume was selected.
Appears only if Entry type = Fixed pieces was selected.
selected.
Density The density of a liquid sample substance, in [g/mL]. 0.0001…100
Appears only if Entry type is set to Weight, Volume, Fixed
weight or Fixed volume.

Entry Determines the entry time for the sample size. Before | Arbitrary
Before: The sample size must be entered before the titration.
Arbitrary: The sample size will have to be entered at any time
during the titration (no later than when it is used during the calcu-
lations).
Only appears if none fixed values are selected in Entry type.
Titrator reader Defines how sample data is read. None | SmartSample |
None: no sample data reader is used. MT 2D barcode | ID 1
SmartSample: the titrator will prompt the operator to position the barcode
sample on the SmartSample reader. The sample ID1,2, sample
size, density and correction factor are filled automatically at
analysis start.
MT 2D barcode: the titrator prompts the operator to read the
barcode with a connected barcode reader before the sample
analysis starts. The sample ID1 and the sample size are filled
automatically at analysis start if the barcode has an MT specific
barcode layout.
ID 1 barcode: the titrator prompts the operator to read the
analysis starts. The sample ID1 is filled automatically at analysis
start.
Only appears if Titration stand is set to Manual stand, External
stand or Auto stand.
InMotion reader Defines how sample data is read. SmartSample | MT 2D
None: no sample data reader is used. barcode | ID 1 barcode |
SmartSample: the InMotion reader reads the sample ID1,2, None
sample size, density and factor from the Smart Tag on the beaker.
barcode layout.
start.
Only appears for Titration stand = InMotion.
Number of Defines the number of additional sample factors that can be used. 0…3
sample factors
Name of sample Defines the name of the additional sample factor. This name is 0…20 characters
factor 1 displayed in reports and in windows where the user can enter
sample data.
Value of sample Defines the value of the additional sample factor. 0.0000…106
factor 1
7.12.3.2 Sample (Calib)

Start of a loop for sensor calibration. Contains all of the necessary data regarding the sensor and the calibration
standard.

Sensor type Defines the type of sensor that is calibrated. List of available sensor
types
Action Defines if a calibration or a sensor test is performed. Calibration | Sensor test
Automatic buffer Defines whether the titrator should automatically identify the Active | Inactive
recognition buffers via the pH buffer list. Only possible for pH sensors.
pH buffer list Defines the pH buffer list to be used for the calibration of a pH Select from the pH buffer
sensor. lists (Auto pH buffer
lists) defined in Setup.
List of standards Defines the standards list to be used for the calibration of an ISE Select from the
or conductivity sensor. standards lists defined
in Setup.
Calibration Here you can define whether the calibration of a pH or ISE sensor Linear | Segmented
should be done in a linear or segmented manner.
Number of buffers The number of buffers to be used for the calibration of a pH 1…9
sensor.
Number of The number of standards to be used for the calibration of an ISE 1…9
standards sensor.
Buffer 1…9 Defines the buffers used for the calibration or sensor test of a pH List of available pH
sensor. buffers
For the calibration, up to nine buffers can be selected from the pH
buffer list.
For the sensor test, two buffers must be selected from the pH
buffer list.
Standards 1…9 For the calibration of an ISE sensor, up to nine standards can be Select from the
selected from the standards list. standards list.
Standard Select the name of the standard from the standards list. Select from the
standards defined in the
setup.
Temperature The temperature during the calibration in [°C] if temperature -20°C…200°C
acquisition has not been selected in the method function Measure
(normal). Does not appear for temperature sensors.
7.12.3.3 Sample (KF)

The method function Sample (KF) for Karl Fischer titration is subdivided into the subfunctions Sample,
Concentration, and Blank values. The method type determines which subfunctions are available.
Method type Sample Concentration Blank values
KF Vol • • –
Ext. Extr. V. • • •
Scan KF V. • • –
IM KF V. • • –
Stromb. V. • • –
KF Coul • – –
Ext. Extr. C. • – •
Scan KF C. • – –
IM KF C. • – –
Stromb. C. • – –

You can define the following parameters:
Subfunction: Sample
Sample type is only available for the following method types:
• IM KF C.
• IM KF V.

Sample type Defines the type of sample used in the sample loop. The sample Sample | Standard |
type is shown in the method editor, the sample data window and Blank
the report.
Only appears subject to the settings made in Number of IDs.
the method.
Lower limit Defines the lower limit for the variable entry of data. The unit will [g]: 0 … 1000
depend on the setting for the Entry type parameter. [mL]: 0 … 104
Only appears if Entry type is set to Weight, Volume or Pieces. [pcs.]: 0…106
Only appears if Entry type is set to Weight, Volume or Pieces. [pcs.]: 0 … 106

Value Volume in [mL]. 0...104
Only appears if for Entry type "Fixed" values are selected.
selected.
Solvent weight Quantity of solvent in [g] in which the sample was extracted or 0...1000
dissolved.
Only for method type = Ext. Extr..
Wt. extracted Total weight of sample in [g] which was extracted or dissolved in 0...1000
sample the solvent.
Only for method type = Ext. Extr..

Autostart If activated, KF titration starts following a significant signal Active | Inactive
increase within 30 seconds after the start of the analysis (not for
Stromboli or InMotion KF methods).
If deactivated, the sample addition must be confirmed before
titration can begin.
Analysis start If Automatic is selected, the analysis begins without any user Automatic | Manual
confirmation if the value falls below the maximum start drift and
the defined stability criterion Drift stability/dt and the set
temperature are reached.
If the standby is executed by the method function Standby (only
for Stromboli and inMotion KF), the automatic start is not
performed (affects the 2nd, 3rd....series).
If the analysis is started manually, the series must be started
explicitly in the Standby dialog.
Drift stability Maximum permitted drift difference in [µg/min]. 0...1000
Only for "Stromboli" method type and if Analysis start =
Automatic is selected.
dt dt in [sec] is the time taken to determine the drift stability. The 1…1000
time recording can begin before the set temperature is reached
and before the value falls below the maximum start drift.
Only for "Stromboli" method type and if Analysis start =
Automatic is selected.
Entry Determines the input time for the sample size. Arbitrary | After addition
lations). Only appears if for Entry type no "Fixed" values are
selected.
After addition: You are prompted to enter the sample data once
the sample has been added. The sample size - even during the
method execution - can be entered later on (however, no later
than when required for use in formulas).
Subfunction: Concentration
To correctly determine the water content of a sample, the concentration of the titrant should be determined using
Karl Fischer water standards. The concentration determination is performed using control and termination
parameters.
Any predispensing defined in the method is not performed. A defined blank value is also not taken into account
in the calculation. Following a concentration determination, the system always switches to standby mode to
enable double and multiple determinations.
The concentration determination can be started manually. You can start the concentration determination of the
KF titrant from Standby of any volumetric Karl Fischer (KF) method except Scan KF V.. You can determine the
following parameters:
setup.
the method.


Value Volume in [mL]. 0...104
Mix time The duration of stirring in [s] with the defined "Stir" speed. 0…104
selected.
Conc. lower limit Defines the lower limit of the concentration limit. 0.1…100
Conc. upper limit Defines the upper limit of the concentration limit. 0.1…100
Note
• Outside of these limits, the actual concentration is not entered in the settings.
Subfunction: Blank
The method function Blank assigns a determined water content to the solvent. The blank can be a fixed value,
can be taken from the settings, or can be requested by the system. The method function Blank is only available
for the method type Ext. Extraction Coul..
Source for blank Setup: After the blank value is determined, the value and the unit Setup | Fix value [%] |
of the blank are transferred to the settings. Fix value [ppm] |
Fix: The value defined in the method is used. Request [%] | Request
[ppm]
Request: The blank value in the relevant unit is requested before
each sample.
The specified blank value is labeled with "B" in the method
function Calculation.
Value Here you can enter a numerical value. 0...106

Blank The blank value assigned to the solvent to be determined. Value from the settings
You can select a blank value defined in the settings.
Unit Defines the unit in which the blank value is calculated and used % | ppm
in a calculation. The unit for calculation with a blank value must
be the same as the unit set here.
Applies for the Setup option only.
Entry type Defines whether the sample should be added with a defined mass Weight | Fixed weight |
or defined volume. The sample data query will then adjust Volume | Fixed volume
according to the unit of measurement.
For Fixed weight or Fixed volume, the sample mass and the
sample volume are entered as parameters in the method function
and not requested in the sequence of the method.
Lower limit Defines the lower limit for the variable entry of sample data in 0...1000
[mL] or [g]. The unit will depend on the setting for Entry type
parameter.
Applies only for Entry type = Weight and Volume.
Upper limit Defines the upper limit for the variable entry of sample data in 0...1000
[ml] or [g]. The unit will depend on the setting for the Entry type
parameter.
Density The density of the liquid sample in [g/mL] for Entry type = 0…1000
Volume or Fixed volume.
Mix time The duration of stirring in [s] with the defined "Stir" speed. 0…104
selected.
Lower limit Defines the lower limit of the blank. Appears only if Limits = 0...106
Active was selected. Outside these limits, the blank value is not
entered in the setup.
Upper limit Defines the upper limit of the blank. Appears only if Limits = 0...106
Active was selected. Outside these limits, the blank value is not
entered in the setup.
End of sample
This parameter is only available for Karl Fischer titration without the Stromboli oven sample changer. If Open
series is set, the titrator enters Standby mode at the end of the analysis and the method remains active. If Open
series is not set, the method is ended after the final sample.

Open series Determines whether the subsequent method functions are Active | Inactive
processed after the method function End of sample, or if the
titrator returns to Standby mode.
7.12.3.4 Sample (Standard addition)

With the parameters in the method function Sample (Standard Addition) you can define information about the
sample, how this information is entered, how the sample is prepared and what type of analysis is performed.
Identification of the sample
For each sample up to 3 IDs can be defined, depending on the setting of the parameter Number of IDs. ID 1 is
always available. ID 2 and ID 3 are only available if the parameter Number of IDs is set to 2 or 3 respectively.
The values defined in the method function Sample are used as default values and can be changed before or
during an analysis.
ID 1 is displayed in the window Start analysis. ID 2 and ID 3 are displayed in the window Sample data.
Definition of the analysis type
You can define if a blank value is determined, the concentration of a sample is measured directly or
compensated with a blank value. For the determination of a blank value, no entries for sample size are needed.
Definition of the sample size
You can define if the sample size is given as weight, volume or number of pieces and if the sample size can be
entered or is set to a fixed value. Pieces is only available for solid samples.
Weight, Volume and Pieces allow the user to enter the sample size in the window Start analysis. You can
define a range for the sample size with the parameters Lower limit and Upper limit. The user can change
Weight per piece and Density for a sample in the window Sample data.
Weight Volume Pieces
Lower limit • • •
Upper limit • • •
Density • • -
For Fixed weight, Fixed volume and Fixed pieces the predefined sample size is displayed in the window Start
analysis but the user cannot change it. You can define the sample size with the parameters Weight, Volume
and Pieces. The user can change Weight per piece and Density for a sample in the window Sample data.
Fixed weight Fixed volume Fixed pieces
Weight • - -
Volume - • -
Pieces - - •
Density • • -
Definition of additional information about the sample

You can use the parameter Correction factor to define additional information about the sample. The value
defined in the method function Sample is used as default value. The user can change the value before or
during an analysis, and when the results are recalculated.
The value of the correction factor is included in reports and can be used in calculations.

Definition of sampling method
You can select the way the sample is be prepared fo the analysis. Depending on the method, different
parameters can be entered by the user. The following methods can be selected in the parameter Sampling.
Direct: The sample (1), a predefined volume of water (2) and a predefined volume of ISA solution (3) are
added directly to the analysis beaker. The entire content of the analysis beaker is used for the analysis.
Parameters
1 Sample size
2 Water volume
3 ISA volume
Aliquot incl. ISA: ISA solution (3) is added to the sample (2) until a defined volume (1) is reached. A
predefined volume (4) of the mixture is transferred to the analysis beaker and is used for the analysis.
Parameters
1 Dilution volume
2 Sample size
4 Aliquot volume
Aliquot excl. ISA: Water (3) is added to the sample (2) until a defined volume (1) is reached. A defined
volume of the mixture (4) is transferred to the analysis beaker. A defined volume of ISA solution (5) is added to
the analysis beaker. The entire content of the analysis beaker is used for the analysis.
Parameters
1 Dilution volume
2 Sample size
4 Aliquot volume
5 ISA volume
The table below shows which parameters are available for each sampling method.
Sampling method Water volume ISA volume Dilution volume Aliquot volume
Direct • • - -
Aliquot incl. ISA - - • •
Aliquot excl. ISA - • • •
Definition of the method for entering sample size and additional data
You can define if the sample size and some additional data is read from the sample by one of the devices listed
below or if the data needs to be entered by hand.
• SmartSample reader of the titrator
• SmartSample reader of a connected InMotion Autosampler
• Barcode reader
The table below shows which data can be read depending on the setting of the parameter Titrator reader or
InMotion reader. InMotion reader is displayed, if an InMotion Autosampler is used as titration stand.
ID 1 ID 2 Sample size Density Correction factor
SmartSample • • • • •
MT 2D barcode • - • - -
ID 1 barcode • - - - -


Only appears subject to the settings made in Number of IDs.
Analysis type Direct Direct | Blank determi-
Determination of the concentration of the sample. nation | Blank
Blank determination compensated
Determination of the ion concentration of the solvent. The result
will be stored as blank value.
Blank compensated
Before the results are calculated, the ion concentration of the
analysis beaker is compensated with the blank value.
Sample type Define if the sample is liquid or solid. liquid | solid
the method.

selected.
lations).

Sampling Defines the way the sample will be prepared fo the analysis. Direct | Aliquot incl. ISA |
Direct: The sample, water (volume defined in Water volume) Aliquot excl. ISA
and ISA solution (volume defined in ISA volume) are added
directly to the analysis beaker.
Aliquot incl. ISA: ISA solution is added to the sample until the
volume defined in Dilution volume is reached. A volume defined
in Aliquot volume is transferred to the analysis beaker.
Aliquot excl. ISA: The sample is diluted to the volume defined in
Dilution volume. A volume defined in Aliquot volume is trans-
ferred to the analysis beaker and ISA solution (volume defined in
ISA volume) is added to the analysis beaker.
Water volume Defines the volume of water added to dilute the analysis solution 0.00000...1000 mL
to achieve the needed ISA concentration in the analysis beaker.
Only if Sampling is set to Direct.
ISA volume Define the ISA volume added to the analysis beaker. 0.00000...1000 mL
Only if Sampling is set to Direct or Aliquot excl. ISA.
Dilution volume Defines the volume of the dilution solution in [mL]. 0.00000...1000
Only if Sampling is set to Aliquot incl. ISA or Aliquot excl. ISA.
Aliquot volume Defines the volume of the aliquot taken from the dilution solution. 0.00000...1000 [mL]
The aliquot is added to the analysis beaker.
Only if Sampling is set to Aliquot incl. ISA or Aliquot excl. ISA.
analysis start.
barcode layout.
start.
barcode layout.
start.

Number of Defines the number of additional sample factors that can be used. 0…3
sample factors
Name of sample Defines the name of the additional sample factor. This name is 0…20 characters
factor 1 displayed in reports and in windows where the user can enter
sample data.
Value of sample Defines the value of the additional sample factor. 0.0000…106
factor 1
7.12.3.5 Sample (Titer)

Start of a loop for titer determination Contains all of the necessary data regarding the titrant and the standard to
be used.
setup.
Entry type Defines whether the quantity (weight or volume) of a liquid or Weight | Fixed weight |
solid standard should be entered when the analysis is started or Volume | Fixed volume |
whether a Fixed weight or a Fixed volume should be defined in Pieces | Fixed pieces
the method function.
The available options depend on the setting of Type of standard.
Lower limit Defines the lower limit for the variable entry of sample data in 0...1000
[mL] or [g]. The unit will depend on the setting for Entry type
parameter.
Only appears if none fixed values are selected in Entry type. [St.]: 0 … 106
lations).

analysis start.
barcode layout.
start.
barcode layout.
start.
7.12.4 Titer
7.12.4.1 Titer
The "Titer" method function is only available outside a loop. This method function assigns the result of a
sample loop to a titer and updates the value stored in Setup.
Define limits for the result assigned to the titer
If Limits is activated, the titrator checks if the result falls within the limits defined in Lower limit and Upper
limit. If the result lies outside the limits, it is not assigned to the titer.
the limits.
message.

the limits.

TITER= Specifies for how many results the titer should be determined. Mean[Ri], i=1…30
(For i=1, i does not have to be defined.)
Lower limit Defines the lower limit of a value. 0…100
Upper limit Defines the upper limit of the concentration limit. 0.1…100
See also
7.12.5 Subfunctions
7.12.5.1 Hidden sub functions

The following hidden functions exist for Karl Fischer methods: Pretitration and standby.
Following the start of a Karl Fischer method, a pretitration is performed. The titrator then switches to Standby
mode. The system switches automatically between Standby and Pretitration. The switch criterion is the drift
value.
If the pretitration lasts longer than 30 minutes, a system message is displayed informing you that the preti-
tration cannot be ended because the drift value is too high. You can end the pretitration, and then cancel the
method or series or restart the pretitration.
7.12.5.2 Calibration
This method function assigns the result of a calibration loop to a sensor and updates the sensor setup.
Calibration is only performed outside a loop.
Define limits for the result assigned to the sensor
If Limits is activated, the titrator checks if the result falls within the limits defined in Min. slope, Max. Slope,
Min. zero point and Max. zero point.

• If the result of a calibration lies outside the limits, it is not assigned to the sensor.
• If the result of a pH test lies outside the limits, the sensor does not pass the test.
the limits.
message.
the limits.

Note
In cases of segmented calibration for pH and ISE sensors, the limits will be defined and observed for each
segment.
Depending on the sensor type (pH, ISE, conductivity), if the "Limits" checkbox is activated, the following
parameters can be determined (100% represents -59.16 mV/pH (sensor type: pH) or to -59.16 mV/[unit]) /
Ion charge (sensor type: ISE). The unit corresponds to the unit specified in the previous method function,
"Sample (Calib)". (For temperature sensors, only the two info fields for the minimum and maximum zero point
are displayed.)
For pH and ISE sensors:
Min. slope 1-8 The lower limit for the slope, in [%]. (100% refers to -59.16 mV/ 10…200
pH.)
Max. Slope 1-8 The upper limit for the slope, in [%]. 10…200
Min. zero point The lower limit for the zero point. -100…100
1-8
Max. zero point The upper limit for the zero point. -100…100
1-8

For conductivity sensors:
Min. cell constant Defines the lower limit for the cell constant of a conductivity 0…100
sensor, in [1/cm].
Max. cell Defines the upper limit for the cell constant of a conductivity 0…100
constant sensor, in [1/cm].
See also
7.12.5.3 Mix Time

You can use the "Mix time" method function to define the stir time in [s] for Karl Fischer titration. This value is
obtained from experience and can be entered individually for each sample.
The stir speed, however, is entered in the method function "Titration" using the "Stir" parameter. This applies for
the whole method.
7.12.6 Titrator Evaluation Procedure

The identification of equivalence point candidates within a defined recognition range can be done using four
different evaluation methods:
• Standard
• Minimum / Maximum
• Segmented
• Asymmetric
Which method you use for the evaluation will depend on the type of titration or the form of the resulting titration
curve. The procedure to be used is defined in the "Evaluation and recognition" method subfunction of the
"Titration (EQP)" and "Titration (two-phase)" method functions.

7.12.6.1 Standard Evaluation Procedure
The titrator's standard evaluation procedure is based on the chemical model of a classic acid-base titration. In
this model, the equivalence point of such a titration will be at the point of inflection of the S-shaped titration
curve and the curve will be symmetrical with regard to this inflection point.
E For the recognition of an inflection point using the
standard procedure, the titrator will always look at one
group of measured values (a "measured value window").
It will examine whether an inflection point is detectable for
that group of measured values. This window will then be
shifted along the curve by one measured value and
(1) reexamined for points of inflection. The system repeats this
procedure until it detects no inflection point twice in a row.
It then uses the inflection points found to define the most
suitable one as the final inflection point of the titration.
(1) Inflection point

Note
These criteria can be defined in the "Evaluation and recognition" subfunction of the "Titration EQP" and "Titration
(two-phase)" method functions.
The standard evaluation procedure initially only identifies points of inflection. Criteria defined by the user in the
method can influence whether and when an inflection point is to be registered as an EQP candidate.
If so defined in the method, the following criteria will have to be fulfilled:
• The inflection point must lie within a recognition range.
• It must be above a threshold (refers to the first derivative).
• The titration curve must demonstrate a specified tendency in the area of the inflection point.
EQPs are only detected in the range of the measured curve which is the specified by the "Tendency" parameter
(Positive, Negativ), refer to method function "Titration (EQP): Evaluation and Recognition".
If these criteria are fulfilled, the inflection point becomes an EQP candidate.
The additional EQP criteria can now be used to influence which EQP candidates are ultimately recognized as
equivalence points.
For the standard evaluation, the additional EQP criteria "Last EQP" and "Steepest jump" are available. They can
be selected individually for each defined recognition range.
See also
2 Titration method function } Page 414
2 Titration method function } Page 414
7.12.6.2 Minimum / Maximum

The result of this evaluation is the calculated minimum (maximum) of the measured titration points. The classic
example of a titration curve with a minimum is the photometrically indexed surfactant determination.
E The minimum (maximum) is calculated using a
polynomial approximation of the titration curve in the
range of the minimum (maximum). The equivalence point
recognition is done directly from the titration curve data.

7.12.6.3 Segmented Evaluation
Various indication methods (including photometry, conductometry, and amperometry) generate titration curves
with linear or approximately linear sections (segmented curves). The titrator uses individual procedures to
evaluate these curves. For a precise determination of the equivalence point, it is very important that these
curves have both linear segments and a clear bend.
E Titration curve
The titration curve contains two more less linear segments
and a bend between these two segments. The evaluation
of segmented curves is generally done with the aid of the
standard procedure for S-shaped curves, with the system
using as its evaluation basis not the titration curve's
measured points but the data calculated from them in the
first derivative.
V 1. Derivative
∆E/ ∆V The first derivative of a segmented curve is the first to
demonstrate the typical S shape. Its inflection point is the
titration's equivalence point.
2. Derivative
The threshold references the second derivative of the
titration curve. In other words, the equivalence point for a
defined threshold must be above this threshold number.
EQPs are only detected in the range of the measured curve
V which is the specified by the "Tendency" parameter
(Positive, Negativ), refer to method function "Titration
∆2E/ ∆V 2
(EQP): Evaluation and Recognition". Within the
segmented procedure the tendency refers to the 1.
derivative.
7.12.6.4 Asymmetric
For markedly asymmetrical curves, the standard procedure can result in a systematic error. The difference
between the true equivalence point and the point of inflection can be greater than the normally achievable
precision. For these cases, the titrator uses an evaluation that uses the Tubbs method.
This empirical approximation method is a procedure for the evaluation of asymmetrical, analog-registered
titration curves. It can also be used for digitally recorded titration curves. The Tubbs procedure result will be
closer to the true equivalence point for some asymmetrical curves than the inflection point.
This evaluation procedure is based on the following considerations:

E Each of the two branches of the titration curve will have a
writable osculating circle with a minimal radius. The
M2
relationship between the two radii is determined by the
curve's asymmetry. The intersection of the connecting
lines between the circle center points M1 and M2 and the
EQP titration curve produces the desired equivalence point.
Theoretical calculations show that the true equivalence
M1 point for asymmetrical titration curves will always lie
between the inflection point and the branch of the titration
curve with the greater degree of curvature (i.e. the smaller
osculating circle).
V
The titrator uses a hyperbola to approximate those parts of the titration curve located in the area of the greatest
curvature. For each approximated hyperbola, the system determines the peak (the point with the greatest
curvature). The center points of the assigned smallest osculating circles are the focal points of both hyperbolas.
The intersection of the connection lines from the two focal points and the titration curve produces the desired
equivalence point, as shown above.
The evaluation requires at least six measured values in the area of the greatest curvature before and after the
titration curve's inflection point. If the course of the titration curve does not permit the inclusion of the osculating
circles, the titrator will use the standard procedure to calculate the equivalence point. You will be notified of this
in the record of the "raw results".
EQPs are only detected in the range of the measured curve which is the specified by the "Tendency" parameter
(Positive, Negativ), refer to method function "Titration (EQP): Evaluation and Recognition".
7.12.7 Evaluate and calculate
7.12.7.1 Formulas
Calculation formulas can be used in the "Calculate" and "Condition" method functions. Some parameters within
method functions can also be defined in the form of formulas.
Formulas within the "Calculation" method function
One typical example for a formula within the "Calculation" method function would be the expression R=VEQ in
the "Formula" parameter. In this case, the consumed volume of titrant up to the point at which the end point is
reached is assigned to R. All the symbols can be used for analysis data in relations like this. The analysis data
to be used must be generated by the method before the "Calculate" method function.
Formulas for entering values for parameters
Formulas can also be used to specify the values for some parameters. For example, you can enter the stirring
time in a "Stir" method function in the form of a formula. The result of the formula will then be copied over as a
nondimensional value in the unit of the parameter in question.
Conditions
A condition is a formula whose result comes in the form of "true" or "false". Conditions can be used in various
method functions in the "Condition" parameter or subfunction. Depending on the condition's result, the method
function in question will be executed (condition true) or not executed (condition false).
Note
• Auxiliary values and blanks defined in the setup can generally be used in formulas in the same manner as
symbols. The general form for an auxiliary value is: H[Name] (as defined in the setup).
• Likewise, results from other "Calculation" method functions can be referenced in the "Calculation" method
function. (E.g. R3=R2+R1)
(What is important in this case is to make sure that the results used must already be in existence at the
time they are to be used!)

7.12.7.1.1 Using analysis data in formulas
All analysis data that can be accessed via a symbol can be used in calculation formulas (see "[Naming
Conventions for Using Analysis Data in Calculations } Page 441]").
All analysis data must be generated in the method before the point at which they will be used in a calculation
formula. For some analysis data, this could be as checked early as during the validation in the processing of a
method. For others, whether or not the data are available at the time in question may not be decided until the
execution of the method. If the analysis data is not available at the time of the calculation, the result of the
calculation formula will be "NaN" ("Not a number").
Note
• The formula must be assigned to a result (Rx) in the "Formula" parameter in the "Calculate" method
function.
Analysis data for which symbols have been defined can be used in the most general cases in the following
format (the separators ’_’ are only used for clarification purposes here; they are not used in the formulas):
Basic symbol plus symbol extension_group ID_symbol index_unit(x,y)_[group index]
Shortcuts
• Instead of using VEQ and QEQ, you can also use the corresponding short forms (V and Q) in the formulas.
• If you leave out the symbol index of a symbol, Symbol Index 1 will be used.
Example: VEQ stands for VEQ1
• If you leave out the group index of a symbol, Group Index 1 will be used.
Example: VEQ1 stands for VEQ1[1]
All three rules can also be combined, for example:
Q stands for QEQ1[1]
Assignments in the form X(condition)
Using the "Calculate" method function within a loop makes it possible to make assignments containing a
condition.
Conditional assignments of this type can be made using the symbols QEQ, VEQ and EEQ and indexed using
the group index.
Note
Use of the logical operators AND and OR is not permitted within conditional assignments. Likewise, you cannot
use the mathematical operators (+, -, * and /) within the parenthetical expression.
Explanation Examples
Basic symbol and Taken together, they serve as an VEQ identifies the equivalence/end point of a
symbol extension identifier for the analysis data. titration.
GroupID Defines the group of method functions SLOPESt designates the slope of a sensor used
(Ti, Me, Di, or St) to which the by a stating method function.
method function used to create the
analysis data belongs.
Symbol index Specifies precisely which analysis VEQ2 designates the consumed volume at the
data are meant if one method function 2nd equivalence point of an EQP titration.
generates analysis data multiple c2 references the nominal concentration of the
times using the same symbol. 2nd titrant
If multiple titrants are used in one TITER2 references the titer of the second titrant
method function, so the titer and used.
nominal concentration will be used
multiple times per generating method
function. In this case, the index can
be used to define the titrant data to be
used in a calculation.

Unit(x) / Unit(x,y) Unit(x) specifies which time ("t"), VE(7) designates the titrant volume required to
potential ("E") or conversion ("CON") reach a pH of 7 (for the pH unit).
the analysis data should reference. CVt(1.5) designates the mean stating use per
Unit(x,y) specifies the time interval minute in the time interval between one and five
the analysis data should reference. minutes.
Group index Specifies which method function ESTSt[3] is the designation of the start potential
within a method function group of the 3rd method function from the method
generates the analysis data. function group "Stating".
Shortcuts
General examples for the use of a formula in the "Calculate" method function:
R1=VStt(1.5)[2]
This example provides the volume (basic symbol = V) consumed during stating until the time of 1.5 (1 minute,
30 seconds) (unit(x) = time t(x)) as a result for the second method function (group index = 2) from the
Stating group (group ID = St).
R2=SLOPEMeE(7)
This example provides the slope (basic symbol = SLOPE) of the sensor used at pH 7 (unit(x) = potential E(x))
as a result for the first method function (group index = 1, can be omitted) from the Measure group (group ID =
Me).
7.12.7.1.2 Indexing of method functions

The method functions Titration (EP, EQP, 2-phase, LearnEQP), Stating, Measure (normal), Measure (MVT),
Dispense, and Dispense (controlled) provide their own raw results within a method.
These raw results are saved by the titrator in the order in which the generating method functions are processed
within the method. To ensure that any time these method functions are used more than once the raw results
can still be given a unique assignment to their individual method functions, they are divided into four groups:
• Group 1 (all titrations): Method function Titration (EP, EQP, two-phase, Lern EQP)
• Group 2 (Stating): Method function Stating (normal)
• Group 3 (all measurements): Method functions Measure (normal) and Measure (MVT)
• Group 4 (all dispenses): Method function Dispense (normal) and Dispense (controlled)
If method functions from a group are used multiple times within a method, they are given indexes (beyond the
loop limits). This group index allows unique referencing of the raw results during calculations.
If the structure of a method is changed, the group indices are automatically updated, guaranteeing the serial
numbering at all times.
Note
• Make sure your calculations take this into consideration!
Calculations can be used independently of the method functions that generated the results. For the results, we
suggest using the IDs R1...Rn, following the sequence of the calculations in the method.
Example
Method function Group index Result
Title
Sample
Titration stand
Stir
Titration (EQP) 1
Titration (EP) 2
Dispense 1
Titration (EQP) 3
Calculation R1

Calculation R2
Calculation R3
End of sample
Sample
Titration stand
Dispense 2
Stating 1
Titration (EP) 4
Titration (EQP) 5
Calculation R4
End of sample
Calculation R5
For Titration (KF Vol) (multiple loops are permitted for the Stromboli method type)
Title
Sample (KF)
Mix time
Titration (KF Vol) 1
Calculation R1
Calculation R2
Calculation R3
End of sample
Sample (KF)
Titration stand
Mix time
Titration (KF Vol) 3
Calculation R4
End of sample
Calculation R5
Note
• The group index "1" can be omitted because when a group index is missing, the system automatically
assigns the group index "1".
For Titration (KF Coul) (multiple loops are permitted for the Stromboli method type)
Title
Sample (KF)
Mix time
Titration (KF Coul) 1
Calculation R1
Calculation R2
Calculation R3

End of sample
Sample (KF)
Mix time
Titration (KF Coul) 2
Calculation R4
End of sample
Calculation R5
7.12.7.1.3 Explanatory examples
Titration method function

E [mV]
EPD
EPD b
EST a
V [mL]
Predispensing
The following shows the various type of predispensing that can be used during a titration method:
a: Reference to a defined volume (or to the product of a factor and the sample size)
b: Reference to a defined potential
EST Provides the potential at the start of the titration.
EPD Provides the potential after dispensing and the waiting time.

E [mV]
nEQ = 3
EEQ3 3
EHNV3
EEQ2 2
EHNV2
EEQ1 1
EHNV1
V [mL]
Q [mmol]
VEQ1 VEQ2 VEQ3 VEX
QEQ1 QEQ2 QEQ3 QEX
VEND
QEND
Sample EQP titration containing three equivalence points
The following shows the three (nEQ = 3) recognized equivalence points (1, 2 and 3).
VEQ1, VEQ2 and VEQ3 Provide the calculated volume used until each EQP.
QEQ1, QEQ2 and QEQ3 Provide the calculated substance quantity used until each EQP.
EEQ1, EEQ2 and EEQ3 Provide the potential at each EQP.
EHNV1, EHNV2 and EHNV3 Provide the "half neutralization point" for each EQP.
VEX and QEX Provide the excess volume titrated and the excess substance
quantity titrated.
VEND and QEND Provide the volume used by the end of the method and the
substance quantity of the titrant.
E [mV]
+200
x1
+100
-100
x2
-200
V [mL]
VE(x1)/QE(x1) Q [mmol]
VE(x2)/QE(x2)
Example of an EQP titration with the evaluation of defined potentials (x1 and x2)

The following shows the evaluation of a titration curve with regard to the titrant consumption at certain
potentials (x1 and x2).
VE(x1) and VE(x2) Provide the titrant volume consumption at Potentials x1 and x2.
QE(x1) and QE(x2) Provide the substance quantity of the titrant consumed at
Potentials x1 and x2.
E [mV]
4 (EQP)
2 (EQP)
V [mL]
Theoretical example for the evaluation of a titration curve with five points of inflection
Explanation:
This titration curve shows five points of inflection (1 – 5).
Inflection points 1, 2 and 4 are recognized as EQP candidates, since only these points lie within the 2 recog-
nition ranges while also fulfilling the "Tendency" and "Threshold" parameters.
The specified "Additional EQP criteria" then determine whether the EQP candidates are actually recognized as
EQP. These additional EQP criteria can be defined for every recognition range.
In the example shown above, the following were specified as additional EQP criteria:
Recognition Range 1: "Last EQP"
Recognition Range 2: "No"
Of the two EQP candidates found in Recognition Range 1, the system only identifies the second one as an EQP
due to the "Final jump" criterion. The first one remains merely an EQP candidate.
The termination criterion defined was that the titration should be terminated after the recognition of three EQP
candidates ("Termination after EQP" = "3"). In the above example the titration is terminated on identification of
the 4th turning point (3rd EQP candidate).

Stating method function
V [mL] / Q [mmol]
VENDSt / QENDSt
VStt(t2) / QStt(t2)
VStt(t1) / QStt(t1)
VPTSt / QPTSt
t [s]
0 t1 t2
Stating example including evaluation at specified points in time (t1, t2) where 0 is the start of the Stat titration following the
pretitration.
VENDSt, QENDSt Provide the entire volume consumed and the entire substance quantity
consumed
VStt(t1) and VStt(t2) Provide the titrant volume consumed at Times t1 and t2
QStt(t1) and QStt(t2) Provide the substance quantity consumed at Times t1 and t2
VPTSt Volume used for pretitration: {mL}
QPTSt Substance quantity of titrant used for pretitration: {mmol}
V [mL] / Q [mmol]
tSt
VENDSt / QENDSt
VStt(t2) / QStt(t2) VStt(tCON(100))
VStt(t1) / QStt(t1) QStt(tCON(100))
0
t [s]
0 t1 t2
Stating example including pretitration (gray area) and evaluation at specified points in time (t1, t2)
VENDSt, QENDSt Provide the entire volume used and the entire substance quantity used at the
end of stating (including the pretitration)
VStt(t1) and QStt(t1) Provide the titrant volume consumption and the substance quantity
consumption at Time t1 (not including pretitration)
VStt(t2) and QStt(t2) Provide the titrant volume consumption and the substance quantity
consumption at Time t2 (not including pretitration) )
VStt(tCON(100))/ Provide the titrant volume consumption and the substance quantity
QStt(tCON(100)) consumption at the end of stating (not including pretitration)

∆V/ ∆t [mL/s]
CVt(t1,t2)
CQt(t1,t2)
t [s]
t1 t2
Stating example including evaluation of the mean titrant consumption
The following is a stating example including the evaluation of the mean consumption between Times t1 and t2.
CVt(t1,t2) and CQt(t1,t2) are determined using linear regression over the measured values between Times t1
and t2. CORRt(t1,t2) specifies the coefficient of correlation of this linear regression.
CVt(t1,t2) Provides the mean titrant consumption between t1 and t2 in the form of volume per
time.
CQt(t1,t2) Provides the mean titrant consumption between t1 and t2 in the form of substance
quantity per time.
7.12.7.2 Result proposal lists

When the user selects a result proposal from the list, the parameters Results, Result unit, Formula and
Constant C= are automatically filled and cannot be changed (depending on the titrator type).
The proposal lists are filtered by method type and entry type. Results and Result unit define the formula with
the help of the entry type chosen in the method function Samples. If the entry type changes, the formula will be
modified if the result type = Predefined (if this is possible for the unit in question). If no formula exists for the
newly selected entry type, the system should detect this during method validation when the entry type is saved.
7.12.7.2.1 General titration (GT)

The table shows predefined results that can be used in general titration loop (GT loop). To reach the results
proposal lists, go to Add result > Result proposals.
Result Result unit Formula Constant C=
Content % Q*C/m M/(10*z)
Content g/100mL Q*C*d/m M/(10*z)
Content mg/g Q*C/(m) M/z
Content mL/g VEQ/m 1
Content mol/L Q*C/m 1/z
Content mmol/L Q*C/m 1000/z
Content ppm Q*C/m M*1000/z
Consumption mmol Q 1
Consumption mL VEQ 1
Consumption mL/min CVt(0, tCON(100)) 1
Titer -- m/(VEQ*c*C) M/(10*p*z)
Titer -- m/(VEQ*c*C) 1/(cst*z)
Back titration % (QENDDi-Q)*C/m M/(10*z)
Blank-compensated % (Q-B[x])*C/m M/(10*z)

Potential mV E 1
Stating % QStt(tCON(100)) M/(10*z)
EQP higher than x mmol Q(EEQ>10) 1
EQP lower than x mmol Q(EEQ<10) 1
EQP close to x mmol Q(EEQ~10) 1
EQP between x, y mmol Q(5<EEQ<10) 1
Ion conc. mol/L pw(-E) 1
Absorption A -lg(E/100) 1
Log (base e) -- ln(1) 1
Exp (base e) -- ex(1) 1
Square -- sq(1) 1
Root -- sr(1) 1
7.12.7.2.2 Standard addition (STD)

Different result proposals are available depending on the following factors:
• Analysis type
• Sample type
• Sampling method
• Entry type
Analysis type = Blank determination

Result Unit Formula R= Constant C=
Blank mg/L cRawStd 1
Analysis type = Direct

Liquid samples
The following table shows the result proposals for the following settings in the Sample (Standard Addition)
method function:
• Sample type = liquid
• Sampling =Direct
• Entry type = Volume and Fixed volume
The total volume [ml] is defined as VTOT = VWATER + VISA + m.
Concentration mg/L cRawStd 1
Content mg/L cRawStd*VTOT/m 1
ppm cRawStd*VTOT/m 1
g/100mL (cRawStd*VTOT/m)/10000 1
% (cRawStd*VTOT/m)/10000 1
mg/100mL (cRawStd*VTOT/m)/10 1
g/L (cRawStd*VTOT/m)/1000 1
g/100g (cRawStd*VTOT/(m*d))/10000 1
method function:

• Entry type = Weight and Fixed weight
The total volume [ml] is defined as VTOT = VWATER + VISA + m/d.
Content mg/L cRawStd*VTOT/(m/d) 1
ppm cRawStd*VTOT/(m/d) 1
g/100mL (cRawStd*VTOT/(m/d))/10000 1
% (cRawStd*VTOT/(m/d))/10000 1
mg/100mL (cRawStd*VTOT/(m/d))/10 1
g/L (cRawStd*VTOT/(m/d))/1000 1
g/100g (cRawStd*VTOT/m)/10000 1
method function:
• Sampling = Aliquot excl. ISA
The total volume [ml] is defined as VTOT = VALIQUOT + VISA.
Content mg/L (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/m) 1
ppm (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/m) 1
g/100mL ((cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/ 1
m))/10000
% ((cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/ 1
m))/10000
mg/100mL ((cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/ 1
m))/10
g/L ((cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/ 1
m))/1000
g/100g ((cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/m/ 1
d))/10000
method function:

Content mg/L (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/(m/d)) 1
ppm (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/(m/d)) 1
g/100mL (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/(m/ 1
d))/10000
% (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/(m/ 1
d))/10000
mg/100mL (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/(m/ 1
d))/10
g/L (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/(m/ 1
d))/1000
g/100g (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/ 1
m)/10000
method function:
• Sampling = Aliquot incl. ISA
Content mg/L cRawStd*(VDILUTION/m) 1
ppm cRawStd*(VDILUTION/m) 1
g/100mL cRawStd*(VDILUTION/m)/10000 1
% cRawStd*(VDILUTION/m)/10000 1
mg/100mL cRawStd*(VDILUTION/m)/10 1
g/L cRawStd*(VDILUTION/m)/1000 1
g/100g cRawStd*(VDILUTION/(m*d))/1000 1
method function:
Content mg/L cRawStd*(VDILUTION/(m/d)) 1
ppm cRawStd*(VDILUTION/(m/d)) 1
g/100mL cRawStd*(VDILUTION/(m/d))/10000 1
% cRawStd*(VDILUTION/(m/d))/10000 1
mg/100mL cRawStd*(VDILUTION/(m/d))/10 1
g/L cRawStd*(VDILUTION/(m/d))/1000 1
g/100g cRawStd*(VDILUTION/m)/10000 1
Solid samples
method function:
• Sample type = solid

The total volume [ml] is defined as VTOT = VWATER + VISA.
Content mg/kg cRawStd*VTOT/m 1
ppm cRawStd*VTOT/m 1
g/100g (cRawStd*VTOT/m)/10000 1
% (cRawStd*VTOT/m)/10000 1
mg/100g (cRawStd*VTOT/m)/10 1
method function:
• Entry type = Pieces and Fixed pieces
Content mg/kg cRawStd*VTOT/m*wp 1
ppm cRawStd*VTOT/m*wp 1
g/100g (cRawStd*VTOT/m*wp)/10000 1
% (cRawStd*VTOT/m*wp)/10000 1
mg/100g (cRawStd*VTOT/m*wp)/10 1
method function:
Content mg/kg (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/m) 1
Content ppm (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/m) 1
Content g/100g (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/ 1
m)/10000
Content % (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/ 1
m)/10000
Content mg/100g (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/m)/10 1
method function:

Content mg/kg (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/m*wp) 1
Content ppm (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/m*wp) 1
Content g/100g (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/ 1
m*wp)/10000
Content % (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/ 1
m*wp)/10000
Content mg/100g (cRawStd*VTOT/VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/ 1
m*wp)/10
method function:
Content mg/kg cRawStd*VDILUTION/m 1
Content ppm cRawStd*VDILUTION/m 1
Content g/100g (cRawStd*VDILUTION/m)/10000 1
Content % (cRawStd*VDILUTION/m)/10000 1
Content mg/100g (cRawStd*VDILUTION/m)/10 1
method function:
Content mg/kg cRawStd*VDILUTION/m*wp 1
Content ppm cRawStd*VDILUTION/m*wp 1
Content g/100g (cRawStd*VDILUTION/m*wp)/10000 1
Content % (cRawStd*VDILUTION/m*wp)/10000 1
Content mg/100g (cRawStd*VDILUTION/m*wp)/10 1
Analysis type = Blank compensated

Liquid samples
method function:
The total volume [ml] is defined as VTOT = VWATER + VISA + m.
Concentration mg/L (cRawStd-B[Blank Std]) 1

Content mg/L (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/m 1
ppm (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/m 1
g/100mL ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/m)/10000 1
% ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/m)/10000 1
mg/100mL ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/m)/10 1
g/L ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/m)/1000 1
g/100g ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/(m*d))/10000 1
method function:
The total volume [ml] is defined as VTOT = VWATER + VISA + m/d.
Content mg/L (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/(m/d) 1
ppm (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/(m/d) 1
g/100mL ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/(m/d))/10000 1
% ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/(m/d))/10000 1
mg/100mL ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/(m/d))/10 1
g/L ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/(m/d))/1000 1
g/100g ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/m)/10000 1
method function:
Content mg/L ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/m)
ppm ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
g/100mL (((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/m))/10000
% (((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
mg/100mL (((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
g/L (((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
g/100g (((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/m/d))/10000

method function:
Content mg/L ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/(m/d))
ppm ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/(m/d))
g/100mL ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/(m/d))/10000
% ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
mg/100mL ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
g/L ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
g/100g ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/m)/10000
method function:
Content mg/L (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*(VDILUTION/m) 1
ppm (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*(VDILUTION/m) 1
g/100mL (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*(VDILUTION/m)/10000 1
% (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*(VDILUTION/m)/10000 1
mg/100mL (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*(VDILUTION/m)/10 1
g/L (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*(VDILUTION/m)/1000 1
g/100g (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*(VDILUTION/ 1
(m*d))/1000
method function:

Content mg/L (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*(VDILUTION/(m/d)) 1
ppm (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*(VDILUTION/(m/d)) 1
g/100mL (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*(VDILUTION/(m/ 1
d))/10000
% (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*(VDILUTION/(m/ 1
d))/10000
mg/100mL (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*(VDILUTION/(m/d))/10 1
g/L (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*(VDILUTION/(m/ 1
d))/1000
g/100g (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*(VDILUTION/m)/10000 1
Solid samples
method function:
Content mg/kg (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/m 1
ppm (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/m 1
g/100g ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/m)/10000 1
% ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/m)/10000 1
mg/100g ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/m)/10 1
method function:
Content mg/kg (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/m*wp 1
ppm (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/m*wp 1
g/100g ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/m*wp)/10000 1
% ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/m*wp)/10000 1
mg/100g ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/m*wp)/10 1
method function:

Content mg/kg ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
Content ppm ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
Content g/100g ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
Content % ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
Content mg/100g ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
method function:
Content mg/kg ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/m*wp)
Content ppm ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/m*wp)
Content g/100g ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
VALIQUOT)*(VDILUTION/m*wp)/10000
Content % ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
Content mg/100g ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VTOT/ 1
method function:
Content mg/kg (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VDILUTION/m 1
Content ppm (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VDILUTION/m 1
Content g/100g ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VDILUTION/m)/10000 1
Content % ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VDILUTION/m)/10000 1
Content mg/100g ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VDILUTION/m)/10 1
method function:

Content mg/kg (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VDILUTION/m*wp 1
Content ppm (cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VDILUTION/m*wp 1
Content g/100g ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VDILUTION/ 1
m*wp)/10000
Content % ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VDILUTION/ 1
m*wp)/10000
Content mg/100g ((cRawStd-B[Blank Std])*VDILUTION/m*wp)/10 1
7.12.7.2.3 Volumetric Karl Fischer titration

Predefined results for volumetric Karl Fischer titration are described below. You use the Results proposals
button in the Add result dialog to open the result proposal lists.
Navigation: Results > Add result > Result proposals or from the start screen of a method Calculation > Result
proposals
If a results proposal is selected from the list, the parameters are set as follows: Result, Result unit, Formula,
and Constant C= parameters are automatically filled. On some titrator types the parameters can be changed.
The proposal lists are filtered by method type and entry type. Result and Result unit define the formula with the
help of the entry type chosen in the Sample KF method function. If the entry type changes and if the Result type
is set to Predefined, the formula is modified (if this is possible for the unit in question). If no formula exists for
the newly selected entry type, the system will detect this during method validation when the entry type is saved.
The blank value of the Sample (KF) method function - Blank subfunction - is used for the blank values of the
external extraction/solution.
The formulas listed below are result proposals.
KF Vol method type

The result proposals in the following table are independent of the Entry type parameter in the Sample KF
method function.
Mean consumption µL/min VEQ*1000/TIME 1
Titration duration min TIME 1
Total water content µg CW 1
Concentration mg/mL CONC 1
Drift consumption µL DRIFTV*TIME 1
The result proposals for the calculation of the content depend on the setting of the Entry type parameter in the
Sample (KF) method function.

Result proposals for Entry type = Weight or Fixed weight
Content mg (VEQ*CONC- 1
µg TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C 1000
% (VEQ*CONC-TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/m 0.1
ppm 1000
g/kg 1
mg/g 1
mg/mL (VEQ*CONC-TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/(m/d) 1
g/mL 0.001
µg/L 1000000
µg/mL 1000
Result proposals for Entry type = Volume or Fixed volume
% (VEQ*CONC-TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/(m*d) 0.1
ppm 1000
g/kg 1
mg/g 1
mg/mL (VEQ*CONC-TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/m 1
g/mL 0.001
µg/L 1000000
µg/mL 1000
Result proposals for Entry type = Pieces or Fixed pieces
% (VEQ*CONC-TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/(m*wp) 0.1
ppm 1000
g/kg 1
mg/g 1
mg/pc (VEQ*CONC-TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/m 1
Ext. Extr. V. method type

The result proposals depend on the setting of the Entry type parameter in the Sample (KF) method function.
External dissolution (B in % C*[(msol+mext)/mext]-B*msol/ (VEQ*CONC-
%) mext TIME*DRIFT/1000)*0.1/m
External dissolution (B in ppm C*[(msol+mext)/mext]- (VEQ*CONC-
ppm) B*msol/mext TIME*DRIFT/1000)*1000/m
External extraction (B in % 100/(100-C)*(C*msol/mext- (VEQ*CONC-
%) B*msol/mext) TIME*DRIFT/1000)*0.1/m

External extraction (B in ppm pw(6)/[pw(6)-C]*(C*msol/ (VEQ*CONC-
ppm) mext- TIME*DRIFT/1000)*1000/m
B*msol/mext)
%) mext TIME*DRIFT/1000)*0.1/(m*d)
ppm) B*msol/mext TIME*DRIFT/1000)*1000/
(m*d)
%) B*msol/mext) TIME*DRIFT/1000)*0.1/(m*d)
ppm) mext- TIME*DRIFT/1000)*1000/
B*msol/mext) (m*d)
%) mext TIME*DRIFT/1000)*0.1/(m*wp)
ppm) B*msol/mext TIME*DRIFT/1000)*1000/
(m*wp)
%) B*msol/mext) TIME*DRIFT/1000)*0.1/(m*wp)
ppm) mext- TIME*DRIFT/1000)*1,000/
B*msol/mext) (m*wp)
IM KF V. method type
method function.
InMotion KF blank value µg (VEQ*CONC-TIME*DRIFT/1,000)*C 1000

Content blank value mg (VEQ*CONC-B[Blank IMKF Vol]/1000- 1
compensated (B in µg) µg TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C 1000
% (VEQ*CONC-B[Blank IMKF Vol]/1000- 0.1
ppm TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/m 1000
g/kg 1
mg/g 1
mg/mL (VEQ*CONC-B[Blank IMKF Vol]/1000- 1
g/mL TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/(m/d) 0.001
µg/L 1000000
µg/mL 1000
ppm TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/(m*d) 1000
g/kg 1
mg/g 1
mg/mL (VEQ*CONC-B[Blank IMKF Vol]/1000- 1
g/mL TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/m 0.001
µg/L 1000000
µg/mL 1000
ppm TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/(m*wp) 1000
g/kg 1
mg/g 1
mg/pc (VEQ*CONC-B[Blank IMKF Vol]/1000- 1
TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/m
Scan KF V. method type

Sample size gI m 1
mL
pcs
Stromb. V. method type

method function.

Stromboli blank value µg VEQ*CONC-TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C 1000
Content blank value mg (VEQ*CONC-B[Blank Stromboli]/1000- 1
% (VEQ*CONC-B[Blank Stromboli]/1000- 0.1
ppm TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/m 1000
g/kg 1
mg/g 1
mg/mL (VEQ*CONC-B[Blank Stromboli]/1000- 1
g/mL TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/(m/d) 0.001
µg/L 1000000
µg/mL 1000
ppm TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/(m*d) 1000
g/kg 1
mg/g 1
mg/mL (VEQ*CONC-B[Blank Stromboli]/1000- 1
g/mL TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/m 0.001
µg/L 1000000
µg/mL 1000
ppm TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/(m*wp) 1000
g/kg 1
mg/g 1
mg/pc (VEQ*CONC-B[Blank Stromboli]/1000- 1
TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/m

Internal calculations
Concentration determination
Concentration (Std. in mg/ mg/ml CONC=CONT*m/(VEQ- 1
g) (DRIFT/CONC(old))*TIME/1000) 1)
Concentration (Std. in mg/ mg/ml CONC=CONT*(m/d)/(VEQ- 1
ml) (DRIFT/CONC(old))*TIME/1000) 1)
Concentration (Std. in %) mg/ml CONC=CONT*m*10/(VEQ- 1
(DRIFT/CONC(old))*TIME/1000) 1)
Concentration (Std. in mg/ml CONC=CONT*m/(1000*VEQ-(DRIFT/ 1
ppm) CONC(old))*TIME) 1)
1)
CONC(old) refers to the Setup value current at the time of calculation.
Concentration (Std. in mg/ mg/ml CONC=CONT*(m*d)/(VEQ- 1
g) (DRIFT/CONC(old))*TIME/1000) 1)
Concentration (Std. in mg/ mg/ml CONC=CONT*m/(VEQ- 1
ml) (DRIFT/CONC(old))*TIME/1000) 1)
Concentration (Std. in %) mg/ml CONC=CONT*(m*d)*10/(VEQ- 1
(DRIFT/CONC(old))*TIME/1000) 1)
Concentration (Std. in mg/ml CONC=CONT*(m*d)/(1000*VEQ-(DRIFT/ 1
ppm) CONC(old))*TIME) 1)
1)
Concentration (Std. in mg/ mg/ml CONC=CONT*m/(VEQ-(DRIFT/ 1
pc) 1) CONC(old))*TIME/1000) 2)
1)
For standard Riedel de Haën FASTrate tablets (CONT in mg/pc , m=pieces)
2)
Blank determination
The result proposals depend on the setting of the following parameters:
• Entry type in the Sample (KF) method function.
• Source for drift in the Titration stand method function
Result proposals for Entry type = Weight or Fixed weight and Source for drift = Request, Online or Fix
value
Blank % (VEQ*CONC-TIME*DRIFT/1,000)*C/m 0.1
ppm 1,000
Result proposals for Entry type = Weight or Fixed weight and Source for drift = Determination
Blank % (VEQ*CONC-TIME*DRIFTV*CONC/1,000)*C/m 0.1
ppm 1,000

Result proposals for Entry type = Volume or Fixed volume and Source for drift = Request, Online or Fix
value
Blank % (VEQ*CONC-TIME*DRIFT/1,000)*C/(m*d) 0.1
ppm 1,000
Result proposals for Entry type = Volume or Fixed volume and Source for drift = Determination
Blank % (VEQ*CONC-TIME*DRIFTV*CONC/1,000)*C/ 0.1
ppm (m*d) 1,000
Miscellaneous internal calculations
Drift µg/min DRIFT=DRIFTV*CONC 1
CW µg CW=VEQ*CONC*1,000 1

Navigation: Results > Add result > Result proposals or from the start screen of a method Calculation > Result
proposals
If a results proposal is selected from the list, the parameters are set as follows: Result, Result unit, Formula,
and Constant C= parameters are automatically filled. On some titrator types the parameters can be changed.
The proposal lists are filtered by method type and entry type. Result and Result unit define the formula with the
help of the entry type chosen in the Sample KF method function. If the entry type changes and if the Result type
is set to Predefined, the formula is modified (if this is possible for the unit in question). If no formula exists for
the newly selected entry type, the system will detect this during method validation when the entry type is saved.
The blank value of the Sample (KF) method function - Blank subfunction - is used for the blank values of the
external extraction/solution.
The formulas listed below are result proposals.
KF Coul method type

method function.
Coulometric consumption mC ICEQ 1
Mean consumption µg/min (ICEQ/10.712)/TIME 1

Content mg (ICEQ/10.712-TIME*DRIFT)/C 1,00
µg 1
% (ICEQ/10.712- 10,00
ppm TIME*DRIFT)/(C*m) 1
mg/g 1,00
g/kg 1000
µg/mL (ICEQ/10.712- 1
mg/mL TIME*DRIFT)/(C*(m/d)) 1000
µg/L 0.001
g/mL 1000000
Content mg (ICEQ/10.712-TIME*DRIFT)/C 1000
µg 1
% (ICEQ/10.712- 10000
ppm TIME*DRIFT)/(C*(m*d)) 1
mg/g 1000
g/kg 1000
µg/mL (ICEQ/10.712- 1
mg/mL TIME*DRIFT)/(C*m) 1000
µg/L 0.001
g/mL 1000000
Content mg (ICEQ/10.712-TIME*DRIFT)/C 1000
µg 1
% (ICEQ/10.712- 10000
ppm TIME*DRIFT)/(C*(m*wp)) 1
mg/g 1000
g/kg 1000
mg/pc (ICEQ/10.712- 1000
TIME*DRIFT)/(C*m)
Ext. Extr. C method type

Result Unit Formula R = Constant
External dissolution (B in % C*[(msol+mext)/mext]-B*msol/ (ICEQ/10.712–TIME*DRIFT)/
%) mext (10000*m)
External dissolution (B in ppm C*[(msol+mext)/mext]-B*msol/ (ICEQ/10.712–TIME*DRIFT)/m
ppm) mext
External extraction (B in % 100/(100-C)*(C*msol/mext- (ICEQ/10.712-TIME*DRIFT)/
%) B*msol/mext) (10000*m)

External extraction (B in ppm pw(6)/[pw(6)-C]*(C*msol/ (ICEQ/10.712-TIME*DRIFT)/m
ppm) mext-B*msol/mext)
%) mext (10000*(m*d))
External dissolution (B in ppm C*[(msol+mext)/mext]-B*msol/ (ICEQ/10.712–TIME*DRIFT)/
ppm) mext (m*d)
%) B*msol/mext) (10000*(m*d))
External extraction (B in ppm pw(6)/[pw(6)-C]*(C*msol/ (ICEQ/10.712-TIME*DRIFT)/
ppm) mext-B*msol/mext) (m*d)
%) mext (10000*(m*wp))
External dissolution (B in ppm C*[(msol+mext)/mext]-B*msol/ (ICEQ/10.712–TIME*DRIFT)/
ppm) mext (m*wp)
%) B*msol/mext) (10000*(m*wp))
External extraction (B in ppm pw(6)/[pw(6)-C]*(C*msol/ (ICEQ/10.712-TIME*DRIFT)/
ppm) mext-B*msol/mext) (m*wp)
IM KF C. method type
method function.
InMotion KF blank value µg (ICEQ/10.712-TIME*DRIFT)/C 1

Content blank value mg (ICEQ/10.712–TIME*DRIFT- 1000
compensated (B in µg) µg B[Blank IMKF Coul])/C 1
% (ICEQ/10.712– 10000
ppm TIME*DRIFT- 1
B[Blank IMKF Coul])/(C*m)
mg/g 1000
g/kg 1000
µg/mL (ICEQ/10.712– 1
mg/mL TIME*DRIFT- 1000
B[Blank IMKF Coul])/(C*(m/d))
µg/L 0.001
g/mL 1000000
% (ICEQ/10.712– 10000
ppm TIME*DRIFT- 1
B[Blank IMKF Coul])/(C*(m*d))
mg/g 1000
g/kg 1000
µg/mL (ICEQ/10.712– 1
µg/L 0.001
g/mL 1000000
% (ICEQ/10.712– 10000
ppm TIME*DRIFT- 1
B[Blank IMKF Coul])/(C*(m*wp))
mg/g 1000
g/kg 1000
µg/pc (ICEQ/10.712– 1000
TIME*DRIFT-
Scan KF C. method type

Sample size gI m 1
mL
pcs
Stromb. C. method type

method function.

Stromboli blank value µg (ICEQ/10.712-TIME*DRIFT)/C 1
compensated (B in µg) µg B[Blank Stromboli])/C 1
% (ICEQ/10.712– 10000
ppm TIME*DRIFT- 1
B[Blank Stromboli])/(C*m)
mg/g 1000
g/kg 1000
µg/mL (ICEQ/10.712– 1
B[Blank Stromboli])/(C*(m/d))
µg/L 0.001
g/mL 1000000
% (ICEQ/10.712– 10000
ppm TIME*DRIFT- 1
B[Blank Stromboli])/(C*(m*d))
mg/g 1000
g/kg 1000
µg/mL (ICEQ/10.712– 1
µg/L 0.001
g/mL 1000000
% (ICEQ/10.712– 10000
ppm TIME*DRIFT- 1
B[Blank Stromboli])/(C*(m*wp))
mg/g 1000
g/kg 1000
µg/pc (ICEQ/10.712– 1000
TIME*DRIFT-

Internal calculations
Blank determination
Blank % (ICEQ/10.712-TIME*DRIFT)/(C*m) 10000
ppm 1
Blank % (ICEQ/10.712-TIME*DRIFT)/(C*(m*d)) 10000
ppm 1
Miscellaneous internal calculations
CW µg CW=ICEQ/10.712 1
7.12.7.2.5 Bromine index (BI)

The result proposals depend on the setting of the Entry type parameter in the Sample method function.
Blank mC ICEQ 1
mg 0.000828147*ICEQ 1
Bromine index mg/100g ICEQ*C/m 0.0828147
Bromine index mg/100 g (ICEQ-B[Bromine index])*C/m 0.0828147
(B in mC)
Bromine index mg/100 g (0.000828147*ICEQ-B[Bromine index])*C/m 100
(B in mg)
Blank mC ICEQ 1
mg 0.000828147*ICEQ 1
Bromine index mg/100g ICEQ*C/(m*d) 0.0828147
Bromine index mg/100 g (ICEQ-B[Bromine index])*C/(m*d) 0.0828147
(B in mC)
Bromine index mg/100 g (0.000828147*ICEQ-B[Bromine index])*C/ 100
(B in mg) (m*d)
Blank mC ICEQ 1
mg 0.000828147*ICEQ 1
Bromine index mg/100g ICEQ*C/(m*wp) 0.0828147
Bromine index mg/100 g (ICEQ-B[Bromine index])*C/(m*wp) 0.0828147
(B in mC)
Bromine index mg/100 g (0.000828147*ICEQ-B[Bromine index])*C/ 100
(B in mg) (m*wp)

7.12.7.3 Constants within a Content Calculation
The tables below provide an overview of how to select the constant C in content determinations, depending on
the unit of the desired results and the data entered.
Desired indication of the result: Desired indication of the result: Desired indication of the result:
content per gram of the sample Content per milliliter of the Content per item of the sample
Input of the sample in [g]: R = sample Input of the sample in [St.]: R =
QEQ*C/m Input of the sample in [mL]: R = QEQ*C/m
Input of the sample in [mL]: R = QEQ*C/m
QEQ*C/(m*d) Input of the sample in [g]: R =
Input of the sample in [St.]: R = QEQ*C/(m/d)
QEQ*C/(m*wp)
Constant Unit Constant Unit Constant Unit
C = 1/z [mmol/g], [mol/ C = 1/z [mmol/mL], C = 1/z [mmol/pc.]
kg] [mol/L]
C = M/z [mg/g], [g/kg] C = M/z [mg/mL], [g/L] C = M/z [mg/pc.]
C=1 [meq/g], [eq/ C=1 [meq/mL], [eq/ C = 1 [meq/pc.]
kg] L]
C = 1000/z [mmol/kg], C = 1000/z [mmol/L], C = 1000/z [µmol/pc.]
[µmol/g] [µmol/mL]
C = 1000 [meq/kg], [µeq/ C = 1000 [meq/L], [µeq/ C = 1000 [µeq/pc.]
g] mL]
C = M*1000/z [ppm], [mg/kg], C = M*1000/z [mg/L], [µg/mL] C = M*1000/z [µg/pc.]
[µg/g]
C=M -- C=M -- C=M --
C = M*1000 -- C = M*1000 -- C = M*1000 --
C = M/(10*z) [%] (w/w) C = M/(10*z) [g/100mL], [%] C = M/(10*z) --
(w/v)
C = 56.1 [mgKOH/g] C = 56.1 -- C = 56.1 --
(TAN, TBN)
Calculation formulas for the titer determination
Standard type: fixed (input type = weight)
R = m/(VEQ*c*C) C = M/(10*p*z)
Standard type: liquid (entry type = volume)
R = m/(VEQ*c*C) C = 1/(cst*z)
Standard type: liquid (input type = weight)
R = m/(VEQ*c*C)
C = d/(cst*z)
The data shown above applies similarly for more complex content determinations as well:
Back titration content: R = (QENDDi-Q)*C/m
Content with blank: R = (QEQ-B[Name])*C/m
Stating content: R = QENDSt*C/m
7.12.7.4 Mathematical functions and operators

The following mathematical functions and operators can be used in formulas:

Functions Comparison operators
Logarithm to the base 10 lg(x) equal to =
Logarithm to the base e ln(x) larger than >
Exponential to base 10 pw(x) or larger than or equal to >=
scientific notation
Exponential to base e ex(x) smaller than <
Square sq(x) smaller than or equal to <=
Square root sr(x) x in the range of ... < x < ...
not equal to <>
approximately ~
Mathematical operators Logical operators

Addition + and AND
Subtraction - or OR
Multiplication *
Division /
Logical operators are only permitted within the formulas of "Condition" subfunctions (or parameters).
7.12.7.5 Naming Conventions for Using Analysis Data in Calculations

In calculations (Calculation method function), you can access analysis data (raw results, results, resource
data, and sample data) using symbols or generate further results. The following chapters contain tables with
the analysis data that is available for the different types of titrations.
The analysis data is represented by symbols. The symbols consist of basic symbols and symbol extensions.
The basic symbols define the type of data (volume, substance quantity) and the corresponding unit. The
symbol extensions specify the data more precisely. The symbol extensions are listed in the table below.
Note that the entry of symbols in formulas is case-sensitive.
Extension Explanation
Cal Calibration method function
Cc Conditioning (controlled) method function
CON(x) x percent of the titrant converted
Di Dispense (normal) method function and Dispense (controlled) method function
E(x) Potential x
END End of a method function
EQ Equivalence point
EX Excess
ext Extraction
HNV Half neutralization value
Me Measure (normal) method function and Measure (MVT) method function
Mean Mean value
s Sample
sol Solvent
St Stating method function
Std Standard Addition method function
t(x) Time x.
t(x,y) Interval between the times x an y.

Extension Explanation
Ti Titration method function
• Titration (EP)
• Titration (EQP)
• Titration (2-phase)
• Titration (LearnEQP)
• Titration (Therm.)
• Titration (KF Vol)
• Scan (KF Vol)
• Titration (KF Coul)
• Scan (KF Coul)
USE Use of the symbol in the Calculation method function.
7.12.7.5.1 General titrations

The tables below show the symbols that you can use in the following titration types:
• EP titration
• EQP titration
• 2-phase titration
• LearnEQP titration
• Thermometric titration
• Measure
• Titer
• Calibration
• Stating
All the symbols listed in the tables below can be used in calculations within a loop.
Sample data and series data
Basic symbol Unit Possible symbol extensions Symbol Meaning
d [g/mL] -- -- -- d The density of a sample or a standard.
f -- -- -- -- f A correction factor as defined in the sample
method function.
m [mL] -- -- -- m The sample size.
[g]
[pcs]
n -- -- -- -- n The sample number.
nTOT Total number of samples in the loop.
sf -- -- -- -- sf An additional sample factor as defined in the
sample method function.
T [°C], [K], [°F] s -- -- Ts The temperature of the sample, standard or
buffer solutions as defined in the sample
method function.
wp [g/pcs] -- -- -- wp The weight per item.
Resource data
B [µg] -- -- -- B[Name] A blank.
[mmol]

c [mol/L] -- -- -- c Specifies the nominal concentration of a titrant
used for a titration method function.
St cSt Specifies the nominal concentration of a titrant
used for a Stating method function.
Di cDi Specifies the nominal concentration of a titrant
used for a Dispense (normal) method
function or a Dispense (controlled).
CELLC [1/cm] -- -- -- CELLC Specifies the cell constant of a conductivity
sensor used for a titration method function.
Me CELLCMe Specifies the cell constant of a conductivity
sensor used for Measure (normal) method
function or a Measure (MVT) method function.
cst [mol/L] -- -- -- cst The concentration of a liquid titer standard.
H -- -- -- -- H[Name] An auxiliary value.
M [g/mol] -- -- -- M The molar weight of a substance. As defined
in the setup.
p [%] -- -- -- p The purity of a solid titer standard.
SLOPE Depends on the -- -- SLOPE Specifies the slope of a pH or ISE sensor or a
sensor Phototrode for a titration method function.
St SLOPESt Specifies the slope of a pH sensor for a
Stating method function.
Di SLOPEDi Specifies the slope of a pH sensor for a
Dispense (controlled) method function .
Me SLOPEMe Specifies the slope of a pH or ISE sensor or a
Phototrode for a Measure (normal) method
function or a Measure (MVT).
TITER -- -- -- -- TITER The titer value for a titrant used in a titration
method function.
St TITERSt The titer value for a titrant used in a Stating
method function.
Di TITERDi The titer value for a titrant used in a Dispense
(normal) method function or a Dispense
(controlled) method function.
z -- -- -- -- z The equivalent number of a substance. As
defined in the setup.
ZERO Depends on the -- -- -- ZERO Specifies the zero point of a pH, ISE or
sensor temperature sensor or a Phototrode for a
titration method function.
St ZEROSt Specifies the zero point of a pH sensor for a
Di ZERODi Specifies the zero point of a pH sensor for a
Me ZEROMe Specifies the zero point of a pH, ISE or
temperature sensor or a Phototrode for a
Measure (normal) method function or a
Measure (MVT) method function.
Raw results
AuxInst -- -- -- -- AuxInst Result of the Auxiliary instrument method
function from the sequence of the external
auxiliary instrument.
BETAHNV [mmol/L*pH] -- -- -- BETAHNV Specifies the buffer capacity with half of the
titrant volume used up to the equivalence
point for a titration method function. Not
possible forTitration (EP)andTitration (Therm.)
C -- -- -- -- C A constant that uniquely belongs to the result
Rx. It cannot be used in this form for the
calculations of other results.

CON [%] -- -- t(x) CONt(x) Specifies the reaction conversion at the time x
in percent. Relative to 100% reaction
conversion at the end of a Stating method
function.
Ti CONTit(x) Reaction conversion at the time x in percent
for a titration method function with accom-
panying stating.
CORR -- -- -- t(x,y) CORRt(x,y) CVt(x,y) and CQt(x,y) are determined using
the linear regression of the measured values
between x and y. CORR is the coefficient of
correlation of this linear regression (volume
versus time) and provides a standard for its
quality.
CQ [mmol/min] -- -- t(x,y) CQt(x,y) Defines the mean consumption (substance
quantity) per minute between the time points x
and y during a Stating method function.
Ti CQTit(x,y) Average consumption (substance quantity)
per minute between the times x and y for
titration method function with accompanying
stating
CV [mL/min] -- -- t(x,y) CVt(x,y) Defines the mean consumption (volume) after
pretitration per minute between the time points
x and y during a Stating method function.
Ti CVTit(x,y) Average consumption (volume) per minute
between the times x and y for titration method
function with accompanying stating
E Depends on the EQ -- -- EEQ The potential at the end point or equivalence
sensor point of a titration method function.
(No temperature HNV EHNV The potential at VEQ/2 of a titration method
sensor) function. Not possible for Titration (EP)
-- E The measured potential of a method function
Measure (normal). Without temperature or
thermometric sensor.
EPD Depends on the -- -- -- EPD The measured potential after the waiting
sensor period for predispensing during a titration
method function. Not possible for Titration
(Therm.).
St EPDSt The measured potential after the waiting
period for predispensing during a Stating
method function.
EPT Depends on the -- St -- EPTSt The measured potential after pretitration
sensor (before the waiting period) during a Stating
(No temperature method function.
sensor)
EST Depends on the -- -- -- EST The measured potential at the start of a
sensor titration method function.
St ESTSt The measured potential at the start of a
Di ESTDi The measured potential at the start of a
Dispense (controlled) method function.
Me ESTMe The measured potential at the start of a
Measure (normal) method function or a
Measure (MVT) method function. Without
temperature or thermometric sensor.
n -- EQ -- -- nEQ The number of equivalent points for one of the
following titration functions:
• Titration (EQP)
• Titration (LearnEQP)
Titration (2-phase)

Q [mmol] EQ -- -- QEQ (=Q) Substance quantity used up to the end point
or equivalence point of a titration method
function.
EX QEX Excess substance quantity titrated in after
reaching the end point or equivalence point of
a titration method function.
END -- QEND The total substance quantity used up to the
end of a titration method function.
St QENDSt The total substance quantity used during a
Di QENDDi The total substance quantity used during a
Dispense (normal) or Dispense (controlled)
method function.
-- -- E(x) QE(x) The substance quantity used until the potential
x is reached during a titration method
function.
-- -- t(x) Qt(x) The substance quantity used until the time x is
reached during a titration method function.
St QStt(x) The substance quantity used until the time x is
reached during a Stating method function.
Di QDit(x) The substance quantity used until the time x is
reached during a Dispense (normal) method
function or a Dispense (controlled) method
function.
QTP [mmol] -- St -- QPTSt Substance quantity of titrant used for the preti-
tration.
SLOPE Depends on the Cal -- -- SLOPECal Reports the slope of a sensor after a
sensor Calibration method function.
-- -- E(x) SLOPEE(x) Specifies the slope of a pH or ISE sensor or a
Phototrode at a potential of x for a titration
method function.
St SLOPEStE(x) Specifies the slope of a pH sensor at a
potential of x for a Stating method function.
Di SLOPEDiE(x) Specifies the slope of a pH sensor at a
potential of x for a Dispense (controlled)
method function .
Me SLOPEMeE(x) Specifies the slope of a pH or ISE sensor or a
Phototrode at a potential of x of a Measure
(normal) method function or a Measure
(MVT) method function.
Mean -- SLOPEMean Specifies the mean slope of a pH or ISE
sensor or a Phototrode for a titration method
function.
St SLOPEMeanSt Specifies the mean slope of a pH sensor for a
Di SLOPEMeanDi Specifies the mean slope of a pH sensor for a
Me SLOPEMeanMe Specifies the mean slope of a pH or ISE
sensor or a Phototrode of a Measure (normal)
method function or a Measure (MVT) method
function.
T [°C], [K], [°F] -- -- -- T The measured temperature in a Measure
(normal) method function (direct
measurement with temperature sensor or
concomitant temperature acquisition).

t [min] -- -- -- t Duration of a titration method function.
St tSt Duration of a Stating method function.
Di tDi Duration of a Dispense (normal) method
function.
Me tMe Duration of a Measure (normal) method
USE -- tUSE Duration of an analysis of a sample from the
start of the loop to the usage of the symbol in
the Calculation method function. The symbol
cannot be used for conditions.
-- -- CON(x) tCON(x) Duration of a Stating method function until x%
of the titrant used for stating is converted.
(Relative to 100% reaction conversion at the
end of a Stating method function.)
Ti tTiCON(x) Duration of a titration method function until x
% of the titrant used for titration are converted.
(Relative to 100% reaction conversion at the
end of a titration method function.)
V [mL] EQ -- -- VEQ (=V) Titrant consumption up to the end point or
equivalence point of a titration method
function. For multiple equivalence points, the
consumption is calculated from the previous
equivalence point.
EX VEX The excess of titrant added after reaching the
end point or equivalence point of a titration
method function.
END -- VEND Titrant volume used up to the end of a titration
method function.
St VENDSt The total titrant volume used during a Stating
method function, including the pretitration.
Di VENDDi The total titrant volume used during a
Dispense (normal) method function or a
Dispense (controlled) method function.
-- -- E(x) VE(x) The titrant volume used until the potential x is
-- -- t(x) Vt(x) The titrant volume used until the time x is
St VStt(x) The titrant volume used until the time x is
reached during a Stating method function.
Di VDit(x) The titrant volume used until the time x is
reached during a Dispense (normal) method
function.
VPT [mL] -- St -- VPTSt Volume of titrant used for the pretitration.

ZERO Depends on the Cal -- -- ZEROCal Reports the zero point of a sensor after a
sensor Calibration method function .
-- -- E(x) ZEROE(x) Specifies the zero point of a pH, ISE or
temperature sensor or a Phototrode at a
potential of x for a titration method function.
St ZEROStE(x) Specifies the zero point of a pH sensor at a
potential of x for a Stating method function.
Di ZERODiE(x) Specifies the zero point of a pH sensor at a
potential of x for a Dispense (controlled)
method function .
Me ZEROMeE(x) Specifies the zero point of a pH, ISE or
potential of x for a Measure (normal) method
Mean -- -- ZEROMean Specifies the mean zero point of a pH or ISE
sensor for a titration method function.
St ZEROMeanSt Specifies the mean zero point of a pH sensor
for a Stating method function.
Di ZEROMeanDi Specifies the mean zero point of a pH sensor
for a Dispense (controlled) method function .
Me ZEROMeanMe Specifies the mean zero point of a pH or ISE
sensor for a measurement Measure (MVT)
method function.
Results
Mean Unit of Rx Rx -- -- Mean[Rx] The mean value of a result Rx.
yRx Meany[Rx] The mean value of a result Rx over y samples
Rx Arbitrary -- -- -- Rx A result x.
Rx[yy] Arbitrary -- -- -- Rx[yy] Uses the value in the Result Buffer list for the
corresponding sample for Result x from the
method with ID yy.
s Unit of Rx Rx -- -- s[Rx] The standard deviation of a result Rx
yRx sy[Rx] The standard deviation of a result Rx over y
samples
srel [%] Rx -- -- srel[Rx] The relative standard deviation of the result
Rx.
yRx srely[Rx] The relative standard deviation of a result Rx
over y samples
Symbols outside of loops

The following symbols can be used in calculations outside loops:
M z B[Name] H[Name]
C Titer SLOPE ZERO
CELLC SLOPEE(x) ZEROE(x) SLOPEMean
ZEROMean Mean[Rx] s[Rx] srel[Rx]
SLOPECal ZEROCal
VENDDi, QENDDi and tDi
(within a method function Dispense outside a loop)
Results (symbol "R") that are generated outside loops can also be used in calculations outside loops.
7.12.7.5.2 Standard addition

Sample data

method function.
[g]
[pcs]
sf -- -- -- -- sf An additional sample factor as defined in the
sample method function.
method function.
VALIQUOT [mL] -- -- -- VALIQUOT Aliquot volume
VDILUTION [mL] -- -- -- VDILUTION Dilution volume
VISA [mL] -- -- -- VISA ISA volume
VTOT [mL] -- -- -- VTOT Aqueous partition of the analyze mixture ( i.e.
only water soluble fraction are counted)
VWATER [mL] -- -- -- VWATER Water volume
Resource data
[mmol]
c mol/L, mg/L -- Std -- cStd Nominal titrant concentration for a Standard
Addition method function
in the setup.
SLOPE Depends on the -- Std -- SLOPEStd Slope of a pH/ISE/Phototrode sensor for
sensor Standard Addition method function
Cc SLOPECc Slope of a pH/ISE/Phototrode sensor for
Conditioning (controlled) method function
TITER -- -- Std -- TITERStd The titer value for a titrant used in a Standard
Addition method function.
ZERO Depends on the -- Std -- ZEROStd Zero point of a pH/ISE/Phototrode/temperature
sensor sensor for a Standard Addition method
function.
Cc ZEROCc Zero point of a pH/ISE/Phototrode/temperature
sensor for a Conditioning (controlled) method
function.
Raw results
AuxInst -- -- -- -- AuxInst Result of the Auxiliary instrument method
function from the sequence of the external
cRawStd mg/L -- -- -- cRawStd Concentration in the sample
DRIFT Depends on the -- Cc -- DRIFTCc Sensor drift per minute
sensor
E Depends on the -- Cc -- ECc Potential measured in a Conditioning
sensor (controlled) method function.

EST mV -- Std -- ESTStd Measured potential at the start of the Standard
Addition method function
Intercept- mV -- -- -- InterceptStdAdd Intersection of the standard addition linear
StdAdd regression with the y-axis
R2 -- -- -- -- R2 Coefficient of the linear regression
SLOPE Depends on the -- Std E(x) SLOPEStdE(x) Specifies the slope of a pH or ISE sensor or a
sensor Phototrode at a potential of x for a Standard
Addition method function.
Cc SLOPECcE(x) Specifies the slope of a pH or ISE sensor or a
Phototrode at a potential of x for a Condi-
tioning (controlled) method function.
Mean Std -- SLOPEMeanStd Specifies the mean slope of a pH or ISE
sensor or a Phototrode for a Standard Addition
method function.
Cc SLOPEMeanStd Specifies the mean slope of a pH or ISE
sensor or a Phototrode for a Conditioning
(controlled) method function.
SlopeStdAdd mV/Log(c) -- -- -- SlopeStdAdd Standard addition linear regression of
measured points
t min, s -- Std -- tStd Duration of a Standard Addition method
function
Cc tCc Duration of a Conditioning (controlled)
method function
USE tUSE Duration of an analysis of a sample from the
VEND mL -- -- -- VENDStd The total titrant volume used during a
Standard Addition method function.
ZERO Depends on the -- Std E(x) ZEROStdE(x) Specifies the zero point of a pH, ISE or
sensor temperature sensor or a Phototrode at a
potential of x for a Standard Addition method
function.
Cc ZEROCcE(x) Specifies the zero point of a pH, ISE or
potential of x for a Conditioning (controlled)
method function.
Mean Std -- ZEROMeanStd Specifies the mean zero point of a pH or ISE
sensor for a Standard Addition method
function.
Cc ZEROMeanStd Specifies the mean zero point of a pH or ISE
sensor for a Conditioning (controlled) method
function.
Results
method with ID yy.
samples
Rx.
over y samples

7.12.7.5.3 Volumetric KF titration
Sample data
method function.
[g]
[pcs]
[g] -- -- sol msol Solvent weight for titrations of type Ext. Extr.
(External extraction).
[g] -- -- ext mext Extracted sample quantity for titrations of type
Ext. Extr. (External extraction)
method function.
Resource data
[mmol]
c [mol/L] -- -- -- c Specifies the nominal concentration of a titrant
used for a titration method function.
CONC [mg/mL] -- -- -- CONC Represents the actual titrant concentration.
CONT [mg/g] -- -- -- CONT The concentration of a liquid KF standard.
[mg/mL]
[mg/pc]
[%]
[ppm]
in the setup.
Raw results
CONC [mg/mL] -- -- -- CONC Represents the actual titrant concentration.
CW [µg] -- -- -- CW Volume of water titrated up to the end point
(without drift or blank value correction).
DRIFT [µg(H2O)/min] -- -- -- DRIFT Consumption (mass) per minute for the
titration method function (water quantity per
time unit that penetrates the titration stand).
DRIFTV [µL/min] -- -- -- DRIFTV Volume of titrant consumption per minute for
the drift determination.
E [mV] EQ -- -- EEQ Potential at the end point of the titration
method function.
EST [mV] -- -- -- EST Measured potential at the start of the titration
method function.

t [min:s] -- -- -- t Duration of a sample analysis.
T [°C], [°F], [K] EQ -- -- TEQ Temperature at the equivalence point of a
Titration (KF Vol) method function.
TIME [min:s] -- -- -- TIME Duration of a sample analysis from the end of
Standby mode to the end of the titration
method function or a scan method function
(incl. waiting for sample addition)
V [mL] EQ -- -- VEQ (=V) Titrant consumed up to the end point of the
titration method function.
Results
method with ID yy.
samples
Rx.
over y samples
7.12.7.5.4 Coulometric KF titration and bromine index

Sample data
method function.
[g]
[pcs]
[g] -- -- sol msol Solvent weight for titrations of type Ext. Extr.
(External extraction).
[g] -- -- ext mext Extracted sample quantity for titrations of type
Ext. Extr. (External extraction)
method function.
Resource data
[mmol]

CONT [mg/g] -- -- -- CONT The concentration of a liquid KF standard.
[mg/mL]
[mg/pc]
[%]
[ppm]
in the setup.
Raw results
CW [µg] -- -- -- CW Volume of water titrated up to the end point
(without drift or blank value correction).
DRIFT [µg(H2O)/min] -- -- -- DRIFT Consumption (mass) per minute for the
titration method function (water quantity per
time unit that penetrates the titration stand).
E [mV] EQ -- -- EEQ Potential at the end point of the titration
method function.
EST [mV] -- -- -- EST Measured potential at the start of the titration
method function.
IC [mC] EQ -- -- ICEQ (=CEQ) Coulometric consumption to the end point of
the titration method function.
t [min:s] -- -- -- t Duration of a sample analysis.
TIME [min:s] -- -- -- TIME Duration of a sample analysis from the end of
Standby mode to the end of the titration
method function or a scan method function
(incl. waiting for sample addition)
Results
method with ID yy.
samples
Rx.
over y samples

7.13 Method functions - Density Refractometry
7.13.1 Common
7.13.1.1 Adjustment
Use this method function to adjust measuring cells. The adjustment is checked against the last adjustment. If
the maximum deviation is exceeded, a decision can be made at the end of the adjustment, whether the data is
transferred.
During an adjustment, the instrument thermostats the measuring cell with the sample to exactly the set
temperature. The oscillation value (OSC) of the measuring cell is determined and assigns the nominal i.e.
theoretical value of the standard. In practice, this is done first with air as the first standard and then with water
as the second standard. These measured values represent the zero point and the slope of the adjustment curve.
Availability of automation units
Automation SPR200 DryPro SC30 SC1 InMotion FillPal DryPal
D4 / D5 / D6 • • • • •
DM40 / DM45 / • • • • •
DM50 / DX40 /
DX45 / DX50
Method function: Adjustment
General
is supported.
Configuration
Cell 1 - 2 Depending on the selection in Cell mode, select a measuring List of available
cell. instruments
Automation Defines the automation unit used by the method. List of available
automation units
External Defines the external instruments to be used in the method. pH | Conductivity |
instruments Color | pH and color |
None | Conductivity and
color
Save videos Defines whether videos of density measuring cells are stored in Active | Inactive
LabX.
Settings
Temperature unit Specifies the temperature unit for the measurements. °C | °F

Performance Verification
Show error If this setting is activated, a message is displayed if the prereq- Active | Inactive
message uisites or preconditions for the instrument are not met.
Preconditions Displays the preconditions (last test, adjustment or service) for Active | Inactive
the instrument if activated.
Method behavior Determines whether the method is paused or continued, if the Active | Inactive
if preconditions preconditions are not met.
not satisfied
Verify test set Defines whether the test set is to be verified. Active | Inactive
Last successful Specifies the minimum time in hours since the last successful 1…87600
test - less than test.
[h]
Verify adjustment Defines whether the adjustment set is to be verified. Active | Inactive
set
adjustment - less adjustment.
than [h]
Verify service date Defines whether the service date is to be verified. Active | Inactive
Service must be Specifies the minimum number of days until the next service is 1…3650
valid for [d] due.
Return values
See also
7.13.1.2 Clean
Use this method function for cleaning cells with rinsing liquids and subsequent drying with air.
D4 / D5 / D6 • • • • •
DM40 / DM45 / • • • • •
DM50 / DX40 /
DX45 / DX50
Method function: Clean
General
is supported.
Configuration

cell. instruments
automation units
color
Settings
not satisfied
[h]
set
than [h]
valid for [d] due.
Return values
See also
7.13.1.3 Import adjustment data

You can use this method function to import the adjustment data of the last adjustment in the instrument "Stand
alone" mode. This must be an adjustment with air and water at 20 °C.
Method function: Import adjustment data
General
is supported.

Import
Method compatibility according to the selection in parameter Adjustment mode.
DM40 / DM45 / DM50 / RM40 / D4 / D5 / D6 / R4 / R5 / RX4 / RX5
RM50 / DX40 / DX45 / DX50 /
X40 / RX50
Air&Water • •
Air&Standard •
Water&Standard •
Standards •

Adjustment mode Defines the standard that is used for the adjustment procedure. Air&Water |
Air&Standard |
Water&Standard |
Standards
Adjustment set Select the test set with which the adjustment was performed. List of defined test sets
Adj. temperature The adjustment temperature is displayed (info field). 15 °C | 20 °C | 25 °C
Return values
See also
7.13.1.4 Measurement
Use this method function to perform an analysis.
D4 / D5 / D6 • • • • •
DM40 / DM45 / • • • • •
DM50 / DX40 /
DX45 / DX50
Method function: Measurement
General
is supported.

Configuration
cell. instruments
automation units
Lid handling Defines whether CoverUp (optional lid handling system on Active | Inactive
InMotion) is used in the method.
color
LabX.
Color settings
Color settings Activates Illuminant so that the illuminant type can be defined Active | Inactive
(Minolta only) and Observer so that the angle can be entered.
Illuminant Defines the illuminant to be used. A | C | 65 | D50 | ID65 |
ID50 | F2 | F12
Observer Defines the viewing angle. Default 2°. 2° | 10°
Settings
not satisfied
[h]
set
than [h]
valid for [d] due.

Return values
See also
7.13.1.5 Atmospheric Pressure

Use this method function to define the atmospheric pressure that is used to calculate the nominal value of the
air density. The atmospheric pressure is required for adjustments or tests with air or for cell tests.
For instrument types D4 / D5 / D6: The atmospheric pressure is given by an internal pressure sensor. It can
however be manually overwritten if the instrument is configured accordingly.
Setup > Global > Physical properties > Enter atmospheric pressure manually.
For instrument types DM40 / DM45 / DM50 / DX40 / DX45 / DX50: When an AtmoSens pressure sensor is
connected to the instrument, the value of the pressure sensor is always used.
Method function: Atmospheric pressure
General
is supported.
Pressure
Atmospheric Defines the atmospheric pressure that will be used for calculating 600…1100
pressure [hPa] the nominal value of the air density on the instrument.
7.13.1.6 Test
Use this method function to verify the measuring cells.
D4 / D5 / D6 • • • • •
DM40 / DM45 / • • • • •
DM50 / DX40 /
DX45 / DX50
Method function: Test
General
is supported.

Configuration
cell. instruments
automation units
LabX.
Settings
not satisfied
[h]
set
than [h]
valid for [d] due.
Return values
See also
7.13.2.1 Calculate on instrument

This method subfunction can only be inserted in the Measurement method function. This method function is
used to define the result, either by selecting predefined result types (e.g. density, nD, Brix, Alcohol) or by
entering a calculation formula for specific results. These results can be displayed on the online screen of the
instrument.
Results receive an index Rx, by which they can be referenced in formulas of other method functions. The calcu-
lation number (Rx) is increased (from R1 to R20) when the Calculation method function is inserted, indepen-
dently of the sequence of the method functions.

The syntax provided by the instrument applies for the calculations. The formula editor of this method function
differs from the general editor in that only formulas and tables that can be used for this instrument are listed.
See also Density Refractometry formula syntax and tables.
Subfunction: Calculate on Instrument
General
is supported.
Calculate on Instrument
Predefined By choosing a formula, the corresponding values are inserted into Filtered list of predefined
formula the calculation fields. formulas
The listed formulas are filtered according to the instrument type.
ID Indicates the index of the calculation. -
Name Defines the name of the result generated in the calculation. 1…30 characters
Unit Specifies the unit used for the result. 0…18 characters
Formula Specifies the formula for calculating the result. Mathematical calcu-
lation
All specific value tables and all value tables created in LabX are available for the calculations in accordance
with the selected cell mode. The operator for value tables is T.
Decimal places Defines the number of decimal places in the calculated result. 0…6
Coefficients Activates the coefficients that can be used in the formula. Active | Inactive
For powers to the base 10 the "e"-convention may be used (e.g.
1.2e-4 --> 0.00012).
Variable x / Defines the variables that can be used in the formula. -
Variable y
A/B/C/D Defines the coefficients that can be used in the formula. -
Result limits Defines whether limits should be observed for the result. Active | Inactive
Lower limit Defines the lower result limit. -1.0x108…1.0x108
Upper limit Defines the upper result limit. -1.0x108…1.0x108
Interrupt if limits Defines that the measurement will be interrupted if the result is Active | Inactive
exceeded outside the limits. It then receives the status "Error". If this
parameter is not activated, the measurement continues even if the
limit value is exceeded.
Result
Main result Indicates that the result is the main result. If the relevant setting is Active | Inactive
selected in Search folders, these results are displayed in list
view.

Export
Condition
See also
2 Use of fx, data binding, task parameters, formulas } Page 195
7.13.2.2 Cell Test

This method function is always part of a main method function and cannot be inserted as an independent
element.
Use this method function to verify the cleanliness and dryness of a cell, either before or after performing a
measurement, test, or adjustment.
A measurement of the empty (clean and dry) cell is performed, and compares the measured density to the
nominal air density under the current pressure conditions. A warning is shown if the difference exceeds the
defined tolerance.
Subfunction: Cell test
General
is supported.
Cell 1 - Cell Test Settings
If a second cell is available, this area appears twice.
Tolerance Maximum permissible deviation of the measured air density from 0.0001…0.001
the theoretical value [g/cm3].

Other Cell - Test Settings
Max. test duration Defines the maximum duration of the cell test in [s]. If the 1…9999
measured value has not stabilized by this time, the cell test is
interrupted and is treated as failed.
Interrupt if failed Active: the measurement receives the status Error if the cell test Active | Inactive
fails. The task list is interrupted.
Inactive: the measurement proceeds, even if the cell test has
failed.
Condition
7.13.2.3 Clean
element.
Cleaning of the measuring cell using the automation unit specified in the method block.
Subfunction: Clean
General
is supported.
Drain Settings
Drain Defines whether the contents of the measuring cell should be Active | Inactive
drained.
Drain direction Defines the pumping direction. Waste | Vial | Beaker
Waste: The liquid is pumped through the cell and into the waste
container.
Vial: The liquid is pumped back into the sample vial (SC1/SC30).
Beaker: The liquid is pumped back into the sample beaker
(InMotion).

Drain mode Fixed duration: Draining is stopped after a defined time. Fixed duration |
Automatic: The drain duration depends on the sample feed (total Automatic
duration equals the time for which the pump was in operation
during filling).
Drain duration Defines the fixed pumping time [s] for draining. 1…1000
Drain ratio Duration of draining in percentage of filling duration. 10…1000
Rinse Cycle 1 - Settings
Rinse cycle 1 Activates a first rinse cycle. Active | Inactive
Solvent 1 The name of the solvent is entered here. In order for a method to 1…30 characters
be executed correctly, the name must be identical to the name
entered in the instrument setup.
Rinse mode 1 Fixed duration: Rinsing is stopped after a defined time. Fixed duration |
Automatic: The rinse duration depends on the sample feed (total Automatic
duration equals the time for which the pump was in operation
during filling).
Rinse duration 1 Defines the fixed rinse time in [s]. 1…1000
Rinse ratio 1 Duration of rinsing as percentage of filling duration. 10…1000
Rinse Cycle 2 - Settings
Rinse cycle 2 Activates a second rinse cycle. Active | Inactive
For other parameters, please refer to Rinse Cycle 1 - Settings.
Rinse Settings
Air addition To increase the efficiency of rinsing, air is mixed with the solvent. Normal | Low | Very low
A higher air ratio causes a more turbulent flow, meaning more
intensive cleaning and lower consumption of fluid.
Dry Settings
Dry Activates drying the cell. Active | Inactive
Dry mode Fixed duration: Drying is stopped after a defined time. Fixed duration |
Automatic: The oscillation is measured. Drying is stopped, when Automatic
the oscillation value becomes stable.
Dry duration Defines the fixed drying time in [s]. 1…1000
Max. dry duration If the oscillation value has not stabilized by the end of this period 1…10000
[s], drying is stopped.
Interrupt if failed Active: the measurement receives the status Error if the drying Active | Inactive
fails. The task list is interrupted.
Inactive: the measurement proceeds, even if the drying has
failed.

Condition
7.13.2.4 Instruction
element.
Use this method function to display instructions on instruments or on workbenches. The analysis is paused
while the message is displayed.
Subfunction: Instruction
General
is supported.
Instruction Settings
Instruction The text of the instructions to be output to the display. Arbitrary, including
This text can also contain a formula or auxiliary values, enclosed enclosed formula
in percent symbols. Example: %R1%. (control characters: %)
Continue after Confirmation: The analysis will continue as soon as the user Confirmation | Time
confirms the instructions. interval
Time interval: The analysis is continued after the defined time
period has elapsed.
Time interval The time period, in [sec], during which the analysis is paused 0…106
and the instructions are displayed on the screen.
Condition

7.13.2.5 Temperature compensation
Temperature compensation allows you to measure a sample at a temperature and then to output the measured
value at another temperature. This temperature compensation is used in the following cases:
• The measured value must for example be stated at 15 °C, however the sample is too viscous at this
temperature. Therefore these samples must be measured at correspondingly higher temperatures so that
they can be pumped to the measuring cell and remain fluid there.
• For accelerated measurements. If the sample is delivered at 35 °C for example and the measured value is
required at 15 °C, the sample can be measured at 35 °C and the measured value can be compensated to
15 °C.
• If the required reference temperature is outside the range of the measuring instrument (e.g. 120 °C), the
sample can be measured at 75 °C and the result compensated to 120 °C.
In order to use temperature compensation, the temperature dependency of the sample must be known (e.g.
density at various temperatures) or in the case of petrochemical products, their temperature dependencies in
accordance with ASTM-D 1250 are already stored in the device. The following tables are used (for crude oils,
refined products and lubricants):
• 53A, 53B and 53D for 15 °C
• 5A, 5B and 5D for 60 °F
• 59A, 59B and 59D, for 20 °C
The aforementioned ASTM or API tables take as input values the readings taken from a hydrometer, which do
not however make allowance for the coefficient of expansion of the glass hydrometer. Therefore the measured
density cannot be directly used as the input value for these tables.
The measured values are converted to the desired temperature. The output value (TC) of this method function
can be used in the method function "Calculation".
Subfunction: Temperature Compensation
General
is supported.
Temperature Compensation Settings
Compensation API: Temperature compensation according to API tables. API | Formula
type Formula: Defines the temperature compensation entering a
formula.
API table Selection of the relevant API table. Crude oils | Refined
products | Lubricants
Compensation API table: Select the reference temperature (15 °C, 60 °F, API table | Formula
temp. 20 °C). The temperature is entered as the input value in the
algorithm for calculating the API compensation.
Formula: The defined value is for information purposes only and
is not included in the calculation.
Output Defines the unit in which the temperature compensated value is to °API | d | SG4 | SG
be expressed.
Formula Specifies the formula for the temperature compensation. Mathematical calcu-
lation

All specific value tables and all value tables created in LabX are available for the calculations in accordance
with the selected cell mode.
Coefficients Activates the coefficients that can be used in the formula. Active | Inactive
For powers to the base 10 the "e"-convention may be used (e.g.
1.2e-4 --> 0.00012).
A/B/C/D Defines the coefficients that can be used in the formula. -
7.13.2.6 Wait
element.
Use this method function to temporarily pause a method.
Method subfunction: Wait
General
is supported.
Wait Settings
Condition
7.13.2.7 Line rinse

element.
This function for InMotion sample changer, starts at Position Rinse (or when using higher beakers at a higher
position) and moves down at a variable speed (Descent rate). Air bubbles are introduced with the rinsing
liquid in the beaker for mechanical cleaning of the system.
This method function can be inserted into a method function Clean (Common) in combination with an
InMotion sample changer. Additional parameters will be displayed with this combination.

Method function: Line rinse
General
is supported.
Line Rinse Settings
Duration Defines the cleaning time, which depends on the installed tubes Short | Medium | Long
and the desired degree of cleanliness.
Descent rate Defines the speed at which the lift of the autosampler is lowered. Very low | Low | Medium
This parameter affects the ratio of intake air and liquid. The | High | Very high
suction of air improves the cleaning effect.
Condition

element.
This method function activates auxiliary instruments and enables the instrument to communicate with these
auxiliary instruments. Auxiliary instruments can be connected either to the "Aux" (24 Volt) socket on the
instrument board or to a USB interface, using a USB-RS232 adapter. The parameters described in the following
apply to all control types.
Subfunction: Auxiliary instrument
General
is supported.

Configuration
Control type The control type of the auxiliary instrument. USB-RS232 | Output
24 V
Name Enter the name of the auxiliary instrument as defined in the 1…100 characters
settings of the instrument.
Control type: 24V output
Mode Defines the mode for controlling the control output. On | Off | Fixed duration
Fixed duration: The control output is switched on for the defined
time interval.
Duration A time span in [sec] can be defined here for which the control 0…106
Control type: USB-RS232
Send output Defines whether the instrument sends an output sequence to the Active | Inactive
sequence auxiliary instrument.
Output sequence Defines the output sequence the instrument sends to the auxiliary 1…120 characters
instrument.
The control sequence for the signal receiver - can also contain a
formula or result enclosed in characters % or control characters
in format \xxx where xxx is the decimal number of the ASCII
control character.
\010 for line feed.
Wait for input Defines whether the instrument waits for a defined input sequence Active | Inactive
sequence before continuing the method.
Maximum time Defines the maximum time the method function waits for the input 0…1000000 s | ∞ s
sequence. When the maximum time has passed, the method
continues even if no input sequence was detected.
Input sequence Defines the input sequence the spectrophotometer expects from 1…20 characters
the auxiliary instrument.
Input sequence Defines whether the input sequence contains data that is used in Active | Inactive
with results calculations.
Inactive: The instrument waits for the input sequence defined in
Input sequence.
Active: The instrument waits for the input sequence with results
as defined by the various parameters.
Start sequence, Total length, Number of results, Start position
1…Start position 10, Max. length 1…Max. length 10
Start sequence Defines the start sequence that the instrument expects from the 0…20 characters
The start sequence can contain ASCII control characters in the
format \xxx. Here, xxx is the decimal code of the control
character.
Total length Defines the total length of the input sequence. 1…1000 characters

Number of results Defines the number of relevant values that are included in the 1…10
input sequence.
Start position 1… Defines the absolute position of first character of the relevant 1…1000
Start position 10 value. Leading space characters before the result will be ignored.
Max. length Defines the maximum length of the relevant value. 1...1000 characters
1Max. length
10…
Condition
Note
• Results are stored under the variables "AuxInst x[y]" (x: result number; y: number of the "Auxiliary
instrument" method function). For example: AuxInst 3[2]; where "3" represents the third result in the input
sequence, which was received in the second auxiliary instrument method function in the method.
See also
7.13.2.9 PowerShower
element.
The PowerShower rinsing offers an automated and effective cleaning mechanism, eliminating carryover thanks
to strong solvent stream that cleans the tubes from top to bottom with the defined number of rinse cycles.
Method function: PowerShower
General
is supported.
PowerShower Settings
Rinsing with the defined number of rinse cycles in the setup.

Beaker position Absolute position: Defines the absolute position that is Absolute position |
Drain beaker Drains the beaker before rinsing with the complete beaker volume. Active | Inactive
The maximum pumping speed is used for draining.
PowerShower Rinse using the PowerShower pump. During rinsing, the sampling Active | Inactive
rinse pump is always active with maximum speed to prevent overfilling
of the beaker.
Rinse cycles Defines the number of rinse cycles that are performed. 1…100
Fill beaker Defines whether the PowerShower pump moves the volume Active | Inactive
defined in Volume to the sample vessel.
Volume Defines the volume of rinse liquid, pumped into the beaker, per 0…1000 mL
cycle. The lift will go to position Sample for that.
Fill cell and tubes Fills the cell and tubes with the defined volume using the Active | Inactive
sampling pump.
Volume Defines the volume of rinse liquid, pumped towards the cell. The 0…1000 mL
lift will go to position Sample for that.
Volume Defines the volume of rinse liquid, pumped into the beaker, per 0…1000 mL
cycle. The lift will go to position Sample for that.
Condition
7.13.2.10 Park
This method function cannot be inserted as an independent element, but is always a component of the Clean
method function. With this method function you can park the InMotion head in a beaker, e.g. parking the pH
electrode in a beaker with buffer.

Method function: Park
General
is supported.
Park settings
Park position Absolute position: Defines the absolute position that is Absolute position |
Condition
7.13.2.11 Stir
element.
With this method function you can define a fixed pre-stirring duration and also, if the stirrer should be activated
after the defined pre-stirring duration.
Method function: Stir
General
is supported.

Stir Settings
Speed 1 Define the stirrer speed in percent depending on the maximum 1…100
speed of the stirrer (pre-stirring).
Stir duration Define the stirring time [s] for the pre-stirring. You can define two 0…10000
stirring sections (e.g. 10 s higher speeded for pre-stirring
followed lower speeded until the end of measurement).
Continue stirring Continued stirring after the defined stirring time in Stir duration. Active | Inactive
Speed 2 Define the stirrer speed after pre-stirring in percent depending on 1…100
the maximum speed of the stirrer.
Condition
7.13.3 User interaction
7.13.3.1 Standard data

This method function is used to request the data for certified density & refractometry standards. The data is
requested when a method function is in progress, and can be entered manually or via the barcode reader.
You can perform flexible assignment via data binding using the subfunction Set sample parameters.
Method function: Standard Data
General
is supported.
Standard Data
Standard name Specify a descriptive name of your choice. 0…30 characters
Lot number The lot or batch number of the standard. 0…30 characters
Date of certifi- The certification date of the standard. Date
cation
Expiry date The expiry date of the standard. Date
standard
Request standard Determines whether the standard data is requested. Active | Inactive
data

Allow canceling Determines whether the function can be interrupted. An entry Active | Inactive
window will be shown, offering different options for selection.
D
d nominal 15 °C Nominal density value of the standard at the specified 0.00000…3.00000
temperature.
temperature.
temperature.
Uncertainty d 15 Limits of error of the standard (with reference to the nominal 0.00000…0.00100
°C value) at the specified temperature.
R
nD nominal 15 Nominal refractive index value of the standard at the specified 1.32000…1.70000
°C temperature.
°C temperature.
°C temperature.
Uncertainty nD 15 Limits of error of the standard (with reference to the nominal 0.00000…0.00100

The return values correspond to all relevant details for standards that can be referenced via data binding in the
subfunction Set sample parameters.
Standard name The name of the standard. -
Lot number The lot or batch number of the standard. -
Date of certifi- The certification date of the standard. -
cation
Expiry date The expiry date of the standard. -
standard

d nominal 15 Nominal density value of the standard at 15 °C / 20 °C / 25 °C. -
°C / 20 °C / 25 °
C
Uncertainty d 15 Limits of error of the standard (with reference to the nominal -
°C value) at 15 °C / 20 °C / 25 °C.
/ d 20 °C / d 25
°C
nD nominal 15 Nominal refractive index value of the standard at -
°C / 20 °C / 25 ° 15 °C / 20 °C / 25 °C
C
Uncertainty nD 15 Limits of error of the standard (with reference to the nominal -
°C / nD 20 °C / value) at 15 °C / 20 °C / 25 °C.
nD 25 °C
Creation time The time at which return values are created. The time is visible on -
7.13.4 Subfunctions
7.13.4.1 Set sample parameters (Adjustment)

Use this method function to define sample-related data.
The displayed options depend on the selected instrument in Configuration > Cell.
This subfunction is a fixed component of a method block and is not available as an independent element.
Subfunction: Set sample parameters
General
is supported.
Sample Parameters
Viscosity Activation of the viscosity correction. Active | Inactive
correction
Viscosity ≤2000 (info field) -
[mPa*s]
Adjustment Settings
Adjustment mode Selection of the adjustment sets and the standard specific data. Air&Water |
The selection is filtered according to the available sets. Air&Standard |
Water&Standard |
Standards
Cell 1 - Adjustment Settings

Cell Information on the type of cell (Density/Refractometry). D | R | D+R | D+D | R+R
Adjustment set The adjustment set defines the standards and the temperature at Air&Water |
which the adjustment is performed. The selection of sets is filtered Air&Standard |
according to the selection in Cell mode. Water&Standard |
Air&Water: The instrument accesses its internally saved nominal Standards
value tables.
Standards: The nominal value must be entered.
Temperature Active: A temperature range adjustment will be performed at 20 Active | Inactive
range adjustment °C / 40 °C / 60 °C. This procedure takes several hours.
Only for Cell mode D and Adjustment set Air&Water20.00C".
Standard 1
cation
Expiry date Std The expiry date of the standard. Date
Set nominal value Determines whether the values are entered manually or whether Active | Inactive
default values are used.
Standard 1: Cell 1
d nominal Defines the nominal density value of the standard. 0.00000…3.00000
Uncertainty d [g/ Limits of error of the standard (with reference to the nominal 0…0.001
cm3] value).
nD nominal Defines the nominal refractive index value of the standard. 1.32…1.7
Uncertainty nD Limits of error of the standard (with reference to the nominal 0…0.001
value).
7.13.4.2 Set sample parameters (Test)

General
is supported.

Sample Parameters
correction
Viscosity <= 2000: For non-viscous samples. <= 2000 | > 2000
[mPa*s] > 2000: For viscous samples.
Test Settings
Test mode Selection of the test sets and the standard specific data. The Air | Water | Standard |
selection is filtered according to the available sets. Brix standard
Cell 1 - Test Settings
Test set The test set defines the standards and the temperature at which Air&Water |
the test is performed. The selection of sets is filtered according to Air&Standard |
the selection in Cell mode. Water&Standard |
Air&Water: The instrument accesses its internally saved nominal Standards
value tables.
Standards: The nominal value must be entered.
Test temperature The test temperature is displayed (info field). 15 °C | 20 °C | 5 °C
Standard 1
cation
Expiry date Std The expiry date of the standard. Date
Set nominal value Determines whether the values are entered manually or whether Active | Inactive
default values are used.
Standard 1: Cell 1
d nominal Defines the nominal density value of the standard. 0.00000…3.00000
Uncertainty d [g/ Limits of error of the standard (with reference to the nominal 0…0.001
cm3] value).
nD nominal Defines the nominal refractive index value of the standard. 1.32…1.7
Uncertainty nD Limits of error of the standard (with reference to the nominal 0…0.001
value).
7.13.4.3 Set sample parameters (Measurement)


General
is supported.
Sample Parameters
correction
Viscosity <= 2000: For non-viscous samples. <= 2000 | > 2000 | Set
[mPa*s] > 2000: For viscous samples. value
Set value: To enter a specific value.
Viscosity value Defines the viscosity value of the sample. 1…99999
[mPa*s]
Correction factor Defines a correction factor that can be used in calculations. 0.000001…1000000
7.13.4.4 Measure (Adjustment)

Use this method function to configure data capture and error detection.
For method type Adjustment this subfunction contains the following parameters:
Subfunction: Measure
General
is supported.
Error Detection
You record the following measuring errors with the bubble check or a multiple measurement:
• air bubbles in the measuring cell (Bubble Check)
• Solvent residues in the measuring cell
• Solid particles in the sample
With the Bubble Check variations in the measuring signal are analyzed.
With Multiple measurement, n measurements are performed. Between measurements, the sample is subject
to continual movement. The standard deviation of the n measurements is added, and checked to see whether it
is smaller than the maximum standard deviation (Max. SD) defined in the method.

Bubble check If activated, the system verifies whether bubbles are present in the Active | Inactive
density cell.
Acquisition of measured values
Wait time R The refraction index measurement begins after this time has 0…9999
elapsed. This wait time ensures that the prism is completely
wetted with liquid. In the case of multiple measurements, each
measurement is started after this wait time has elapsed.
Endpoint Automatic: The measurement is ended if the defined stability Automatic | Fixed
criteria have been achieved. This is fixed for the method types duration
Adjustment and Test.
Fixed duration: The measurement is stopped after a certain time.
This function is used to shorten the measurement time if high
precision is not required. The measurement is stopped on
achievement of the maximum measurement reliability at the
latest.
Max. meas. Maximum duration of measurement. If the measured value has 1…9999
duration not stabilized by this time, the measurement will be canceled with
the status Error. This depends on the stability criteria of the
parameter Meas. reliability.
Meas. reliability Setting of stability criteria for measurement value acquisition. Medium | High |
Maximum
7.13.4.5 Measure (Measurement)

For method type Measurement this subfunction contains the following parameters:
General
is supported.
Cell 1 - Measurement Configuration
Meas. Defines the measuring temperature. 0.00…91.00 | 0.00…
temperature 95.00
Temperature unit Information on the temperature unit applicable for the °C | °F
measurement.

Adjustment set Defines the adjustment set applicable for the measurement. List of available
adjustment sets
Adjustment Information on the temperature unit applicable for the adjustment °C | °F
temperature unit set.
Error Detection
Multiple If activated, several measurements are performed with the same Active | Inactive
measurement sample.
No. of Defines the number of measurements. 2…10
measurements
Refill ratio Used for the calculation of the further movement of the sample 10…100
between two measurements. The refill rate [%] is calculated over
the duration of the sample addition.
Example: The fill duration is 10 s and the refill ratio 50%, i.e.
pumping is activated for 5 seconds.
Repeat if failed If activated, the measurement is repeated if bubble check has Active | Inactive
failed or if Max. SD or Max. deviation are exceeded.
Note: If Multiple measurement is activated, all measurements
are repeated.
density cell.
Error Detection Cell 1
Max. SD Maximum permitted absolute standard deviation of the 4 | 5 | 6 decimal places
measurements for density, refractive index or color. When the
deviation is exceeded the measurement is interrupted with the
status Error.
The maximum standard deviation must be entered in the function
of the measuring cell type.
Max. SD Maximum permitted absolute standard deviation of the 4 | 5 | 6 decimal places
measurements for density, refractive index or color. When the
deviation is exceeded the measurement is interrupted with the
status Error.
The maximum standard deviation must be entered in the function
of the measuring cell type.

Error Detection External pH Meter
No. of meas. Defines the number of measured points used for determining the 1…10
points mean value. Preferably use a high number of 10 measuring
points.
Note: If multiple measurement is activated, only the measured
values from the last measurement repetition are used.
Max. deviation The maximum permissible absolute deviation [pH] of the 0.01…7.00
measured values for pH or conductivity meters. If this is
exceeded, the results are marked accordingly.
Max. deviation The maximum permissible absolute deviation [µS/cm] of the 0.1…2000.00
measured values for conductivity meters. If this is exceeded, the
results are marked accordingly.
Error Detection External Colorimeter
Max. SD Maximum permitted absolute standard deviation of the 0…100
measurements for color. If this is exceeded, the results are
marked accordingly.
Wait time Col The colorimetric measurement begins after this time has elapsed. 0…9999
In the case of multiple measurements, only the first measurement
is started after this wait time has elapsed. All other measurements
begin with no wait time.
criteria have been achieved. This is fixed for the method types duration
Adjustment and Test.
Fixed duration: The measurement is stopped after a certain time.
This function is used to shorten the measurement time if high
precision is not required. The measurement is stopped on
achievement of the maximum measurement reliability at the
latest.
Meas. duration Defines the duration of measurement in [s]. 1…9999
Maximum
7.13.4.6 Measure (Test)

For method type Test this subfunction contains the following parameters:

General
is supported.
Cell 1 - Measurement Configuration
Cell Information on the type of cell (Density Refractometry). D | R | D+R | D+D | R+R
Test temperature The test temperature is displayed (info field). 15 °C | 20 °C | 5 °C
Adjustment set Defines the adjustment set applicable for the measurement. List of available
adjustment sets
Error Detection
density cell.
criteria have been achieved. duration
This is fixed for the method types Adjustment and Test.
Fixed duration: To define a fixed duration.
Meas. duration Defines the duration of measurement in [s]. 1…9999

Maximum
7.13.4.7 Adjustment
Use this subfunction is to save the adjustment data in the setup for the corresponding cells.
Subfunction: Adjustment
General
is supported.
Adjustment Settings
Adjustment Defines whether the adjustment should be used to verify the Active | Inactive
analysis accuracy of the determined adjustment data. The system checks
the deviation from the last adjustment. If the maximum deviation
is exceeded, you can decide at the end of the adjustment whether
the data is transferred.
Standard 1 Information of the used standard. -
Max. deviation Defines the maximum permissible deviation of the second 0.0001…0.001
standard.
Standard 2 Information of the used standard. -
Max. deviation Defines the maximum permissible deviation of the second 0.0001…0.001
standard.
7.13.4.8 Test
This function compares the measured with the theoretical test value. The data from the test is saved in the setup
of the corresponding cells.

Subfunction: Test
General
is supported.
Cell 1 - Cell Test Settings
Tolerance d Defines the maximum permissible tolerance. 0.0001…0.001
Tolerance nD Defines the maximum permissible tolerance. 0.0001…0.001
7.13.4.9 Fill
Defines the sample addition via the automation unit specified in the higher-level method function.
Subfunction: Fill
General
is supported.
Sample Parameters
Prompt for When activated, a confirmation appears on completion of the Active | Inactive
sample method function Fill, stating that the task is paused until
confirmed.
Speed High / Medium / Low: The corresponding pump speed can be set High | Medium | Low |
on the instrument under Setup > Hardware > Automation. Maximum | Reduced |
SC1 / SC30 Automatic
• Maximum: Sample feed with maximum pump speed.
• Reduced: Sample feed with speed set at the automation unit.
• Automatic: The pump speed changes after the defined time
period from Reduced to Maximum.
Max. filling speed Defines the period of time [s] after which the pump speed 1…10000
after changes to maximum speed.

Filling mode Defines the way in which the sample feed is to be stopped. Fixed duration |
Fixed duration: The sample feed is stopped after a certain time. Automatic
Automatic: The measuring signal is used to detect when the
sample has reached the measuring cell. (Not possible with
InMotion sample changer).
Filling duration Defines the fixed duration [s] for the filling. 0…10000
Fill ratio Defines the percentage by which the cell is "overfilled" for 100…1000
automatic filling. For example: After 10 s pumping, the sample is
recognized in the cell, the fill ratio is 150%, i.e. the pump
switches off after 15 s.
(Filling duration + Filling duration x (Fill ratio -100) / 100).
Sample detection Selection of the cell in which the sample detection is carried out. D|R
at
Max. fill duration After this time at the latest, the sample feed for automatic filling is 1…10000
stopped if no new sample is detected in the cell.
Pressure release Determines whether the pressure should be released after filling Active | Inactive
the cells for SC1 and SC30 sample changer.
7.13.4.10 Online display

Defines the display positions on instrument screens of the results from method function Calculate on
Instrument.
Subfunction: Online Display
General
is supported.
Online Display
Displayed results Sets the number of results to display on the online screen. 1…7 | 1…4
1…7: Instrument models D4 / D5 / D6
1…4: Instrument models DM40 / DM45 / DM50 / DX40 / DX45 /
DX50
Top / bottom Place at which the calculated results can be displayed on the "Displayed results" = "2"
screen.
Top left / Top Place at which the calculated results can be displayed on the "Displayed results" = "4"
right / Bottom screen.
left / Bottom right
See also

Common
Tset Set temperature
Tcell Actual temperature at the time of measured value acquisition.
SD Standard deviation for multiple measurements.
MaxSD Maximum permitted absolute standard deviation of measurements if
multiple measurements are taken.
p Atmospheric pressure
f Correction factor
R1…R20 Results from Calculation method function.
TC1…TC5 Results from Temperature compensation method function.
RLim[1] ... RLim[x] The result describes whether the limit is within [1] or outside [0] of the
calculations.
TIME Duration from the start of the method to the time of calculation of TIME.
DRY Result of the Clean method function for Dry mode = Automatic (0: "not
passed", 1: "passed").
TE Result of the test of the method of type Test (0: "not passed", 1:
"passed").
ADJAN Result of the test of the method of type Adjustment (0: "not passed", 1:
"passed").
t Measurement duration (Method type Measurement or Test).
t1 Measurement duration standard 1 (method type Adjustment).
t2 Measurement duration standard 2 (method type Adjustment).
Density - Module
OSC Oscillation: Actual measurement signal.
OSC1…OSC10 Single oscillation from multiple measurements.
d Density
• During the measurement, the extrapolated density is displayed as
soon as it is received.
• If viscosity correction is activated, the viscosity-corrected density is
transferred at the end of the measurement.
d1…d10 Single values from multiple measurements.
dRaw Uncorrected density. Differences to d:
• During the measurement, the non-extrapolated density is displayed.
• At the end of the measurement, the viscosity-corrected density is not
transferred, even if viscosity correction is activated.
dA Apparent density
SG Specific weight: Density of the sample divided by the density of water at
the measurement temperature.
SGA Apparent specific weight
SG4 Specific weight 4 °C: Density of the sample divided by the density of
water at 4 °C.
SG4A Apparent specific weight 4 °C
SG60 Specific weight 60 °F: Density of the sample divided by the density of
water at 60 °F.
SG60A Apparent specific weight 60 °F
F Adjustment factor

CT Result of the Cell test method function (0: "not passed", 1: "passed").
DevCT Deviation of the cell test from the nominal value.
Brix measured The measurement Brix value.

Brix deviation Deviation to nominal value of the measured Brix value.
Measured density Measured density.
Measured density deviation Deviation to nominal value of the measured density value.
Standard deviation cell test Standard deviation in the cell test.
Refractive index - Module
nD Refractive index
nD1... nD10 Single values from multiple measurement
External instruments
pH pH value
DevpH Maximum deviation in the pH measurement.
MaxDevpH The maximum permitted absolute deviation of measured values for pH.
TpH Temperature pH
COND Conductivity
DevCOND Maximum deviation in the conductivity measurement.
MaxDevCOND The maximum permitted absolute deviation of measured values for
conductivity.
TCOND Temperature conductivity
SDCOL Standard deviation of the measured values for color in the case of
multiple measurements.
MaxSDCOL Maximum permitted absolute standard deviation of the measured
values for color, if multiple measurements are taken.

7.14 Method functions - Thermal Value
7.14.1 Performance verification

This method function verifies the last performed adjustments and tests of an instrument.
Method function: Performance Verification
General
is supported.
Last Successful Adjustment
Verify last Defines whether a check should be performed to ascertain Active | Inactive
adjustment whether the last instrument adjustment was successful.
Verify adjustment Defines whether the adjustment data should be verified. Active | Inactive
data
Adjustment - Less Specifies the minimum time in days since the last instrument 1…1000
than [d] adjustment.
Last adjustment LabX: The last adjustment must have been performed from LabX. LabX | Instrument |
origin Instrument: The last adjustment must have been performed on Unspecified
the instrument without using LabX.
Unspecified: The origin of the last adjustment is irrelevant.
Last Successful Test

Verify last test Defines whether a check should be performed to ascertain Active | Inactive
whether the last instrument test was successful.
Verify test data Defines whether the test data should be verified. Active | Inactive
Test - Less than Specifies the minimum time in days since the last instrument test. 1…1000
[d]
Return Values
See also
7.14.2 Test melting point/range

This method function can be used to perform a test with the use of a reference substance. Tests are entered in
the history of the instrument and can be verified with the method function Performance Verification.

Method function: Test melting point / range
General
is supported.
Temperature Program
Define the temperature ramp to the start temperature
You can activate a controlled heating of the furnace to the start temperature with Ramp to start temperature.
Initial temperature defines the start temperature of the initial temperature ramp. The value for Initial
temperature has to be equal to or above the ambient temperature and below the value defined in Start
temperature.
Initial heating rate defines how fast the temperature rises during the initial temperature ramp.
Define the temperature ramp for the measurement
You can define the temperature ramp with Start temperature, Waiting time, Heating rate and End
temperature.
The parameter Ramp to start temperature defines how the instrument heats up to the start temperature. This
includes the definition of the initial temperature and heating rate during the ramp.
The temperature range is limited by the ambient temperature and the maximum temperature of the instrument.
The maximum temperatures for the different instruments are listed below.
• MP70: 350 °C, 662 °F, 623.1 K
• MP80: 350 °C, 662 °F, 623.1 K
• MP90: 400 °C, 752 °F, 673.1 K
The value for Start temperature has to be equal to or above the ambient temperature, below the maximum
temperature of the instrument and lower than the end temperature.
Example: Benzoic acid (expected melting point temperature 122 °C)
122 °C - 5 min x (1 °C/min) = 117 °C
Waiting time defines, how long the furnace stays at the temperature defined by Start temperature after you
have started the analysis. After the waiting time the sample should have the same temperature as the furnace.
Heating rate defines how fast the temperature rises during the measurement. Low values for Heating rate give
more accurate results but increase the duration of the measurement. The maximum duration of the
measurement is determined by the maximum duration of the video recording.
Usually, and typical for most Pharmacopeias, the heating rate corresponds to 1 °C/min. For highest accuracy
and non-decomposing samples, 0.2 °C/min is often used. With substances that decompose, we recommend 5
°C/min, for exploratory measurements 10 °C/min.
The value for End temperature has to be equal to or above the ambient temperature, higher than the start
temperature and below the maximum temperature of the instrument.
122 °C + 5 min x (1 °C/min) = 127 °C
Define the behavior after the measurement
t (iso) specifies how long the furnace is kept at the value defined in End temperature once the measurement is
done.

If the parameter Stop at event of the subfunction Termination and end behavior is activated, t (iso) should be
set to 0 s. In this case the temperature is not kept constant after the determination of the melting point but rises
to the value defined in End temperature.
Temperature unit Defines which temperature unit should be used for the analysis. °C | °F | K
Ramp to start Defines how the instrument heats up to the start temperature. Active | Inactive
temperature Active: The instrument heats up with a controlled heating rate.
Inactive: The instrument heats up as fast as possible.
Initial temperature Defines the initial temperature of the ramp to the start temperature. 10.0 °C…Tmax
50.0 °F…Tmax
283.2 K…Tmax
Initial heating rate Defines the heating rate of the ramp to the start temperature. 0.1…20 °C/min
0.1…35 °F/min
0.1…20 K/min
Start temperature Defines the temperature at which the temperature program starts. 10.0 °C…Tmax
50.0 °F…Tmax
283.2 K…Tmax
Waiting time Defines the duration of the idle period before the temperature ramp 0...1000 s
starts. Neither measurement data nor video data are recorded
during this time.
Heating rate Defines the rate at which the measuring cell is heated during the 0.1…20 °C/min
temperature ramp. 0.1…35 °F/min
0.1…20 K/min
End temperature Defines the final temperature at the end of the temperature ramp. 10.0 °C…Tmax
50.0 °F…Tmax
283.2 K…Tmax
t (iso) Defines the duration of the isothermal segment after the 0...1000 s
measurement.
Evaluation
Define the determination of temperature values
The instrument does not measure the temperature of the sample directly but only measure the temperature in
the furnace. The temperature difference between the sample and the furnace depends in principle on the heating
rate, the sample size and the substance. The adjustment of the instrument corrects the furnace temperatures for
these factors.
If you set Temperature values to Pharmacopeia, the furnace temperature is used. Tpharma is thus the
temperature of the furnace at the corresponding melting point. Measurement values can only be compared if the
measurements are performed under the conditions used during calibration and adjustment.
If you set Temperature values to Thermodynamic the temperature is corrected for the difference between the
temperature of the furnace and the capillary. The relationship is given by the equation shown below.
Tthermo is the thermodynamic temperature

Tpharma is the temperature of the furnace at the corresponding melting point
β is the heating rate in °C/min (K/min)
With the factor f, which depends on the particular measurement point
fA = 0.2
fB = 1.5
fC = 2.0
in units of

The amount of energy needed to melt a crystalline substance is quite large; the enthalpy of fusion of organic
substances is typically of the order 150 J/g. As a result, the sample temperature from the start of the melting
process (point A) to the clear point at the end of the melting process (point C) lags behind the furnace
temperature. The temperature correction given above compensates the lag caused by the thermal resistance
between the furnace and the sample, the enthalpy of fusion, and the heat capacity of capillary and sample for
the geometry of the instrument.
Define the melting point manually
You can determine the melting point either manually or the instrument can determine the melting point automat-
ically.
Activate the parameter Set manually to manually determine the melting point or the start point and endpoint of
the melting range. A Set button appears for each sample during the analysis. When a button is pressed, the
relevant temperature is recorded.
Configure the automatic determination of the melting point
The melting point instruments use a camera as a detector to measure the percentage light intensity (trans-
mittance) of the sample. The figure below shows typical light intensity curves obtained during the melting of six
samples.
Three points, A, B, and C are marked on the curve. These points are characteristic temperatures that are
determined in a melting point analysis. Point A marks the start of melting, B is a temperature at which the
transmittance reaches a certain value, and C is the end of melting after which the light intensity remains
approximately constant. Methods for melting point determination use points B or C. Most pharmacopeia
standards define the end of melting (C) as the melting point. Points A and C are used to determine the melting
range.
Figure. Light intensity curves during a typical melting process: A is the start of melting (TA), B is the threshold value, 40%
(TB), and C is the end of melting (TC) for six simultaneously measured samples.

The parameter Melting point criterion defines which points are used to determine the melting point or the
melting range.
For the melting point you can choose between the points B and C.
To use point B, set Melting point criterion to Threshold value B and define the transmittance with the
parameter Threshold.
To use point C, set Melting point criterion to Endpoint C. If you activate Automatic endpoint C slope the
instrument will determine the endpoint C automatically. If you deactivate Automatic endpoint C slope you need
to define the slope at endpoint C that is used to determine the endpoint C with the parameter Endpoint C slope.
By default Endpoint C slope is set to 0.4 %/s.
Points A and C are used for the determination of a melting range.
The parameter Initial threshold A defines the transmittance for point A. By default, 5 % is defined as the
starting point of the melting range.
Operation mode Defines whether the melting point or the melting range is Melting point | Melting
evaluated. The melting point is defined by one temperature value; range
the melting range is defined by two.
Temperature Defines how the temperature values are determined. Pharmacopeia |
values Pharmacopeia: the temperature values are taken directly from the Thermodynamic
temperature sensor in accordance with the pharmacopeia
standard.
Thermodynamic: the thermal inertia of the measuring cell is
considered when the temperature values are determined.
Heating rate Defines the action taken if a deviating heating rate is selected for Ignore and continue |
warning adjustment. Prompt for action |
Only for Temperature values = Pharmacopeia. Pause Task
Initial threshold A Defines the intensity value at which the start of the melting range 0...25 %
is assumed. The value is entered as a percentage of the
maximum intensity.
Melting point Defines how the melting point is determined. Threshold value B |
criterion Threshold value B: a threshold for the intensity is used to Endpoint C
determine the melting point.
Endpoint C: the slope of the intensity curve at endpoint C is used
to determine the melting point.
Threshold B Defines the threshold of the intensity value at which the melting 1.0…99.0 %
point is detected. The value is entered as a percentage of the
maximum intensity.
Automatic Defines how the endpoint C is evaluated. Active | Inactive
endpoint C slope Active: the entire intensity curve is evaluated. Various criteria are
applied which are based on the slope of the intensity curve.
Inactive: a user-defined slope of the intensity curve is used to
Endpoint C slope Defines the slope of the intensity curve at endpoint C at which the 0.0...2.5 %/s
melting point is defined.
Display results Active: the window Results containing the analysis results opens Active | Inactive
after analysis at the end of the analysis.
Inactive: the homescreen opens at the end of the analysis.
Allow excluding Allows capillaries to be excluded after the analysis is complete. Active | Inactive
Save videos Defines whether the videos are stored in LabX. A video occupies a Active | Inactive
maximum of around 30 MB in the LabX database. The sizes are
dependent upon the measurement duration.

Available capillaries
Capillary 1 - Defines the recognition of capillaries for which results are Automatic detection |
Availability… displayed. Active | Inactive
Capillary 6 - Automatic detection: Capillaries are detected optically using
Availability transmitted light.
Termination Behavior
The instrument can end the measurement either when it has detected a melting point in all samples or when the
temperature defined in End temperature is reached.
If you activate parameter Stop at event the measurements ends when a melting point is detected in all
samples. This setting is only available, if the melting point is determined automatically.
Using the parameter End behavior you can define the temperature, the instrument goes to at the end of the
measurement or when you stop the measurement. With this setting you can influence the cooling and heating
time between measurements and the energy used by the instrument.
If Stop at event is activated and you select End temperature, heating will continue after the end of the
measurement until the end temperature has been reached.
If you do not want to use one of the predefined temperatures you can select Remove temperature and specify
an arbitrary temperature between the ambient temperature and the maximum temperature of the instrument.
Stop at event Defines when the analysis ends. Active | Inactive
Active the analysis ends as soon as the expected effect is
detected in all samples.
Inactive: the analysis ends when the end temperature is reached.
End behavior Defines the behavior of the measuring cell at the end of an End temperature | Start-/
analysis. The measuring cell can either retain the end temperature Initial temperature |
of the analysis or return to the start temperature or the furnace can Furnace power off |
be switched off. Remove temperature
End temperature: the measuring cell can either retain the end
temperature of the analysis.
Start-/Initial temperature: the measuring cell returns to the start
temperature or the initial temperature of the analysis.
Furnace power off: the furnace is switched off.
Remove temperature: the measuring cell goes to the remove
temperature.
Remove Defines the remove temperature. 10.0 °C…Tmax
temperature 50.0 °F…Tmax
283.2 K…Tmax
Confirm end of Active: the analysis dialog and the results it includes are Active | Inactive
analysis displayed until you press OK. This allows you to leave the
instrument to itself during an analysis and return to it to view the
final result after the analysis has ended. You can enter an
analysis comment or comments on the samples before the dialog
is closed and the display returns to the homescreen.
Inactive: the display automatically returns to the homescreen at
the end of an analysis.
Calibration substance
Substance Specifies the reference substance to be used for the analysis. List of available
substances
You can define reference substances in Resources.

Result Validation
Capillaries within Defines whether the minimum number of capillaries that must lie Active | Inactive
limits within the limits is checked.
Number of capil- Defines the minimum number of capillaries that must lie within 1…6
laries the limits. The number cannot be greater than the number of
available capillaries.
Limit excluded Defines whether the maximum number of capillaries that can be Active | Inactive
capillaries excluded is checked.
Number of capil- Specifies the maximum number of capillaries that can be 1…3
laries excluded.
Return Values
See also
2 Performance verification } Page 487
2 Manage calibration substances } Page 649
7.14.3 Melting point/range

This method function can be used to perform an analysis to determine the melting point or melting range. If you
select a Calibration substance, the data from an analysis performed using this method can be used for
adjustment purposes.
Method function: Melting point / range
General
is supported.
Temperature Program
temperature.
temperature.
The maximum temperatures for the different instruments are listed below.
• MP70: 350 °C, 662 °F, 623.1 K
• MP80: 350 °C, 662 °F, 623.1 K

• MP90: 400 °C, 752 °F, 673.1 K
122 °C - 5 min x (1 °C/min) = 117 °C
Usually, and typical for most Pharmacopeias, the heating rate corresponds to 1 °C/min. For highest accuracy
and non-decomposing samples, 0.2 °C/min is often used. With substances that decompose, we recommend 5
°C/min, for exploratory measurements 10 °C/min.
122 °C + 5 min x (1 °C/min) = 127 °C
done.
set to 0 s. In this case the temperature is not kept constant after the determination of the melting point but rises
50.0 °F…Tmax
283.2 K…Tmax
0.1…35 °F/min
0.1…20 K/min
50.0 °F…Tmax
283.2 K…Tmax
during this time.
Screening This option is used for the rapid analysis of an unknown Active | Inactive
substance. If it is selected, a heating rate that deviates from the
adjustment is permitted without warning. In addition, the Overall
result state is set to "Uncertain.
0.1…20 K/min
50.0 °F…Tmax
283.2 K…Tmax

measurement.
Evaluation
Define the determination of temperature values
The instrument does not measure the temperature of the sample directly but only measure the temperature in
the furnace. The temperature difference between the sample and the furnace depends in principle on the heating
rate, the sample size and the substance. The adjustment of the instrument corrects the furnace temperatures for
these factors.
If you set Temperature values to Pharmacopeia, the furnace temperature is used. Tpharma is thus the
temperature of the furnace at the corresponding melting point. Measurement values can only be compared if the
measurements are performed under the conditions used during calibration and adjustment.
If you set Temperature values to Thermodynamic the temperature is corrected for the difference between the
temperature of the furnace and the capillary. The relationship is given by the equation shown below.
Tthermo is the thermodynamic temperature

Tpharma is the temperature of the furnace at the corresponding melting point
β is the heating rate in °C/min (K/min)
With the factor f, which depends on the particular measurement point
fA = 0.2
fB = 1.5
fC = 2.0
in units of
The amount of energy needed to melt a crystalline substance is quite large; the enthalpy of fusion of organic
substances is typically of the order 150 J/g. As a result, the sample temperature from the start of the melting
process (point A) to the clear point at the end of the melting process (point C) lags behind the furnace
temperature. The temperature correction given above compensates the lag caused by the thermal resistance
between the furnace and the sample, the enthalpy of fusion, and the heat capacity of capillary and sample for
the geometry of the instrument.
Define the melting point manually
You can determine the melting point either manually or the instrument can determine the melting point automat-
ically.
Activate the parameter Set manually to manually determine the melting point or the start point and endpoint of
the melting range. A Set button appears for each sample during the analysis. When a button is pressed, the
relevant temperature is recorded.
Configure the automatic determination of the melting point
The melting point instruments use a camera as a detector to measure the percentage light intensity (trans-
mittance) of the sample. The figure below shows typical light intensity curves obtained during the melting of six
samples.
Three points, A, B, and C are marked on the curve. These points are characteristic temperatures that are
determined in a melting point analysis. Point A marks the start of melting, B is a temperature at which the
transmittance reaches a certain value, and C is the end of melting after which the light intensity remains
approximately constant. Methods for melting point determination use points B or C. Most pharmacopeia

standards define the end of melting (C) as the melting point. Points A and C are used to determine the melting
range.
Figure. Light intensity curves during a typical melting process: A is the start of melting (TA), B is the threshold value, 40%
(TB), and C is the end of melting (TC) for six simultaneously measured samples.
The parameter Melting point criterion defines which points are used to determine the melting point or the
melting range.
For the melting point you can choose between the points B and C.
To use point B, set Melting point criterion to Threshold value B and define the transmittance with the
parameter Threshold.
To use point C, set Melting point criterion to Endpoint C. If you activate Automatic endpoint C slope the
instrument will determine the endpoint C automatically. If you deactivate Automatic endpoint C slope you need
to define the slope at endpoint C that is used to determine the endpoint C with the parameter Endpoint C slope.
By default Endpoint C slope is set to 0.4 %/s.
Points A and C are used for the determination of a melting range.
The parameter Initial threshold A defines the transmittance for point A. By default, 5 % is defined as the
starting point of the melting range.
Operation mode Defines whether the melting point or the melting range is Melting point | Melting
evaluated. The melting point is defined by one temperature value; range
the melting range is defined by two.
Set manually Defines if the temperature of the melting point or the start Active | Inactive
temperature and end temperature of the melting range are
determined automatically or manually.
Active: The user sets the temperature manually.
Inactive: The software determines the temperature.

Temperature Defines how the temperature values are determined. Pharmacopeia |
values Pharmacopeia: the temperature values are taken directly from the Thermodynamic
temperature sensor in accordance with the pharmacopeia
standard.
Thermodynamic: the thermal inertia of the measuring cell is
considered when the temperature values are determined.
Heating rate Defines the action taken if a deviating heating rate is selected for Ignore and continue |
warning adjustment. Prompt for action |
Only for Temperature values = Pharmacopeia. Pause Task
Initial threshold A Defines the intensity value at which the start of the melting range 0...25 %
is assumed. The value is entered as a percentage of the
maximum intensity.
Melting point Defines how the melting point is determined. Threshold value B |
criterion Threshold value B: a threshold for the intensity is used to Endpoint C
Endpoint C: the slope of the intensity curve at endpoint C is used
to determine the melting point.
Threshold B Defines the threshold of the intensity value at which the melting 1.0…99.0 %
point is detected. The value is entered as a percentage of the
maximum intensity.
Automatic Defines how the endpoint C is evaluated. Active | Inactive
endpoint C slope Active: the entire intensity curve is evaluated. Various criteria are
applied which are based on the slope of the intensity curve.
Inactive: a user-defined slope of the intensity curve is used to
Endpoint C slope Defines the slope of the intensity curve at endpoint C at which the 0.0...2.5 %/s
melting point is defined.
Available capillaries
Capillary 1 - Defines the recognition of capillaries for which results are Automatic detection |
Availability… displayed. Active | Inactive
Capillary 6 - Automatic detection: Capillaries are detected optically using
Availability transmitted light.
The instrument can end the measurement either when it has detected a melting point in all samples or when the
If you activate parameter Stop at event the measurements ends when a melting point is detected in all
samples. This setting is only available, if the melting point is determined automatically.

temperature.
283.2 K…Tmax
Substance If you select a substance, the data from an analysis performed List of available
using this method can be used for adjustment purposes. Only substances
reference substances which match the selected evaluation
parameters are displayed.
Return Values
See also
7.14.4 Cloud point

This method function can be used to perform an analysis to determine the cloud point.
Note
• Cloud point measurements are only possible with MP80 instruments.
Method function: Cloud point

General
is supported.

Temperature Program
temperature.
The maximum temperature is 350 °C, 662 °F, 623.1 K.
Example: 1 % ethoxylated nonylphenol in water (expected cloud point temperature 62 °C)
62 °C - 5 min x (1 °C/min) = 57 °C
Usually a heating rate of 1 °C/min is used. For highest accuracy and non-decomposing samples, we
recommend 0.2 °C/min. With substances that decompose, we recommend 5 °C/min, for exploratory
measurements 10 °C/min.
Example: 1 % ethoxylated nonylphenol in water (expected cloud point temperature 62 °C)
62 °C + 5 min x (1 °C/min) = 67 °C
done.
set to 0 s. In this case the temperature is not kept constant after the determination of the cloud point but rises to
the value defined in End temperature.
50.0 °F…Tmax
283.2 K…Tmax
during this time.
0.1…20 K/min
50.0 °F…Tmax
283.2 K…Tmax
measurement.

Evaluation
You can determine the cloud point either manually or the instrument can determine the cloud point automat-
ically.
To determine the cloud point manually, activate the parameter Set manually. A Set button appears for each
sample during the analysis. When a button is pressed, the relevant temperature is recorded.
If the cloud point is determined automatically, you can define the threshold for the transmission at which the
cloud point is detected.
Set manually Defines whether the temperature of the cloud point is determined Active | Inactive
automatically or manually.
Enter evaluation Defines the threshold of the transmission at which the cloud point 1.0…99.0 %
transmission is detected. The value is entered as a percentage of the maximum
transmission.
The instrument can end the measurement either when it has detected a cloud point in all samples or when the
If you activate parameter Stop at event the measurements ends when a cloud point is detected in all samples.
This setting is only available, if the cloud point is determined automatically. If you only measure one sample,
you need to specify the placement of the samples in the parameter Stop condition.
Stop condition Left & right sample: The instruments ends the measurement Left & right sample | Left
when it has detected the expected effect in both samples. sample | Right sample
Left sample: The instruments ends the measurement when it has
detected the expected effect in the left sample.
Right sample: The instruments ends the measurement when it
has detected the expected effect in the right sample.

End behavior Defines the behavior of the measuring cell at the end of an End temperature | Start
analysis. The measuring cell can either retain the end temperature temperature | Furnace
of the analysis or return to the start temperature or the furnace can power off | Remove
be switched off. temperature
End temperature: the measuring cell retains the end temperature
of the analysis.
Start temperature: the measuring cell returns to the start
temperature.
283.2 K…Tmax
Return Values
See also
7.14.5 Boiling point

This method function can be used to perform an analysis to determine the boiling point.
Note
• Boiling point measurements are only possible with MP80 instruments.
• You can define if MP80 instruments measure the atmospheric pressure during analysis or uses manual
values for correction of boiling points.
Method function: Boiling point
General
is supported.
Temperature Program
temperature.

temperature.
Example: Acetone (expected boiling point temperature 55 °C)
55 °C - 5 min x (1 °C/min) = 50 °C
Waiting time
The parameter Waiting time defines, how long the furnace stays at the temperature defined by Start
temperature after you have started the analysis. After the waiting time the sample and the air trapped in the
inner boiling point capillary should have the same temperature as the furnace. When the trapped air heats up, it
expands and bubbles are formed. The waiting time needs to be long enough for this expansion to be finished.
Example: Acetone (expected boiling point temperature 55 °C)
55 °C + 5 min x (1 °C/min) = 60 °C
done.
set to 0 s. In this case the temperature is not kept constant after the determination of the boiling point but rises
50.0 °F…Tmax
283.2 K…Tmax
50.0 °F…Tmax
283.2 K…Tmax
during this time.
0.1…20 K/min

50.0 °F…Tmax
283.2 K…Tmax
measurement.
Evaluation
Define if the boiling point is determined automatically or manually
You can determine the boiling point either manually or the instrument can determine the boiling point automat-
ically. If the instrument determines the boiling point automatically it also evaluates the results to detect
instances of superheating. Results with superheating are marked with (Sh).
To determine the boiling point manually, activate the parameter Set manually. A Set button appears for each
sample during the analysis. When a button is pressed, the relevant temperature is recorded. The detection of
superheating is deactivated if the boiling point is determined manually.
Define the brightness used for the measurement
By default, the instrument determines the optimal brightness during the last 20 s of the waiting time. If the
automatic determination of brightness does not give satisfactory results, you can set the brightness manually.
To set the brightness manually, activate the parameter Manual brightness and set the parameter Brightness to
the value that should be used for the measurement.
Set manually Defines whether the temperature of the boiling point is determined Active | Inactive
automatically or manually.
Manual Defines how the brightness used for the measurement is Active | Inactive
brightness determined.
Active: a fixed brightness is used for the measurement.
Inactive: the instrument automatically adjusts the brightness used
for the measurement.
Brightness Defines the brightness used for the measurement. 10…100 %
The instrument can end the measurement either when it has detected a boiling point or when the temperature
defined in End temperature is reached.
If you activate parameter Stop at event the measurements ends when a boiling point is detected in all samples.
This setting is only available, if the boiling point is determined automatically. If you only measure one sample,
you need to specify the placement of the samples in the parameter Stop condition.
With End behavior you can define, to which temperature the instrument goes at the end of the measurement or
when you stop the measurement. With this setting you can influence the cooling and heating time between
measurements and the energy used by the instrument.
If you select Start-/Initial temperature, the furnace goes to the temperature defined in Initial temperature if
Ramp to start temperature is activated. If Ramp to start temperature is deactivated the instrument goes to the
temperature defined in Start temperature.

Stop condition Left & right sample: The instruments ends the measurement Left & right sample | Left
when it has detected the expected effect in both samples. sample | Right sample
Left sample: The instruments ends the measurement when it has
detected the expected effect in the left sample.
Right sample: The instruments ends the measurement when it
has detected the expected effect in the right sample.
temperature.
283.2 K…Tmax
Return Values
See also
7.14.6 Slip melting point

This method function can be used to perform an analysis to determine the slip melting point.
Note
• Slip boiling point measurements are only possible with MP80 instruments.
Method function: Slip melting point

General
is supported.

Temperature Program
temperature.
temperature.
Example: Stearic acid (expected slip melting point temperature 69 °C)
69 °C - 5 min x (1 °C/min) = 64 °C
Example: Stearic acid (expected slip melting point temperature 69 °C)
69 °C + 5 min x (1 °C/min) = 74 °C
done.
50.0 °F…Tmax
283.2 K…Tmax
0.1…35 °F/min
0.1…20 K/min

50.0 °F…Tmax
283.2 K…Tmax
during this time.
0.1…20 K/min
50.0 °F…Tmax
283.2 K…Tmax
measurement.
Evaluation
You can determine the slip melting point either manually or the instrument can determine the slip melting point
automatically.
For the automatic determination of the slip melting point you need to define the frequency for the evaluation of
the images for slipping of the samples with the parameter Evaluation frequency. For most samples the default
value of 2.0 Hz will lead to good results. For slow slipping samples, a lower frequency can improve the results.
For fast slipping samples, a higher frequency can improve the results.
To determine the slip melting point manually, activate the parameter Set manually. A Set button appears for
each sample during the analysis. When a button is pressed, the relevant temperature is recorded.
Set manually Defines whether the temperature of the slip melting point is Active | Inactive
determined automatically or manually.
Evaluation Defines the frequency of the evaluated measurement points. 0.5 Hz | 1.0 Hz | 2.0 Hz
frequency | 4.0 Hz
measurement. With this setting you can influence the cooling and heating time between measurements and the
energy used by the instrument.
If you select Start-/Initial temperature, the furnace goes to the temperature define in Initial temperature if
Ramp to start temperature is activated. If Ramp to start temperature is deactivated the instrument goes to the
temperature defined in Start temperature.

temperature.
283.2 K…Tmax
Return Values
See also

functions.
General
Parameters Description Values
State Specifies the status of the result. Uncertain is output in the Not OK | OK | Uncertain
following cases:
• The heating rate differs from the rate used for the adjustment.
• A precondition was not fulfilled.
• An analysis was interrupted or stopped.
Test status Specifies whether the limits defined in the reference substances Passed | Failed
have been maintained for method function Test melting point /
range.
Conformity - Indicates if the minimum number of capillaries lie within the limits True | False
Capillaries for method function Test melting point / range.
Conformity - Indicates whether the maximum number of excluded capillaries is True | False
Exclusion not exceeded for method function Test melting point / range.
Conformity check Indicates if the minimum number of capillaries lie within the limits
and whether the maximum number of excluded capillaries is not
exceeded.

Mean The mean value of the temperature of the of the capillaries that are Temperature value
not excluded.
Difference The calculated temperature difference between the capillaries that Floating value
are not excluded.
Only for: Slip melting point, Cloud point, Boiling point
Atmospheric The atmospheric pressure at the time of measurement from the Floating value
pressure integrated pressure sensor.
Analysis state Specifies whether an analysis was interrupted or stopped. OK | Interrupted |
Stopped | Interrupted
and Stopped
Results Result of the performance verification. Overwrite is output if the OK | Failed | Overwrite
analysis is resumed despite the status Failed.
Temperature unit Specifies the temperature unit used. °C | °F | K
A mean Mean value A of the capillaries that are not excluded. Temperature value
A std. deviation Standard deviation A of the capillaries that are not excluded. -
B mean Mean value B of the capillaries that are not excluded. Temperature value
B std. deviation Standard deviation B of the capillaries that are not excluded. -
C mean Mean value C of the capillaries that are not excluded. Temperature value
C std. deviation Standard deviation C of the capillaries that are not excluded. -
Delta T mean The value calculated from: C mean - A mean Temperature value
Creation time The time at which the values were created. -
Capillaries
All capillaries - List value of all A values measured from non-empty capillaries. Temperature value
Measured A
All capillaries - List value of all B values measured from non-empty capillaries. Temperature value
Measured B
All capillaries - List value of all C values measured from non-empty capillaries. Temperature value
Measured C
Capillary 1 - Specifies the status of individual capillaries. Included | Excluded |
Result… 6 Empty
Capillary 1 - Displays the comments relating to the capillaries. Text
Comment … 6
Capillary 1 - The A value measured with the capillaries. Temperature value
Measured A… 6
Capillary 1 - The B value measured with the capillaries. Temperature value
Measured B … 6
Capillary 1 - The C value measured with the capillaries.. Temperature value
Measured C … 6
Capillary 1 - The melting point or the start of melting range temperature Temperature value
Manual value 1 manually determined by the user with the corresponding capillary.
… 6
Capillary 1 - The calculated boiling point based on the atmospheric pressure Temperature value
Boiling point with the corresponding capillary.
… 2

Capillary 1 - The temperature which a bubble frequency is 0.6 Hz with the Temperature value
Boiling corresponding capillary.
temperature … 2
Capillary 1 - The boiling point temperature manually determined by the user Temperature value
Manual boiling with the corresponding capillary.
point … 2
Capillary 1 - The boiling temperature manually determined by the user with the Temperature value
Manual boiling corresponding capillary.
temperature … 2
Capillary 1 - Slip The temperature value measured with the corresponding capillary. Temperature value
melting point
… 2
Capillary 1 - The slip melting point temperature manually determined by the Temperature value
Manual slip user with the corresponding capillary.
melting point
… 2
Capillary 1 - The temperature value measured with the corresponding capillary. Temperature value
Cloud point … 2
Capillary 1 - The cloud point temperature manually determined by the user with Temperature value
Manual cloud the corresponding capillary.
point … 2

7.15 Method functions - SevenExcellence
7.15.1 Stir
Use this method function to define a fixed pre-stirring duration and to display a message.
General
is supported.
Stir Settings
Stirring speed Defines the stirring speed [%]. -
Stir duration [s] The stirring time, in [sec], during which the stirrer should be in -
operation.
Instruction Determines whether an instruction text is displayed. Active | Inactive
Text Enter a multiline text, which is displayed as a Instruction. Any
Automation Activates the automation unit to be used in the method. Active | Inactive
PowerShower Activates rinsing using the PowerShower unit. Active | Inactive
Rinse cycles Number of rinse cycles that should be performed after 1…100
measurement.
Rinse position Absolute position: The system will move to the defined position Absolute position |
on the turntable for the start of a sample. Current position | +1
Current position: The system will start looking for the first beaker
to come.
+1: The system will move to the beaker which is next to the tower
(home position + 1). If no beaker can be detected, the sample
changer moves to the next position (home position + 2) and
7.15.2 Measurement
Use this method function to perform an analysis. Up to three measurements can be defined to run in parallel.
Their types are mutually independent.
Method function: Measurement
General
is supported.

Configuration
Measurement Specifies the measurement type to be used to perform the pH | Ion | Conductivity |
type physical quantity to be measured. Dissolved Oxygen |
Redox | Temperature
Sensor name Select a sensor from the list of defined sensors, if the method List of defined sensors
always runs with the same sensor. If not selected, you can
choose any suitable sensor when you start the method.
A selected sensor is referenced by its name.
Temperature Select the temperature capture mode. Internal | External |
capture Internal: The used temperature sensor is integrated in the Manual
measurement sensor.
External: A separate temperature sensor is used.
Manual: The temperature is entered manually.
Temperature Select a sensor from the list of defined sensors, if the method List of defined sensors
sensor always runs with the same sensor. If not selected, you can
Displayed if Temperature capture = External is selected.
Barometric Select the barometric pressure capture mode. Displayed if Automatic | Manual
pressure capture Measurement type = Dissolved Oxygen
Temperature unit Defines the temperature unit applicable for the measurement. °C | °F
Displayed if Temperature capture = Manual is selected.
Barometric Defines the air pressure unit applicable for the measurements. For mbar | hPa | mmHg |
pressure unit method execution, the unit defined in the SevenExcellence settings atm
will be used.
Displayed if Barometric pressure capture = Manual is selected.
Barometric Defines the barometric (atmospheric) pressure. 500.0…1100.0 mbar |
pressure Displayed if Barometric pressure capture = Manual is selected. 500…1100 hPa |
375…825 mmHg |
0.493…1.086 atm
Shared If parallel measurements have been defined, one temperature Active | Inactive
temperature value sensor can be used for all measurements.
Used temperature Select the channel to be used for temperature capture. Measurement type 1 |
Displayed if Shared temperature value is activated. Measurement type 2 |
Measurement type 3
Temperature Defines the temperature for the measurement. -30…130 °C /
Displayed if Temperature capture = Manual is selected. -22...266 °F
Lift position The vertical position to which the head of the sample changer Sample | Conductivity
should be brought. measurement
Sample: The sensor is immersed into the sample.
Conductivity measurement: This position is 20 mm above the

PowerShower Activates rinsing using the PowerShower unit. Active | Inactive
Rinse cycles Number of rinse cycles that should be performed after 1…100
measurement.
Rinse position Absolute position: The system will move to the defined position Absolute position |
on the turntable for the start of a sample. Current position | +1
Current position: The system will start looking for the first beaker
to come.
+1: The system will move to the beaker which is next to the tower
(home position + 1). If no beaker can be detected, the sample
changer moves to the next position (home position + 2) and
See also
2 Automation } Page 129
7.15.2.1 Measuring pH / Redox

Measurement
Sensor name Information on the sensor name selected for the method. -
Unit The unit to be used for the measurement. pH | mV | Rel.mV
The available units depend on the selected measurement type.
Offset Defines the offset [mV]. -2000…2000 mV
Displayed if Measurement type = Redox and Unit = Rel.mV is
selected.
Decimal places Defines the number of digits for the displayed measurement 1|2|3|4
result. The displayed decimal places depend on the selected unit.
Endpoint type Defines how the endpoint of the measurement is to be terminated. Automatic | Manual |
Timed
Endpoint criteria Defines the parameters for the endpoint criteria. Strict | Standard | Fast |
Strict: Value varies less than 0.03 mV for the last 8 seconds or User-defined
0.1 mV for the last 20 seconds.
Standard: Value varies less than 0.1 mV for the last 6 seconds.
Fast: Value varies less than 0.6 mV for the last 4 seconds.
User-defined: The relevant settings are displayed.
Displayed if Endpoint type = Automatic is selected.
dE Defines the measured value interval. As soon as the change in the -
time interval.
Displayed if Endpoint type = Automatic and Endpoint criteria =
User-defined.
dt Defines the time component for dE. dt>tmin and tmax>dt. 1…600
User-defined.

tmin Earliest possible time for the measured value acquisition. 1…100000
User-defined.
tmax Latest possible time for the measured value acquisition. 1…100000
Note
The measurement ends after the time defined, even if the stability
criteria of dE and dt are not fulfilled.
User-defined.
Endpoint time Period of time [s] until the endpoint of the measurement is 5…1000000
reached.
Displayed if Endpoint type = Timed.
Threshold Activates thresholds to be monitored, with optionally finding an Active | Inactive
endpoint of the measurement upon exceeding a threshold.
Lower threshold Defines the value for the threshold. -
Displayed if Threshold is activated.
Upper threshold Defines the value for the threshold. -
Endpoint when Defines that the endpoint is reached when the threshold value is Active | Inactive
threshold exceeded.
exceeded Displayed if Threshold is activated.
Measurement general
Interval Activates the interval measurement. Active | Inactive
The measurement data will be stored after each period specified
in Interval time.
Interval time Defines the time period between successive readings [s]. 1…106
Stir Activates the stirrer. Active | Inactive
Stirring speed Defines the stirring speed. 10%…100%
Displayed if Stir is activated.
7.15.2.2 Measuring ion

Measurement
Unit The unit to be used for the measurement. mV | mg/L | ppm | mol/
The available units depend on the selected measurement type. L | mmol/L | % | pX
Timed

time interval.
User-defined.
User-defined.
User-defined.
Note
User-defined.
reached.
threshold exceeded.
Measurement general
in Interval time.
7.15.2.3 Measuring conductivity

Measurement
Unit Defines the measurement unit for conductivity. µS/cm | mS/cm | S/m |
µS/m | mS/m

Temperature Defines the relationship between conductivity, temperature and Linear | Non-linear | Off |
correction ion concentration. Pure water
Linear: Use for the temperature correction of medium and highly
conductive solutions.
Non-linear: Use for natural water (only for temperature between
0…36 °C). The measured conductivity at the sample temperature
is corrected to the defined reference temperature (20 °C or
25 °C).
Off: The conductivity value at the current temperature is displayed.
Pure water: An optimized type of temperature algorithm is used
for Measurement type = Conductivity or Resistivity.
Displayed if Measurement type = Conductivity, TDS or Resis-
tivity is selected.
α-coefficient Defines the factor for the linear dependency. 0.00…10.00
Displayed if Cond.mode = Conductivity, TDS or Resistivity in
combination with Temperature correction = Linear is selected.
Reference The conductivity reading will be directly corrected to the set 20°C | 25°C
temperature reference temperature.
If Measurement type = Conductivity or Resistivity in combi-
nation with Temperature correction = Pure water is selected a
reference temperature of 25 °C is automatically set.
Displayed if Measurement type = Conductivity, TDS or Resis-
tivity in combination with Temperature correction = Linear is
selected.
TDS factor To calculate the TDS value, the conductivity will be multiplied with 0.00…10.00
this factor.
Displayed if Conductivity = TDS is selected.
Timed
Select User-defined
Strict: Value varies less than 0.4% during the last 8 seconds.
Standard: Value varies less than 0.6% during the last 6 seconds.
Fast: Value varies less than 0.8% during the last 4 seconds.
time interval.
User-defined.
User-defined.
User-defined.
Note
User-defined.

reached.
threshold exceeded.
Measurement general
in Interval time.
7.15.2.4 Measuring dissolved oxygen

Measurement
DO unit Defines the unit for the measurement. mg/L | ppm | %
Timed
Strict: Value varies less than 0.03 mg/L during the last User-defined
20 seconds.
Standard: Value varies less than 0.08 mg/L during the last
20 seconds.
Fast: Value varies less than 0.08 mg/L during the last
10 seconds.
time interval.
User-defined.
User-defined.

User-defined.
Note
User-defined.
reached.
threshold exceeded.
Measurement general
in Interval time.
Salinity correction Defines the sample's salinity. The oxygen concentration depends -
factor on temperature and salinity of the sample.
Displayed if Measurement type = Dissolved Oxygen.
7.15.2.5 Measuring temperature

Measurement
Unit Defines the unit for the measurement. °C | °F
Timed

20 seconds.
20 seconds.
10 seconds.
time interval.
User-defined.
User-defined.
User-defined.
Note
User-defined.
reached.
threshold exceeded.
Measurement general
in Interval time.
Salinity correction Defines the sample's salinity. The oxygen concentration depends -
factor on temperature and salinity of the sample.
Displayed if Measurement type = Dissolved Oxygen.

7.15.3 Calibration
In this method function, the number of buffers and standards to perform a calibration is defined. The method
function performs a measurement for each of the specified buffers/standards. The calibration data of the sensor
is calculated automatically and will be transferred to the sensor settings.
Method function: Calibration
General
is supported.
Configuration
Measurement Defines the measurement type to be used to perform the pH | Ion | Conductivity |
type calibration. Dissolved Oxygen
Sensor name Select a sensor from the list of defined sensors, if the method List of defined sensors
always runs with the same sensor. If not selected, you can
A selected sensor is referenced by its name.
Lift position The vertical position to which the head of the sample changer Sample | Conductivity
should be brought. measurement
Sample: The sensor is immersed into the sample.
Conductivity measurement: This position is 20 mm above the
The following calibration settings are available for configuring a method depending on the sensor type selected.
7.15.3.1 Calibrating pH/ISFET sensor

Configuration
Buffer group Select a buffer group from the list of predefined and user-defined -
buffer groups.
Cal. mode Specifies whether calibration data will be approximated with one Linear | Segmented
straight line segment or left as a series of segments.
Automatic buffer Activates the automatic recognition of buffers. Only available for Active | Inactive
recognition predefined pH buffer groups.
Number of buffers Defines the number of buffers for the calibration. 1|2|3|4|5
Number of Defines the number of calibration standards to be used. 1|2|3|4|5
standards

Buffer 1 - Buffer 5 The number of fields depends on the number of defined buffers. -
Up to 5 buffers are displayed with consecutive numbers. Select a
buffer for each calibration point from the list of predefined and
user defined buffer groups.
Displayed if Automatic buffer recognition is not activated.
measurement sensor.
Endpoint settings
Timed
time interval.
User-defined.
User-defined.
User-defined.
Note
User-defined.
reached.

Analysis Settings
Analysis Activates the limits for accepting a calibration. Active | Inactive
Min. slope Defines the lower limit for the slope [%]. -
Displayed if Analysis is activated.
Max. slope Defines the upper limit for the slope [%]. -
Min. offset Defines the lower limit for the offset [mV]. -
Max. offset Defines the upper limit for the offset [mV]. -
Display actual pH Activates the option to display additional values in the results. Active | Inactive
and temp. values Displayed if Measurement type = pH.
Stir Settings
7.15.3.2 Calibrating ion sensor

Configuration
Calibration Select a calibration standard group from the list of predefined and -
standard group user-defined standard groups.
standards
Standard 1 - The number of fields depends on the number of defined -
Standard 5 standards. Up to 5 standards are displayed with consecutive
numbers. Select a standard for each calibration point from the list.
measurement sensor.
Endpoint settings
Timed

time interval.
User-defined.
User-defined.
User-defined.
Note
User-defined.
reached.
Analysis Settings
Min. offset Defines the lower limit for the offset [mV]. -
Max. offset Defines the upper limit for the offset [mV]. -
Stir Settings

7.15.3.3 Calibrating conductivity sensor
Configuration
Standard Select a standard from the list of the preselected calibration -
standard group.
standards
measurement sensor.
Endpoint settings
Timed
Select User-defined
Strict: Value varies less than 0.4% during the last 8 seconds.
Standard: Value varies less than 0.6% during the last 6 seconds.
Fast: Value varies less than 0.8% during the last 4 seconds.
time interval.
User-defined.
User-defined.
User-defined.
Note
User-defined.

reached.
Analysis Settings
-1
Min. cell constant Defines the lower limit for the cell constant [cm ]. -
-1
Max. cell Defines the upper limit for the cell constant [cm ]. -
constant
Stir Settings
7.15.3.4 Calibrating dissolved oxygen sensor

Configuration
Number of Defines the number of calibration standards to be used. 1|2
standards
Standard 1-2 Select the values for the calibration points. 0 % | 100 %
measurement sensor.
Barometric Select the barometric pressure capture mode. Automatic | Manual
pressure capture
Barometric Defines the air pressure unit applicable for the measurements. For mbar | hPa | mmHg |
pressure unit method execution, the unit defined in the SevenExcellence settings atm
will be used.
Displayed if Barometric pressure capture = Manual is selected.
Barometric Defines the barometric (atmospheric) pressure. 500.0…1100.0 mbar |
pressure Displayed if Barometric pressure capture = Manual is selected. 500…1100 hPa |
375…825 mmHg |
0.493…1.086 atm

Endpoint settings
Timed
20 seconds.
20 seconds.
10 seconds.
time interval.
User-defined.
User-defined.
User-defined.
Note
User-defined.
reached.
Analysis Settings
Stir Settings

7.15.4 Resource validation
This method function is validating the usable life and life span of sensors used in a selected method function.
In addition, calibration limits of sensors can be defined. If during the execution of a method a validated value is
outside the defined limit, a notification will appear.
Method function: Resource validation
General
is supported.
Resource validation
Method function Select a method function from the list whose resources should be -
validated.
Validation time Defines the time window within which possible expirations of -
window [min] resources should be notified.
Sensor validation
Calibration limits Activates the parameters to set the limits. Active | Inactive
Min. slope Defines the lower limit for the slope, in [%]. 10…200
Displayed if Calibration limits is activated.
Max. slope Defines the upper limit for the slope, in [%]. 10…200
Min. offset Defines the lower limit for the offset, in [mV]. -2000…2000
Max. offset Defines the upper limit for the offset, in [mV]. -2000…2000
Max. drift Define values for maximum drift during the 5 minutes drift test, in 0…2000
[mV].
Min. cell constant Defines the lower limit for the cell constant [cm-1]. 0…100
Displayed if Measurement type = Conductivity.
Max. cell Defines the upper limit for the cell constant [cm-1]. 0…100
constant Displayed if Measurement type = Conductivity.

State Specifies the status of the result. Not OK | OK | Uncertain
Creation time The time at which return values are created. The time is visible on
Analysis is Language-independent result of the method function, which can True | False
successful be used as a decision-making criterion in the method function
Decide.

Result unit The unit of the result. mV | pH | mg/L | mmol/L
| mol/L | mg/L | ppm | %
| pX | µS/cm | mS/cm |
S/m | µS/m | mS/m |
ppt(‰) | g/L | psu |
Ω.cm | MΩ.cm | Rel.mV
Temperature unit The unit of the temperature. °C | °F
Barometric The unit of the barometric pressure. mbar | hPa | atm |
pressure unit mmHg
Measurement The measurement duration of the analysis. s
duration
Measurement - The result of the measurement. -
Result
Measurement - The raw result of the measurement. -
Raw result
Measurement - The defined or measured temperature of the sample. -
Temperature
Measurement - The defined or measured barometric pressure. -
Barometric
pressure
Initial - Result The initial result of the measurement before the endpoint. -
Initial - Raw The initial raw result of the measurement before the endpoint. -
result
Initial - The initial defined or measured temperature of the sample before -
Temperature the endpoint.
Initial - The initial defined or measured barometric pressure before the -
Barometric endpoint.
pressure
Initial - Raw The unit of the raw result. mV | Ω | kΩ | MΩ | nA |
result unit mg/L
Interval - Result The result of the measurement. -
Interval - Raw The raw result of the measurement. -
result
Interval - The defined or measured barometric pressure. -
Barometric
pressure
Interval - The measurement duration of the analysis. -
Measurement
time
Interval - The defined or measured temperature of the sample. -
Temperature
Endpoint type The type of endpoint that was used for the measurement. -
Sensor type The type of sensor to be used to perform the measurement. -
Cell constant The cell constant of a conductivity sensor used for measurement. cm-1
Sensor name The name of the sensor used to perform the measurement. -
Standard unit The unit of the used standard. mmol/L | mol/L | mg/L |
ppm | % | pX | µS/cm |
mS/cm | S/m | µS/m |
mS/m

Standard 1 - At The value of the standard at reference temperature. -
reference
temperature
2…5
Standard 1 -
Measured
temperature
2…5
Buffer unit The unit of the used buffer. pH

Buffer 1 - At The value of the buffer at reference temperature. -
reference
temperature
2…5
Buffer 1 - At
measured
temperature
2…5
Buffer 1 -
Measured
temperature
2…5
Slope The slope of the sensor at the calibration. %
1…4
Offset unit The unit of the offset. mV (pH, ion) | nA (pol.
DO) | mg/L (optical DO)
Offset The offset of the sensor at the calibration. mV (pH, ion) | nA (pol.
1… 4 DO) | mg/L (optical DO)
Cell constant
unit
Cell constant The cell constant of the sensor at the calibration. cm-1
1…5

7.16 Method functions - UV/VIS
7.16.1 Configuration
The general settings influence the selection and setting options of other method functions used within the
method. The method function Configuration must precede all other method functions of the UV/VIS method.
In addition to the configuration of the measurements, it offers configuration options for results and ranges on
the instrument's online screen. When writing a new method, select the compatibility in Method compatibility
which will enable the method editor to create a valid method.
Supported on
Criteria UV7 UV5 UV5Bio UV5Nano
Method type FW (Fixed Wavelength) • • • •
Method type Q (Quant) • • • •
Method type K (Kinetics) • •
Method type S (Scanning) • • • •
Method type BFW (Bio fixed wavelength) • •
Method type BS (Bio scanning) • •
Method type BQ (Bio Quant) • •
Methods using the "Micro volume platform" •
Methods using the "CuvetteChanger" • • •
Performance tests using CertiRef modules • • •
Performance tests of type Monitored •
performance test.
The method-types Scanning and Fixed Wavelength are used for measurements on single or multiple samples.
In LabX the two method types are equivalent and offer the same functionality except that the scan methods will
show the spectrum on the instrument screen by default and the fixed wavelength methods will show the
calculated results screen by default. In both the user may toggle the two screens. Both method types allow the
selection of up to four wavelengths of interest, peak/valley detection, smoothing, and of course calculations.
To measure the concentration of a sample, use quant type methods. For methods of this type it is necessary
that the method contains a method function Calibration.
To observe how a sample changes over time after e.g. the addition of an enzyme, use methods of the type
kinetics. For methods of this type it is necessary that the method contains a method function Kinetics loop.
7.16.1.1 Bio Fixed Wavelength

Method function: Configuration > Bio fixed wavelength
General
is supported.
Method compatibility
Method compati- Specifies with which instrument types the method has to be List of available
bility compatible. instruments

Method type
Method type Define the type of the method. Bio fixed wavelength
Measurement Settings
Path length Defines the path length for the measurement in [cm]. 0.0001…5.000
Measurement Define how long the blank, sample and standard will be 1…1000
duration measured.
Display unit
Unit Define which unit shall be shown on the online screen. This unit A | %T
will also be used in the data fields for the absorbance/trans-
mittance values for further evaluation.
Spectrum Evaluation
Smoothing Define if the spectrum shall be smoothed for displaying and None | Low | Medium |
further evaluation. The smoothed spectrum can be used for further High
processing steps, such as an additional curve.
Peak / valley Select if you want to calculate and view a list of peaks and/or None | Peaks | Valleys |
detection valleys. Peaks and valleys
Wavelength Selection
Number of Define the number for the wavelengths used for absorbance (A1 1 | 2 | 3 | 4
wavelengths to A4) or transmittance values (Trans1 to Trans4). The
absorbances and transmittances can be background corrected, if
Background correction is selected.
Wavelength 1 Define the wavelength used for calculating the absorbance or 190…1100
- transmittance values as selected in the unit above.
Wavelength 4
Background Define the background correction type for each selected None | 1-Point | 3-Point
correction 1 wavelength (no background correction, 1-Point background
- correction, 3-Point background correction).
Background 1-Point: A 1-point background correction is the compensation of
correction 4 an offset and is always applied to the values in the unit given by
the symbol (and not the unit chosen by the user). This method is
often used when a baseline shift occurs between measurements
3-Point: A 3-point background correction draws a straight line
between two reference wavelengths in the spectrum, in the unit
given by the symbol (and not the unit chosen by the user). The
value of background corrected signal is obtained as a difference
between the non corrected signal value and the signal value of
the line at the target wavelength.
This method corrects for any background signal that exhibits a
linear relationship to the wavelength.

Default Dyes
Dyes Select the number of dyes. None | 1 | 2
(Only for method type Bio fixed wavelength)
Dye 1 | Dye 2 Select a dye from the list. Any
The list of dyes must be previously defined in Setup > Dyes &
Values > Dyes.
Online screen settings

Displayed results Define the number of results which shall be shown on the screen. 1 | 3 | 5 | 7
Not in method Scanning.
Field 1 Field 1 is a large field on the top, field 2-7 are smaller fields. The Selection of calculations
- calculation you want to see in the online screen can be selected (Rx) | Empty
Field 7 in the list of calculated result. The fields can also be left empty.
x-axis min. Define the min. value for the x-axis to be shown in the online 190…1100
screen and used for reporting (see the parameter Report). x-axis
min. must be smaller than x-axis max..
x-axis max. Define the max. value for the x-axis to be shown in the online 190…1100
Color Settings
Observer The chromatic response of each observer (2° CIE 1931; 10° CIE 2° | 10°
1964) is described by a set of three color matching functions
each. They describe the spectral sensitivity of the three different
light detectors.
Illuminant The illuminants are the spectral power distributions of theoretical A | C | D50 | D55 |
light sources. In simple terms: The emission spectra of different D65 | D75
light sources. These spectra are available from the CIE. Illuminant
A mimics a tungsten-filament lamp, C mimics daylight, the D
series are also approximations of daylight where the number
behind the D is one hundredth of the CCT (correlated color
temperature) or the temperature of the Planckian radiator.
Automation settings
Automation Defines the automated-sampling device used in the method. Available automated-
sampling devices
Suppress loading If activated, prompting for cuvette placement is deactivated (for Active | Inactive
instructions fully automatic workflows).
Note: The arrangement of the cuvettes is analogues to the use
case where the user is prompted.

7.16.1.2 Bio Quant
Method function: Configuration > Bio Quant
General
is supported.
Method type
Method type Define the type of the method. Bio Quant
duration measured.
Display unit
Calibration
Number of Enter the number of calibration curves. 1 | 2
calibration curves
Fit type 1 Select the type of regression: Linear | Quadratic |
- Linear | Cubic | Quadratic: Cubic
Fit type 2 The calculated concentration of the sample is below the lowest or
above the highest standard concentrations.
A validation is executed if the number of standards needed to
calculate the calibration curve is too small. This is determined
when saving a method or starting an analysis.
Wavelength 1 Enter the value for the wavelength for the calibration curve.. 190 ... 1’100
-
Wavelength 2

Reference Define the reference wavelength for a 1-point calibration. 190 ... 1’100
wavelength 1 Depending on the Number of calibration curves you must define
- 1 or 2 reference wavelengths.
Reference
wavelength 2
wavelength 1A - Depending on the Number of calibration curves you must define
Reference 1 or 2 reference wavelengths.
wavelength 2A The reference wavelength 1A/2A must be smaller than the
and reference wavelength 1B/2B.
Reference
wavelength 1B -
Reference
wavelength 2B
Default Dyes
Values > Dyes.


Color Settings
light detectors.
Automation settings
sampling devices
7.16.1.3 Bio Scanning

Method function: Configuration > Bio scanning
General
is supported.

Method type
Method type Define the type of the method. Bio scanning
duration measured.
Display unit
Spectrum Evaluation
Wavelength 4

Default Dyes
Values > Dyes.

Color Settings
light detectors.
Automation settings
sampling devices

7.16.1.4 Fixed Wavelength
Method function: Configuration > Fixed Wavelength
General
is supported.
Method type
Method type Define the type of the method. Fixed Wavelength
duration measured.
Display unit
Spectrum Evaluation
Algorithm Defines which algorithm is to be used for peak finding. Iterative algorithm |
Iterative algorithm: The advanced peak-finding algorithm is used Derivative algorithm
with additional adjustable parameters.
Derivative algorithm: The Savitzki-Golay algorithm to calculate
derivations between neighbored spectrum points is used.
These following parameters are displayed according to the selection in Algorithm.
Iterative algorithm Derivative algorithm
Detection sensitivity • •
Detection threshold •

Peak / valley prominence •
Peak / valley shape •
Peak / valley min. height •
Peak / valley min. width •
Peak / valley max. width •
Detection min. wavelength • •
Detection max. wavelength • •
Sorting • •

Detection sensi- You can set a peak and valley detection scheme (High or Low) or Low | High | User
tivity choose to enter user defined parameters for Peak / valley min. defined
height, Peak / valley min. width and Peak / valley max. width.
Only if Peak / valley detection is active.
Detection A percentage value that specifies a minimum peak height between 0.0…100.0
threshold the minimum and maximum values within the selected
wavelength range.
This option is active only if the parameter Detection sensitivity is
set to User defined.
Peak / valley A value used to determine how prominent a peak (or valley) must 1.0…10.0
prominence be relative to its neighboring peaks or valleys.
Peak / valley Define the shape of your spectrum based on the Savitzky Golay Sharp | Intermediate |
shape algorithm here. Wide
Peak / valley min. Define the minimal peak height and valley depth (A or %T). Take 0…1000
height note that the actual measured value must be equal to or greater
than the value defined here.
Peak / valley min. Define the minimal peak and valley width (nm). Take note that 1…910
width the actual measured value must be equal to or greater than the
value defined here.
Peak / valley Define the maximal peak and valley width (nm). Take note that 1…910
max. width the actual measured value must be equal to or less than the value
defined here.
Detection min. Define the lower limit of the wavelength range for peaks and 190…1100
wavelength valleys detection.
Detection max. Define the upper limit of the wavelength range for peaks and 190…1100
Sorting Define if the peaks and values shall be sorted by wavelength or Wavelength | A | %T
by peak height or valley depth.

Wavelength 4
Color Settings
light detectors.

Automation settings
sampling devices
7.16.1.5 Kinetics
Method function: Configuration > Kinetics
General
is supported.
Method type
Method type Define the type of the method. Kinetics
duration measured.
Display unit

Wavelength 4
Automation settings
sampling devices

7.16.1.6 Quant
Method function: Configuration > Quant
General
is supported.
Method type
Method type Define the type of the method. Quant
duration measured.
Display unit
Calibration
Number of Enter the number of calibration curves. 1 | 2
calibration curves
Wavelength 1 Enter the value for the wavelength for the calibration curve.. 190 ... 1’100
-
Wavelength 2

wavelength 1A - Depending on the Number of calibration curves you must define
Reference 1 or 2 reference wavelengths.
wavelength 2A The reference wavelength 1A/2A must be smaller than the
and reference wavelength 1B/2B.
Reference
wavelength 1B -
Reference
wavelength 2B
Color Settings
light detectors.

Automation settings
sampling devices
Example
The quantification or concentration determination of a substance by UV/VIS spectroscopy is based on the
Lambert-Beer Law, which states that the absorbance of a solution is directly proportional to the concentration of
the absorbing substance in the solution and the path length of the cuvette. Thus, for a fixed path length, UV/VIS
spectroscopy can be used to determine the concentration of the absorbing substance in a solution.
However, it is necessary to know how much the absorbance changes with concentration. This change can be
taken from references, such as tables of extinction coefficients, or determined from a calibration curve. The
method type Quant is meant for a quantification based on a calibration curve.
A quantification based on a calibration curve can be divided into the following steps.
• Selection of a suitable wavelength
• Determination of the calibration curve
• Measurement of the sample
• Determination of the sample concentration
Selection of a suitable wavelength

The wavelength is normally chosen at a peak maximum, i.e. at the peak of the absorption band. At a peak the
change in absorbance for a given concentration change is maximal, leading to greater sensitivity and accuracy
in the measurements.
Determination of the calibration curve
For the calibration curve, the absorbance of known standards is measured at the chosen wavelength and
plotted against the concentration. The absorbance is proportional to the concentration and a first order
regression curve can be fitted to the data points.
The example below shows the calibration curve for caffeine dissolved in deionized water.
Standard 5
• Standard 1 (100 [mg/L] caffeine)

Absorbance (A)
3

Standard 4
2,5

Standard 3

2
Standard 2

Standard 1
1,5
1
0,5
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
Caffein content (mg/L)

Measurement of the sample and determination of the sample concentration
As shown in the example below, the sample concentration for the measured absorbance can be read from the
curve.
Absorbance (A)
Measured absorbance of the sample: 1.652 [A]
3
Concentration of the sample: 542 [mg/L]
2,5
2
A = 1,652
1,5
542 mg/L
1
0,5
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
Caffein content (mg/L)
7.16.1.7 Scanning
Method function: Configuration > Scanning
General
is supported.
Method type
Method type Define the type of the method. Scanning
duration measured.
Display unit

Spectrum Evaluation
Algorithm Defines which algorithm is to be used for peak finding. Iterative algorithm |
Iterative algorithm: The advanced peak-finding algorithm is used Derivative algorithm
with additional adjustable parameters.
Derivative algorithm: The Savitzki-Golay algorithm to calculate
derivations between neighbored spectrum points is used.
These following parameters are displayed according to the selection in Algorithm.
Detection sensitivity • •
Detection threshold •
Peak / valley prominence •
Peak / valley shape •
Peak / valley min. height •
Peak / valley min. width •
Peak / valley max. width •
Detection min. wavelength • •
Detection max. wavelength • •
Sorting • •

Detection sensi- You can set a peak and valley detection scheme (High or Low) or Low | High | User
tivity choose to enter user defined parameters for Peak / valley min. defined
height, Peak / valley min. width and Peak / valley max. width.
Only if Peak / valley detection is active.
Detection A percentage value that specifies a minimum peak height between 0.0…100.0
threshold the minimum and maximum values within the selected
wavelength range.
Peak / valley A value used to determine how prominent a peak (or valley) must 1.0…10.0
prominence be relative to its neighboring peaks or valleys.
Peak / valley Define the shape of your spectrum based on the Savitzky Golay Sharp | Intermediate |
shape algorithm here. Wide
Peak / valley min. Define the minimal peak height and valley depth (A or %T). Take 0…1000
height note that the actual measured value must be equal to or greater
than the value defined here.

Peak / valley min. Define the minimal peak and valley width (nm). Take note that 1…910
width the actual measured value must be equal to or greater than the
value defined here.
Peak / valley Define the maximal peak and valley width (nm). Take note that 1…910
max. width the actual measured value must be equal to or less than the value
defined here.
Detection min. Define the lower limit of the wavelength range for peaks and 190…1100
Detection max. Define the upper limit of the wavelength range for peaks and 190…1100
Sorting Define if the peaks and values shall be sorted by wavelength or Wavelength | A | %T
by peak height or valley depth.
Wavelength 4

Color Settings
light detectors.
Automation settings
sampling devices
7.16.2 Measure blank

This method function is used to measure the blank spectrum, i.e. the intensity of light per wavelength which will
be used to compute the absorbance or transmittance of the measured samples and standards. Once a blank
has been measured it is used until a new blank is measured or the task ends. Blanks are always task specific,
i.e. every method needs to include at least one blank measurement, paused tasks do not share their blank with
other tasks.
In LabX, the placement of the method function Measure (Blank) decides when the method function is executed,
i.e. if the method function is placed inside a sample cycle, a blank is measured for every sample. This behavior
deviates from the one in standalone mode. You may choose to place method function Measure (Blank) as
often as convenient and necessary for the method.
Method function: Measure (Blank)
General
is supported.

Blank Data
Blank ID Enter an arbitrary default ID for the blank. The entered ID can be Arbitrary
modified in the start analysis screen.
User Prompt
Prompt for blank Defines whether or not the user is prompted to place a blank. If Active | Inactive
you want to customize this, place a method function Message
just before this method function and deactivate this option.
Only displayed, if Automation is set to None.
Blank Measurement Settings

Preconditions for the parameter Use the same cuvette for each blank measurement:
• Automation is selected to be the CuvetteChanger.
• Method function is within a sample scope.
• Not in combination with method function Parallel Kinetics.

Use the same Defines whether the same blank cuvette should be used instead of Active | Inactive
cuvette for each individual ones for each of the sample or standard. Cuvettes will
blank be indicated with circular arrows.
measurement
7.16.3 Measure sample

This method function is used to measure the intensity spectrum of the respective sample and returns the
absorbance or transmittance spectrum, depending on the method type and user method configuration.
The parameters such as extinction coefficients or volume can be used in calculations.
Method function: Measure (Sample)
General
is supported.
Sample data
Oligo sequence Activate this function to enter a base sequence. -
calculator
Nucleic acid Displays the calculated nucleic acid factor. This factor can be -
factor used in calculations (Symbol fNA).
Molar mass Displays the default value defined for the molar mass for the -
sample. This value can be modified at the start of the analysis.
The molar mass can be used in calculations M)

Molar mass entry Enter a default unit for the molar mass of a sample. The entered None | g/mol | Da | kDa
unit can be modified at the start of an analysis.
Molar extinction Define a value for the molar extinction coefficient. This value can (mol/L)-1 cm-1
coefficient be modified at start of the analysis.
The molar extinction coefficient can be used in calculations
(Symbol ExtCoeff).
Extinction Choose if you want to use an extinction coefficient and if a molar None | Molar | Percent
coefficient entry (Molar) or a percent extinction coefficient (Percent) shall be
used.
Volume Enter a volume for the analysis. 0…1000
This volume can be used in calculations (symbol V).
Volume entry Define if you want to use the sample volume and if so, choose None | L | mL | µL
the unit for it.
Dilution factor Enter a dilution factor. This value can be modified at the start of 0…1000000
an analysis. The dilution factor can be used in a calculation
(DilF).
Correction factor Enter the correction factor. This value can be modified at the start 0…10000000000
of an analysis. The correction factor can be used in a calculation
(f).
User Prompt
Prompt for Defines whether or not the user is prompted to place a sample. If Active | Inactive
sample you want to customize this, place a method function Message
For automated workflows, turn of the prompt to avoid user inter-
actions.
7.16.3.1 Return values - Spectrum

Return Values and their usage in calculations
The return values of method function Measure (Sample) in all categories except General are normal return
values. Those in the category General are slightly different because they are formulae. That means that the
values inside the brackets need to be replaced by wavelengths and the expression will then return a value, e.g.
A(210) will return the absorbance at 210 nm.
For all formulae, it is possible to use one or two extra parameters which will lead to background subtractions
with one or two reference wavelengths (the examples are done for A but work for all others analogously):
• A(wavelength1, wavelength2) = absorbance at wavelength 1 – absorbance at wavelength 2.
– The absorbance is then background corrected and will be marked with data marking 43.
• A(wavelength1, wavelength2, wavelength3) = absorbance at wavelength 1 background corrected with
the interpolation between A(wavelength2) and A(wavelength3).
– The absorbance is then background corrected and will be marked with data marking 43.
Note: Not all available symbols are shown in the return values of the method editor. However symbols with
optional parameters can be typed directly into the formula field.
Symbols and their meaning
A(l; lref1(optional); lref2(optional)) Absorbance at l; lref1 or (lref1 and lref2) are optional for one point/three
point background corrections respectively.
AMax(l1; l2; lref1(optional); Maximum absorbance value between l1 and l2.
lref2(optional))

AMin(l1; l2; lref1(optional); Minimum absorbance value between l1 and l2.
lref2(optional))
Area(l1; l2; lref1(optional); Area under the curve in the selected display unit between l1 and l2.
lref2(optional))
LambdaAMax(l1; l2; lref1(optional); Wavelength with the largest absorbance value in the range between l1
lref2(optional)) and l2.
LambdaAMin(l1; l2; lref1(optional); Wavelength with the smallest absorbance value in the range between l1
LambdaSMax(l1; l2; lref1(optional); Wavelength with the largest absorbance/transmittance (depending on
lref2(optional)) the selected display unit) value in the range between l1 and l2.
LambdaSMin(l1; l2; lref1(optional); Wavelength with the smallest absorbance/transmittance (depending on
lref2(optional)) the selected display unit) value in the range between l1 and l2.
LambdaTransMax(l1; l2; lref1(optional); Wavelength with the largest transmittance value in the range between l1
LambdaTransMin(l1; l2; lref1(optional); Wavelength with the smallest transmittance value in the range between
lref2(optional)) l1 and l2.
SMax(l1; l2; lref1(optional); Maximum absorbance/transmittance (depending on the selected
lref2(optional)) display unit) value between l1 and l2.
SMin(l1; l2; lref1(optional); Minimum absorbance/transmittance (depending on the selected
lref2(optional)) display unit) value between l1 and l2.
Trans(l; lref1(optional); lref2(optional)) Transmittance at l; lref1 or (lref1 and lref2) are optional for one point/three
TransMax(l1; l2; lref1(optional); Maximum transmittance value between l1 and l2.
lref2(optional))
TransMin(l1; l2; lref1(optional); Minimum transmittance value between l1 and l2.
lref2(optional))
A(l; lref1(optional); lref2(optional)) Absorbance at l; lref1 or (lref1 and lref2) are optional for one point/three
AMax(l1; l2; lref1(optional); Maximum absorbance value between l1 and l2.
lref2(optional))
Explanatory graphs
Absorbance
Wavelength [nm]

Absorbance
Wavelength [nm]
Absorbance
Wavelength [nm]

Absorbance
Wavelength [nm]
3-point corrected spectrum
7.16.3.2 Return values - Color

Return Values and their usage in calculations
The return values of method function Measure (Sample) in all categories except General are normal return
values. Those in the category General are slightly different because they are formulae. That means that the
values inside the brackets need to be replaced by wavelengths and the expression will then return a value, e.g.
A(210) will return the absorbance at 210 nm.
The formula symbols for color are divided in two sections, the three-dimensional color maps and the one-
dimensional color numbers.
Color numbers
The color numbers are calculated using the 2° observer and the C illuminant where applicable.
Symbol Description
COL[Saybolt] Saybolt color according to ASTM D156 & D6045
COL[Gardner] Gardner color according to ASTM D6166 & DIN ISO 4630
COL[PT_Co_Hazen] Color number for Pt/Co, Hazen, and APHA (all three are equivalent) according to
ASTM D1209 & DIN ISO 6271
COL[Hess_Ives] Hess-Ives color according to DGK (Deutsche Gesellschaft für wissenschaftliche
und angewandte Kosmetik) F050.2
COL[Yellowness_Index] Yellowness index according to ASTM E313 (only 2°, C)
COL[EBC] Color number for beer and caramels according to the European brewing
convention (EBC).
COL[ASBC] Color number for beer according to the American society of brewing chemists
(ASBC)
Color maps
The coefficients of the three-dimensional color maps depend on the selected observer and illuminant combi-
nation defined in the Configuration method function.
Syntax of the symbol Col[Name(sub-scale)]
• Name: name of the color map
• sub-scale: selected coefficient

Symbol Description
COL[Tristimulus(X)] Tristimulus X
COL[Tristimulus(Y)] Tristimulus Y
COL[Tristimulus(Z)] Tristimulus Z
COL[Chromaticity(x)] Chromaticity x
COL[Chromaticity(y)] Chromaticity y
COL[Chromaticity(z)] Chromaticity z
COL[CIELAB(L)] CIE Lab L
COL[CIELAB(a)] CIE Lab a
COL[CIELAB(b)] CIE Lab b
COL[CIELUV(L)] CIE Luv L (identical to the CIE Lab L)
COL[CIELUV(a)] CIE Luv u
COL[CIELUV(b)] CIE Luv v
COL[Hunter(L)] Color according to Hunter L
COL[Hunter(a)] Color according to Hunter a
COL[Hunter(b)] Color according to Hunter b
7.16.4 Kinetics loop

The kinetics loop is used to measure the absorbance of a sample as a function of time. In LabX it is possible to
record the complete spectrum for each point in time and display the measured data as a heat map. Be aware
that this creates very large amounts of data and should not be used for routine operation. The heat map can be
found in the result after the measurement.
To measure a blank for each point in time, a method function Measure blank has to be placed inside the
Kinetics loop. This is only possible if the method is configured to run with a cuvette changer. Unlike the
instrument, it is not possible to measure kinetics curves of multiple samples at the same time.
Method function: Kinetics loop
General
is supported.
3D Data
Keep full Defines whether full spectra should be saved for each point for a Active | Inactive
spectrum for 3D spectrum. The heat map can be found in the result after the
every point measurement.
The kinetics loop is used to measure the absorbance of a sample
as a function of time. In LabX it is possible to record the complete
spectrum for each point in time and display the measured data as
a heat map.
This only works for kinetics loops with one stage. Be aware that
this creates very large amounts of data and should not be used
for routine operation.

Timing
Kinetics stages Define the number of stages for a kinetic measurement with 1 | 2
different duration and intervals.
Kinetics time unit Define the unit for the interval, duration and evaluation times. s | min
Kinetics duration Define the time span of a stage in which measurement points are 1…500
1 taken with the defined interval. The total number of data points for
Kinetics duration a kinetic reaction must be smaller or equal to 2000.
2
Kinetics interval 1 Define the time interval between the measurement points of a 1…10000
Kinetics Interval 2 kinetics measurement. The interval must be smaller than or equal
to the duration. It can happen that the actual time interval exceeds
the time interval defined by the user, e.g. the changing of cuvettes
with the FillPalMini and the measurement time together take
longer than the interval defined. In this case the next
measurement point is taken as soon as possible.
Kinetics evaluation
Calculate rate Define if no evaluation, an evaluation based on zero order or an Active | Inactive
constant evaluation based on first order should be applied.
A zero order kinetics is mostly observed for heterogeneous
reactions, e.g. reactions on surfaces, enzyme reactions, photo-
chemical reactions.
First order kinetics are often related to the decay of intermediate
products.
Reaction order Select which type of evaluation to perform. Zero order | First order
Only if Calculate rate constant = Active.
Calculate initial Define if the initial rate shall be calculated or not. Active | Inactive
rate
Total Information on the sum of the duration. -
measurement
duration
Evaluation start Define the start time for the evaluation window. The Evaluation Min: 0
time start time must be smaller than the Evaluation end time. Max: Adapted to the
The total measuring time can be set in the method function sum of Duration 1 and
Configuration and is the sum of Kinetics duration 1 and 2
Kinetics duration 2.
Evaluation end Define the end time for the evaluation window. The Evaluation Min: 1
time start time must be smaller than, or equal to the max. Evaluation Max: Adapted to the
end time. sum of Duration 1 and
The total measuring time can be set in the method function 2
Configuration and is the sum of Kinetics duration 1 and
Kinetics duration 2.
7.16.5 Parallel kinetics

The method function Parallel Kinetics can be used to measure the kinetics curve of up to 8 samples in parallel
if you are using a CuvetteChanger (please note that this method function is only valid if the Automation is
selected to be the CuvetteChanger). This can save a significant amount of time for slow kinetics reactions. For
the parallel kinetics you have to choose the number of parallel samples in the method function Parallel

Kinetics in the method. The preview helps to understand how the sequence of measurements is structured.
Note that the preview will only show the first two cycles to illustrate the principle.
All parallel samples in one parallel kinetics measurement are associated with the sample ID in LabX. However,
it is possible to define names for the parallel samples for each position. To reference one of the parallel
samples' return values, use the indexing.
Example: To get the Rate constant of Parallel sample 3 at Wavelength 1 use the following equation:
MeasureSample1[3].Wavelength1RateConstant
Where:
• The name of the method function
• The number of the parallel sample
• Referenced property of the sample
For more information please refer to the method template for Parallel Kinetics.
Parameters
Methods Parameters Return values

Search text...
Parallel Kinetics
General
Title
Name
Description
Parallel Samples
Number of parallel samples
Parallel sample name 1 Parallel sample 1
Expected Parallel Sample Sequence
Time Offset Parallel sample name

Parallel sample 1
Parallel sample 2
Parallel sample 3
Preview Parallel sample 1
Parallel sample 2
Parallel sample 3
Blank settings
There are different ways to measure the parallel kinetics in relation to the blank.
The blank can either be one blank measured before the kinetics loop. This same blank measurement will then
be used for all the measurements of the samples during the kinetics. For this setup, place the method function
Measure (Blank) anywhere before the method function Parallel Kinetics.
The second option is to measure a blank for each position on the CuvetteChanger before the kinetics reaction is
started. These blanks will then be used for the subsequent sample measurements. This is especially useful if

you are looking at the change of the different samples with respect to their spectrum before the reaction was
started. For this setting, use the following placement and set Measure blank for each parallel sample to true.
Parallel Kinetics
Measure (Blank)
Kinetics loop
Measure (Sample)
With the sample placement of the method function Measure (Blank) but with Measure blank for each parallel
sample set to false, the system will expect a blank to be placed on position 1 of the CuvetteChanger. The
system will then measure the blank before the kinetics cycles start. This one blank will then be used for all
samples during the entire kinetics reaction. Note that the user will not be prompted between that blank and the
beginning of the kinetics reaction.
If you want to measure a blank for each point during the kinetics reaction, place the method function Measure
(Blank) inside the method function Kinetics loop.
Parallel Kinetics
Kinetics loop
Measure (Blank)
Measure (Sample)
With the parameter Measure blank for each parallel sample you determine which of the two following
scenarios is executed.
Measure blank for each parallel sample = true
The system will expect one blank (on position 1) that is used for the up to 7 samples
Kinetics Tasks
Sample ID
Load CuvetteChanger
Sample Sample Sample

Blank
Sample Sample Sample Sample
OK List

Measure blank for each parallel sample = false
The system will expect one blank for each sample, i.e. up to 4 samples with their own blank each.
Kinetics Tasks
Sample ID
Load CuvetteChanger
Blank Blank Blank Blank
Sample Sample Sample Sample
OK List
Method function: Parallel Kinetics

General
is supported.
Parallel Samples
Number of Number of samples to measure in parallel (the parallel samples 1…8
parallel samples will all be listed under the same sample ID). So to measure
4 samples in parallel, set this value to 4 and then run the method
with one sample.
Parallel sample Fields to give each of the parallel samples names, so as to be -
name 1…8 able to distinguish them in the report and on the graph.
Expected Parallel Sample Sequence
Time Offset Time after the first measurement of the kinetics loop, i.e. the first -
measurement is always done at 0 seconds for every parallel
sample.
Parallel sample This column shows the name of the parallel sample chosen in -
name parallel sample name 1…8.
7.16.6 Calibration
This method function is used to calibrate quant methods, i.e. to create the calibration curve from which the
concentration of a sample is deduced. In LabX it is possible to edit a calibration after finishing the calibration
loop and before measuring samples. For better precision, LabX offers to work with replicates, for more infor-
mation see the description of method function Measure (Standard).
In LabX, you can make use of replicates for quant measurements. Using replicates has the following conse-
quences:
• The total number of calibration points is (Number of standards) * (Number of replicates)
• After the measurements, the system will use the mean absorbance for each concentration to compute the
calibration curve.
• You can exclude singe replicates just like normal standards.

• The system will display a standard deviation for each replicate group, i.e. concentration which can help
identify outliers.
Method function: Calibration
General
is supported.
Configuration
Enforce If a calibration has expired, the user will be forced to measure a Active | Inactive
calibration new calibration or to manually end the task.
Only displayed, if Monitoring is deactivated.
Activate Defines whether the calibration will be used for a limited time. Active | Inactive
monitoring Only displayed, if Enforce calibration is deactivated.
Interval Defines the interval after how many days calibration has to be 1…10000
performed again.
Only displayed, if Enforce calibration is activated.
Reminder Determines whether a reminder should be issued before the Active | Inactive
calibration is about to expire.
Only displayed, if Activate monitoring is activated.
Days before Determines the number of days before expiration of the 1…100
expiration calibration, at which the reminder should be issued.
Action when Defines the behavior of the method in case the calibration has Enforce calibration |
expired expired. Warn
Prompt for Determines whether the calibration window is displayed on the Active | Inactive
calibration confir- instrument after calibration.
mation Active: After calibration, the calibration window with the
"Continue" button is shown on the instrument screen.
Inactive: The calibraton window is not displayed in order not to
interrupt the workflow.

Positioning of method function Measure (Blank)
If one blank is to be used for all standards, the
method function Measure (Blank) should be placed
between method function Calibration and the method Configuration
function Calibration loop. Method functions placed

before the Calibration loop will be executed even if Calibration
the user chooses to use an existing calibration.

Measure (Blank)
Calibration loop
Measure (Standard)
If a blank needs to be measured for every standard,

the method function Measure (Blank) has to be
Configuration
placed inside the Calibration loop. The content of the
loop is only executed if the user measures a new
calibration, i.e. if using an existing calibration, at Calibration
least one blank must be measured before measuring

samples. Calibration loop
Measure (Blank)
Measure (Standard)
Placing a blank before method function Calibration

leads to a valid method as well but then the blank
Configuration
needs to be measured before the user is prompted
with the standards list or the existing calibration. We
encourage the use of the first two examples. Measure (Blank)
Calibration
Calibration loop
Measure (Standard)
7.16.7 Clean
This method function is used in combination with automation units InMotion, FillPalMini and SPR200. The
method function will determine the correct solvent to prompt for by itself, the prompt can be suppressed by
deactivating the corresponding function.

Method function: Clean
General
is supported.
Configuration
Drain Defines whether the contents of the cuvette should be drained. Active | Inactive
Drain speed Defines the drain speed of the pump according to the defined Low | Medium | High
values in the settings.
Drain direction Defines the pumping direction. Waste | Beaker
Waste: the liquid is pumped through the flow cell and into the
waste container.
Beaker: the liquid is pumped back into the beaker.
Drain duration Defines the pumping time [s] for draining. 1…10000
Rinse Defines whether the cuvette should be rinsed. Active | Inactive
Solvent Specifies the solvent to be used for rinsing. -
Rinse duration Defines the pumping time [s] for rinsing. 1…10000
User Prompt
Prompt for Defines whether or not the user is prompted to provide the Active | Inactive
solvent solvent. If you want to customize this, place a method function
Message just before this method function and deactivate this
option.
See also
7.16.8 Display results

This method function is used to interrupt the method, allowing the user to review results before continuing to the
next sample. This function is not supported if a method is using a CuvetteChanger and in methods of type
Kinetics to prevent any influence on the measurement time.
Depending on the method type and available data, you will have different choices on the instrument online
screen. For all method types one option will be to continue. Once pressed the method flow is released again. It
has no parameters.
Method function: Display results
General
is supported.

7.16.9 Fill
This method function is used to pump samples into the cuvette and is used in combination with automation
units InMotion, FillPalMini and SPR200. The method function will determine the correct substance to prompt for
by itself, the prompt can be suppressed by deactivating the corresponding function.
Method function: Fill
General
is supported.
Configuration
Speed Defines the speed for pumping air and filling. Low | Medium | |High
Pump air Select to pump air before filling the cuvette. -
Pump air duration Define for how many seconds to pump air. 1…10'000 s
Filling duration Define the duration for filling the cuvette. 0…10'000 s
Wait after filling Select if you want the sample to settle in the cuvette before -
measuring.
Wait duration Define how long the sample should settle. 1…10'000 s
Fill configuration
Prompt for Defines whether or not the user is prompted to place a sample. If Active | Inactive
sample you want to customize this, place a method function Message
For automated workflows, turn of the prompt to avoid user inter-
actions.
7.16.10 Measure standard

Standards are measured within method function Calibration to determine the correlation between the
absorbance at a given wavelength and the concentration of a given substance in a sample. This correlation
allows you to determine the concentration of a given sample.
Method function: Measure (Standard)
General
is supported.

Standard Data
Number of Defines the number of standards to be used. 1…100
standards
Replicates Replicate standards will be treated as a statistical ensemble for Active | Inactive
the calibration. A mean value is calculated that will be used for
curve fitting
Number of The number of replicates states the number of "equal" standards 2…100
replicates which will be in the standards list, i.e. equal concentrations. The
number of replicates has two effects, it influences how often the
calibration loop is executed and it multiplies the number of
standards in the list.
Only displayed, if Replicates is activated.
Unit Defines the unit to be used for the standards and the concen- mg/L | g/L | mol/L |
tration determination. ppm | % | µg/µL | µg/
mL | µg/L | User defined
unit
No. The consecutive numbering for the standards, depending on the 1…10000
settings in Number of standards and Replicates.
Standard ID Define an arbitrary ID for the standard. Any
Concentration Enter the concentration of the standard. The unit can be defined in 0…100000
the method function Standards.
Standard You can add an arbitrary comment for this standard. Any
comment
User Prompt
Prompt for Defines whether or not the user is prompted to place a standard. If Active | Inactive
solvent you want to customize this, place a method function Message
7.16.11 Performance test

Spectrophotometer performance verification is executed according to accepted guidelines. Certiref modules can
be used for performance tests according to US or EU Pharmacopeia. The recommended performance tests
include: the check of photometric accuracy and repeatability, wavelength accuracy and repeatability, instrument
resolution as well as stray light measurement.
Note: Monitoring of calibration curves and performance test sequences is only possible on the UV7.
Method function: Performance test
General
is supported.

Performance test type
Performance test Specifies which selections are used to perform the tests. User defined | Monitored
type User defined: The individual test sequences are selected within performance test
this method function.
Monitored performance test (UV7 only): The instrument specific
selections from Performance test sequence will be used. Test
results from executed tests can be found in Performance Tests.
See [Performance test sequence - UV/VIS } Page 598] and [Performance tests - UV/VIS } Page 599]
CertiRef Tests
Resolution - Tests the resolution of the instrument by measuring the ratio of a Active | Inactive
Toluene peak and a valley in the Toluene in Hexane Spectrum.
Wavelength Measures the spectrum of a solution of holmium oxide. To verify Active | Inactive
accuracy - Ho the wavelength accuracy the measured values are compared to
literature values.
Wavelength Measures and compares multiple measurements of the spectrum Active | Inactive
repeatability - Ho containing a series of very sharp peaks in a solution of holmium
oxide.
Photometric Measures the absorbance of a reference substance for UV-light Active | Inactive
accuracy UV and compares the result with literature values.
Photometric Determines and compares several spectra of a reference Active | Inactive
repeatability UV substance for UV-light and checks the results against literature
values.
Stray light - KCl Measures a substance with sharp cut-off wavelength. Determines Active | Inactive
whether light is detected at a wavelength, where the sample is
supposed to be completely blocking it.
LinSet Tests
Photometric Measures the absorbance of a reference substance for visible light Active | Inactive
accuracy VIS and compares the result with literature values.
repeatability VIS substance for visible light and checks the results against literature
values.
Photometric Measures the absorbance of three different concentrations of a Active | Inactive
linearity UV reference substance for UV light and compares the results with
literature values.
Photometric Measures the absorbance of three reference materials for visible Active | Inactive
linearity VIS light and compares the results with literature values.

Tests without CertiRef
Wavelength Measures and compares the spectrum by measuring the emission Active | Inactive
accuracy - Xe from the light source.
repeatability - Xe by measuring the emission from the light source.
Baseline flatness Enables measurement of the effectiveness of the baseline Active | Inactive
correction.
Photometric noise Enables the signal to noise ratio measurement of the instrument. Active | Inactive
The accuracy of the measurement and the detection limit of the
instrument are determined.
Photometric drift Enables measurement of the stability of the measurement over a Active | Inactive
period of time.
Status Message
Display The results of the test are automatically displayed after testing. Active | Inactive
performance test
results
See also
2 Performance test sequence - UV/VIS } Page 598
2 Performance tests - UV/VIS } Page 599
7.16.12 PowerShower
The basic concept of the PowerShower method function is, that the PowerShower pump moves rinsing liquid
through the PowerShower head into the sample vessel. To prevent overfilling of the sample vessel, the
sampling pump continuously moves liquid from the sample vessel to the waste bottle. The sampling pump
runs with the maximum flow rate.
Method function: PowerShower
5
3
2 4 6
1 7
1 Container with rinsing liquid 5 Flow cell

2 PowerShower pump 6 Sampling pump
3 PowerShower 7 Waste container
4 Sample vessel
General
is supported.

PowerShower
Beaker position Defines the position on the rack where the rinse procedure is Current position | Next
executed. beaker | Absolute
Current position: the beaker at the current position is used. position | Home
Next beaker: the next beaker is used.
Absolute position: the beaker in the position defined in Position
is used.
Home: the beaker in position 1 is used.
Position Defines the absolute position of the rinse beaker on the sample 1…303
rack.
Drain beaker Defines whether the sample vessel is emptied or not. Active | Inactive
PowerShower Defines whether the PowerShower pump is used to rinse the Active | Inactive
rinse system.
Rinse cycles Defines the number of rinse cycles that are performed. 1…100
Fill cell and tubes Defines whether the sampling pump moves the volume defined in Active | Inactive
Volume from the sample vessel through the flow cell to the waste
container.
Volume Defines the volume moved by the pump. 0…1000 mL
7.16.13 Stir
Use this method function to define a fixed pre-stirring duration and to display a message.
General
is supported.
Speed Defines the speed of the stirrer in percent of the maximum speed. 0…100 %
0 %: The stirrer is off.
100 %: The stirrer moves at maximum speed.

Stir
Stir duration Duration of stirring. 0…10000 s

8 Data and Results Workspace
If you click Data in the navigation pane, a list view of the results and reports is displayed. Filters can be applied
to the respective Search folders. Some of these folders are predefined, e.g. “Last 3 days”. In addition, you can
define your own folders, which will then be displayed next to the series of predefined folders, or you can modify
the predefined folders. Double-clicking on a result or result set opens the Results Editor.
Data storage
width.
Navigation: Data
Objects Description
Results If a Sample Scope method function was used in a method, an entry is displayed
for each sample processed.
Result sets You will find one entry for each task processed. Click on Result sets to open the
display of the individual results.
Reports If a Reports method function was used in a method, the corresponding entries will
be displayed for each task processed.
Reports can also be created at a later time. Reports that contain the system config-
uration or Audit Trail, for example, are also displayed here.
See also
8.1 Manage results

In the Results Editor, the data generated during the execution of a task on an instrument is displayed.
Navigation: Data > Results - or - Data > Result set
The attribute in the column Origin is a task specific. It presents the source from which a task was created. As
origin the following sources could come into consideration: Method, Product, Sample Series and Series
sequence.
In Determination type, LabX will allocate a type per result for every result associated with a sample and
depending on the scope(s) configuration in the method.
1 Select the result that you wish to open in the list view.
2 Select Open Result or Open Result Set in the toolbar. The results editor opens.
ð Depending on the instrument, different tabs are available for displaying result data and charts.
ð To print the content of the selected tab, click on Print in the toolbar.
Note
• The button Undo Saved Changes on the toolbar reverses any saved changes to their original values.
• Editing is only possible as long as result sets are not signed. You can revoke the signing if required.
• Select more then one result to obtain statistics or overlaid curves over several samples or series. Results will
open in read-only mode. To do this, hold the Ctrl key and click on the results you wish to display.
• For the titrator model T90/T9: Logical conditions (Condition) that determines whether or not a method
function is executed are ignored when recalculating any results.
568 Data and Results Workspace LabX

Results tabs
Available tabs Balance Quantos Titration Density Refrac- Thermal Values Seven- UV/VIS
tometry Excellence
Results • • • • • • •
Result Details • • • • • • •
Raw Data • • • • • • •
Video •
Measured • • • • •
values
Statistics • • • • • • •
Signatures • • • • • • •
Task data • • • • • • •
Resource data • • • • •
Method Data • • • • • • •
Quant •
Calibrations
Table of •
measured
values
Measurements • • • •
Measurements • •
chart
Graph • • •
Kinetics •
Spectrum •
Performance •
test
Available toolbar functions

Available Balance Quantos Titration Density Refrac- Thermal Values Seven- UV/VIS
functions tometry Excellence
Edit Result • • • • • •
Comment
Delete Videos •
Exclude / •
Include Sample
Outlier Test •
Recalculate •
Results
Edit Sample •
Data
Reevaluate •
Open Heatmap •
Reanalysis •
See also
8.1.1 Edit sample data

This function lets you subsequently recalculate existing results from one sample. On the basis of this new
calculation, specific sample data can be subsequently changed.
For example, the sample size or the correction factor can be adjusted, if these values were erroneously entered
incorrectly in the method or in the method start.
A recalculation can be performed for:
LabX Data and Results Workspace 569

• Samples or determinations within a sample or titer loop, and for all concentration or blank determinations.
• An individual GT sample (of the type sample or titer) or a Karl Fischer (KF) determination (sample, blank or
concentration).
Note
• Running KF tasks can only be recalculated from the instrument screen.
• New raw data cannot be generated, therefore changes can only be made to existing data.
• If you change data in the function Edit Sample Data, all the calculations that depend on that data (both
directly and indirectly), inside and outside loops, are rerun and marked accordingly.
For Karl Fischer titrations, these calculations refer only to the current determination type. The original raw
results are not deleted.
Navigation: Results Editor > Edit Sample Data
The following sample data can be subsequently changed
For titrations of type GT
Changeable parameters Individual sample of type
Sample Titer
Sample size Yes** -
Standard size - Yes**
Density Yes -
Correction factor Yes Yes
Standard density - Yes
For titrations of type KF
Changeable parameters Individual determination of type
Sample Titer Concentration
Sample size Yes** Yes** -
Standard size - - Yes**
Density Yes Yes -
Correction factor Yes - -
Standard density - - Yes
* Only for Entry type = Fix
** Only for Entry type = Variable
See also
8.1.2 Recalculate results

This function lets you subsequently recalculate existing results by modifying used formulas or adding new
results using different formulas.
Navigation: Results Editor > Recalculate Results
§ Specify whether the calculation should be run inside or outside a loop (scope). For calculations within a
loop, the result will be added for all the samples (of the same loop) of a series.
1 Select an existing result.
- or -
Click [+] to add a subsequent result calculation to your analysis results.
2 Enter the parameters in accordance with the method function Calculation.

3 Click OK to calculate the additional result and add it to your analysis results.
ð If you are missing raw data or raw results for the calculation and cannot calculate the result for that reason,
the result "NaN" (Not a number) will be added.
Note
• Only resource data of resources that were used in the original measurement can be used.
See also
2 Calculation } Page 329
2 Result } Page 227
8.1.3 Reevaluate
This function is only available if a method function Titration (EQP), Titration (2-phase) or Titration (Thermo-
metric) is included in the method. This function lets you make subsequent adjustments to the parameters in
Evaluation and Recognition for an equivalence point and thus run a new evaluation of the measurement data.
If a single sample is selected, you can insert a new EQP on the displayed titration curve.
Navigation: Results Editor > Reevaluate
1 Select the sample scope and, if the method contains multiple titration functions, select the one whose recog-
nition criteria you want to adjust.
2 If desired, uncheck Apply to all samples and select the Sample Scope
specific sample. Method function
3 Click Edit to open the reevaluation window. Apply to all samples
Apply to sample
4 In Evaluation and Recognition Parameters, apply
changes to the available parameters and click
Reevaluate.
Edit
ð The reevaluation is only run for the selected sample (or
samples) and the selected method function. All calcu-
lations affected directly or indirectly, inside or outside
loops, will be rerun and the results obtained will be marked.
Evaluation and Recognition

Minimum | Maximum |
Segmented
*

candidates.
defined.
values defined.
values defined.
Add an EQP
§ If a single sample is selected, you can insert a new EQP at any point desired on the curve.
1 Using the toolbar commands, zoom the particular region of the curve and displaying the derivative with E-V
curves, before carrying out the procedure.
2 In the toolbar, select Add EQP.
3 Using the pointer, select the desired position to which the EQP is to be inserted.
4 Once the position is optimized, click to freeze it.
ð The EQP is inserted in the graphics window and the accompanying data is shown in Raw Data.
5 Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box.
ð All calculations affected directly or indirectly, inside or outside loops, will be rerun and the results obtained
will be marked.
Edit EQPs
§ If a single sample is selected, you can edit EQPs.
1 Select te EQP to be edited on the curve or in the list Raw Data.
2 In the toolbar, select Remove EQP to remove the EQP.
- or -
In the toolbar, select Valid / Invalid to toggle the validity of the EQPs.
3 Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box.
ð All calculations affected directly or indirectly, inside or outside loops, will be rerun and the results obtained
will be marked.
See also

8.1.4 Reanalysis
This function for UV/VIS methods allows you to change certain parameters of the data analysis and some
sample parameters. Changes will affect either just the one sample, or all samples in the result set, depending
on the parameter. Sample parameters affect the sample, method parameters affect the entire result set. All
changes made will be traceable via Data markings, i.e. all influenced data will be marked with marking 1
(Modified).
Navigation: Results Editor > Reanalysis
The Discard and Close button will undo any changes ever done to the result set in reanalysis and restore the
result set state just after measurement, i.e. this includes all changes done in earlier reanalysis sessions.
The following sample parameters can be changed
Sample Parameters Effect
Dilution factor If used in calculations within the method, the system will recompute these
Molar mass results and all dependent results.
Extinction coefficient Note that the units cannot be changed.
Correction factor
Volume
For kinetics measurements, the evaluation settings (what to calculate and start/end times for the window) are
editable per sample, thus they are found in the sample table.
Sample Parameters Effect
Calculate rate constant Defines whether the result is calculated or not
Evaluation type Changes the evaluation order
Calculate initial rate Defines whether the result is calculated or not
Evaluation start time Defines the start time of the evaluation window, can be changed sample by
sample
Evaluation end time Defines the end time of the evaluation window, can be changed sample by
sample
All settings in the method functions Result and Configuration which can be changed affect all samples inside
the result set! That means: if you change the formula or the value of wavelength 1, all samples in the result set
will use the new values and will be reanalyzed.
Configuration Parameters Effect
Path length If used in calculations within the method, the system will recompute these
results and all dependent results.
Smoothing Smoothes the spectrum according to new calculation. Note that this will
cause the recalculation of all results because a change in the smoothing
influences all absorbance values.
Peak finding Change the peak finding settings, the newly found peaks/valleys will be
• Detection type available in the peak/valley vectors. Use the spectrum view to see online
what the changes mean for the samples.
• Detection sensitivity
• Parameters for the user
defined peak finding
Wavelength Selection Change the wavelength selected as wavelength 1…4 and the respective
• Number of wavelengths background correction settings. This also works for quant, you are able to
change the calibration wavelengths and fit types. To include/exclude a
• Wavelengths
standard, go via the edit calibration button in the toolbar.
• Background corrections and
their parameters
• Fit type (Quant)

Configuration Parameters Effect
Dyes Change the selected dye for the method. All results using dye1/dye2
• Number of dyes parameters will be recalculated.
• Selected dye
The following settings of the result method function can be edited

Result Parameters Effect
Formula Any aspect of the formula can be changed, i.e. from just changing a factor to
a complete replacement of the formula.
Decimal places Change the number of decimals to influence the precision of the result and
all dependent results.
8.1.5 Results
There is one line per sample displayed with the corresponding results and the sample specific parameters.
Main result1) must be activated.
Results are the results of the calculation of raw results within the following listed method functions. Result1),
Calculate on Instrument2) or Calculate3). The results of an analysis can be influenced by the user.
Navigation: Results Editor > Results
width.
Note
• Since vector values cannot be of type Main result, they are not displayed.
• Multiple results (e.g. generated in a do while loop are shown as (multiple)) in this view, without values.
See also
2 Do while } Page 241
8.1.6 Result details

In this view, there is one line displayed per sample and result. Result comments are predefined or are entered
on the instrument by the user, but can be edited. Select the result that you want to edit and click Edit Result
Comment.
Results are the results of the calculation of raw results within the following listed method functions. The results
of an analysis can be influenced by the user.
Method Balance Quantos Titration Density Thermal Seven- UV/VIS
function Refrac- Values Excellence
tometry
Result • • • • •
Calculate •
on
Instrument
Calculate •
Navigation: Results Editor > Result Details

width.
Note
• Since vector values cannot be of type Main result, they are not displayed.

See also
8.1.6.1 Edit results comments

Navigation: Results Editor > Result Details
Result comments are predefined or are entered on the instrument by the user, but can be edited.
− Select the result that you want to edit and click Edit Result Comment.
− Edit the settings as required and save them.
8.1.7 Raw data

Navigation: Results Editor > Raw Data
Raw data are grouped by scopes, samples and method functions. They are automatically generated and stored
during the analyses. Raw data are always created for each analysis and cannot be influenced by the user.
See also
8.1.8 Video
In addition to the standard buttons, the video window features the option to play a video at various speeds. You
can also grasp the slider using the mouse pointer and move it along the timeline. The timeline in the intensity
diagram moves synchronously to the video playback. In the graphics window, it is possible to display or hide
the intensity curves of individual capillaries.
To export or save a video pair (Transmitted/Reflected) to a storage medium, click on Export. To delete video
data of the selected result click Delete Videos in the toolbar.
8.1.9 Measured values

Navigation: Results Editor > Measured values
The content of this view is dependent on the origin of the data. Depending of the module different presentations
are offered.
8.1.9.1 Balance
Measurements chart
Displays the raw data sent by the instrument as a chart, including such from method function Interval weight.
The Orient by sample option causes multiple samples to be displayed side by side. If this option is not
selected, multiple measurements for a particular sample, for example, will be displayed as a curve.
See also
8.1.9.2 Quantos
Measurements chart
Displays the raw data sent by the instrument as a chart, including such from method function Interval weight.
The Orient by sample option causes multiple samples to be displayed side by side. If this option is not
selected, multiple measurements for a particular sample, for example, will be displayed as a curve.
See also

8.1.9.3 Titration
Table of measured values
The values in the table are created by some method functions during an analysis.
Graph
You can select or clear options and select different curve displays for titration and calibration curves.
Depending on the method, select a sample and method function if more than one is available. Grid lines can
be configured (minor/major in both directions on/off).
• To overlay curves from different results, select the desired results in the list view Results or Result sets.
Data are then selectable in Select results.
Graph functions
See also
8.1.9.4 Thermal Value

This window is divided into two sections: the upper section with the graphic elements and the lower section
with the table display.
Transmission %
Playback speed Export

Furnace temperature °C
Measurement and Capillary Data
Operation mode Melting point Set manually Automatic endpoint C slope
Initial threshold A [%] 1.2 Threshold B [%] 40 Endpoint C slope [%/s] 0.4
Melting point criterion Threshold B Temperature values Thermodynamic
Point A Point B Point C Man. point 1 Man. point 2 Status Capillary Comment
Included
Included
Included
• In addition to the standard buttons, the video window features the option to play a video at various speeds.
You can also grasp the slider using the mouse pointer and move it along the timeline. The timeline in the
intensity diagram moves synchronously to the video playback.
• In the graphics window, it is possible to display or hide the intensity curves of individual capillaries, zoom
in and out on the curves, export the chart, and display or hide gridlines.
• To export or save a video pair (Transmitted/Reflected) to a storage medium, click on Export. To delete video
data of the selected result click Delete Videos in the toolbar.
• In addition to a parallel display of the capillary data, it is also possible to display information that is
relevant to the evaluation in the table display.

8.1.9.5 SevenExcellence
Measurements
The values in the table are created by some method functions during an analysis.
Graph
This component shows the same data as in Measurements but in a chart format. You can select the results to
be displayed in the chart.
Graph functions
See also
8.1.9.6 UV/VIS
8.1.9.6.1 Kinetics
A graphical representation of the kinetics curve and the associated value table is shown. If for the selected task
multiple kinetics are available, you can select from the list of available kinetics. If for a kinetic measurement
multiple wavelengths are measured, you can select the wavelengths to be shown in the graphical represen-
tation (overlay).
If for a kinetic curve 3D-data is available, a 3D-Editor can be accessed.
For each selected wavelength (curve) the following results are shown if available as an additional information
within the "Filter settings table".
• Wavelength
• k and corresponding R2
• vInit and corresponding R2
Graph functions
See also
8.1.9.6.2 Calibrations
If for the selected task multiple calibrations are available, you can select from the list of available calibrations.

Graph functions
See also
8.1.9.6.3 Spectrum
The measured spectrum/spectra and the associated value table is shown. If for the selected task multiple
spectra are available, you can select from the list of available spectra. Default units Absorbance [A] and Trans-
mittance [%]) of the measured spectrum are shown, as defined within the method function.
You can choose the unit (A or %T) at the top left of the graph. Grid lines can be configured (minor/major in
both directions on/off).
Graph functions
In an open result set (not in read-only mode) you have the possibility to annotate the graph. To place an
annotation, select the curve you want to annotate by clicking on the curve and choose from the option in the
graph toolbar. If any operation cannot be performed on a selected chart, the button will not be shown.
Available actions
Action Procedure
A text-box which by default contains information about the point you annotated, i.e.
Add label wavelength and absorbance / transmittance. The box is connected to the point you
annotated by a blank line.
A text box can be placed anywhere on the graph surface. It can contain a user defined
Add Text text.
A line can be drawn in the graph area, the line connects two points with defined
Add line wavelengths and absorbance / transmittance values (if you zoom, the line will resize
accordingly).
Rectangle can be placed in the graph. The four corners of the rectangle have defined
Add rectangle wavelength absorbance / transmittance values (if you zoom, the rectangle will resize
accordingly).
To delete a selected annotation.
Delete
Annotation
Color To define the color of the selected text.
Background To define the background color of the selected text.
Size To define the text size of the selected text.
Chart export To export the graphics into a selectable format. Annotations are not exported.
See also

8.1.9.6.4 Heatmap editor
The heatmap illustrates the evolvement of the spectrum over time. The absorbance is displayed as color. The
color scheme and the minimum and maximum values can be selected. With the export button, choose to
export the map as csv (header and first column contain the time and wavelength information, the rest of the
matrix are the respective absorbances) or as image file (graph in current configuration and aspect ratio is
exported to selected file format).
Note
• The heatmap editor is only available if the kinetic loop in the method was configured accordingly (3D Data
> Keep full spectrum for every point).
See also
2 Kinetics loop } Page 554
8.1.10 Signatures
For released results, the signatures of the user or users releasing the result set are displayed.
Navigation: Results Editor > Signatures
8.1.11 Task data

Displays the global and sample parameters which were used at the time of execution. It always contains the
original data of the task execution even if parameters for recalculation were changed. (The changed values are
shown in Raw Data and Results).
Navigation: Results Editor > Task data
In Task comment, you may enter any information required.
8.1.12 Statistics
Statistics data such as mean value and standard deviation is displayed, if the parameter Activate basic
statistics is activated in the in method function Result. The Statistics window allows you to recalculate the
result of statistics. Statistics for titrators are always shown.
In the graph pane, you can select or clear options and select curve displays.
Navigation: Results Editor > Statistics
Outlier Test
If the results of individual samples in a measurement series deviate greatly from the calculated mean value, it
may make sense to question the significance of these (few) results and treat them as "outliers".
Outliers will have the following effects on the overall result of an analysis:
• The mean value is significantly shifted higher or lower.
• The standard deviation is increased.
• The distribution of the individual values around the mean value is distorted and no longer follows a normal
distribution.
The procedure used by LabX is the Grubbs outlier test. For this procedure, the measured value [x*] that has the
greatest deviation from the calculated mean value is analyzed. This number is used in the following equation,
together with the mean value [ ] and the standard deviation [s]:
x* - x
PG =
s
The test variable [PG] is then compared with the corresponding value in the Grubbs table G (N, 90%), which
in turn depends on the number of measured values N.

§ You can run an outlier test if you have the results from more than three samples.
1 Select Outlier Test in the toolbar to perform an outlier test.
ð Any outlier candidates found will be listed.
2 Click OK to exclude the outliers from statistics or click Cancel to not exclude these.
ð After confirmation, the entire samples are excluded and the statistics is recalculated without the identified
and excluded outliers.
Note
• The system will not delete the results of the samples excluded in this way but merely mark them as
excluded. They will no longer be included in the statistics.
• When excluding a sample, all results are reverted back to the last saved values. Results which were added
by recalculation and have not been saved yet, will get ### as a value if excluded. This indicates, that no
value has been saved up to now.
• Samples that have been excluded can be returned to the statistics at any time by selecting them and
clicking Exclude / Include Sample in the toolbar.
Excluding samples from the statistics
In Result selection all the results available for the entire series are listed.
− Click Exclude / Include Sample in the toolbar to exclude or include selected samples from the statistical
evaluation (Grubbs' test).
ð After a sample is excluded, all affected calculations (inside and outside of scopes or loops) are performed
again.
Modify data limits
Select the limits or tolerances for recalculating the statistics of titration results.
1 In Data Limits, select Factor of standard deviation or Absolute value(s) option to enter values either as
factors of the standard deviation or as absolute values and enter te desired values. If Limits is not activated,
no limits are calculated.
2 Click Apply to recalculate the statistics.
ð The calculation will be rerun and the results obtained will be marked.
See also
2 Result } Page 227
8.1.13 Resource data

Data for all resources as used during the execution of an analysis (for example, titrant, auxiliary instrument).
Always contains the original data of the task execution even if parameters for recalculation were changed.
Navigation: Results Editor > Resource data
See also
8.1.14 Method data

Displays the version of the method as used at the time of execution.
Navigation: Results Editor > Method Data
8.1.15 Add compliance comment

If Signature and Release Policies are activated for Result sets, you are forced to enter a comment when
applying any changes to a result. The comments will be shown in the Audit Trail.

See also
2 Audit Trail } Page 665
8.2 Export results

In Data, the data generated during the execution of a task on an instrument is displayed. Result data can be
exported using export templates.
1 Select the result that you wish to export.
2 Select Export Result or Export Result Set in the toolbar and choose a template.
ð The data will be exported according to the settings in the template.
See also
2 Manage export templates } Page 688
8.3 Display additional results

In the Results folder, it is possible to display additional columns with the results for each sample. The corre-
sponding columns containing the units for the results are also displayed automatically.
A maximum of 15 result columns and their units can be selected. By default, the columns are added at the
end. You can then change the order and save the settings to the respective search folder.
Navigation: Data > Results
§ Results which were calculated using the method function Result should already be available. If no results
are available yet, you can enter the names that should appear in the methods.
1 Highlight the desired search folder and select Edit Result Columns in the toolbar. An Editor window is
opened.
2 For referencing, the names entered as the title in the method function Result are used. To this end, select the
required results from the drop-down list. All result titles found by the defined filter are proposed.
ð The additional columns are displayed in the list view for the selected search folder.
Note
• Alternatively, you can call up these settings via Edit Search Folder in the toolbar. Then select the Result
Title tab.
• For Density Refractometry instruments, results from the method function Calculate on Instrument can also
be displayed.
8.4 Edit instrument settings

This function is not supported by all instruments.
Results and result sets from LabX can be displayed on instruments in the usual way. For this purpose, search
folders with the relevant settings are created in LabX. On the Instrument Settings tab, select the columns to be
displayed.
1 Select the appropriate search folder or create a new search folder.
2 Select Edit Search Folder in the toolbar. An Editor window is opened.
3 On the Filter criteria tab, define your search criteria.
4 On the Instrument Settings tab, define how the results should be displayed.
ð The results are displayed on the selected instrument family.
The results displayed can be limited, for example, to an instrument and instrument family. To do this, assign in
Filter criteria the option Instrument and select Operator = Is Current.

Instrument Settings tab
Parameters Explanation
Show on instrument Specifies that the filtered results should be displayed on instruments.
Instrument family Specifies the instrument family on which these settings should be used.
Number of rows Specifies the maximum number of results to be displayed in these search
folders on the instruments. A maximum of 200 rows per search folder can be
displayed.
Available columns List of all available items for the columns.
Assigned columns List of all assigned items for the columns. A maximum of 4 columns can be
displayed.
Note
• Existing search folders can also be edited on instruments. In addition, the column widths can be adjusted
accordingly. The settings are also applied to the PC.
• Search folders on instrument families are displayed only if the instruments of these families are listed in the
resources of the system. Automatically, predefined search folders with the name of the instrument family are
also created.

9 Resources and Instruments Workspace
The Resources workspace contains the following objects.
width.
Object Description
Instruments Here you organize the instruments that are connected to the system.
Resources Here you manage all device-specific resources such as weights and standards.
Value tables Here you manage tables for converting results.
See also
9.1 Manage instruments

Instruments are connected to an instrument server either by USB, by RS-232 ports or by a network (TCP/IP). An
instrument server is a LabX software component responsible for communication with instruments. With the
LabX Server Edition it is possible to install multiple instrument servers.
PCs may be equipped with one, two or possibly even no USB or RS-232 ports. Depending on the number of
peripheral devices you want to connect, you must install one or more interface cards. For further information,
contact the IT support group in your company, a computer specialist, or your local METTLER TOLEDO Technical
Specialist. The order numbers for the corresponding connection cables can be found in the operating
instructions of the instruments concerned. Before you can define instruments in LabX, you must have the corre-
sponding rights; make sure that you are logged in as a user with the necessary rights.
For improved manageability, you can create additional folders within the Instruments folder. In the list view the
following information is shown.
Available headers
Name Displays the name as entered when the instrument was added.
Model Displays the model name of the instrument.
Family Displays the family of the instrument.
Category Displays the category of the instrument license within LabX.
Serial number Displays the serial number of the instrument.
State Ready: This status will be indicated if the listed conditions are fulfilled.
• The serial number of the instrument matches a registered serial number in LabX.
Busy: The instrument is busy.
Interaction Required: User interaction is required before the task can be continued on the
instrument.
Blocked: The instrument is blocked.
Connected: The instrument is connected to LabX.
Error: An error occurred on the instrument.
System error: An system error occurred on the instrument.
Connecting: The instrument is currently connecting to LabX.
Disconnected: The instrument cannot be reached.
LabX Resources and Instruments Workspace 583

State details Detailed messages will be displayed if the instrument is not in State > Ready.
Availability status Available: The instrument is available.
Unavailable: The instrument was set unavailable by user or by the system.
Unavailability Displays the reason for which an instrument was set to Unavailable.
reason
Blocking reason Displays the reason for which an instrument was blocked. Instruments are blocked, for
example, when the service is due.
Next service date Displays the date for the next service.
Last test Displays the date of the last executed test.
Last adjustment Displays the date of the last executed adjustment.
Available Displays the number of available workspaces.
workspaces
Driver name Displays the name of the installed instrument driver.
Driver version Displays the version of the installed instrument driver.
Firmware version Displays the firmware version of the instrument.
Internal ID Displays the ID which was automatically assigned by the system.
See also
9.1.1 Manage instrument settings

The available options vary depending on the instrument type, which means that different tabs appear in the
Properties window. It is possible to edit the connection settings. After the editing, an attempt is made to
establish a connection using the new connection parameters. The Properties tab contains freely selectable
additional fields in which you can specify the location of instruments, for example.
Options in Instrument Editor
Available options Balance Quantos Titration Density Thermal Seven- UV/VIS
Refractometry Values Excellence
Connection • • • • • • •
Properties • • • • • • •
Default assignments • • • • • • •
Drivers • • • • • • •
StatusLight • • • • •
Maintenance • •
Adjustment and Test • • •
Hardware • • • •
Global settings •
Stirrer •
Sensor modules •
Performance test UV7 only
sequence
Performance Tests UV7 only

Edit instrument settings
1 Follow the navigation and select the instrument you want to edit from the list view.
2 Select Open Instrument in the toolbar.
584 Resources and Instruments Workspace LabX

Display instrument settings
− Follow the navigation and select the instrument you want to edit from the list view.
ð The instrument properties are shown in the reading pane.
See also
9.1.1.1 Connection
This tab displays the connection options for the instrument. These include:
• Connection type of the instrument
• Connection Settings
• Instrument Server
Navigation: Resources > Instruments > Connection
9.1.1.2 Properties
The top part of the window displays general information about the connected instrument; it is possible to modify
the instrument name and the freely selectable, additional fields. The bottom part of the window displays
parameters based on the measurement technology or instrument type concerned.
Navigation: Resources > Instruments > Properties
9.1.1.3 Default assignments

In LabX, a distinction is made between two types of printer. For example, a report can be opened on any client
and printed out on a local printer. If a method contains a print report instruction, the report will be printed out on
the printer assigned to the instrument on which the method is executed. For each instrument, it is possible to
set up one printer for normal printouts and one for printing labels. Label printers must support the ZPL or EPL
printer languages.
Navigation: Resources > Instruments > Default assignments
A standard method is useful for whenever a sample ID that cannot be assigned to a method is scanned in with
the barcode reader.
Note
• In the case of a distributed installation, instrument printers installed on PCs or servers running the "Server"
LabX component are available for selection.
• Peripheral devices can also be connected directly to a balance, in which case these are configured at the
balance rather than in LabX.
9.1.1.4 Drivers
This tab displays a list of the drivers available to the system that can be used for the selected instrument. If
multiple drivers are installed, you can assign one to the instrument.
Navigation: Resources > Instruments > Drivers
See also
2 Manage drivers } Page 693
9.1.1.5 Maintenance
Define what should happen before the service date arrives and after it has passed. The service date is stored on
the instrument and cannot be changed in LabX.
Navigation: Resources > Instruments > Maintenance

9.1.1.6 StatusLight
This tab lists the instrument statuses the same way as the representation on the workbench.
Navigation: Resources > Instruments > StatusLight
The color of the StatusLight indicates the current status of an instrument.
StatusLight
Ready Green This status will be indicated if the listed conditions are fulfilled.
• The serial number of the instrument matches a registered
serial number in LabX.
Busy Flashing green The instrument is busy.
Interaction Required Orange • User interaction is required before the task can be continued
on the instrument.
• The instrument service has expired.
Interaction Required Flashing orange The instrument needs attention and user interaction is required
before the task can be continued.
Blocked Red • The instrument is blocked by the method function Block
Instrument.
• A service date has expired.
Unavailable Red The instrument is made unavailable by user.
Error Red • An error occurred on the instrument.
• Measurement conditions are not met.
• Unsuccessful calibration.
System error Flashing red An system error occurred on the instrument.
See also
2 StatusLight - Dialog } Page 149
9.1.1.7 Adjustment and test

This tab page displays information about the adjustments and tests carried out on the instrument.
Navigation: Resources > Instruments > Adjustment and Test
9.1.1.8 Hardware
This tab lists all the hardware components connected to the instrument. These include:
• Automation units
• External instruments
• Peripheral devices
• Sensors
• Auxiliary instruments

Navigation: Resources > Instruments > Hardware
Note
• For Density Refractometry instruments: You cannot make any settings in LabX, these are only made on the
instrument.
9.1.1.8.1 Hardware - UV/VIS

Parameters for CertiRef
Status Indicates whether the CertiRef is connected to the instrument. Installed | Not installed
Set SNR Information on the serial number of the certified reference material -
installed in the CertiRef.
Certification date Information on date of the certification. -
Expiry date Information on the expiry date, calculated from the date of the -
certification.
Parameters for FillPalMini and SPR200
Speed "Low" Defines the flow rate of the speed level Low in % of the maximum 10...100 %
flow rate.
Speed "Medium" Defines the flow rate of the speed level Medium in % of the 10...100 %
maximum flow rate.
Speed "High" Defines the flow rate of the speed level High in % of the 10...100 %
maximum flow rate.
Parameters for InMotion
Base type Defines the sample changer type. Available types
Stirrer output Defines which port on the sample changer is used for the stirrer. Available ports
Status Shows if the accessory is connected to the selected output. Installed | Not installed
Sampling pump Defines which port on the sample changer is used for the pump Available ports
output that pumps the sample from the sample vessel to the cuvette.
Speed "Low" Defines the flow rate of the speed level Low in % of the maximum 10...100 %
flow rate.
Speed "Medium" Defines the flow rate of the speed level Medium in % of the 10...100 %
maximum flow rate.
Speed "High" Defines the flow rate of the speed level High in % of the 10...100 %
maximum flow rate.
Rate at 100% Defines the maximum flow rate. 0.1…1000 mL/min
PowerShower Defines which port on the sample changer is used for the Available ports
output PowerShower.
Rate Defines the flow rate of the pump. 0.1…1000 mL/min
Rack Shows the rack that is installed on the sample changer. PnP | Standard | Water
Standard: standard rack bath
Water bath: rack including a wather bath
PnP: no known rack is detected.
Rack size Shows the number of positions on the rack. –
Beaker height Defines the height of the beakers. 125…210 mm

Parameters for Auxiliary instrument
Control type Defines the manner in which the auxiliary instrument is controlled. Available control types
Name Defines the name of the auxiliary instrument. 1…30 characters
Baud rate Defines the baud rate for data transmission via the RS-232 1200 Ι 2400 Ι 4800 Ι
interface. 9600 Ι 19200
Data bit Defines the number of data bits. 7Ι8
Stop bit Defines the number of stop bits. 1 | 2
Parity Defines the parity protocol. Even Ι Odd Ι None
Handshake Data transmission via the RS-232 interface. None Ι Xon-Xoff
None: no confirmation of the transmission
Xon-Xoff: confirmation of transmission. The settings on both
instruments must be the same.
9.1.1.9 Global settings - Titration

Navigation: Resources > Instruments > Global settings
In Global settings, you can make general settings on the titrator that apply for all users.
Analysis and resources Settings for monitoring the expiration dates and life span of resources (determining
behavior the actions of the titrator before, during and after the performance of an analysis).
Settings for the response of the titrator when resources are deleted or when PnP
resources are identified.
Solvent Control Prompts the user to replace the solvent. For information on the process for
replacing the solvent (Manual operation).
− To open the settings, click [Open] below the corresponding window pane.
See also
2 Global settings } Page 60
Monitoring the usable life of a resource

For certain resources, the titrator provides automatic monitoring of the usable life.
The usable life is the period after which the values for a specific resource should be remeasured. These values
depend on the nature of the resource:
• The calibration parameters of a sensor.
• The titer of a titrant.
• The numerical value of an auxiliary value.
• The numerical value of a blank.
• The lot/batch from which a concentration/titer standard is taken.
Whether the usable life should be monitored can be defined in the setup for each individual resource.
If monitoring is activated then additional parameters become available in the respective resource with which the
duration of the usable life can be determined. In addition a reminder may optionally be issued by the titrator
before the expiration dates expire.
Monitoring usable life
life monitored.

Reminder Defines if the user is reminded that the resource will expire soon. Active | Inactive
Days before Defines the number of days before the reminder informs about the 1…1000
expiration [days] upcoming expiry date.
Expiry date Shows the calculated expiry date of the resource. Date
Note
• If a resource is renewed (e.g. a sensor is recalibrated, or the titer of a titrant is re-determined), the Date/
Time field in the Setup for the affected resource is updated automatically and the expiration date (or the time
of expiration) is recalculated.
• In Analysis and resources behavior define how the titrator should deal with the relevant resource if the
expiration dates have been exceeded at the start of the analysis.
See also
Monitoring the life span of a resource

The life span is the period after which a resource is exhausted and should be replaced. A life span can be
defined for the following resources:
• Sensors
• Titrants
Whether the life span should be monitored can be defined in the setup for sensors and titrants.
If monitoring is activated then additional parameters become available in the respective resource with which the
date of initial operation of the resource and the duration of its life span can be defined.
Monitoring life span
span
Note
• In Analysis and resources behavior, define how the titrator should deal with the relevant resource if the
expiration dates have been exceeded at the start of the analysis.
See also
9.1.1.9.1 Monitoring the shelf life of a resource

The shelf life defines the date after which the supplier no longer guarantees that a resource is fit for use. A shelf
life can be defined for the following resources
• Titrants
If monitoring is activated then additional parameters become available in the respective resource.
Monitoring shelf life
Monitoring shelf Specifies whether the shelf life of the resource is to be monitored. Active | Inactive
life

See also
9.1.1.9.2 Monitoring the expiry date of a resource

The expiry date defines the date after which an unopened chemical, stored in the original container, must be
replaced.
• Concentration standards
• Titer standards
If monitoring is activated then additional parameters become available in the respective resource.
Monitoring expiry Specifies whether the expiry date of the resource is to be Active | Inactive
date monitored.
Expiry date Defines the expiry date of the chemical stored in original Date
See also
9.1.1.9.3 Analysis and resources behavior

Navigation: Resources > Instruments > Global settings > Analysis and resources behavior
The settings that you make here relate to the sequence of the analysis of samples or series with the aid of
methods.
• You can define the actions of the titrator when started, during an analysis and afterward.
• You can also program the response of the titrator to the deletion of resources or when it identifies PnP
resources.
Analysis sequence settings

The analysis sequence settings can only be modified if no tasks are currently being performed by the titrator.
You can make the following settings that influence the sequence of an analysis.
Show required When an analysis is started a screen appears displaying all Active | Inactive
resources at start resources required for the analysis and their status (available,
not-available, locked or in use). If an individual entry is selected
from this screen then the user receives additional information
about the respective resource.
However, if Inactive is selected, then the required resources are
still checked when the analysis is started and if necessary, an
appropriate error message is issued.
Show SOP If an SOP (standard operating procedure) has been defined in the Active | Inactive
Title method function then this will be displayed before the
method is started provided that Active has been selected.
Note
• If Show required resources at start and Show SOP parameters were set to Active, all SOPs and subse-
quently all resources for the individual sample series must be confirmed before the analysis is started. In
this way, a Series sequence can be performed after it has been started without any further interruption.

Confirm after a This setting affects analyses that are to be performed on the Active | Inactive
completed rack sample changer and require more beakers than can be accom-
rotation modated on the rack of the sample changer.
If activated, a warning message is issued after a complete
revolution of the sample changer and before a position is
approached on the tray that has already been titrated. This
warning must be acknowledged by the user.
InMotion sample For InMotion T: if the beaker is not detected or the sample data is Active | Inactive
detection auto- not readable (e.g. Smart Tag or barcode) the system automat-
skip ically skips the sample after 10 min without requiring confir-
mation.
For InMotion KF: if the vial is not detected or the vial is higher
than allowed, a message informs the user of the problem, moves
the drift vial to the oven position and goes into standby mode.
The system automatically skips the sample after 10 min without
requiring confirmation.
Show results after If a manual or external titration stand is being used, then the Active | Inactive
analysis results for a sample are automatically displayed after they have
been analyzed and must be acknowledged by the user before the
analysis can be continued. With Auto stand the results are
displayed for a certain period and are not to be confirmed.
The activated parameter is valid for the following functions:
Analysis: the results for a sample are shown
Calibration/Loop: The results of the calibration are shown (slope,
zero point)
Sensor test: The results of the test are shown (slope, zero point,
drift and sensor test OK / not OK)
Check local When selected, the availability of a printer is checked at the Active | Inactive
printer connection beginning of the method.
and wait If not selected and no printer is connected, the method function
Record is skipped. If a printer is connected, the method function
Record is executed even if this parameter is not selected.
Only for USB printer, USB compact printer.
Resources behavior
Use the following parameters to configure how the titrator responds to the deletion of resources and its response
to the automatic identification of PnP resources.
Information when Defines if a confirmation will be requested every time a PnP Active | Inactive
recognizing PnP resource is identified.
resources
Protect Defines whether users can change data read from a Active | Inactive
SmartChemical SmartChemical tag.
data
Action when exceeding usable life
If it is determined by the titrator that the expiration dates of a resource have been exceeded, then the titrator may
perform various actions.
Warning The user is warned that the resource's usable life has been exceeded and the raw results and

Block The user is notified that the usable life of the resource has been exceeded and it is no longer
possible to start the analysis with the affected resource. (Methods that result in renewal of
this resource can however still be started.)
None If you select "none" then the analysis is started without message in spite of the exceeded
usable life. The expiry of the expiration date will, however, be logged.

analysis that the usable life of a sensor has been exceeded.
analysis that the expiration date of a titrant has been exceeded.
analysis that the date in Usable life of a titer or a concentration
Auxiliary values This action is performed if the system determines at the start of an None | Warning | Block
analysis that the usable life of an auxiliary value that is to be
used in the analysis has been exceeded.
Blank values This action is performed if the system determines at the start of an None | Warning | Block
analysis that the usable life of a blank value that is to be used in
the analysis has been exceeded.
Action when exceeding life span
If, at the start of an analysis, it is determined that the life span of a resource to be used for the analysis has
expired, the titrator can set various actions.
Warning The user is warned that the resource life span has been exceeded and the raw results and
Block The user is notified that the life span of the resource has been exceeded and it is no longer
possible to start the analysis with the affected resource.
None The analysis is started in spite of the exceeded life span.

analysis that the life span of a sensor has been exceeded.
analysis that the life span of a titrant has been exceeded.
Action when exceeding shelf life / expiry date
If, at the start of an analysis, it is determined that the date in Shelf life or Expiry date of a resource to be used
for the analysis has expired, the titrator can set various actions.
Warning A message is displayed at the start of the analysis. Users can continue the analysis. Results
and raw data are marked.
Block A message is displayed at the start of the analysis. Users can only start the analysis when
the resource is replaced.
None The analysis is performed without warning. Results and raw data are marked.

analysis that the date in Shelf life of a titrant has been exceeded.
analysis that the date in Expiry date of a titer or a concentration

Pump and stirrer detection
Stirrer detection Defines if the automatic stirrer detection is activated. This may be Active | Inactive
stirrer outputs that are not automatically identified by the titrator.
Pump detection Defines if the automatic pump detection is activated. This may be Active | Inactive
pump outputs that are not automatically identified by the titrator.
See also
2 Monitoring the life span of a resource } Page 589
2 Monitoring the usable life of a resource } Page 588
2 Monitoring the shelf life of a resource } Page 589
9.1.1.9.4 Solvent Control

Solvent control allows you to monitor the solvent for volumetric Karl Fischer titrations or the reagent for coulo-
metric Karl Fischer titrations.
On T9 you can run parallel titrations. If you run parallel Karl Fischer titrations you can either run two volumetric
Karl Fischer titrations or one volumetric and one coulometric Karl Fischer titration.
For each instance of solvent control you can configure the parameters listed below. Parameters that are specific
for coulometric or volumetric Karl Fischer titrations are listed in the next chapter.

Instance Shows the selected instance of Solvent control. Solvent Control 1 |
Solvent Control 2
Control type Defines the type of Karl Fischer titration that the solvent control is Solvent (volumetric) |
used for. Reagent (coulometric)
Solvent (volumetric): solvent control is used for a volumetric
Reagent (coulometric): solvent control is used for a coulometric
See also
2 Pump } Page 106
Volumetric Karl Fischer titrations

T7 and T9)
T7 and T9)

• Monitoring usable life of solvent: The time interval for the use of the solvent.
• Monitoring capacity of solvent: The capacity limit, i.e. a fixed maximum value of the total water volume of
samples titrated (including standby and pre-titration) in the same solvent.
• Monitoring no. of samples: Maximum number of samples to be titrated in the solvent.
• Enforce replacement when exceeding usable life: The user has to replace the solvent before he can start
the next titration.
• Autom. exchange when exceeding usable life: The solvent manager replaces the solvent or reagent
automatically.
• If neither Enforce replacement when exceeding usable life nor Autom. exchange when exceeding usable
life is activated, the system displays a reminder that the solvent should be exchanged. The user can either
replace the solvent or start a new titration.
Exchange of solvent with a Stromboli oven sample changer
For sample analysis using the Stromboli oven sample changer, the solvent can only be replaced in standby
Exchange of solvent with an InMotion KF Pro
For sample analysis using an InMotion KF, the solvent can be replaced in standby mode before analysis of the

Monitoring usable Defines if the usable life of the solvent is monitored. Active | Inactive
life of solvent
Last replacement Shows date and time of the last solvent-replacement. -
Performed by Shows the person or instance who performed the last -
replacement.
Usable life Defines the time interval in days for the use of the solvent. 1…104
Expiry date Shows the expiry date of the solvent in use. -
when exceeding Only if Monitoring usable life of solvent is activated.
usable life
when exceeding exceeding the specified usable life.
usable life Only if Monitoring usable life of solvent is activated.
Monitoring Defines if the capacity of the solvent is monitored. Active | Inactive
capacity of
solvent
Max. amount of The maximum volume of water in [mg] for a solvent. 0...106
water Only if Monitoring capacity of solvent is activated.

Curr. amount of Shows the current amount of water [mg] in the solvent. -
water
Enforce If activated, the user is forced to replace the solvent before he can
when exceeding Only if Monitoring capacity of solvent is activated.
capacity
when exceeding exceeding the specified capacity of the solvent.
capacity Only if Monitoring capacity of solvent is activated.
samples
samples solvent.
samples
samples
at max. no. of exceeding the specified maximum number of samples.
samples Only if Monitoring no. of samples is activated.
within InMotion
KF Pro series
Drain duration Defines the pumping time for draining the exhausted solvent from 0...1000
the titration vessel.
The pumping time should be as long as possible to ensure that
the tubes are completely free of solvent following draining.
Fill duration Defines the pumping time for filling the titration vessel with new 0...1000
solvent.
Coulometric Karl Fischer titrations


T7 and T9)
T7 and T9)
T7 and T9)
T7 and T9)
• Monitoring usable life of reagent: The time interval for the use of the reagent.
• Monitoring capacity of reagent: The capacity limit, i.e. a fixed maximum value of the total water volume of
samples titrated (including standby and pre-titration) in the same reagent.
• Monitoring no. of samples: Maximum number of samples to be titrated in the reagent.
• Enforce replacement when exceeding usable life: The user has to replace the reagent before he can start
the next titration.
• If Enforce replacement when exceeding usable life is not activated, the system displays a reminder that
the reagent should be exchanged. The user can either replace the reagent or start a new titration.
Exchange of reagent with a Stromboli oven sample changer
For sample analysis using the Stromboli oven sample changer, the reagent can only be replaced in standby
Exchange of reagent with an InMotion KF Pro
For sample analysis using an InMotion KF, the reagent can be replaced in standby mode before analysis of the

Monitoring usable Defines if the usable life of the reagent is monitored. Active | Inactive
life of reagent
Last replacement Shows date and time of the last reagent-replacement. -
Performed by Shows the person or instance who performed the last reagent- -
replacement.
Usable life Defines the time interval in days for the use of the reagent. 1…104
Expiry date Shows the expiry date of the reagent in use. -

when exceeding Only if Monitoring usable life of reagent is activated.
usable life
Monitoring Defines if the capacity of the reagent is monitored. Active | Inactive
capacity of
reagent
Max. amount of Defines the maximum volume of water in [mg] for a reagent. 0...106
water Only if Monitoring capacity of reagent is activated.
Curr. amount of Shows the current amount of water [mg] in the reagent. -
water
Enforce If activated, the user is forced to replace the reagent before he can
when exceeding Only if Monitoring capacity of reagent is activated.
capacity
samples
samples reagent.
samples
samples
within InMotion
KF Pro series
9.1.1.10 Stirrer - SevenExcellence

In this tab, define the properties off the currently connected stirrer.

Stirrer type Select a stirrer from different standard types or define individual Magnetic | Overhead |
parameters for a stirrer. User defined
10% Defines the voltage at 10% stirring speed. Recommended default 0.1 ... 8.0
value for stirrer type Magnetic is 2 [Volt].
100% Defines the voltage at 100% stirring speed. Recommended 0.1 ... 8.0
default value for stirrer type Magnetic is 6 [Volt].
9.1.1.11 Sensor modules - SevenExcellence

This tab displays the properties off all connected sensor modules that are currently attached to the selected
instrument.
Module type Information on the type of module.

Serial number Information on the serial number.
Firmware Information on the firmware.
Sensor name Information on the name of the currently plugged in sensor.
ISM Identifies ISM sensor.
Temperature sensor Information on the name of the currently plugged in sensor.
9.1.1.12 Performance test sequence - UV/VIS

Spectrophotometer performance verification is executed according to accepted guidelines. Certiref modules can
be used for performance tests according to US or EU Pharmacopeia. The recommended performance tests
include: the check of photometric accuracy and repeatability, wavelength accuracy and repeatability, instrument
resolution as well as stray light measurement.
Navigation: Resources > Instruments > Performance test sequence
Manage the performance test sequence configuration and the monitoring for a specific instrument.
This configuration is used when an performance test method is executed with the selection Monitored
performance test.
Configuration
Resolution - Tests the resolution of the instrument by measuring the ratio of a Active | Inactive
Toluene peak and a valley in the Toluene in Hexane Spectrum.
Wavelength Measures the spectrum of a solution of holmium oxide. To verify Active | Inactive
accuracy - Ho the wavelength accuracy the measured values are compared to
literature values.
repeatability - Ho containing a series of very sharp peaks in a solution of holmium
oxide.
Photometric Measures the absorbance of a reference substance for UV-light Active | Inactive
accuracy UV and compares the result with literature values.
repeatability UV substance for UV-light and checks the results against literature
values.
Stray light - KCl Measures a substance with sharp cut-off wavelength. Determines Active | Inactive
whether light is detected at a wavelength, where the sample is
supposed to be completely blocking it.
Photometric Measures the absorbance of a reference substance for visible light Active | Inactive
accuracy VIS and compares the result with literature values.
repeatability VIS substance for visible light and checks the results against literature
values.
Photometric Measures the absorbance of three different concentrations of a Active | Inactive
linearity UV reference substance for UV light and compares the results with
literature values.
Photometric Measures the absorbance of three reference materials for visible Active | Inactive
linearity VIS light and compares the results with literature values.
Wavelength Measures and compares the spectrum by measuring the emission Active | Inactive
accuracy - Xe from the light source.
repeatability - Xe by measuring the emission from the light source.

Baseline flatness Enables measurement of the effectiveness of the baseline Active | Inactive
correction.
Photometric noise Enables the signal to noise ratio measurement of the instrument. Active | Inactive
The accuracy of the measurement and the detection limit of the
instrument are determined.
Photometric drift Enables measurement of the stability of the measurement over a Active | Inactive
period of time.
Monitoring
Monitoring Specifies whether the time period of the performance test is to be Active | Inactive
CertiRef test monitored.
sequence
Time period Defines the unit for the time period. Hours | Days
Only displayed, if Monitoring CertiRef test sequence is
activated.
Interval Defines the time interval in days before the last passed 1…10000
performance test sequence expires.
Displayed if Monitoring CertiRef test sequence is activated.
Expiry date Shows the the expiry date of the last test sequence, calculated -
from the last executed performance test and the value defined in
Interval.
Displayed if Monitoring CertiRef test sequence is activated.
Reminder Determines whether a reminder should be issued before the Active | Inactive
performance test is about to expire.
Days before Specifies the number of days before expiry of the performance test 1…100
expiration to issue a reminder.
Only displayed if Reminder is activated.
Action when Defines how to proceed once the performance test has expired. Block | Warn
expired Block: The user is notified that the life span of the performance
test has been exceeded. It is longer possible to start an analysis.
Warn: The user is warned that the life span has been exceeded.
Only displayed if Monitoring CertiRef test sequence is activated.
9.1.1.13 Performance tests - UV/VIS

To display and to generate reports of executed performance test sequences and their result (passed/failed) for a
specific instrument.
Navigation: Resources > Instruments > Performance Tests
− Select a single test in the list view and click New Performance Test Sequence Report.
ð The report with the measured data and the reference absorbance values that are stored for the used
CertiRefs will open in a preview window.
- or -
− Select more than one test in the list view and click New Performance Test History Report.
ð The report with the behavior over time for all tests which were executed in the selected performance test
sequences will open in a preview window.
See also
2 Performance test sequence - UV/VIS } Page 598
2 Report templates } Page 675

9.1.2 Add instruments
Regardless which interface is used, the necessary drivers must be installed on the system in order for commu-
nication with instruments to be possible. The software searches for a suitable driver when you add a new
instrument. If no suitable driver is found, you will be prompted to install one.
Peripheral devices are added in the same way, but depending on the system, no connection check is
performed.
Interface settings
Instruments To configure the instrument interfaces see:
Balance - XP/XS/XPE/XSE [Configure the Ethernet Interface } Page 50]
[Configure the serial interface } Page 50]
Balance - XPR/XSR [Configure the Ethernet Interface } Page 45]
[Configure LabX connection } Page 46]
Quantos [Configure the interfaces } Page 54]
Titration [Configure the network settings } Page 58]
Density Refractometry [Configure the network settings } Page 112]
SevenExcellence [Configure the network settings } Page 127]
UV/VIS [Configure the network settings } Page 135]
Thermal Values [Configure the network settings } Page 121]
See also
2 Manage drivers } Page 693
9.1.2.1 Establishing a serial connection

• In the case of a distributed LabX installation, the "Instrument server" component must be installed at least
once as this is required for communication.
Recommended default parameters for serial connections

Baud rate 9600
Bit / Parity 8 / none
Handshake Xon/Xoff
End of line <CR><LF>
Character set Ansi/Win
Please observe the following preconditions before you establish a connection between instruments and LabX.

§ Connect the instrument to a serial port, e.g. COM1, of a PC with an installed instrument server component.
§ Carry out the necessary steps on the instrument to configure the serial port. Document the listed settings or
select the recommended default parameters (see table).
§ At least one free instrument license must be available.
§ The instrument must be "Online", so that LabX can establish a connection.
1 Select New Instrument in the toolbar.
ð The wizard is displayed, which guides you step-by-step through the required settings.
Add Instrument - Wizard
1. Instrument Category Select the instrument category
2. Connection Type
3. Connection Settings Balance Density Refractometry Quantos
4. Instrument Detection
5. Name and properties
SevenExcellence Thermal Values Titrator
UV/VIS Peripheral Device
Back Next Cancel
2 Select the instrument category and click on Next. Add Instrument - Wizard
1. Instrument Category Select Connection Type
3 Select Serial connection and click on Next.
2. Connection Type
4 Make a selection for Instrument Server, if more than
3. Connection Settings Ethernet connection USB connection Serial connection
one of these components is installed on your LabX
system and click Next. 4. Instrument Detection
5 Enter the connection settings you made5.on

Name and Properties
the instrument and click Next.
ð LabX tests the connection automatically.
ð If the instrument is not detected, please check the cable connection and the connection parameters of
the instrument.
6 Then click Next.
7 Choose unique and informative names for instruments so that you can easily identify a particular instrument
when several are connected. You can add freely definable fields, in which you can enter additional infor-
mation for the properties.
8 Click on Finish to complete the procedure. Back Next Cancel
ð The newly added instrument will be displayed in the list.
See also
9.1.2.2 Establishing a network connection

• If the instrument is connected directly to the network port on the PC, you may need a crossover cable,
depending on the PC.

§ Connect the instrument to the network or to the network connection of the PC.
§ Carry out the necessary steps on the instrument to configure the Ethernet port. Note down the settings.
2. Connection Type
Back Next Cancel
3 Select the link type Ethernet connection and click
2. Connection Type
Next.
4 Make a selection for Instrument Server, if more than
one of these components is installed on4. Instrument
your LabX Detection
system and click Next. 5. Name and Properties
5 Enter the connection settings you made on the instrument and click Next.
ð LabX tests the connection automatically.
ð If the instrument is not detected, please check the cable connection and the connection parameters of
the instrument.
6 Then click Next.
mation for the properties. Back Next Cancel
8 Click on Finish to complete the procedure.


See also
9.1.2.3 Establishing a USB connection

§ An additional device-specific USB driver must first be installed on the PC to which an instrument is
connected.
§ Connect the instrument to a USB port on a PC that has an installed instrument server component.
§ Carry out the necessary steps on the instrument to configure the USB port.
2. Connection Type
Back Next Cancel
3 Select USB connection and click Next.
2. Connection Type
ð The window Instrument Selection is shown.
ð If the instrument is not detected, please check the
cable connection and the connection parameters of
5. Name and Properties
the instrument.
4 Select the instrument you want to add from the list and click Next.
mation for the properties.
Back Next Cancel

6 Click on Finish to complete the procedure.
See also
2 USB instrument drivers } Page 45
9.1.3 Change availability of instruments

On instruments that have the status Not available, information to this effect is displayed and no tasks can be
executed.
The availability of instruments may be revoked for the following reasons:
• Change of software version.
• Change of firmware version.
• Addition/removal of a measuring cell.
The availability of instruments can be changed manually. Users who have activated messages will receive a
message if the availability of an instrument has been revoked automatically.
Make instrument unavailable
2 Select Make Unavailable in the toolbar.
3 Enter a reason for why the instrument will be unavailable and click OK.
ð The instrument has been made unavailable.
Make instrument available
2 Select Make Available in the toolbar.
ð The instrument has been made available.
See also
9.1.4 Block or unblock instruments

Instruments are blocked, for example, when the service is due. On instruments that have the status Blocked,
information to this effect is displayed. To execute methods on blocked instruments, select Can run on blocked
instruments in the method properties.
The blocked status can also be changed by means of the method functions Block Instrument or Unblock
instrument.
Users who have activated Messages will receive notifications.
Block Instrument
2 Select Block Instrument in the toolbar.
3 Enter a reason for why the instrument will be blocked and click OK.
ð The instrument has been blocked.
Unblock instrument
PC.

2 Select Unblock instrument in the toolbar.
ð Depending on the system settings either the Unblock window or the Signing window appears.
3 Enter a comment describing the reason for unblocking the instrument and click OK or Sign.
See also
2 Block instrument } Page 218
2 Unblock instrument } Page 235
9.1.5 Edit ErgoSens settings

These settings do not apply to balances or Thermal Value instruments. For balances, settings for ErgoSens are
configured directly on the instrument.
You can assign any executable shortcut of your choice to a touch-free ErgoSens sensor. Alternatively, you can
select the option Repeat Last Task. Note that one shortcut can be assigned per instrument and per user.
ErgoSens accepts hand movements only when the device is showing the home screen.
2 Select ErgoSens in the toolbar.
3 Activate the required shortcut in the list.
9.2 Resources Balance
9.2.1 Monitored objects

The list will show the relevant properties of the balances for which monitoring is activated and of the weights.
Navigation: Resources > Balance > Monitored objects
The following information will be shown:
Object Description
State The following states are possible: Due, Overdue, Not performed, Passed, Canceled,
Failed.
Instrument Information on the name of the instrument.
Name Information on the name of the weight, the test, or the adjustment.
Type Information on the type of object.
Expiry date Information on the expiry date.
9.2.2 History
The history for the following objects is displayed here:
• Test
• Adjustment
• Calibration
• MinWeigh

Navigation: Resources > Balance > History
Filters can be applied to the respective Search folders. Some of these folders are predefined, e.g. “Last 30
days”. In addition, you can define your own folders, which will then be displayed next to the predefined folders,
or you can modify existing folders.
See also
9.2.3 Quality Settings
9.2.3.1 Monitoring
LabX actively monitors the balance status and ensures fulfilling all the preconfigured quality criteria. You can
configure the action for every balance when the defined monitoring parameters reach their expiry date or due
date. Reminders will be sent to users or roles that are defined to receive messages for instruments. In addition,
messages will be shown on the relevant instrument screens, independent of the logged in user.
The following objects can be monitored:
• Calibration certificate
• MinWeigh certificate
• Service
• Leveling warning
Navigation: Resources > Balance > Quality Settings > Monitoring
§ The desired balance must be "Online".
1 Choose the desired balance in the list view.
2 Select Open Monitoring Settings in the toolbar.
ð The window to edit the parameters opens.
Properties
Calibration certificate and MinWeigh certificate
Activate Defines whether the expiry date is to be monitored. Active | Inactive
monitoring
Send a reminder Defines whether the user is reminded that a monitored object will Active | Inactive
expire soon.
Days before Defines the number of days before the reminder informs about the 0...365
expiration upcoming expiry date.
Block Instrument Defines whether the balance will be blocked after a defined Active | Inactive
number of days.
Days before Defines the number of days when the expiry date has been 0...365
blocking reached, until the balance will be blocked.
Service
Activate Defines whether the expiry date is to be monitored. Active | Inactive
monitoring
Send a reminder Defines whether the user is reminded that a monitored object will Active | Inactive
expire soon.

Days in advance Defines the number of days before the reminder informs about the 0...365
upcoming due date.
Block Instrument Defines whether the balance will be blocked after a defined Active | Inactive
number of days.
Days before Defines the number of days when the due date has been reached, 0...365
blocking until the balance will be blocked.
Service date Shows the date of the last service. Date
Next service date Shows the due date of the next service. Date
Leveling warning
Type Inactive: The leveling state will be ignored. Raw results will be Inactive | Forced leveling
marked with Out of level if applicable. | Optional leveling
Forced leveling: To prevent results from being generated if a
balance is "Out of level", leveling will be enforced.
Optional leveling: A Message will appear if the leveling state is
Out of level. Leveling the balance is not mandatory. Results will
be marked with Monitored objects criteria not fulfilled if
applicable.
Messages at login
Activate Define whether messages are sent for monitored objects at the Active | Inactive
messages time of login on the instrument.
Monitored objects Defines the minimum time period for monitored objects validity at 1...720
must be valid for start of the task.
[h]
See also
9.2.3.2 Adjustments
Configure the adjustment settings, for example the adjustment strategy and the scheduling for your balances.
Navigation: Resources > Balance > Quality Settings > Adjustments
Edit an adjustment
1 Choose the desired balance in the list view.
2 Select Open Adjustment in the toolbar.
General
Strategy Defines the adjustment method. Internal adjustment* |
When the options No adjustment or External adjustment are External adjustment | No
activated other options are not available. adjustment
* Factory setting
Weight
These parameters appear if Strategy > External adjustment is selected.

defined as the expected weight value of the weight.
Weight class Defines the weight class according to OIML or ASTM. Alternatively, E1 | E2 | F1 | F2 | M1 |
a customized tolerance class can be created with Own. M2 | M3 | ASTM000 |
ASTM00 | ASTM0 |
ASTM0 | ASTM1 |
ASTM2 | ASTM3 |
ASTM4 | ASTM5 |
Specifications
These functions are only available for balance models XPR/XSR.
'As found' test At the start of the adjustment sequence, an internal test (sensi- Active | Inactive*
tivity) is performed to ascertain the current status. The input test
has automatically started when the adjustment sequence is
activated and the result is displayed and recorded.
'As left' test When the adjustment is complete, an internal test (sensitivity) is Active | Inactive*
performed.
Limit unit Information on the used unit for the limits. -
Warning limit Defines the warning limit. Numeric
The warning limit is an upper or lower limit, which if exceeded or (0.001...100%)
Result if the warning limit is exceeded: The adjustment is passed,
but the difference is higher than expected.
Result if the control limit is exceeded: The adjustment failed, the
balance is out of specification.
* Factory setting
Printing
Automatic print When activated adjustment results are immediately printed after Active | Inactive*
the result has been calculated on the enabled strip printer.
Error management
Block balance Defines the behavior of the balance if the adjustment has failed. Active | Inactive*
Active: The balance will be blocked after the adjustment has
failed. In this case, the balance can not be used anymore until a
user with the appropriate right unblocks the balance.
Inactive: The balance will not be blocked.
* Factory setting
Planning
Start after leveling Defines if the internal adjustment starts after leveling. Active | Inactive*

Start after Defines if the internal adjustment starts after a temperature Active | Inactive*
temperature change.
change
Schedule Defines when the adjustment is being performed. It is possible to Inactive* | 1 start time |
define several start times (1-3) per day. It can also be defined on 2 start times | 3 start
what day/s the adjustment is being performed. times
* Factory setting
Execution condition
Temperature Information on the temperature change that is used for the -
change condition.
Note
• Please ensure when scheduling tasks during the night that these are not duplicated, or omitted, as a result
of the change to/from summertime.
9.2.3.3 Tests
Routine tests can be performed to ensure accurate weighing results according to GWP® or other QM systems.
Therefore the tests should be performed in fixed, regular intervals depending on your QM system and the results
should be documented in a traceable way.
Navigation: Resources > Balance > Quality Settings > Tests
For Test type > Custom test see [Custom test } Page 613].
Eccentricity test
The purpose of the eccentricity test is to check if every eccentric
load deviation (corner load deviation) is within the user SOP
tolerances. The corner load is the deviation of the measurement 3
value through off-center (eccentric) loading. The corner load
increases with the weight of the load and its distance from the 2 1 4
center of the weighing pan support. If the display remains
consistent, even when the same load is placed on different parts 5
of the weighing pan, the balance does not have corner load
deviation.
The result corresponds to the highest of the four determined
eccentric load deviations (2 to 5).
Repeatability test
The repeatability test calculates the standard deviation of a series of measurements with a single test weight in
order to determine the repeatability of the balance.
Repeatability is a measure of the ability of a balance to supply the same result in repetitive weighings with one
and the same load under the same measurement conditions. During the test, the same load is placed and
measured in different parts of the weighing pan. Afterwards, the difference between the measured weight values
is calculated. The spread of the measured results leads to the repeatability.
Repeatability is highly affected by the ambient conditions (drafts, temperature fluctuations and vibrations) and
also by the skill of the person performing the weighing. Therefore, the series of measurements must be carried
out by the same operator, in the same location, under constant ambient conditions and without interruption.
The following test types are available:
• Repeatab. - 1 TP: To test repeatability of the balance without tare weight.
• Repeatab. - Tare - 1 TP: To test repeatability of the balance with tare weight. The first test weight (tare
weight) is used to simulate a tare container.

Sensitivity test
The sensitivity of the balance defines the deviation between the balance reading and the actual load. The sensi-
tivity test allows you to measure the sensitivity using one or two test points.
The following test types are available:
• Sensitivity - 1 TP: To test sensitivity of the balance with one test weight.
• Sensitivity - 2 TP: To test sensitivity of the balance with two test weights.
• Sensitivity - Tare - 1 TP: To test sensitivity of the balance with two test weights. The first test weight (tare
• Sensitivity - Tare - 2 TP: To test sensitivity of the balance with three test weights. The first test weight (tare
See also
2 Custom test } Page 613
9.2.3.3.1 Manage tests

Configure the test settings, for example the test type and the scheduling for your balances.
Available tests
Test Balance type
XPR/XSR XP/XS/XPE/XSE
Sensitivity test • •
Sensitivity - 2 TP •
Sensitivity - Tare - 1 TP •
Sensitivity - Tare - 2 TP •
Repeatab. - 1 TP • •
Repeatab. - Tare - 1 TP •
Eccentricity test • •
For Test type > Custom test see [Custom test } Page 613].
The available parameters depend on the selected test type.
Add a test
1 Select New Test in the toolbar.
2 Choose the desired balance and the type of test set.
ð Editing a test definition or default tolerance profile will result in a test that becomes overdue and therefore
needs to be executed.
Edit a test
1 In the list view select the test you want to modify.
2 Select Open Test in the toolbar.

Delete a test
1 In the list view select the test you want to delete.
2 Select Delete Test in the toolbar.
ð A message box appears.
ð The test has been deleted.
Properties
Test type Defines the test type to be used. Tests may have one or two test Sensitivity test | Sensi-
points and may include a tare weight. tivity - 2 TP | Sensitivity
Auto. Repeat. - Tare - 1 TP: This test requires a dosing module - Tare - 1 TP | Sensitivity
with a MinWeigh test head attached. - Tare - 2 TP | Repeatab.
- 1 TP | Repeatab. - Tare
- 1 TP | Eccentricity test |
Auto. Repeat. - Tare - 1
TP
Name Defines the name of the test. Text (1...22 characters)
Instrument Information of the assigned instrument. -
Test activated Enables/disables the test. Active* | Inactive
* Factory setting
Test Specification
weight class.
Number of Defines the number of weight measurements of a series. Numeric 10* | (2...15)
repetitions
* Factory setting
Test point
ASTM00 | ASTM0 |
ASTM0 | ASTM1 |
ASTM2 | ASTM3 |
ASTM4 | ASTM5 |
balance

* Factory setting
Tare
Tare name Defines a name for the tare weight. Text (1...22 characters)
Minimum tare Defines the minimum weight for the tare container. The test is only Numeric
weight continued if a tare container with at least this weight is placed on
the balance.
Print and Report Options
Strip printer When activated, protocols will be printed to the strip printer on Active | Inactive
balance models XPR/XSR.
Generate report When activated, reports will be generated and printed or saved to Active | Inactive
PDF files.
Report name Defines the name that will be displayed in the list view of Data > -
Reports.
Print Reports are automatically printed after tasks are completed to the Active | Inactive
default printer.
File
Error management
Block balance Defines the behavior of the balance if a test has failed. Active | Inactive*
Active: The balance will be blocked after a specified amount of
failed tests. In this case, the balance cannot be used anymore
until a user with the appropriate right unblocks the balance.
Inactive: Blocking is not activated.
Allowed number Defines the maximum allowed retries until the balance will be Numeric (3* | 0...9)
of retries blocked.
* Factory setting

Planning
Planning type Specifies the schedule for the test to be performed. Manually* | Daily |
Manually: The test must be performed manually. Weekly | Monthly |
Quarterly | Annually
Daily: The test will be performed automatically every day at the
specified time.
Weekly: The test is performed automatically at least once a week.
Additional days can be selected if required.
Monthly: The test will be performed automatically every month at
the specified day and time.
Quarterly: The test will be performed automatically every three
months at the specified time.
Annually: The test will be performed automatically once a year at
the specified time.
Start time Defines the start time for executing the task. Time
(x) hours before Defines the time period before the notification informs about the Different values
test upcoming expiry date. depending on the
selected frequency
(Planning type).
Preferred days Defines the preferred weekday for the execution of the test. Monday | Tuesday |
Wednesday | Thursday |
Friday | Saturday |
Sunday
Preferred day for Defines the preferred day for execution of the test. None* | Monday |
execution Tuesday | Wednesday |
Thursday | Friday |
Saturday | Sunday
Occurrence of day Defines the occurrence of a given day of week within a month. First* | Second | Third |
Fourth
Note
9.2.3.3.2 Custom test

A custom test will always base on methods which include method functions of the following types:
• Sensitivity - 1 TP
• Repeatab. - 1 TP
• Eccentricity test
• Adjustment
• Test history record
Add a test
1 Select New Test in the toolbar.
2 Choose the desired balance and select Custom test.
3 In Properties > Method, select an existing method that contains method functions suitable for testing the
balance.

Method properties Custom Test Settings
Method
Method Parameters Return values
Method properties Properties
ID SE1TP Type Custom test
Internal ID M342 Name Cust.
Name SE1 Test Method SE1 Test
Use released method
Instrument XPR Balance
Internal ID TE154
Test activated
4 If Use custom test parameters is activated for the included method functions, click New or Edit to define
the test specifications required for each of the corresponding method function.
Parameters Custom Test Settings
Method
Method Parameters Return values
Search text... Test Specification
SE1 Test Name Type Nominal weight

Sensitivity 1 Sensitivity test 5 g, E1 (OIML)
Properties
Type SE1TP
Name Sensitivity 1
Method SE1 Test
Use custom test parameters New Edit Delete

Delete a test
1 In the list view select the test you want to delete.
2 Select Delete Test in the toolbar.
ð The test has been deleted.
Edit a test
1 In the list view select the test you want to modify.
2 Select Open Test in the toolbar.
Properties
Type Information of the selected method type. Custom test
Name Defines the name of the test. Text (1...22 characters)
Method Selection of the test method which will be used as a template, Method selection
defining the types of tests to be executed.
Use released Defines whether only released method can be executed. Active* | Inactive
method

Instrument Information of the assigned instrument. -
Test activated Enables/disables the test. Active* | Inactive
* Factory setting
Test Specification
Test type Information on the used test type. Sensitivity - 1 TP |
Repeatab. - 1 TP |
Eccentricity test
Name Corresponds exactly to the name of the method function. 1…100 characters
weight class.
ASTM00 | ASTM0 |
ASTM0 | ASTM1 |
ASTM2 | ASTM3 |
ASTM4 | ASTM5 |
balance
* Factory setting
9.2.3.4 Tolerance profiles

By setting up tolerance profiles you can ensure weighing tasks meet defined quality requirements and
regulations. In addition, as the same profile is used each time a specific task is carried out, you can be sure of
consistent settings to guarantee traceable results.
Navigation: Resources > Balance > Quality Settings > Tolerance Profiles
Add a tolerance profile
1 Select New Tolerance Profile in the toolbar.

2 Choose the desired balance.
General
Name in LabX The name of the tolerance profile as used in LabX. Text
Name on The name of the tolerance profile as used on the balance. Text
instrument
Instrument name Displays the name as entered when the instrument was added. Text
Description A free text describing the tolerance profile. Text
Indicator Settings
These functions are only available for balance models XPR/XSR.
Define Activates an indication on the balance screen identifying the Active | Inactive
currently active tolerance profile.
Color Defines the color of the indicator that is shown on the balance Neutral | White | Yellow |
screen. Red | Blue | Green
Text Defines a short text for the indicator that is shown on the balance 1...3 characters
screen.
Weighing Settings
Environment Defines the environmental conditions of the balance. Stable | Standard |
Stable: For an environment which is practically free from drafts Unstable | Very unstable
and vibrations.
Standard: For an average working environment subject to
moderate variations in the ambient conditions.
Very unstable: For an environment where the conditions are
continuously changing.
Weighing mode Defines the filter settings of the balance. Universal* | Dosing |
Universal: For all standard weighing applications. Sensor mode | Check
weighing | Dynamic
Dosing: For dosing liquid or powdery products. With this setting,
the balance responds very quickly to the smallest changes in
weight.
Sensor mode: Depending on the setting of the ambient
conditions, this setting delivers a filtered weighing signal of
varying strength. The filter has a linear characteristic in relation to
time (not adaptive) and is suitable for continuous measured
value processing.
Check weighing: With this setting, the balance only reacts to
significant changes in weight and results are very stable.
Dynamic: The dynamic weighing function determines the average
weight of a moving sample.
Value release Defines how fast a measured value is recognized by the balance Very fast* | Fast | Fast
as stable and released. and reliable | Reliable |
Very fast: For fast value release with increased repeatability. Very reliable
Very reliable: For extended settling time with low repeatability.

Allowed units Defines the units that are allowed in this tolerance profile. The available values are
model-specific.
Display Determines the readability [d] of the balance display. 1d* | 2d | 5d | 10d |
readability 1d: Shows the maximum resolution 100d | 1000d
2d: Shows the final digit in increments of 2
5d: Shows the final digit in increments of 5
10d: 10x smaller resolution
Zero drift The function Zero drift compensation performs ongoing Active* | Inactive
compensation corrections of deviations from zero which may occur, for
example, as a result of small amounts of dirt on the weighing
pan.
* Factory setting
Calibration certificate
• For balance type XPR/XSR
– After calibrating a balance, a service technician issues a certificate. The listed parameters are read from
the balance's calibration certificate.
• For balance type XP/XS/XPE/XSE
– After calibrating a balance, the listed parameters can be manually entered from the balance's calibration
certificate.
MinWeigh
MinWeigh defines the smallest net weight. If the weighing result is below the minimum weight, MinWeigh spots
the error and warns you on the balance terminal. It prevents unacceptable weighing results from being used
further. The MinWeigh functionality can be activated as required by a service technician. The smallest net
weight depends on the repeatability of the balance at the place where it is used, the user, the environmental
conditions, and the specified quality tolerances (weighing tolerance, expansion factor, safety factor).
After setting up a balance, a service technician issues a certificate. It documents the measurements and
tolerances as well as the corresponding tare and smallest net weight values. The listed parameters are read
from the balance MinWeigh certificate.
9.2.4 Manage weights

Enter all the weights to be used for tests and adjustments. The individual weights can be combined into weight
sets.
Weights can only be used if they have the status Released and Available.
Navigation: Resources > Balance > Weights
Add a weight
1 Select New Weight in the toolbar.
2 Enter the required information in the properties.
Edit a weight
1 In the list view select the weight you want to modify.
2 Select Open Weight in the toolbar.

Delete a weight
§ The weight to be deleted must not be assigned to a Weight set.
1 In the list view select the weight you want to delete.
2 Select Delete Weight in the toolbar.
ð The weight has been deleted.
Properties
Name Specify a descriptive name of your choice. 1…100 characters
Weight ID Defines an ID that may be used as an identifier. 1…100 characters
Internal Weight ID Displays the internal ID used by LabX. -
Nominal value Defines the value for the nominal weight. The nominal weight is 0.0…1.0x106
[g] defined as the expected weight value of the weight.
Conventional The calibrated value of the weight indicated on calibration 0.0…1.0x106
mass value [g] certificates.
M2 | M3 | ASTM000 |
ASTM00 | ASTM0 |
ASTM0 | ASTM1 |
ASTM2 | ASTM3 |
ASTM4 | ASTM5 |
ASTM6 | ASTM7 | Own
Density [g/cm3] The density value as indicated on calibration certificates. 0.0…1.0x106
Marking For entering a text marking if the weight has one. 0...100 characters
Manufacturer Defines the manufacturer of the weight. 0...100 characters
Weight set Indicates the weight set to which the weight belongs. -
Certificate
ID Defines the ID of the certificate that may be used as an identifier. 0...100 characters
Date Defines the date when the last calibration was performed. Date
Next date Defines the date, when the next calibration must be performed. Date
Release state Information on the release state of the object. Proposed | Released
See also
2 Manage weight sets } Page 618
9.2.5 Manage weight sets

Here, it is possible to assign weights to weight sets. A weight can only be assigned to one weight set.
Navigation: Resources > Balance > Weight sets
Add a weight set
1 Select New Weight Set in the toolbar.

2 Enter the required information in the properties.
Edit a weight set
1 In the list view select the weight set you want to modify.
2 Select Open Weight Set in the toolbar.
Delete a weight set
§ The weight set to be deleted must not have any weights assigned to it.
1 In the list view select the weight set you want to delete.
2 Select Delete Weight Set in the toolbar.
ð The weight set has been deleted.
Properties
Name Specify a descriptive name of your choice. 1…100 characters
Weight set ID Defines an ID that may be used as an identifier. 1…100 characters
Weights
Here you can add weights to a weight set or remove weights from a weight set.
• To add weights, click Add and select the required weights from the list. You can select multiple weights at a
time.
• To remove weights, select the required weights in the list and click Remove.
9.3 Resources Titration
9.3.1 Hardware
In Hardware, configure all the hardware components connected to titrators.
Hardware components of all to LabX connected instruments are shown, also from instruments that are offline.
To edit components, relevant titrators must be "Online".
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware
on the PC.
9.3.1.1 Sensors
You can configure and manage sensors to be used with the titrator as well as change settings already stored in
the titrator. The settings for an individual sensor can also be output to a printer. In addition, the corresponding
method for sensor calibration can be accessed from here.
Note
• A maximum of 50 sensors can be defined in the device.
• Each sensor is associated with a specific type. Each sensor type can deliver measured values in one or
more units of measure. The following table provides information regarding which units of measure can be
selected for a corresponding sensor type:
1)
mV mV mV
1)
pH pH pH | mV

ISE pM pM / pX | ppm | mV
Phototrode %T %T | A | mV
Polarized mV mV | µA
Temperature °C °C | K | °F
Thermometric °C °C | K | °F
Conductivity µS/cm µS/cm | mS/cm | µS | mS
1)
Plug and Play sensors (PnP) are available for pH or mV measurements.
• Changing the unit of measurement for a sensor may render the calibration parameters and expiration date
parameters meaningless and result in their subsequent omission. This may also mean that the calibration
parameters are recalculated by the titrator (for temperature sensors), or that another set of calibration
parameters is displayed (for ISE sensors).
on the PC.
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Sensors
Add a sensor
§ The desired titrator must be "Online".
1 Select New Sensor in the toolbar.
2 Choose the desired titrator and the type of sensor.
Plug and Play sensors (PnP)
• If a PnP sensor is connected to the sensor input, this automatically generates an entry in the setup. All infor-
mation (sensor name, type or inputs) is updated by the titrator (if a PnP sensor is not connected, the entry
"PnP" appears for the sensor input ).
• The setup may contain several PnP sensors with identical sensor IDs but with different sensor input infor-
mation. When the analysis starts, a validation is carried out during which the user is prompted to remove a
sensor. For several PnP sensors with the same ID, all entries apart from one are deleted when the sensors
are removed.
The following settings are available for configuring a sensor depending on the sensor type selected:
Sensor type: mV
types
span

Sensor type: pH
types
Zero point The zero point of the pH sensor in the relevant unit. -100 … 100
-20 … 200 [°C]
-4.0 … 392 [°F]
253.2 … 473.2 [K]
temperature
life monitored.
span
Note
• The parameters zero point, slope and the corresponding calibration temperature are required to convert the
mV signal of the sensor to the selected unit. These appear only for the unit [pH].
Sensor type: Phototrode
types
Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will mV | %T | A
Wavelength The Phototrode DP5 features a selection of 5 fixed wavelengths in 520 | 555 | 590 | 620 |
[nm]. 660
-20 … 200 [°C]
-4.0 … 392 [°F]
253.2 … 473.2 [K]
Slope The slope of the phototrode in [mV/%T]. -100…100
temperature
life monitored.

span
Note
• The parameter Calib. temperature cannot be edited for segmented calibration; in this case, the system
displays an information field.
Sensor type: Polarized
types
Unit The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will mV | µA
span
Sensor type: Temperature or Thermometric
types
Zero point The adjusted point from the theoretical value for reading 0.0 °C. -20 … 200 [°C]
-4.0 … 392 [°F]
253.2 … 473.2 [K]
Calibration Shows the method of the last change to the calibration values. Manual | Name of
method Manual: The calibration values were entered or changed calibration method
manually in the sensor setup.
Name of calibration method: The calibration values were change
by a calibration method.
life monitored.
span
Sensor type: Conductivity
types

T compensation For the temperature compensation, the titrator converts the Linear | Non linear |
conductivity to a defined reference temperature. Inactive
Linear: The conductivity is linearly converted to a reference
temperature. The linearity is described by the temperature
coefficient [%/°C].
Non linear: The conductivity is converted to a reference
temperature non-linearly, in accordance with the EN norm 27
888.
Inactive: The conductivity is determined without temperature
compensation.
T coefficient The temperature coefficient in [%/°C] defines the percentage of 0.001…100
the change in conductivity for linear temperature compensation for
a temperature increase of 1°C.
Appears for T compensation = Linear only.
Ref. temperature The reference temperature in [°C] for the temperature compen- 25.0 | 20.0
sation.
Appears for T compensation = Linear or Non linear only.
Cell constant The cell constant in [1/cm] can be entered here. The cell constant 0…100
value [mS | µS] into the conductivity [mS/cm | µS/cm]. The
temperature compensation only affects the conductivity, not the
conductance.
temperature
life monitored.
span
Note
• The temperature compensation is only performed for the units µS/cm and mS/cm (conductivity).
Temperature compensation is not conducted for units of measure µS and mS (conductance).
• The parameter Calib. temperature is required during the calibration to determine the temperature-dependent
conductivity of conductivity standards.
(Only appears for Unit = µS/cm or mS/cm.)
Sensor type: ISE
You can define the following parameters:
types

-20 … 200 [°C]
-4.0 … 392 [°F]
253.2 … 473.2 [K]
life monitored.
span
Note
• For ISE sensors there are two independent calibration sets, one for the units "pM" or "pX" and one for the
unit "ppm".
• When calibrating an ISE sensor in ppm units, the sensor's slope and zero point are specified in pX or pM
units.
9.3.1.1.1 Sensor calibration

pH, ISE, temperature and conductivity sensors can all be calibrated with the titrator. The phototrode can only be
manually calibrated. To do this the relationship between sensor signal and transmission capacity must be
determined and the calibration parameter to be determined (normally only the gradient from a single point
calibration) must be entered "manually" in the selected phototrode.
Temperature sensors are calibrated with the temperature standard "freezing water" (0°C). For conductivity
sensors, you can choose the desired standard for the calibration from a standards list. Here a single point
calibration is performed to determine the cell constant.
Two calibration modes are available for the calibrating pH and ISE sensors that can be selected. Linear
calibration and segmented calibration.
Starting a sensor calibration
§ A calibration method needs to be available.
1 Select the sensor that you wish to calibrate in the list view.
2 Select Start Calibration in the toolbar.
3 Edit the parameters and start the task.
ð Upon inserting the corresponding PnP burette on the titrator, it can be assigned to the titrant.

Linear calibration
Linear calibration is explained below taking the example of pH sensor.
In linear calibration the 1st step is the capture of measurement data and the interpolation of the pH values with
the buffer table to the effective values (the values used are only provided as an example):
Selected buffer During the mV values pH (effective) by
solutions calibration of the measured during interpolation
recorded calibration according to the pH
temperature buffer table
1st Buffer 4.01 (at 25°C) 17 °C 172 mV 4.00
2nd Buffer 7.00 (at 25°C) 22 °C 0 mV 7.012
3rd Buffer 9.21 (at 25°C) 27 °C -129 mV 9.19
In a second step, the mV measured values are converted to the averaged temperature "TAverage" (17°C+22°C
+27°C) / 3 = 22°C):
Selected buffer solutions mV values measured Temperature-corrected
during calibration measured values for
TMean = 22°C
1st Buffer 4.01 (at 25°C) 172 mV 174.96 mV
2nd Buffer 7.00 (at 25°C) 0 mV 0 mV
3rd Buffer 9.21 (at 25°C) -129 mV -126.85 mV
In the third stage, the gradient (TMean) and the mV value at pH 0 are determined by linear regression with the
value pairs from mV (TMean) and pH (effective). The zero value is found from the mV value at pH 0, divided by
the gradient (TMean):
• Slope (TMean) = -58.15
• mV value at pH 0 = 407.61 mV
• Zero point [pH]= mV value at 0 pH/Slope (TMean) = 7.010 [pH]
Lastly, the slope at (TMean) is back-calculated to the slope at (25°C).
• Slope (25°C) = -58.74 (=99.3% of the theoretical value)
Segmented calibration
With segmented calibration, no linear regression is performed across all measured points; instead, line
segments that connect the individual calibration points are used. In this way allowance can be made for a non-
linear performance of the sensor over a larger measurement range. For n standard solutions, (n-1) segments
are evaluated.

The segmented calibration is explained below taking the example of an ISE sensor (F- ).
Just as in the case of linear segmentation initially the readings are recorded:
During the calibration of Standard value (pX) at mV values measured
the recorded temperature measuring temperature during calibration
Standard 1 25 °C 4.00 (at 25°C) 162.0 mV
Standard 2 25 °C 2.00 (at 25°C) 42.0 mV
Standard 3 25 °C 9.21 (at 25°C) -15.0 mV
The mV measured values are then converted to the averaged temperature (not necessary in the example
because the temperature is constantly 25°C) and a linear regression is conducted for each segment. Thus for
each segment a gradient and the mV value at pH 0 are determined (both related to the mean temperature) and
from both values the zero point is respectively calculated:
During the mV value at 0 pH Slope (TMean) Zero point [pX]
calibration of the (based on TMean)
recorded
temperature
Segment 1 25 °C -78.00 mV 60.00 1.30
Segment 2 25 °C -72.00 mV 57.00 1.26
Afterward, the slope is converted to the reference temperature of 25°C (not necessary in this example, because
(TMean) is already 25°C.
9.3.1.1.2 Sensor test

pH, ISE, temperature and conductivity sensors can all be calibrated with the titrator. The phototrode can only be
manually calibrated. To do this the relationship between sensor signal and transmission capacity must be
determined and the calibration parameter to be determined (normally only the gradient from a single point
calibration) must be entered "manually" in the selected phototrode.
Temperature sensors are calibrated with the temperature standard "freezing water" (0°C). For conductivity
sensors, you can choose the desired standard for the calibration from a standards list. Here a single point
calibration is performed to determine the cell constant.
Two calibration modes are available for the calibrating pH and ISE sensors that can be selected. Linear
calibration and segmented calibration.

Starting a sensor test
§ A test method needs to be available.
1 Select the sensor that you wish to test in the list view.
2 Select Start Test in the toolbar.
3 Edit the parameters and start the task.
9.3.1.1.3 Sensor calibration history

The date, time and calibration data of the calibrations are displayed in list form on this window.
Display a calibration history
1 Select the sensor for that you wish to display the calibration history in the list view.
2 Select Show Calibration History in the toolbar.
ð The window to display the parameters opens.
Data Selection
Calibrations from Defines the date range of calibrations to be displayed. Click Retrieve Data to
update that listed entries.
Calibration
Calibration History Select the calibration entries to be shown by checking the box Show.
Entries
Calibration History Chart Select calibration parameters, and if applicable segments, to be represented
against the date of the calibration from the drop-down lists.
To fit the represented curves, click Fit Chart.
Selected calibration Detailed information in list view are represented for the selected entries.
details
9.3.1.1.4 Sensor test history

The date, time and test data of the test are displayed in list form on this window.
Display a test history
1 Select the sensor for that you wish to display the test history in the list view.
2 Select Show Test History in the toolbar.
Data Selection
Calibrations from Defines the date range of calibrations to be displayed. Click Retrieve Data to
update that listed entries.
Test
Test History Entries Select the test entries to be shown by checking the box Show.

Test History Chart Select test parameters, and if applicable segments, to be represented against the
date of the test from the drop-down lists.
Selected test details Detailed information in list view are represented for the selected entries.
9.3.1.1.5 Value ranges from sensor measuring units and control band
Sensor type Meas. Value range Value range EP relative Value range Control band
unit
mV mV -2x103…2x103 -4x103…4x103 0.1…4x103
pH pH -100…100 -100.00…100.00 0.01…100
mV -2x103…2x103 -4x103…4x103 0.1…4x103
ISE pM | pX -100…100 -100.00…100.00 0.01…100
6 7 7
ppm 0…10 -10 …10 0.001…107
mV -2x103…2x103 -4x103…4x103 0.1…4x103
3 3
Phototrode %T 0.001…100 -1x10 …1x10 0.1…1x103
A 0…5 -106…106 0.01…106
mV -2x103…2x103 -4x103…4x103 0.1…4x103
Polarized mV 0…2x103 -2x103…2x103 0.1…2x103
µA 0…220 -220.0…220.0 0.1…220
Temperature °C -20…200 -220.0…220.0 0.1…220.0
K 253.2…473.2 -220.0…220.0 0.1…220.0
°F -4…392 -396.0…396.0 0.1…396.0
Conductivity µS/cm 0…106 -106…106 0.001…106
mS/cm 0…106 -106…106 0.001…106
µS 0…108 -106…106 0.001…106
mS 0…108 -108…108 0.001…106
9.3.1.2 Pumps
You can configure a maximum of 20 pumps for use with the titrator. Starting from the pump list, you can add
new pumps or select existing ones and change their settings. The list can also be printed and pumps can be
deleted.
You can set up different pumps. For each pump, you need to specify an explicit, user-defined name, the
pumping rate and the connection from which the pump should operate.
Note
• The Karl Fischer Solvent Manager is predefined in Setup when connecting to the back of the instrument, and
cannot be configured individually. All pump ports on the instrument but also on the InMotion autosampler
are available for connection.
• Two Solvent Managers or Air pumps can be defined per instrument.
on the PC.
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Pumps
Add a pump
1 Select New Pump in the toolbar.

2 Choose the desired titrator and type of pump.
Type Defines the type of pump. Available pump types
Max. pump rate Displays the pump rate in [mL/min] when the pump is operated 0.1…1000
at 100%. This is stated by the manufacturer or determined experi-
mentally.
9.3.1.3 Peripherals
These settings encompass all input and output devices that belong to the titrator environment but that are not
essential instruments for processing an analysis (peripherals cannot be accessed in methods).
on the PC.
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Peripherals
Edit peripherals
2 Select Edit Peripherals in the toolbar.
ð The window with several tabs to edit the parameters opens.
9.3.1.3.1 Balance
Balances can either be connected directly to the instrument or to LabX. here you find the description for a direct
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Peripherals > Balance
Before defining a balance, you need to select the balance type. The titrator supports the following types of
balance:
Balance type Supported balances
Mettler AB | PB | PB-S | AB-S | PB-E | AB-E | College-S | SB | CB | GB | College-B |
HB | AG | PG | PG-S | SG | HG | XP | XS | XA | XPE | XSE | XVE | AX | MX |
UMX | PR | SR | HR | AT | MT | UMT | PM | AM | SM | CM | MS | ML | XPR | XSR
Sartorius Sartorius
Others -
METTLER TOLEDO Balances

These balances support Plug'n'Play and are automatically recognized and configured by the titrator.
For automatic balance recognition, you need to ensure the following:
1. The balance has been started up and is connected to the titrator by a suitable cable,
2. The balance has been set to "Bidirectional" (if necessary, set the "Host" parameter accordingly),
3. The parameters for the RS-232 interface on the balance correspond with those on the titrator.
Note
• As long as the balance is not connected to the titrator, the settings "Baud Rate", "Data Bit", "Stop Bit",
"Parity" and "Handshake" can be entered manually. These are however automatically overwritten with the
values identified by the PnP as soon as the user sets the same transmission parameters at the balance and
the titrator.

Type Defines the type and the brand of a balance as well as the type of Mettler RS-232 | Mettler
connection. USB | Sartorius | Others |
Mettler RS-232: For METTLER TOLEDO balances connected via None
RS-232 port.
Mettler USB: For METTLER TOLEDO balances connected via USB
port.
Sartorius/Others: For other brands of balances connected via an
RS-232 port.
None: No balance is to be connected to the titrator.
Status Indicates whether the balance is connected to the titrator. Installed | Not installed
9600 | 19200
rate of 9600.)
9.3.1.3.2 Barcode reader

When a barcode is imported, the system checks whether the imported barcode is suitable for starting a method.
If so, the analysis starts on the corresponding instrument. On a InMotion sample changer, the position CP+1
will be assigned. The barcode will be ignored if it cannot be recognized.
If an analysis is already running with the same method ID, the sample is added to the end of the current
analysis.
Note
• Only one barcode reader can be defined.
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Peripherals > Barcode reader
Transfer Transfer barcode to LabX. Active | Inactive
SmartCodes to
LabX
9.3.1.3.3 USB stick

Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Peripherals > USB-Stick
Commercially available USB sticks from USB Version 1.1 are supported.
You can assign a relevant name to the USB stick.

9.3.1.3.4 Printer
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Peripherals > Printer
Printer
The following printer types are supported by the titrator:
• RS-232 compact printer (RS-P26)
• USB compact printer
The following data is printed using these printers:

Results All except for curves and tables of measured values
Method function Record Overview
Results
Raw results
Resource data
Sample data
Method data
Note
• The USB-B port on the mainboard is exclusively reserved for LabX.
• The available printers are different from the operation in the offline mode.
USB compact printer

Connection Information on the USB port to which the printer is connected. PnP MB/USB 1/2/Terminal
is displayed if the printer is not connected to the titrator.
Printer type Defines the type of printer or data export used. RS-232 compact
printer | USB compact
printer | LabX printer
RS-232
Name Information on the name of the installed printer is displayed. RS-P26
Baud rate Information on the baud rate for data transmission via the RS-232 2400
interface.
Data bit Information on the number of data bits is displayed. 8
Stop bit Information the number of stop bits is displayed. 1
Parity Information on the parity defined for the report is displayed. No
Handshake Information on data transmission via the RS-232 interface. None
9.3.1.3.5 Fingerprint reader

You can use a fingerprint reader to authenticate users on instruments. In order to do this, the fingerprint reader
must be activated on the instrument.

Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Peripherals > Fingerprint reader
Activate Activates the fingerprint reader for authenticating users when Active | Inactive
fingerprint reader logging onto the titrator.
Status Indicates whether the fingerprint reader is connected to the titrator. Installed | Not installed
Name The designation of the fingerprint reader. Arbitrary
Connection Information on the USB port to which the fingerprint reader is PnP | USB 1
connected. PnP is displayed if the fingerprint reader is not
9.3.1.3.6 LevelSens
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Peripherals > LevelSens
The level sensor (LevelSens) can be used either to monitor the fill level of titration or solvent vessels or to
prevent the overflow of waste vessels.
The level sensor is connected to the "LevelSens box", which is connected to the titrator via the CAN interface.
The titrator automatically recognizes up to two of these boxes (PnP recognition). These appear in the settings.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > LevelSens
1 In LevelSens, tap on a "LevelSens box".
2 The parameters Level, Waste or Inactive can be defined for the relevant sensor type
Activating level monitoring
• At the start of a method or a manual operation.
The level is checked for all activated and connected sensors, regardless of whether they are used in the
method.
• At the start of each sample (GT).
• After completion of a Karl Fischer analysis (KF).
• Before the start of a KF Stromboli method.
• Before replacing the solvent.
• During the course of the following manual operations: Burette (Rinse, Rinse multiple burettes, Dispense,
Manual titration), Pump, Auxiliary instrument (output 24V), Sample changer (Pump, Rinse).
If the fill level is not reached or exceeded, a message appears with a prompt either to empty or fill the vessel
(depending on the Setup setting: Waste or Level). The analysis is interrupted during this time. After the vessel
has been emptied or filled and the message has been confirmed, the analysis is resumed.
Note
• Only two LevelSens boxes can be entered in the settings. Additional boxes do not generate an additional
entry.
• Entries in the settings can only be deleted if the corresponding LevelSens box is not installed.
• The sensor must be fitted in such a way that when the maximum fill level is reached, the analysis of a
sample, the entire loop of a Stromboli method or a solvent replacement can be performed.
• The fill level is only checked before a sample analysis, at the start of a Stromboli method or before a solvent
replacement.
Name Information on the designation of the LevelSens box. -
In the settings, the first detected box is entered as LevelSens Box
1, the second as LevelSens Box 2.
Chip ID Information on the Chip-ID of the detected LevelSens box. -
Position Information on the position of the LevelSens box connected to the PnP | PnP1 | PnP2
titrator.

Sensor 1 type… Specifies the sensor type to be used. Level | Waste | Inactive
Sensor 4 type
9.3.1.3.7 TBox
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Peripherals > TBox
The following parameters are available for the METTLER TOLEDO TBox: TBox connected. This parameter
specifies whether or not the TBox is connected to the titrator.
9.3.1.3.8 External SmartChemical reader

You can use a SmartChemical reader to read data from reagent bottles tagged accordingly. The following
parameters are available for the SmartChemical reader:
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > External SmartChemical reader
Status Indicates whether the SmartChemical reader is connected to the Installed | Not installed
titrator.
Name The designation of the SmartChemical reader. Arbitrary
Serial number Information on the serial number of the device. Arbitrary
Connection Information on the USB port to which the SmartChemical reader is PnP | USB 1
connected. PnP is displayed if the SmartChemical reader is not
9.3.1.4 Titration stands

Starting from the titration stand list, you can add new titration stands or select existing ones and modify their
parameters. Furthermore the list can be printed out or individual titration stands can be deleted, whereby one of
each type must be in the list.
Configure the following titration stands that can be connected to the titrator.
• Manual stand
• Auto stand
• External stand
• Rondo/Tower A and Rondo/Tower B
• InMotion T/Tower A and InMotion T/Tower B
• Rondolino TTL
• Stromboli TTL
• KF stand
• InMotion KF
on the PC.
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Titration Stands
Add a titration stand
1 Select New Titration Stand in the toolbar.
2 Choose the desired titrator and type of titration stand.

9.3.1.4.1 Manual stand
The manual stand is typically used for the METTLER TOLEDO Manual Titration Stands. Before each sample in
the series is analyzed, a popup window requesting confirmation that the respective sample is in place will
appear. The selected titration stand defines the stirrer output used in following method functions requiring a
function Stir.
9.3.1.4.2 Auto stand

If you use an auto stand, the popup window that reminds you to add the respective sample does not appear.
Thus an interruption-free analysis sequence can be guaranteed for multiple determinations with an automation
unit. The selected titration stand defines the stirrer output used in following method functions requiring a
function Stir.
9.3.1.4.3 External stand

The external stand is typically used for stands not directly attached to the titrator. Before each sample in the
series is analyzed, a popup window requesting confirmation that the resepective sample in place will appear.
Stir.
9.3.1.4.4 Rondolino TTL

The Rondolino sample changer can hold 9 samples to be tested in sequence. The Rondolino connects to the
TTL port on the titrator. The selected titration stand defines the stirrer output used in following method functions
requiring a function Stir.
9.3.1.4.5 Stromboli TTL

The Stromboli oven sample changer can hold 14 sample vials and one drift vial. The Stromboli connects to the
TTL port on the titrator.

Connection Information on the connection type. MB/TTL
method
9.3.1.4.6 InMotion
accompanying sample rack. The InMotion Autosampler connects to USB1 on the titrator. InMotion
Autosamplers and attached towers are PnP devices that are automatically recognized and installed upon
connection to the titrator. If a second InMotion Autosampler is to be attached, a USB expander must be used at
the titrator for the second USB connection. The USB expander ports on the back of the first InMotion
Autosampler attached can also be used for the connection. The first InMotion device attached is labelled
InMotion T/1A and the second attached to the system will be labeled InMotion T/2A in the list. If unattached
and reattached after the initial installation, the titrator will know which InMotion Autosampler is /1 and /2
according their Chip ID. An InMotion Autosampler can also manually be added to the Titration Stand list with
default parameters if needed for method programming.
CoverUp Indicates whether this option is installed. Installed | Not installed
SmartSample Indicates whether a SmartSample reader is installed for the inner Installed | Not installed
inner row.
SmartSample Indicates whether a SmartSample reader for the outer row is Installed | Not installed
outer installed.
Barcode reader Indicates whether this option is installed. Installed | Not installed
Only the outer rack row can be used with the barcode option.
Rack Indicates the type of the installed rack. Standard | Water bath |
Standard: Standard rack. Dual | PnP
Dual: Rack type with two types of beaker sizes.
PnP: No rack is detected.
the rack
For COD kit = Active the value range is different.
Conditioning Defines if a specific condition beaker is used. The last beaker Active | Inactive
beaker position of the rack is the specific conditioning beaker position.
This parameter is stored in the rack.

Rinse beaker Defines if a specific rinse beaker is used. Active | Inactive
Special beaker Defines if specific special beaker are used. Rinse beaker positions Active | Inactive
1…Special are next to the conditioning beaker.
beaker 4 These parameters are stored in the rack.
Note
When fixed beakers are defined, they cannot be used for samples and are reserved for Conditioning, Rinse
and Line rinse method functions only. The fixed beakers reserve the last available positions on the rack, in the
order stated above, with conditioning beaker being last.
COD kit Defines if the system is used with the Aliquot Kit. Active | Inactive
For InMotion Pro with 25 mL rack only.
Aliquot beaker Defines whether the extension on InMotion is installed for an Active | Inactive
aliquot beaker. Aliquoting is not possible with all rack types. For
InMotion Pro only.
9.3.1.4.7 InMotion KF
InMotion KF titration stands are available on the following titrator types:
• T7
• T9
• C30S
• V30S
Gas stop valve Indicates whether a gas stop valve is installed on the sample Installed | Not installed
changer.
Air pump KF Indicates whether an air pump is installed on the sample Installed | Not installed
changer.
Heated transfer Indicates whether a heated transfer tube is installed on the sample Installed | Not installed
tube changer.
Rack Indicates the type of the installed rack. KF | PnP
KF: a standard rack is detected.
PnP: no rack is detected.
the rack
Vial height Defines the height of the vials used on the rack. 34…60 mm
method
type

9.3.1.4.8 Rondo60
The Rondo autosampler can hold 12-60 samples depending on the accompanying sample rack. The Rondo is
connected to either MB1/COM or MB2/COM ports on the titrator. The Rondo60 is automatically named /1 or /2
according to the COM port is attached. The Rondo and attached Towers are PnP devices that are automatically
recognized and installed upon connection to the titrator. A Rondo can also manually be added to the Titration
Stand list with default parameters if needed for method programming.
Rack Indicates the size off the installed rack. 20 | 12 | 15 | 30 | 60
Beaker height Beaker configuration of the installed rack. 90 | 110 | 150 | 210
Tower position Indicates the tower position configuration off Rondo. Left | Right
Conditioning Conditioning beaker setting of the installed rack. Installed | Not installed
beaker
Rinse beaker Indicates the beaker setting of the installed rack. Installed | Not installed
CoverUp Defines whether a CoverUp unit is connected to the Rondo and, if Rondo/1 TTL-Out 1 |
so, to which port. Select None if there is no CoverUp unit on your Rondo/1 TTL-Out 2 |
Rondo. Rondo/2 TTL-Out 1 |
Only appears when Rack = 20 has been selected. Rondo/2 TTL-Out 2 |
MB/TTL-Out 1 | MB/TTL-
Out 2 | None
9.3.1.4.9 KF stand
Stir.

Auxiliary instruments can be any instruments that access a titrator's TTL or 24 V output, stirrer or RS-232
connection and that are to be used in a method (e.g. valves, dispensers).
An auxiliary instrument is switched on for a predefined period or switched on and then switched off again via
the corresponding command. The instruments are controlled via the method function Auxiliary instrument.
Auxiliary instruments form part of a method, while peripherals are classified as input/output devices (printers,
balances, barcode readers etc.), which do not have direct access to methods.
Starting from the auxiliary instrument list, you can add new auxiliary instruments or select existing ones or
modify their parameters. Furthermore the list can be printed out at a printer or selected auxiliary instruments can
be deleted.

Note
• A maximum of 50 auxiliary instruments can be saved in the titrator.
on the PC.
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Auxiliary instrument
Add an auxiliary instrument
1 Select New Auxiliary Instrument in the toolbar.
2 Choose the desired titrator and the control type.
Control type Information on the manner in which the auxiliary instrument is Output 24 V | Out TTL
controlled. (Single pin) | Input TTL
(Single pin) | TTL
(Multipin) | Stirrer |
RS-232
Output 24 V/Stirrer (0-18V output)
More depending on
configuration
TTL
Output Indicates which port and which pin on the titrator you want to use MB/TTL-Out 1 | MB/TTL-
for the auxiliary instrument. Out 2 | MB/TTL-Out 3 |
Does not appears for Control type = Input TTL (Single pin). MB/TTL-Out 4 | More
ration
Only appears for Control type = Input TTL (Single pin). 2
RS-232
9600 | 19200

rate of 9600.)
9.3.1.6 Homogenizers
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Homogenizer
Edit Homogenizers
1 In the list view, choose the desired Homogenizer.
2 Select Edit Homogenizer in the toolbar.
Homogenizer TTL
Output Defines the output to which the device is connected. MB/TTL-Out 1…MB/TTL-
Out 4 | Rondo/1 TTL-Out
1…Rondo/2 TTL-Out 4 |
(More depending on
configuration)
Homogenizer RS
Status Determines whether or not the titrator is connected to the homog- Installed | Not installed
enizer.
Output Indicates which port on the titrator you want to use. MB/COM1 | MB/COM2 |
AB1/COM | (More
ration)
• For the homogenizer of type PT 1300D (RS interface), the panel for changing or saving the speed during
operation is blocked via the titrator (GLP conformity).
• It is not possible to change an entry while a method that uses a homogenizer is running.
• For the status Installed, balance and sample changer polling is deactivated.
• The parameters for serial connection are for information only and cannot be changed.
9.3.1.7 Liquid Handlers

If a Liquid Handler is connected, the titrator detects the Liquid Handler automatically (PnP) and the identifi-
cation parameters are transferred to the titrator's setup. Specify the setup parameters, for example to assign the
ports to the related connections. Port 6 is fixed assigned to the waste port. The waste port is required to
discharge residual solutions upon liquid exchange or to remove excessive liquid volumes from the burette.
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Liquid Handler

Edit Liquid Handler
1 Select Edit Liquid Handler in the toolbar.

Name The first connected Liquid Handler is displayed as Liquid Handler Liquid Handler 1 | Liquid
1 and the second one as Liquid Handler 2. Handler 2
For T9 you can change the name only if one Liquid Handler is
available and is not connected.
Chip ID Information on the ID of the Liquid Handler's PnP chip. Arbitrary
Position Information on the position of the Liquid Handler. 1 | 2 | PnP (default
value)
Burette volume Information on the volume [mL] of the Liquid Handler's burette. 50 mL (default)
SNR Burette glass The serial number of the burette glass can be entered. Arbitrary
Port 1…6 Indicates the position of the multiport valve. Active | Inactive
Connection The corresponding ports and the connected components can be Arbitrary
designated. The names can then be selected within the method
function Liquid Handling.
Note
• After the removing of the Liquid Handler, the data (name, chip-ID, burette volume, SNR burette glass,
connections and port assignments) remain at the titrator's setup.
• When a Liquid Handler is connected, the chip-ID will be overwritten.
• When more than one Liquid Handler are connected, the existing Setup entries will be assigned to the
related.
Liquid Handler, according to the connection order.
• The last Liquid Handler in the list cannot be deleted.
9.3.2 Values
Blanks and auxiliary values can be created, edited and deleted and the list of defined blanks or auxiliary values
can be viewed and printed out. It is also possible to print out the individual values with their parameters.
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Values
Values of all to LabX connected instruments are shown, also from instruments that are offline. To edit values,
relevant titrators must be "Online".
on the PC.
9.3.2.1 Blanks
Blanks can be used in formulas for calculations. They can either be created manually with the aid of their
various parameters or generated as the result of a method. A resulting blank (or calculated mean value) can
then be assigned to a blank using the method function Blank. The blank will then appear under the assigned
name in the Blank list in Setup.
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Values > Blanks
Add a blank value
1 Select New Blank in the toolbar.
2 Choose the desired titrator.

life monitored.
Note
• A maximum of 100 blanks can be saved in the titrator.
• Blanks cannot be deleted or modified if they are currently in use.
• When a blank is assigned with the "Blank" method function, this is updated in the setup immediately after
completion of the method function.
9.3.2.2 Auxiliary values

You can use auxiliary values in formulas. They can either be manually created and edited or can be generated
using a method. A result, a mean derived from several results or a raw result can be assigned to an auxiliary
value by means of the "Auxiliary Value" method function. The auxiliary value then appears under the assigned
name in the auxiliary values list in the Setup.
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Values > Auxiliary values
Add an auxiliary value
1 Select New Auxiliary Value in the toolbar.
life monitored.
Note
• A maximum of 100 auxiliary values can be saved in the titrator.
• Auxiliary values cannot be deleted or modified when they are currently in use.
• When an auxiliary value is assigned with the method function Auxiliary value, this is updated in the setup
immediately after completion of the method function.
9.3.3 Chemicals
In Chemicals, configure and manage the titrant, auxiliary reagents, concentration/titer standard, and other
substances. You can view and print out lists of chemicals that have already been defined. You can also specify
new chemicals or delete created chemicals.
Auxiliary reagents must be assigned to a pump with which they can be added. Titrants (independently of the
type) must each be assigned to a drive.
Chemicals of all to LabX connected instruments are shown, also from instruments that are offline. To edit
chemicals, relevant titrators must be "Online".
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Chemicals
on the PC.
9.3.3.1 Titrants
Titrants are managed together with burettes and burette drive (PnP with chip and traditional burettes without
chips).

For classical burettes, the relevant titrant data is entered manually. For PnP (Plug&Play) burettes, the data is
automatically read from the chip and automatically transferred to the instrument and to LabX.
on the PC.
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Chemicals > Titrants
Add a titrant
1 Select New Titrant in the toolbar.
2 Choose the desired titrator and the type of titrant.
Type The type of titrant. You can select from the following types of General titration |
titrant: Auxiliary reagent |
General titration: Classical titrants for general titration. Karl Fischer titration |
Auxiliary reagent: If you are adding reagents manually using a Standard Addition
burette.
Karl Fischer titration: Karl Fischer titrant.
Standard Addition: For adding standards using a burette.
Concentration The concentration of the titrant, in [mol/L]. 0.00001…100
For Type = General titration.
The non-dimensional concentration of an auxiliary reagent. 0.00001…104
For Type = Auxiliary reagent.
The concentration of the titrant in [mg/L] 0.00001...40'000
For Type = Standard Addition.
Titer The titer for the titrant. 0.00001…10
For Type = General titration, Standard Addition
Current conc. Actual concentration of the Karl Fischer titrant in [mg/mL]. 0.1…100
Burette volume Select the burette volume in [mL]. 1 | 5 | 10 | 20
Drive Defines the drive on which you will use the burette containing the 1…8 | PnP
titrant. Select the "PnP" entry for available but unused PnP
burettes.

life monitored.
span
Monitoring shelf life
Monitoring shelf Specifies whether the shelf life of the resource is to be monitored. Active | Inactive
life
Note
• Titrants (independently of the type) must each be assigned to a drive.
• A maximum of 100 titrants can be defined in the instrument.
• In PnP burettes, the serial number is entered automatically. This can, however, be changed.
9.3.3.1.1 Titrant history

Navigation: Resources > Titration > Chemicals > Titrants
The date, time and test data of the test are displayed in list form on this window.
Display a test history
1 Select the titrant for that you wish to display the history in the list view.
2 Select Show Titrant History in the toolbar.
Data Selection
History from Defines the date range to be displayed. Click Retrieve Data to update that listed
entries.
Titrant History Entries Select the entries to be shown by checking the box Show.
Titrant History Chart Select parameters, and if applicable segments, to be represented against the date
from the drop-down lists.

9.3.3.2 Auxiliary reagents
Auxiliary reagents are liquid chemicals that can be used to aid the titration process. Auxiliary reagents must be
added using a pump and can be used via the method functions Pumps and Rinse.
on the PC.
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Chemicals > Auxiliary reagents
Add an auxiliary reagent
1 Select New Auxiliary Reagent.
9.3.3.3 Calibration standards

Calibration standards are used for the calibration of sensors. The instrument contains various calibration
standard lists for the calibration of pH sensors (pH buffer lists), ISE sensors (ISE standard lists) and conduc-
tivity sensors (conductivity standard lists) (see Appendix). In this dialog, you can view and print the predefined
lists stored in the titrator, and create additional user-defined calibration standard lists for pH buffers and ISE and
conductivity standards.
on the PC.
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Chemicals > Calibration standards
Add a new user-defined calibration standard lists
1 Select New Calibration Standard in the toolbar.
2 Choose the desired titrator and type of standard.
3 After you have created a calibration standard list, you can add various buffers and standards to this list,
depending on the type selected.
Type Select the corresponding type for the new calibration standard list. pH | Auto pH | ISE |
Conductivity
Unit The unit of measure to be used will depend on the type selected. pH | pM | pX | ppm |
mS/cm | µS/cm
Base list Add the calibration standard lists of various pH buffers by List of available
selecting them from the list. calibration standards
Only for Type = Auto pH.
Ref. temperature Define the reference temperature of the buffer. -20…200
Note
• To delete a user-defined calibration standard list from the titrator, you must first access the parameters in
the list via Info. From this window, you can delete the calibration standard list by selecting Delete.

• A maximum of 20 user-defined calibration standard lists and 10 auto pH buffer lists can be defined in the
titrator.
Add a pH Calibration Standard (pH Buffer)
§ After creating a calibration standard list of the type pH, add various pH buffers to it.
1 In New buffer at 25 °C, enter the respective pH value of the buffer, based on the reference temperature from
the calibration standard list and click Add Buffer. Repeat this step for additional buffers.
ð To reflect the temperature influence of a pH buffer, enter a maximum of 20 value pairs for each
individual buffer composed.
2 In New temperature [°C], enter the respective temperature value, based on the reference temperature from
the calibration standard list and click Add Temperature. Repeat this step for additional temperatures.
3 Enter the pH values for each buffer in all given temperatures rows in the table.
4 Save the list by clicking Save and Close.
Add a pH Calibration Standard (pH buffer) of type Auto pH
§ For a calibration standard list of the type Auto pH, the various pH buffers are detected by the titrator
automatically. In order to ensure positive identification, the pH values of the individual solutions must differ
from each other by at least two pH points.
1 In New buffer at 25 °C, select the respective pH value of the buffer and click Add Buffer. Repeat this step
for additional buffers.
Note
• The temperature dependency of the individual pH buffers is also taken from the base list and cannot be
edited, only viewed.
Add an ISE Calibration Standard (ISE Standard)
§ After creating a calibration standard list of the type ISE, you can add various ISE standards to it.
1 In New standard at x °C, enter the corresponding value for the standard in the desired unit of measure,
based on the reference temperature from the calibration standard list and click Add Standard. Repeat this
step for additional standards.
ð To reflect the temperature influence of an ISE standard, enter a maximum of 20 value pairs for each
3 Enter the values for each standard in all given temperatures rows in the table.
Add a Conductivity Calibration Standard (Conductivity Standard)
§ After creating a calibration standard list of the type Conductivity, add various standards to it.
1 In New standard at x °C, enter the respective conductivity value of the standard, based on the reference
temperature from the calibration standard list and click Add Standard. Repeat this step for additional
standards.
each individual buffer composed.
3 Enter the conductivity values for each standard in all given temperatures rows in the table.
9.3.3.4 Concentration and titer standards

Enter and manage the concentration and titer standards required for titer determinations and the Karl Fischer
water standards for the concentration determination of KF titrants.

on the PC.
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Chemicals > Concentration and titer standards
Add a standard
1 Select New Concentration or Titer Standard in the toolbar.
2 Choose the desired titrator and type of standard.
Type Defines the type of standard. solid | liquid | KF
Purity The purity of a solid standard, in percent. 0.001…101.000
Only for Type = solid.
Concentration The concentration of a liquid standard, in [mol/L]. 0.00001…100
Only for Type = liquid.
Water content The water content of a Karl Fischer standard. 0.00001…106
Unit Unit for the water content of the Karl Fischer standard. mg/g | mg/mL | % |
ppm | mg/piece
M The molar mass of a solid standard, in [g/mol]. 10-5…103
Density The density of a liquid standard, in [g/mL]. 0.0001…100
Only for Type = liquid or KF.
number
Supplier Defines the name of the company that supplied the chemical. 1…30 characters
Compliance Defines the specification regarding the manufacturer's accredi- List of specifications
tation for the substance.
Uncertainty Defines the uncertainty of the chemical as given by the supplier. 0.001…100
life monitored.

Monitoring expiry date
Monitoring expiry Specifies whether the expiry date of the resource is to be Active | Inactive
date monitored.
Expiry date Defines the expiry date of the chemical stored in original Date
Note
• All fields except for Lot/Batch must be filled before the standard can be saved.
• A maximum of 50 titer standards can be defined.
9.3.3.5 Substances
Any chemical substances that are required for performing your analyses can be managed using name,
empirical formula, molecular weight, and equivalent number.
on the PC.
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Chemicals > Substances
Add a substance
1 Select New Substance in the toolbar.
Empirical formula Defines the empirical formula of the substance. Arbitrary
Molecular weight Defines the molecular weight of the substance. 0.0001…104
number
Note
• A maximum of 100 substances can be defined.
9.3.4 Expired resources

Resources for which monitoring was selected in the settings can expire. Select Expired Resources to open an
overview of all expired resources with the type, name and date of expiry of the respective resource. The desired
titrator must be "Online".
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Expired Resources
9.4 Resources Density Refractometry

You can create new sets and delete existing ones (when deleting you receive a prompt with the option to
cancel). Before an adjustment or test can be performed, an adjustment or test set must be defined. A maximum
of six different adjustment sets or test sets respectively can be entered in the set list. Before an adjustment or
test can be performed, an adjustment or test set must be defined.

9.4.1 Manage adjustment sets
Enter all adjustment sets that are used for adjustment in Density Refractometry methods. The adjustment set
Air&Water 20.00C is always available and cannot be deleted. You can select the sets to view more detailed
information. Adjustment sets can only be used in methods if they have the status Released. Existing
adjustment sets cannot be modified.
Navigation: Resources > Density Refractometry > Adjustment Sets
Add an adjustment set
1 Select New Adjustment Set in the toolbar.An Editor window is opened.
2 Enter the necessary information into the fields and save the data.
Note
• When a set is deleted, the set history will also be deleted. Methods that refer to the deleted set are no longer
executable.
Set name Specify a descriptive name of your choice. 1…30 characters
Adjustment mode Defines the standard that is used for the adjustment procedure. Air&Water |
Standards requires a valid adjustment with Air&Water at this Air&Standard |
temperature. (Air&Standard and Water&Standard are not Water&Standard |
available for refractometers). Standards
Temperature Defines the temperature at which the procedure is performed. 0.00…100.00 °C |
32.00…212.00 °F
See also
9.4.2 Manage test sets

Enter all test sets that are used for testing in Density Refractometry methods. The test set Air&Water20.00C is
always available and cannot be deleted. You can select the sets to view more detailed information. Test sets
can only be used in methods if they have the status Released. Existing test sets cannot be modified.
Navigation: Resources > Density Refractometry > Test Sets
Add a test set
1 Select New Test Set in the toolbar. An Editor window is opened.
Note
• When a set is deleted, the set history will also be deleted. Methods that refer to the deleted set are no longer
executable.
Set name Specify a descriptive name of your choice. 1…30 characters
Test mode Defines the standard that is used for the test procedure. Air | Standard | Brix
standard
Temperature Defines the temperature at which the procedure is performed. 0.00…100.00 °C |
32.00…212.00 °F
See also

9.5 Resources Thermal Value
9.5.1 Manage calibration substances

Reference substances can be defined and used for the adjustment of your Thermal Value instrument in order to
check the measurement accuracy. Melting point values that are entered on sample bottles and the accom-
panying certificates may deviate slightly from the values listed below for T nominal. These are assigned to the
reference substances as Lots with individual values.
The data for the calibration substances below is already available in LabX. Additional calibration substances
can be added to the system.
Substance T nominal Tolerance
Benzophenone 47.8 °C ± 0.2 °C
Vanillin 81.7 °C ± 0.4 °C
Benzoic Acid 122.2 °C ± 0.2 °C
Saccharin 228.3 °C ± 0.3 °C
Caffeine 236.0 °C ± 0.3 °C
Potassium Nitrate 334.0 °C ± 0.3 °C
Note
• If necessary, the temperature values given in °C above can be converted to °F or K when adding lots.
Properties Reference substances are uniquely identified and displayed in the system by means of their
names.
Nominal values Specifies whether the lot information relating to the melting point should be entered
according to Pharmacopeia or Thermodynamic. Alternatively, the lot information relating to
the melting range can be selected according to Pharmacopeia.
Navigation: Resources > Thermal Values > Calibration substances

Add a calibration substance
1 Select New Calibration Substance in the toolbar. An Editor window is opened.
ð You can now add Lots to the reference substance.
9.5.1.1 Manage lots

Navigation: Resources > Thermal Values > Calibration substances
The melting point values entered on the sample bottle and accompanying certificate are managed individually
as lots. Prior to this, either a reference substance must be defined or one of the predefined substances is used.
A lot whose expiration date has passed can no longer be used and is no longer displayed, but is still listed in
reports. If multiple lots of a reference substance are known to the system, the list is displayed for selection at
the start of an analysis.
Identification Displays the reference substance. Entry of a name for the lot.
General Details the certificate's date of issue and period of validity. Selection of the temperature unit.
Melting point / Details the melting point according to Pharmacopeia or Thermodynamic. Details the
range melting range according to Pharmacopeia.
Add a new lot

1 Select the required reference substance in the list view.
2 Select New Lot in the toolbar. An Editor window is opened.

9.6 Resources SevenExcellence
9.6.1 Sensors
Sensors for pH, redox, ISFET, conductivity, dissolved oxygen, ion and temperature measurement can be
connected to the instrument. ISM® sensors are detected automatically. The factory calibration will be transferred
when ISM® sensors are used for the first time.
Sensors can be added, modified and deleted. The usable life and life span of a sensor can be set and
monitored (for redox and temperature sensors only the life span can be monitored).
The usable life is the period after which the values for a specific resource should be remeasured, e.g.
calibration for sensors. The life span is the period after which a resource is exhausted and should be replaced.
Navigation: Resources > SevenExcellence > Sensors
Add a sensor
ISM® sensors are added automatically, when connecting.
1 Select New Sensor in the toolbar.
2 Choose the desired type of sensor.
Delete a sensor
§ Before deleting an ISM® sensor, disconnect it from the instrument.
1 Select the required sensor in the list view.
2 Select Delete Sensor in the toolbar.
Edit a sensor
1 Select the required sensor in the list view.
2 Select Edit Sensor in the toolbar.
9.6.1.1 pH/ISFET sensors

Sensor details

®
Module Module to which the sensor is attached. ISM sensors are -
detected automatically.
Displayed if a module is connected to the instrument and a
sensor is connected to a module.
Type Information on the type of measurement. -
Intelligent Sensor ISM® sensors are detected automatically. This is identified here. Active | Inactive
Management
Name Information on the name of the sensor. -
Serial number Information on the serial number of the sensor. -


Monitoring usable Specifies whether the usable life of the sensor is to be monitored. Active | Inactive
life
Time period Defines the unit for the period of time. Days | Hours
Displayed if Monitoring usable life is activated.
Usable life Defines the period in days or hours up to next calibration. -
Expiry date Information on the sensors lifetime, calculated from the predefined -
parameters.

span
Initial operation Here you can enter the date of initial commissioning of the -
sensor.
Displayed if Monitoring life span is activated.
Life span Describes the period of time after which a resource is consumed -
and should be replaced.
Expiry date Information on the end of the life span, calculated on base of the -
predefined parameters.
Calibration

Calibration Information on calibration procedure. Initial | Method
procedure Initial: Default or ISM values are used.
Method: Values determined by a calibration method are used.
Date/Time of Information on date and time of the calibration. -
calibration
Calibrated by Information on the name of the user performing the calibration. -
Offset Information on the offset of the sensor in [mV]. -
Slope Information on the slope of the sensor in [mV/pH]. -
Slope Information on the slope of the sensor in [%]. -
9.6.1.2 Ion sensors

Sensor details

Module Module to which the sensor is attached. ISM® sensors are -

Management
Ion The ion charge and molar mass values of predefined ions are Ag+ | Ca2+ | Cl- | CN- |
stored in the instrument. Cu2- | F- | I- | K+ | Na+ |
NO3- | Pb2+ | S2 | Other
Molar mass Molar mass of an ion is calculated by adding the atomic weight -
of the individual atoms the ion is composed of. This parameter is
needed for calculations of the units mol/L and mmol/L.
Ion charge Ion charge of the ion to be detected. -3 | -2 | -1 | +1 | +2 |
+3

life
parameters.

span
sensor.
Calibration

calibration

9.6.1.3 Redox sensors

Sensor details

®
Management
span
sensor.
9.6.1.4 Conductivity sensors

Sensor details

®
®
Intelligent Sensor ISM sensors are detected automatically. This is identified here. Active | Inactive
Management

life

parameters.

span
sensor.
Calibration

Calibration Information on calibration procedure. Initial | Method | Manual
Manual: Manually entered values are used.
calibration
Number of Defines the number of standards for the calibration (up to 5 for 1|2|3|4|5
standards ion sensors, up to 2 for conductivity sensors).
Cell constant The cell constant in [1/cm] can be entered here. The cell constant -
value into the conductivity.
9.6.1.5 Dissolved oxygen sensors

Sensor details

®
Intelligent Sensor ISM sensors are detected automatically. This is identified here. Active | Inactive
Management
Detection Information about the detection mode of the sensor. Manually -
added sensors always have polarographic detection.


life
parameters.

span
sensor.
Calibration

calibration
9.6.1.6 Temperature sensors

Sensor details


Management
Temperature Select a type according to the specifications of the temperature NTC30kOhm | Pt1000
signal sensor.

span
sensor.
9.6.2 Sensor calibration history

LabX saves the calibration history so that current calibrations can be compared with previous ones. This infor-
mation helps selecting the optimum calibration frequency, for monitoring changes in the offset or slope over
time, and will reveal when sensors are reaching the end of it’s lifetime.
9.6.3 Manage buffers and standards

In Buffers and Standards, enter and manage the buffer and calibration standard groups, required for
calibrating sensors.
Navigation: Resources > SevenExcellence > Buffers and Standards
Add a user-defined buffer/standard group
1 Select New Group in the toolbar and select the desired type of buffer or standard.
ð An editor window opens.
2 Enter a meaningful name for the group.
3 After you have created a group, you can add buffers or standards to this group.
Type Information on the type of the buffer or standard for the pH | Ion | Conductivity
calibration.
Name Defines the name of the buffer or standard group. The name must -
be unique and must not contain any special characters or
spaces.
Unit The unit of measure to be used depends on the type of buffer or pH | pM | mmol/L | mol/
standard selected. L | mg/L | % | pX | ppm
Reference Defines the temperature of the nominal buffer or standard value 15.0...35.0 °C
temperature (usually 20 °C or 25 °C).
Temperature unit Defines the temperature unit to be used. °C | °F

Edit pH buffer groups
§ After creating a buffer group of the type pH, you can add or copy various pH buffers to it.
1 In New buffer at 25 °C, enter the respective pH value of the buffer, based on the reference temperature from
the calibration standard list and click Add Buffer. Repeat this step for additional buffers.
ð To reflect the temperature influence of a pH buffer, a maximum of 20 value pairs for each individual
buffer composed can be entered.
3 You can edit the values for each buffer in the temperature rows.
4 Save the group by clicking Save and Close.
Edit ion calibration standard groups
§ After creating a calibration standard group of the type Ion, you can add various standards to it.
1 In New standard at x °C, enter the corresponding value for the standard in the desired unit of measure,
based on the reference temperature from the calibration standard list and click Add Standard. Repeat this
step for additional standards.
ð To reflect the temperature influence of an Ion standard, enter a maximum of 20 value pairs for each
3 You can edit the values for each standard in the temperature rows.
Edit conductivity calibration standard groups
§ After creating a calibration standard group of the type Conductivity, you can add various standards to it.
1 In New standard at x °C, enter the respective conductivity value and unit of the standard, based on the
reference temperature from the calibration standard list and click Add Standard. Repeat this step for
additional standards.
each individual buffer composed.
3 You can edit the conductivity values for each standard in the temperature rows.
9.6.3.1 Copying pH buffers

You can copy pH buffers including all its temperature related values from other buffer groups to a user-defined
buffer group.
§ A user-defined buffer group is opened in the editor window.
1 To copy a buffer from another group, click Copy from another Group....
ð A dialog window to select a buffer appears.
2 Select a buffer from the list of buffer groups and click Select.
ð The values of the buffer are copied into the currently open buffer group.
3 Repeat the steps to add more buffers to the buffer group.
4 You can edit the values for each buffer in the temperature rows.
5 Save the group by clicking Save and Close.

9.6.3.2 Predefined buffers and standards
The parameters of the following predefined buffers and standards are already stored.
Type Name
pH METTLER TOLEDO USA (Ref. 25 °C)
METTLER TOLEDO Europe (Ref. 25 °C)
MERCK (Ref. 20 °C)
DIN(19266)/NIST (Ref. 25 °C)
DIN(19267) (Ref. 25 °C)
JJG119 (Chinese) (Ref. 25 °C)
Technical (Ref. 25 °C)
JIS Z 8802 (Japanese) (Ref. 25 °C)
Conductivity International (Ref. 25 °C)
Saturated NaCl (Ref. 25 °C)
Chinese (Ref. 25 °C)
Japanese (Ref. 20 °C)
Ion METTLER TOLEDO ION (Ref. 25 °C)
9.7 Resources UV/VIS
9.7.1 Dyes
You can add, edit or delete dyes. To edit or delete a dye, select the dye in the list view and select the corre-
sponding command from the toolbar.
Navigation: Resources > UV/VIS > Dyes
Add a dye
1 Select New Dye in the toolbar.
Name Enter a meaningful name that simplifies identification for the dye. Arbitrary
Comment Enter an arbitrary comment for the dye. Arbitrary
Molar mass Molar mass [g/mol] of the dye that will be used in calculations. 0 ... 1’000’000
Lambda max Maximum absorbance [nm] of the dye that will be used in calcu- 190 ... 1’100
lations.
Molar extinction Molar extinction coefficient [(mol/L)-1 cm-1] of the dye that will 0 ... 1’000’000
coefficient be used in calculations.
Dye factor 1 (260 Correction factor for absorbance readings at a wavelength of 0.0000 ... 1.0000
nm) 260 nm that will be used in calculations.
Dye factor 2 (280 Correction factor for absorbance readings at a wavelength of 0.0000 ... 1.0000
nm) 280 nm that will be used in calculations.
Edit a dye
§ The dye you want to modify is not used by a task that is running.
1 In the list view select the dye you want to modify.
2 Select Edit Dye in the toolbar.
3 Adjust the parameter settings.

4 Click Save and Close to save the changes and close the dialog window.
Delete a dye
§ At least two dyes have been configured.
§ The dye you want to delete is not used by a task that is running.
1 In the list view select the dye you want to delete.
2 Select Delete Dye in the toolbar.
ð The dye has been deleted.
9.7.2 Quant Calibrations

When you execute a quant method and measure a calibration, the system will recall this calibration curve for
the instrument and method combination (i.e. if you measure the same method on two instruments, two
separate calibration curves will be stored).
Navigation: Resources > UV/VIS > Quant Calibrations
If the method is configured to allow the use of an existing calibration curve, the method will prompt you with
this calibration at the next execution and requests whether you want to use it again or measure a new
calibration curve. If you choose to measure a new one, the old one will be over-written permanently (i.e. you
will not be able to restore it). The existing calibrations can be modified, i.e. you can exclude measured
standards. This means that for the next execution of the method on the instrument for which you have edited the
calibration, the modified calibration curve will be proposed.
9.7.3 CertiRef
LabX allows you to monitor the status of the CertiRef and define how to proceed when it has expired, e.g. the
life span of the CertiRef stipulates when the module must be certified by a qualified service technician.
Navigation: Resources > UV/VIS > CertiRef

CertiRefs that are connected to an instrument will be detected automatically and will be shown in the list. All the
relevant data will be transferred to LabX. If a CertiRefs is recertified, the corresponding data is also updated in
LabX.
Before deleting a CertiRef, disconnect it from the instrument. If a deleted CertiRef is reconnected, the entries are
restored.
Set SNR Information on the serial number of the certified reference material -
installed in the CertiRef.
CertiRef type Information on the type of the CertiRef. CertiRef USP | CertiRef
EUP | CertiRef EUP V2 |
LinSet PDC | LinSet
Niacin
Certification date Information on date of the certification. -
Expiry date Information on the expiry date, calculated from the date of the -
certification.
Status Indicates whether the CertiRef is connected to the instrument. Installed | Not installed
Instrument name Indicates the instrument where the CertiRef is currently installed. -
Monitoring life Specifies whether the life span of the CertiRef™ is to be Active | Inactive
span of CertiRef monitored.

Action when Defines the behavior in case the life span of at least one CertiRef Block | Warn
CertiRef expired has expired.
Block: The user is notified that the life span of the CertiRef™ has
been exceeded and it is no longer possible to execute a
performance test.
Warn: The user is warned that the life span has been exceeded.
Results from performance tests will be marked with data marking
42.
Only displayed, if Monitoring life span of CertiRef is activated.
Reminder Determines whether a reminder should be issued before the life Active | Inactive
span is about to expire.
Days before Determines the number of days before expiration of the life span, 1…100
expiration at which the reminder should be issued.
See also
9.8 Manage value tables

are interpolated according to the selected settings. If the input value is outside the range of defined values, the
result is marked as incorrect. For better clarity and readability you may create additional folders within the
folder.
Navigation: Resources > Value tables
Instead of entering value tables manually, you can also create and import CSV or .lvt (custom LabX format)
files.
Value Table
Table Properties Value Table
Input value Output value Delta

Internal ID VT13
0.9982 0.0 0
Name d1Propanol20Cto100
0.9963 1.0 0
Value table ID Propanol 20 - 100 0.9946 2.0 0
Fit type Lagrange interpolation 0.9928 3.0 0

0.9911 4.0 0
0.9896 5.0 0
Input Value Definition
0.9882 6.0 0
Name Density(20) [gcm3] 0.9868 7.0 0
Unit New Delete Recalculate Deltas
Output Value Definition
Name 1-Propanol (wt-%)
Unit
Release state Proposed
Add or edit a value table

1 Click New Value Table to create a new value table.
- or -
Select the required value table in the list view and click on Open Value Table in the toolbar.
2 Define the table properties on the left window pane.

3 Click on New to enter a value pair.
4 For each further value pair, click on New again.
- or -
To delete a value pair select the line and click Delete.
ð You can specify the sorting sequence by clicking on the appropriate column header.
5 Select Save and Close In the toolbar to save the changes.
Delete a value table
1 Select the required value table in the list view.
2 Select Delete Value Table in the toolbar.
ð The value table has been deleted.
Table Properties
Internal ID Internal ID of the table (defined by the system).
Name Enter a meaningful name that simplifies identification.
Value table ID Enter an ID of your choice.
Fit type Definition of the curve type for the calculation.
• Linear interpolation: Corresponds to a segmented curve.
• Lagrange interpolation: Lagrange fit via four points
• 1st order polynomial
• 2nd order polynomial
• 3rd order polynomial
• One to one: Simple x=y curve
Input Value Definition
These values are used to display the parameter and the unit of the input value in the table header.
Name Enter a meaningful name that simplifies identification in the table header. Include
the unit here or in the separate field.
Unit Enter the unit here or in the name field.
Output Value Definition
These values are used to display the parameter and the unit of the output value in the table header.
Name Enter a meaningful name that simplifies identification in the table header. Include
the unit here or in the separate field.
Unit Enter the unit here or in the name field.
Release state Information on the release state of the object. Status are Proposed or Released.
Value Table
Column - Input value Represents the input value of the value pairs.
Column - Output value Represents the output value of the value pairs.

Column - Delta Displays the calculated deviation according to the selected option in Fit type. To
calculate the deviation, click Recalculate Deltas.
See also
9.8.1 Import value tables

Instead of entering value tables manually, you can also create and import CSV files.
Extract of an csv file

1 Select Import Value Table in the toolbar and choose the file type CSV or .lvt (custom LabX format).
ð The Import Value Table dialog opens.
2 Define the import settings and click on Import ....
3 Select the desired file and click on Open.
ð The imported values are displayed. It is still possible to enter or edit the desired values manually.

Value Table
Import Settings
Column separator
Decimal separator
Header line in file
Fields in quotes
Import Values
Table Properties Approval and Release State
Internal ID VT13 Release state Proposed
Name 1-Propanol (wt-%)
Value table ID Propanol 20 - 100
Fit type Lagrange interpolation
Input Value Definition Output Value Definition
Name Density(20) [gcm3] Name d1Propanol20Cto100
Unit Unit
Value Table
Input value Output value Delta
0.9982 0.0 0
0.9963 1.0 0
0.9946 2.0 0
0.9928 3.0 0
0.9911 4.0 0
0.9896 5.0 0
0.9882 6.0 0
0.9868 7.0 0
New Delete Recalculate Deltas
4 Define the settings in according to your requirements.

ð The value table has been saved to system.
Import Settings
Column separator Specifies the column separator.
Decimal separator Specifies the decimal separator.
Header line in file Defines whether the first line is a header line.
Fields in quotes Defines whether every field is contained in quotation marks.
See also
9.8.2 Export value tables

1 Select Export Value Table in the toolbar to export the table in .lvt file (custom LabX format).
ð The Export Value Table dialog opens.
2 Define the export settings and click on Export.

3 Select the desired file and click on Open.
ð The imported values are displayed. It is still possible to enter or edit the desired values manually.
4 Define the settings in according to your requirements.
5 Enter the path for the file and click on OK.
ð The value table has been saved to the file system.
Import Settings
Header line in file Defines whether the first line is a header line.
Fields in quotes Defines whether every field is contained in quotation marks.
See also

10 System Workspace
The System workspace contains the following objects.
width.
Object Description
Audit Trail The audit trail records all important activities.
Schedules Here you create schedules for the time-controlled execution of tasks.
Background Jobs The running background jobs are displayed.
Report templates The Report templates object defines the form and content of reports.
User management You can define user access rights here.
Import and Export In the import settings, you can define the structure and save location of automated
task imports. In the export settings, you can define the structure and save location
of automated result exports.
Instrument Driver Here you can manage the drivers required for communication with the instruments.
SmartCodes The purpose of managing barcodes is to automate methods in combination with
products or sample series.
See also
10.1 Audit Trail

The function Audit Trail records all important activities to provide documentary evidence of the sequence of
activities that have affected at any time a specific operation, procedure, or event. This function enables auditing
of data access, deletions, changes and manipulations. Audit Trail entries include information such as user
identifications, time stamps and workplaces.
Actions triggered by the system are allocated to system users and not to known users managed in the user
management.
Navigation: System > Audit Trail

Creating your own search folders makes it is easier to gain an overview of large amounts of data. You can add
multiple criteria to one search folder and thereby create combinations that meet several criteria.
See also
2 System users } Page 703
10.1.1 Compare versions

For objects that are managed in versions, a new version is created every time it is saved. In Audit Trail,
selected versions of objects can be compared with their direct predecessors.
Objects that can be compared:
• Methods
• Products
• Sample Series
Navigation: System > Audit Trail
1 Select the transaction of an object that can be compared in the list view.
2 Select Compare Versions in the toolbar to open the corresponding dialog box.
LabX System Workspace 665

See also
10.2 Manage schedules

Schedules are used to automatically create tasks and optionally assign them to users, roles or instruments.
Tasks that are defined to start automatically can only be assigned to one instrument and are started at the
scheduled time and as soon as the instrument is ready.
Examples
• Calibrating instruments in the early morning, so that all instruments are ready to use on time.
• Performing the pretitrations on Karl Fischer titrators, so that the cells are water free and ready in time for
work.
Navigation: System > Schedules
Add a schedule
1 Select New Schedule in the toolbar.
ð An editor window to manage the properties is opened.
2 Select the desired method.
3 Enter the settings according to your requirements and save the data.
Note
• A created task can be started either on the instrument or on the PC.
Edit a schedule
1 Select the desired schedule in the list view.
2 Select Edit Schedule in the toolbar.
ð An editor window to manage the properties is opened.
3 Edit the settings according to your requirements and save the data.
Delete a schedule
1 Select the desired schedule in the list view.
2 Select Delete Schedule in the toolbar.
Execution - group
Task schedules
Name Defines the name of the scheduled. 1…50 characters
Method Selection of the method to be used to execute the task. List of methods
Activated Defines whether the schedule is active or not. Active | Inactive
666 System Workspace LabX

Task creation and start
Start task Defines whether the task is to be started automatically. Active | Inactive
automatically
Executing Selection of the instrument to be used to execute the task if Start List of instruments
instrument task automatically is activated.
The instrument must also be selected in Instrument and users >
Instruments.
Ask before Defines whether an confirmation screen is shown for tasks that Active | Inactive
starting start automatically.
task high priority.
Time
Time 1 Defines the time when the task should be executed. -
You can define a maximum of 3 times for execution by activating
it accordingly.
Recurrence pattern
Start date Defines the date when the task should be executed. -
Recurrence Determines whether the execution of the task is repeated on the Active | Inactive
basis of a pattern.
Interval Days: The task is executed repeatedly according to a number of Days | Weekly | Month
specified days.
Weekly: The task is executed repeatedly on defined weekdays.
Month: The task is executed repeatedly according to a number of
specified months.
Instrument and users - group
The assignment to Users and Roles is cumulative. If no selection is made in both Users and Roles, the task is
displayed to all users.
Users Assigns a scheduled task to one or multiple users. If no selection List of users
is made, the task will be shown to all users.
Roles Assigns a scheduled task to one or multiple roles. If no selection List of roles
is made, the task will be shown to all users.
Instruments Assigns the scheduled task to one or multiple instruments. If no List of instruments
selection is made, the task will be shown on all compatible
instruments.
10.3 User management

This chapter explains how to manage users and their assignment to roles or groups. Users can be added,
changed, deleted or temporarily disabled. In the roles, you define the rights that are available to the assigned
user. By default, 5 roles or groups are predefined in LabX. However, these can be edited, deleted or new roles
added as desired. Each user should be assigned at least one role. However, a single user can also be
allocated multiple roles, whereby the rights available to the user are increased cumulatively. The rights
assigned to roles and thus to users are subdivided by System and Modules, e.g. LabX balance.

Active Directory
Active Directory is the directory service by Microsoft. With the aid of Active Directory the administrator can grant
and limit access to users of the network. You can activate Active Directory for authentication and to map Active
Directory groups to LabX roles.
the LabX environment. Various settings in Account policies and User management have therefore no effect on
the Active Directory users.
After any change to the Active Directory settings, it will be necessary to restart the LabX client to apply the
changes.
See also
2 Handling of passwords in LabX } Page 703
10.3.1 Manage users

Users can be added, changed, deleted or temporarily disabled. In the roles, you define the rights that are
available to the assigned user. Each user should be assigned at least one role. However, a single user can
also be allocated multiple roles, whereby the rights available to the user are increased cumulatively.
You cannot delete the last remaining administrator account nor otherwise modify it in such a way that the
associated administrator rights would be lost.
Navigation: System > User management > Users
See also
2 Assign rights to roles } Page 672
10.3.1.1 Manage LabX users

Add local LabX users
1 Select New User in the toolbar.
Edit local LabX users
1 Select the user in the list view that you wish to edit and select Edit User in the toolbar.
Delete local LabX users
You cannot undo the deletion of a user. A user name that is associated with an account will no longer be
accessible or usable, but the content created by the user will not be removed or altered.
1 Select the required user in the list view.
2 Select Delete User in the toolbar.
ð The account has been removed from the list and is as no longer accessible. It still exists in the system,
however. This will allow the system to retain a complete history for auditing purposes.

Migrate LabX user to Active Directory user
NOTICE
You cannot undo the migration of a user.
The local LabX user will no longer be accessible after migration.

2 Select Edit User in the toolbar.
3 Select Migrate to Active Directory User in the toolbar.
ð A dialog box to select an Active Directory user appears.
4 Select the user and click OK.
5 Enter the necessary data and save your entries.
ð The local user has been migrated to an Active Directory user. The local LabX user is no longer accessible,
but the system will retain a complete history for auditing purposes.
Account
User name Defines the user's logon name. Once an account is created, it is 1…64 characters
not possible to change the user name associated with it. The
system uses this name on the login screen, when assigning
procedures or tasks and in Audit Trail entries.
Note that even if you delete an account, the user name that was
associated with that account can no longer be used.
User must change Select this option to force a user to change their password at next Active | Inactive
password at next logon.
login
Password Specify a password for the user. According to the settings
defined in Account
policies.
Confirm Confirm the password for the user. Same string as defined
for Password.
State Defines the status of the account. Active | Inactive
Inactive users can no longer log in to the system. This action will
not remove or alter the content created by them.
User details
Full Name Defines the full name of a user, typically comprising first name 1 … 64 characters
and last name. Similar to a comment, this information can
contain spaces and special characters.
Changing the entry has an immediate effect on the displayed
name in all the various usages in the system, regardless of the
release status. Audit Trail entries however remain unchanged.
E-Mail Defines the e-mail address of the user. -

Message distri- Defines how system generated messages are to be distributed to None | Messages only |
bution the user. Messages and E-Mail
None: No messages will be shown or sent to the user.
Messages only: Messages are shown in Analysis > Messages.
Messages and E-Mail: In addition to the above selection, e-mails
are sent to the user.
Roles
Available Defines the assignment of users to roles. List of all roles set up on
the system.
10.3.1.2 Manage Active Directory users

the LabX environment. Most of the settings in the user management have no effect on the Active Directory users
therefore.
Add Active Directory users
There is no need to add any Active Directory users to the system if the option Role mapping is enabled in
Account policies. An Active Directory user logging on for the first time will automatically create an account in
LabX and will appear in the list of users.
Add users in LabX, if Role mapping is not enabled. This step includes adding roles to the user.
§ Identical user names for local users and LabX Active Directory users cannot be used.
1 Select New User > New Active Directory User in the toolbar.
ð A dialog box to select an Active Directory user appears.
2 Search or enter the user and click OK.
ð The Active Directory user has been added to the system.
Edit Active Directory users
1 Select the user in the list view that you wish to edit and select Edit User in the toolbar.
Delete Active Directory users
The account will be removed from the user list, but the content created by the user will not be removed or
altered.
2 Select Delete User in the toolbar.
ð The account has been removed from the list. The system will retain a complete history for auditing
purposes.
ð If the same user logs on again, the account will be reestablished and will appear in the list of users. Role
mapping information however will be lost.
Account
User name Displays the Active Directory log in name of the user. -

State Defines the status of the account. Active | Inactive | Active
Inactive users can no longer log in to the system. This action will Directory controlled
not remove or alter the content created by them.
Active Directory controlled: The state of the account is handled
by the Active Directory Service.
User details
Full Name Displays the Active Directory full name of a user, typically -
comprising first name and last name.
E-Mail Displays the Active Directory e-mail address of the user. -
Message distri- Defines how system generated messages are to be distributed to None | Messages only |
bution the user. Messages and E-Mail
None: No messages will be shown or sent to the user.
Messages only: Messages are shown in Analysis > Messages.
Messages and E-Mail: In addition to the above selection, e-mails
are sent to the user.
Roles
Available Defines the assignment of users to roles if Role mapping is not List of all roles set up on
enabled. the system.
See also
10.3.2 Manage roles

Roles can be added, changed or deleted. In the roles, you define the rights that are available to the assigned
users. At least one role must be assigned to each user. The rights get accumulated if multiple roles are
assigned.
The rights assigned to roles and thus to users are subdivided by system and modules, e.g. LabX balance. This
is represented by two or more tabs in the view. Depending on the installed modules, additional tabs may be
displayed. The tabular option feature enables you to assign specific rights to specific roles.
Navigation: System > User management > Roles
Add roles
1 Select New Role in the toolbar. The Editor is opened.
2 Activate or deactivate the checkboxes on the various tabs according to your requirements, and save the
data.
Edit roles
1 Select the role that you wish to edit.
2 Select Edit Role in the toolbar. The Editor is opened.
3 Activate or deactivate the checkboxes on the various tabs according to your requirements, and save the
data.
Delete roles
1 Select the role that you wish to delete.
2 Select Delete Role in the toolbar.
ð The role has been deleted and the assignment has been removed from respective users.

10.3.2.1 Assign rights to roles
The rights assigned to roles and thus to users are subdivided by system and modules, e.g. LabX balance.
Navigation: System > User management > Roles
Selectable rights
Rights
Objects Description
View Authorized users to view details of the object concerned (method, scheduling, …).
If the user does not have this right, the preview pane remains blank and the Open
command in the editor is inactive.
Edit Authorized users to create new objects of the type concerned (by editing or
importing) or are able to modify existing objects and save the changes. If an
object, e.g. a method, is modified, a new version will be created. However, a copy
of the existing version is retained and can be viewed by users with the appropriate
rights and restored if necessary.
Delete Authorized users to remove objects from the system. This right also includes the
View right.
View History Authorized users to view the details of previous versions of selected objects. This
right also includes the View right. The ability to restore a previous version requires
the Edit right.
Release Authorized users to release new versions of objects. As a result, objects change
status of Approval state from Approved to Released.
Export Authorized users to transfer data from an object, e.g. a method, to a file. This right
also includes the View right.
Execute / view proposed Authorized users to view unreleased objects and create or start tasks based on
them.
Allow Authorizes users to execute certain actions.
Revoke Approval Authorizes users to revoke approvals.
Forced logout Authorizes users to log out other logged on users.
Force unblock Authorizes users to force the unblocking of instruments.
Rights on the system

Analysis
Objects Description
Methods A method represents the program for conducting the analysis. It consists of a
series of method functions that are processed in sequence by the instrument.
Sample Series Use sample series to group several individual samples together into a sample
series, so that all samples in the series can be analyzed in sequence using a
defined method.
Series sequence With the help of Series Sequences, you can combine several sample series to form
a single series.
Products Products are helpful for specifying parameter values for samples with similar
properties.
Value tables In a value table, values that are used for the conversion of results are arranged as
value pairs.
Results If you click on the Data navigation pane, a list of saved results and reports is
displayed in chronological order.
Reports If you have used a Reports method function in a method, the corresponding
entries will be displayed for each task processed.

Objects Description
Report templates Using the Report Editor, it is possible to modify the grid of the templates in the
sequence, and the individual sections and contents can be shown or hidden
individually.
Resources In resources you manage instruments, device-specific resources such as weights
and standards and value tables.
Shortcuts Shortcuts enable you to start tasks directly from the Shortcuts list in LabX or from
an instrument.
Schedules Schedules are used to assign tasks to instruments and insert them in the wait
queues of the selected instruments.
Statistical Evaluation Specifying tolerance definitions and rules that are used to execute evaluations on
results.
Personal shortcuts This type of shortcuts is displayed only to the author of the shortcut.
Instruments
Objects Description
Instruments Instruments, e.g. balances, can be connected to the system, depending on the
activated modules in LabX.
Manual Operations Defines whether manual operations can be displayed or edited.
System
Objects Description
Configuration Labels
Labels are headers for freely definable fields, in which you can enter additional
information for the properties of instruments, products, and sample series.
Mail Settings
You use these settings to define which e-mail server is used for sending
messages.
SmartCodes
Barcodes can be used to start the relevant methods in combination with products
or sample series.
Drivers
Regardless of which interface is used, the necessary drivers must be installed on
the system in order for communication with instruments to be possible.
Security Settings Account policies
Account policies are a combination of settings governing password and account
lockout policies.
User management
Users can be added, changed, deleted or temporarily disabled. In the roles, you
define the rights that are available to the assigned user.
Screen Lock Other logged on users can be logged out.
Signature Policies These policies define the operations that can be configured to require signing.
Audit Trail The Audit Trail records all the important activities such as: logging on, starting a
task, creating methods, changing methods, performing recalculations and reevalu-
ations.
Archiving An archive is a data backup file that has been generated before previous data was
deleted from the database.

Task
Objects Description
Tasks Tasks are assigned to instruments and inserted into the wait queues of the selected
instruments.
Rights in the balances module
Adjustment
Objects Description
Adjustment with external Authorized users to run adjustments with external weights.
weight
Rights in the Density Refractometry module

Sets
Objects Description
Adjustment Sets Adjustment sets are used for making adjustments in Density Refractometry
methods.
Test Sets Test sets are used for tests in Density Refractometry methods.
Video
Objects Description
Videos In the Results Editor, the videos created during the execution of a task on an
instrument are displayed.
Rights in the Thermal Value module
Objects Description
Calibration substances Reference substances can be defined and used for the adjustment of your Thermal
Value instrument in order to check the measurement accuracy.
Instrument
Objects Description
Adjustments The melting point measurements taken when using reference substances form the
basis for an adjustment.
Video
Objects Description
Videos In the Results Editor, the videos created during the execution of a task on an
instrument are displayed.
10.4 Background jobs

The following processes are listed as “Background jobs”:
• Processes from export templates
• PDF generation
• Printing processes
Background jobs can be started manually or automatically and have various statuses. In the event of an error,
the system will try repeatedly to execute these jobs automatically.
Status Explanation
Waiting This background job is waiting in the queue.
Jobs that cannot be completed due to an error are also displayed. Information is shown for
the cause of the error, time of the next run, and the number of attempts.

Status Explanation
Running This background job is currently in progress.
Suspended This background job has been suspended and can be resumed.
Completed This background job has been finished successfully. This will no longer be displayed when
the display is refreshed.
Navigation: System > Background Jobs
Edit background jobs
1 Select the required background job in the list view.
2 Select the desired command in the toolbar.
10.5 Report templates

The form and content of reports are defined in the report templates. You can modify the report templates using
the Editor to customize the generated report to your needs. Using the Report Editor, it is possible to modify the
grid of the templates in the sequence, and the individual sections and contents can be shown or hidden
individually.
With the optional Report Designer, you are free to tailor the design of your reports as you wish. You can incor-
porate all the information available from the methods and variables via data binding and arrange them the way
you want.
Navigation: System > Report templates
Reports containing data are created based on report templates. They can be generated automatically at the task
runtime or manually after a task has been completed. Reports can also be generated for instruments.
Topic-oriented basic report templates are available. These report templates can be used as a basis for creating
new templates, which enables you to quickly and simply create a new template.
Data management
A distinction is made between data (results and result sets), report templates, and reports. Independently of the
status of a task, data can be recorded at any time by specifying a report template, and this report can be saved
and released separately.
If a report is generated automatically from a task at runtime (method function used: Report), it can only contain
data that refers to its own task.
However, if a report is generated subsequently by selecting multiple result sets, depending on the report
template used, this can contain cross-task information such as diagrams or statistics.
Data
Results
Result sets
Reports
Resources
System
Audit Trail
Schedules
User management
Background Jobs
Report templates
Once report templates have been created they remain available globally, and are therefore managed at system
level.

General report functions
Independently of the tool used for creation, the following general report functions are available in the toolbar.
Recreate report template, open, delete, tag, export, import, approve, and release. Approval and release are
generally available for signable objects, if the Regulation option is licensed.
Automated report generation
To generate a report automatically from a current task, the Report method function must be integrated in the
method used. A link must therefore be made to an existing report template. For automatic report generation,
only those report templates can be used that reference task-based fields.
As an option, it is also possible to select a printer to have the report printed out at the same time.
Data from multiple tasks in one report
Only the data from one task can be used as a basis for an automatically generated report. A report containing
data from different tasks can be generated by selecting multiple results sets. The data from the individual tasks
is then automatically arranged together.
Data that originates from different tasks cannot be linked to a report, for example, for calculations or statistics.
Module-specific data source
The preset topic-specific report templates reference a (module-)specific data source. Within this data source,
the fields can be used in any way to create or adjust the report template. It is not possible to refer to data from
different data sources within one report template.
See also
10.5.1 Manage report templates

Two different tools are available for editing reports.
• The Report Editor, for the quick and simple configuration of a template.
• The Advanced designer, for the flexible creation of an individual template.
These two tools and their options for creating a report template are described in separate chapters. The
Advanced designer is not included in the standard LabX package.
Note
• Once a template has been edited using the Report Designer, from then on it can only be edited with this
editor.
Navigation: System > Report templates
Add a new report template
1 Select New Report Template in the toolbar.
ð A selection of templates is displayed.
2 Select an appropriate template from the list and choose New Report Template
Report Editor or Advanced designer. Search text...
Name
ð The template is displayed in the editor and can be
edited according to your requirements.
3 Select Save and Close In the toolbar to save the
changes.
ð The report template has been saved to the system.
Description
Advanced designer Report Editor Cancel
Edit a report template

1 Select the required report template in the list view.

2 In the toolbar, select either Open in Report Editor or Open in Report Designer.
ð The template is displayed in the editor and can be edited according to your requirements.
See also
2 The report editor } Page 677
2 The report designer } Page 679
10.5.2 The report editor

The editor can be used to edit various templates used in the system or creating new ones from scratch. The
basic structure or grid of the templates can be modified, and the section contents elements can be shown or
hidden individually.
When the editor opens, the report template preview appears in the preview pane. The top part of the window
contains a toolbar in which you can make changes to the page layout. The right-hand part of the window
features two tabs. The properties tab allows to edit the template name and supply a comment (both are shown
in the report template list). Also, it allows to define what to load in the joined result table. On the Configuration
tab, you can define the order of sections and determine which sections should be shown.
The visibility of the section contents elements can be determined individually for each selected section. If
necessary, the name of section contents elements (label name) can be edited.
To integrate a particular company's logo into the templates, select "Logo" and enter the path to a graphic file.
The graphic must be in JPG, BMP, GIF or PNG format. The size of the placeholder for the graphic is 52 x
25 mm. As graphics cannot be scaled here, you should have the graphic scaled to the desired size and saved
at this size in a graphics program. From the correct size, it is possible to derive the resolution of the graphic in
dpi. A typical size is, e.g., 50 x 22 mm, 200 dpi (394 x 173 pixels). With GIF graphics, the resolution in dpi
cannot be changed and is always 72 dpi. Therefore, this type of graphic should not exceed 147 x 71 pixels.
Roles can be added, changed or deleted. In the roles, you define the rights that are available to the assigned
users. At least one role must be assigned to each user. The rights get accumulated if multiple roles are
assigned.

The rights assigned to roles and thus to users are subdivided by system and modules, e.g. LabX balance. This
is represented by two or more tabs in the view. Depending on the installed modules, additional tabs may be
displayed. The tabular option feature enables you to assign specific rights to specific roles.
Joined Results
In this section of the report, the data is arranged one row per sample.
Properties
The column Place holder is used to select the column in the Properties Configuration
Joined Results table that will receive data. Report template properties
Name
The entry in the column Title specifies the method function
whose result should be used as data source. The title must
Comment
exactly match the value of the filed Title in the method function
editor. In order to see in the finished report where the data for a
Report template parameters
particular column came from, you can configure the column
Place holder Title
name appropriately in the Configuration tab.
N1 Substance name
R1 Final calculation
Note
• For titration method functions in general, and for the method function Calculation in particular, the
parameter Title cannot be edited. Use instead R1, R2, ..., R15, as defined by the method function and
shown on the graphical editor of the method editor.
Place holder Method function
Rn, Tn, Nn Result | Calculation | Calculate on Instrument
T Selection | Text
N Number
Configuration
After activating Joined Results, the content can be configured, Properties Configuration
the visibility set and the name modified, in Section content. Header
Section
For example, columns not used in the tab Properties / report
Visible Name
template parameters can be made invisible and/or names of the
Joined Results
remaining ones modified to identify the data source (e.g. via Summary
method function title).
Section content
Visible Name
(R1) Number
(R1) Tolerance range
Export report templates

To export and re-import a created template complete with data binding, select the template in the list of report
templates and choose the "report templates export" function in the toolbar. The import function is also available
there.

10.5.3 The report designer
Just like the report editor, you can use the report designer to create report templates or edit existing templates.
In contrast to the report editor, in the report designer, the structure of the templates, the individual data elements
they contain, and the links to data can be freely selected.
Items on the screen

When you open the Designer, example data for the selected report template appears on the left-hand side of the
preview, to ensure a clear overview. The top part of the window contains a toolbar in which you can make
changes to the layout. The right-hand part of the window features up to five tabs for displaying content-specific
information. These can be shown or hidden by choosing Window View in the toolbar.
Tab Description
Properties The name of the template is entered here.
Report template You can also define report template parameters here. These act as an alias for results
parameters and must be created if you want to align results horizontally in a report. The data
binding is then created in accordance with the defined alias.
Field List In this area, the LabX data available for a report is displayed. This window can also be
used to link existing report items with data, or to create this type of linked item directly.
Tool Box Contains the graphical control elements, which can be dragged into the report template
using drag and drop.
Report Explorer This area provides simple navigation through the existing items of the report template.
The whole report structure is visible and the properties of the item can be quickly
accessed directly from the item.
Property Grid This area displays all the properties of a selected item. It is possible to make the
required settings in the properties of an item, or by selecting the smart tag that belongs
to an item.
Joined Results
In this section of the report, the data is arranged one row per sample.

Properties
The column Place holder is used to select the column in the Properties Configuration
Joined Results table that will receive data. Report template properties
Name
The entry in the column Title specifies the method function
whose result should be used as data source. The title must
Comment
exactly match the value of the filed Title in the method function
editor. In order to see in the finished report where the data for a
Report template parameters
particular column came from, you can configure the column
Place holder Title
name appropriately in the Configuration tab.
N1 Substance name
R1 Final calculation
Note
• For titration method functions in general, and for the method function Calculation in particular, the
parameter Title cannot be edited. Use instead R1, R2, ..., R15, as defined by the method function and
shown on the graphical editor of the method editor.
Place holder Method function
Rn, Tn, Nn Result | Calculation | Calculate on Instrument
T Selection | Text
N Number
Configuration
After activating Joined Results, the content can be configured, Properties Configuration
the visibility set and the name modified, in Section content. Header
Section
For example, columns not used in the tab Properties / report
Visible Name
template parameters can be made invisible and/or names of the
Joined Results
remaining ones modified to identify the data source (e.g. via Summary
method function title).
Section content
Visible Name
(R1) Number
(R1) Tolerance range
Smart Tags
This function enables context-sensitive access to the properties of an arbitrary report template item. The corre-
sponding item must always first be selected, and then the smart tag icon is displayed.

10.5.3.1 Insert bands
The preview of the report template on the left-hand side shows the sections and detailed reports currently used
in the template, together with the data elements they contain. The hierarchy of the bands is represented using
different colors.
A distinction is made between different types of bands and items from the tool list, which can in turn be linked
to data from the LabX database.
The data is organized in the report template using "bands". Since the data is hierarchical, the bands must also
be arranged accordingly. This means that the report template is logically broken down into different areas with
different properties. The following band types are defined:
Band Meaning/Function/Example
Top margin For specific margin information.
Record header Can be used in the report and in every detailed report where it is inserted.
Page header For header line information on every report page.
Group header Can be used any number of times with the report and the detailed report (e.g. for table
headers)
Special feature: The view of the data within this group can be determined by entering
this group field. (e.g. After sample ID1 > Selected data can be listed after sample ID1).
Detail Must be used at least once at report level. This can be used to design detailed reports,
etc. (the actual data is contained in detailed reports)
Group footer Can used additionally for each group header line.
Page footer For footer line information on every report page.
Report footer Can be used in addition to the report header line in the report and in every detailed
report.
Bottom margin For specific margin information.
Bands can be added, moved, or deleted directly in the report template using a right click. On the left-hand ruler
scrollbar, you can use drag and drop to move the band types that are selected.
10.5.3.2 Inserting detailed reports

The basic report template already consists of a large number of detailed reports. As you can see, the detailed
reports can be used for simple grouping of data according to different topics.
Right-clicking on a free report space or within the Report Explorer enables you to insert additional sections for
linked or unlinked detailed reports.
Linked detailed reports can no longer draw on data, as defined in the scope of the selected data field. In order
to draw on more data, an unlinked detailed report must be selected. This can be useful, in particular, for
diagrams.
Repetition of data
The selection of the data field of a detailed report also determines how the section containing this data is
repeated within the whole report.

10.5.3.3 Items on the Tool Box tab
Items Description
Text Can be used for labels and for data fields. Typically used for free-standing
information such as the headers of report areas immediately before or after a
band definition.
Table The cells of a table can be used for both labels and data fields. Right-click to
define the number of rows and columns in the table.
Picture Box Enables you to insert pictures that exist as a file in image format.
Panel This is a container item that is used as an aid for grouping together
individual elements within layouts.
Lines, Shapes and Check Boxes These are purely graphical design elements with no data binding options in
LabX.
Bar Code This item can be linked, and displays the text in the form of a bar code. Can
be linked, e.g. with a sample ID to automate a process sequence. Note:
Module automation must be selected in the properties.
Rich Text Enables free writing and formatting of text sections.
Zip Code Can be used to display zip codes. The output character set is supported by
specialist scanners.
Chart A powerful wizard enables the creation of highly flexible charts. The data
binding must be entered for every defined range.
Pivot Grid This item can be used for the summarized representation of referenced data.
The pivot grid is an aid for reducing large datasets to a manageable size and
performing simple evaluations. This enables the display of summaries and
statistical calculations.
Page Info and Page Break Used to structure whole pages in terms of adding typical document infor-
mation in header and footer lines.
Cross-band Line and Cross- Enable the use of graphical elements across band boundaries.
band Box
10.5.3.4 Pivot grids

The following aggregate functions are supported within the pivot grid: Sum, Average, Count, Min, Max, StdDev,
StdDevp, StdVar, StdVarp.
The pivot grid contains the following separate areas in which fields can be created:
Row area (Row field)
If a field is dragged or referenced to here, the output data is grouped according to this field. One row in the pivot
grid is displayed for each different field content that occurs in the output data. If two fields are selected as row
fields, all groups that belong to the second field are displayed within every group that belongs to the first field in
the pivot table. If there are more than two row fields, the same division continues for all fields. The order of the
row fields is relevant, and is selected by the user to make the result as transparent as possible.
Column area (Column field)
Enables grouping, similarly to the fields in the row area, whereby the different contents of a column field are
displayed in columns instead of rows. If the user uses row fields and column fields together, this creates a
cross table.
Data area (Data field)
Determines what is displayed at the intersect point of the rows and columns. For each data field, the use of an
aggregation function (e.g. "Sum" or "No. of Data Records") means that exactly one value is entered in every
cell of the pivot table, even if there is a large number of data records that are members of the group belonging
to the cell. If multiple data fields are selected, the user can decide whether the different data fields are displayed

next to each other in columns or underneath each other in rows (the same as for column and row fields). The
same field can also be used more than once as a data field (for practical reasons, with different aggregate
functions).
Filter area (Filter field)
Enables filtering, i.e. restriction of the pivot table to include only the data records of the output set resulting from
the values defined in the selected filter fields. The division of the fields into row fields and column fields
determines the structure of the pivot table. If this division or sequence is changed, the data displayed is not
more or less, but simply in a different format. For example, changing between column and row fields
(maintaining the same sequence) results in a transposed table.
Moving a row or column field to a different position is also described as "pivoting" this field.
10.5.3.5 Structuring a simple template

Using the basic report template "balanceMeasurementreport1", we can see that the following structure can
typically be applied:
1st Band: PageHeader

Various individual items in the header area of the report
2nd Band: Detail
1st Detailed report (here e.g. methods)
Then within this detailed report: a ReportHeader, followed by a Label, followed by the detail block containing
the data e.g. in table form, and the data binding of individual cells.
2nd Detailed report (here e.g. BalanceMeasurementResults)
Then in this detailed report: a ReportHeader, followed by a Label, followed by (as a variant) a GroupHeader
for all headers of a table and the corresponding detail block containing the actual data, here for example in
table form, and the data binding of cells in a range.
This is followed by further detailed reports, until the final band follows at the end:
n th Band: PageFooter
Plus various individual elements
10.5.3.6 Linking items with data

For linking items to data from the LabX database, you can use either the table item, the text item or other items
such as charts from the tool list. The Smart Tag of this item (in tables, this is the individual cell) can be used to
enter the required data binding.
The Task node in the field list is a central starting point for the data binding. For task-based reports, the access
point is "Document" (so that data are repeated correctly in the case of multiple tasks). Under this node, all
results and further data generated from a task are structured in a list.

10.5.3.7 Filtering the data
LabX displays the data fields preselected according to a certain topic (Task, Instrument, Sample, Products,
etc.). By choosing the data field parameter in each band of the report template you can define the data scope
and the orientation used to draw data. For example, if you only want to access the results of one task, fields
within the task structure must be selected from the field list. However, if you want to access results of several
tasks, for example, the fields from the MainResultData data must be selected.
10.5.3.8 Using formatting rules

Formatting rules stored for the report template can be used to dynamically control the formatting of items, e.g.
depending on a result. Formatting rules are created using an editor, which can be called directly from every
Smart Tag selection list of an item.
10.5.3.9 Reviewing in the preview

The toolbar can be used to display a print preview and an HTML view of the current report template.
10.5.3.10 Further information

The LabX Knowledge Base contains further information such as additional report templates.
Tutorials and other general information on the operation of the Report Designer and its tools and elements can
be found on the Internet. Note that the functions available within LabX are restricted to the concept of LabX.
DevExpress - Reporting https://documentation.devexpress.com/#XtraReports/CustomDocument2162
10.5.4 Print preview

Print preview is a function for displaying a report before it is sent to a printer. Print preview is a useful function
as it helps to see how the final printed material will appear. It also gives you the opportunity to check or adjust
the layout or resolve any issues before printing the report to achieve the intended form.
Editing
This section only appears when you create a new report.
Save and Close To save reports to Data > Reports.
Close To close the preview window without saving it.
Print
Print To choose the print preferences and to send the document to the standard printer defined in
Windows.
Quick Print To send the document directly to the standard printer defined in Windows.
Page Setup
Scale Stretches/shrinks the
printed output to a
percentage of its actual
size.

Margins Selects the margin sizes
for the entire document.
Orientation Switches the pages

between portrait and
landscape layouts.
Size Selects the paper size of

the document.
Navigation
First Page To display the first page of the document
Previous Page To display the previous page of the document.
Next Page To display the next page of the document.
Last Page To display the last page of the document.
Zoom
Mouse Pointer To display the mouse pointer.
Hand Tool To enable scrolling manually through the pages.
Magnifier Entire single page is visible/ zooms the page to 100% of the normal size.
Many Pages To display several pages at once.
Note: The number of displayed pages depends on the size of the preview window.
Zoom out To reduce the display size of the document.
Zoom To change the zoom level of the document preview.
Zoom in To enlarge the display size of the document.

10.6 Import and export
Navigation: System > Import and Export
Import templates
In the import templates, you can define the structure and save the location of automated task, product, and
sample series imports. The import can also be performed manually. Select the desired template in the list view
and click on Execute in the toolbar.
Export templates
In the export templates, you can define the structure and save the location of automated result, product, sample
series and melting point/range measurements exports. The export of products and sample series can also be
performed manually. Select the desired template in the list view and click on Execute in the toolbar.
10.6.1 Manage import templates

In the import templates, you can define the structure and save location of task, product, and sample series
imports.
Tasks The data for new tasks is imported.
Products All products are imported along with the folder structure. If an "Internal product ID"
already exists, the product will be overwritten.
Sample Series All sample series are imported along with the folder structure. New sample series
are always added and not overwritten.
Navigation: System > Import and Export > Import Templates

Edit Import Template
1 Select New Import Template in the toolbar and choose the type of setting.
- or -
Select the import template that you wish to edit and select Edit Import Template in the toolbar.
ð An editor window is opened.
2 In the Settings tab, you specify the properties of the file to be imported and define, if required, the time
intervals at which the imports are carried out. Specify the actions for handling the imported files.
3 In the Field Mapping tab, you specify the file type and the fields to be imported. The available fields are
predefined.
Settings
Import Settings
Name Specifies the name of the import template.
Type Specifies the type of import template.
Automatic import
Import interval Defines the unit of time for the interval.
Value Specifies the value of the interval.
Import File
Server import directory Specifies the path for the files to be imported.
File Extension Specifies the file extension of the files to be imported.

Action after successful import
Action Specifies the action for further handling of the imported file.
Renamed extension Specifies the new file extension for the imported files.
Action after failed import
Action Specifies the action for further handling of the imported file.
Renamed extension Specifies the new file extension for the imported files.
Server log location Specifies the path for the log files to be exported for errors.
File type
Type Specifies whether the file is in CSV or XML format.
Nested separator Specifies the nested column separator.
Line break Specifies the characters used for a line break.
File encoding For CSV files, indicates whether UTF-8 or ASCII encoding is used.
Header line in file For CSV files, defines whether the first line is a header line.
Fields in quotes For CSV files, defines whether every field is contained in quotation marks.
Line layout One sample per task: For every line or string, a new task will be created.
(For tasks only) Multiple samples per task: Only if one of the listed values differs from the
preceding line or string, a new task is created. If not applicable, samples are
added to the same task.
• Method internal ID
• Instrument internal ID
• Product internal ID
Field Mapping
Special items
Task priority "True" if the task has a high priority, or "False" for normal priority.
Method internal ID The ID automatically assigned by the system that cannot be changed.
User name Corresponds to the name used for logging in.
Info Fields Corresponds to the fields that can be updated by Labels.
Field Mapping
Use the arrows to add or remove fields. The order in Selected can be changed. Each item represents the
assignment of an element from the file to an element within LabX.
Position Defines the position of the field. Not relevant for XML files.
Name in LabX Specifies the name of the field as it appears in LabX.
Name in file Specifies the expected name of the field. This must be identical with this infor-
mation.
Manual Value Not used.
Format string Not used.

Settings Used for entering task parameters for sample series and products. These are
assigned to the method and the respective task parameter. Click Edit to define the
mapping.
See also
2 Elements for export and import templates } Page 691
10.6.2 Manage export templates

In the export templates, you can define the structure and save location of automated result, product, sample
series and melting point/range measurements exports.
To run automated exports for results and melting point/range measurements, you need to select a matching
setting in the corresponding Export Templates of the method. Products and sample series are exported
manually.
Results The data of a completed task are exported.
Products All products are exported with the folder structure.
Sample Series All sample series are exported with the folder structure.
Melting point / Videos and intensity curve data are exported.
range
Navigation: System > Import and Export > Export Templates

Edit export templates
1 Select New Export Template in the toolbar and choose the type of setting.
- or -
Select the export template that you wish to edit and select Edit Export Template in the toolbar and choose
the type of template.
ð An editor window is opened.
2 In the Settings tab you can define the name of the file to be exported and specify the intervals at which the
exports should be carried out. The file name may contain dynamic text fragments such as Instrument
name, User name or Sample ID. To do this, select appropriate placeholders from the drop-down list.
3 In the Field Mapping tab specify the file type and the fields to be exported. The available fields have a
structured format, but the groups are not exported in their entirety, rather the individual subordinate infor-
mation units, such as Instrument serial number or Sample ID 1.
Settings - Group
Export Settings
Name Specifies the name of the export template.
Type Information on the type of export template.
Export File
Server export directory Defines the path to which the files will be exported.
File name template Use placeholders to define dynamic file names. Select appropriate placeholder
from the drop-down list and click Insert. Placeholders will be inserted in File
name. Arrange placeholders and fixed texts as required in File name.
Only available for templates of type Result set and Thermal values video.
File name Defines the file names of the files to be exported.
File Extension Defines the file extension of the files to be exported.

File update
Note: Only for template of type Result set.
Update at end of task All generated data of the current task is exported to one file. If for the filename a
sample specific variable is selected (e.g. Sample ID 1) and more than one
sample is available in the exported data, the name for that variable will be
"NoSpecificSample".
Update if task is paused All generated data of the current task is exported to one file when the task is
paused.
Update if task is stopped All generated data of the current task is exported to one file when the task is
stopped.
Update at end of sample All generated sample data of the current sample is exported to one file when the
sample is completed. If the file name contains a sample specific variable (e.g.
Sample ID 1) LabX will create a new file. If no sample specific variable is included
in the filename, LabX will either append it to the existing file or overwrite the file,
depending on the selection in Write mode.
Update after signing of All generated data of the current result set is exported to one file when the result set
result set has been signed.
Export only results 'OK' Only results with overall state OK are exported.
File type
Type Specifies whether the file is in CSV or XML format.
Write mode Overwrite the existing file: Defines whether an existing file is overwritten during
(Only for CSV files) export.
Append to file: The existing file is updated.
Nested separator Specifies the nested column separator.
Line break Specifies the characters used for a line break.
File encoding For CSV files, indicates whether UTF-8 or ASCII encoding is used.
Header line in file For CSV files, determines whether the first line will contain a header line with the
field name.
Fields in quotes For CSV files, defines whether every field is contained in quotation marks.
Line layout One line per result: One line is used for each result.
(Only for results) One line per sample: One line is used for each sample.
If this option is selected in conjunction with Export only results 'OK' only those
results with the status “OK” will be exported.
Field Mapping - Group
Result set > CSV simple/XML simple
Method Data Exports the version of the method as used at the time of execution.
Raw Data Exports raw data grouped by scopes, samples and method functions.
Resource data Exports data for all resources as used during the execution of an analysis.

Results Exports results of the calculation of raw results within the following listed method
functions.
• Result
• Calculate on Instrument
• Calculate
Table of measured values Exports the table of measured values from titration methods (CSV simple only).
Task data Exports the global and sample parameters which were used at the time of
execution. It always contains the original data of the task execution even if
parameters for recalculation were changed. (The changed values are shown in
Raw Data and Results).
Result set > Thermal Values

Transmitted light videos / Video pairs of the analyses are exported in AVI format.
reflected light videos
Curve data Intensity curves of all capillaries in analyses are exported as CSV files.
General CSV/XML
Use the arrows to add or remove fields. The order in Selected can be changed. Each item represents the
assignment of an element from the file to an element within LabX.
Position Defines the position of the field.
Name in LabX Specifies the name of the field as it appears in LabX.
Name in file Specifies the name of the field as it is exported. For XML files, this cannot be
changed.
Manual Value If such a field is inserted, the value can be entered here. Not available for XML
files.
Format string For certain fields, format identifiers can be entered here.
Settings Used for entering task parameters for sample series and products. These are
assigned to the method and the respective task parameter. One item is required for
each task parameter.
See also
2 Elements for export and import templates } Page 691
2 Standard date and time formats strings } Page 724
10.6.3 Import and export templates

Templates definitions can be exported or imported. This enables you to send templates definitions to another
location, for example, by e-mail or using a data storage medium. The file extension .lit is used for templates.
Navigation: System > Import and Export
Import
1 Select Import ... in the toolbar.
ð The template is displayed in the editor and can be edited according to your requirements.
3 Enter the necessary data and save your entries.
ð The import process is not completed until the template has been saved.

Export
1 Select the required template in the list view and click Export ... in the or toolbar.
ð The template has been saved to the file system.
10.6.4 Elements for export and import templates

Result set
Objects Description
Sample Contains sample related fields used for the analysis.
Sample IDs: Contains the sample IDs.
Sample ID 1 label: Contains the label texts.
Sample tags: Contains the tagged colors of the samples.
Sample start time: Contains the start time of the samples.
Task Contains task related fields used for the task.
Task name: Contains the name of the task.
Task internal ID: The ID automatically assigned by the system that cannot be
changed.
Start time: Contains the start time of the task.
Task end time: Contains the end time of the task.
State: Contains the status of the task.
Method Contains method related fields used for the method.
Product Contains product related fields used for the product.
Account Contains user-specific properties.
Result set Corresponds to the status of the result set.
Result Contains result and instrument properties.
Text Corresponds to the text from the “Text” method function and the instrument
properties.
Selection Corresponds to the selection from the "Selection" method function and the
instrument properties.
Number Corresponds to the number from the "Number" method function and the instrument
properties.
Not used Inserts a column as a placeholder.
Line Counter Each line in the export file is numbered.
Manual Value A free text can be entered that is exported once for each line.
Products
Objects Description
Product ID Contains the product IDs used.
Product name Contains the names entered.
Product internal ID Contains the LabX internal product IDs.
Product description Contains the product descriptions.
Info fields Corresponds to the fields that can be updated by “Labels”.
Task parameters Corresponds to the task parameters of one or more referenced methods. For each
task parameter of the method to be referenced, the individual items of “Task
Parameters” need to be inserted. Based on these, one column per task parameter
will be created in the file, or exported, for each linked method.

Objects Description
Line Counter Each line in the export file is numbered.
Manual Value A free text can be entered that is exported once for each line.
Sample Series
Objects Description
Sample Series ID Contains the sample series IDs used.
Sample series name Contains the sample series names entered.
Sample series comment Contains the sample series comments entered.
Info fields Corresponds to the fields that can be updated by “Labels”.
Sample ID Contains the sample IDs.
Global task parameters Corresponds to the global task parameters of one or more referenced methods. For
each global task parameter of the method to be referenced, the individual items of
“Global Task Parameters” need to be inserted. Based on these, one column per
global task parameter will be created in the file, or exported, for each linked
method.
task parameter of the method to be referenced, the individual items of “Task
Parameters” need to be inserted. Based on these, one column per task parameter
will be created in the file, or exported, for each linked method.
Instrument internal ID Contains the LabX internal instrument IDs.
Task name Contains the names entered.
Tasks
Objects Description
Task name Contains the names entered.
Instrument internal ID Contains the LabX internal instrument ID.
Sample IDs Contains the sample IDs.
Continuous run "True" if activated, or "False" if not activated.
Workspace Contains the selection of the used workspace of the unit.
method to be referenced manually, the individual items of “Task Parameters” need
to be inserted. Based on these, additional columns for the task parameters will be
exported for each linked method.
Global task parameters Corresponds to the global task parameters of one or more referenced methods. For
each method to be referenced manually, the individual items of “Global Task
Parameters” need to be inserted. Based on these, additional columns for the
global task parameters will be exported for each linked method.

Objects Description
Line Counter Contains the number of lines that are exported.
Manual Value Contains the free text that can be entered.
10.7 Manage drivers

Regardless of which interface is used, the necessary drivers must be installed on the system in order for
communication with instruments to be possible. In LabX, all installed drivers are listed. Whenever you add a
new instrument, the software searches for a suitable driver. If no driver is found, you will be prompted to install
one.
If a new driver is installed, it will become available to the entire system.
Navigation: System > Drivers
Install drivers
1 Select Import Driver in the toolbar.
ð The relevant dialog box appears.
2 Click Browse....
ð The dialog box to open files appears.
3 Browse to the folder containing the driver and click OK.
4 Install.
ð The newly installed driver is displayed in the list.
10.8 SmartCodes
To enter a barcode manually, LabX must be in the foreground. If a code can be applied to several SmartCodes,
LabX always chooses the most complex SmartCode.
For manual scanning, we recommend the use of a METTLER TOLEDO barcode reader. For optimum function,
we recommend to use "Code 128 - Code set B" barcode and to configure the barcode reader to "USB-KBD-ALT-
MODE".
"Code set B" barcodes are used for alphanumeric data including both uppercase letters/capital letters and
lowercase letters, as well as the numbers 0-9, and punctuation marks. "Code set B" corresponds to the full
lower 128 ASCII character set.
Navigation: System > SmartCodes
10.8.1 Add SmartCodes

1 Select New SmartCode in the toolbar. An Editor window is opened.
2 Enter the properties and check the expected string in Test.
3 Click Save and Close.
See also
2 Edit SmartCodes } Page 693
10.8.2 Edit SmartCodes

1 Select the required SmartCode in the list view.
2 Select Edit SmartCode in the toolbar. An Editor window is opened.
3 Enter the properties and check the expected string in Test.

4 Click Save and Close.
SmartCodes
Name Defines the name of the SmartCode.
Active Activates this SmartCode.
SmartCode composition
Objects Description
Available items All available items, such as Method ID and Product ID are listed here. To add an
required item, double-click it or select it and click Add.
Note: The specific placeholders are required for unused components of the code.
Contained items All added items are listed here. The sequence of the items can be changed using
the arrow buttons. To delete an item, double-click it or select it and click Remove.
SmartCode item
In this area, the item selected under SmartCode composition is displayed and can be edited.
Item is active Individual items selected under SmartCode composition can be activated or
deactivated. In the sequence, deactivated items are treated in the same way as if
they were not contained.
Name The name of the item selected under SmartCode composition is shown.
Prefix Enter a prefix to be used for separation of the selected item. If the items have a
fixed length, no prefix is required. Prefixes from RFID reading use hyphen "-".
Length If the item has a fixed number of characters, enter the number of characters here.
SmartCode validation
The validation of the selected parameters is displayed in this area.
Result Displays whether the validation is successful.
Expression Displays the selected parameter as a character string including the defined prefixes
or delimiters.
SmartCode context
Here you define where a code is to be read.
Selection Automation: Enables an automation unit to perform barcode or RFID reading.
Instrument / Workbench: Enables barcode reading on the instrument or from the
workbench that is in the foreground.
Sample ID: Enables a barcode to be read when the user is requested to enter a
sample ID.
Task list: Enables searching for matches in the list of queued tasks in a
workbench that is in the foreground. More than one are shown if the pattern is
fulfilled in these.
Test
This area is used for manual verification of the defined parameters.
SmartCode content Enter a character string to be verified via keyboard or use a barcode reader
attached to the PC to read a barcode.

Interpretation An interpretation of the character string to be checked is displayed here. The items
are listed in similar way as in Contained items.
Result Displays whether the code recognition is successful.
10.8.2.1 SmartCodes examples

Example 1
This code contains of two elements. The first element of this code needs a placeholder although it is not used
after the interpretation. The number of characters of the two elements of the code are variable as we are using
delimiters. We search for PET in the string, which defines the method ID.
• Code: P001-PET
• Searched item: Method ID
Elements
Place holder Prefix Method ID
P001 - PET
SmartCode definition
SmartCode composition SmartCode item Test
Contained items Prefix Length Interpretation
Place holder 1 Unused Variable P001
Method ID - Used Variable PET
Example 2
This code contains of three elements. The first and third elements of this code need a placeholder although they
are not used after the interpretation. The number of characters of the three elements of the code are variable as
we are using delimiters. We search for PET in the string, which defines the method ID.
• Code: P001-PET-21234
Elements
Place holder Prefix Method ID Prefix Place holder
P001 - PET - 21234
Place holder 1 Unused Variable P001
Method ID - Used Variable PET
Place holder 2 - Used Variable 21234
Example 3
This code contains of three elements. The first and third elements of this code need a placeholder although they
are not used after the interpretation. The number of characters of the three elements of the code are fixed as we
are not using delimiters. We search for PET in the string, which defines the method ID.
• Code: P001PET21234
Elements
Place holder Method ID Place holder
P001 PET 21234

Place holder 1 Unused 4 Fixed P001
Method ID Unused 3 Fixed PET
Place holder 2 Unused 5 Fixed 21234
10.8.2.2 SmartCodes example for titration

The standard format for titrators contain two major elements to be used for the method ID and the sample ID
when used with the function Start Auto SmartCodes.
The string used is: SampleID1;SampleID2;f;d
Example
• Code: Ketchup3;k1234;23.4;1029.4
• Searched item: Sample ID
Elements
Method ID Prefix Sample ID Prefix Place holder Prefix Place holder
Ketchup3 ; k1234 ; 23.4 ; 1029.4
Method ID Unused Variable Ketchup3
Sample ID ; Used Variable k1234
Place holder 1 ; Used Variable 23.4
Place holder 2 ; Used Variable 1029.4
See also
2 Start Auto SmartCodes - Dialog } Page 159
10.8.3 Import and export SmartCodes

SmartCodes definitions can be exported or imported. This enables you to send SmartCode definitions to another
location, for example, by e-mail or using a data storage medium. The file extension .bcp is used for
SmartCodes.
Import SmartCode
1 Select Import SmartCode in the toolbar.
3 The SmartCode is displayed in the Editor and can be edited according to requirements.
ð The import process is not complete until the SmartCode has been saved.
Export SmartCode
1 Select the required SmartCode in the list view and click on Export SmartCode in the or toolbar.
ð The SmartCode is saved in the file system.

11 Peripheral devices
11.1 Barcode readers
To enter a barcode manually, LabX must be in the foreground. If a code can be applied to several SmartCodes,
LabX always chooses the most complex SmartCode.
For manual scanning, we recommend the use of a METTLER TOLEDO barcode reader. For optimum function,
we recommend to use "Code 128 - Code set B" barcode and to configure the barcode reader to "USB-KBD-ALT-
MODE".
"Code set B" barcodes are used for alphanumeric data including both uppercase letters/capital letters and
lowercase letters, as well as the numbers 0-9, and punctuation marks. "Code set B" corresponds to the full
lower 128 ASCII character set.
See also
2 SmartCodes } Page 693
11.2 Fingerprint readers

Fingerprint readers can be used for authentication as an alternative to password entry. In contrast to a conven-
tional login with a user name and password, the user simply places a finger on the fingerprint reader. If the
fingerprint is recognized, the relevant user is authenticated in the same way as if they had entered a user name
and password.
When a fingerprint reader is active, this is indicated by a fingerprint icon during the following actions.
• Logging on to LabX
• Releasing a screen lock
• Signing various objects
Note
• If the user management is based on Active Directory, fingerprint readers cannot be used for authentication.
• A PC driver for the fingerprint reader can be found on the LabX installation DVD, in the directory “Drivers/
Fingerprint Reader”.
• Fingerprint readers can also be operated in conjunction with Density Refractometry, Titration Excellence,
SevenExcellence, UV/Vis spectrophotometers instruments for the log-in procedure on LabX. In order to do
this, the fingerprint reader must have been activated on the instrument.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > Fingerprint reader
Fingerprint readers on a PC are always activated.
See also
2 Register fingerprints } Page 34
LabX Peripheral devices 697

12 Data Backup
All documents stored on a PC must be backed up regularly. Backup means that your files and programs are
copied to another storage medium. Data backup can be done in a number of different ways using different
storage media.
It makes particular sense to save the copied data to a physically separate location from the original data, e.g. a
different disk or even on a different computer. This reduces the risk of data loss caused by failure of a storage
medium. Centralized data backup is particularly important on a network. It is essential that one person is
designated as being responsible for the routine backup of data. This includes setting up automated backups.
12.1 Database backup

LabX data are organized and stored in an SQL server database. To save or manage a LabX database, you can
use either third-party data backup software or the "LabX DB Maintenance" program. The latter is recommended
if only a simple form of data backup is required. If LabX is installed on a dedicated SQL server, the IT
department will usually determine which tools are used for database administration.
A scheduled backup strategy is vital for sensitive data. For example, the data could be backed up at regular
intervals of a few hours or even minutes. However, this is not possible with the tools supplied. To achieve this
level of data safety, it will be necessary to consult professional database administrators.
Note
• A database backup contains all the necessary data to re-create your LabX environment including user
management.
• In order to prevent data loss, any manipulation of the database should be performed only by a specialist
from the IT department.
12.2 LabX DB Maintenance

With the LabX DB Maintenance application, you are able to create a data backup routine manually for the
database or restore a database from an existing backup. The database can be restored to its initial state. All
data will be deleted in the process. Archives can be created and published for viewing.
Navigation: Start > All apps > METTLER TOLEDO > LabX > Tools
Launch DB maintenance
− Under Windows, follow the navigation and select LabX DB Maintenance.
Backup database Restore Database Initialize Database New Archive Publish Archive
Editing Archiving
Connected server: EUch295437w
Database Server Published Archive Data
Server engine Microsoft SQL Server 2017 Express Edition Archive name Archive 2019 (01-01-2019-31-12-2019)
Server Version 11.0.2100.60 From 01.01.2019
Database To 31.12.2019
Database sequoia
Status Installed
Last Backup Never

History Time Installation type DB version
698 Data Backup LabX

Database Server Displays information about the database server in use.
Database Displays the database installed, the last backup and the version history.
Published Displays the currently published archive.
Archive Data
Note
• To enable connection to the LabX database, LabX DB Maintenance must be started on the PC hosting the
database server.
• With the standard installation, the connection to the LabX database can be established only by a user who
has local administrator rights and also belongs to the database administrators group.
12.2.1 Create automated data backup

The database backup can be automated using the Windows function Task Scheduler and the
LabX DB Maintenance program. This enables you to execute the backup at regular intervals, for example every
evening at 7 p.m.
Navigation: Start > All apps > Windows Administrative Tools
1 Select Task Scheduler.
ð The window Task Scheduler appears.
2 In the menu Action, select Create Task.
ð The dialog box Create Task appears.
3 In the tab General, give the task a meaningful name and apply the following settings:
- Security options: Run whether user is logged on or not and Run with highest privileges
- Configure for: Select your operating system
4 In the tab Triggers, click New.
ð The dialog box New trigger appears.
5 Apply the following setting:
ð Begin the task > On a schedule
ð Settings > Daily/Weekly/Monthly
ð Advanced settings > Enabled
6 Click OK to close the dialog box.
7 In the tab Actions, click New.
ð The dialog box New action appears.
8 Apply the following setting:
ð Action > Start a program
ð Program/script > "C:\Program Files\METTLER TOLEDO\LabX\LabXDBMaintenance.exe"
ð Add arguments > -backup "z:\mybackup.bak"
9 Click OK to close the dialog box.
10 In the Settings tab activate Allow task to be run on demand.
11 Click OK to accept and save all the applied settings.
ð The window Task Scheduler appears.
12 Enter the user account credentials for running this task and click OK.
ð To test the task, open the Task Scheduler, select the task in the list and click Run. Check whether the files
are written to the target path for the data backup.
Parameters
-backup This is the parameter for a data backup.
LabX Data Backup 699

"z:\mybackup.bak" This is the target path for the data backup. The target directory must exist, the user
under whose name the scheduled task is being run must have write permission.
Note
• For the LabX database backups, please use a network drive that is also backed up at regular intervals by
the IT department.
• Always enter the path details in quotation marks (").
• Check the log file for detailed information. See:
"C:\Program Files\METTLER TOLEDO\LabX\Log\LogError_LabXDBMaintenance.exe.log"
management.
12.2.2 Perform manual data backup

In a manual data backup, you are prompted to enter a path and file name for the backup file. You must have
the appropriate write authorization for the specified target directory.
1 Under Windows, follow the navigation and select LabX DB Maintenance.
2 Select Backup database in the toolbar.
ð The backup file has been saved.
Note
• The process can take several minutes.
management.
12.2.3 Restore database

Restoring a database must be well thought out and prepared in advance.
NOTICE
The current database will be overwritten as part of this process.
Before you perform the following action, we strongly recommend that you always save your
data in order to prevent loss of data.

§ Stop the LabX Service (PC clients, instrument clients and API clients).
1 Stop the LabXHostService service in Windows task manager. Wait until the service has actually stopped.
3 Select Restore Database in the toolbar.
5 After successful restoration, close LabX DB Maintenance.
6 Restart the LabXHostService service.
ð As soon as the service has been restarted, LabX is ready for operation.
Note
• The name of the database cannot be changed.
• Reactivation is required if restoring from a database that was backed up on a different PC.
management.

12.2.4 Initialize database
NOTICE
A database initialization irrevocably deletes all data in the LabX database that
has been created since the installation of LabX.
Before you perform the following action, we strongly recommend that you always save your
data in order to prevent loss of data.
A database initialization irrevocably deletes all data in the LabX database that has been created since the instal-
lation of LabX. Before you perform the following action, we strongly recommend that you always save your
data in order to prevent loss of data. The following steps must always be adhered to:
Note
• The name of the database cannot be changed.
12.2.5 Create archive

An archive is a data backup file that is created before data is deleted from the database.
When an archive is created, a data backup is performed with subsequent purging of past data for results,
reports and the Audit Trail. All other data, such as methods, resources and users, are left intact.
You can define the time at which the purging of past data should begin. The time taken for the archive file to be
created depends on the size of the database.
2 Select New Archive in the toolbar. The relevant dialog appears.
3 Define the time at which the purging of past data should begin.
4 Enter a meaningful name for the archive.
ð A data backup is performed with subsequent purging of past data.
Note
• The file is saved in a backup directory on the SQL server.
• Please ensure that archive files are backed up.
• The purging process may take several hours.
• The performance of LabX may be affected by the purging process. The demands on the database may result
in timeouts. It is particularly not recommended to create an archive while tasks are running. However, data
integrity of both the archive and the LabX system is always ensured.
Archiving should therefore be performed at an appropriate time.
12.2.6 Publish an archive

Publishing an archive makes it possible to view its contents on the LabX client. Files that were saved by the
New Archive function can be selected directly from a list.
2 Select Publish Archive in the toolbar. The relevant dialog appears.
3 Select an archive from the list.
- or -
Click File and select a data backup file.
ð The archive or data backup file can be viewed in LabX.
LabX Data Backup 701

Note
• A published archive will not be displayed until the LabX client has been restarted.
• You can publish any archived LabX backup files of your choice, regardless of which version of LabX they
were created by. This must have been generated with the Backup database or New Archive function.
See also
2 View archives } Page 28

13 Appendix
13.1 Handling of passwords in LabX
Transmission of passwords between instrument and LabX server
Public key cryptography (RSA with a key length of 1024 bit) is used to secure the transmission of passwords
in LabX.
This mechanism is applied for transferring all kind of passwords, independent if Active Directory credentials or
the LabX internal credentials for authentication are configured.
Limitation: In the current version of LabX, instruments do not validate the authenticity of the LabX server with
the effect that there is no man-in-the-middle (MITM) protection available. If enabling the Active Directory authen-
tication, we recommend connecting the instruments via an isolated network to the LabX system and prevent
physical access to it.
Transmission of passwords between PC Client and the server
• If Active Directory credentials are used in combination with Single Sign-On (SSO), the Microsoft Windows
internal (Kerberos) transmission method is used. In this mode LabX does not transfer any password over
the wire.
• If the LabX internal credentials or the Active Directory credentials are used for authentication without Single
Sign-On (SSO), public key cryptography (RSA with a key length of 1024 bit) is used to secure the trans-
mission of passwords in LabX.
Limitation: In the current version of LabX the PC clients do not validate the authenticity of the LabX system with
the effect that there is no man-in-the-middle (MITM) protection available. If enabling the Active Directory authen-
tication, we recommend to activate the Single Sign-On (SSO) feature.
Storing of passwords
• If internal authentication is configured, the salt (cryptography) and the password are processed with a
cryptographic hash function, and the resulting output is stored in a database. To generate hash values, the
SHA-1 algorithm is used with a hash size of 160 bit.
• If Active Directory authentication is configured, no password related data is stored in the database.
See also
• RSA https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/RSA_(cryptosystem)
• SSO https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Single_sign-on
• Kerberos https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windows/desktop/aa378747(v=vs.85).aspx
• SHA-1 https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.security.cryptography.sha1(v=vs.110).aspx
13.2 System users

Actions triggered by the system are allocated to system users and not to known users managed in the user
management.
Action Example User login name Full Name Comments
Automated actions based Removing of expired • LabX 2017 and earlier • LabX 2017 and earlier "Scheduler account" user
on defined date/time. resources (e.g. Thermal versions: "Scheduler" versions: "Scheduler replaced by "System
Value calibration • LabX 2018 and account" internal account" user in
substances). upcoming versions: • LabX 2018 and LabX 2018.
"SystemInternal" upcoming versions:
"System internal
account"
External actions that affect Sensor calibrations carried • "ExternalUser" "External user" Users of standalone
data. out offline that are • "ExternalUser(1)" systems may appear as
synchronized to LabX "External (<external user
upon connection of the name>)" in data histories
sensor. and on reports.
LabX Appendix 703

Action Example User login name Full Name Comments
Common automated Any information about task "SystemInternal" "System internal account"
actions. starts, task completions,
instrument connections,
DB maintenance triggered
messages, login failures,
etc.
13.3 Synchronization of date and time

Date and time on the connected instruments are synchronized with the LabX Instrument Server to which the
instruments communicate every time a connection is made and every time a task is started.
13.4 Applicable operators

Operators
Operator short Operator Application
form
* Multiplication List=List * individual value or Each item in the list is multiplied by the
List=Single value * list single value. A list containing the same
number of items is returned.
/ Division List=List / single value Each item in the list is divided by the single
value. A list containing the same number of
items is returned.
List=Single value / list The single value is divided by every item of
the list value. A list containing the same
number of items as input variables is
returned.
DIV Division with List=List DIV single value Each item in the list is divided by the single
remainder value. A list containing the same number of
items is returned.
List=Single value DIV list The single value is divided by every item of
the list value. A list containing the same
returned.
% Modulo List=list % single value Each item in the list is calculated using the
single value. A list containing the same
number of items is returned.
List=Single value % list The single value is calculated using every
item of the list value. A list containing the
same number of items as input variables is
returned.
+ Addition List=List + single value or Each item in the list is added to the single
List=Single value + list value. A list containing the same number of
items as input variables is returned.
- Subtraction List=List - single value The single value is subtracted from every
item in the list. A list containing the same
returned.
List=Single value - list Each item in the list is subtracted from the
single value. A list containing the same
returned.
In addition to the described usages, all operators can be used to act between equally long lists.
704 Appendix LabX

Example
list = list1 * list2 (if list1 and list2 have the same number of entries).
This means that list(i) = list1(i) * list2(i) where i is the index of the entry.
13.5 Applicable functions

Formulas can be used to offset method function results against each other. Operators, functions, variables, time
and date formats and value tables are available for calculations. These are found on the various tabs.
Additional functions can be entered that are not available on the Functions tab.
Standard functions
Function Description Example
Sqrt Square root Scalar = sqrt(scalar), Vector = sqrt(vector)
Abs Data Area Scalar = abs(scalar), Vector = abs(vector)
Log Common logarithm Scalar = log(scalar), Vector = log(vector)
Ln Natural logarithm Scalar = ln(scalar), Vector = ln(vector)
Range Pane Scalar = range(vector)
Intercept Interception Scalar = Intercept(yVector; xVector)
Trend For the calculation of trends, a linear Scalar = Trend(yVector; xVector; xTrend-
regression is applied. A regression line is Scalar)
calculated based on the present values.
The searched value is on this line.
Slope Slope Scalar = Slope(yVector; xVector)
Mean Average Scalar = mean(scalar), Scalar =
mean(vector)
Count Quantity Scalar = count(scalar), Scalar =
count(vector)
Sum Sum Scalar = sum(scalar), Scalar =
sum(vector)
Min Minimum value Scalar = min(scalar), Scalar = min(vector)
Max Maximum value Scalar = max(scalar), Scalar =
max(vector)
MaxDev Unsigned maximum deviation from the Scalar = maxDev(vector)
mean value.
Median Median Scalar = median(scalar), Scalar =
median(vector)
Logb Logarithm to the base. Scalar = Logb(scalar; scalar), Vector =
Logb(vector; scalar)
1/x Inverse Scalar = inv(scalar), Vector = inv(vector)
StdDev Standard deviation n Scalar = SD(vector)
RelStdDev Relative standard deviation based on the Scalar = RSD(vector) [%]
standard deviation SD.
StdDev n-1 Standard deviation n-1 Scalar = SDn-1(vector)
Normal Dist. (SD) The function uses the input vector to Scalar = ND(vector; x)
calculate the mean value and standard
deviation (SD), assuming that data is
normal distributed. The standard deviation
and the mean value are then used to
calculate the probability of the scalar under
the assumed normal distribution.
LabX Appendix 705

Normal Distribution The function uses the input vector to Scalar = NDn-1(vector; x)
(SDn-1) calculate the mean value and standard
deviation (SDn-1) assuming that data is
normal distributed. The standard deviation
and mean value are then used to calculate
the probability of the scalar under the
assumed normal distribution.
rsdn-1(vector) Relative standard deviation based on the Scalar = RSDn-1(vector)
standard deviation SDn-1.
FirstDefined This function returns the first defined a = FirstDefined(zero; zero; 1; 2; 3)
argument, starting from the first argument in this case, a is 1.
from the left. There can be any number of
arguments.
x^y Potential Scalar = Pow(scalar; scalar), Vector =
Pow(vector; scalar)
Bin Range Counts all elements between the lower and Scalar = BinRange(lowerLimit; upperLimit;
upper limits. vector)
Concatenate This function joins all arguments of a vector a = [1;2;3;4;5]
together. There can be any number of b = 99
arguments.
x = concatenate (a;b)
x = [1;2;3;4;5;99]
GoodnessOfFit Calculates the Standard Error of the Formula
regression, given a sequence of modeled/ GoodnessOfFit(Concatenate(1;2;3);
predicted values, and a sequence of actual/ Concatenate(1;3;2))
observed values.
Input
• Input: Modeled values vector, Actual
Modeled values vector = [1;2;3;]
values vector
Actual values vector = [1;3;2]
• Output: Scalar
Output
• Formula: GoodnessOfFit(Modeled
values; Actual values) StdDev = 0.2
vt In a value table, values that are used for Scalar = vt('valueReferenceTableName';
the conversion of results are arranged as scalar)
value pairs. The scalar parameter is inter-
polated in accordance with the selected
setting in the value table. Also see [Manage
value tables } Page 660].
Additional functions
Enter these formulas manually.
ElementAt Returns a vector item at specified index (1 ElementAt(Concatenate(10;21;31;40;50;1
based index) 1); 3) => returns 31
First Returns first element of a given vector First((Concatenate(44;21;31;10;55;11))
(equivalent to ElementAt(Vector, 1)) => returns 44
Last Returns last element of a given vector Last((Concatenate(44;21;31;10;55;11))
(equivalent to ElementAt(Vector, => returns 11
Count(Vector))
Advanced math
Enter these formulas manually.
706 Appendix LabX

Interpolate When arguments: vector, vector, scalar, Formula
interpolation type: Interpolate(Concatenate(0;10;20;30);
• Gets the interpolated Y values for x Concatenate(20;40;30;50); 5; Cubic-
values, where X[0]= xVector[0], X[i+1] SplineNaturalInterpolation)
= X[i]+Interval, X[lastIndex] ≤ Input
xVector[lastxVectorIndex]
X vector = [0;10;20;30]
• Input: X vector, Y vector, interval, inter-
Y vector = [20;40;30;50]
polation type
Interval = 5
• Output: Vector
Interpolation type = CubicSplineNaturalIn-
• Formula: Interpolate(xVector; yVector;
terpolation
Interval; InterpolationType)
Output
Y’ vector = [20;34;40;35;30;36;50]
Formula
When arguments: vector, vector, vector, Interpolate(Concatenate(0;10;20;30);
interpolation type: Concatenate(20;40;30;50);
• Gets the interpolated Y values for x Concatenate(5;15;25); CubicSplineNatu-
values specified by target X vector ralInterpolation)
• Input: X vector, Y vector, target vector, Input
interpolation type X vector = [0;10;20;30]
• Output: Vector Y vector = [20;40;30;50]
• Formula: Interpolate(xVector; yVector; Target vector = [5;15;25]
TargetxVector; InterpolationType) Interpolation type = CubicSplineNaturalIn-
terpolation
Output
Y’ vector = [34;35;36]
GetxVectorForInterpo- Produces a densed vector from the Formula
lation / Dense specified vector, where distance between GetxVectorForInterpo-
values of new vector are equal or smaller lation(Concatenate(0;10;20;30); 5)
then specified interval (x2- x1 ≤ interval,
Input
output vector length ≥ input vector length ),
see also DenseBy. X vector = [0;10;20;30]
• Input: X vector, interval Interval = 5
• Output: Vector Output
• Formula: GetxVectorForInterpo- Vector = [0;5;10;15;20;25;30]
lation(xVector; Interval)
DenseBy Produces a densed vector from the Formula
specified vector, inserting the specified DenseBy(Concatenate(0;10;20;30); 1)
number of linearly propagated values in
Input
between of every input vector values (x2-
x1 ≤ interval, output vector length ≥ input X vector = [0;10;20;30]
vector length ), can be used as target Insert = 1
vector of interpolation, see also Dense. Output
• Input: X vector, number of values to Vector = [0;5;10;15;20;25;30]
insert between vector values
• Output: Vector
• Formula: DenseBy(xVector;
NumberOfInsertedValues)
LabX Appendix 707

GetXAtInterpolatedY Gets the X values for specified interpolated Formula
Y coordinate GetXAtInterpo-
• Input: X vector, Y vector, Y value, inter- latedY(Concatenate(0;10;20;30);
polation type Concatenate(20;40;30;50); 34; Cubic-
• Output: Vector SplineNaturalInterpolation)
• Formula: GetXAtInterpolatedY(xVector; Input
yVector; yValue; InterpolationType) X vector = [0;10;20;30]
Y vector = [20;40;30;50]
Y = 34
terpolation
Output
Vector = [5;16;24]
GetInterpolatedYAtX Gets the interpolated Y value for specified X Formula
coordinate GetInterpolat-
• Input: X vector, Y vector, X value, inter- edYAtX(Concatenate(0;10;20;30);
polation type Concatenate(20;40;30;50); 16; Cubic-
• Output: Scalar SplineNaturalInterpolation)
• Formula: GetInterpolatedYAtX (xVector; Input
yVector; xValue; InterpolationType) X vector = [0;10;20;30]
Y vector = [20;40;30;50]
X = 16
terpolation
Output
Y = 34
Differentiate Gets the Y values of derivative of first Formula
degree for corresponding X coordinates Differentiate(Concatenate(0;10;20;30);
• Input: X vector, Y vector, interpolation Concatenate(20;40;30;50); LinearInterpo-
type lation)
• Output: Vector Input
• Formula: Differentiate(xVector; yVector; X vector = [0;10;20;30]
InterpolationType) Y vector = [20;40;30;50]
Interpolation type = Linear
Output
Y’ vector = [2.0;-1.0;2.0;2.0]
Formula
Differentiate(Concatenate(0;10;20;30);
Concatenate(20;40;30;50); CubicSpline-
NaturalInterpolation)
Input
X vector = [0;10;20;30]
Y vector = [20;40;30;50]
terpolation
Output
Y’ vector = [3;0;0;3]
708 Appendix LabX

DifferentiateAt Gets the derivative of first degree for specific Formula
X value(s) DifferentiateAt(Concatenate(0;10;20;30);
• Input: X vector, Y vector, X value/ Concatenate(20;40;30;50); 30; Cubic-
xVector, , interpolation type SplineNaturalInterpolation)
• Output: Scalar/Vector (if 3rd parameter Input
is scalar, returns scalar, otherwise X vector = [0;10;20;30]
vector)
Y vector = [20;40;30;50] X value = 30
• Formula: DifferentiateAt (xVector;
yVector; xValueOrxVector; Interpola-
terpolation
tionType)
Output
Y’ = 3
Formula
DifferentiateAt(Concatenate(0;10;20;30);
Concatenate(20;40;30;50);
Concatenate(0;10;20;30); CubicSplineNat-
uralInterpolation)
Input
X vector = [0;10;20;30]
Y vector = [20;40;30;50]
Target X vector = [0;10;20;30]
terpolation
Output
Y’ vector = [3;0;0;3]
Differentiate2 Gets the Y values of derivative of second Formula
degree for corresponding X coordinates Differentiate2(Concatenate(0;10;20;30);
• Input: X vector, Y vector, , interpolation Concatenate(20;40;30;50); LinearInterpo-
type lation)
• Formula: Differentiate2(xVector; yVector; X vector = [0;10;20;30]
InterpolationType) Y vector = [20;40;30;50]
Interpolation type = Linear
Output
Y’’ vector = [0;0;0;0]
Formula
Differentiate2(Concatenate(0;10;20;30);
Concatenate(20;40;30;50); CubicSpline-
NaturalInterpolation)
Input
X vector = [0;10;20;30]
Y vector = [20;40;30;50]
terpolation
Output
Y’’ vector = [0.0;-0.6;0.6;0.0]
LabX Appendix 709

Differentiate2At Gets the derivative of second degree for Formula
specific X value(s) Differentiate2At(Concatenate(0;10;20;30);
• Input: X vector, Y vector, Target X value/ Concatenate(20;40;30;50); 10; Cubic-
Target xVector, interpolation type SplineNaturalInterpolation)
• Output: Scalar/Vector (if 3rd parameter Input
is scalar, returns scalar, otherwise X vector = [0;10;20;30]
vector)
Y vector = [20;40;30;50]
• Formula: Differentiate2At (xVector;
X value = 10
yVector; xValueOrxVector; Interpola-
tionType) Interpolation type = CubicSplineNaturalIn-
terpolation
Output
Y’’ = -0.6
Formula
Differentiate2At(Concatenate(0;10;20;30);
Concatenate(20;40;30;50);
Concatenate(0;10;20;30); CubicSplineNat-
uralInterpolation)
Input
X vector = [0;10;20;30]
Y vector = [20;40;30;50]
Target X vector = [0;10;20;30]
terpolation
Output
Y’’ vector = [0.0;-0.6;0.6;0.0]
GetValuesInRange Gets the vector values, where the values Formula
are in the specified range GetValuesInRange(Concatenate(1;7;3;6);
• Input: Vector, min. value, max. value 5; 8)
• Formula: GetValuesInRange (Vector; Vector = [1;7;3;6]
MinValue; MaxValue) min = 5
max = 8
Output
Vector = [7;6]
GetValuesOut- Gets the vector values, where the values Formula
OfRange are out of the specified range GetValuesOut-
• Input: Vector, min. value, max. value OfRange(Concatenate(1;7;3;6); 5; 8)
• Formula: GetValuesOutOfRange(Vector; Vector = [1;7;3;6]
MinValue; MaxValue) min = 5
max = 8
Output
Vector = [1;3]
710 Appendix LabX

GetValuesExcept Gets the first vector values, where the Formula
values are not contained by the second GetValuesExcept(Concatenate(1;7;3;6);
vector Concatenate(7;3))
• Input: Vector, Vector Input
• Output: Vector Vector = [1;7;3;6]
• Formula: GetValuesExcept (Vector; Vector = [7;3]
Vector)
Output
Vector = [1;6]
GetxValuesWhereY- Get the Y vector values, where the corre- Formula
InRange sponding X vector values are in the GetyValuesWhereX-
specified range InRange(Concatenate(1;7;3;6);
• Input: X vector, Y vector, min. value X, Concatenate(10;11;12;13); 5; 8)
max. value X Input
• Output: Vector X vector = [1;7;3;6]
• Formula: GetyValuesWhereX- Y vector = [10;11;12;13]
InRange(xVector; yVector, MinValueX;
min = 5
MaxValueX)
max = 8
Output
Vector = [11;13]
GetxValuesWhere- Get the X vector values, where the corre- Formula
PointsInRange sponding Y vector values are in the GetxValuesWhereY-
specified range InRange(Concatenate(1;7;3;6);
• Input: X vector, Y vector, min. value Y, Concatenate(10;11;12;13); 9; 11)
max. value Y Input
• Formula: GetxValuesWhereYInRange Y vector = [10;11;12;13]
(xVector; yVector, MinValueY;
min = 9
MaxValueY)
max = 11
Output
Vector = [1;7]
GetyValuesWhere- Get the X vector values, where the X vector Formula
PointsInRange values are in specified X range and corre- GetxValuesWhere-
sponding Y vector values are in the PointsInRange(Concatenate(1;2;3;4);
specified Y range Concatenate(10;11;9;13); 2; 5;9;11)
• Input: X vector, Y vector, min. value X, Input
max. value X, min. value Y, max. value
X vector = [1;2;3;4]
Y
Y vector = [10;11;9;13]
• Output: Vector
Min X = 2
• Formula: GetxValuesWhere-
PointsInRange (xVector; yVector, Max X = 5
MinValueX; MaxValueX, MinValueY; Min Y = 9
MaxValueY) Max Y = 11
Output
Vector = [2;3]
LabX Appendix 711

GetyValuesWhere- Get the Y vector values, where the corre- Formula
PointsInRange sponding X vector values are in the GetyValuesWhere-
specified X range and the Y vector values PointsInRange(Concatenate(1;2;3;4);
are in specified Y range Concatenate(10;11;9;13); 2; 5; 9;11)
• Input: X vector, Y vector, min. value X, Input
max. value X, min. value Y, max. value
X vector = [1;2;3;4]
Y
Y vector = [10;11;9;13]
• Output: Vector
Min X = 2
• Formula: GetyValuesWhere-
PointsInRange(xVector; yVector, Max X = 5
MinValueX; MaxValueX, MinValueY; Min Y = 9
MaxValueY) Max Y = 11
Output
Vector = [11;9]
FlexX Returns X coordinates of inflection points of Formula
function interpolated from specified X/Y FlexX(Concatenate(1;2;3;4);
vectors Concatenate(10;11;9;13); CubicSplineNat-
• Input: X vector, Y vector, interpolation uralInterpolation)
type Input
• Formula: FlexX(xVector; yVector, Inter- Y vector = [10;11;9;13]
polationType)
terpolation
Output
Vector = [2.4;4.0]
FlexY Returns Y coordinates of inflection points of Formula
function interpolated from specified X/Y FlexY(Concatenate(1;2;3;4);
vectors Concatenate(10;11;9;13); CubicSplineNat-
• Input: X vector, Y vector, interpolation uralInterpolation)
type Input
• Formula: FlexY(xVector; yVector, Inter- Y vector = [10;11;9;13]
polationType)
terpolation
Output
Vector = [10.1;13.0]
GetXForMaxY Gets the X value, where corresponding Y Formula
value is a maximal GetXForMaxY(Concatenate(1;2;3;4);
• Input: X vector, Y vector Concatenate(10;11;9;13))
• Output: Scalar Input
• Formula: GetXForMaxY(xVector; X vector = [1;2;3;4]
yVector) Y vector = [10;11;9;13]
Output
Scalar = 4
712 Appendix LabX

GetXForMinY Gets the X value, where corresponding Y Formula
value is a minimal GetXForMinY(Concatenate(1;2;3;4);
• Formula: GetXForMinY(xVector; yVector) X vector = [1;2;3;4]
Y vector = [10;11;9;13]
Output
Scalar = 3
GetYForMaxX Gets the Y value, where corresponding X Formula
value is a maximal GetYForMaxX(Concatenate(1;2;3;4);
• Formula: GetYForMaxX(xVector; X vector = [1;2;3;4]
Output
Scalar = 13
GetYForMinX Gets the Y value, where corresponding X Formula
value is a minimal GetYForMinX(Concatenate(1;2;3;4);
• Formula: GetYForMinX (xVector; X vector = [1;2;3;4]
Output
Scalar = 10
FullWidthHalfMax Gets full width at half maximum Formula
• Input: X vector, Y vector, interpolation FullWidthHalfMax(Concatenate(1;2;3;4);
type* Concatenate(4;11;9;5); CubicSplineNatu-
• Output: Scalar ralInterpolation)
• Formula: FullWidthHalfMax(xVector; Input
yVector, InterpolationType) X vector = [1;2;3;4]
Y vector = [4;11;9;5]
terpolation
Output
Scalar = 2.7
LabX Appendix 713

GetDistances When arguments: vector, vector Formula
• Gets distances (absolute values) GetDistances(Concatenate(1;2;3;4);
between 2D points specified by x and y Concatenate(4;11;9;5))
vectors Input
• Input: X vector, Y vector. X vector = [1;2;3;4]
• Output: Vector (output vector length = Y vector = [4;11;9;5]
input vector length – 1)
Output
• Formula: GetDistances(xVector;
yVector) Vector = [7.1;2.2;4.1]
When arguments: vector Formula
• Gets distances (absolute values) GetDistances(Concatenate(1;2;4;7))
between 1D points provided by a single Input
vector
Vector = [1;2;4;7]
• Input: Vector
Output
• Output: Vector (output vector length =
input vector length – 1) Vector = [1;2;3]
• Formula: GetDistances(Vector)
GetDifferences Gets differences (positive and negative Formula
values) between values of a given vector GetDifferences(Concatenate(1;10;4;7))
• Input: Vector Input
• Output: Vector (output vector length = Vector = [1;10;4;7]
Output
• Formula: GetDifferences(Vector)
Vector = [9;6;3]
GetIndexOfMax Gets the (1 based) index of maximal value Formula
from a given vector GetIndexOfMax(Concatenate(1;10;4;20;5;
• Input: Scalar 20;6))
• Output: Vector (output vector length = Input
input vector length – 1) Vector = [1;10;4;20;5;20;6]
• Formula: GetIndexOfMax(Vector) Output
Scalar = 4
GetIndexOfMin Gets the (1 based) index of minimal value Formula
from a given vector GetIndexOfMin(Concatenate(10;1;20;1))
• Input: Scalar Input
• Output: Vector (output vector length = Vector = [10;1;20;1]
Output
• Formula: GetIndexOfMin(Vector)
Scalar = 2
Fit Least-Squares fitting the points (x,y) to a Formula
line y : x -> a+b*x, returning its best fitting Fit(Concatenate(1;2;3);
parameters as (a, b) tuple, where a is the Concatenate(1;3;2))
intercept and b the slope.
Input
• Input: X vector, Y vector
X vector = [1;2;3;]
• Output: Vector (Tuple)
Y vector = [1;3;2]
• Formula: Fit(xVector; yVector)
Output
Tuple = [1.0;0.5]
714 Appendix LabX

Vector functions
CopyVectorFro- Returns a coppied vector from specified Formula
mIndex index CopyVectorFromIndex(Creat-
• Input: Vector, index. eVector(5;6;7;8;9;10); 3)
• Output: Vector. Input
• Formula: CopyVectorFromIndex(Vector; Vector = [5;6;7;8;9;10]
index) Index = 3
Output
Vector = [7;8;9;10]
CopyVector Returns a specified number of values Formula
coppied from a source vector CopyVector(CreateVector(5;6;7;8;9;10); 3)
• Input: Vector, count Input
• Output: Vector Vector = [5;6;7;8;9;10]
• Formula: CopyVector(Vector; Count) Count = 3
Output
Vector = [5;6;7]
Tail Gets vector tail (all values except first Formula
value) Tail(CreateVector(5;1;3))
• Output: Vector Vector = [5;6;7]
• Formula: Tail(Vector) Output
Vector = [6;7]
Head (same as First) Gets first vector value Formula
• Input: Vector Head(CreateVector(5;1;3))
• Formula: Head(Vector) Vector = [5;6;7]
Output
Scalar = 5
CreateVector When 3 arguments: Formula
• Creates a new vector, with specified CreateVector(5;1;4)
number of values, where Input
ResultVector[0] = FirstValue and
First value = 5
Vector[i+1] = Vector[i]+Interval
Interval = 1
• Input: first value, interval, count
Count = 4
• Output: Vector
Output
• Formula: CreateVector(FirstValue;
Interval; Count) Vector = [5;6;7;8]
When 2 arguments: Formula
• Creates a new vector, with specified CreateVector(5;3)
number of items, where each item = Input
Value
Value = 5
• Input: Value, Count
Count = 3
• Output: Vector
Output
• Formula: CreateVector(Value; Count)
Vector = [5;5;5]
LabX Appendix 715

CreateVector- Creates a new vector, with values from the Formula
FromRange / given closed range, where ResultVector[0] CreateVectorFromRange(5;10;2)
LinSpace = FirstValue, Vector[i+1] =
Input
Vector[i]+Interval and Vector[lastIndex] ≤
LastValue First value = 5
• Input: first value, last value, interval Last value = 10
• Output: Vector Interval = 2
• Formula: CreateVector- Output
FromRange(FirstValue; LastValue; Vector = [5;7;9]
Interval)
Reverse Gets xVector values in order, corresponding Formula
to sorted xVector values in ascending order Reverse(CreateVectorFromRange(5;10;2))
• Output: Vector Vector = [5;7;9]
• Formula: Reverse(Vector) Output
Vector = [9;7;5]
SortAsc Gets sorted vector in ascending order. Formula
• Input: Vector SortAsc(CreateVector(5;-1;3))
• Formula: SortAsc(Vector) Vector = [5;4;3]
Output
Vector = [3;4;5]
SortDesc Gets sorted vector in descending order. Formula
• Input: Vector SortDesc(CreateVector(5;1;3))
• Formula: SortDesc(Vector) Vector = [5;6;7]
Output
Vector = [7;6;5]
GetxVectorOrdered- Gets X vector values in order, corre- Formula
ByYAsc sponding to sorted Y vector values in GetxVectorOrderedByYAsc(Creat-
ascending order. eVector(5;1;3); CreateVector(13;-1;3))
• Input: Vector X, vector Y Input
• Output: Vector Vector X = [5;6;7]
• Formula: GetxVectorOrdered- Vector Y = [13;12;11]
ByYAsc(xVector; yVector)
Output
Vector = [7;6;5]
GetxVectorOrdered- Gets X vector values in order, corre- Formula
ByYDesc sponding to sorted Y vector values in GetxVectorOrderedByYDesc(Creat-
descending order. eVector(5;1;3); CreateVector(13;1;3))
• Formula: GetxVectorOrdered- Vector Y = [13;14;15]
ByYDesc(xVector, yVector)
Output
Vector = [7;6;5]
716 Appendix LabX

GetyVectorOrdered- Gets Y vector values in order, corre- Formula
ByXAsc sponding to sorted X vector values in GetyVectorOrderedByXAsc(Creat-
ascending order. eVector(5;-1;3); CreateVector(13;1;3))
• Formula: GetyVectorOrdered- Vector Y = [13;14;15]
ByXAsc(xVector; yVector)
Output
Vector = [15;14;13]
GetyVectorOrdered- Gets Y vector values in order, corre- Formula
ByXDesc sponding to sorted X vector values in GetyVectorOrderedByXDesc(Creat-
descending order. eVector(5;1;3); CreateVector(13;1;3))
• Formula: GetyVectorOrdered- Vector Y = [13;14;15]
ByXDesc(xVector; yVector)
Output
Vector = [15;14;13]
Available interpolation types
Usage in formula Type
StepInterpolation Step Interpolation
LinearInterpolation Linear Interpolation
CubicSplineNaturalInterpolation Cubic Spline Natural Interpolation
CubicSplineAkimaInterpolation Cubic Spline Akima Interpolation
RationalWithoutPolesInterpolation Rational Without Poles Interpolation
RationalWithPolesInterpolation Rational With Poles Interpolation
PolynomialEquidistantInterpolation Polynomial Equidistant Interpolation
PolynomialInterpolation Polynomial Interpolation
LogLinearInterpolation Log Linear Interpolation
See also
13.6 Global variables

Variables Description Module
ButtonOk The button variable for OK Platform
ButtonCancel The button variable for Cancel Platform
False The variable for False Platform
IsMethodExecutableOn- Method is marked with: Can run on blocked Platform
BlockedInstrument instruments
IsAdjustmentMethod Method is of type: Adjustment analysis Platform
IsCalibrationMethod Method is of type: Calibration method Platform
InstrumentName The name of the instrument Platform
InstrumentSerialNumber Instrument's serial number Platform
InstrumentCategory Instrument's category Platform
LabX Appendix 717

InstrumentModel Instrument's model Platform
IsInstrumentBlockedByDateExpi- Instrument is blocked for the following reason: Expiry Platform
ration date
IsInstrumentBlockedByMethod Instrument is blocked for the following reason: Method Platform
IsInstrumentUnblockedByUser Instrument is blocked for the following reason: Users Platform
MethodInternalId The system internal method ID Platform
MethodName The name of the method Platform
MethodComment The comment of the method Platform
MethodId The method ID Platform
MaxNumberOfSamples The maximum number of samples for the current Platform
scope
Nominal The nominal value Platform
NotOk The variable for the status Not OK Platform
Ok The variable for the status OK Platform
ProductInternalId The system internal product ID Platform
ProductId The product ID Platform
ProductName The product name Platform
ProductLabel1 The product label 1 Platform
RfidTagFormatBeaker RFID format type Beaker Platform
RfidTagFormatChainOfCustody RFID format type Chain of Custody Platform
RfidTagFormatEmpty RFID format type Empty Platform
RfidTagFormatIdentification RFID format type Beaker Platform
RfidTagFormatPipette RFID format type Pipette Platform
RfidTagFormatPretare RFID format type Pretare Platform
RfidTagFormatSieve RFID format type Sieve Platform
SampleId1 The sample ID 1 Platform
SampleSerieId The sample series ID Platform
SampleSerieInternalId The sample series internal ID Platform
SampleSerieName The name of the sample series Platform
SampleSerieLabel1 The sample series label 1 Platform
718 Appendix LabX

T1Minus The relative lower tolerances Platform
T1Plus The relative upper tolerances Platform
TaskInternalId The system internal task ID Platform
TaskName The name of the task Platform
TaskResponsibleName The name of the responsible user Platform
TaskResponsibleFullName The full name of the responsible user Platform
True The variable for True Platform
Uncertain The variable for Uncertain Platform
TestName The name of the test Balance
TestResult_Aborted For test result Canceled/Stopped Balance
TestResult_Failed For test result Failed Balance
TestResult_Passed For test result Passed Balance
TestResult_PassedWithWarning For test result Passed with warning Balance
MinWeighExpansionFactor For the MinWeigh Expansion factor Balance
MinWeighSafetyFactor For the MinWeigh Safety factor Balance
MinWeighWeighingTolerance For the MinWeigh Tolerance Balance
ToleranceProfile For the tolerance profile Balance
WeighBridgeSerialNumber Serial number of the weigh bridge Balance
WeighBridgeSoftwareNumber Software number of the weigh bridge Balance
WeighBridgeSoftwareVersion Software version of the weigh bridge Balance
TerminalSerialNumber Serial number of the terminal Balance
TerminalSoftwareNumber Software number of the terminal Balance
TerminalSoftwareVersion Software version of the terminal Balance
InclinometerStateLeveled For inclinometer state: Leveled Balance
InclinometerStateNotLeveled For inclinometer state: Not leveled Balance
InclinometerStateNotAvailable For inclinometer state: Not available Balance
InclinometerStateMalfunction For inclinometer state: Malfunction Balance
InclinometerStateUndefined For inclinometer state: Undefined Balance
MinWeighStateViolated For MinWeigh state: Violated Balance
MinWeighStateNotViolated For MinWeigh state: Not violated Balance
MinWeighStateUndefined For MinWeigh state: undefined Balance
PipetteTypeMultiChannel Multi channel pipette type Balance
PipetteTypeSingleChannel Single channel pipette type Balance
SmartTagFormatBeaker Smart Tag format Beaker Balance
SmartTagFormatPipette Smart Tag format Pipette Balance
SmartTagFormatEmpty Uninitialized Smart Tag Balance
DosingUnitSerialNumber Serial number of the Quantos dosing module Quantos
LabX Appendix 719

DosingUnitModel Model of the Quantos dosing module Quantos
HeadTypeSolid Module type Solid of Quantos dosing head Quantos
HeadTypeLiquid Module type Liquid of Quantos dosing head Quantos
AnalysisStatusOk The analysis status OK Thermal Values
AnalysisStatusInterrupted The analysis status Interrupted Thermal Values
AnalysisStatusStopped The analysis status Stopped Thermal Values
AnalysisStatusInterruptedAnd- The analysis status Interrupted and stopped Thermal Values
Stopped
TestStatusPassed The test status Passed Thermal Values
TestStatusFailed The test status Failed Thermal Values
CapillaryStatusIncluded The capillary status Included Thermal Values
CapillaryStatusExcluded The capillary status Excluded Thermal Values
CapillaryStatusEmpty The capillary status Empty Thermal Values
See also
2 Use of data binding } Page 199
13.7 Data markings

Data markings
Index Text Description Module
1 Modified The result has been modified. Titration / Platform
2 Excluded The result has been excluded. Titration / Platform
3 Outside limits The value is outside the defined limits. Titration / Platform
4 Resource expired The resource has expired. Titration / Platform
5 srel above max. srel The srel is above the defined limits. Titration
6 srel above srel for multiple deter- The srel is above the defined limits for multiple determination. Titration
mination
7 Value outside limits, not saved in The determined value is outside the defined limits. The value will Titration
setup not be updated in the resources of the instrument nor in the
burette.
8 Sample data outside limits The sample data is outside the defined limits. Titration
9 Standard evaluation used If no EQPs were recognized with the defined procedure in Titration
Evaluation and Recognition, the procedure of type Standard is
used instead.
Affected raw results and results based on those raw results are
marked.
12 Unfinished Sample Not all the measurements of this sample were completed. Titration / Platform
13 Measurement(s) deleted Marked measurements are deleted. Platform
14 Reset performed A reset on the instrument has been performed. Titration / Platform
15 Termination due to error A termination due to an error occurred. Titration / Platform
16 Sample suspended The sample has been suspended. Titration / Platform
17 Data compression on instrument If the instrument measures continuously and more than 1000 Titration
occurred readings have been measured, the values on the instrument are
compressed. The subsequent calculations in the instrument are
based on compressed data.
18 Intermediate data Temporary data that has not yet been persistently saved. Titration
19 New result The result was added after analysis by a recalculation. Titration
20 Sample skipped The sample was skipped by the user interaction. Titration
22 New (Manual) New EQP was added by the user by reevaluation. Titration
23 New (Reevaluated) Titration curve was reevaluated by the defined parameters in Titration
Evaluation and Recognition.
720 Appendix LabX

Index Text Description Module
24 Error due to electrostatic charge Error condition due to electrostatic charge detection. Balance
27 Returned result limit exceeded The number of found results has exceeded the maximum of Platform
2000.
28 Raw data outside limits A raw value is outside the limits. SevenExcellence
32 Manual interaction A manual interaction occurred during measurement. SevenExcellence
40 Calibration expired The used calibration has expired. UV/VIS
41 Performance test sequence The life span of the performance test has been exceeded. UV/VIS
expired
42 CertiRef expired A performance test was performed with one or more CertiRefs UV/VIS
whose life span was exceeded.
43 Background corrected Background correction was activated for measurement. UV/VIS
44 Monitored objects criteria not The defined settings in Monitoring have not been met. Balance
fulfilled
13.8 Balance alibi memory

The alibi memory is a tamper-proof data storage device on which weighing data subject to legal control is
automatically stored and accessible for a period of time. An alibi memory device operates according to the
principle of a "ring" memory: when the capacity limit of the data records and the retention period are reached,
the oldest data record in the memory is automatically overwritten by the new data record.
As soon as a result is generated by the balance, it will be stored in the alibi memory of the balance, if the
feature is activated. Access to the alibi memory on the balance is provided in stand-alone mode only.
The combination of Alibi record ID and Bridge serial number ensures the uniqueness of an alibi memory
entry. The balance also defines a retention period describing the minimum amount of time during which the
results must be stored in the alibi memory. As soon as the retention period for specific alibi entries is exceeded,
the balance can reuse these memory slots for new entries.
The alibi memory is only available for specific balance models and needs to be activated by a service
technician. Contact your METTLER TOLEDO representative for more details.
LabX stores the following data related to alibi records on balances which can be retrieved in raw data and
balance reports:
• Alibi ID
• Bridge serial number
• Retention period (days)
• Instrument internal ID
Note
When the Capture mode is set to Immediate, no alibi record is generated.
13.9 Determination type

These types are shown in the list views of Results or Result sets.
Determination Balance Quantos Titration Density Refrac- Thermal Values Seven- UV/VIS
type tometry Excellence
None* • • • • • • •
Multiple* • • • • • •
Measurement • • • • •
Interval •
Good Weighing • •
Practice
Test • •
Adjustment •
Calibration •
Clean •
LabX Appendix 721

Determination Balance Quantos Titration Density Refrac- Thermal Values Seven- UV/VIS
type tometry Excellence
GT sample •
determination
Titer determi- •
nation
Sensor •
calibration
pH sensor test •
Concentration •
determination
Blank determi- •
nation
Drift determi- •
nation
KF sample •
determination
Manual •
Operation
Adjustment •
Clean •
* Only appear in Result sets

• None: If no samples are configured to be handled in the method.
• Multiple: If more than one and different determination types are present in the result set.
13.10 User defined date and time format strings

The following table describes the user defined date and time format specifiers and displays a result string
produced by each format specifier.
Format specifier Description Examples
d The day of the month, from 1 to 31. 6/1/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 1
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 15
dd The day of the month, from 01 to 31. 6/1/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 01
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 15
ddd The abbreviated name for the day of the week 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> Mon (en-US)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> Пн (ru-RU)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> lun. (fr-FR)
dddd The full name for the day of the week 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> Monday (en-US)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> Понедельник (ru-RU)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> lundi (fr-FR)
f The tenth of a second in a date and time value. 6/15/2016 13:45:30.617 -> 6
6/15/2016 13:45:30.050 -> 0
ff The hundredth of a second in a date and time value. 6/15/2016 13:45:30.617 -> 61
6/15/2016 13:45:30.005 -> 00
F If not zero, the tenth of a second in a date and time 6/15/2016 13:45:30.617 -> 6
value. 6/15/2016 13:45:30.050 -> (no output)
FF If not zero, the hundredth of a second in a date and 6/15/2016 13:45:30.617 -> 61
time value. 6/15/2016 13:45:30.005 -> (no output)
FFF If not zero, the millisecond in a date and time value. 6/15/2016 13:45:30.617 -> 617
6/15/2016 13:45:30.0005 -> (no output)
FFFF If not zero, the ten-thousandth of a second in a date 6/1/2016 13:45:30.5275 -> 5275
and time value. 6/15/2016 13:45:30.00005 -> (no output)
FFFFF If not zero, the hundred-thousandth of a second in a 6/15/2016 13:45:30.61754 -> 61754
date and time value. 6/15/2016 13:45:30.000005 -> (no output)
FFFFFF If not zero, the millionth of a second in a date and 6/15/2016 13:45:30.617542 -> 617542
time value. 6/15/2016 13:45:30.0000005 -> (no output)
722 Appendix LabX

FFFFFFF If not zero, the ten-millionth of a second in a date and 6/15/2016 13:45:30.6175425 -> 6175425
time value. 6/15/2016 13:45:30.0001150 -> 000115
g, gg The period or time frame. 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> A.D.
h The hour from 0 to 11 when using a 12-hour display. 6/15/2016 1:45:30 AM -> 1
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 1
hh The hour from 00 to 11 when using a 12-hour 6/15/2016 1:45:30 AM -> 01
display. 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 01
H The hour from 0 to 23 when using a 24-hour display. 6/15/2016 1:45:30 AM -> 1
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 13
HH The hour from 00 to 23 when using a 24-hour 6/15/2016 1:45:30 AM -> 01
display. 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 13
m The minute from 0 to 59. 6/15/2016 1:09:30 AM -> 9
6/15/2016 1:09:30 PM -> 9
mm The minute from 00 to 59. 6/15/2016 1:09:30 AM -> 09
6/15/2016 1:09:30 PM -> 09
M The month from 1 to 12. 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 6
MM The month from 01 to 12. 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 06
MMM The abbreviated name of the month. 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> Jun (en-US)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> juin (fr-FR)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> Jun (zu-ZA)
MMMM The full name of the month. 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> June (en-US)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> juni (da-DK)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> Juni (zu-ZA)
s The second from 0 to 59. 6/15/2016 1:45:09 PM -> 9
ss The second from 00 to 59. 6/15/2016 1:45:09 PM -> 09
t The first character in the AM/PM tag. 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> P (en-US)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 午 (ja-JP)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> (fr-FR)
tt The AM/PM tag. 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> PM (en-US)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 午後 (ja-JP)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> (fr-FR)
y The year from 0 to 99. 1/1/0001 12:00:00 AM -> 1
1/1/0900 12:00:00 AM -> 0
1/1/1900 12:00:00 AM -> 0
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 9
yy The year from 00 to 99. 1/1/0001 12:00:00 AM -> 01
1/1/0900 12:00:00 AM -> 00
1/1/1900 12:00:00 AM -> 00
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 09
yyy The year, with a minimum of three digits. 1/1/0001 12:00:00 AM -> 001
1/1/0900 12:00:00 AM -> 900
1/1/1900 12:00:00 AM -> 1900
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 2016
yyyy The year as a four-digit number. 1/1/0001 12:00:00 AM -> 0001
1/1/0900 12:00:00 AM -> 0900
1/1/1900 12:00:00 AM -> 1900
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 2016
yyyyy The year as a five-digit number. 1/1/0001 12:00:00 AM -> 00001
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 02016
z Hour offset from UTC, without preceding zeros. 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -07:00 -> -7
zz Hour offset from UTC, with one preceding zero for a 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -07:00 -> -07
single-digit value.
zzz Offset from UTC in hours and minutes. 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -07:00 -> -07:00
LabX Appendix 723

: The time delimiter. 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> : (en-US)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> . (it-IT)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> : (ja-JP)
/ The date delimiter. 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> / (en-US)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> - (ar-DZ)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> . (tr-TR)
13.11 Standard date and time formats strings

Standard format character strings use format labels to define how text is displayed. Any date and time format
character string that contains more than one character (including space characters) is interpreted as a user-
defined format character string for date and time.
Format identifier Description Examples
d Short date format 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 6/15/2016 (en-US)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 15/06/2016 (fr-FR)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 2016/06/15 (ja-JP)
D Long date format 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> Monday, June 15, 2016 (en-US)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> Montag, 15. Juni 2016 (de-DE)
g General date/time format (short time) 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 6/15/2016 1:45 PM (en-US)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 15/06/2016 13:45 (es-ES)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 2016/6/15 13:45 (zh-CN)
G General date/time format (long time) 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM (en-US)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 15/06/2016 13:45:30 (es-ES)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 2016/6/15 13:45:30 (zh-CN)
s Sortable date/time format, according to ISO 8601 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 2016-06-15T13:45:30
t Short time format 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 1:45 PM (en-US)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 13:45 (hr-HR)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 01:45 ‫( م‬ar-EG)
T Long time format 6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 1:45:30 PM (en-US)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 13:45:30 (hr-HR)
6/15/2016 1:45:30 PM -> 01:45:30 ‫( م‬ar-EG)
13.12 User-defined time and date functions

Time and date functions
year(timeSpan) This function returns the time span in years based on 365 days. The function can be used to
add a time span in years to a date that is created using the following functions:
now(), today(), datetime(...), date(...)
month(timeSpan) This function returns the time span in months based on 30 days. The function can be used to
add a time span in months to a date that is created using the following functions:
day(timeSpan) This function returns the time span in days. The function can be used to add a time span in
days to a date that is created using the following functions:
hour(timeSpan) This function returns the time in hours. The function can be used to add a time in hours to a date
or a time that is created using the following functions:
now(), today(), datetime(...), time(...), date(...)
minute(timeSpan) This function returns the time in minutes. The function can be used to add a time in minutes to a
date or a time that is created using the following functions:
second(timeSpan) This function returns the time in seconds. The function can be used to add a time in seconds to
a date or a time that is created using the following functions:
time(hour;minute;second) This function can be used to output a time in a specified format in hours, minutes and seconds.
724 Appendix LabX

datetime(day;month;year;hour;minute;s This function can be used to output a time and date value a specified format in days, months,
econd) years, hours, minutes and seconds.
date(day;month;year) This function can be used to output a date value in a specified format in days, months and
years.
now() This function returns a date value for the current date and time.
today() This function returns a date value for the current date.
Formatting is performed according to the specifications described in the appendix.
See also
2 User defined date and time format strings } Page 722
2 Standard date and time formats strings } Page 724
13.13 Density Refractometry formula syntax and tables
13.13.1 Conditions and formulas

A logical condition can be defined to determine whether a particular method function should be executed based
on a result (true or false). The condition is in the format of a formula. An empty condition is interpreted as true.
Formulas may be used in various method functions. You can enter calculated results Rx, temperature-
compensated values (TCx), tables and raw data in formulas.
A formula may be formed, for example, as follows:
"CT[1]=0". This formula checks whether the first cell test of the method has failed ("0" stands for "False" and
"1" for "True").
The raw data of the method functions is indexed (e.g. CT[1], CT[2]). If the index is missing, [1] is assumed
automatically (CT=CT[1]).
Application example: The following method functions have been integrated into one method:
Method function: Cell test
"Interrupt if failed": Disabled
"Condition": Disabled
Method function: Cleaning

"Condition: Enabled
"Formula": CT[1]=0
Method function: Cell test

"Interrupt if failed": Enabled
"Condition": Enabled
"Formula": CT[1]=0
The following behavior has been programmed with this sequence:

• If the first cell test was successful, cleaning and the second cell test are skipped (Conditions "CT[1]=0").
• If the first cell test has failed, cleaning and the second cell test are carried out (Conditions "CT[1]=0").
• If the second cell test has failed, the execution of other tasks is interrupted (on account of the enabled
setting, "Interrupt if failed").
Mathematical Functions and Operators
The following mathematical functions and operators can be used in formulas:
LabX Appendix 725

Functions Comparison operators
Logarithm to the base 10 lg(x) equal to =
Logarithm to the base e ln(x) larger than >
Exponential to base 10 pw(x) or larger than or equal to >=
scientific notation
Exponential to base e ex(x) smaller than <
Square sq(x) smaller than or equal to <=
Square root sr(x) x in the range of ... < x < ...
not equal to <>
approximately ~
Mathematical operators Logical operators

Addition + and AND
Subtraction - or OR
Multiplication * correct TRUE
Division / False FALSE
Note
• Logical operators are only permitted within formulas of the subfunction "Condition".
• The use of mathematical operators (+, -, * and /) within a parenthetical expression is not possible.
Formula Syntax
- Brackets
There are three types of brackets that can be used in formulas:
• Round brackets "( )":
e.g. T[Table_name(d)] and mathematical operators ln(d)
• Curly brackets "{ }": Relation to the cell, e.g. d{DX}. if the cell is not specified, then the internal cell is used
as default.
• Square brackets "[ ]"
- Indexing of the raw result, e.g.CT[1]: corresponds to the result of the first method function "Cell test" (if the
method has several "Cell test" method functions)
- Table name T[Table_name()] , e.g. T[Brix_d_NBS(d)];
- Auxiliary value H[Auxiliary_value], e.g. H[Auxiliary_Value_1]
- Color results with subscale/wavelength COL[Color_scale()], e.g. COL[CIELAB(L)];
COL[x]; x= color scale without subscale
COL[x(y)]; x= color scale with subscale
COL[T..(z)]; z= spectral value
T = Transmission %, T = Transmission abs; T = Extinction
(The color scales shown can be selected in the formula editor using the C button; button 1 in the formula
editor calls up C.)
- Fixed abbreviations
The following abbreviations are defined:
DM Internal density cell
RX Refractive index module

R1 ... Rx Results from the method function "Calculation"
TC1 … TCx Results from the method function "temperature compensation"
A, B, C, D, x, y Coefficients (A-D) and variables (x,y) can be used in formulas, e.g. Ax + B.
- Syntax examples
• Simple raw result: R1 = d
• Temperature compensation: R1 = TC1
726 Appendix LabX

• Tables: R1 = T[Brix_d_NBS(d)]
The following values can be entered for tables:
- Internal tables: d, dRaw, dvisc, nD, TC
- User-defined tables: All analysis data generated
- Rules for color results
• Color scales with subscales:
The colorimeter sends up to four results (subscales) for each color scale. The subscales are inserted
between the round brackets. If only one color value is sent for a particular color scale, no round brackets
are needed, e.g. COL[Scale(Subscale)] or COL[Scale].
• Transmission and extinction:
The Lovibond colorimeter sends the results for all wavelengths, in increments of 5 nm between 420 and
710 nm, e.g. COL[Extinction(450)]. If you wish to define a wavelength between the results sent from the
colorimeter, this will need to be interpolated. "–" is displayed if the inputted wavelength is not within the
420 to 710 nm range
13.13.2 Color scales

Chromaticity() Klett
Tristimulus() Icumsa (420)
CIELAB() Icumsa (4560)
CIELCH() Icumsa (420 - 720)
Lovibond RYBN EP Red
AOCS RY EP Yellow
Saybolt EP Brown
EBC EP Brown/Yellow
Gardner EP Green/Yellow
ASTM Color CH YG
PT-Co/Hazen CH Y
Iodine CH OY
Delta E CH OR
IP Units CH BR
AF960 AOCS PFUND
Chlorophyll a & b ADMI 3F
beta Carotene EBC (430nm)
Hess Ives ASBC
Yellowness Index ASBC (430nm)
Yellowness E313-73 Series 52
Yellowness E313-96 Transmission %
Yellowness D1925 Transmission absolute
Hunter lab () Extinction
13.13.3 Result proposals

List of the predefined results
Application d: Others
Twaddell number Based on the specific weight SG at meas. temperature.
°Twad = 200 * (SG-1)
LabX Appendix 727

Baumé degree Based on the specific weight SG at meas. temperature.
For samples heavier than water:
H. °Be = ((1/SG) - 1) * -144.3), at 15°C
H. Bé (US) = ((1/SG) - 1) * -145), at 60°F
For samples lighter than water:
Lt. °Bé = 10 + 144.3 * ((1/SG) - 1), at 15°C
Lt. °Bé (US) = 10 + 145 * ((1/SG) - 1), at 60°F
Application d: Alcohol
Jap. Sake deg. Sake Grade (Japan), based on the specific weight SG, measured at
15°C
Jap. Sake deg. = ((1/SG) - 1) * 1443
Milk degrees Based on the specific weight SG at meas. temperature.
Milk deg. =1000 * (SG-1)
Alc. (%v/v) OIML @20°C % volume of ethanol at the stated temperature, as per the OIML R-22
Alc. (%v/v) OIML @60°F (International Organization of Legal Metrology, Recommendation 22:
Alc. (%v/v) OIML @15°C alcohol tables), temperature scale IPTS 68, based on the absolute
density (in vacuum)
Alc. (%w/w) OIML % weight ethanol, as per the OIML R-22 (International Organization of
Legal Metrology, Recommendation 22: alcohol tables), temperature
scale IPTS 68, based on the absolute density (in vacuum)
Alc. d @20°C True density (in vacuo) of an ethanol sample at the stated temperature,
Alc. d @60°F as per OIML R-22
Alc. d @15°C
Alc. dA @20°C Apparent density (in Air) of an ethanol sample at the stated temperature
Alc. dA @60°F
Alc. dA @15°C
Alc. SGA @20°C Apparent relative density (in air), SG(t/t), of an ethanol sample at the
Alc. SGA @60°F stated temperature
Alc. SGA @15°C
Alc. (Proof) USA US proof degree at 15.56°C (60°F), based on the true density
Alc. (%v/v) HM C&E % volume ethanol as per H.M. C&E Table, at 20°C
Alc. (%w/w) HM C&E
Alc. (%v/v) Canada @20°C % volume ethanol at 20°C, as per the Canadian ethanol tables
Alc. (proof) UK UK proof degree at 15.56°C (60°F)
Alc. (%v/v) OIML ITS90 @20°C % volume of ethanol at the stated temperature, as per the OIML R-22
Alc. (%v/v) OIML ITS90 @60°F (International Organization of Legal Metrology, Recommendation 22:
Alc. (%v/v) OIML ITS90 @15°C alcohol tables), new temperature scale ITS 90, based on the true
density (in vacuum)
Alc. (%w/w) OIML ITS90 % weight ethanol, as per the OIML R-22 (International Organization of
Legal Metrology, Recommendation 22: alcohol tables), new
temperature scale ITS 90, based on the true density (in vacuum)
Alc. (%v/v) AOAC % volume ethanol at 60°F, or % weight ethanol, as per AOAC tables
(American Organization of Analytical Chemists), based at the true
density at 20°C.
Alc. (%v/v) Gay-Lussac %-volume ethanol at 15°C, as per OIML R-22 (International Organi-
zation of Legal Metrology, Recommendation 22: (alcohol tables), new
temperature scale IPTS 68, based on the true density (in vacuum)
Application d: Sugar
Plato d Extract-content in percentage weight (% w/w), Plato table, from true
density at 20°C
728 Appendix LabX

Brix d NBS 113 Saccharose content in percentage weight (% w/w), NBS table 113,
from true density at 20°C
Brix d Emmerich Saccharose content in percentage weight (% w/w), according to A.
Emmerich, Zuckerindustrie 119 (1994), from true density at 20°C
HFCS42 d %-weight HFCS syrup (High Fructose Corn Syrup) with 42 % fructose
fraction, based on true density at 20°C. Must be measured at 20°C.
HFCS55 d %-weight HFCS syrup (High Fructose Corn Syrup) with 55 % fructose
fraction, based on true density at 20°C. Must be measured at 20°C.
Invert sugar d %-weight invert sugar, based on true density at 20°C. Must be
measured at 20°C.
KMW d Klosterneuburg sugar grade (Austria). Precise sugar content in grape
juice. Based on true density at 20°C.
Babo (KMW) d Sugar content in grape juice (Italy). Based on true density at 20°C.
Oechsle d Oechsle degree in grape juice, based on the specific weight at 15°C.
°Oe = (SG-1) * 1000, with d in g/cm3
Application nD: Others
Zeiss (14.45) Zeiss number, based on nD(20°C). Pure water gives a value of 14.45.
Zeiss (15.0) Zeiss number, based on nD(20°C). Pure water gives a value of 15.0.
Application nD: Sugar
Brix nD @ Tx Saccharose content in %.weight as per ICUMSA, 20th session in
Colorado Springs (1990). Also corresponds to OIML R 108 (1993).
Result without temperature compensation to 20°C.
Brix nD comp 20C Saccharose content in %.weight as per ICUMSA, 20th session in
Colorado Springs, 1990. Also corresponds to OIML R 108 (1993).
Result compensated to 20°C.
Invert sugar nD % weight invert sugar, as per ICUMSA, 20th session in Colorado
Springs (1990). Result without temperature compensation to 20°C.
HFCS 42 nD % weight HFCS syrup (High Fructose Corn Syrup) with 42 % fructose
fraction. Based on the refractive index at 20°C. Must be measured at
20°C.
HFCS 55 nD % weight HFCS syrup (High Fructose Corn Syrup) with 55 % fructose
fraction. Based on the refractive index at 20°C. Must be measured at
20°C.
Oechsle nD Oechsle degree from grape juice, based on the refractive index at 20°C.
13.14 Arithmetic model

Calculations in LabX are performed according to IEEE-754-2008. The IEEE 754 standard requires support for a
number of operations. These include arithmetic operations such as add, subtract, multiply, divide, square root,
conversion operations, scaling, and comparisons. The results of these operations are to be the same for all
implementations of the standard, for a given format and rounding mode.
13.14.1 Computations and accuracy

LabX performs each of the computational operations that return a numeric result by using the maximum
available accuracy and then performs the rounding as the last step, according to the settings in the result
calculations if necessary.
Example
Where N is a number and R a result.
• Result R1 to be presented to the nearest 3 decimal points.
N1 1.123456
LabX Appendix 729

N2 + 1.1234567
R1 without rounding = 2.2469127
R1 with rounding 2.247
• Result R2 to be presented to the nearest 4 decimal points.

• N3 = 2.21311
• R2 = R1 + N3
R1 2.247
N3 + 2.21311
R2 without rounding = 4.46011
R2 with rounding 4.4601
Note
For R2 the available accuracy regarding R1 is three decimals and not the full accuracy, according to the
settings in the result calculations.
13.14.2 Infinity and NaN

• For both “NaN” and “Infinity”, LabX indicates all result states as Not OK .
• LabX preserves all representations of "NaN" and "Infinity" numbers upon importing and exporting data.
13.14.3 Rounding
LabX is applying the default rounding of the IEEE-754 for all computations. Negative and positive numbers are
treated the same way by "Round half to even". This procedure treats positive and negative values symmet-
rically, and is free of sign bias.
Examples
Number Number rounded
+ 13.5 + 14
+ 14.5 + 14
– 13.5 – 14
– 14.5 – 14
All numbers are rounded to +14 or – 14 because it is an even number. All other numbers which are not ending
in 0.5 round to nearest digit as usual.
Further examples
Number Number rounded
+ 13.6 + 14
– 13.4 – 13
+ 6.6 + 7
+ 6.4 + 6
Note
• Results of piece counting in LabX may differ slightly from stand-alone balances because different types of
rounding are applied. LabX uses "Round half to even" for all calculations. Balances on the other hand use
"Round half away from zero".
13.14.4 Trailing zeroes in calculations and results

LabX adds trailing zeros according to the settings in the result calculations.
Example
Where N is a number and R a result.
730 Appendix LabX

N1 entered as 1.2 1.2
R2 is defined to 2 decimal places + 1.23
R3 is defined to 4 decimal places = 2.4300
13.14.5 Significant digits

LabX is using fix point arithmetic based on the "Microsoft .NET data type decimal". For database persistence
reasons LabX supports 14 digits before and after the decimal separator.
Significant digits
When using the calculation functions the significant digits are limited to 15. This is related to the internal
Microsoft .NET data type double conversion. At the end a decimal is used to store the data. Because of the
floating point behaviour, the decimal point is not fix.
1. ln
2. logb
3. log
4. ND
5. NDn-1
6. Pow
7. RSD
8. RSDn-1
9. Sqrt
10. SD
11. SDn-1
See also
Microsoft .NET data type decimal https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.decimal(v=vs.110).aspx
13.14.6 Standard deviation

LabX statistic calculations follow the Bessel's correction. For sample standard deviation n – 1 is used, where n
is the number of observations in a sample. This corrects the bias in the estimation of the population variance,
and some of the bias in the estimation of the population standard deviation.
13.15 Grubbs table G (N, 90%)

N (Number of samples) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
90 % - - 1.15 1.46 1.67 1.82 1.94 2.03 2.11 2.18
90 % 2.23 2.29 2.33 2.37 2.41 2.44 2.48 2.5 2.53 2.56
90 % 2.58 2.6 2.61 2.63 2.65 2.67 2.69 2.7 2.72 2.74
90 % 2.75 2.77 2.78 2.79 2.81 2.82 2.83 2.84 2.86 2.87
90 % 2.88 2.89 2.9 2.91 2.92 2.92 2.93 2.94 2.95 2.96
LabX Appendix 731

90 % 2.97 2.97 2.98 2.99 3 3 3.01 3.02 3.02 3.03
90 % 3.03 3.04 3.04 3.05 3.05 3.06 3.06 3.07 3.07 3.08
90 % 3.08 3.08 3.09 3.09 3.1 3.1 3.11 3.11 3.12 3.12
90 % 3.12 3.13 3.13 3.14 3.14 3.15 3.15 3.16 3.16 3.17
90 % 3.17 3.17 3.18 3.18 3.19 3.19 3.2 3.2 3.21 3.21
90 % 3.21 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.23 3.23 3.23 3.23 3.24 3.24
90 % 3.24 3.22 3.25 3.25 3.26 3.26 3.26 3.26 3.27 3.27
13.16 Version info

Mettler-Toledo GmbH
Im Langacher 44
8606 Greifensee, Switzerland
www.mt.com/contact
Subject to technical changes.
© Mettler-Toledo GmbH 8/2019
732 Appendix LabX

Index
Symbols System users 665, 703
Authentication 34, 697
[i] 200, 202, 205
Auto ID generation 176, 244
[s] 200, 202, 205
Auto Stand 83, 634
A Automatic print 608
Account policies 36 Automatic weight detection 266, 269, 272
Action When Exceeding Usable Life 62, 591 Automation 129
Activation Auxiliary reagents 69, 644
Offline 32 Auxiliary values 92, 641
Online 32 AuxInst 326
Active Directory 36, 668, 670 Availability
Logon 16, 33, 47, 51, 55, 92, 114, 122, 129, 138 Editing 604
EQP 572
B
Adjustment 586
Background jobs 674
Adjustment sets
Balance
Managing 648
Managing weights 605
Alibi memory 721
Balance tests 610
Allowed number of errors until blocking 612
Balances
Allowed units 617
Ethernet Interface 45, 50
Analysis and Resources Behavior
Operating 51
Action When Exceeding Life Span 62, 592
Barcode reader 693, 697
Action when exceeding shelf life 62, 592
Blank value
Action When Exceeding Usable Life 62, 591
Dialog 91
Analysis Sequence Settings 60, 590
Block balance 608, 612
Resource Behavior 62, 591
Bromine index
Analysis data 441
Formula examples 439
Using 411
Bubble Check 477, 479, 481
Analysis Data in Formulas 411
Buffers 656
Approve
Buffers and standards
Approve of objects 21
Predefined 656
Archive
Creating 28, 701 C
Displaying 28 Calibration 157, 577
Publishing 701 Calibration curve
Arithmetic model Excluding a standard 137
Computations and precision 729 Including a standard 137
Infinity 730 Calibration editor 157
NaN 730 Calibration standards 70, 644, 656
Rounding 730 Cell test, method function 461
Significant digits 731 CertiRef 563, 659
Trailing zeroes 730 Managing 659
As found test 608 Chemicals
As left test 608 Auxiliary reagents 69
Asymmetric evaluation procedure 409 Calibration standards 70
Audit Trail 665 Concentration and titer standards 71
LabX Index 733

Substances 72 Initializing a database 701
Titrants 68 Manual 700
Color results PC/Server 698
Formula syntax 726 Publishing an archive 701
Column chooser 18 Restoring a data base 700
Compare versions 180, 183, 192 Data binding 199, 212, 218, 222, 232, 235
Audit Trail 665 apply 199
Methods 192 Example 195
Products 183 Data storage 227, 232, 568
Concentration and titer standards 71 Date and time
Managing 645 Daylight saving time 704
Condition, method function 725 Synchronization 704
Conditions 205 Daylight saving 609, 613, 666
Conductivity Sensors 622 DB Maintenance 698
Configure USB stick 79, 630 Default gateway 46
Configuring a balance 78, 629 Definitions 13
Configuring Sensors Density Refractometry
Conductivity Sensors 76 General settings 44
Connecting a TBox 82, 633 Manual operations 118
Connection 585 Density Refractometry method functions
Constants Within Constant Determination 440 Adjusting 453
Content Determination 440 Atmospheric pressure 458
Control Auxiliary instruments 467
Titration EP(Coul) 372 Calculate on instrument 460
Titration KF(Coul) 383 Cell test 461
Titration KF(Vol) 354, 381 Clean 454, 462
Control band 628 Fill 483
Control limit 256, 258, 259, 608, 612, 615 Import adjustment data 455
Control type Instruction 464
Output 24 V 468 Line rinse 467
USB-RS-232 468 Measure (adjustment) 477
Current increments Measure (Measurement) 478
Titration EP(Coul) 372 Measure (Test) 481
Titration KF(Coul) 383 Measurement 456
Curve progression 414 Online Display 484
Minimum / Maximum 408 Park 471
Titration 576 PowerShower 469
Set Sample Parameters (Measurement) 477
D
Set Sample Parameters (Test) 475
Data 568
Setting Sample Parameters (Adjustment) 474
Displaying results 581
Standard data 472
Data backup
Stir 471
Automatic 699
Temperature compensation 465
Creating an archive 28, 701
Test 458, 483
Database 698
Wait 466
DB Maintenance 698
Density Refractometry method subfunction
Displaying archives 28
734 Index LabX

Adjustment 482 Bromine index 439
Determination type 721 KF vol 428
Display readability 617 Formula syntax 726
DNS server (primary) 46 Formulas 202, 410
DNS server (secondary) 46 Example 726
Dosing rate In method functions 725
Control 354, 381 Initials 726
Driver Use formulas 201, 705
Changing 585 Functions 706, 714, 717, 725
Drivers 693
G
Dyes
General method functions
Managing 658
Beep 210
Dynamic weighing 268
Communication with peripheral device 223
E Data Access 219
Editing maintenance settings 585 Data input 220
Electronic signatures 38 Display message 212
Electrostatic detection 266, 268 Information method 213
End-Point Titration 363 Notify 223
Environment 616 Number 213
EQP Read RFID tag 225
Editing 572 Report 227
ErgoSens Request selection 215
Settings 605 Request text 216
Evaluation procedure Result 227
asymetric 409 Sample cycle 241
Introduction 407 Sample IDs 211
Evaluations 209 Sample scope 243
Editing 209 Task 232
Executing 210 Transferring data 234
Exporting 210 Write RFID tag 236
Importing 210 Global settings
Exceeding Usable Life 62, 591 Analysis and Resources Behavior 60, 590
Excluding Graph
Standards 137 Displaying 156
Expired Resources 60
H
Expiry date 590
Hardware 73
Export templates 688
Peripherals 78, 629
Managing 686
Heat map 554
F Home screen 48, 93, 115, 130, 139
Fingerprint reader 81, 631 Homogenizer
Fingerprint readers 34, 697 Methods 338
Folders 25, 26 TTL / RS 338
Formats strings Host name 45
Date and time 724 Hyperlinks 191
Formula examples
LabX Index 735

I Activate 81, 632
Licenses
IEEE-754-2008 729
License Manager 30
Import templates 686
License options 31
Managing 686
Life Span 589
Including
Line rinse 466
Standards 137
Linear Calibration 625
Increments 372, 383
LinearitySet 563, 659
Index 200, 202, 205
Liquid Handler 89
InMotion 85, 129, 635
Liquid Handlers 639
Instruction, Method function 464
List view 18
Instruments
Lock screen 25
Adding 600
Logging on to the system 47
Availability 604
Loop
Block 604
Types and numbers 304, 323
Editing properties 585
Lock 218 M
Managing 583 MAC address 46
Network connection 602 Manual operation
Serial connection 600 Auxiliary instruments 108
Settings 584 Burette 103
Unblock 235, 604 Conductivity sensor 102, 169
Unlock 218 Dispense 104
USB connection 603 Manual titration 104
Internal calculations Polarized sensor 101, 168
Blank determinations 433 Potentiometric Sensor 100, 167
Concentration determination 433 Pump 106
Interpolation types 717 Sample changer 111
Ion Selective Sensors 77, 623 Temperature Sensor 100, 167
Ionizer 266, 268 Manual operations
IP address 46 Drain 120
ISE Sensors 77, 623 Dry 119
K Move lift 121
Move to position 121
Karl Fischer Titration 381
PowerShower 120
KF Stand 86, 637
Pump sample 120
Kinetics 158, 577
Rinse 119
L Sensor 99
Labels Stir 120
Applying 187 Stirrer 99
Managing 35 Manual Stand 83, 634
LabX service 46 Mathematical functions and operators 440, 725
Languages 19 Measure (MVT) 345
Learn Titration (EQP) 384 Measure (Normal) 346
Level sensor 81, 632 Measured value acquisition 268
LevelSens Messages 204
Define 27
736 Index LabX

Managing 27 Calibration 405
Show 28 Line rinse 339
Method editor Measure (Normal) 346
Manage views 188 Mix Time 407
Method function Sample 391
Data Access 219 Sample (Calibration) 393
Data input 220 Sample (KF) 394
Parallel kinetics 558 Sample (Titer) 403
Method functions Sync 363
Cell test 461 Titer 404
Condition 725 Titration (EQP) 363
Indexing 412 Titration (LearnEQP) 384
Inserting 189 Titration Stand 387
Instruction 464 Method syntax 284, 304, 309, 315
Maximum number 308 Methods
Overview 300 Creating 187
Possible number 317 Editing 185
Pretitration 405 Editing parameters 190
Standby 363, 405 Exporting 185, 193
Temperature compensation 465 Importing 185, 192
Method functions balances Manage 151
Adjustment 247 Managing 185
Automatic feeder 248 Method templates 187
Draft shield 248 Outdated 193
Eccentricity 255 Properties 188
Info lines 249 METTLER TOLEDO balances 78, 629
Repeatability test 256 Minimum / Maximum
Settings 250 Curve progression 408
Test - external weight 258 Minimum tare weight 257, 612
Test history record 260 MinWeigh 617
Validation 252 mV Sensors 74, 620
Method functions general
N
Audit Trail 217
Name
Decide 240
test 611, 614
Decision tree 240
Naming conventions for calculations 441
Delay 221
Network configuration 46
Do while 241
Nominal weight 255, 257, 258, 608, 611, 615
Label Printer 222
Number of repetitions 257, 611
Lock instrument 218
Recreate task 226 O
Tape printer 231 Objects
Unblock instrument 235 Approve 22
Method functions miscellaneous Release 23
Sample changer position 230 Occurrence of day 613
Method functions, parameters Open read-only 24
Auxiliary value 327 Operators 205, 704
LabX Index 737

Outdated methods 193 Pumps 77, 628
Outlier test 579
Q
Output 24 V 468
Quant Calibrations 137
Overall result state
Managing 659
Assignment 41
Quantos
Titration 576
Ethernet Interface 54
Overview
Manual operations 57
Method functions 308
Operating 55
P Switching on and logging in to 56
Panning 18 Quantos method function
Parallel kinetics 558 Blocking the head 281
Password complexity 38 Dosing 279
Passwords Front doors 277
Changing 33 Read/Write from/to RFID 278
PDF Validation and settings 277
Generating 189, 227, 612
R
peripheral devices
Reactivation 30, 32
Adding 54
Reanalysis 573
Peripherals 78, 629
Reevaluation 571
Balance 78, 629
Release
Fingerprint reader 81, 631
Release of objects 21
TBox 82, 633
Release policies 21
USB stick 79, 630
Report
pH Sensor 74
Multiple tasks 676
pH Sensors 621
Report designer
Phototrode 75, 621
Filtering data 684
Planning type 613
Formatting rules 684
Plug and Play Sensors
Information 684
Setup 73, 620
Insert bands 681
Polarized Sensors 75, 622
Insert detailed reports 681
Policies
Linking items 683
Display signatures 25
Overview 679
Port
Pivot Grids 682
LabX 46
Preview 684
PowerShower 469
Structuring a report 683
Preferred days 613
Tools 682
Print list
Report editor
Settings 42
Overview 677
Printer
Report functions
Selecting a default printer 585
General 676
Printing
Report templates 675
Automatic printing 350, 612
Data management 675
Products
Data sources 676
Editing 182
Editing 676
Managing 152, 181
Pump and Stirrer Detection 63, 593
738 Index LabX

Manage 676 Revoke approval 24
Reports RFID
Automatic generation 676 Reading 694
Resetting RFID tag 225, 236
Titrator 98 Rinse Burette 103
Resources Rinse Multiple Burettes 103, 164
Auxiliary reagents 644 Roles
Calibration standards 644 Adding 671
Concentration and titer standards 645 Delete 671
Expired resources 647 Edit 671
Hardware 619 Managing 671, 677
Liquid Handlers 639 Rondo 86, 637
Pumps 628 Rondolino 83, 634
Sensors 620 Rounding 730
Substances 640, 647 Rule sets 207
Titrants 641 Exporting 208
Values 640 Importing 208
Result buffer Rules
Displaying 166 Editing 208
Result calculation 255, 257, 259, 611, 615
S
Result set 568
Sample 391
Results 568
Sample (KF) 394
Adding EQP 572
Sample Changer
Color settings 41
Move Titration Head 112, 159
Displaying 153
Move to Position 111, 159
Displaying on instruments 581
Rinse 112, 159
Edit comments 575
Sample ID
Edit sample data 569
Requesting 211
Editing EQP 572
Sample series
Exporting 581
Adding 178
Managing 568
Compare 180
Measured values 575
Editing 179
Method data 580
Managing 151, 177
Raw data 575
Maximum number 177, 179
Recalculating 570
Schedule 609
Reevaluating 571
Schedules
Resource data 580
Adding 666
Result details 574
Editing 666
Show 574
Managing 666
Statistics 579
Screen lock 25
Task data 579
Search folders 26
Results Proposals Lists 418
Segmented
Return values
Evaluation procedure 409
Measurement 274, 526
Segmented evaluation procedure 409
Thermal values 508
Sensor Calibration 624, 626
Linear Calibration 625
LabX Index 739

Segmented Calibration 625 Bessel's 731
Sensor modules 597 Standard evaluation procedure 408
Sensor Test 624, 626 Standard table 157
Sensors 620 Standards
Calibration history 627 Excluding 137
Setup 650 Including 137
Test history 627, 643 Standby
Sensors, manual operations 99 Method Function 363
Series sequence Start after leveling 608
Adding 180 Start after temperature change 609
Editing 180 Start time 613
Series sequences StaticDetect 266, 268
Manage 180 Stating 355
SevenExcellence Stating method function 417
General settings 44 Statistics
SevenExcellence method function Displaying 154
Calibration 519 Evaluations 209
Measurement 510 Managing 207
Monitoring 526 Recalculating 580
Stir 510 Rule sets 207
Shelf life 589 StatusLight
Shortcut Settings 42
Adding 96 Status 149, 586
Shortcuts Stirrer 99
Add 49, 94, 116, 125, 131, 140, 171 Stirrer properties 597
Adding 171 Storing of passwords 703
Delete 172 Strategy 607
Edit 171 Stromboli 84, 634
Manage 171 Subnet mask 46
Managing 150 Substances 72, 640, 647
Manual operations 91, 94, 113, 116, 128, 131, 138, Balance 52
140 Symbols
Show preparation instructions 255, 257, 259, 611 Inserting 191
Signature policies 21
T
Single Sign-On 37
Smart Tag 160 Table of measured values
Settings 43 Displaying 170
SmartCodes 693, 697 Titration 576
Adding 693 Tags
Editing 693 Managing 28, 34
Exporting 696 Tare name 612
Importing 696 Task parameters 200
Starting 159 Using 200
SmartSample 693, 697 Tasks
SmartTrac 264, 266, 268, 272 Add 173
Spectrum 157, 578 Controlling 175, 176
Standard deviation Editing 95, 132, 141, 153, 174
740 Index LabX

Managing 152 Titration stands 633
Status 97, 117, 132, 141 USB-Stick 79, 630
TBox 82 Titration (EP Coul) 372
Temperature compensation, method function 465 Titration (KF Coul) 382
Temperature Sensor 75, 622 Titration (KF Vol) 381
Templates Titration (LearnEQP) 384
Exporting 690 Titration method function
Importing 690 Auxiliary Instrument 323
Test 586 Blank Value 328
Test activated 611, 615 Calculation 329
Test sets Conditioning 333
Managing 648 Dispense (Controlled) 335
Tests 609 Dispense (Normal) 336
Thermal Values Drain 337
Adjusting the instrument 125 Drift Determination 337
Adjustment 493 Instruction 338
General settings 43 Measure (MVT) 345
Managing batches 649 Park 349
Manual operations 126 Pump 350
Reference substances 649 Record 350
Set the furnace temperature 126 Rinse 351
Switch off the furnace 126, 127 Stating 355
Thermal Values method functions Stir 359
Boiling point 501 Titration (EP Coul) 372
Cloud point 498 Titration (KF Coul) 382
Melting point/range 493 Titration (KF Vol) 381
Melting point/range test 488 Titration Stand 387
Performance verification 487 Titration method functions
Slip melting point 504 Pretitration (EP Coul) 373
Titrants 68, 641 Titration (EP) 367
Titration Titration (EQP) 374
Auxiliary instruments 87, 638 Titration (Thermometric) 385
Balance 78, 629 Titration stands 82
Balance settings 43 SmartCodes 696
Barcode reader 79, 630 Transferring data 154
Fingerprint reader 81, 632 Transmission of passwords 703
Global settings 60, 588
U
Homogenizer 88, 639
Unblock balance 48, 52
LevelSens 81, 632
Unblock instrument 57, 115, 125, 131, 140
Network settings 81
Usable life 588
PC settings 80
USB-RS-232 468
Peripherals 78, 629
User
Printer 79, 631
Adding 668, 670
Sample weighing 43, 49, 53
Deleting 668, 670
SmartChemical reader 89
Editing 668, 670
TBox 82, 633
User interactions 150
LabX Index 741

User Interface 15 Pretare 264
Users Tare 265
Managing 668 Weight 267
UV/Vis Zero 271
Performance tests 598, 599 Weighing mode 616
UV/VIS method function Weight class 255, 257, 259, 608, 611, 615
Bio Fixed Wavelength 529 Weights
Bio Quant 532 Managing 617
Bio Scanning 534 Weight sets 618
Calibration 559 Workbench 148
Clean 561
X
Configuration 529
x hours before test 613
Display results 561
Fill 562 Z
Fixed Wavelength 537 Zero drift compensation 617
Kinetics 540 Zooming 18
Kinetics loop 554
Measure blank 548
Measure sample 549
Measure standard 562
Performance test 563
PowerShower 565
Quant 542
Scanning 545
Stir 566
V
Value ranges
Control band 628
Sensors 628
Value release 616
Value tables
Importing 662
Managing 660
Values
Auxiliary 92, 641
Blank 91
Variables 199, 717
Version history 17, 24
Versioned objects 18
Recover 17, 24
W
Warning limit 256, 257, 259, 608, 612, 615
Weighing method functions
Interval weight 262
Ionizer 250
742 Index LabX

www.mt.com/labx
For more information
Mettler-Toledo GmbH
Im Langacher 44
8606 Greifensee, Switzerland
www.mt.com/contact
Subject to technical changes.

© Mettler-Toledo GmbH 09/2019
51710858I en
51710858

LabX Manual EN

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LabX Manual EN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reference Manual LabX

2 Overview and Navigation 15

4 Options and Settings 30

LabX Table of Contents 1

2 Table of Contents LabX

6 Workbench for Instruments 148

LabX Table of Contents 3

7 Analysis and Methods Workspace 171

4 Table of Contents LabX

LabX Table of Contents 5

6 Table of Contents LabX

LabX Table of Contents 7

8 Table of Contents LabX

8 Data and Results Workspace 568

9 Resources and Instruments Workspace 583

LabX Table of Contents 9

10 Table of Contents LabX

10 System Workspace 665

11 Peripheral devices 697

LabX Table of Contents 11

12 Table of Contents LabX

1.2 Elements of instructions

Methods Drag a column header here to group by that column

Sample Series Delete Method

Products Start Task

Resources New Shortcut

Copy selected as Text

LabX Overview and Navigation​​ 15

2.1 Login screen

User name PredefinedUser

− Place the preferred finger on the fingerprint reader.

16 Overview and Navigation​​ LabX

2.2 Versioned objects

2.3 List views

3 ID Name Type Internal ID Compatibility Modified by Version Creation time Status

LabX Overview and Navigation​​ 17

2.4 Graphics window options

18 Overview and Navigation​​ LabX

Grid lines on x axis

Grid lines on y axis

Show all grid lines

2.5 Supported languages

LabX Overview and Navigation​​ 19

20 Overview and Navigation​​ LabX

LabX Common Activities​​ 21

Approval state Release state Approval state Release state

Approve Method Approve Method

Reviewed Proposed Approved Proposed

Approve Method Auto release

3.1.1 Approve objects

procedure will appear. If a one step is defined, the Comment

dialog box will close.

22 Common Activities​​ LabX

signing process. Signature 2 of 2 for approval of Method

- or - Concerns method 'Checkweighing'

ð The status of Approval state has been changed to

If two signatures are required, the second is usually Version number 1

performed by a different person in an additional step.

3.1.2 Release objects

3.1.3 Delete released objects

LabX Common Activities​​ 23

3.1.5 Manage versions

3.1.6 Display signatures

24 Common Activities​​ LabX

LabX Overview and Navigation 15

16 Overview and Navigation LabX

LabX Overview and Navigation 17

18 Overview and Navigation LabX

LabX Overview and Navigation 19

20 Overview and Navigation LabX

LabX Common Activities 21

22 Common Activities LabX

LabX Common Activities 23

24 Common Activities LabX

LabX Common Activities 25

26 Common Activities LabX

LabX Common Activities 27

28 Common Activities LabX

LabX Common Activities 29

30 Options and Settings LabX

LabX Options and Settings 31

32 Options and Settings LabX

LabX Options and Settings 33

34 Options and Settings LabX

LabX Options and Settings 35

36 Options and Settings LabX

LabX Options and Settings 37

38 Options and Settings LabX

LabX Options and Settings 39

40 Options and Settings LabX

LabX Options and Settings 41

42 Options and Settings LabX

LabX Options and Settings 43

44 Options and Settings LabX

LabX Operate Instruments 45

46 Operate Instruments LabX